QUE$TOR Manual PDF

QUE$TORHelp
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
About the Quick Start Guide
65
Getting Started
67
From the taskbar Start button
67
From your PC desktop
67
Creating a New Project
68
Selecting the Project Properties
69
Entering Your Field Level Data
72
Creating a Production Profile
74
Setting the Design Flowrates
76
Setting the Number of Wells
77
Setting the Wellhead Conditions
78
Selecting a Concept - Offshore
79
Selecting a Concept - Onshore
80
Using the Field Development Schematic
82
Adjusting a Component
83
Inputs
83
Sub-components
84
Cost sheet
85
Calculating the Operating Costs
86
Scheduling the Capital Costs
87
Generating the Investment and Production Profile
88
Saving Your Project
89
Opening a Saved Project

About QUE$TOR
89
90
Capabilities
90
Cost Databases
90
Estimate Basis
92
Recommended System Specifications
93
QUE$TORHelp
Minimum system specifications:
93
Before installing QUE$TOR
93
Installation requirements
93
Exporting to Microsoft Excel from QUE$TOR
94
Contacting Customer Support
95
Copyright
97
QUE$TOR Structure
98
Once on the FDS

About Project Properties
100
Units of Measure
101
Main Product
101
Location
101
Creating Procurement Strategies
103
About Field Level Data
105
Field Characteristics
106
Fluid / Profile Characteristics
108
Liquid data
108
Gas data @ STP
108
Well data
109
Miscellaneous
99
110
Miscellaneous Items
110
Temperature
110
BOEEquivalents
111
About Production Profiles
112
Production Profile Edit
113
Production Profile
114
Design Flowrates
116
Peak daily average production rates
116
Design rates
116
Water injection
117
QUE$TORHelp
Gas injection
117
Number of Wells
118
About the Concept Selector
119
Concept Selection for New Projects
120
Concept Selection for Existing Projects
121
Field Development Schematic
123
Topsides docking to substructures
124
Pipelines, Power cables & linking components
124
About Component Level Data

Cost Summary Tree
127
127
Component Toolbar
128
Component Duplication
130
Well and Flow Distribution
133
Offshore Cost Centres
136
Equipment Costs
136
Materials Costs
137
Fabrication Costs
137
Installation Costs
138
Hook-up and Commissioning (HUC) Costs
138
Design and Project Management Costs
138
Insurance and Certification costs
139
Contingency
139
About Offshore Components
140
Cost Summary Tree
140
Input Panel
141
Cost Estimate Sheets
141
About Topsides
142
User Interface
143
Inputs
143
Facilities
144
QUE$TORHelp
Cost Estimate
Primary Inputs
146
Functions
146
Capacities
147
Configuration
149
Substructure
149
Include electrical buildings
150
Deck
150
Installation and HUC
151
Product Export
Gas Disposal / Export
Design Conditions
145
152
153
154
Reservoir Pressure
154
Dry tree wellhead temperature
154
Arrival temperature
154
Acid Gas / High T / High P
155
Maximum monthly average air temperature
155
Facilities
156
Manifolding
158
Multiphase metering
158
Operating pressures
159
Design pressures
159
Oil Processing
161
Oil Export
166
Pipeline Sizing
166
Details
167
Driver
167
Derating Factor
167
Capacity
168
Driver Model
168
QUE$TORHelp
Pump Weight
168
Pump Driver Weight
168
Metering Capacity
168
Metering Weight
168
Gas Processing
169
Cooling
170
Acid Gas Removal
170
Membrane Unit
170
Conventional Acid Gas Removal
172
Dehydration
173
Dewpoint Control
175
Stabiliser
176
Metering
176
Gas Compression
Compressor Classification and Selection
177
177
Flash gas
177
Export gas
178
Gas lift
178
Gas injection
178
Compressor Sizing
178
Compressor type
178
Number of stages
179
Power
179
Derated power
179
Number of compressors
179
Design duty/compressor
179
Driver type
179
Driver model
180
Driver rating
180
Pipeline Sizing
180
QUE$TORHelp
Coolers
181
Weights
181
Water Injection
182
Details
183
Driver
183
Configuration
184
Weight
184
Custom Equipment
185
General
187
Bulk materials, utilities and operating weight
187
Utilities
187
Power
187
Civils
187
Cost sheet
187
Example
Cost sheet
Custom equipment library
188
189
190
190
Control and Communications

Monitoring and Control
191
Telemetry System
192
On-Platform Communications
192
Off-Platform Communications
192
Drilling Facilities
193
Rig details
193
Number of rigs
194
Maximum measured depth
194
Power
194
Weights
194
Quarters
191
196
QUE$TORHelp
Existing facilities
196
Number of beds
197
Cabin size
197
Helideck
197
Platforms with No Quarters
197
Manning
198
Process Utilities
199
Process Support Utilities
200
General Utilities
200
Ancillaries
201
Chemical Injection
202
Flare
207
Gas Design Capacity
207
Flare Type
207
Flare Tower Type
208
Power
209
Power Requirement
209
Emergency Power
210
Generation and distribution
211
Distribution only
211
Derating
211
Capacity
211
Driver
211
Weights
212
Electrical Buildings
213
Equipment List
214
Equipment Costs
216
Freight
Bulk Materials Costs
Steel
216
217
217
QUE$TORHelp
Piping
217
Electrical bulks
218
Instrument bulks
218
Others
218
Freight
219
Fabrication Costs
Loadout and Seafasten
Installation Costs
220
221
Tugs Transport Spread
221
Barge Transport Spread
221
Installation Spread
221
Hook-up and Commissioning Costs
223
Atshore HUC
223
Inshore HUC
223
Offshore HUC
223
HUC Accommodation (flotel)
224
General Costs
225
Design
225
Project Management
225
Certification
226
Insurance
226
Contingency
226
Hints on Developing Topsides Projects

Sour Gas Service
227
227
Gas lift projects
228
About Jackets
229
Calibration of jacket weights

Inputs
220
229
231
Jacket Type
231
Water Depth
231
QUE$TORHelp
Topsides Operating Weight
232
Installation Method
232
Jacket attachments
233
Soil conditions
233
Environmental conditions
233
Regional jacket steel factor
234
Materials Costs
235
Jacket Steel
235
Piles
235
Conductors
235
Anodes
235
Installation aids
235
Freight
236
Fabrication Costs
Installation Costs
237
237
238
238
238
Installation Spread
238
General Costs
239
Design
239
Project Management
239
Certification
240
Insurance
240
Contingency
240
Lightweight Structures
241
Guyed Caisson
241
Braced Monotower
242
Lightweight Jacket
242
About Gravity Based Structures
243
QUE$TORHelp
Inputs
GBS Type
244
Water Depth
244
244
Storage Capacity
244
Inshore Deck Mating
244
Conductors
245
Materials Costs
246
Concrete
246
Steel
246
Solid Ballast
246
Mechanical Outfitting
247
Conductors
247
Freight
247
Fabrication Costs
10
244
248
GBS
248
248
Installation Costs
249
Deck Mating
249
Deck / Shaft HUC
249
Tow Out
249
Installation
249
General Costs
250
Design
250
Project Management
250
Certification
251
Insurance
251
Contingency
251
About Offshore Pipelines
252
Pipeline Links
253
QUE$TORHelp
Length
253
Water depth
254
Flow type
254
To / From
254
Pipeline Sizing
256
General
256
Material
257
Liquid / Oil / Methanol Flowrate
258
Water Flowrate
258
Gas Flowrate
258
Pressure In
258
Pressure Out
258
Fluid Temperature
258
Buckle Arrestors
258
Nominal Diameter
259
Corrosion Allowance
259
Wall Thickness
259
Pipeline Installation
260
Lay Vessel
260
Pipeline Crossings
261
Buried Length
261
Coating
261
Weight Coat
261
Cathodic Protection
262
Insulation Material
262
Insulation U-value
262
Export End
263
Termination details
263
Pipeline end terminations (PLETs)
264
Receiving End
265
11
QUE$TORHelp
Termination details
265
266
About Pipeline Terminations
267
Riser - Steel Fixed
268
Riser Linepipe
268
Coating
268
Insulation
268
Anodes
268
Clamps
269
Spools, Flanges & Fittings
269
Subsea Emergency Shutdown Valve Systems
269
Riser - Steel Retrofit

Riser Linepipe
270
Coating
270
Insulation
270
Anodes
270
Clamps
270
271
271
Riser - Steel Catenary
272
Riser Linepipe
272
Coating
272
Insulation
272
Anodes
272
Strakes
273
Buoyancy
273
Flex Joint
273
273
273
Riser - Flexible Lazy S
12
270
274
QUE$TORHelp
Riser Linepipe
274
Riser Arch Buoy System
274
274
274
Riser - J-Tube
275
Riser Linepipe
275
Coating
275
Insulation
275
Anodes
275
Clamps
276
276
276
Riser - Top Tension
277
Riser Linepipe
277
Coating
277
Insulation
277
Anodes
277
Tensioning Equipment
278
Buoyancy Cans
278
Lower Assembly
278
Foundation
278
278
278
Riser - Single Leg Hybrid
279
Flexible Linepipe
279
Rigid Linepipe
279
Coating
279
Insulation
280
Anodes
280
Upper Assembly
280
13
QUE$TORHelp
Buoyancy Cans
280
Lower Assembly
280
Foundation
280
280
280
Pipeline Tie-In
Pipeline Tie-In
282
282
282
Shore Approach
284
Shore Approach Materials
284
284
Pipeline End Terminations (PLETs)
14
282
285
Structure
285
Valve
285
Protection Structure
285
Mudmat
285
Jumper
286
Jumper Connectors
286
Installation Durations
287
Pipelay Spreads
287
Diving Support Vessel
287
Trench Vessel
288
Survey Vessel
288
Dredge Vessel
288
Rock Install Vessel
288
Materials Costs
289
Linepipe
289
Coating
289
Weight Coating
289
QUE$TORHelp
Insulation
290
Onshore Welding and Reeling
290
Terminations
290
PLETs
290
Freight
290
Installation Costs
291
Pipelay Spreads
291
291
Testing & Commissioning Equipment
291
Trench Vessel
291
Survey Vessel
292
Dredge Vessel
292
Rock Install Vessel
292
Shore Approach
292
General Costs
293
Design
293
Project Management
293
Certification
294
Insurance
294
Contingency
294
About Offshore Power Cables
295
Power Cable Links
296
Water depth
296
To / From
297
Cable Sizing
298
General
298
Power
298
Voltage
298
Conductor Size
298
Burial
298
15
QUE$TORHelp
Rock Installation
Termination details
300
Export End
300
Receiving End
300
301
Cable laying
301
Survey Vessel
301
Rock Install Vessel
301
Materials Costs
302
Cable
302
Gravel
302
Export End Riser
302
Export End Connection System
302
Receiving End Riser
302
Receiving End Connection System
303
Landfall System
303
Freight
303
Installation Costs
304
Cable Lay Spread
304
Rock Install Vessel
304
Survey Vessel
304
304
Shore Approach
304
General Costs
305
Design
305
Project Management
305
Certification
306
Insurance
306
Contingency
306
About Semi-submersibles
16
299
307
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
308
Semi-submersible Type
308
Semi-submersible Generation
309
309
Water Depth
309
Number of Risers
309
Conversion Upgrades
309
Length of Sea Trials
310
Additional Load
310
Buoyancy Aid
310
Drilling Facilities
310
Marine transport
311
Mooring System
312
Mooring Type
312
Anchor Type
313
Soil Condition
313
Environmental Conditions
314
Mooring Chain Size
314
Number of Mooring Lines
315
Chain Length
315
Rope Length
315
Wire Length
315
Equipment Costs
316
Vessel Purchase
316
Anchors
316
Materials Costs
317
General Upgrade
317
Marine Upgrade
317
Drilling Upgrade
317
Mooring Upgrade
317
17
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring Chain
317
Mooring Wire
318
Mooring Rope
318
Mooring Terminations
318
Buoyancy Aid
318
Freight
319
Fabrication Costs
Strip Out
320
General Upgrade
320
Marine Upgrade
320
Drilling Upgrade
320
Mooring Upgrade
320
Buoyancy Aid
320
Installation Costs
321
Transport from fabrication yard
321
Mob / Demob and Tow out
321
Installation
321

Sea Trials and Marine Commissioning
18
320
322
322
General Costs
323
Design
323
Project Management
323
Certification
324
Insurance
324
Contingency
324
About Spar Buoys
325
Primary Inputs
326
Spar Type
326
Riser Wall Type
327
Number of Platform Wells
327
QUE$TORHelp
Water Depth
327
Distance to Installation Site
327
327
Marine transport
327
Mooring System
329
Mooring Type
329
Anchor Type
330
Soil Condition
330
331
Mooring Chain Size
331
Number of Lines
332
Chain Length
332
Rope Length
332
Wire Length
332
Materials Costs
333
Hull Structure
333
Hull Outfitting and Marine Systems
334
Mooring Chains
334
Mooring Wire / Rope
334
334
Anchors
334
Riser Pipe (conductors)
334
Riser Connectors and Buoyancy Cans
334
Riser Components
335
Fabrication Costs
336
Hull Structure
336
336
336
Hull Joining
336
Installation Costs
337
19
QUE$TORHelp
Transport from Fabrication Yard
337
Transport to Installation Site
337
Hull Installation Duration
337
Anchor and Mooring Installation
337
General Costs
339
Design
339
Project Management
339
Certification
340
Insurance
340
Contingency
340
About Tankers
341
Primary Inputs
342
Tanker Type
342
Tanker Size
343
Water Depth
343
Production Rate
343
Water Injection Rate
343
Gas Export/Injection
343
Days of Storage
343
Number of Risers
343
General Upgrade
343
MarineUpgrade
344
Tanker Strengthening
344
344
Mooring Option
344
Added Production Facilities Weight
345
Elevated Deck
345
Gas Lift
345
Marine transport
345
Mooring System
20
346
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring Type
346
Anchor Type
347
Soil Condition
347
348
Mooring Chain Size
348
Number of Lines
349
Chain Length
349
Rope Length
349
Wire Length
349
Equipment Costs
350
Vessel Purchase
350
Swivels/Disconnect
350
Anchors
351
Materials Costs
352
352
Marine / Offloading
352
General Upgrade
352
Mooring Chain
352
Mooring Wire / Rope
353
353
Frame / Mooring Arm
353
Turret / Riser
353
Chain table / Buoy
353
Riser Porch
353
Elevated Deck
354
Freight
354
Fabrication Costs
355
355
Marine / Offloading
355
General Upgrade
355
21
QUE$TORHelp
Turret
355
Riser Porch
355
Elevated Deck
355
Installation Costs
357
357
Installation
357

358
358
General Costs
359
Design
359
Project Management
359
Certification
360
Insurance
360
Contingency
360
About Cylindrical Hulls
361
Primary Inputs
362
Production Rate
362
Days of Storage
362
Required Storage
362
363
Hull Weight
363
Water Depth
363
363
Marine Transport
363
Mooring System
22
357
364
Mooring Type
364
Anchor Type
365
Soil Condition
365
366
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring Chain Size
366
Number of Lines
367
Chain Length
367
Rope Length
367
Wire Length
367
Materials Costs
368
Hull Structure
368
368
Mooring Chains
368
Mooring Wire / Rope
368
368
Anchors
369
Freight
369
Fabrication Costs
370
Hull Structure
370
370
Installation Costs
371
371
371
371
General Costs
372
Design
372
Project Management
372
Certification
373
Insurance
373
Contingency
373
About Tension Leg Platforms
374
Inputs
375
TLP Type
375
375
23
QUE$TORHelp
Water Depth
376
Number of Wells
376
Number of Pre-installed Risers
376
Soil Conditions
376
376
Marine transport
377
Materials Costs
24
378
Hull
378
Foundations
378
Tendons
378
Tendon Connectors
379
Production Risers
379
379
Buoyancy
379
Freight
379
Fabrication Costs
380
Installation Costs
381
381
Foundation Install
381
Transportation to installation site
381
Tendon Install
381
TLP Connect / Tension
381
General Costs
382
Design
382
Project Management
382
Certification
383
Insurance
383
Contingency
383
About Offshore Loading
384
Primary Inputs
385
QUE$TORHelp
385
Loading Type
385
Water Depth
386
Export Rate
386
FlexiblePipeline
386
Number of Lines & Diameter
386
Riser Length at Buoy
386
Water Depth at Topsides
386
Riser Length at Topsides
387
Storage Tanker
387
Storage Time
387
Storage Capacity
387
Tanker Size
387
Marine transport
387
Mooring System
389
Mooring Type
389
Anchor Type
390
Soil Condition
390
391
Mooring Chain Size
391
392
Chain Length
392
Rope Length
392
Wire Length
392
Equipment Costs
393
Loading Buoy
393
Anchors
393
Storage Tanker
393
Materials Costs
Mooring Chain
394
394
25
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring Wire / Rope
394
394
Flexible Riser at Buoy
394
Riser System at Buoy
395
Pipeline (flexible)
395
Riser at Platform
395
Riser System at Platform
395
Installation Costs
26
396
396
Tow out and installation
396
Sea trials and marine commissioning
396
General Costs
397
Design
397
Project Management
397
Certification
398
Insurance
398
Contingency
398
About Offshore Drilling
399
Inputs
400
Rig
401
Category
401
Profile
402
Well Details
402
Drilling Details
403
Water Depth
403
Reservoir Depth
403
Reservoir Pressure
403
Pressure Rating
403
Longest Stepout
403
Trip Speed
404
QUE$TORHelp
Rate of Build
404
Acid Gas
404
Use ESPs
404
Drilling Profiles
405
Well Profile
406
Horizontal Section
406
Measured Depth and Deviation
408
Drilling/Completion Rig
409
Completion Type
409
Drilling Durations
410
Add Well / Remove Well
410
Drilling Curves
411
Rig class
411
Profile
411
Stage
411
Equipment Costs
413
Xmas trees
413
Wellheads
413
Completions
413
Electronic submersible pumps (ESP)
414
Exploration wellheads / Appraisal wellheads
414
Materials Costs
415
Drilling/Completion
415
Conductors
415
Drilling Template
416
Installation Costs
417
From Floating or Jackup
417
From Platform
418
Specialist Services
418
Transport
418
27
QUE$TORHelp
Site Preparation
General Costs
420
Design
420
Project Management
420
Certification
421
Insurance
421
About Subsea
422
Inputs
423
Primary
425
Wells and Flowrates
425
Services
425
Layout
427
Item defaults
427
Flowline defaults
427
Features
429
Design conditions
429
HIPPS
430
Features
430
Tie-in Point
432
Flowlines
433
Lay Vessel
433
Flowline Type
434
Buried Lines
434
Material by Fluid Type
434
Thermal Insulation Material
435
Thermal Insulation U-value
435
PLET selection
436
Umbilicals
28
418
437
Control System
437
Control Tube Material
437
QUE$TORHelp
Inhibitor Chemicals
437
Power Cables
437
Installation
439
Subsea Configuration
441
Item and Link Names
442
Item and Link Duplication
442
Subsea Items
446
General
446
Well details
447
Services
447
Multiphase metering
447
Umbilical Terminations
448
Subsea Flowlines
449
General
449
Well / Tie-back ends
449
Total flowrates
449
Flowline sizing
450
Coating and insulation
451
Well end termination / Tie-back end termination
452
Umbilicals
452
Subsea Tie-back
453
Tie-back type
453
Water Depth
453
Termination type
453
Sub-type
453
Riser Systems
454
Riser Length
454
Equipment Costs
455
Intervention Tools
455
Platform Controls Main
455
29
QUE$TORHelp
Platform Controls Additional
455
Freight
455
Detailed Item Cost Breakdown
455
Main Structure
456
Xmas trees
456
Manifolding (Piping & Valves)
457
Multiphase metering
457
457
Flowline Connectors/Pull-In
457
457
Cluster Satellites
457
458
Control and Testing
458
HIPPS
458
Materials Costs
Riser Systems
Links
Umbilicals
Risers
459
459
460
461
Installation Costs
462
General Costs
463
Design
463
Project Management
463
Certification
464
Insurance
464
Contingency
464
About Barges
Developments with Barges
Primary Inputs
Storage Required
30
459
465
465
466
466
QUE$TORHelp
Production Rate
466
Topside Operating Weight
466
Barge Size
466
Water Depth
467
Marine transport
467
Mooring System
468
Mooring Type
468
Anchor Type
469
Soil Condition
470
470
Mooring Chain Size
470
Number of Lines
471
Chain Length
471
Rope Length
471
Wire Length
471
Equipment Costs
472
Barge Cost
472
Anchors
472
Materials Costs
473
Mooring Chain
473
Mooring Wire/Rope
473
473
Freight
473
Installation Costs
474
474
Tow Out and Installation
474
474
General Costs
475
Design
475
Project Management
475
31
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
476
Insurance
476
Contingency
476
About Bridge Links
477
Inputs
478
Functions
478
Details
478
Process
Flow Type
479
Flowrates
480
Pressure
480
Diameter
480
Materials Costs
481
Primary Steel
481
Secondary Steel
481
Piping
481
Electrical Bulks
481
Instrument Bulks
482
Others
482
Freight
482
Fabrication Costs
Installation Costs
32
479
483
483
484
484
484
Installation Spread
484
General Costs
485
Design
485
Project Management
485
Certification
486
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
486
Contingency
486
About User Defined
487
Cost Estimate
488
Operating Expenditure - OPEX
489
Working with OPEX

Locking/Unlocking
Applying a Change to a Range of Cells
490
491
492
Operating Personnel
494
Inspection and Maintenance
495
Platforms
495
Pipelines
496
Power Cables
496
Subsea
497
Logistics and Consumables
498
Helicopters
498
Supply Boats
498
Rescue and Recovery Boat
498
Fuel Gas
498
Diesel
499
Chemicals
499
Well Costs
500
Insurance
501
Field / Project Costs
502
Tariffs
503
CO2 Emission Taxes
504
Leases
505
Capital Expenditure Scheduling
506
CAPEX Scheduling Window
507
Distributions
508
33
QUE$TORHelp
Intra-component Relationships
509
Inter-component Relationships
510
Locking
510
First Oil
510
Timescale
511
Adding and Removing Components
511
CAPEX Breakdown Graphs
512
About Decommissioning
513
Decommissioning Scenarios
514
Decommissioning duration
514
Delay after end of field life
514
Component Decommissioning
Cost estimate
515
Scrap
515
Inputs
34
515
516
Distance to Disposal Site
516
Temporary Piping Weight
516
Padeyes Weight
516
Crane Size
516
Maximum Lift Weight
517
Number of Lifts
517
Weights
518
Hazardous Volumes
519
Flushing / Inerting
520
Flushing Days
520
Inerting Days
520
Dismantle / Removal
521
Cost Sheet
522
Materials
522
Fabrication
523
QUE$TORHelp
Decommissioning / removal
523
Design and Project management
524
Insurance
524
Certification
524
Contingency
525
Scrap
525
Inputs
526
Removal
526
Disposal
526
Lifts
527
Details
528
Jacket
528
Attachments
528
Cost Sheet
529
Materials
529
Fabrication
530
530
Design and Project Management
531
Insurance
531
Certification
531
Contingency
531
Scrap
532
Pipeline Decommissioning
533
Removal
533
Disposal
533
Cleaning
534
Details
535
Pipeline Decommissioning Cost Sheet
536
Decommissioning / Removal
536
537
35
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
538
Certification
538
Contingency
538
Scrap
538
About the Investment and Production Profile
539
Exporting the Investment Profile into AS$ET
541
QUE$TOR Structure
542
Once on the FDS

544
Units of Measure
545
Main Product
545
Location
545

To create a new procurement strategy
547
547
549
550
552
Liquid Data
552
Gas Data @ STP
552
Well Data
553
Miscellaneous
36
543
554
Miscellaneous Items
554
Layout
554
Artificial Lift
555
Temperature
555
BOEEquivalents
555
556
557
Production Profile
558
Design Flowrates
560
QUE$TORHelp
560
Design rates
560
Water injection
561
Gas injection
561
Gas lift
561
Number of Wells
562
Wellhead Conditions
563
564
565
567
569
Pipelines & Linking Components
570

Cost Summary Tree
572
572
Component Toolbar
574
576
579
Onshore Cost Centres
581
Equipment Costs
581
Materials Costs
581
Prefabrication Costs
583
Construction Costs
583
584
Insurance and Certification Costs
585
Contingency
585
About Onshore Components
586
Cost Summary Tree
586
Input Panel
586
587
About Production Facilities
588
37
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
589
Inputs
589
Facilities
590
Cost Estimate
591
Primary Inputs
592
Terrain
592
Elevation
592
Functions
592
Capacities
593
Fluid Capacities
594
Inlet High Pressure Fluids
594
Arrival Temperature
594
Arrival Pressure
594
Well Stream Fluids
594
Separated Fluids
595
Inlet Medium Pressure Fluids
595
Total Capacities
595
Design Conditions
596
Reservoir Pressure
596
Acid gas / High T / High P
596
Max. Ambient Air Temperature
596
Prefabrication
597
Winterisation
598
598
Manifolding
38
599
Number of Flowlines
599
Multiphase metering
599
Operating Pressure
600
Design Pressure
600
Weight
600
QUE$TORHelp
Oil Processing
602
Oil Processing Configurations
602
Stream Properties
603
Equipment Sizing
604
Gas Processing
607
Cooling
608
Acid Gas Removal
608
Membrane Unit
608
609
Sulphur
611
Dehydration
612
Dewpoint Control
613
Gas Metering
614
Deethaniser
614
Stabiliser
614
Produced Water
616
Product Storage
617
Atmospheric Storage Inputs
617
Pressurised Storage Inputs
618
Product Export
620
Export Rate
620
Size Export Pipeline
621
Details
621
Driver
622
Derating Factor
622
Capacity
622
Driver Model
622
Pump Weight
623
Pump Driver Weight
623
Metering Capacity
623
39
QUE$TORHelp
Metering Weight
Gas Compression
624
624
Flash gas
624
Export gas
625
Gas lift
625
Gas injection
625
Compressor Sizing
625
Compressor type
625
Number of stages
626
Power
626
Derated power
626
626
626
Driver type
626
Driver model
627
Driver rating
627
Pipeline Sizing
627
Coolers
628
Weights
628
Water Injection
629
Details
629
Driver
630
Configuration
631
Weight
631
Custom Equipment
40
623
632
General
634
634
Utilities
634
Power
634
QUE$TORHelp
Civils
634
Cost sheet
635
Example
Cost sheet
635
636
637
637
638
Control System
638
Communications
638
Process Utilities
640
640
General Utilities
641
Power
643
Power Requirement
643
Emergency Power
644
Generation and Distribution / Distribution only Radio Buttons
644
Derating Factor
644
Capacity
645
Driver
645
Weights
646
Civils
647
Foundation Area
647
Plot Area
648
Equipment List
649
Equipment Costs
651
Freight
651
Material Costs
652
Steelwork
652
Piping
652
Electrical
652
41
QUE$TORHelp
Instruments
653
Others
653
Civils Materials
653
Freight
653
Loadout and Transport
Construction Costs
654
655
Site Preparation
655
Civil Construction
655
General Costs
656
Design & Project Management
656
Insurance
657
Certification
657
Contingency
657
About Terminal Facilities
658
User Interface
659
Inputs
659
Facilities
660
Cost estimate
660
Primary Inputs
661
Location
661
Inlet Flows
661
Export Method
662
Marine Transport
662
Prefabrication
663
Winterisation
664
Product Storage
665
665
666
Product Export
42
654
668
QUE$TORHelp
Export Rate
668
668
Details
669
Driver
669
Derating Factor
669
Capacity
669
Driver Model
670
Pump Weight
670
Pump Driver Weight
670
Metering Capacity
670
Metering Weight
670
671
Control System
671
Communications
671
Process Utilities
673
673
General Utilities
674
Power
675
675
Power Requirement
676
Emergency Power
676
Derating Factor
676
Duty
676
Driver
677
Weights
677
Civils
679
Foundation Area
679
Plot Area
680
Equipment Costs
Product Loading
681
681
43
QUE$TORHelp
Safety
682
Freight
682
Material Costs
683
Steelwork
683
Piping
683
Electrical
683
Instruments
684
Others
684
Offloading Buoy (marine)
684
Offloading Pipeline
684
Jetty Materials
684
Civils Materials
684
Freight
684
Construction Costs
685
686
Site Preparation
686
Civil Construction
686
Buoy Installation
686
686
Jetty Construction
687
General Costs
44
685
688
688
Insurance
689
Certification
689
Contingency
689
About Onshore Pipelines
690
Pipeline Links
691
Length
691
Flow Type
691
QUE$TORHelp
To / From
692
Pipeline Sizing
694
For oil, gas, liquid & two phase lines
695
For gas injection, gas lift and water injection lines
695
Material
695
Oil / Gasoline/Condensate / NGL / LPG
696
Water Flowrate
696
Gas Flowrate
696
Fluid Temperature
696
Pipeline Sections
697
Nominal Diameter
697
Fixed Diameter
697
Corrosion Allowance
697
Wall Thickness
697
Slug Catchers
699
Winterisation
700
Pipeline winterisation
700
Booster station winterisation
700
Pipeline Sections
701
Pipeline Sections
702
Booster / Reducer Stations
703
705
Product Export / Gas Compression
705
707
Utilities
708
Power
709
710
Power Requirements
710
Emergency Power
710
Derating Factor
711
45
QUE$TORHelp
Duty
711
Driver
711
Weights
712
Civils
712
Terrain and Crossings

Terrain Type
714
Construction Type
714
Length
714
Number of Crossings
714
Construction Duration
715
Pipeline Schematic
716
717
Equipment Costs
718
Booster Stations
718
Reducer Stations
719
Slug Catchers
719
Freight
719
Materials Costs
720
Linepipe
720
Fittings
720
Coatings
720
Crossings
720
Civils Materials
721
Booster Stations
721
Slug Catchers
722
Freight
723
Construction Costs
724
Booster Stations
724
Slug Catchers
725
General Costs
46
714
726
QUE$TORHelp
726
Insurance
727
Certification
727
Contingency
727
About Wellpad Groups
728
User Interface
729
Inputs
729
Primary Inputs
731
Location
731
Wells
731
Prefabrication
733
Winterisation
734
Wellpad Editor
735
Wellpad Editor Primary Inputs
737
Linkages
737
Equipment
737
Multiphase meters
737
Power Requirements
738
Well Count
738
Wellpad Editor Flowline Bundle
739
Bundle
739
Flowlines
740
Construction
740
Number of Crossings
741
Wellpad Editor - Details
742
Manifolding and Equipment
742
Utilities
742
Power
742
Flowlines
Flowline
743
743
47
QUE$TORHelp
Installation
Control System
745
Civils
746
Equipment Costs
747
Manifolding
747
Multiphase Metering
747
Freight
747
Materials Costs
749
Steelwork
749
Piping
749
Electrical
749
Instruments
750
Others
750
Flowlines
750
Umbilical
750
Power Cable
750
Crossings
750
Civils Materials
750
Freight
751
Construction Costs
752
752
753
Site Preparation
753
Civil Construction
753
Flowline Testing
753
Flowline Right of Way
753
General Costs
48
744
755
755
Insurance
756
Certification
756
QUE$TORHelp
Contingency
756
About Onshore Drilling
757
User Interface
758
Inputs
Details
758
760
Rig Class
760
Well Type
761
Pumped Wells
761
Profile
762
Well Details
762
Drilling Details
763
Winterisation
Winterisation Cost
765
765
Drilling Profiles
766
Well Type
767
TVD
768
Kick Off
768
Horizontal Shift
768
Profile Type
768
Horizontal Section
768
Measured Depth
770
Maximum Deviation
771
Drilling Rig
771
Completion Rig
771
Completion Type
771
Drilling Durations
772
772
Drilling Curves
773
Rig class
773
Profile
773
49
QUE$TORHelp
Stage
Equipment Costs
776
Xmas trees
776
Wellheads
776
Completions
776
777
Pumps
777
Freight
777
Material Costs
778
Cement
778
Mud
778
Brine
778
Bits
779
Freight
779
Construction Costs
780
Rig Hire
780
Drill Crew
780
Consumables
780
Drill Camps
781
Transportation
781
In-field Rig Down / Relocation / Rig up
781
Mob / Demob
781
Drilling Services
781
Other Costs
782
General Costs
783
783
Insurance
784
Certification
784
Contingency
784
About Infrastructure
50
774
785
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
786
Inputs
786
Facilities
787
Cost Estimate
787
Primary Inputs
788
Location
788
Distances to Major Populations
788
Road
790
Road Links
790
Road Type
791
Terrain
791
Rail
Terrain
792
793
Construction Camp
794
Operations Camp
795
Administration Offices
796
Permanent Housing
797
Medical / Hospital Facilities
798
Schools, Places of Worship, Community Buildings
799
Power Transmission
800
Airstrip
801
Material and Construction Costs
802
Road Construction
802
Rail Construction
803
Construction Camp
803
Operations Camp
803
Administration Buildings
803
Permanent Housing
803
Medical Facilities
803
Schools, Places of Worship
803
51
QUE$TORHelp
Power Transmission
804
Airstrips
804
Community Projects/Others
804
General Costs
805
Insurance
806
Certification
806
Contingency
806
About User Defined Components
807
Cost Estimate
808
810
Working with OPEX

Locking/Unlocking
52
805
811
812
813
Operating Personnel
814
815
816
Fuel Gas
816
Diesel
816
Chemicals
817
Transportation
817
Messing
817
Vehicles
818
Well Costs
819
Insurance
820
821
Support
821
Land Costs
821
Tariffs
823
CO2 Emission Taxes
824
QUE$TORHelp
Lease costs
825
826
827
Distributions
828
829
830
Locking
830
First Oil
831
Timescale
831
831
832
833
834
834
834
835
Cost estimate
835
Scrap
835
836
838
LNG Regasification Structure
839
About Regasification Terminal Facilities
840
User Interface
841
Inputs
841
Facilities
842
Cost estimate
842
Primary Inputs
844
Terrain
844
Elevation
844
Functions
844
53
QUE$TORHelp
Capacities
Inlet Composition
845
846
Molecular weight
846
Composition
846
Gas Properties
847
Design Specifications
848
Sales gas specification
848
Maximum ambient air temperature
848
Prefabrication
849
Winterisation
850
Marine Infrastructure
851
Ship / Berth Details
851
Jetty details
852
Marine Slip Details
852
LNG Metering
853
LNG Flowlines / Berth
853
Breakwater
854
Dredging
854
LNG Storage
855
Containment Type
855
Number of Tanks / Capacity per Tank
856
Diameter / Height
856
LNG Processing
857
Nitrogen injection
858
Demethaniser
859
Deethaniser
860
Stabiliser
860
Stream properties
860
861
LNG Pumping
54
862
QUE$TORHelp
In-tank Pumps / Tank
862
LNG Processing Feed Pumps
863
Send out Pumps
863
Liquid Storage
865
865
866
Liquid Export
868
Export Rate
869
869
Details
869
Driver
870
Derating Factor
870
Capacity
870
Driver Model
871
Pump Weight
871
Pump Driver Weight
871
Metering Capacity
871
Metering Weight
871
Vapour Handling
872
Derating Factor
872
Boil off Gas Compression (BOG)
873
Recondenser
874
Vapour Return Blowers
874
Vapourisation
876
Process
876
Open Rack
877
Submerged Combustion
878
Intermediate Fluid
878
Gas Metering
879
880
55
QUE$TORHelp
Control System
880
Communications
880
Process Utilities
882
General Utilities
883
Power
885
Power Requirement
885
886
Derating Factor
886
Duty
886
Driver
887
Emergency Power
887
Weights
888
Civils
889
Foundation Area
889
Totals
890
Equipment Costs
56
882
891
Odourisation
891
Safety
891
Freight
892
Material Costs
893
Steelwork
893
Berth
893
Jetty
893
Marine Slip
893
Breakwater
894
LNG Flowlines
894
Piping (cryogenic)
894
Piping
894
Electrical
894
QUE$TORHelp
Instruments
894
Others
894
Civils Materials
895
Freight
895
Construction Costs
896
896
897
Site Preparation
897
Civil Construction
897
Tank Excavation
897
General Costs
898
898
Insurance
899
Certification
899
Contingency
899

Working with OPEX
Locking/Unlocking
900
901
902
903
Operating Personnel
905
906
907
Nitrogen
907
Fuel Gas
907
Diesel
907
Transportation
908
Messing
908
Vehicles
908
Insurance
910
Field / Project OPEX
911
57
QUE$TORHelp
Support
911
Land Costs
911
Tariffs
913
CO2 Emission Taxes
914
Leases
915
916
917
Distributions
918
Locking
919
First Oil
919
Timescale
920
920
921
Investment and Production Profile
922
924
925
926
926
926
Cost estimate
928
Scrap
928
Data Input
929
Text boxes
929
Option buttons
929
Dropdown lists
929
Check boxes
930
Locked Values
931
To Unlock a Locked Value

Units
58
928
931
932
QUE$TORHelp
Unit Nomenclature
Form Conventions
932
933
Tabs
933
Form Buttons
933
Component buttons
933
Warning Messages
935
About Program Menus
936
File Menu
937
Project Menu
938
Options Menu
939
Reports Menu
940
Tools Menu
942
Help Menu
943
About Data Flow and Locking
944
Data Flow between Components
945
Exceptions to the hierarchy order
947
Multiple topsides
947
Data Flow Within Components
948
Locking
949
About Project Costs
950
Project Cost Options
951
To add a project cost
951
To remove a project cost
952
To set the default project costs
953
Managing Project Costs
954
Item name
954
Cost
954
Schedule distribution
954
Schedule duration
955
Creating a new project cost
955
59
QUE$TORHelp
Deleting a project cost

About Contingency
957
Base Cost Estimate
957
Expected Value (or most likely cost)
957
Contingency
957
Accuracy Levels
958
Operators Reserve
958
Contingency Options
960
About Component Ghosting
962
Ghosting of Components
963
Ghost CAPEX
963
Ghost OPEX
964
Ghosting Options
965
966
About Reports
967
Component Reports
969
Project Reports
970
Locked Values
972
Project Notes
974
About Database Editor
976
Procurement Strategies
977
View/Edit Procurement Strategy

Technical Databases
View/Edit Technical Database
Database Editor Interface
977
979
979
981
Item Type (procurement strategies)
981
Item Type (technical databases)
981
Component Type
982
Table Description
982
About Project Editor
60
956
985
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
To Change a Procurement Strategy or Technical Database
986
986
988
Technical Databases
989
About Project Viewer
991
User Interface
993
Exporting from the Project Viewer
995
About Unit Editor
996
Custom Unit Sets
997
About Network Licences
1000
Feature
1000
Days until expiry
1000
Borrowed until
1000
Network Licence Management
1001
To borrow a feature from the network licence server
1001
To return a feature to the network licence server
1001
Restrictions
1002
ANSI Pressure Ratings
1003
Flow Definitions
1004
Basis of Inspection and Maintenance
1005
Comparison of Profile Timescales
1006
Offshore Components
1007
Offshore Concepts
1010
Decommissioning Toolbar
1011
Fabrication Details
1012
Installation Vessel Maximum Lift Weights
1014
CAPEX Scheduling Toolbar
1015
Offshore Technical Databases
1016
Offshore Toolbar
1017
Barge Sizes With Storage
1018
61
QUE$TORHelp
62
Barge Sizes Without Storage
1019
Offshore Casing / Tubing Programme
1020
Offshore Drilling Profiles
1021
Concept Selector - Export Options
1022
CO2 Removal Only
1023
H2S Removal Only
1024
Simultaneous H2S and CO2 Removal
1025
Solvent Data
1026
Typical Gas Compositions
1027
Default Dehydration Process
1028
GBS Storage Capacity
1029
Jacket Installation Factors
1030
Maximum Topsides Weight
1031
Monotower GBS Concrete Volume
1032
Semi-submersible Characteristics
1033
Maximum Load and Buoyancy Aid Weights
1034
Subsea Flexible Flowline Limits
1035
Flying Leads Calculation
1036
Subsea Pressure Ratings
1037
Subsea Toolbar
1038
Standard Chain and Rope Sizes
1039
Wind Speed Lookup
1040
Single Point Mooring Systems
1041
Tanker Storage Capacity
1042
Offshore Gas Processing Product Specification
1043
Oil Processing Defaults for Gas Projects
1044
Oil Processing Defaults for Oil Projects
1045
Oil Processing Toolbar
1046
Tripod GBS Concrete Volume
1047
1048
QUE$TORHelp
Onshore Components
1049
Onshore Concepts
1050
Construction Details
1051
Prefabrication Details
1053
Onshore Technical Databases
1055
Onshore Toolbar
1056
Onshore Drilling - Profiles
1057
Onshore Drilling - Rig Class
1058
1059
Onshore Casing / Tubing Programme
1060
Solvent Data
1061
CO2 Removal Only
1062
H2S Removal Only
1063
Simultaneous H2S and CO2 Removal
1064
1065
Gas Processing Defaults
1066
Column Operating Conditions - Single Column
1067
Column Operating Conditions - Both Columns
1068
1069
1070
GRP Pipe Sizes
1071
1072
Double Containment LNG Storage Tanks
1073
Full Containment LNG Storage Tanks
1074
Single Containment LNG Storage Tanks
1075
LNG Tanker Properties
1076
LNG Regasification Onshore Toolbar
1077
1078
Database Editor Toolbar
1079
Project Viewer Toolbar
1080
63
QUE$TORHelp
Unit Sets
64
1081
QUE$TORHelp
About the Quick Start Guide

This guide is designed to help you understand the operation of the QUE$TOR program,
outlining the basic steps involved in developing a QUE$TOR project to produce a
scheduled estimate for capital and operating costs.
QUE$TOR is structured around a field development schematic (FDS) which allows you
to create a visualisation of the development. The FDS is driven by a number of high
level inputs which allow the development conditions to be specified. The basic
program calculation sequence followed in QUE$TOR to generate a full life-cycle field
or prospect development cost estimate is shown below.
To define the new project, QUE$TOR presents you with a series of forms that allow
high level parameters of the development to be specified.The Field level data form is
populated with default values for the basin selected in the Project properties form.
Subsequent forms have values and selections based on earlier entries. Once you
65
QUE$TORHelp
have reviewed and adjusted as necessary the default inputs in each form, click on OK
to apply the inputs and move on to the next form.Click on Cancel to ignore changes
made and go back to the previous form and make any necessary revisions.
66
QUE$TORHelp
Getting Started
QUE$TOR must be installed on a local PC. This must be done by a local administrator.
See the release notes for installation instructions.
QUE$TOR will run on these following operating systems:
Windows
Windows
Windows
Windows
XP
Vista
7
8.
A licence must be available; either a standalone dongle which plugs directly into your
computer or a network licence which is accessible across your company's local area
network. QUE$TOR Offshore, QUE$TOR Onshore and QUE$TOR LNG Regasification
require separate licences. Contact your IT department for further details.
Depending on your installation options, you can launch QUE$TOR either from the
taskbar Start button or from your PC desktop.
From the taskbar Start button

Click Start and follow All Programs\IHS\QUE$TOR 2014 Q3
From your PC desktop
Double-click the QUE$TOR 2014 Q3 application shortcut icon
67
QUE$TORHelp
Creating a New Project

On opening QUE$TOR the task selection form will appear.
On this form you can choose to create a new project or open an existing project. For
new projects you can either create a new offshore project or a new onshore project.
For existing projects there are shortcuts to the last five projects saved.
The location of your wells should determine whether you pick offshore or onshore as
the start point. If you are running a combined offshore and onshore project then the
second location can be selected later in the project estimate.
Once you have selected your project location i.e. offshore or onshore, click OK to
move onto the Project properties form. QUE$TOR will check that you have a valid
licence to run the selected project type at this point.
68
QUE$TORHelp
Selecting the Project Properties

The project properties allow you to setup the basic information about your project
including the procurement strategy, regional technical database and units set
preference.
Work through the following steps to set up your project:

l
Give your project a name.

Select the units you want to work in.Pick from one of the standard unit sets
provided or create your own using the Unit editor tool. For the majority of users
69
QUE$TORHelp
one of the default unit sets should meet your needs as you can change each unit as
needed throughout the program.
70
Select the main product. For Oil projects you will have to define your recoverable
oil reserves and a gas oil ratio, while for gas projects you will input your
recoverable gas reserves and a liquid gas ratio.
Select the geographical region, country, and basin to enable QUE$TOR to seed
your project with typical basin specific data generated from the IHS IRIS21 E&P
database. This selection will also drive the default location of a new procurement
strategy and will set your regional technical database.
Create your procurement strategy. This can be done by clicking the Newbutton.
This will display the Define procurement strategy form shown below. Procurement
strategies allow you to choose different regional cost databases for each cost
centre. By default all costs are reported in US Dollars but this can be edited by
changing the currency name, symbol and exchange rate at the top of the form.
QUE$TORHelp
Select the technical database to use for your project. This will normally be the
region which you have selected for your project.Use Browse to select an
alternative if required.
Once you have completed the above steps, click OK to move onto the Field level data
form.
71
QUE$TORHelp
Entering Your Field Level Data

The Field level data form contains three tabs which list the values for the field
characteristics, fluid characteristics and some miscellaneous data respectively.
The information entered varies slightly depending on whether you have selected an
offshore or onshore project. Default values are populated from a database relevant
to the basin you selected in the Project properties form.
On this form, modify the data to the specifics of the field that you want to produce an
estimate for. The purpose of the default data is to provide a reasonable value where
none is known and therefore you should use your values over these defaults. Any
input value can be changed by simply over-typing it.
In this form, and any other form, the individual input units can be changed on the fly
by clicking on the unit to the right of the value and selecting the unit you wish to use
from the options available, this is shown for the recoverable reserves input below.
72
QUE$TORHelp
Once you have entered / confirmed the data on all three tabs click OK to move onto
the Production profile edit form.
73
QUE$TORHelp
Creating a Production Profile

The production profile is created through two forms; the first form gives seven
entries through which you can influence the basic parameters of your production
profile.
Enter any of the values you know at this point and then click OK to move onto the
Production profile form which gives you a visual representation of these values.
The production profile is displayed in a graphical and tabular format across four tabs;
oil (or condensate), gas, water and gross liquids. Numbers in blue can be edited;
numbers in black such as those in the gross liquids tab are derived numbers and
therefore cant be edited. This colour convention is common throughout QUE$TOR.
74
QUE$TORHelp
You can change the production for each year by entering the values in the table at the
bottom of the form. This can either be typed in year by year or you can paste in a
profile from an external spreadsheet through a right mouse click. You can overwrite
either the daily or annual flowrates but not the cumulative row of the table. You can
also copy the data in the production profile and paste it into an external spreadsheet.
Note: When pasting in a production profile from a spreadsheet ensure that the
field life specified in the production profile edit form is the same as that of the profile
you are pasting in.
Once you are happy with the production profile, click OK to move onto the Design
flowrates form.
75
QUE$TORHelp
Setting the Design Flowrates

The Design flowrates form gives the flowrates that will be used to design the facilities
within your project.
The production values are based on the peak production with a design factor for oil
projects giving an allowance for day to day variation, and a swing factor in gas
projects giving an allowance for seasonal demand variation.
The injection values should be adjusted based on your pressure maintenance and gas
disposal assumptions.
Once you are happy with the design flowrates, click OK to move onto the Number of
wells form.
76
QUE$TORHelp
Setting the Number of Wells

The Number of wells form, shown below, sets the total number of wells required
across the field.
The default number of production wells is based on the recoverable reserves, well
productivity, plateau production and peak well flow. The default number of water
injection wells assumes an average of two injectors for every five oil production
wells.Gas injectors are based on an average flowrate of 30 MMscf/day per well.
Modify the well count to match your design assumptions and click OK to move onto
the Wellhead conditions form for onshore projects or the Concept selector form for
offshore projects.
77
QUE$TORHelp
Setting the Wellhead Conditions

The Wellhead conditions form is only available for onshore projects and provides the
wellhead conditions of the primary streams.
Water injection, gas injection and gas lift pressure are only relevant if these services
are selected. Adjust the conditions as necessary and then click OK to move onto the
Concept selector form.
78
QUE$TORHelp
Selecting a Concept - Offshore

The Concept selector form allows you to choose the basic concept of your field
development.
QUE$TOR selects a field development concept based on the field level data and
production profile.You can change this to another of the 14 default concepts using the
list box. If you want to configure your concept from scratch, select 'Blank concept'.
Based on your concept, QUE$TOR will select typical oil and gas export options. Adjust
these to match your desired product export routes.
When you click OK QUE$TOR runs the complete cost estimate using program defaults
throughout and displays the field development schematic along with the cost
summary tree.
79
QUE$TORHelp
Selecting a Concept - Onshore

The Concept selector form allows you to choose the basic concept of your field
development.
QUE$TOR selects a field development concept based on the field level data and
production profile.You can change this to another of the 6 default concepts using the
list box. If you want to configure your concept from scratch, select 'Blank concept'.
Based on your concept, QUE$TOR will select typical oil and gas export options. Adjust
these to match your desired product export routes.
80
QUE$TORHelp
When you click OK QUE$TOR runs the complete cost estimate using program defaults
throughout and displays the field development schematic along with the cost
summary tree.
81
QUE$TORHelp
Using the Field Development Schematic

On selecting your concept and clicking OK QUE$TOR will move through to the main
field development schematic.
The field development schematic shows the components within your chosen concept
on the right hand side of the screen, with the associated high level CAPEX summary
on the left hand side of the screen.
The schematic can be changed by adding and removing components. You can select
components to add from the component toolbar at the top of the screen and click on
the schematic to place the component. To delete a component hit delete when the
component is selected or right click on the component and select Delete. You will be
asked to confirm any deletions to prevent any components being inadvertently
deleted.
Components often require links so that the correct data can flow between them.
Components are linked using the link icon in the toolbar
. Once you have linked
two components you may need to add a pipeline by double clicking on the link.
Note: Connections from drilling components, subsea, and wellpad groups do not
require pipelines to be specified.
Each component will be estimated using default assumptions based on the data you
have entered so far. To view a component in detail you can double click on it or right
click on it and select Edit / view cost estimate.
82
QUE$TORHelp
Adjusting a Component
You can view the details of each component by either double clicking on the
component or by right clicking and selecting Edit / view cost estimate.
Each component has two main parts to it: the inputs, where you can adjust the design
parameters, and the cost sheet, where you can see the detailed breakdown of the
cost.
You can make changes within each of these areas and when you click Apply or OK
these changes will be applied to the component and the CAPEX estimate adjusted
accordingly. Clicking on OK will also exit the component. Clicking Cancel also exits
the component; however you will lose all changes made since you entered the
component.
Inputs
The left hand side of the screen contains the main input data for that component. The
input form for the topsides component is shown below.
83
QUE$TORHelp
The input form shows the main design parameters for a given component, such as the
design flowrates. You can make changes to these values to match your design
assumptions. When you click Apply these changes will be applied to the component
and the CAPEX estimate adjusted accordingly.
Sub-components
There are arrow buttons
within many components that can be clicked on to open
up one of the sub-components; the details of that system are then shown. The
topsides Manifolding sub-component form is shown below.
84
QUE$TORHelp
You can make changes within each sub-component and when you click OK these
changes will be applied to the component and the CAPEX estimate adjusted
accordingly.
Cost sheet
The right hand side of the screen has the cost sheet. This shows a detailed breakdown
of the CAPEX estimate for the component. Each line item is made up of a quantity and
a unit rate.
The quantity is calculated from the design parameters and technical algorithms for
that item and the unit rate is taken from the selected procurement strategy. You can
overwrite any of the blue values within the cost sheet, as shown for the quantity
entry above. Numbers in black are derived by multiplying the quantity by the unit
rate so cant be overwritten.
85
QUE$TORHelp
Calculating the Operating Costs

The operating cost calculations should be run once you have finished the design of
your development as the costs are based on the technical definition of the
development.
The OPEX algorithms are run by selecting OPEX from the Project menu. This will
open a separate window where a summary of the operating costs for each year of
production is displayed.
The costs are broken down into various categories, which can be seen on the left side
of the screen. The detailed breakdown of these cost categories can be seen by
clicking on these items, they are formatted as blue hypertext. This will open up
further definition sheets for you to review or adjust the default values.
Once you are happy with the operating costs, click OK to go back to field
development schematic so that you can generate the project schedule.
86
QUE$TORHelp
Scheduling the Capital Costs

The CAPEX scheduling calculations should be run once you have finished the design of
your development as the schedule and costs are based on the details of the
development.
The CAPEX scheduling module can be accessed by selecting Scheduling from the
Project menu. The schedule will be shown as a Gantt chart along with the underlying
data for each component.
For each component, a detailed schedule can be viewed by expanding the component
using the
icon. You can adjust the start date and activity duration either by
dragging the bars within the Gantt chart or by adjusting the corresponding values in
the table. Adjusting these values will change when the calculated CAPEX values are to
be spent.
Once you are happy with the project schedule, click OK to go back to field
development schematic so that you can generate the Investment and production
profile.
87
QUE$TORHelp
Generating the Investment and Production Profile

The investment and production profile is run by selecting Investment and
production profiles from the Project menu.
The investment and production profile gives a report of all of the values that could be
required to run an economic analysis, with the production, CAPEX and OPEX given for
each year of the project. The values in this report are in real terms, i.e. they are
costs specific to a particular point in time (depending on the version) and have not
been inflated or discounted over the life of the project.
This report can be printed or exported to Excel using the toolbar buttons.
88
QUE$TORHelp
Saving Your Project

Projects are not automatically saved in QUE$TOR. We recommend you save your
project when you reach the field development schematic and at regular intervals
after this.
To save a project select Save or Save As from the File menu or click on the Save
project button
. This will enable you to save the project in the usual Windows
fashion. The default location for saved projects is My
Documents\IHS\QUE$TOR\Projects.
Saved project files have a .qpr file extension and include the selected procurement
strategy, technical database and unit set. Once saved, projects are completely
standalone and have no further interaction with QUE$TORs databases. This means
that saved projects can easily be sent to others who may not have the same
databases.
Saved projects can be moved, copied and renamed using Microsoft Windows Explorer
in the same way as any Windows file. Projects can be opened either directly from
Windows Explorer or from within QUE$TOR. To open a saved project in QUE$TOR
either select Open existing project from the form that appears when QUE$TOR
starts or select Open from the File menu.
Note: When you create a new project you won't be able to save the project until
you reach the field development schematic.
Opening a Saved Project

To open a saved project select, using the option buttons, Browse for project and
click OK to proceed or click on the Open project button
.This will enable you to
open a project in the usual windows fashion.The Open existing project box has
shortcuts to the last five projects opened in QUE$TOR.Saved projects have a .qpr
file extension.
89
QUE$TORHelp
About QUE$TOR
QUE$TOR has been designed to produce high level estimates of the capital and
operating costs of green field oil and gas developments. It will assist with project
modelling, evaluation and subsequent decision making in the oil and gas industry.
QUE$TOR provides a reliable, consistent methodology for producing cost estimates
and creates efficiency when optimising field developments. It has benefits in many
applications, including:
l
Prospect evaluations
Screening studies
Feasibility studies
Conceptual studies
Optimisation studies
QUE$TOR uses a systematic approach to generate a field development basis, capital

and operating costs, and project schedules from basic field data. QUE$TOR uses a
bottom up methodology; the calculations are based around detailed sizing algorithms
and engineering rules of thumb with regional variations where appropriate.
This approach allows engineers, estimators and economists to produce weight and
cost estimates quickly, consistently and accurately and to develop investment
profiles.
Capabilities
QUE$TOR has the capability to handle most oil and gas developments worldwide, it
has clearly defined methodologies for offshore and onshore upstream developments
as well as onshore LNG regasification projects. Any combination of these three
project types can be modelled provided you have the requisite licences.
In generating capital cost estimates for a field development, the estimate is broken
down into a number of discrete components.Combining these components allows a
field development plan to be identified and estimated.It is then possible to generate
operating costs for the facilities specified and phase the expenditures as necessary.
The use of separate cost and technical databases for all major worldwide oil and gas
producing regions means that any development, present or future, can be modelled.
Cost Databases
There are 17 offshore and 11 onshore regional cost databases behind the program.
These cost databases are updated on a six-monthly basis with a new version of the
program sent out for each update. Each new version can be installed alongside all
existing versions of the program allowing you to track costs of a project over time.
Each of the databases is editable meaning that if there is a region where you have a
good understanding of the costs you can overwrite some of the costs within the
QUE$TOR databases to give you greater confidence in the estimate.
90
QUE$TORHelp
91
QUE$TORHelp
Estimate Basis
The following points should be considered when generating or reporting a cost
estimate using QUE$TOR.
l
92
QUE$TOR provides an estimate based on the costs within the markets today. We
make no allowance for inflation or deflation of costs over the project life.
All of the costs within QUE$TOR are in real terms, i.e. they are costs specific to a
particular point in time (depending on the version). We do not apply any
discounting or inflation to the estimate to costs incurred over the project life.
Pre-sanction costs, such as FEED studies and environmental impact assessments,
are not included within the estimate by default. These costs can be optionally
added as a percentage of the project CAPEX costs or as monetary value.
Post sanction costs that fall outside of the typical EPC contract scope, such as the
owner's project management cost, are not included by default. These costs can be
optionally added as a percentage of the project CAPEX costs or as monetary value.
Contingencies within QUE$TOR are calibrated to target the P50 development cost.
QUE$TOR is designed for use early in the project cycle. Therefore the estimate
level that can be attained by using the program is typically within the range of +/25% to 40%.
The estimate produced is dependent on user entered values. Therefore, any
estimate should take into account the confidence of these values.
QUE$TORHelp
Recommended System Specifications

QUE$TOR is supported for the following operating systems:
l
Windows XP service pack 2 or later
Windows Vista
Windows 7
Windows 8.
The 32-bit (x86) and 64-bit (x64) versions of these operating systems are supported.
To run QUE$TOR in a terminal server environment requires the use of network
licences.
Minimum system specifications:

l
1 GHz Pentium 4 processor
512 MB RAM
250 MB disk space
Minimum 1024x768 resolution
CD ROM drive
Before installing QUE$TOR

l
QUE$TOR requires that you install Windows Installer 3.1, Windows Imaging
Component and .NET framework 4 or later.
QUE$TOR requires that the Sentinel SuperPro driver be installed on PCs that have
a local security key (dongle) for their QUE$TOR licence.
These are included on the CD.
Note: Administrator privileges are required to install these components.
Installation requirements
l
QUE$TOR must be installed on a local PC. This must be done by a local

administrator. See the release notes for installation instructions.
A licence must be available to run QUE$TOR; either a standalone dongle which
plugs directly into your computer or a network licence which is accessible across
your company network. Contact your IT department for further details.
93
QUE$TORHelp
Exporting to Microsoft Excel from QUE$TOR
It is not necessary for Microsoft Excel to be installed on the PC that QUE$TOR is
running on to perform an export to an Excel format file. However, to view the
exported file requires Microsoft Excel 2003 SP3 or later. The exported files may open
in earlier versions, however some of the formatting may be lost.
94
QUE$TORHelp
Contacting Customer Support

As part of the continuing licensing agreement for QUE$TOR, IHS offers a full technical
support service via its regional offices. Both computing and engineering support
relating to the operation and understanding of the program are available.
The QUE$TOR support group has a dedicated support email address: support_
questor@ihs.com
Note: There is an 's', not a '$' in questor in the email address.

The IHS software support team key contacts are as follows:
North & Central

America
Jonathan Stephens - Product Manager,

jonathan.stephens@ihs.com
Abhishek Verma - Senior Field Development Engineer,
abhishek.verma@ihs.com
Zayd Wahab - Cost Analyst, zayd.wahab@ihs.com
5333 Westheimer
Houston
Texas 77056
USA
Tel: (+1) 713 840 8282
Fax: (+1)713 995 8593
South America
Thais Hamilko - Product Specialist, E&I Prod Line-LATAM,

thaisfrancielle.hamilko@ihs.com
Rua So Bento, 29 - 7o andar
Centro
Rio de Janeiro
RJ, CEP 20090-010
Brazil
Tel: (+55) 21 3299 0440
Europe, Africa &

Middle East
Rita Antonelli - Cost Manager, rita.antonelli@ihs.com

Matthew Butcher - Field Development Engineer,
matthew.butcher@ihs.com
John Helliwell - Engineering Advisor,
john.helliwell@ihs.com
Greville Williams - Engineering Manager,
greville.williams@ihs.com
133 Houndsditch
London
EC3A 7BX
95
QUE$TORHelp
UK
Tel: (+44) 20 3159 3300
Fax: (+44) 20 3159 3299
S.E. Asia & Australia
Sanjay Sinha - APAC Field Development SME,

sanjay.sinha@ihs.com
First Floor, Tower A
Vatika Business Park
Sohan Road, Sec 49
Gurgaon 122018 - Haryana
India
Tel: (+91) 124 454 2699
China
Yaxing Wang - Sr. Customer Solution Advisor,

yaxing.wang@ihs.com
Room 3001
China World Office 1
No.1, JianGuoMenWai Avenue
Beijing
100004
China
Tel: (+86) 10 5633 4567
Fax: (+86) 10 5633 4500
96
QUE$TORHelp
Copyright
Copyright 2014, IHS Inc. and its affiliated and subsidiary companies, ALL RIGHTS
RESERVED.
Windows and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks and service marks, including without limitation QUE$TOR,
AS$ET and IHS ENERGY, belong to IHS Inc. and its affiliated and subsidiary
companies, all rights reserved.
This product, including software, data and documentation, is licensed to the
authorised user for its internal business purposes only and no part thereof may be
disclosed, disseminated, sold, licensed, copied, reproduced, translated, transmitted
or transferred to any third party. All rights reserved.
IHS Inc.
15 Inverness Way East
Englewood, Colorado 80112
(303) 736-3000
Rev May 2014
97
QUE$TORHelp
QUE$TOR Structure
QUE$TOR is structured around a field development schematic (FDS) which allows you
to create a visualisation of the development. The FDS is driven by a number of high
level inputs which allow the development conditions to be specified.The basic
high level parameters of the development to be specified. Once you have reviewed
and adjusted as necessary the default inputs in each form, click on OK to apply the
inputs and move on to the next form.Click on Cancel to go back to the previous form
and adjust any changes made.
98
QUE$TORHelp
On starting each new project you will be led through the first four stages shown
above. Each of these stages will be populated with default values based upon your
choices in the previous stage.
When the concept selector is completed, QUE$TOR will generate a complete cost
estimate immediately made up of a series of components, e.g. topsides, jacket,
drilling and pipelines.
These components are all live linked to each other so that a change to one component
will change all dependent components, e.g. jacket cost is dependent on topsides
operating weight.You can enter and update these components and fix inputs so that
they are no longer updated by the program.This is called locking. Although you can
edit components in any order you should try to follow a logical path to avoid locking
variables based on incorrect data.For example you should not lock the jacket weight
until the topsides is fully defined. QUE$TORs order of calculation is explained in
further detail in Data flow and locking.
OPEX and Scheduling take data from all components to generate field operating costs
(OPEX) and schedule the calculated capital and operating costs along with the
production profile to give an overall project investment profile.
Once on the FDS

Cost estimates in QUE$TOR are made up of a number of individual components such
as topsides and jackets.Each of these components will influence or be dependent on
the design of associated components, e.g. jacket design is dependent on its
associated topsides.Components are linked or docked to those components from
which they require data.There are also high level parameters defined within
QUE$TOR, such as reserves, which influence all components.
In generating a cost estimate QUE$TOR calculates one component at a time and then
passes all requisite data on to the next component.The order of this is defined by the
calculation hierarchy.The concept selector generates a basic development plan from
a selection of built-in defaults. The components selected by the concept are then run
in the hierarchy order to provide a development capable of handling the wells and
production defined in the production profile and field level data.
If you wish to fix parameters within a component, preventing them from being
recalculated by the program, you can lock them.
99
QUE$TORHelp

The project properties is the starting point for defining a new project. It enables you
to specify the location of the project, the procurement strategy and technical
database to be used in the project and the preferred units.
Note: It is not possible to make changes in this screen once a project is

created. However, the Project editor does allow the procurement strategy and the
technical database to be changed once the project is saved.
Name: enter a name for the project here.This will be the default file name when
you save the project.
100
QUE$TORHelp
Units of Measure
The units of measure define the units that will appear, both in the project and the
reports. QUE$TOR has three built-in unit sets, metric, imperial and oilfield which are
selected from the dropdown list.
Custom unit sets can be defined using the Unit editor.To select a user defined unit
set, select the use custom unit set option button and use the Browse button to locate
it. The default location for custom unit sets is: My Documents \IHS \QUE$TOR
\Unit Sets.
Once in a project the units can be easily changed, for every input QUE$TOR provides
a choice of relevant units. However the units in the reports are fixed by the choice of
unit set.
Main Product
The main product can be either oil or gas, the volume of the secondary product, e.g.
associated gas when oil is selected, is defined by a ratio on the Field level data form.
This should typically be Oil if the gas oil ratio (GOR) is <2500 scf/bbl (450 Sm3/m3) [
Liquid gas ratio >400 bbl/MMscf (70 m3/million Sm3)].
Note: Once selected this cannot be changed in the project.

Selection will also affect the default field level data (but this can adjusted if required)
which in turn will influence the field life and plateau production rate.
The default product type is set to the choice made in the last project you created, or
to oil when QUE$TOR is shipped.
Location
QUE$TOR contains a database of typical field characteristics, extracted from the IHS
IRIS21 E&P database. These are broken down on a basin by basin basis and provide
the default properties for the field.Whilst you can overwrite all these characteristics,
they can be useful if some data is unavailable.
Procurement strategy
This allows you to select the regional databases to be used for each of the cost
centres for the new project. For example equipment could be sourced from North
America and design performed in Europe. The currency of the cost estimate can also
be defined.
The box displays existing procurement strategies which can be chosen by selection.
To look for existing procurement strategies in a different folder, click on Browse.
Click on New to create a procurement strategy. When you create a new procurement
strategy QUE$TOR bases the default regional database on the location selected.See
Creating procurement strategies for more information.
Click on View to examine a procurement strategy.
Click on Delete to delete the selected procurement strategy.
101
QUE$TORHelp
Note: QUE$TOR does not ship with any built-in procurement strategies.
Technical database
The technical database contains regional specific technical data such as
environmental data.QUE$TOR includes template databases for every offshore region
worldwide.The default database is based on the location chosen.To change to a
different database, click on Browse.
You will be prompted to choose whether you want to use a template database
supplied with QUE$TOR or use a custom database. See Technical Databases for
further information.
Once you have adjusted all inputs as necessary, click OK. This applies your changes
and closes the form to move on. Cancel will clear all entries in the form and take
you back a step.
102
QUE$TORHelp

Procurement strategies allow you to choose different regional cost databases for
each cost centre. They can also be used to choose the currency for the cost estimate.
The cost data in each regional database is stored in either US dollars or the local
currency (for the UK, Norway and the Netherlands). When cost databases are brought
into the procurement strategy QUE$TOR converts them all into US dollars. You can
edit the exchange rate used for this conversion. You can then choose a currency for
the cost estimate and enter the exchange rate from US dollars to this currency.
1. Click Create new procurement strategy in the project properties form. This
opens the form shown below.
2. Select a region and country.

3. By default the cost database will be assigned a title which is the same as the
country selected; this can be overwritten.
4. Click OK.
5. The procurement strategy definition form is displayed.
103
QUE$TORHelp
6. QUE$TOR has built in defaults for every country which it uses to choose where
cost centres are sourced from. To adjust the default region use the dropdown
lists.
7. Check the exchange rate for each database. Some cost databases are in local
currencies. In creating a procurement strategy QUE$TOR converts all costs to US
dollars.A default exchange rate is entered if the cost database is in local currency
but this should obviously be treated with care and edited to reflect expected
exchange rates. The rate should be in the form of local currency to 1 US dollar,
e.g. UK0.624 = US$1.
8. Define the currency in which you wish to cost your project. Enter a name and a
symbol (the symbol can have up to three characters). Enter an exchange rate
from US dollars. The rate should be in the form of the specified currency to 1 US
dollars, e.g. UK0.624= US$1.
9. Click OK.
10. The new procurement strategy will now be available for selection in the
procurement strategy frame in the project properties form.
104
QUE$TORHelp

The field level data form opens after the project properties if you are creating a new
project.If you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Field level
data from the Project menu or clicking
in the toolbar.
The field level data form allows specification of the overall field and reservoir
characteristics.All inputs have default values based on your chosen basin.These are
useful if you do not have some data available although the more accurate the data
the more accurate your cost estimate will be.The form has three tabs: Field
characteristics, Fluid / profile characteristics and Miscellaneous.
Once you have adjusted the input data on all tabs as necessary, click OK. This applies
your changes and closes the form to move on. Cancel will clear all entries in the
form and take you back a step.
105
QUE$TORHelp
The offshore field characteristics tab is shown below.
Reserves:the total recoverable reserves for the field(s) covered by your

project.If you have specified the main product as gas, this is the gas recoverable
reserves.For oil projects it is the oil recoverable reserves.
Condensate gas ratio / Gas oil ratio:for gas projects enter the condensate
gas ratio (CGR) and for oil projects the gas oil ratio (GOR). The ratio should be in
terms of recoverable reserves and represents the ratio when the wellstream fluids
are flashed at stock tank conditions, i.e. 60F (15.6C) and atmospheric pressure.
Reservoir depth from LAT:measured from sea level at lowest astronomical
tide (LAT) to the top of the reservoir. This is principally used to calculate drilling
costs.
Reservoir pressure: used in calculating wellhead and injection pressures.
Reservoir temperature: measured at the reservoir and used in calculating
wellhead temperature.
Reservoir length and Reservoir width: these are based on the recoverable
reserves and global reserves/km figures. The field length is twice the field
width.The field dimensions are used in conjunction with the maximum drilling
106
QUE$TORHelp
stepout to calculate the number of drilling centres required to fully drain the
reservoir.
l
Water depth:measured from the lowest astronomical tide (LAT) and strongly
influences the development concept chosen.
107
QUE$TORHelp

The fluid / profile characteristics tab is shown below.
Liquid data
l
Oil density @ STP:the crude or condensate API at stock tank conditions is used
in conjunction with the GOR/LGR and the gas molecular weight to generate a
pseudo composition for the wellstream fluid.This is used in the topsides
component for sizing the separators.
Initial water cut:the water cut at the start of production as a percentage of
water to gross liquids. This is used in the generation of the produced water profile.
Gas data @ STP

l
Gas molecular weight: this represents molecular weight of the gas portion of
the wellstream fluids resulting when it is flashed at stock tank conditions, i.e. 60F
(15.6C) and atmospheric pressure.
Note: The gas molecular weight entered is for the hydrocarbon plus acid gas
components. If you change the default acid gas content you should considering
adjusting the gas molecular weight as increasing the acid gas content without
108
QUE$TORHelp
increasing the gas molecular weight effectively decreases the molecular weight of
the hydrocarbon portion of the gas.
l
CO content and H S content: the gas H S and CO contents are used in the
2
2
2
2
topsides component for selection of the materials (carbon steel or corrosion
resistant alloy), corrosion allowances and the gas sweetening option. They are
also used to select the casing, conductor and Xmas tree unit costs in drilling. The
following logic is used for material selection of pressure vessels:
l
- If the CO content in the gas is </= 1 mol % carbon steel is selected

2
with a 3 mm (~1/8th inch) corrosion allowance
- If the CO content in the gas is >1 mol % but </= 3 mol % carbon
2
steel is selected with a 6 mm (~1/4 inch) corrosion allowance
- If the CO content in the gas is >3 mol % corrosion resistant alloy
2
pipe/piping and stainless clad carbon steel vessels are selected.
If carbon steel pipelines are selected a standard 3 mm (~1/8th inch) corrosion

allowance is assumed.
Well data
l
Productivity: used to generate the production well count and relates to the total
production of a well over the field life.
Peak well flow: used to determine the plateau production rate which is also
based on the percentage of reserves extracted at peak and estimated drilling
durations.The peak well flow should be entered on a daily basis.
109
QUE$TORHelp
Miscellaneous
The miscellaneous tab is shown below.
Miscellaneous Items
l
Distance to operations base:used to determine the cost of logistics

(transportation of men and consumables) in OPEX.
Distance to delivery point:used in the concept selector to determine the
export route and whether or not a subsea or wellhead tie-back development is
viable.
Maximum drilling stepout:used in conjunction with the reservoir extent to
determine the number of drilling centres required to drain the whole of the
reservoir.
Temperature
l
Maximum ambient air temperature:this is the maximum monthly average

ambient air temperature. It is used to calculate a derating factor for gas turbine
driven compressors and power generation packages and to calculate the process
outlet temperature and hence the size/weight of fin-fan coolers. The calculated
power requirement is divided by the derating factor to calculate the ISO
110
QUE$TORHelp
equivalent power requirement for any gas turbines.
l
Average seawater temperature:this is the average seawater temperature. It

is used to calculate the heat loss in the pipelines from the wellhead to the
production facility.
BOEEquivalents
Barrel of oil equivalent (BOE) values for oil, condensate and gas can be entered for
use when calculating the cost/BOE metrics displayed above the table in the
Investment and Production Profile sheet. The values entered apply to all Investment
and Production Profile tabs (Offshore, Onshore, Regasification and Combined) .
Note: The units for BOE are by definition fixed and therefore cannot be toggled
to select a different unit set.
111
QUE$TORHelp

The production profile opens after the field level data if you are creating a new
project, if you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Production
Profile from the Project menu or clicking
in the toolbar.
The production profile consists of a series of four forms which allow you to define the
production profile as well as the capacities of your facilities and the number of wells.
Once you have completed adjusting each form click OK.This applies your changes
and closes the form to move on. Cancel will clear all entries in the form and take
you back a step.
112
QUE$TORHelp

QUE$TOR will generate a default profile based on the reserves, well productivity and
well peak flow rate. The initial ramp-up duration is calculated based on the number of
production wells and the number of production wells that can be drilled per year.
The production profile edit form, shown below, allows you to modify QUE$TORs
initial estimates to shape the generated production profile as required.
Onstream days: the onstream days is used to convert the daily production
rate into an annual rate allowing for a nominal annual maintenance period.
Concurrent drilling operations: the number of concurrent drilling
operations is based on the production well count. If the well count is < 25 then
a single drilling operation is selected, if the well count >96 then three
concurrent drilling operations are selected else two concurrent drilling
operations are selected.
Wells per year per operation: the number of wells per drilling operation is
based on the production well count, average production well length, water
depth, a typical drill rig learning curve, the onstream days and the regional
default drilling time vs depth data.
Plateau rate (daily equivalent): the plateau rate is based on the peak well
flow, production well count, years to plateau and recoverable reserves.
Years to plateau: the years to plateau is based on the production well count,
wells per year per operation, and number of concurrent drilling operations.
Plateau duration: the plateau duration lasts until 55% of the recoverable
reserves have been produced.
Field life: the field life is based on the years to plateau, the plateau duration
and the production well count.
Once these values have been adjusted, click OK to progress to the production
profile.You can still go back to the production profile edit form by clicking on Modify
Profile below the production profile.
113
QUE$TORHelp
Production Profile
The production profile form gives the user a visual representation of the production
profile as specified in the production profile edit form.
oil (or condensate), gas, water and gross liquids. The gross liquids tab shows the sum
of the oil and water tabs. Use the dropdown lists to select which graph is displayed on
each tab.
Tip: When pasting in a production profile from a spreadsheet ensure that the field
life specified in the production profile edit form is the same as that of the profile you
are pasting in.
If you wish to change the reserves or any other field level data, click on Field data
to go back to the field level data form.
In an oil project, changes to the oil profile are automatically reflected in the gas
profile (using the input GOR) and similarly with gas projects the liquids profile
114
QUE$TORHelp
reflects the numbers input for gas.The reverse is not true, i.e. the oil is not back
calculated if a new gas profile is entered in an oil project.
Note:The daily production rate is based on the onstream days specified in the
Production profile edit form.
The production profiles can be printed or exported to Excel using the toolbar buttons
at the top of the form.
If the production profile entered results in cumulative production differing by >1%
from the total recoverable reserves entered in the field level data a warning will be
displayed when you click OK, shown below.Click OK to continue with the entered
profile or Cancel to go back and edit the values.If you continue with the profile, the
recoverable reserves entered in the field level data will be ignored.
115
QUE$TORHelp
Design Flowrates
The Design flowrates form shows the flowrates that will be used to design the
components.

l
Peak daily average:this is the peak production of the main product from the
production profile.
Design rates
l
Design factor / Swing factor: the design factor (for oil projects) or a swing
factor (for gas projects) is applied to account for the variance between the peak
daily average and the actual peak flows used for equipment sizing.Entering a new
design factor or swing factor automatically recalculates the design rates.
The design rates for oil (or condensate), gas and gross liquid flowrates are
determined by the peak production and the design factor. These flowrates are carried
116
QUE$TORHelp
through the program and are used to size the equipment within the field
development.
Water injection
Water injection is selected by default for oil projects where it is assumed to be used
for reservoir pressure maintenance. Water injection is never included by default for
gas projects.
l
Water injection capacity factor:this factor is applied to the design gross

liquids flowrate to give the water injection flowrate. It is set to 1.1 by default, i.e.
the water injection flowrate will be 110% of the design gross liquids flowrate.
Water injection flow:the design water injection flowrate for the field. The
default is based on the water injection capacity factor and gross liquids design
flowrate. You can adjust either the capacity factor or the flowrate to match you
assumptions.
Gas injection
Gas injection is selected by default for oil projects when the daily associated gas
production rate is between 5 and 200 MMscf/day. Gas injection is never selected by
default for gas projects.
l
Gas injection flowrate:the design gas injection flowrate for the field. When gas
injection is selected, the default is for all of the produced gas to be reinjected.
117
QUE$TORHelp
Number of Wells
The number of development wells form, shown below, provides the estimated
number of wells required across the field to achieve the specified profile but you can
modify the well count.The default number of production wells is based on the well
lifetime productivity. The default number of water injection wells assumes an
average of two injectors for every five oil production wells.Gas injectors are based
on an average flowrate of 30 MMscf/day per well.
118
QUE$TORHelp

The concept selector opens after the production profile if you are creating a new
project.If you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Concept
selector from the Project menu or clicking
in the toolbar.
It must be recognised that whilst QUE$TORs default concept selection is very useful,
the software does not take all the factors into account that would ultimately influence
a final concept selection.In some instances a concept may be returned that, based on
the generic software logic, is very reasonable but when compared to your real life
field situation might appear somewhat surprising. Having said that, time and effort
has gone into making the selection process as comprehensive and realistic as
possible.
119
QUE$TORHelp

The concept selector form, shown below, gives you the option to define your own
concept or use a predefined concept.
QUE$TOR will choose a default concept based on the field level data and production
profile.You can change this to another of the 14 Predefined concepts using the list
box.Alternatively you can select Blank Concept from the list box and use the field
development schematic to create your own concept.The key input parameters that
influence the selection most are: hydrocarbon type, reservoir extent, water depth,
distance to delivery point, and the number of wells.
The gas export and oil export frames allow you to specify the oil and gas export
method from the main platform. Again QUE$TOR will choose a default concept but
you can select an alternative using the list boxes.Distances to delivery point should
also be entered for pipeline export to determine length of the export pipelines.
Once you have completed adjusting the form click OK. This applies your changes,
closes the form and opens the field development schematic. Cancel will clear all
entries in the form and take you back a step.
120
QUE$TORHelp

When the concept selector is opened from an existing project it has two tabs, New
and Last selected, as shown below.
The Last selected tab is not editable but displays the concept being used by QUE$TOR
at that time.
The New tab will display QUE$TORs default concept selection.This may be different
to the last selected concept if you have changed the field level data or production
profile.The New tab also allows you to choose a different concept.To use the concept
selected on the New tab click OK.This will delete all existing components and create
a new set of components.To exit without changing the concept click Cancel.
Note: When you create a new concept you will lose any changes you have made
to the components in the original field development plan.
The concept is never changed automatically. If you make changes to the field level
data or production profile that trigger a change to QUE$TORs default concept the
concept will only be changed if you open the concept selector and click OK on the
New tab.A warning is displayed, see below, to caution you that you have chosen to
replace the current development concept with the new concept.The warning then
gives a description of the new concept selected in brackets
121
QUE$TORHelp
If you want to use the new concept click Yes.If you want to keep your existing
development concept click No, to return you to the previous form, then Cancel.
This is to prevent QUE$TOR deleting your changes to components in the field
development schematic (FDS). Any changes to the field level data or production
profile are passed automatically to all components in the FDS, e.g. changing the
plateau production rate will change the production capacity of the topsides, but the
concept will remain fixed.
122
QUE$TORHelp

The field development schematic gives a graphical representation of the project and
allows the selected concept to be refined.
To add components to the FDS

Select a component from the Components Toolbar by left clicking on it. If you require
a different component type to that selected, use the dropdown button to change the
type before clicking on the component button. Move the cursor onto the FDS and left
click again to drop the component in the required position.
To add notes in the FDS
Notes can be added to the FDS using the annotation icon

. When selected, the
Add annotation dialog is displayed allowing you enter text and position it in the FDS.
To wrap text press the Enter key on your keyboard.

To select a group of components on the FDS
Groups of components can be selected by left clicking with the mouse and holding
down to drag over all required components before releasing. These groups can be
moved or deleted.
123
QUE$TORHelp
To move a component or group of components
Left click on a component or group of components and hold down to drag to a new
position.
To delete a component or group of components
Either select the component(s) with a left mouse click and hit delete or right click on
the component and select Delete. You will be asked to confirm any deletions to
prevent any components being inadvertently deleted.
To open a component
To open and adjust a components cost estimate, double click on it or right click on it
and select Edit/View Cost Estimate.See the relevant component chapter for more
information.
Topsides docking to substructures

Topsides are docked to their associated substructure. This enables the program to
pass data needed to size the components between them.It also means that moving
one of the components will move both components. To dock a substructure and
topsides, move one towards the other in the FDS by selecting it and holding down on
the left mouse button.When they get close together they will snap towards each
other, release the mouse button to dock the components. To undock a topsides and
substructure right click on either one and select Undock.
Pipelines, Power cables & linking components

The Link button enables components to be linked together.This can represent
pipelines and/or power cables between platforms but can also be used as an
information link e.g. linking drilling to subsea.To link two components:
l
Ensure the two components you wish to connect are on screen.
Select the link button
in the components toolbar.
Left click the first component you wish to connect in the link then click again on the
second component.
The order in which components are linked should generally follow the sequence of
oil/gas production, i.e. drilling to subsea or topsides and not the other way round.If
you cant complete a link, hit the escape key and retry in the opposite direction.
You cannot create links to or from substructures.Links can only be made between the
following components: topsides, offshore loading, subsea, drilling, sources and sinks.
The link will be displayed in one of three colours:
l
Black:A pipeline or power cable link; see Pipelines and power cables, below.
Blue:Used to link subsea components to topsides.This link is for passing data
only.All flowline costs are included in the subsea component.
124
QUE$TORHelp
l
Green:Used to link drilling components to subsea or topsides components.This

link is for passing data only
Links become red when selected and can be deleted by hitting delete or right clicking
and selecting Delete link.
Pipelines and Power cables
When a black link is added to the schematic, there are no pipelines included by
default. There can be multiple pipelines in each link. The example below shows a two
phase line going from Topsides 2 (WHP) to Topsides 1 (CPP), with water injection and
gas injection pipelines flowing in the opposite direction. Power is provided by interplatform cable from CPP to WHP.
To add a pipeline to a link, double click on the link and click Add in the 'Pipelines'
section of the Pipeline and Power cable link form. Once the pipeline has been added
the fluid type and direction of flow can be adjusted using the associated dropdown
menus. On the main schematic, each pipeline within a link is represented by a
coloured arrow on the link showing the direction of flow.
Similarly to add a power cable to a link, double click on the link and click Add in the
'Power cables' section of the Pipeline and Power cable link form. Once the cable has
125
QUE$TORHelp
been added the direction in which power is flowing can be adjusted using the
associated dropdown menus. On the main schematic, each cable within a link is
represented by a grey arrow on the link showing the direction the power is flowing.
The length and maximum water depth for all pipelines and/or cables in the link can be
edited at the top of the form.
Note: All pipelines and/or cables within a link are assumed to follow the same
route.
To remove an unwanted pipeline or cable from the link, select the desired pipeline or
cable and click Remove in the Pipelines or Power cables section.
Pipelines can then be sized and costed by selecting them and clicking Cost. For more
information see Offshore Pipelines.
126
QUE$TORHelp

QUE$TOR calculates capital costs based on default inputs for every component as
soon as it is added to the field development schematic (FDS).You can then open any
of these components and adjust the inputs to refine the cost estimate.The default
inputs are chosen based upon the region selected, your inputs in the field level details
and other linked components.The default inputs are designed to give you a
reasonable cost estimate in the absence of further data.
The components are all live linked to each other so that a change to one component
will change all dependent components.You can enter and update these components
and fix inputs so that they are no longer updated by the program.This is called
locking.Although you can edit components in any order you should try to follow a
logical path to avoid locking variables based on incorrect data. QUE$TORs order of
calculation is explained fully see Data flow and locking.
Cost Summary Tree

The cost summary tree can be seen in the panel to the left of the FDS.This displays a
running total of the total project cost together with a breakdown of each component
cost.By default, the tree is displayed in expanded format, i.e. for all components
the cost for each cost centre is displayed. If you want to see just the total cost of
each component right click in this panel and select Collapse all.
The tree is updated automatically as components are added, deleted and adjusted.
When a component is opened the cost summary tree shows a cost breakdown for the
open component and a total cost for all other components.
127
QUE$TORHelp
Component Toolbar
The component toolbar displays the components which can be used to create a
development configuration. There are three tabs available in the component toolbar
Offshore, Onshore and LNG Regasification. When starting a new project
QUE$TOR will acquire only the licence for the type of development being created.
This initial licence is called the primary licence, the example below illustrates a new
offshore project. The green circle indicates the active procurement strategies that
QUE$TOR is currently using. The example below illustrates an offshore only project
and therefore only the offshore tab has a green circle.
The Offshore tab displays the offshore components available in QUE$TOR. The
Onshore tab however will not yet contain any components since the licence has not
been activated.
To add onshore components the licence must be activated, to do this click Add
onshore project. QUE$TOR will locate the onshore licence, when it is located the
onshore components will become active and the Onshore tab will now display the
onshore components.
A green circle has now appeared on the Onshore tab to indicate an onshore
procurement strategy is selected and is ready to be used.
Note: Once acquired QUE$TOR will not release a licence until the program is
closed
Similarly, to add a LNG regasification component, the licence must be activated.To
do this click Add LNG regasification onshore project,QUE$TOR will locate the
LNG regasification licence, when it is located the LNG regas onshore tab will become
active and will display the LNG regas onshore components.
Some components have a dropdown next to them, these can have one of two
functions:
128
QUE$TORHelp
l
Some components are available in different variations e.g. a spar buoy component
can be a caisson, truss or cell spar buoy. To change the component type selected
use the dropdown arrow to the right of the component button, the type selected is
indicated by the marker dot. The components this applies to are: Jackets, GBS,
TLP, Spar Buoy, Offshore Loading and Terminal Facilities.
For Topsides, Production facilities and Regasification terminal facilities this
dropdown allows the functions of the component to be defined.This can also be
done within these components. To change the component type selected use the
dropdown arrow to the right of the component button, the functions present are
ticked.
129
QUE$TORHelp
QUE$TOR allows duplication of one or more components to quickly produce projects
that contain similar sets of components. This feature saves you having to re-enter
changes to the QUE$TORdefaults for the selected duplicated components.
A typical scenario would be where there are multiple wellhead drilling platforms tied
back to a central production platform.
The steps to achieve this are:

l
130
Configure the wellhead platform, substructure, drilling and attached pipelines

as required.
Select Topsides 2, Jacket 2 and Offshore drilling 2. Right click on one of them
and select the Duplicate option.
QUE$TORHelp
A ghosted image of the selected components is displayed allowing you to

position the components on the field development schematic.
131
QUE$TORHelp
l
Left click to add the components to the schematic.A new wellhead platform,
substructure, drilling and pipelines to Topsides 1 will be added.
Any changes made to the original components (Topsides 2, Jacket 2 and

Offshore drilling 2) will also be present in the new components (Topsides 3,
Jacket 3 and Offshore drilling 3).
Note: Once you have duplicated a component additional changes can be

made to the duplicate component which will apply only to that component.
132
QUE$TORHelp

QUE$TOR divides the wells and flows specified in the production profile between the
components in the field development schematic.Wells are divided up first and flows
are then allocated on a per well basis.
Production, water injection and gas injection wells are divided equally between all
drilling components. The three projects shown below, all have a total of 11 producers
specified in the production profiles.The well distribution is illustrated in each figure.
This shows a project with two drilling components.The wells are split between the
two drilling components with the extra wells going to the first drilling components.
133
QUE$TORHelp
This shows the same project but with the addition of a subsea component with
associated drilling.The eleven wells are again divided between the drilling
components.
This shows the same project but the number of subsea wells has been specified as
5.Therefore the remaining six wells have been split equally between the remaining
two drilling components.
Note: Changes to the number of wells or the flowrates in a subsea component

will not be passed to any linked drilling component but they will be passed to any
linked topsides.
Water and gas injection wells are allocated on the same basis as production wells.
Adding a new drilling component or adding wells to an existing drilling components
will re-allocate the wells and reduce the number of wells in all other unlocked drilling
components. The total number of wells will be maintained at the number specified in
the production profile.If there is only one drilling component or if all other drilling
components are locked then adding wells will increase the total wells.Deleting wells
follows the same methodology in reverse.Any change to the total wells in the drilling
and subsea components will not be passed back to the production profile but will be
included in all capital and operating cost estimates. See Data flow and locking for
more information on the calculation hierarchy.
Flowrate allocation is done on a per well basis.The design capacities specified in the
production profile are divided by the number of wells in the production profile to give
a flowrate per well.If you increase the total wells in the field schematic then the total
flowrate will be increased as the flow per well is based on the number of wells and
134
QUE$TORHelp
design capacity specified in the production profile.The same applies in reverse if you
decrease the total wells in the field schematic.
Flows from drilling components are passed from component to component in the
direction of production.Gas injection and water injection flowrates are handled in the
same fashion despite physically flowing in the opposite direction.Their flowrates are
determined in the drilling component and passed in the direction of production to
calculate the injection facilities required on the relevant topsides.
Note: The flowrates from the wellhead platform will not be passed to the main
topsides unless there is an appropriate pipeline in the link, the flowrate will be
automatically used to size the pipeline.
If a wellhead platform has a water injection pipeline coming from a main (full
production) platform then QUE$TOR assumes that all pumping is on the main
platform.If you add water injection to the wellhead platform then QUE$TOR will
reduce the pumping capacity on the main platform accordingly.Gas injection and gas
lift compression is always assumed to be done exclusively on the main platform.
Note:Even though injection fluids physically flow from the main platform to the
reservoir information on their flowrates is passed in the opposite direction. If you
wish to change injection flowrates change them in the drilling components and the
topsides component will be automatically updated.
135
QUE$TORHelp
Offshore Cost Centres

The cost estimate sheet is displayed on the right hand side of the screen when a
component is open. It displays a breakdown of every cost item included in the
component.The component inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on the
cost estimate.The unit rates are determined by the procurement strategy. The costs
are generally based on a simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship. It is possible
to go to any blue number in the cost sheet and make any appropriate changes to the
calculated weights or the unit rates.
Offshore components costs are broken down into eight cost centres:
Equipment Costs
The equipment weights are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each subcomponent is adjusted and unit rates for each identified equipment item are retrieved
from the procurement strategy.Unit rates are also dependent on the construction
material with stainless steel or a stainless steel internal cladding used in areas where
high acid gas contents are experienced.Equipment costs cover the vendors' cost for
fabrication of the equipment, any procurement of sub-components and sub-vendors'
submission to approval authorities and testing at the vendors' works.Direct
procurement costs are included in the design cost centre.
136
QUE$TORHelp
A freight cost is then added which is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the
total cost of the equipment identified in the systems listed above. It includes the cost
of packaging and transporting equipment from the manufacturer to the construction
yard.You can modify the freight percentage, the default is dependent on where the
equipment is procured 'in region' or 'out of region' i.e. is the item being procured
from the same region as the field location.
Materials Costs
Covers all the bulk materials permanently installed with the component.The costs
cover delivery, insurance, guarantees and duties. There are five main categories for
the bulk materials:
l
Steel: covers any secondary steel required for a component such as support
steel, module frames, access ways, ladders etc.
Piping: covers any pipe supports, flanges and fittings and valves but excludes
control valves and emergency shutdown valves (which are included in instrument
bulks).
Electrical: covers any cabling, cable trays, supports, terminations, glands, gland
transits, junction boxes, lighting and small power systems (e.g. batteries/life
support power).
Instrument: covers any instrument cabling, pneumatic tubing, terminations,
glands, gland penetrations, supports, control valves, relief valves and ESD and
blowdown valves.
Others: covers any additional bulk system weights associated with the HVAC and
safety systems plus painting and architectural bulks.
A freight cost is added to these in a similar method to the equipment freight costs.
Costs for consumables and materials for construction aids or temporary works are
included in fabrication.
Fabrication Costs
The fabrication costs include all fabrication activities, from receipt and storage of
materials, fabrication, assembly, testing and precommissioning to weighing,
including any off-site fabrication (not vendor-supplied skids).
The fabrication costs are based around a required number of man-hours and a manhour rate. Clicking on the hyperlinked fabrication heading will open up the fabrication
breakdown form giving details of how the fabrication costs are calculated, see
Fabrication Details for more information.
The man-hour rate includes: yard mobilisation, welder testing, all wages, salaries
and bonuses, payroll burden, indirect services, i.e. scaffolding, cleaning, yard
maintenance; consumable materials, temporary construction/lifting aids,
construction plant and small tools, contractor's own supervision and management,
shop drawings, general overheads, utility services, depreciation, project expenses,
137
QUE$TORHelp
i.e. office facilities for operator's representatives, secretarial and office staff,
accounting.
Installation Costs
Installation costs include transport of the component modules or deck from the
fabrication yard to the installation site or deck mating area and installation costs of
lifting the modules or deck on to an installed jacket, mating a deck with a GBS or TLP
substructure or installation of modules on to a semi-submersible or tanker deck in a
yard.
Hook-up and Commissioning (HUC) Costs

Cover all the costs off hook-up and commissioning and can be broken down into three
areas:
l
Atshore HUC: work which can be carried out in the yard where systems can be
tested and commissioned in situ, prior to leaving the yard.
Inshore HUC:work which can be carried out away from the construction yard but
at a location close to shore, e.g. deepwater sites used for deck mating, and
applies generally to GBS platforms. It includes for labour, support services
(supply boat, etc) onshore accommodation and catering and onshore supply base
costs. Inshore hook-up therefore reduces the cost of transporting personnel and
equipment to the hook-up location. The costs include all HUC activities possible
without having hydrocarbons available.This includes connection of
modules/equipment (e.g. pressure testing, loop testing of cabling, run up of
turbines on propane, testing of compressors, etc). It includes allowance for
salaries, consumables, overheads, temporary construction aids/lifting aids,
construction plant and small tools, specialist subcontractors, contractors own
supervision and management.
Offshore HUC: work carried out at the offshore location. It includes for labour,
support services (supply boat, helicopter, etc) temporary accommodation and
catering and onshore supply base costs. The costs include all hook-up and
commissioning activities to achieve first oil, all modules/equipment fully
performance tested using crude from the field and all systems on-line and
available for production. The costs include all salaries, consumables, overheads,
temporary construction aids/lifting aids, construction plant and small tools,
specialist subcontractors, contractors own supervision and management.There is
also an allowance for additional shift changes, travelling time, etc.

Covers the hours of the component designers and project management:
l
Design hours: the design man-hours are factored from the equipment and
materials weights and include project specification, special studies, detail design,
site surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection
services, project control, QA and documentation during the detailed design phase.
138
QUE$TORHelp
The rates include wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll
burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility services,
depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration), project expenses and
equipment.Also included are the vendors' drawings and data, delivery of items to
the yard, vendors installation and commissioning services, commissioning
spares, insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
l
Project management hours: the project management hours required for the
project management team to manage, monitor and control all phases of the
development. This includes project engineering, project control and planning,
design and construction supervision, quality assurance, HSE and third party
liaison.This covers from the project sanction date, through completion in the
yard, to first oil. The project management man-hours are based on the design
man-hours. Pre-sanction management costs are not included within QUE$TOR and
should be added as necessary. Operations supervision, product sales, etc are also
excluded from this cost centre.
The project management man-hours are factored from the design man-hours
Insurance and Certification costs

Covers the costs of insuring and certifying the components:
l
Insurance: covers the cost of insuring project components during transport,

construction, installation, HUC, etc up to first oil. Personnel liability insurances are
assumed to be covered by corporate policies. The insurance costs are taken as a
percentage of the overall component cost.
Certification: covers the certification costs of the design, equipment, materials
and construction of the development by a recognised certifying authority (e.g.
Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).Certification is only included by default for European and
North American countries where it is common practice and is taken as a
percentage of the total component cost.A certification percentage is included in
the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost databases. All other cost databases have a
zero cost for certification.
Contingency
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total material, fabrication, installation,
HUC, design, project management, insurance and certification costs to bring the
component cost estimate to a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see Contingency
Definitions.
139
QUE$TORHelp
About Offshore Components

On entering a component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the screen
with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side, the cost tree will display the open
component.
You can edit all inputs, quantities and unit rates.When a value is changed it will
become locked and will no longer be updated by QUE$TOR if a higher level input is
adjusted. You can also lock a value without changing it by right clicking on it and
selecting Locked. To unlock a value, right click on it and deselect Locked.You can
change locked values without unlocking them.Unlocked values will be updated if
other variables in the component or project upon which they are dependent are
changed.
Once all the inputs are adjusted, click Apply to update the cost estimate.To apply all
changes and exit a component, click OK. To exit a component without saving your
changes click Cancel.
Cost Summary Tree

140
QUE$TORHelp
Input Panel
The input panel displays the inputs of the components and behave in a similar manner
to forms.Some input panels contain arrow buttons ( ) which when clicked will
open up a sub-component form e.g. Topsides Manifolding, allowing more detailed
specification.When new inputs are entered the cost estimate and any other
dependent values are not updated until Apply is clicked.
Apply will only be active if changes have been made to the inputs.

The cost estimate sheet displays a breakdown of every cost item included in the
component which are broken down under the QUE$TOR cost centres.The costs are
broken down into a quantity, usually a weight, and a unit rate. The component inputs
are used to calculate the quantities and the unit rates are determined by the
procurement strategy.The costs are generally based on a simple weight x unit rate
= cost relationship.It is possible to go to any blue number in the cost sheet and
make any appropriate changes to the calculated quantities or the unit rates.
Some sheets have blue underlined values. Clicking on these will open a more
detailed cost estimate sheet in a new window.
Clicking on OK will apply all changes to the component, close it and return you to the
FDS.Clicking on Cancel will exit the component without applying any changes and
return you to the FDS.
141
QUE$TORHelp
About Topsides
The topsides component covers processing facilities for oil or gas, including wellhead
manifolding, separation, gas treatment, gas compression, condensate handling,
export metering, water or gas injection, utilities, power generation, communications
and control, quarters, drilling facilities, bulk materials and structural steel.
Technical algorithms are used to calculate process capacities and equipment sizes
from which weights are derived.These weights are then combined into system
weights and associated utilities and power requirements calculated.Bulk factors are
applied to systems and individual equipment items to estimate the piping, electrical,
instrumentation, architectural and safety bulk material requirements. Module steel,
module support frame (MSF) steel and deck steel are calculated according to the
above weight estimates and fabrication costs for the topsides modules or decks
generated.
The configuration of topsides facilities, bulk factors and steel weight calculations are
dependent on the choice of modular (including module weight limitations) or
integrated deck construction and the choice of substructure type, i.e. jacket,
lightweight structure, GBS, TLP/spar or floating production unit.Regional differences
between oil producing countries are reflected in both the technical algorithms and the
cost databases.
The estimate is completed by calculating transportation and installation durations,
hook-up and commissioning (HUC) man-hours, design and project man-hours and
adding allowances for insurance, certification and contingency.
142
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
On entering the topsides component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the
screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
adjusted.You can also lock a value without changing it by right clicking on it and
changed.
changes and exit a component, click OK.To exit a component without saving your
Inputs
The topsides input panel is shown below.QUE$TOR will choose appropriate values for
every parameter based on linked components and field level data.Many inputs are
also dependent upon higher level inputs within the same component.
You can navigate between high level inputs using the tabs.To adjust one of the
available facilities, such as oil export, click on the relevant arrow button.Each facility
can be considered as a sub-component within the topsides.All of these subcomponents are recalculated when unlocked if high level inputs (e.g. oil inlet flow)
are changed.In a similar fashion if you adjust oil export then, as long as it is
unlocked, power generation will be recalculated based on the new power
requirements.
When the high level inputs in the tabs are adjusted, click Apply to update the subcomponents and the cost estimate.
143
QUE$TORHelp
Facilities
The facilities frame contains links to each of the topsides sub-components (e.g. oil
processing) available in QUE$TOR.Clicking on the arrow button next to each label
allows the design details to be reviewed and optionally adjusted.All of these subcomponents are recalculated when unlocked if a high level input (e.g. input flows) is
changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust oil processing then, as long as it is
requirements.
Note: Facilities follow a hierarchy for recalculations, with changes to high level
facilities causing a recalculation of lower level facilities.
This does not apply in reverse.You should also note that once an input is locked in a
facility, the input and its dependent values will no longer be updated by the program
if higher level inputs are adjusted.For example if you adjust and lock power
generation then you must ensure that any subsequent changes you make to higher
144
QUE$TORHelp
level facilities do not result in a power demand that cannot be met by the selected
generators.This problem can be solved by returning to power generation and
unlocking the values.
The data flow between the facilities within a topsides is illustrated below.The
flowchart is designed to give a broad view of the relationships between subcomponents.Any changes to a sub-component may affect all sub-components
downstream of it in the flowchart. This does not apply to every parameter of a subcomponent and neither does it mean that every downstream sub-component will be
influenced by changes to an upstream component.
Cost Estimate
The cost estimate displays a breakdown of every cost item included in the
component.The topsides inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost
estimate.The unit rates are determined by the procurement strategy.The costs are
generally based on a simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship.It is possible to
go to any blue number in the cost sheet and make any appropriate changes to the
calculated quantities or the unit rates.
Modifications to the equipment weights will be immediately reflected in the bulk
materials, pre-fabrication, construction and design costs if these are unlocked.
145
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The Primary inputs tab allow you to choose the highest level topsides design
specifications and is shown below.
Functions
The topsides can consist of any or all of five functions: Wellhead (manifolding),
Production, Compression, Drilling and Quarters. Selecting a function will include all
associated systems in the cost estimate and allow you to open and edit the associated
sub-components.
Note: You must click Apply before your changes are implemented.
The functions are:
l
Wellhead: selection of this incorporates production, test, water and gas injection
and gas lift manifolds. It also includes a well kill manifold, a well control package
with its associated panels and a hydraulic power unit for well control.It does not
include Xmas trees which are included in the Drilling component.
Production: selection of this will include production and test separation, oil or
condensate processing, oil export facilities, gas processing and water injection
facilities.Detailed specifications of the processing facilities are made interactively
in the relevant sub-components.
Compression: selection of this includes flash gas, gas export, gas reinjection and
lift gas compression packages along with the associated suction scrubbers and
aftercoolers.
146
QUE$TORHelp
l
Drilling: selection of this includes all drilling facilities on the platform and should
be selected for platform rigs and tender supported drilling.It is not applicable for
lightweight structures.
Quarters: selection of this function includes the accommodation and helideck.
For floating production units it is assumed that some accommodation is supplied
with the vessel, however, additional accommodation and refurbishment of the
existing accommodation can be included. If quarters is not selected, QUE$TOR
includes an emergency shelter and a lighter helideck.If a lightweight structure is
selected, a lightweight aluminium helideck can be included.
Utilities, power generation and distribution systems are calculated for all topsides
and are determined based on the process systems included.
Capacities
The capacities include flows to or from other linked platforms and are used to size
separation, processing and export facilities. They include the design margins
specified in the Production profile.
l
Oil/condensate: total flowrate of all oil or condensate arriving at the topsides.

Water injection: the total water injection flowing from the platform to linked
drilling subsea and topsides components.
Export/flared gas:the flowrate of gas leaving the platform via flare, gas or two
phase pipelines.
Gas injection: the flowrate of gas leaving the platform for gas injection. This
includes gas going to linked drilling, subsea and topsides components.
Gas lift:the flowrate of gas leaving the platform for gas lift. This includes gas
going to linked drilling, subsea and topsides components. For further details see
Gas lift projects.
The total gas arriving at the topsides from all linked drilling subsea and topsides
components is taken to be the sum of the Export/flared gas, the Gas injection and the
Gas lift.This total flowrate is used to size the separation and processing facilities.
Water injection, gas injection and gas lift capacities do not necessarily reflect the
pumping or compression facilities on the topsides.They are simply flowrates.Water
and gas injection is assumed to be supplied at high pressure to wellhead platforms
tied back to a full processing platform.
For example consider a project with a wellhead platform tied back to a main platform
with processing facilities.If there is gas injection all associated gas produced on the
wellhead platform flows back via a two phase pipeline to the main platform. Here
QUE$TOR assumes it is separated and compressed to the full injection pressure.If
there are any gas injectors on the wellhead platform a portion of the gas will flow to
it via a high pressure gas injection pipeline. The gas injection capacity of the
wellhead platform will then be greater than zero but it will still have no gas injection
compressors.The same principles apply by default for water injection.
147
QUE$TORHelp
Gas lift is never included by default but if you add it QUE$TOR will assume that all gas
lift compression is done on the main platform (providing the platforms are linked by a
gas lift pipeline). In this situation the Export/disposed gas capacity of the wellhead
platform should be increased equivalent to its Gas lift capacity to take account of the
gas lift circulation.
Should you wish to transfer injection or compression away from the main platform,
QUE$TORs default assumptions can be easily overridden using locking.
148
QUE$TORHelp
Configuration
The Configuration tab allows you to specify the topsides configuration, the
substructure type and the hook-up and commissioning (HUC) philosophy.
Substructure
l
Type: QUE$TOR uses the substructure type to determine the steel weights
required, the installation method and to determine which utilities to include.
The default is picked up from the attached substructure but this can be changed
to apply different design assumptions. For example, a GBS has a higher
structural steel content than a jacket, the deck mating and hook-up and
commissioning can occur inshore and some utility systems may be located in
the shaft, e.g. seawater lift and firewater pumps.
Note:Changing the substructure type in the topsides component will not change
the type of substructure it is docked to in the schematic.
l
Sub type: the sub type options vary dependent on the main substructure type.
For Jackets and GBSs the selection affects some utility systems weights and
other dependent system weights. For Tankers and Semi-submersibles selecting
a sub type of Conversion enables the Integrate existing systems check box.
For TLPs, Spars and Barges there is no sub type option.
Integrate existing systems: when this check box is selected the control &
communications, quarters and helideck, certain utility systems (namely open
drains, instrument & plant air, firefighting, crane, HVAC and lifeboats),
emergency power and power distribution systems weights are reduced as it is
149
QUE$TORHelp
assumed part of the requirement is met by the existing integrated tanker/semisub systems. If this box is deselected then no integration of these systems will
be assumed and therefore the topsides will have to provide the full system.
Include electrical buildings

Electrical buildings to house power distribution/switchgear equipment in a fire and
blast rated enclosure are included if either the Production or Compression functions
are selected in the Primary tab. Wellhead (manifolding), Drilling and Quarters are
assumed to either require no electrical equipment or have their own power
distribution/switchgear systems which are an integral part of the module. The
electrical equipment and the associated electrical cabling inside the building are
accounted for as equipment items and electrical bulk material.
When selected the power system base load is increased by 5% to run the HVAC,
safety systems and lighting inside the buildings.
Deck
l
Configuration: QUE$TOR uses the deck configuration to determine the

structural steel weights and the installation assumptions. There are four
options, two of which are available for any given component. For the majority
of substructures the options are:
o
Integrated: this option implies that the topsides will be installed

on substructures as a single deck, however the drilling,
accommodation and flare boom are treated as separate modules.
QUE$TOR will default to integrated when available.
Modular: this option implies that the topsides will be installed on
substructures as multiple modules. When this option is selected
there will be an increase in the structural steel weight assumed for
the topsides and a greater portion of the hook-up and
commissioning will be assumed to occur offshore. Selecting this
option also enables the Max. module weight data entry.
For substructures where installation of the topsides is likely to occur at

the quayside, i.e. semi-submersibles, tankers and barges, the options
are different:
o
150
Pre-assembled units: this option implies that the topsides will be

loaded onto the substructure from the quayside as pre-assembled
units. The lifting is assumed to be carried out by cranes on the
quayside. If you believe that the lifting will be done by a heavy lift
vessel you should adjust the cost sheet accordingly.
Pancake: this option implies that the process units are installed
directly on to the deck at the fabrication yard thus saving the
primary or module support frame (MSF) steel. This fabrication can
only occur once the substructure is on site. If the topsides
equipment is installed on an elevated deck this is taken in to
account in the substructure component.
QUE$TORHelp
l
Max. module weight: the maximum module weight can be set using the
dropdown list or set to your own maximum module weight using the Max.
module weight entry below when the 'Other' Max. module weight option is
selected. Decreasing the Max. module weight increases the hook-up and
commissioning manhours.
Installation and HUC

This percentage allows you to specify the split between atshore, inshore and offshore
hook-up and commissioning man-hours.
The default percentages are a function of the substructure type and the deck
configuration (modular or integrated). If these are adjusted QUE$TOR automatically
calculates the percentage for atshore, inshore or offshore HUC depending on which of
these has been selected to auto calculate to ensure the percentages add up to 100.
See Hook-up and commissioning costs for an in-depth description of what activities
are covered in the HUC costs.
151
QUE$TORHelp
Product Export
The Export tab allows you to specify the export method for the topsides
products.This information is used to select the appropriate levels of processing for
these products.
Oil/Condensate Export/Disposal
The default method and delivery distance is selected in the Concept Selector. If, for
this particular topsides, the export route or pipeline length is different from the field
export routes, then they should be changed at this stage. This might happen when
Offshore loading has been selected but the platform being investigated is exporting
the crude to another platform before it is exported to the offshore loading system.In
this case, QUE$TOR's selection should be modified to Pipeline to existing platform
and the distance to the other platform entered in the export pipeline component link
dialog box.
Selection of Inject into gas line (gas projects only), Offshore loading or Pipeline to
shore/existing platform/tie in determines the configuration of the separation,
oil/condensate treatment and oil export options.For instance, selecting Pipeline to
shore sets QUE$TORs default separation system to two stages with default pressures
and temperatures to achieve a true vapour pressure (TVP) of 10 bara suitable for
pipeline transmission, whilst selection of Offshore loading will set QUE$TORs default
separation to three stages achieving a Reid vapour pressure (RVP) of 0.7 bara
suitable for tanker loading.
Selection of pipeline export to shore, existing platform, or pipeline tie in is used to
set the pipeline configuration in the Pipelines component and has no effect on the
topsides calculation. Pipeline to shore includes a pipeline to a landfall site including
the export end riser and the shore approach, Pipeline to existing platform includes
platform risers at both ends of the pipeline and Pipeline tie in includes the export end
riser and a tie in to an existing or new pipeline.
152
QUE$TORHelp
Gas Disposal / Export
As with oil/condensate export/disposal, the default method and delivery distance is
selected in the Concept Selector. Again, if for this particular topsides any data is
inappropriate then it should be changed at this stage.
Gas used for Flare/fuel/two phase is not processed, gas reinjected to the reservoir is
dehydrated but not dewpointed by default. These options can be changed when
running the system calculations. If a combination of gas export by pipeline and gas
reinjection is to be modelled, select Pipeline to shore, Pipeline to existing platform,
or Pipeline tie in as appropriate and enter a gas injection capacity.
153
QUE$TORHelp
Design Conditions
The Design Conditions tab allows you to specify the reservoir pressure, the dry tree
temperature, arrival temperature, maximum monthly air temperature and acid
gas/high temperature/pressure conditions.
Reservoir Pressure
The reservoir pressure is used to determine default gas lift, water and gas injection
pressures.
Dry tree wellhead temperature

The temperature of the well fluids arriving on dry trees located on the platform is
calculated and shown here. The calculation is based upon the reservoir temperature
accounting for heat loss in the riser and the Joule Thomson effect. The dry tree
wellhead fluid flow and temperature is then combined with any remote fluids and
mixed on a mass weighted basis to obtain the arrival temperature.
Arrival temperature
The arrival temperature is the mass weighted combination of all the fluid lines
coming onto the platform. The arrival temperature is used in stream 1 of oil
processing and is used to determine if pre-cooling or pre-heating is required. For
remote dry tree risers the temperature of the fluid is assumed to have cooled 5
degrees than the temperature of a similar riser coming direct onto the platform.
154
QUE$TORHelp
Acid Gas / High T / High P
This allows you to specify whether there is acid gas or if the reservoir is high
pressure/high temperature. If the box is selected QUE$TOR will automatically use
more costly, higher grade materials.
If the CO content of the gas specified 1.5 mol% then carbon steel is used for the
2
oil/gas separation and processing equipment with a corrosion allowance of 1.5 mm
(1/16th inch).If the CO content 3 mol% then carbon steel is still used but the
2
corrosion allowance is increased to 3 mm (1/8th inch).If the CO content >3 mol%
2
then acid gas materials, typically stainless steel lining, are used for pressure vessels
and pumps etc with no corrosion allowance.
Maximum monthly average air temperature

This is used to calculate a derating factor for gas turbine driven compressors and
power generation packages. The calculated power requirement is then divided by the
derating factor to calculate the ISO equivalent power requirement for any gas
turbines.
155
QUE$TORHelp
Facilities
The facilities frame contains links to each of the topsides sub-components (e.g. gas
compression) available in QUE$TOR. Clicking on the button next to each label allows
the design details to be reviewed and optionally adjusted.All of these subcomponents are recalculated when unlocked if a high level input (e.g. oil capacity) is
changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust gas processing then, as long as it is
requirements.
This does not apply in reverse. You should also note that once an input is locked in a
if higher level inputs are adjusted.For example if you adjust and lock power
generators.This problem can be solved by returning to power generation and
The data flow between topsides facilities is illustrated below.The flowchart is
designed to give a broad view of the relationships between sub-components.Any
changes to a sub-component may affect all sub-components downstream of it in the
flowchart.This does not apply to every parameter of a sub-component and neither
does it mean that every downstream sub-component will be influenced by changes to
an upstream component.
156
QUE$TORHelp
157
QUE$TORHelp
Manifolding
Clicking on Manifolding in the topsides inputs panel opens the manifolding subcomponent, shown below. This is only available if the Wellhead function has been
selected.The manifolding system includes the associated valving and manifolds for
Production, Test, Water injection, Gas injection and Gas lift.
Manifolding will be included for each of these flows if the total number of relevant
wells and remote risers > 1 and their flowrate > 0. Additional weights for a Well kill
manifold, Well control package, and Hydraulic power unit are included if
required.Manifolding for a particular flow can be added or removed using the check
boxes.
The number of linked wells is passed from all linked topsides, subsea and drilling
components. Platform wells are those with dry trees on this topsides. Remote wells
are any wells either subsea or on wellhead platforms whose production flows to this
topsides.
QUE$TOR defaults to two wellbay areas with one set of production and test manifolds
per wellbay if the total number of well slots is >32 with a maximum of 40 slots per
wellbay possible. This is valid for platform drilled wells but if drilling is to be carried
out using a tender support vessel the maximum number of well slots per wellbay is
reduced to 28 and if drilling is to be done using a jackup in cantilevered mode a
maximum of 24 well slots per wellbay is used.
The manifold sizing includes spare production well slots according to the number of
connections to it as follows:
l
< 5 connections - no spare slots (minimum 2 connections)
5 to 10 connections - 1 spare slot
> 10 connections - 2 spare slots.
Multiphase metering
Multiphase meters can be added to either the production or test manifolds. When
multiphase meters are selected, they will be classified into one of three available
sizes and added to the cost sheet.
158
QUE$TORHelp
Selecting a multiphase meter on the production manifold will mean that the meter
will be sized to measure the flow from all production wells. Selecting a multiphase
meter on the test manifold will mean that the meter will be sized to measure the flow
from a single production well.
Operating pressures
QUE$TOR calculates the manifold operating pressures as follows:
l
Production & Test: 35 bara (508 psia) for oil projects and 80 bara (1160 psia)
for gas projects.
Water injection:55% of the reservoir pressure. This percentage has been set
based on an analysis of a large number of field developments where reservoir
pressure maintenance is by water injection.
Gas injection:based on the reservoir pressure, an allowance for the hydraulic
head of gas between the topsides and the reservoir, a nominal pressure drop in
the gas injection well and an overpressure to ensure the gas injection pressure at
the bottom of the tubing exceeds the reservoir pressure.
Gas lift: based on the same equation as the gas injection pressure but without the
overpressure as the gas is not being injected into the reservoir.
Well kill: equal to the reservoir pressure.
Design pressures
QUE$TOR calculates the manifold design pressures as follows:
l
Production & Test: the design pressure needs to handle an emergency

shutdown, it is therefore set to 108.5% of the calculated well shut-in pressure. For
the associated flanges, QUE$TOR selects the lowest possible standard ANSI class
with a working pressure greater than the wellhead shut-in pressure.
Water injection,Gas injection, Gas lift & Well kill: the design pressure is
set to 108.5% of the operating pressure.As with the production and test
manifolding, the associated flanges are designed for the lowest ANSI class with a
working pressure greater than the design pressure.
Manifolding lengths are calculated based on the number of platform wells and remote
risers allowing 1 m per slot with 3 m for each branch line.
Manifolding diameters are determined based on the total flow of the corresponding
fluid at the operating pressure assuming the velocity does not exceed 50% of the
erosional velocity.QUE$TOR assumes an equal productivity for all wells, both
platform and remote.
The manifold weights are calculated based on the calculated length, diameter and
design pressure and include for non-return and isolation valves.
Xmas trees are not included in this system as they are costed as part of the drilling
component.
159
QUE$TORHelp
160
QUE$TORHelp
Oil Processing
The oil processing sub-component is only available if the Production function has
been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions of oil/gas separation
equipment (separators and reboiled stabilisers), heat exchangers (heaters and
coolers) and oil treatment equipment (dehydrators and desalters).
It allows flexibility in the equipment configuration and a mass balance is performed
internally using the Peng-Robinson equation of state based on user defined operating
conditions and an inlet stream defined by the oil SG, gas molecular weight and gas/oil
ratio (specified in the Field level data).
Clicking on Oil processing in the topsides input panel opens the oil processing
window.The example shown below is specified to produce a tanker loadable i.e. fully
stabilised oil export stream.
The colour scheme in the oil processing schematic is as follows:

l
Green
Oil stream
Red
Gas stream
Blue
Water stream.
A default oil processing configuration is generated based on the feed conditions and
product specification. Stream numbers are automatically assigned to each
stream.The product specifications available are:
l
Tanker/fully stabilised
Pipeline/partially stabilised
161
QUE$TORHelp
l
Live export
Combined gas + condensate (gas/condensate projects only).
There are separate default configurations for oil projects and gas projects.
Note: All separators are 3-phase except for the live export and combined gas
condensate product specification where 2-phase separators are selected.
QUE$TOR will automatically assign a product specification by looking at the
oil/condensate export route entered in the topsides export inputs.This product
specification can be changed via the dropdown menu at the top of the screen which
will give you the option of changing the configuration to match the default for the
product specification.
If you wish to accept the default configuration click the OK button at the bottom.
However, if you wish to define your own configuration, components can be added and
deleted by using Toolbar Buttons.
To delete a component, right click on it from within the Oil processing schematic and
then select the Remove option.To add a heat exchanger or a separator, select the
point in the flow scheme where you wish to add the item (the selected line is
highlighted) then select the item from the menu bar. The item is added to the
schematic and the stream numbers automatically updated.To add a dehydrator,
desalter or reboiled stabiliser simply click the relevant button from the menu bar.
These components will appear automatically in the Oil processing schematic in a
logical position.
Note: QUE$TOR allows a maximum of three stages of separation plus a test

separator.
The stream properties can be viewed by double clicking on any stream (but not the
stream number itself). The stream dialog box will appear on screen, as shown below.
The oil volumetric flow is shown at operating conditions (@ T&P).This is typically

higher than the oil production capacity entered in the component input data form as
162
QUE$TORHelp
the production capacity is a stock tank flow, i.e. measured at atmospheric pressure
and 60 F (15.6 C).
In an oil project the default water flow is set to 10% of the oil flow at stock tank
conditions.In a gas project the default water flow is set to 1% of the condensate flow
at stock tank conditions.
QUE$TOR allows you to edit the Water flow, Temperature and Pressure in Stream
1.All other stream properties will then be recalculated when you click Close. The
flowrates and operating conditions of all other streams are calculated values and
cannot be edited. They can be manipulated by changing the operating parameters of
upstream processing units.
Note: To see the recalculated flowrates when you change the operating
conditions of stream 1 you need to edit the conditions, close the form and then
reopen it. The flowrates do not update dynamically.
By double clicking on a component in the oil processing schematic the component
data forms will appear on screen. As an example, the separator properties form is
shown below.
163
QUE$TORHelp
The type of separator type can be changed via the dropdown menu. The following
options are available:
l
3 Phase (horizontal)
2 Phase (horizontal)
2 Phase (vertical)
The Operating pressure can also be changed to recalculate the size and weight of the
vessel plus internals. Similar forms exist for heaters, coolers, dehydrators and
reboiled stabilisers.
QUE$TOR calculates the number of oil and gas separation trains based on restricting
the vessel diameter and wall thickness to 4 m (13 ft) and 100 mm (4 inch)
respectively.If either maximum is exceeded, QUE$TOR increments the number of
trains by one until both criteria are met.The Number of trains (up to a maximum of
20) can be overwritten to tailor the oil and gas separation configuration to your
specific requirements.
The Design capacity per train allows the basis for sizing each individual separator to
be adjusted. The percentage entered is applied to the flow of the inlet stream.By
default, the design capacity per train is (100/number of trains).
QUE$TOR includes a default slug volume in the first stage separator. The default is
dependent on water depth, varying from 3-5 m3.
The surge factor applies to the volumetric fluid flowrates and defaults to zero.The
separator sizing is based on the inlet liquid and gas flows increased by the surge
factor percentage.
QUE$TOR determines if an inlet heater or cooler is required, so that the first
separator can operate in a workable temperature and viscosity range. When the inlet
stream viscosity is above 20 cP, a pre-heater is added to the inlet stream and the
flow is heated to 50 C, which is assumed to be sufficient to maintain a suitable
viscosity. When the incoming stream is above 120 C a pre-cooler is added so that
the flow into the first separator is cooled to 80 C.
All input variables on the Separator details dialog box can be changed.The weight
and dimensions are recalculated dynamically.Similar forms exist for heaters,
coolers, dehydrators and reboiled stabilisers. Changes can be made to the design
variables for all items and the capacity and number of trains for heat exchangers to
recalculate the equipment size and weight as shown below.
164
QUE$TORHelp
The oil processing flow schematic and a table of the following stream properties can
be printed by clicking the printer button in the oil processing schematic toolbar;
Pressure, Temperature, Oil flow, Water flow, Gas flow, Oil SG and Gas MW
(molecular weight).
be printed by selecting the printer button in the Oil processing schematic menu bar:
165
QUE$TORHelp
Oil Export
The oil export sub-component is only available when Production has been selected, as
QUE$TOR does not include multiphase pumps.The oil export system includes pumps
and fiscal metering skids.
Clicking on Oil export in the topsides inputs panel opens the Oil Export form as
shown below. The pump power is dependent on the pressure drop along the export
pipeline and so the pipeline sizing information is also displayed.
Pipeline Sizing
The pipeline sizing information in the oil export sub-component is the same as the
pipeline sizing tab in the oil export pipeline component. Its operation is identical and
adjustments can be made to it either in the oil export sub-component or in the
Pipeline component itself. For more details on pipeline sizing see offshore pipelines.
The pipeline sizing frame allows you to resize the oil export line, or specify a
diameter and calculate the inlet or outlet pressure.This can change the pumping
requirements of the export pumps.The new pump differential pressure and power
requirement etc are automatically calculated when you change the details of the
pipeline.
166
QUE$TORHelp
l
Oil flowrate: the oil flowrate is the capacity of both the export pump and the
pipeline.The gas flowrate is set to zero and is not editable, multiphase pumps are
not currently available in QUE$TOR.
Note: It is not possible to change the length of the pipeline in this dialog box.To
do this go to the relevant pipeline link.
Details
This provides the basis for the sizing of the oil export pumps.
l
Pump differential pressure: is the difference between the suction pressure

(suction is taken from the outlet of the last oil processing unit) and the required
pipeline inlet pressure. If metering is selected, an allowance of 2.5 bar is included
for pressure losses on the metering skid. If the topsides is installed on an FPSO
then the liquids run by gravity into the storage tanks and hence no pressure drop
is included here. Offloading pumps are assumed to be included within the supply of
a new vessel or existing for a conversion.
Total pump power: the pump power is derived from capacity and pump
differential pressure, assuming 75 percent efficiency.
Metering: allows the selection of fiscal metering for the oil export stream.
Driver
There are three driver options for the oil export pump:
l
Gas engine: are typically only used in S.E. Asia and are available in sizes up to 5
MW. This will be selected by default when the S.E. Asia regional technical
database is used. Costs are not available for all regions. Gas engines will not be
available in projects with procurement strategies that do not have costs for gas
engines.
Electric motor: Electric drivers will be selected by default if the power is less
than 4 MW.electric motors are used to generate the required design power with
the power added to the demand of the topsides.
Gas turbine: Gas turbines are used to generate the required design power.This
is selected when the power is greater than 4MW. When selected the derating
factor becomes active to take into account the effect that the ambient temperature
and elevation have on the power available from the turbine driven generator.Gas
turbine drivers can be used up to 43 MW per train.
Derating Factor
This is the factor applied to the gas turbines to calculate the ISO equivalent power,
and is dependent on the ambient temperature.
167
QUE$TORHelp
Capacity
This displays the derated and design powers, along with the number of generators
and the percentage of the design power each generator is providing. Changes to the
powers, the number of generators or the percentage each is providing are
immediately reflected in the total power load and system weights.
l
Derated power: the Pump duty divided by the derating factor.

Number of pumpsspecifies the number of parallel pumps installed.This is set to
the minimum number of possible pumps. If modified, the program recalculates
the pump weight.
Design duty/pump:the capacity of each pump as a proportion to the total pump
capacity, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%.Combined with the Number of pumps this
specifies how many spare units are installed.
Note:Changing the number of pumps will also initially change the design
duty/pump, if unlocked.
Driver Model
This allows you to select the type of turbine driver and is only active when Turbine is
selected.A default is automatically selected from a number of available turbine
driver types based on the smallest driver that will provide the design power.You can
overwrite the model type via a dropdown list box, if desired.
Pump Weight
The equipment weight derived from the pump power and is the total for the specified
pump arrangement.The weight includes a skid-mounted pump and fixed-speed
motor.
Pump Driver Weight

The weight of the pump driver, as specified above.
Metering Capacity
Normally this will be the same as the export capacity except for when offshore
loading occurs.For these projects the metering capacity will be ten times the
production capacity allowing any shuttle tanker to load ten days production within 24
hours.
Metering Weight
The metering weight is based on the use of conventional fiscal turbine meters
incorporating a meter prover loop for operation within the ANSI Class 600 # rating.
168
QUE$TORHelp
Gas Processing
The gas processing sub-component is only available if the Production function has
been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions of sweetening, dehydration,
dewpointing and NGL stabilisation systems.
Clicking on Gas processing in the topsides inputs panel opens the gas processing
sub-component as shown below. This consists of a series of linked forms which
represent different gas processing unit operations (cooling, sweetening, dehydration,
dewpoint control, NGL recovery, and stabiliser). These can be turned on and off using
the check boxes. The gas processing specifications and the process used can be
changed from within the forms.
A minimum gas processing inlet pressure of 35 bar has been set in QUE$TOR in order
to reduce the diameter of the gas sweetening and gas dehydration vessels and the
loading on the dehydration unit. If the inlet pressure is less than 35 bar QUE$TOR will
automatically include booster compression to reset the inlet pressure to 35 bar. The
booster compressor duty is accommodated by reducing the export gas compression
suction pressure accordingly.
QUE$TOR chooses a default gas processing system configuration based on the
Product Gas Specifications required to achieve gas export or disposal as selected in
the Export inputs tab. This initial selection is displayed in the top right-hand corner of
the screen.
The gas processing unit operations available are:
l
Cooling.
Acid gas removal.
Dehydration.
169
QUE$TORHelp
l
Dewpoint control / NGL recovery.
Stabiliser.
The gas product specification can be modified either by selecting a new Gas product
spec. from the dropdown list or by directly editing the values in each specification.
A change in the overall Gas product spec. will automatically re-default the process
selections required to achieve that specification and reset the stream data.
If an alternative process is required to that selected automatically by QUE$TOR, this
can be selected from the dropdown list for that process unit. The minimum number of
acid gas removal, dehydration and dewpoint control trains required to process the
gas is calculated and displayed. Additional trains can be estimated by overwriting the
number shown.
At all times, a mass balance is maintained over the gas processing module and
stream data between each process unit can be displayed by clicking on the numbered
buttons. Each of the conditions may be edited on any stream and the complete gas
process module is automatically recalculated.
If any gas processing unit specification is changed click Recalc to update the unit
sizing routines.
Cooling
The gas inlet stream is cooled to assist in the dehydration of the gas stream. Cooling
is applied if the feed temperature is above 50C. Two cooling options are available:
l
Shell & tube: the coolers are based on shell and tube designs with the water on
the shell side. The required heat transfer areas for the shell and tube weights are
based on an 8C minimum approach temperature, and typically, a 20C water
temperature rise.
Fin fan: the coolers are based on fin fan, air cooled exchangers. The design is
based on 9.1m long tubes, 25.4mm diameter, 1.65mm thick on a 57mm pitch. The
number of tubes is calculated from the exchanger duty, log mean temperature
difference and an overall heat transfer coefficient calculated according to the
pressure. The weight of the exchanger includes for steel headers, tubes, plenum
and aluminium fins, fan, motor and support steel.
Acid Gas Removal

QUE$TORallows for acid gas (CO and/or H S) removal using a membrane unit
2
2
and/or a 'conventional' acid gas removal process. The membrane pretreatment and
removal unit is always upstream of any conventional acid gas removal unit.
Membrane Unit
A membrane unit is automatically included as part of the gas processing system
when:
170
QUE$TORHelp
l
The inlet gas CO content (stream #2) >= 5 mole %
The inlet gas CO content > membrane CO content
The inlet stream temperature is between 16 and 65 C (60 and 149 F)
The inlet stream pressure is between 27 and 138 bara (390 and 2000 psia)
The inlet stream flow >= 5 MMscf/d (0.142 MMsm3/d).
2
2
Notes:
1.
All of the above criteria must be satisfied before a membrane unit is included
by default.
2. The minimum CO content in the membrane unit product stream is 2 mole %. If
2
a lower value is entered it will be reset to 2 mole %.
CO Spec : the target outlet concentration of CO in the gas stream (stream #4).
2
A membrane unit consists of pre-treatment section with:

l
A coalescing filter to remove liquids/mist

A preheater to provide 11 C (20 F) superheat in a shell and tube exchanger
heating medium
A non-regenerable adsorbent guard vessel to remove trace contaminants
A particle filter to removal any dust pick up from the guard bed.
The pre-treatment system is designed for 100% of the gas flow.

The membrane unit itself consists of a large number of spiral wound cellulose acetate
elements. The elements are connected using a clamp mechanism and inserted into a
steel tube. Multiple tubes are mounted in skids, normally in a horizontal orientation.
Each tube has a single inlet but two outlets; one for the low acid gas product stream
(residue) and the other for the low pressure, typically 3.5 bara (50 psia), acid gas
rich stream (permeate).
The number of elements is dependent on the ratio of the acid gas in the inlet and
permeate streams and is influenced by the operating pressure and temperature.
Higher pressures and temperatures result in smaller units but higher hydrocarbon
losses in the permeate stream.
Only a single stage flow scheme is considered in QUE$TOR. This is normally the
preferred option when the ratio of the inlet/outlet acid gas content is <2.
Note: The ratio of CO in the membrane unit inlet and residue streams is
2
assumed to be the same as the ratio of H S in the membrane unit inlet and residue
2
streams , i.e. if the inlet CO content is 20 mole % and the membrane unit CO
2
2
residue spec is 5% then if the inlet H S content is 1600 ppmv the membrane unit H S
2
2
residue stream will contain 400 ppmv.
171
QUE$TORHelp

A conventional acid gas unit is automatically included as part of the gas processing
system when:
l
The inlet gas CO content (stream #2) < 5 mole % and the inlet gas
2
CO content > Gas product spec. CO content
2
The H S content in the sales gas is > H S content in the membrane

2
2
unit permeate stream.
Spec : the target outlet concentration of the CO and H S.

2
The process frame contains the alternative processes for acid gas removal using
along with the Number of trains and the Design capacity/train of these systems.
There are six process options in the dropdown list:
l
Amine, (MEA, DEA or MDEA)
Physical solvents (Selexol)
Combination (Sulfinol)
Solid bed (Zinc oxide adsorption).
The default selection is dependent on the quantities of H S and CO to be removed. If

2
2
the gas flow does not exceed 50 MMscf/d, no CO removal is required and the daily
2
quantity of H S removed is less 60 kg then a zinc oxide process is selected by
2
default. For other gas flows and quantities of H S and CO the choice is dependent on
2
2
whether there is Simultaneous H S and CO removal, H S removal only or CO
2
2
2
2
removal only.
Amine and Sulfinol units are assumed to contain the same process equipment items
namely: inlet scrubber, contactor and regeneration unit. The Selexol unit is similar
except that the regeneration unit contains three flash drums. A reboiled stripping
column assumed to be electrically heated, is required only if H S is being removed.
2
The zinc oxide process uses solid beds to adsorb H S from the gas (CO is
2
2
unaffected) and must be regularly regenerated. This is normally performed offsite by
the zinc oxide vendor who will replace the spent material.
The contactor column used in solvent (amine or physical) process is sized based on
the gas throughput and is unaffected by the solvent circulation rate. The diameter is
calculated using the formula:
where:
D = contactor diameter (m)
Qg = actual gas flow at operating conditions (m3/s)
172
QUE$TORHelp
= gas density at operating conditions (kg/m3)
g
= solvent/density (kg/m3)
l
M = design margin of 1.3

= gas load factor, 0.055 for bubble cap trays and 0.1 for structured packing.
The height of the contactor is based on 14 theoretical trays and a tray efficiency of
60% for bubble cap trays. For structured packing an equivalent transfer unit height is
calculated based on the gas density and a specific area of packing equal to 250
m2/m3.
The regeneration unit is calculated from the circulation rate of solvent (Amine,
Selexol or Sulfinol) required to achieve the acid gas removal, see Solvent Data for
further details.
A flash vessel is included if the operating pressure is greater than 30 bar. Otherwise
solvent is fed directly to the regeneration column via the solvent/solvent
interchanger. For Selexol, two further flash vessels are included bringing the
pressure down to 1.5 bar in the LP flash tank, this flashes the CO from the Selexol.
2
For amines, Sulfinol and in cases where Selexol is used to remove H S as well as
2
CO , a reboiled stripping column is used to regenerate the solvent. Overhead gases
2
from the stripper are routed to the sulphur recovery unit if present. Lean solvent is
pumped back to the contactor column via the solvent/solvent interchanger and trim
cooler. If the contactor operating pressure is greater than 50 bar, then hydraulic
turbines recover some of the pressure drop lost between the contactor and
regeneration section. In the amine systems, a 20% slipstream flows through a
cartridge filter and an activated carbon filter pre- and post-cooling. A sump/storage
vessel provides surge volume in operation and a drain point in case of process upset.
For small gas flows where relatively small amounts of H S require removal from the
2
gas, a solid bed process will prove to be more economic than a solvent-based
process. Therefore zinc oxide beds are offered as an alternative process within
QUE$TOR.
The system requires 5 kg of zinc oxide per kg of H S removed and is based on
2
replacing the zinc oxide every 60 days. The system includes adsorber(s) and an
after-filter. No on-site regeneration is included.
Any tail gas from the Acid gas removal unit is flared. Sulphur is not recovered.
l
Number of trains: specifies the number of parallel trains installed.

Design capacity / train: allows the basis for sizing each individual train to be
adjusted. The percentage entered is applied to the flow of the inlet stream. By
default, the design capacity per train is (100/Number of trains).
Dehydration
The two options available are:
173
QUE$TORHelp
l
Molecular sieve
Tri-ethylene glycol contacting with a choice of regeneration systems
(conventional, stripping gas, Cold Finger, Drizo).
The Default Dehydration Process is based on the water dewpoint temperature at the
dehydration unit conditions.
The quantity of molecular sieve required to dehydrate the gas is based on the amount
of water in the feed stream (all water present will be removed).
Each train is composed of three adsorption vessels operating with two on line and one
being regenerated. Each adsorber operates cyclically with 8 hours on line followed by
4 hours regeneration. Regeneration takes 10% of the dry gas, heats it in a fired
heater, and backflows through the off-line adsorber. Hot gas picks up the water from
the molecular sieve bed and is returned to the feed stream after being cooled and
free water knocked out.
The required TEG concentration is calculated based on the dewpoint depression
specified, with water content of the saturated feed gas and dry gas conforming to
data given in GPSA.
The TEG contactor column is gas phase sized based on a trayed column with between
4 and 12 trays calculated from the lean glycol concentration required and the
effective fraction of dehydration,
where:
Y
= water content wet gas
= water content dry gas
in
out
= effective fraction of dehydration

QUE$TOR then completes a mass and energy balance around the system using
recovery factors for each of the components calculated on the conditions in the low
temperature separator. Heat is assumed to be recovered from both the cold gas and
cold liquid streams. A 15C and 10C approach temperature respectively is assumed
in these exchangers.
The glycol regeneration unit is sized based on the glycol circulation rate with
adjustments for each method of achieving the required purity. The TEG circulation
rate is 0.036m3/kg of water removed. A conventional regeneration unit includes a
reboiled still, surge drum, flash tank, filters, glycol/glycol exchanger and glycol trim
cooler. An electric heater is assumed to provide the heating duty. To achieve higher
lean glycol purities, additional equipment is required.
l
Stripping gas: An additional stripping column between the surge drum and the
reboiler which uses fuel gas to strip water from the glycol.
174
QUE$TORHelp
l
Cold finger: A cooling coil located in the surge drum which condenses water from
the gas phase above the liquid glycol. This acts as an additional theoretical stage
in the separation.
Drizo: Uses a solvent wash system to improve the purity of lean glycol. The
solvent is composed of C + components normally absorbed by the glycol from the
5
gas stream. Additional vessels are required to condense overhead vapours and
recover the solvent.
Dewpoint Control
The dewpoint control unit achieves the removal of heavier hydrocarbons by chilling
the gas. The options available are:
Refrigeration (Propane)
JT valve
Turbo-expander/recompressor unit.
In order to calculate the amount of liquids recovery a Gas Composition Based on
Molecular Weight is assumed for the inlet gas.
By default, refrigeration will be selected for low pressure units (<40 bar) and a JT
valve to achieve the gas reinjection specification. Turbo-expanders are used to
achieve pipeline, gas grid or LNG specifications provided that the flow is greater than
50 MMScfd. Below this JT valves are used and QUE$TOR checks that there is enough
pressure to achieve the dewpoint specification then sets a minimum pressure in the
low temperature separator of 20 bar. If the specification cannot be met through the
JT valve or turbo-expander alone, then a refrigeration unit will be added upstream of
the valve or turbo-expander.
The weight for the refrigeration unit includes for a two stage propane loop and
includes the compressor, condenser and flash drum. QUE$TOR calculates the
required refrigeration loop pressures allowing a 10C approach temperature between
the propane evaporation and the required process.
The weight of the JT valve is not specified separately from the exchangers and low
temperature separator. The exchangers are assumed to be aluminium plate fin
exchangers up to an operating pressure of 100 barg and shell and tube exchangers
above this. The low temperature separator is a vertical vessel including a demister
pad for efficient liquids removal.
To achieve higher levels of liquids recovery a turbo-expander is used to reduce the
temperature and provide pressure recovery.
The recompressor discharge pressure is calculated using the following equation:
where:
P
= recompressor discharge pressure (bar)
= turbo-expander outlet pressure (bar)
r
out
175
QUE$TORHelp
P
in
= turbo-expander inlet pressure (bar)
An upstream scrubber is used to prevent liquids knocked out in the gas/gas

exchanger from entering the expander.
The minimum pressure in the low temperature separator for either the JT valve or
Expander options is set to 20 bar. If the required temperature cannot be met by
reducing the pressure to 20 bar, a chiller and propane refrigeration unit is installed
upstream to cool the gas before pressure reduction.
Stabiliser
The stabiliser is used to remove lighter components from the NGL to produce a
bottom liquids product of dead condensate suitable for injecting into an
oil/condensate pipeline. The overhead stream is a fuel gas stream (C and lighter
3
components). The operating pressure of the stabiliser is 8 bara.
Metering
Fiscal metering of the gas using orifice plates is automatically included if there is gas
export. If gas is re-injected or flared there is no fiscal metering. The weight includes
the metering skid and meter prover.
176
QUE$TORHelp
Gas Compression
The gas compression sub-component is only available if the Compression function
has been selected. It calculates the weights of all the topsides compression facilities,
including flash gas, export, injection and lift gas compression.
Clicking on Gas compression in the topsides inputs panel opens the Gas
compression form.

The gas compression form contains the details of all of the gas compressors on the
topsides. There are four classifications of compressors, the default selection is
dependent on your oil processing set-up and the selected gas export options.
Flash gas
Flash gas compression will be selected by default if you have multiple stages within
oil processing. The flash gas compressors take the off-gas from the second and third
stages of separation and compresses it back up to the first stage separation pressure.
177
QUE$TORHelp
Export gas
Export gas compression will be selected by default if there is a gas flowrate entered
within the Export / flared gas entry within the primary inputs of the topsides and you
don't have Flare / fuel / two-phase selected in the Export tab. Export gas
compression takes the gas coming out of gas processing and compresses the gas to
the export pipeline inlet pressure.
This inlet pressure of the pipeline is dependent on the pipeline details. To allow easy
adjustment of the pipeline size, in optimising the balance of compressor/pipeline
cost, you can access the export pipeline sizing routine by clicking on Pipeline
sizing. An allowance of an extra 1 bar is included if gas metering is selected in gas
processing, to allow for pressure drop across the metering skid.
Gas lift
Gas lift compression will be selected by default if there is a gas flowrate entered
within the Gas lift entry within the primary inputs of the topsides. The gas lift
compressors take the gas coming out of the export gas compressors and compress
the gas to the operating pressure set within the gas lift manifold, with an allowance
for the pressure drop over the aftercooler. If export gas compression is not selected
then the suction pressure is taken from the outlet stream from gas processing.
Gas injection
Gas injection compression will be selected by default if there is a gas flowrate
entered within the Gas injection entry within the primary inputs of the topsides. The
gas injection compressors take the gas coming out of the export gas compressors
and compress the gas to the operating pressure set within the gas injection manifold,
with an allowance for the pressure drop over the aftercooler. If export gas
compression is not selected then the suction pressure is taken from the outlet stream
from gas processing.
Compressor Sizing
The sizing of each of the compressors is based around the same algorithm, with the
flowrates and pressures determined as described above.
Note:You may have to click Recalc in order to see any changes made fully
applied.
Compressor type
There are two compressor options available in QUE$TOR: centrifugal and
reciprocating. The compressor type will influence the required compression power
and the drivers available. QUE$TOR always defaults to centrifugal compressors.
178
QUE$TORHelp
Number of stages
The number of compression stages is calculated from the suction and discharge
pressure assuming a maximum compression ratio of 3 per stage. This can be
adjusted to an integer value from 1-4.
Note: the number of stages only influences the gas compression power.
QUE$TOR does not calculate a weight for each stage of compression.
Power
The power for gas export, lift and injection compressors is based on the molecular
weight of the gas out of gas processing.The flash gas compressor molecular weight
is a weighted average based on the 1st 2nd and 3rd stage separator gas flows and
molecular weights.
Derated power
A derating factor is applied to any gas turbine drivers duty to allow for reduced
efficiencies at ambient air temperatures above 60F (15.6C).This factor can be
overwritten and the derated power recalculated if desired.
The derated power is the calculated power divided by the derating factor.For electric
motor or gas engine driven compressors the derated power is greyed out as it is not
applicable.
Specifies the number of parallel compressors installed. Changing the training
assumption will also initially change the design duty/compressor, if unlocked. By
default, export compressors have a spare compressor e.g. 3 x 50%, as the export
gas is assumed to be a revenue stream.All other compressor sets have no spare by
default e.g. 2 x 50%.
The percentage shown is the capacity of each compressor compared to the design
quantity, e.g. 100%, 50%, 33%.Combined with the number of compressors this
Driver type
The available compressor drivers depends upon the compressor type selected. For
centrifugal compressors, an electric motor or gas turbine driver can be selected. For
reciprocating compressors, an electric motor or gas engine driver can be selected.
Default selection is electric for gas compression powers up to 4MW; with a gas
turbine or gas engine selected above 4 MW. The limit for electric drivers is 5 MW per
train, for gas engines it's 18 MW per train and gas turbine drivers can be used up to
43 MW per train.
179
QUE$TORHelp
Driver model
If Turbine is selected, a dropdown box will be active displaying the name of the
lowest rated driver selected by QUE$TOR to provide or exceed the derated
power.Alternative drivers may be selected from the dropdown list.
Driver rating
The driver rating is the ISO power output, i.e. power output at 60F (15.6C) for the
selected gas turbine and is displayed for information only.
Pipeline Sizing
The pipeline sizing form, is only available for the Export gas compressor. Clicking on
Pipeline sizing will open the gas export pipeline form, shown below.
This form allows you to resize the gas export line, which will alter the pressure drop
along it and change the power requirements of the export compressor(s).The layout
and operation is identical to the Pipeline sizing tab in the gas export Pipeline
component.Adjustments to the line can be made here or in the pipeline component
itself.For more details on pipeline sizing see offshore pipelines.
The new compressor outlet pressure, and thus sizing, are automatically calculated
when you click OK and exit the form.
Note: It is not possible to change the length of the pipeline in this dialog box.
To do this go to the relevant pipeline link.
180
QUE$TORHelp
Coolers
We assume a maximum compression ratio of 3 per stage, with all stages located on
the same shaft. If required, two interstage cooler options are available:
l
the shell side.A 20C water temperature rise and a 10C minimum approach
temperature is used to calculate the required heat transfer areas for shell and
tube weights.
based on 9.1m long tubes, 25.4mm diameter, 1.65mm thick on a 57mm pitch.The
number of tubes is calculated from the exchanger duty, log mean temperature
pressure.The weight of the exchanger includes for steel headers, tubes, plenum
Weights
The weights of compressors, scrubbers and coolers required for each system are
displayed. The compressor weight includes a skid-mounted package containing the
driver, the compressor(s), base plate, seal and lube oil systems, inlet and exhaust
systems for gas turbine drivers.
If the default inputs are adjusted click Recalc to update the driver type and
compressor set weights.
181
QUE$TORHelp
Water Injection
The water injection sub-component is only available if the water injection capacity is
greater than zero in the topsides primary inputs.Water injection sizes the pumps
used to inject the water.
Clicking on Water injection in the topsides inputs panel opens the water injection
form.
182
QUE$TORHelp
Details
This provides the basis for the sizing of the water injection pumps.
l
Water injection pump capacity: the water flowrate which the pump will be
designed to handle. It is set by the flowrates on the Primary tab.
Water injection delivery pressure: the required water injection pressure
which is set from the water injection manifold operating pressure.
Water injection pump duty: the pumping power to raise the water from the
feed pressure to the delivery pressure, this is calculated assuming a pump
efficiency of 70%.
Note: the water injection feed pressure is set to 0 bara to allow for water
treatment in the vacuum deaerator.
Driver
l
Electric motor:electric motors are used to generate the required design power
with the power added to the demand of the production facility. Electric drivers will
be selected by default if the power is less than 4 MW.
Gas turbine:gas turbines are used to generate the required design power. This is
selected when the power is greater than 4 MW. Gas turbine drivers can be used up
to 44 MW per train.
Derating factor: for electric motors no derating is applied. If a gas turbine
driver has been selected then the maximum monthly average air temperature
(Derating based on) is displayed as this affects the derating factor applied to the
gas turbine ISO equivalent power. The temperature can't be revised on this form
but can using the Design conditions input tab if required.
Derated power: the Water injection pump duty divided by the Derating factor.
Number of pumps: specifies the number of parallel pumps installed. This is set
to the minimum number of possible pumps. If modified, the program recalculates
the pump weight.
Design duty/pump: the capacity of each pump as a proportion to the total pump
capacity, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the Number of pumps this
Driver model: This allows you to select the model of turbine driver and is only
active when Gas turbine is selected. A default is automatically selected from a
number of available turbine driver types based on the smallest driver that will
provide the derated power.You can overwrite the turbine type via a dropdown list
box, if desired.
Driver rating: This is the ISOrating of the selected model of gas turbine.
183
QUE$TORHelp
Note: Changing the number of pumps will also initially change the design
Configuration
This specifies what treatment the water has prior to injection.There are three types
of treatment available, which can be selected independently.
l
Vacuum deaerator:uses a vacuum column and vacuum pump to achieve a

residual oxygen in water content of 5 ppm (after addition of oxygen scavenger).
This would not be required if produced (de-oxygenated) water is being reinjected.
Sulphate removal: If selected then a sulphate removal (SR) package is included
to prevent sulphate ions in the seawater forming barium and strontium sulphate
resulting in scale deposits when seawater and formation water combine. Two
water filtration options are available upstream of the main sulphate removal
membrane package;
l
Ultrafiltration incorporating an ultrafiltration membrane system and a

Cleaning-In-Place (CIP) system - default for a Topsides facility
A cartridge filter and media filtration package.
The sulphate removal package includes feed pumps to provide the necessary inlet
pressure to the 2 stage sulphate removal membrane system along its own CIP
system and a chemicals dosing system. Seawater leaving the SR unit (the permeate)
will typically have a residual sulphate ion concentration of 30-40 mg/l. The reject
water stream is typically 25% of the flow entering the SR unit therefore for a given
water injection rate the seawater supply requirements for water injection are
automatically increased by 33%.
l
Fine filters: fine filtration using sandfilters (with automatic backwashing).
Weight
The weights displayed are the total dry weights for all the pumps, pump drivers plus
the , vacuum deaerator, sulphate removal, filtration and fine filtration packages.
184
QUE$TORHelp
Custom Equipment
The custom equipment feature is designed to allow you to add additional equipment
items to the topsides.
Clicking on Custom equipment in the topsides inputs panel opens the custom
equipment form.
The custom equipment form allows you to add, remove custom equipment items, and
also select the order in which you want them to appear on the cost sheet.
To add an item of custom equipment, click on the Add button, a custom equipment
item will now appear in the left side of the form.
185
QUE$TORHelp
The newly created custom equipment item can now be specified. To edit the item,
either select the desired item and click Edit or double click on the item. This will open
the custom equipment item details.
186
QUE$TORHelp
You can now specify the details of the custom equipment item, so that it can be fully
integrated into the topsides calculations.
General
These items determine the values that will be shown on the cost sheet and follow the
standard cost sheet format.
l
Name: the name of the item. This will be the used in the custom equipment form,
the cost sheet, the equipment list and all reports.
Quantity and Unit rate: the costs within QUE$TOR are generally based on a
simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship.These entries allow this to be
defined for the custom equipment item.

The weight of the equipment items are the key drivers to the bulk materials weights,
utilities estimates and operating weight (offshore only). To allow your custom
equipment item to integrate into these calculations, you can select the existing item
of equipment that it gives the best approximation of how this item should be handled.
There are eight options: Manifolding, Vessels, Heat exchangers - fin fan, Heat
exchangers - shell and tube, Pumps, Columns, Compressors and Package. If your
custom equipment item includes the majority of the bulk materials associated with
the system then you should select the Package option. Only primary and secondary
steel bulk materials will be included for your item when this option is selected.
Utilities
The heating and cooling medium requirements of the custom equipment is entered
here, which is then added to the utilities calculation.
Power
You can specify the power requirement for the item of equipment and it will be picked
up in the required loads in the power sub-component.
Civils
This is only relevant for onshore components.
When you are happy with the equipment item, click OK and the changes will be
applied.
Cost sheet
Each custom equipment item will be added to the cost sheet, after the water injection
costs.
187
QUE$TORHelp
You can edit the quantity and unit rate of the item on the cost sheet, the default will
be based on the value entered in the custom equipment item form.
Example
This feature has been designed to cover a number of items that you may want to
include within QUE$TOR for which there is currently no input. Some examples of such
items are: Pig launchers and receivers, subsea control systems and membrane based
sulphate removal systems for seawater injection. The example below shows how
these three items can be added.
Note: the costs and weights used in this example are purely for illustrative
purposes only and should not provide a basis for your estimate.
The cost will appear on the cost sheet in the selected order. The arrow buttons on the
right hand side can be used to change the items' order. The details of the sulphate
removal system are shown below:
188
QUE$TORHelp
The name, quantity and unit rate desired have been entered at the top of the form. As
sulphate removal is by a membrane based system, it has been chosen that the
system should be treated as per vessels in the calculations of the bulk materials,
utilities and operating weight. The heating and cooling medium estimates have been
entered. All of this data will be used as per any other equipment item.
Cost sheet
These new items will be added to the cost sheet in the order in which they appear on
the custom equipment form.
The weights and unit rates of these items can also be adjusted on the cost sheet.
189
QUE$TORHelp

You can build up a library of custom equipment items which can be used across all
projects. Once you have created a custom equipment item, it can be added to the
library by clicking Store selected item in library.
To add an item from the library click Add item from library, this will open the
custom equipment library, shown below.
To add the item to your project, select the required item and click OK.
Note: custom equipment items are not transferable between onshore and
offshore components.
Items can be deleted from the library using the Manage library button.
190
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on Control and communications in the topsides inputs panel opens the
form.Control and communications allows selection of the process control system and
remote monitoring as well as on and off platform communications options. The
program default selection is based on the topsides configuration and systems
selected.
For monitoring and control and telemetry system the option buttons allow one choice.
For on-platform communications and off-platform communications the check boxes
allow one or more choices.
Monitoring and Control

Four options are available, the default is based on the size and complexity of the
platform and processing functions. Each option includes for main process/utility
control, ESD, fire & gas and associated interface panels.
l
None: Assumes no monitoring or control systems. This should be selected for

living quarter only platforms.
Basic local control: Suitable for small unmanned platforms or wellhead
platforms
Conventional control room: Suitable for medium-sized platforms where one
centralised control room is required
Distributed control system: Suitable for the larger platform where a main
control room and several local equipment rooms are necessary.This is especially
so where large modules are to be pre-commissioned onshore before loadout and
installation.
191
QUE$TORHelp
Telemetry System
Three options are available, the default depends on whether the platform operates as
a stand-alone facility or as a satellite from another platform or onshore.
l
None: Assumes no telemetry systems. This should be selected for living quarter
only platforms.
Remote monitoring only: Suitable where some remote indication of the status
of systems is required either on another platform or onshore
Remote monitoring and control: Suitable where both remote monitoring and
control of the platform systems are required from an adjacent platform or
onshore.
On-Platform Communications
Three possible choices are available, the default depends on whether or not the
platform is manned.
l
Operational voice radio: Automatically included for all options.This is for onand off- platform communications and includes statutory emergency radios, P.A.
system, etc
Entertainment and TV: Automatically included where accommodation has been
selected for the topsides
PABX telephones etc.: Appropriate for platform communications.It may not be
required on small platforms such as simple wellheads.
Off-Platform Communications
Choose between options for the method of communication to other platforms and to
shore.
l
Cable: Selection of this item assumes that off-platform communications are

handled by a bridge-connected platform or via a control umbilical
Microwave Radio: This selection assumes that off-platform communications are
handled using a microwave link.This method of communication is limited to line of
sight, i.e. to a distance of approximately 30 km
Satellite: This assumes that a satellite system will be used to handle the offplatform communications.
It should be noted that the total cost in the cost estimate is not weight related, but
dependent on the form selections.
192
QUE$TORHelp
Drilling Facilities
Clicking on Drilling facilities in the topsides inputs panel opens the Drilling facilities
form.This allows specification of the drilling facilities installed on a platform during
the drilling activities.
Rig details
The choice of drilling type is an economic one depending on the number of wells, the
frequency and complexity of well workover requirements, and the day rates currently
being charged for the lease of tender support drilling vessel.
Rig type: The following three options are available for performing drilling activities
on a fixed platform:
l
Fixed platform (full) - a permanently installed self-contained drilling rig. This is

the default configuration if the drilling function is selected in the topsides,
functions input panel unless the attached Drilling component rig type is Fixed
platform (with TSV).
Fixed platform (TSV) - a skidded rig which is installed only during drilling
periods which relies on a temporarily bridge-linked tender-assisted semisubmersible rig for mud handling, consumables and utilities. Selecting tenderassisted drilling will reduce the drilling rig weight included in the platform
estimate. QUE$TOR assumes a skidded rig is purchased as part of the Topsides
capital cost but the cost for the tender-assist vessel and its utility systems are
included in the Drilling component.
193
QUE$TORHelp
l
Fixed platform (workover) - a permanently installed self-contained workover

rig. This should be selected if the wells are being drilled by a leased rig but
frequent workovers will be required during field life.
Number of rigs
This option allows the choice of one or two drill rigs.
By default the number of platform rigs is one for up to 40 wells and two for >40
wells.
Maximum measured depth

This is the measured depth from the rig floor of the longest well for any linked
Drilling component drilled using the topsides drill rig.It includes an allowance for the
freeboard height. This is used to calculate the rig dry weight.
Power
There are two power options:
l
Self contained - the drilling facilities are isolated and include their own
dedicated power generation units.
Integrated - the drilling facilities are integrated with the topsides and power is
supplied from the platform generators.
Power requirement: this is displayed only if the integrated power option is

selected and is used to populate the Drilling power load in the Topsides, Power
form.
Weights
l
Dry weight: the weight of all the drilling facilities on the platform excluding all
operating weights, i.e. fluids and drilling materials. This is dependent on the rig
type and the maximum measured depth. The weight increases in a step function
as the maximum measured depth increases reflecting standard rig designs based
on the maximum drilled depth.
Operating weight factor: the dry weight is multiplied by this factor to calculate
the operating weight of the drill rig and associated equipment. It varies by rig type
and when a full rig is selected by the reservoir pressure gradient, i.e. reservoir
pressure/true vertical depth of deepest well.
If the drilling rig is to be leased and not purchased, the drilling facilities unit rate on
the cost sheet should be manually set to zero. This ensures that adequate support
steel is included in the platform design to accommodate the later addition of the
skidded rig.
194
QUE$TORHelp
Note:In this case the day rate for drill rig in the drilling component must be
manually updated to include for the lease of a skid-on rig.Allowance will also need to
be made in the drilling component for transporting the rig out to the platform.
To allow for cantilever drilling, drilling facilities should not be selected in the topsides
input panel as neither equipment nor support steel is required on the platform.
The weight for a drill rig is dependent on the maximum measured depth within an
associated drilling component and is based on a modularised package including,
typically, the derrick package (comprising derrick, derrick substructure, top drive,
drill floor, dog house, turntable, crown block, etc), piperack, drill string/bits, mud
pumps/consumable storage/mud mixers, Koomey unit, handling equipment and
utilities to support the drilling equipment. The utilities include power generation
requirements (diesel driven DC units), high pressure air and drill water
system/storage facilities.If two drill rigs are chosen then the rigs share the same
mud handling and utility systems.
The workover rig is specified similarly to the full drilling rig although some systems
are designed smaller as needed for workover activities, this includes the derrick,
derrick substructure, top drive, piperack, mud handling systems. utilities and power.
For the tender-assisted drilling option, the derrick package (comprising derrick,
derrick structure, top drive, drill floor, dog house, turntable, crown block, etc),
piperack and drill strings/bits are included on the platform. All other items are
assumed to be supplied from the tender support vessel including utilities and power.
195
QUE$TORHelp
Quarters
The Quarters sub-component calculates the weights of the quarters and the
helideck.If the Quarters function is not selected in the topsides input panel an
emergency shelter is included.
Clicking on Quarters in the topsides inputs panel opens the accommodation and
helideck form.There are four different forms for the quarters depending on the
topsides configuration selected.If quarters is selected on a jacket, GBS, TLP or spar
substructure then the quarters is considered to be a self-contained module.This
includes all recreational facilities, laundry, messing, office, arrival/departures
facilities (including helideck), HVAC, washing facilities and power distribution.The
weight includes all modular steel, architectural materials and associated bulks and
hence no additional bulks except module support frame steel and primary steel are
calculated.
If quarters is not selected on a jacket or GBS then the option to include a lighter
helicopter deck and temporary safe refuge (TSR) is provided. If a lightweight
substructure has been selected a lightweight aluminium helideck can be included.
Existing facilities
For converted tankers, ship shape tankers and converted semi-submersibles it is
assumed that some accommodation already exists. The level of the existing
accommodation and a helideck is shown in this frame and can be modified as needed.
196
QUE$TORHelp
Number of beds
The number of beds is based on the manning requirement with an allowance for the
any existing beds. If there are any existing beds then the existing accommodation
can be upgraded.
Cabin size
The form allows you to choose between one-man, two-man and four-man cabins. The
default cabin size is regional based on typical operators practices.
Helideck
The helideck size is based on the size of helicopter that it can handle. A medium
helideck is assumed to the capable handling a helicopter that can transport up to 12
men. For larger helicopters you should select the large helideck option.
Platforms with No Quarters

Where no quarters have been included, the emergency shelter & helideck form is
displayed.This allows inclusion of a small lightweight helicopter deck (suitable for
Bell 212 helicopters or equivalent) and an emergency shelter to be included.This
shelter will normally also house the radio communications centre and any control
room functions required during maintenance visits.
197
QUE$TORHelp
Manning
Clicking on Manning opens the manning form. The crew requirements are estimated
by referencing the process systems incorporated and number of trains for separation,
gas processing, compression, etc.
A breakdown between base crew (OIM, Radio Operator, Safety Officer), operations
staff and maintenance staff is made.The operations staff level also reflects the level
of control chosen. Added to this is the drill crew if permanent platform rigs are used
and a marine crew for tankers and semi-submersible operation.Additional crew are
provided for catering and cleaning.The day and night crew levels are specified;
which are added together to give the total crew level. Spare beds are provided for
visitors. The total number of beds is simply the total crew level plus the number of
spare beds.
The tender-assisted drilling option assumes that drilling personnel are located on the
tender assist vessel and therefore no allowance is included in the accommodation
calculation.
The quarters weight and helideck weight are combined and the total is added to the
cost estimate.
198
QUE$TORHelp
Process Utilities
The Process utilities sub-component calculates the weights of all the topsides utilities
systems. Clicking on Process utilities in the topsides inputs opens the process
utilities form as shown below.
The utility systems required are based on the defined process systems and
substructure type.For GBS substructures, some utilities, such as seawater lift and
firewater pumps are included in the shafts. For certain FPSOs and converted semisubmersibles it is assumed that storage, firewater pumps, cranes, lifeboats and
some power generation could supplied with the vessel. If the systems of these
substructures are integrated with the topsides then there will be no weight for these
items here.
199
QUE$TORHelp
Systems can be added or removed using the check boxes.

These are the utilities directly required by the process systems. For the majority of
these utility systems the design capacities are calculated based on the utility
requirements of the process. Adjusting the design capacity will lead to a change in
the weight.
l
Produced water: For clean-up of the produced water from the process
separation systems, prior to discharging overboard. The weight includes for an HP
hydrocyclone, an MP hydrocyclone, a produced water flash drum and oil water
recycle pumps.
Heating medium: Used when heating is required to meet the vapour pressure
specification of exported oil or condensate, or to aid the separation of oil or
condensate from water.The heating medium flowrate is calculated in the oil
processing module based on the required heat duty of the process. The weight
includes for a fired heater package, a heating medium make-up tank, a heating
medium make-up pump, an expansion vessel and heating medium circulation
pumps.
Cooling medium: Required to cool oil or condensate prior to export and for
compression inter- and aftercooling if a shell and tube heat exchanger
configuration has been selected. The weight includes for a closed circuit cooling
water (CCCW) expansion/make-up tank, seawater/CCCW exchangers and CCCW
circulation pumps.
Flare and vent: The weight includes for an HP flare drum, HP flare drum pumps,
an LP flare drum, LP flare drum pumps, a vent KO drum, HP flare tip, LP flare tip,
vent tip, a flare ignition package and a halon snuffing system.
Seawater lift: Provides the seawater required for cooling, injection to wells and
potable water manufacture. Water for seawater injection is taken off downstream
of seawater cooling users. The weight includes for seawater lift pumps, a
chlorination package and a coarse seawater filter package.
Fuel gas: Provided to dry and filter process gas prior to use in turbines or by
other platform users.The weight includes for a fuel gas KO drum, a fuel gas
heater and fuel gas filters.
Chemical injection and storage: Required for chemical injection to wellheads,
oil and gas processing, gas compression and water injection systems. The weight
is calculated on the chemical injection and storage form.
General Utilities
l
Closed drains: For collecting hydrocarbon drainage from pressurised and

hazardous equipment.The weight includes for a closed drains vessel, closed drain
pumps, a reclaimed oil tank and a reclaimed oil returns pump.
200
QUE$TORHelp
l
Open drains: Separate systems for treatment of deck drains from hazardous and
non-hazardous areas. The weight includes for an oily water tank, an oily water
returns pump, a non-hazardous open drains caisson with associated returns pump,
a hazardous open drains caisson with associated returns pump and an oily water
separation tank.
Diesel storage: Provides the means to transfer raw diesel from a supply boat to
the platform and removes water and solid impurities to meet specification for use
in cranes, fire pumps, emergency generators and drilling equipment. The weight
includes for raw diesel storage, transfer pumps, a centrifuge, filter/coalescer and
a treated diesel storage tank.
Aviation fuel: Required solely for helicopter refuelling. The system includes a
fuel storage tank, pumps, filters and hoses.
Instrument and plant air: For providing high quality instrument air and lower
quality plant air. The weight includes for a common compressor, instrument air
filter, instrument air dryer, instrument air receiver and plant air receiver.
Inert gas: Provides inert gas for purging and blanketing operations. The weight
includes for an inert gas generation package, and receivers.
Potable water: Supplies potable water for personnel use, safety showers and
eyebaths. The weight includes for a seawater booster pump, filters, reverse
osmosis desalinisation unit, palatability unit, UV sterilizer, holding tank and sterile
storage tank.
Sewage treatment: Provided to treat all domestic sewage generated on the
platform. The sewage is comminuted and chlorinated before discharging from the
platform. The weight includes for comminutors (macerators), a surge tank and
pumps.
Firefighting: The weight includes for dedicated lift pumps (diesel driven),
firewater lift caissons, diesel day tanks, firewater jockey pumps, hose reels plus
monitors and hydrants.
Other: Will never be selected by default but gives you the ability to add additional
utility systems that QUE$TOR has not otherwise accounted for.
Ancillaries
l
Mechanical handling: Includes all platform cranes and local lifting devices.
HVAC: Provided for all enclosed modules.
Lifeboats: Freefall lifeboats dependent on the number of personnel or additional

beds if the topsides are on a semi-submersible or a tanker.
201
QUE$TORHelp
Chemical Injection
Injection of chemicals can be added into the process topsides or subsea flow lines.
The weight of the chemical injection systems is based upon the storage requirements
for the chemicals and the number and size of dosing pumps required.
The dosage level can be selected from the drop down (None, Low, Medium or High)
selection to give an expected dosage rate for the corresponding chemical or
alternatively a dosage rate in ppm can be specified directly.
The chemical injection usage is based upon the oil, gas, produced water or injected
water capacity flow rates for each of the chemical categories. The storage capacity
and OPEX is calculated on the assumption that there will be 28 days storage of
chemicals on the topsides and a resupply will occur every 14 days.
Chemicals that can be added to enable the oil processing are configured on the oil
processing tab. The dosage rate is based upon the oil in stream 1 in oil processing
or if that is not available upon the topsides primary oil capacity.
l
Defoamer: Defoamer chemicals are added to the topsides feed to prevent foam
from occurring in the first stage separator. A dosage rate between 5 and 150 ppm
can be selected from the dosage level drop down. The medium dosage of 50 ppm
will be selected when the production option is selected on the topsides and the
weight includes 4 dosing pumps.
Demulsifier: To help separate the water from oil emulsion breakers can be
added to the process. A dosage rate between 10 and 500 ppm can be selected
from the dosage level drop down. The medium dosage of 80 ppm will be selected
when the production option is selected on the topsides and the weight includes 5
dosing pumps.
Scale inhibitor: Scale inhibitor can be added but is not selected as a default.
Low, medium or high dosage rates of 1, 15, 40 ppm can be selected and when
active includes 2 dosing pumps.
202
QUE$TORHelp
l
Corrosion inhibitor: Corrosion inhibitor can be added but is not selected as a

default. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 3, 8, 30 ppm can be selected and
when active includes 3 dosing pumps.
Pour point depressant: Pour point depressant can be added but is not selected
as a default. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 40, 100, 500 ppm can be
selected and includes 3 dosing pumps.
Other (oil): Addition of other chemicals for dosing the oil flow can be added to
the chemical injection input form and is not selected by default. Low, medium or
high dosage rates of 1, 20, 50 ppm can be selected and when active includes 2
dosing pumps.
Chemicals that can be added to enable the water injection are configured on the
water injection tab. The dosage rate for the chemicals is based upon the water
injection pump capacity or if that is not available upon the topsides water injection
capacity.
Scale inhibitor: Scale inhibitors can be added to the water injection flow to inhibit
the formation of carbonate and sulfate scales. A dosage rate between 5 and 25 ppm
can be selected from the dosage level drop down. If water injection is included in the
topsides then a medium dosage rate will be included by default at 15 ppm of the
water injection flow. The weight for 2 dosage pumps is included.
Corrosion inhibitor: To prevent corrosion and minimize oxides and sulfides
blocking injection wells, dosing with corrosion inhibitor can be selected. A dosage
rate between 5 and 100 ppm can be selected from the dosage level drop down. If
water injection is included in the topsides then a medium dosage rate will be included
by default at 30 ppm of the water injection flow. The weight for 2 dosage pumps is
included.
Biocide: To prevent the formation of microorganisms biocide can be added to the
process but is not selected by default. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 25, 100,
300 ppm can be selected and includes 2 dosing pumps.
203
QUE$TORHelp
Oxygen scavenger: The addition of 15 ppm oxygen scavenger is assumed to be on
when water injection is included. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 5, 15, 100
ppm can be selected and includes 2 dosing pumps.
Defoamer: Defoamer can be added but is not selected as a default. Low, medium or
high dosage rates of 0.1, 2, 5 ppm can be selected and when active the weight
calculation includes 2 dosing pumps.
Surfactant: Surfactant can be added but is not selected as a default. Low, medium
or high dosage rates of 2, 5, 10 ppm can be selected and when active the weight
Other (injection water): Addition of other chemicals for dosing the water injection
flow can be added to the chemical injection input form and is not selected by default.
Low, medium or high dosage rates of 1, 20, 50 ppm can be selected and when active
includes the weight for 2 dosing pumps.
Other chemicals that can be added to the process are configured on the other tab.
The dosage rate for the chemicals is based upon gas, produced water or ballast water
rates. For gas this is the gas flow in stream 1 in oil processing or if that is not
available upon the topsides export/flared capacity plus the gas injection capacity. For
produced water it is based upon the produced water design capacity and for ballast
water it is assumed to be 50 Mbbl/d.
Corrosion inhibitor (gas): Gas corrosion inhibitor is added to the topsides by
default when production is selected. A dosage rate between 0.1 and 5 ppm can be
selected from the dosage level drop down with a medium dosage of 1 ppm selected
by default. The calculation also includes 3 dosing pumps.
Biocide (produced water): Biocide can be added to the produced water but is not
selected by default. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 25, 100, 200 ppm can be
selected and when active the weight calculation includes 2 dosing pumps.
Flotation aid (produced water): Flotation aid is added to the produced water to
aid the separation of any remaining oil. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 2, 12,
30 ppm can be selected from the drop down. A medium value of 12 ppm is selected
204
QUE$TORHelp
by default when the produced water flow rates is greater than 0. When active the
weight calculation includes 2 dosing pumps.
Demulsifier (produced water): Demulsifier is added to the produced water to
separate out the water in oil. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 5, 20, 300 ppm
can be selected from the drop down. A medium value of 20 ppm is selected by default
when the produced water flow rate is greater than 0. When active the weight
Defoamer (ballast water): Ballast water defoamer is added by default at 5 ppm if
a floating substructure is selected (tanker, cylindrical hull, barge, spar buoy, semisub, TLP). Low, medium or high dosage rates of 1, 5, 10 ppm can be selected and
when active includes the weight for 2 dosing pumps.
Corrosion inhibitor (produced water): Corrosion inhibitor can be added to the
produced water but is not selected by default. Low, medium or high dosage rates of
10, 50, 200 ppm can be selected and when active the weight calculation includes 2
dosing pumps.
Other (gas): Addition of other chemicals for dosing the gas system can be added to
the chemical injection input form and is not selected by default. Low, medium or high
dosage rates of 0.1, 0.5, 10 ppm can be selected and when active includes the weight
for 2 dosing pumps.
Other (produced water): Addition of other chemicals for dosing the produced
water can be added to the chemical injection input form and is not selected by
default. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 1, 20, 50 ppm can be selected and
when active includes the weight for 2 dosing pumps.
The subsea chemicals are added at the subsea trees to help maintain the flow through
to the processing facilities.
Low dose hydrate inhibitor: Hydrate inhibitor can be added to the subsea tree and
the rate is based upon the gas flow. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 0.1, 0.3, 1
ppm can be selected but is not selected by default. When active the weight calculation
includes 2 dosing pumps.
205
QUE$TORHelp
Methanol: Methanol is added to the subsea tree by default when a subsea
component is attached to the topsides and the rate is based upon the gas flow. A
dosage rate between 1 and 4 ppm can be selected from the dosage level drop down
with a medium dosage of 2 ppm selected by default. The calculation also includes 3
dosing pumps.
Asphaltene inhibitor: To prevent asphaltene deposition, inhibitor is added to the
topsides by default when a subsea component is attached to the topsides. The rate is
based upon the oil flow. A dosage rate between 10 and 100 ppm can be selected from
the dosage level drop down with a medium dosage of 40 ppm selected by default. The
calculation also includes 2 dosing pumps.
Wax dispersant: Wax dispersant can be added to the subsea tree and the rate is
based upon the oil flow. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 2, 11, 30 ppm can be
selected but it is not selected by default. When active the weight calculation includes
2 dosing pumps.
Scale inhibitor: Scale inhibitor can be added to the subsea tree and the rate is
based upon the water injection flow. Low, medium or high dosage rates of 5, 15, 25
ppm can be selected but it is not selected by default. When active the weight
206
QUE$TORHelp
Flare
The flare sub-component is available for all platforms containing production or
compression. Clicking on Flare in the topsides input panel opens the flare form.
Gas Design Capacity

The flare gas rate is assumed to be the maximum gas rate through a single
separation or compression train, whichever is the greater.This allows production to
continue whilst a spare compressor is started or the problem solved. It is assumed
that blowdown cases will incorporate sequencing facilities so as not to exceed that
rate.
Flare Type
This allows the choice between a the available flare types, the default is based on the
platform configuration, water depth and flare rate.
The weight of flare booms, towers and vents takes account of typical radiation
shielding arrangements and the location of the point of interest with respect to the
base of the flare structure with the minimum weight equivalent to a gas flow rate of
10 MMscf/day.
Flare lengths have been calculated assuming the maximum radiation level at the
point of interest in an emergency relief situation is:
l
Vent - 6300 W/m2 (2000 Btu/hr ft2)
Tower - 6300 W/m2 (using a low emissivity tip)
Boom - 12500 W/m2 (using a low emissivity tip and radiation shielding).
207
QUE$TORHelp
In the case of a boom the weight of the other bulks has been increased to allow for
the weight of the radiation shielding.
Flare Tower Type

If a tower flare is selected this can be either a platform tower or a tripod tower, the
default selection is based on the water depth and the flare rate.
Note:If a flare tower is installed on a tripod, QUE$TOR includes an allowance

for the interconnecting bridge but not the tripod structure itself. The weight and cost
of the tripod should be calculated using the jackets component.
208
QUE$TORHelp
Power
The Power sub-component calculates the weights of the standard and emergency
generators as well as the power distribution system.Clicking on Power in the
topsides input panel opens the power form.
Power Requirement
The power requirements frame shows a load schedule of the powers that have been
calculated in all other equipment sizing sub-components.The list identifies the loads
for each system, as shown below, which can be changed by overwriting the stated
load with a new figure.
209
QUE$TORHelp
l
Oil/condensate processing: Includes the electrical load associated with any

electrostatic coalescers / desalters.
Oil/condensate export pumps: Electric motor drive except for S.E. Asia where
gas engines may be used
Gas processing: Includes air fin fan cooler powers, TEG regeneration in the
dehydration unit and auxiliary power in the dewpoint control unit
Gas compression:Gas compression powers plus allowance for auxiliary drivers
(seal and lube oil systems) if electric motor driven. If compressor is turbine
driven then power is for auxiliary drivers only (taken as 2% of the gas compressor
duty)
Water injection power: Included if electric motor driven pumps selected
Quarters: Power for heating, lighting, cleaning, cooking etc. FPSOs and semisubmersibles typically come with some quarters and the power generation
equipment to meet this duty. QUE$TOR assumes that there is an additional
topsides power load if the manning exceeds the number of beds provided by the
tanker or semi-sub. In this case the quarters power load is based on the number
of additional beds provided.
Drilling: The total drilling power only applies when drilling power generation has
been selected to be integrated with the processing power requirements. Some
emergency and small power requirements are met from the platform supply when
drilling is self-contained
Downhole equipment: This only applies if electric submersible pumps (ESPs)
have been selected in the associated drilling component.
Utilities: Utility powers are calculated from the utility definitions previously
specified.
Seawater lift:Based on the seawater lift flowrate specified in the utilities subcomponent.
Base load: Includes for platform lighting, control systems, communication
systems and navigational aid systems. For tankers and semi-submersibles there
may be some existing power generation. If the systems of these substructures are
integrated with the topsides then there will be no base load power requirement.
External power: This represents the power demand of all other facilities this
platform is providing power to.
Emergency Power
Covers the power required by essential systems should the main power supply be
disrupted and is set to the base load requirement.
210
QUE$TORHelp
Generation and distribution
This option will be selected when there is no incoming power cable meaning power is
to be generated and distributed on the topsides.
Distribution only
This option is selected when there is one or more incoming power cables. Power is
then generated on another platform or on shore and a power cable links the two
facilities. The selected topsides will include power distribution facilities sized for the
local design power.
Derating
and is dependent on the Ambient temperature. For diesel / gas engines no derating is
applied.
Capacity
l
Total power (derated): the Total demand divided by the Derating factor.
Power factor: is the ratio between real power and apparent power in a
circuit.This is a practical measure of the efficiency of a power
generation/distribution system. The default is 0.83.
Design power: is the Total power (derated) divided by the power factor.
Number of generators: specifies the number of parallel generator sets
installed. By default the value is such that there is one spare generator. If
modified, the program recalculates the generator weight.
Design duty/generator: the capacity of each generator set as a proportion to
the total generator power, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the Number of
generators this specifies how many spare units are installed.
Note: Changing the number of generators will also initially change the design
duty/generator if unlocked, to ensure there is always a spare generator.
Driver
Covers the drivers used to generate the Design power.
211
QUE$TORHelp
l
Gas turbine:Gas turbines are used to generate the required design power.This
is selected when the design power is greater than 2 MW. When selected the
derating factor becomes active to take into account the effect that the Ambient
temperature and Elevation have on the power available from the turbine driven
generator.
Diesel / gas engine: Diesel or gas engines are used to generate the required
design power. This is selected when the design power is less than 2 MW but single
units are available up to about 17 MW.
Microturbine: Generators driven by small scale gas turbines. They are able to
use a wide range of gas or liquid fuels making them ideal for use in offshore or
remote oil and gas facilities. The maximum power available from an offshore
microturbine is 200 kW.
Model: selects the type of turbine driver and is active when Turbine or
Microturbine is selected. A default is automatically selected from a number of
available turbine driver types based on the smallest driver that will provide the
design power. You can overwrite the turbine type via a dropdown list box, if
desired.
Weights
This displays the three possible weights for the power generation / distribution
system:
l
Power generation weight:the weight of the gas turbines plus generator(s) or

the diesel driven generator(s) depending on the driver type selected
Power distribution weight: the weight of the power distribution system.This
includes transformers, switchgear and motor control units. If power is imported or
exported an HVDC converter is included to convert the power from ACto DC at the
power generation end and back to AC at the power consumer end. The converter
weights are based on the imported/exported design power demand.
Emergency power weight: the weight of the diesel generator set(s) for black
start up and emergency use.
212
QUE$TORHelp
Electrical Buildings
The weight of the electrical building(s) is based on the power distribution weight
specified in the Power form. It is for the building structure alone as the electrical
equipment and the associated electrical cabling that is normally inside the building
are accounted for as equipment items and electrical bulk material. The weight is
indicative only and can be adjusted on the cost sheet
The number of buildings required is based on a nominal maximum weight per

building. Building dimensions per building are estimated and displayed at the bottom
of the Equipment list in the Structural section based on the cost sheet weight and the
calculated number of buildings. Fixed building dimension ratios of width being 80% of
the length and the height being 50% of the length are assumed.
Note: Electrical building sizes can vary quite significantly so the dimensions
given in the Equipment list are feasible approximations only.
213
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment List
The Equipment list can be accessed from within the topsides component by clicking
the View equipment list button located at the bottom of the cost sheet.
The equipment list summarises the individual equipment items assumed on the
topsides with the details of each equipment item shown where available. The list is
limited to those items required for the selected systems and it will automatically
update when changes are made to any of the topsides subcomponents.
The equipment list cannot be modified, but can be printed or exported to Excel using
the toolbar at the top of the form.
For each equipment item, the following parameters are summarised, where
available:
l
Number of items: the number of identical equipment items of this type.

Capacity per item (%): shows the contribution of each equipment item has to
the total of the combined items. E.g. 2 100% pumps indicate an installed pump
capacity of twice the value stated in the capacity column, 2 50% pumps indicate
that each pump alone provides half the stated capacity.
214
QUE$TORHelp
l
Capacity: shows either the sum of the capacity of active units to get to 100% of
process design capacity. E.g. 2*100% pumps indicate that 1 pump will be running
in normal operation and the capacity will be of 1 pump at 100%.
Duty: the energy exchanged within the equipment item. The value shown is for
the items to achieve 100% design capacity on the process side.
Power: the electrical power requirement of the equipment items. The value
shown is for all items to achieve 100% design capacity, any over design on units
will result in excess power consumption being reported.
Temperature: both operating and design conditions are shown.
Pressure: both operating and design conditions are shown.
Equipment dimensions: the dimensions of the equipment item. The values

shown are dependent on the equipment type, with length (L), width (W) and height
(H) for rectangular equipment items and tan to tan height (t/t) and length (t/t) for
vessels. ID represents the vessel and tank diameter.
Dry weight: the dry weight of equipment items. The value shown is for all inservice and spare items rather than per item. Changes to the dry weight on the
cost sheet will not be reflected in the equipment list.
215
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
from the procurement strategy.Unit rates are also dependent on the construction
high acid gas contents are experienced. Equipment costs cover the vendor's cost for
fabrication of the equipment, any procurement of sub-components and sub-vendor's
submission to approval authorities and testing at the vendor's works.Direct
Freight
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total cost of the
equipment identified in the systems listed above.It includes the cost of packaging
and transporting equipment from the manufacturer to the construction yard. You can
modify the freight percentage, the default is dependent on where the equipment is
procured (in region or out of region).
216
QUE$TORHelp
Bulk Materials Costs

This includes costs for all bulk materials permanently installed on the topsides.The
costs cover delivery, insurance, guarantees and duties.Costs for consumables and
materials for construction aids and temporary works are included in fabrication.
Steel
Primary steel: Main load bearing members, i.e. truss members, girders, deck
columns, floor beams, joists and floor plates.
Secondary steel: stiffener plates, lifting eyes, walkways, equipment supports,
monorails, hatches, access platforms, stairs, ladders, handrails, gratings, minor
equipment supports, miscellaneous others.
The weight of both the primary and secondary steel is dependent on the substructure
selection and the topsides configuration. The steel requirement is based on lookup
from the equipment dry weight with different tables used for each of the substructure
and configuration options.
The unit rate assumes Grade S355 low carbon steel is used and the quantity includes
allowances for cutting, wastage and surface coatings.
Piping
The piping bulk weights are calculated by applying factors to each individual
equipment weight identified on the topsides cost estimate sheet to give a weight of
piping per system. These system weights are totalled and entered into the piping bulk
weight cell. The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of piping and are stored
in regional databases to reflect different design practices and materials of
construction.The weights include for all pipe supports, flanges and fittings and valves
but excludes control valves and emergency shutdown valves (which are included in
instrument bulks).
ASTM Grade A106B carbon steel pipe is assumed or 316L stainless steel depending on
the service.
217
QUE$TORHelp
Electrical bulks
The electrical bulks are calculated by applying factors to each individual equipment
weight identified on the topsides cost estimate sheet to give a weight of electrical
bulks per system.These system weights are then totalled and entered into the
electrical bulks weight cell.The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of
electrical bulks.
The weights include for all cabling, cable trays, supports, terminations, glands, gland
transits, junction boxes, lighting and small power systems (e.g. batteries/life support
power).
Instrument bulks
The instrument bulks are calculated by applying factors to each individual equipment
weight identified on the topsides cost estimate sheet to give a weight of instrument
bulks per system.These system weights are then totalled and entered into the
instrument bulks weight cell.The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of
instrument bulks. The weights include all instrument cabling, pneumatic tubing,
terminations, glands, gland penetrations, supports, control valves, relief valves and
ESD and blowdown valves.
Wellhead chokes and manifold valves are included in manifolding equipment.
Others
This includes all additional bulk system weights associated with the HVAC and safety
systems plus painting and architectural bulks.
HVAC bulks are calculated as a factor of the equipment system weights. It includes
for ducts, duct supports, insulation, flow dampers and grilles.
Safety system bulks are calculated as a factor of the equipment system weights. It
includes for fire monitors, hose reels, deluge valves, fire and gas sectors, halon and
CO systems, portable fire extinguishers, lifebuoys, life jackets, survival suits, fire
2
blankets, fireman's equipment and fire protection of structural members.
Architectural bulks are calculated as a factor of those equipment systems requiring
architectural items.
This includes costs for all partitioning, fire walls, flooring, floor finishes, acoustic
insulation, wind cladding, weather louvres, furnishings and platform doors. It does
not include any items which are considered as part of the quarters.
These items are then totalled up to give an overall weight which is entered under the
item other bulks.
Note: If the selected substructure is a tanker (i.e. substructure for a FPSO)

then the above bulk material quantities are increased as the topsides equipment will
typically be more spread out on the deck and there is a piperack running the length of
the vessel. The topsides primary and secondary steel weight factors are dependent
on the topsides deck configuration type for FPSOs, i.e. pre-assembled units (PAUs) or
a pancake. The piping, electrical, instrumentation and other FPSO bulk material
factors are independent of the deck configuration type.
218
QUE$TORHelp
Freight
This cost is a percentage applied to the total cost of all bulk items. It includes the cost
of packaging and transporting the steel and bulks from the place of manufacture to
the construction yard.The default is dependent on where the equipment is procured
(in region or out of region).
219
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Costs
including any off-site fabrication (not vendor-supplied skids).
Clicking on the hyperlinked fabrication heading will open up the fabrication


A fixed percentage applied to the total fabrication cost to include for all necessary
fixing and fittings and preparation required to make safe equipment/modules, etc for
sea transportation from the construction yard to the offshore installation location.
220
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
Installation costs include transport of the topsides modules or deck from the
fabrication yard to the installation site or deck mating area and installation costs of
lifting the modules or deck on to an installed jacket, mating a deck with a GBS or TLP
substructure or installation of modules on to a semi-submersible or tanker deck in a
yard.
The cost of all vessels required to transport the modules/equipment to the offshore
installation site are summarised and split into two components, tugs and barges.
The calculated transport spread durations are based on the number of modules and
the average duration per installation operation. These numbers are obviously
significantly reduced for floaters and GBSs, where modules can be installed inshore
or in the construction yard.

The Tugs transport spread includes the cost of the tugs required to deliver the
topsides to the installation site.The costs include labour, fuel, consumables, weather
downtime and support. The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the
spread is given separately.

The Barge transport spread duration allows for barges that will be hired for
considerably longer than the tugs transport spread, including time for refurbishment
at quayside, seafastening and grillage. For lightweight substructures no barge
transport spread is included as installation is assumed to be carried out by the drilling
rig. The costs include labour, consumables, and weather downtime.The mobilisation
/ demobilisation time assumed for the spread is given separately.
Installation Spread
The cost of all vessels required at the offshore installation site, to transfer the
topsides, i.e. modules/equipment, from the transport barges on to the offshore
installation.
This includes heavy lift vessels at the offshore location with crew and support costs,
anchor handling vessels, supply boats, etc, and for labour, fuel, consumables,
downtime, support.This number is obviously reduced for floaters and GBSs where a
221
QUE$TORHelp
significant proportion of the installation is done inshore or at the yard.For lightweight
substructures a minimal installation is included as installation is assumed to be
carried out by the drilling rig.
The duration is calculated from the number of offshore lifts which are based
ontopsides and nominal module weight. Separate lifts are included for quarters,
drilling facilities and flare booms.
No allowance is included for mobilisation / demobilisation by default as it is assumed
that the installation occurs in the same period as the jacket installation and vessels
are already mobilised / demobilised.
If a topsides is being costed without any jacket or the jacket has been pre-installed,
an allowance for mobilisation / demobilisation of 8 days will be added.
222
QUE$TORHelp

Hook-up and commissioning (HUC) costs can be Atshore, Inshore or Offshore. The
percentage (by weight) of HUC that occurs atshore, inshore and offshore is
dependent on the substructure type.
Atshore HUC
Covers HUC work which can be carried out in the yard where systems can be tested
and commissioned in situ, prior to the topsides leaving the yard.
Inshore HUC
Covers the cost of hook-up testing and commissioning which can be carried out away
from the construction yard but at a location close to shore, e.g. deepwater sites used
for deck mating. It includes for labour, support services (supply boat, etc) onshore
accommodation and catering and onshore supply base costs. Inshore hook-up
therefore reduces the cost of transporting personnel and equipment to the hook-up
location and applies to TLP and GBS platforms.
The costs include all HUC activities possible without having hydrocarbons available.
This includes connection of modules/equipment (e.g. pressure testing, loop testing of
cabling, run up of turbines on propane, testing of compressors, etc).
It includes allowance for salaries, consumables, overheads, temporary construction
aids/lifting aids, construction plant and small tools, specialist subcontractors,
contractors own supervision and management.
Offshore HUC
Covers the costs of hook-up, testing and commissioning which are carried out at the
offshore location. It includes for labour, support services (supply boat, helicopter,
etc) onshore supply base costs. The costs include all hook-up and commissioning
activities to achieve first oil, all modules/equipment fully performance tested using
crude from the field and all systems on-line and available for production. The costs
include all salaries, consumables, overheads, temporary construction aids/lifting
aids, construction plant and small tools, specialist subcontractors, contractors own
supervision and management.There is also an allowance for additional shift changes,
travelling time, etc.
223
QUE$TORHelp
HUC Accommodation (flotel)
Covers the cost of offshore accommodation, such as a flotel, during the offshore
hook-up commissioning work. The number of days is set to zero by default and there
is a nominal day rate. You should adjust the number of days and day rate to suit your
development scenario, ensuring that mob / demob days are included.
224
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the topsides.They
include design, project management, certification, insurance and a contingency and
are shown below.
Design
The number of hours required to carry out the design of the topsides. The number of
hours is related to the calculated topsides functions and weight. It covers the hours
required for detailed design and the design hours required in the yard.
Equipment+bulks, steelwork, quarters and drilling have individual tables of manhours per tonne vs weight in the cost database. The number of man-hours is then
calculated by looking up the man-hour per tonne value and multiplying it by the
weight.
The costs include project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys,
follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project
control, QA and documentation during the detailed design phase.
The rates include wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll
burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility services, depreciation
of facilities and administration), project expenses and equipment. Also included are
vendor drawings and data, delivery of items to the yard, vendors installation and
commissioning services, commissioning spares, insurance up to delivery, guarantees
and import duties.
Project Management
The project management hours required for the project management team costs to
manage, monitor and control all phases of the development. This includes project
engineering, project control and planning, design and construction supervision,
quality assurance, HSE and third party liaison.This covers from the project sanction
date through completion in the yard to first oil offshore.
225
QUE$TORHelp
The project management man-hours are based on the design man-hours.
Pre-sanction management costs are not included within QUE$TOR and should be
added as necessary. Operations supervision, product sales, etc are also excluded
from this cost centre.
Certification
A percentage of the total topsides component costs, covers the certification costs of
the design, equipment, materials and construction of the development by a
recognised certifying authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).Certification is only
included by default for European and North American countries where it is common
practice. A certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S.
cost databases. All other cost databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
A percentage of the overall topsides cost, insurance covers project components
during transport, construction, installation, HUC, etc up to first oil. Personnel liability
insurances are assumed to be covered by corporate policies.
Contingency
HUC, design, project management, insurance and certification costs to bring the
component cost estimate to a P50 level.For a fuller explanation see Contingency
Definitions.
226
QUE$TORHelp
Hints on Developing Topsides Projects

Modelling small wellhead platforms
QUE$TOR is ideally suited to the evaluation of small wellhead platforms where
facilities are kept to an absolute minimum.
The topsides should be run specifying only the Wellhead function in the topsides input
panel, with no quarters specified. Usually there will be no production, drilling or
compression.
The topsides cost estimate is performed normally with only allowance for wellhead
equipment and a test separator. As no accommodation has been selected, the
quarters form will display weight allowances for emergency quarters and helideck.
Modelling split processes
The interactive nature of QUE$TOR provides the capability for its imaginative use in
modelling less conventional approaches to offshore design.
For example, if two topsides are specified and run normally, by inspecting each cost
sheet, equipment may be deleted from any area and moved to another simply by
overwriting the weights. Bulk weights, fabrication costs, installation, etc are
automatically recalculated to reflect the changes.
Thus, utility equipment can be grouped on one platform and power generation
equipment can be grouped on one platform to service, say, production and quarters
platforms.
Adding Equipment
QUE$TOR gives the ability to assess the impact of incremental change to a
design.For example, a topsides component may be run conventionally with zero
export compression.This gives zero weight in the corresponding line entry. A hard
copy record may then be obtained of this.
You may then add export compression, all the bulks, fabrication and HUC costs are
adjusted to reflect this change.
A record of its effect can be maintained.
The bulk material (and other system) weights can then be locked and the export
compression removed.You will then be left with a platform without the compressor
but with all other secondary systems ready for its installation.
Sour Gas Service

This is handled automatically by entering CO and H S quantities in the field level
2
2
details.The appropriate unit costs for systems and equipment will be incorporated
automatically.CO is entered as a molar percentage and H S in ppm.
2
227
QUE$TORHelp
Gas lift projects

QUE$TOR Offshore does not currently allow you to specify gas lifted wells at a
concept level but you can add gas lift facilities manually if needed.QUE$TOR follows
certain rules when dealing with gas lift facilities, these are listed below:
If gas lift is included in a subsea component:
l
Linked topsides components will pick up the flowrate and include gas lift
compression.
If gas lift capacity in a topsides is greater than zero:

l
All platform and remote wells are assumed to be gas lifted in the manifolding subcomponent.
If gas lift is included on a wellhead platform tied back to a full production platform
and you add a gas lift pipeline flowing from the main topsides to the wellhead
topsides:
l
The main topsides picks up the gas lift flowrate and includes gas lift compression.
The export/flared gas flowrate at the wellhead topsides will be increased equal to
the gas lift flowrate to reflect the extra volume of the circulated gas.
The two phase pipeline linking the two topsides will be resized according to the
new flowrates.
228
QUE$TORHelp
About Jackets
The Jacket component provides costs for jacket steelwork and all appurtenances
including piles, pile guides, anodes, conductor guides, riser guides, J tubes and
lifting/installing aids.It does not include conductor costs (which are included in the
Drilling component) or export risers (which are included in the Pipelines component).
Cost estimates for three, four, six or eight leg platforms are available with detailed
input of environmental conditions. Optional installation methods include lift, launch
or float.
Three types of lightweight jackets/structures, guyed caissons, braced monotowers
and lightweight jackets are available for minimum cost solutions, see Lightweight
structures.
Other appurtenances such as walkways, mud mats, etc are included as part of the
basic jacket weight and are not identified separately.
For launched jackets, the weight for installation aids, i.e. buoyancy tanks, additional
bracing and controls is calculated.
The algorithm calculates dimensions and weights of the jacket legs, all braces,
conductor and riser guides (if appropriate) and pile guides as functions of the
topsides weight, water depth, environmental conditions and the number of legs,
conductor, risers and J tubes.An allowance is made for the effect of marine growth.
Calibration of jacket weights

There are many aspects of jacket design which influence the ultimate weight of a
jacket. Only a few the most influential - can be taken into account in an
approximate weight-estimating algorithm. As a consequence, discrepancies can
occur in the predicted jacket weights that become evident when they are compared
with actual weights.
To compensate, a calibration is performed in which the estimated weights are
factored to minimise these differences. This is a two-stage procedure.A global
factorisation is performed, within the algorithm, based on the large database of
jackets available in the Northern North Sea and using the default severe
environmental conditions for the Northern North Sea.The calibrated algorithm is then
applied to each world region considered by QUE$TOR, using the local default severe
environment and an additional regional factor established for that region to give a
best fit to published jacket weights. The exception to this occurs with the separate
global calibration performed for the Southern North Sea which has its own large
database of jackets. The regional factors for the Northern and Southern North Sea
regions are 1.0.
The algorithm should not be used for studying jacket weight trends outside the
bounds of the calibration and, in particular, over wide ranges of the environmental
input parameters.This can be misleading and it can lead to erroneous results. You
should ideally accept the QUE$TOR default severe environmental conditions, noting
that any deficiency in these is compensated for, in part, by the calibration
process.Small adjustments to the environment will, however, provide a guide to
their effect on jacket weights.
229
QUE$TORHelp
230
QUE$TORHelp
Inputs
The Jacket inputs are shown below.
Jacket Type
Seven types of jackets are available in QUE$TOR.Three, four, six or eight leg
conventional jackets can be chosen as well as the following lightweight structures:
guyed caissons, braced monotowers and lightweight jackets.
For three legs jackets, the calculation is based on a simple tripod structure
comprising a central column and three inclined bracings from the column to a
triangular seabed frame carrying pile guides.The three-legged jacket is strictly
limited to shallow water (150 m), low topsides weight (2,000 tonnes) and fields
with not more than ten wells.The structure is suitable for estimating very small
unmanned platforms, bridge support platforms and flare tripods.
Lightweight structures are explained in more detail.
Water Depth
This defaults to the field level data water depth.Four, six and eight leg conventional
jackets have been calibrated to water depths of up to 500 m.Three leg jackets are
calibrated to 150 m and lightweight structures to 90 m.
231
QUE$TORHelp
Note: QUE$TOR will accept water depths up to a maximum of 1000 m.If a

water depth >1000 m is entered then it will be reset to the maximum acceptable
value of 1000 m.

The operating weight of the associated topsides. The jacket design algorithm has
been calibrated for a Maximum Topsides Weight.lf you exceed these weights a range
warning will be displayed.
Default topsides weights for substructure types
Installation Method
Three installation methods are available in QUE$TOR:
l
Launch:The jacket is transported to the field on a barge but is launched rather

than lifted into position.This installation method is typically used when the jacket
weight exceeds the capacity of available lift spreads.
Float:Buoyancy aids are attached to the jacket and it is wet towed to the field.
Lift:The jacket is transported to the field on a barge and lifted into position.
QUE$TOR chooses the installation method based on a jackets type and its installation
weight:
l
Guyed caissons are typically capped at both ends and wet-towed from the
fabrication yard so the default installation method is float.
Lift is the default installation method for all other jacket types as long as their
installation weight does not exceed the maximum lift of cranes available in the
region.The maximum lift is defined in the regional technical databases.
If the installation weight precludes Lift then Launch is selected unless the jacket is
a braced monotower when Float is selected.The structure of a braced monotower
makes launching it difficult.
The installation weight of a jacket is calculated by applying an installation factor to its

steel weight. This factor is different to the regional steel factor.The factor
determines how much extra weight is required at installation time to handle upending the jacket into position.So if the jacket weight is say 2600 te and the regional
maximum crane lift capacity is say 2500 te then as 2600 x 0.95 = 2470 the jacket can
still be lifted.The Jacket Installation Factor is dependent on the installation method.
Whilst the default factors are the same for every region, they can be modified in the
regional databases.
232
QUE$TORHelp
Jacket attachments
l
Conductors: the number of jacket conductors is set as the number of platform

wells from the associated topsides manifolding. The conductors affect the
calculation of wave forces used in estimating the jacket steel weight.
Risers: as with conductors, the number of risers is used to calculate the wave
forces. The number of risers is set as the number of remote risers from the
associated topsides manifolding with an extra allowance for product export. The
number of remote risers in the associated topsides is the number of import
pipelines plus the number of risers from subsea components linked to the
topsides.
J-Tubes: can be added to allow for future installation of additional import and
export pipelines. The default number of J-tubes is zero. The number of J-tubes is
used in calculating the wave forces on the jacket.
Soil conditions
The soil condition is used to calculate the piling requirements of the jacket.Three
choices are available.
l
Good: the soil has high load bearing capacity with reduced piling requirements.
Average: the soil has average load bearing capacity.
Poor: the soil has low load bearing capacity and requires additional piling.
Depending on the selection the pile weight is factored up or down from the weight
calculated for average soil conditions.
Option selection is made by selecting from the dropdown menu.
Environmental conditions
Nominally severe environmental conditions are stored for each region. Each value
may be individually modified.
l
Wave height: QUE$TOR jacket weights are calibrated assuming the highest
individual wave with a 50 year return period. QUE$TOR uses the specified value
unchanged. The significant wave height (50 year return period) is often known and
return values can be estimated for design purposes as follows:
50 year return wave height = 1.86 x significant wave height.

Given a 100 year return value, the corresponding 50 year Design Wave Height for use
in QUE$TOR can be estimated by factoring by 1.86/1.95 = 0.95.
The algorithm calculates an associated wave period assuming a 1:11 wave slope.
Wave velocities are calculated from the Airy wave theory.
233
QUE$TORHelp
l
Wind speed: the wind speed is the value measured at a reference height of 10 m
above stillwater and for a 50 year return period.
QUE$TOR jacket weights are estimated assuming a design wind speed appropriate to
a 5 second gust which currently is the value which must be entered.
Frequently, mean wind speeds averaged over 1 hour or 1 minute are known.The
corresponding 5 second value (m/s) can be estimated using a Wind Speed Lookup.
The 50 year return wind speed can be estimated from the 100 year return period as:
50 year speed = 100 year speed/1.05
l
Tidal current: the tidal current is a surface value.The algorithm estimates a

value for the storm surge current (surface value) as 3% of the wind speed. The
assumed tidal current profile follows a 1/7th power law from the seabed to half
the water depth and from there to the surface the current is uniform. If this profile
is not appropriate to the region being considered, then some judgement will be
required to define an equivalent tidal current which can be expected to result in
jacket load contributions of the correct magnitude.
The tidal current rarely exceeds 0.3 m/s along any open coastline (Ref API RP 2A) but
local shoreline or seabed features can increase values to 1.0 m/s or more.In more
restricted waters (e.g. North Sea) values between 0.2 and 0.8 m/s are typical.
Regional jacket steel factor

This is a regional factor which gives a best fit to published jacket weights. More
detail on this calibration is given in About Jackets.
234
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
Materials costs are calculated by applying a cost per tonne to the weights of steel,
piles, etc that QUE$TOR has calculated using its technical algorithms. The materials
section of the cost estimate is shown below.
Jacket Steel
The total weight of steel required in the jacket including allowances for conductor
guides, riser guides, pile guides, walkways and mud mats.
The technical algorithm used to calculate the steel weight allows for environmental
conditions, water depth, topsides configuration, and numbers and sizes of
conductors, risers and J tubes. The unit rate includes an allowance for steel wastage,
procurement margins and surface coatings.
Piles
The weight of piles and pile guides needed. It is calculated as a factor of the jacket
steel weight, taking into account the soil conditions specified, and is based on through
leg piling.
Conductors
The cost for 30 x 1 wall thickness screw thread conductors is included for drilled
or completed wells. It comprises a weight for the total length of conductors
calculated.
Anodes
The weight of sacrificial anodes and anode supports used for cathodic protection of
the jacket is calculated as a percentage of the jacket steel weight.
Installation aids
If the jacket is to be installed using lift or launch methods, a weight for installation
aids is included. The weight includes all additional appurtenances for lifting or
launching a jacket, including installation aids, buoyancy tanks, additional bracing and
controls.
235
QUE$TORHelp
Freight
A percentage of the total cost of materials (steel, piles, anodes and installation
aids).It includes the cost of packaging and transportation of the materials from the
stockists yard to the construction yard.The default is dependent on where the
materials are procured (in region or out of region).
236
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Costs
including any off-site fabrication.


The cost of load-out barges, vessels, heavy lift vessels, and any additional materials
required to make the structure safe for transportation at sea and to transport the
structure on to the load-out barge or to launch.This is a fixed percentage of the total
fabrication cost.
237
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
The installation section of the cost estimate is shown below.

The Tugs transport spread includes the cost of two tugs required to deliver the
structure to the installation site including towing a jacket or a barge to location.The
costs include labour, fuel, consumables, weather downtime and support. For each
jacket, the duration depends on the region, taking into consideration location of
fabrication and fields. The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the spread
is given separately.

The Barge transport spread includes the tug spread, refurbishment at quayside,
seafastening and grillage. The costs include labour, consumables, and weather
downtime. The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the spread is given
separately.
Installation Spread
The Installation spread is the daily cost of hiring vessels to assist with the installation
of the jacket including lift barges where required.It includes labour, fuel,
consumables, weather downtime and support costs. The mobilisation / demobilisation
time assumed for the spread is given separately.
238
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the component. They
are shown below.
Design
The number of man-hours required to perform the design of the jacket and the design
hours required in the yard. The man-hours include project specification, special
studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting and
inspection services, project control, QA, and documentation in the detailed design
phase.
The unit rate includes wages and other personnel expenses, insurance, general
overheads (office facilities, utilities, depreciation and administration), project
expenses and equipment. It includes allowances for vendor data, deliveries of items
to the yard, insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
Project Management
quality assurance, HSE and third party liaison. This covers from the project sanction
239
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
A percentage of the total jacket cost to cover all certification costs for the approval of
the design, materials and construction of the jacket by a recognised certifying
authority (e.g. Lloyds, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by default for
European and North American countries where it is common practice. A certification
percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost databases.All other
cost databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
A percentage of the overall component cost to cover insurance during all phase of the
project up to first oil including construction, transportation and installation.
Contingency
design, project management, insurance and certification costs to bring the
Definitions.
240
QUE$TORHelp
Lightweight Structures
Cost estimates are available for three types of lightweight structures: Guyed caisson,
Braced monotower and a Lightweight jacket with detailed input of environmental
conditions.Lightweight structures are of a minimal design and are not considered to
be suitable for harsh environmental conditions.The design algorithm has only been
calibrated for water depths up to 90 m.
The inputs along with the material, fabrication, installation and general costs are
described in the previous jacket sections.
Guyed Caisson
The guyed caisson is composed of an underwater anchor pile and cable guying
assembly that supports a well protector caisson and the topsides component.The
maximum recommended topside weight is 320 tonne and the maximum number of
conductors recommended is six.
The technical algorithm used to calculate the caisson weight allows for topsides
weight, and numbers and sizes of conductors, risers and J tubes.The unit rate
includes an allowance for steel wastage, procurement margins and surface
coatings.Three anchor piles are costed, each attached to two guying cables.The
cable size is dependent on the topside weight and the cable length is a function of
water depth.The cable termination assembly and the cable tensioning system costs
are included under guying components.Conductor guides and anode/riser clamps are
costed individually.
The materials and fabrication sections of the cost estimate change when guyed
caissons are selected to include items specific to the guyed caisson, such as the
guying components.The materials and fabrication cost estimates for a guyed caisson
are shown below.
241
QUE$TORHelp
The guyed caisson can be capped at both ends, towed out by tugs and then installed
via the drilling rig.Consequently, the default installation method is Float.
Braced Monotower
The braced monotower consists of a central caisson piled via steel support bracings,
rather than the steel cable that is included for the guyed caisson.The maximum
recommended topsides weight is 500tonne with up to eight conductors.
Lightweight Jacket
The lightweight jacket is a modular tower for minimum facilities platforms.The

recommended maximum topsides weight is 1600tonne and no more than 12
conductors are recommended.
242
QUE$TORHelp
About Gravity Based Structures

The Gravity Based Structure (GBS) component includes costs for the concrete gravity
base together with all reinforcement, the transition piece, mechanical outfitting,
grouting and ballasting systems and oil storage facilities.
GBS costs are based generally on the concrete volume of the structure with a choice
between conventional 3 leg condeep and slimline monotower designs.The concrete
volume is calculated from the water depth, topsides operating weight and storage
capacity.Weights for reinforcing steel, pre-stressed steel and ballasting are
calculated from the concrete volume.
Mechanical outfitting costs, including ballast and grout systems, oil storage system
where appropriate, transition steelwork, internal shaft steelwork and conductor
guides (but excluding conductors and risers) are also included.
A choice between inshore deck mating and float out of the complete platform or
substructure installation, followed by topsides lift installation can be made.
243
QUE$TORHelp
Inputs
The GBS inputs are shown below.
GBS Type
Two options are available in QUE$TOR: a conventional 3 leg condeep design (e.g.
Troll, Gullfaks C) and a monotower (e.g. Draugen).Designs are based on those used
in the Norwegian North Sea.
Water Depth
The Water depth at the installation site defaults to the specified field water depth. The
GBS calculations are valid for water depths between 30 and 350m.

The associated topsides operating weight is passed in if the GBS is connected to a
topsides.If there is no associated topsides a default topsides operating weight of
10,000 tonnes is assumed.
Storage Capacity
A default value of zero is assumed here. Storage requirements, other than the default
value should be overwritten. QUE$TOR has been calibrated up to 2.5 million barrels
(400,000 m3).
Inshore Deck Mating

This should be checked for inshore deck mating or unchecked for installation of the
topsides in the field. The GBS design includes sufficient buoyancy to allow it to be
floated and towed out to the field for installation.If inshore deck mating is selected
then additional buoyancy is included to counter the topsides weight whilst the GBS is
towed from the mating site to the field. This increased buoyancy requirement results
in a larger GBS. You should ensure that this selection is consistent with the topsides
hook-up and commissioning locations.If there is any inshore hook-up and
commissioning specified in the associated topsides then the GBS will default to
inshore deck mating.
244
QUE$TORHelp
Conductors
The number of conductors is set as the number of platform wells from the associated
topsides manifolding.
245
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The calculated volume of concrete, weights of steel reinforcing, solid ballast and
mechanical outfitting are included in this section as shown below.The concrete
volumes are taken from designs applicable to North Sea waters and East Canada, as
GBS use outside these regions has been limited to date. The ballast and steel
quantities are calculated using live relationships in the cost sheet, and will be
automatically recalculated if the concrete volume is overwritten.
Concrete
This is the volume of concrete required to support the topsides weight in the specified
water depth and provide the required storage capacity.
Additional allowances have been made for float out of the platform after topsides
mating if it has been specified.In arctic regions a factor is applied to account for the
additional mass of concrete to withstand potential iceberg impact.
The concrete volume is determined from a series of look-up curves as a function of
GBS type, water depth and topsides operating weight, there are separate curves for
Tripod GBS Concrete Volume and Monotower GBS Concrete Volume.
The Available Storage Capacity in a GBS is a function of the topsides operating
weight. If the storage capacity required exceeds the corresponding topsides
operating weight the equivalent operating weight used to determine the concrete
volume is increased.
Steel
The quantity of reinforcing steel which is added to the concrete during construction is
broken down into two types. The pre-stressed steel is of higher quality than the
reinforcing steel.
Solid Ballast
This is the quantity of solid ballast (rocks, etc) required to maintain stability of the
structure on the seabed. The inclusion of solid ballast is dependent on the storage
capacity in the base of the GBS and the water depth in which it is to be installed.
246
QUE$TORHelp
This includes costs of all ballasting, drainage and ventilation systems required for the
installation and operation of the GBS. The cost includes all pumps, instrumentation,
piping, valves, manifolds, ladders, walkways and lifts within the GBS substructure.
When storage is selected, additional product pumps and piping are included.
Conductors
The cost for 30 x 1 wall thickness screw thread conductors is included for drilled
or completed wells. It comprises a weight for the total length of conductors
calculated.
Freight
A percentage of the total cost of the concrete, steel, mechanical outfitting equipment
and ballast covers the cost of any packaging and transportation of these materials to
the fabrication yard.The default is dependent on where the equipment is procured (in
region or out of region).
247
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Costs

GBS
This is the cost of concrete slip forming construction in the yard.The unit rate
includes labour, site and consumable charges related to the construction and is
directly related to the concrete volume.
This is the additional cost covering the mechanical outfitting of the structure.This
includes all labour, materials, plant, tools and equipment required for the installation
of the mechanical systems.
248
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
The GBS installation cost estimate is shown below.
Deck Mating
A lump sum cost is included, if inshore deck mating has been selected, for mating the
deck to the structure.The cost includes transportation of the GBS to a deepwater
inshore site (e.g. a fjord), ballast and deballasting trials and mating the topsides to
the substructure.
Deck / Shaft HUC

The cost covers hook-up of all the support systems in the shaft with those on the
deck.The cost is based on the topsides operating weight.
Tow Out
The cost of all vessels/tugs, etc required to tow the structure, with or without the
topsides, to its installation site.This includes labour, fuel, consumables, downtime,
support and mobilisation / demobilisation.
Installation
The cost of vessels required to install the GBS at the field location.This includes
labour, fuel, consumables, downtime, support and mobilisation / demobilisation.
249
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the component.They
are shown below.
Design
This item includes the number of man-hours required to carry out the design of the
GBS and the design hours required in the yard.The man-hours include project
specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on engineering,
purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project control, QA and
documentation during the detailed design phase. The design hours are related to the
concrete volume.
The unit rate includes wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll
of facilities and equipment, administration etc), project expenses and equipment.
Project Management
250
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
This is a percentage of the total GBS cost. It includes all certification costs for the
approval of the design, materials and construction by a recognised certifying
authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).Certification is only included by default for
Insurance
A percentage of the overall GBS component cost to cover insurance during all phase
of the project up to first oil including construction, transportation and installation.
Contingency
Definitions.
251
QUE$TORHelp
About Offshore Pipelines

The offshore pipelines component allows calculation of pipeline sizes, wall
thicknesses, materials, fittings, installation, design and project management costs
for pipelines and riser systems.The pipelines can include single phase or multiphase
product export, water injection, gas injection and gas lift lines to shore, to new or
existing platforms (fixed or floating) and to existing pipelines for tie-in.The materials
costs include for linepipe, flexible risers and support systems, steel risers (new or
retrofit), shore approaches, corrosion protection, weight coating, cathodic protection,
insulation, fixtures and fittings. Installation can be by a range of vessels suitable for
the combination of pipeline diameter and water depth. Installation vessels include the
pipe-lay barge, or heavy lift vessel as well as DSVs for tie-ins and testing, trenching
and survey vessels.
252
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Links
Offshore pipelines can be specified within a link between two components using the
Pipelines and power cable link form. To open the form, double click on the link within
the main schematic. The example below shows a two phase line going from Topsides
2 (WHP) to Topsides 1 (CPP), with water injection and gas injection pipelines flowing
in the opposite direction in the upper frame and a power cable from CPP to WHP in
the lower frame.
Length
The length of the link is used for sizing and pressure drop calculations in the case of
pipelines as well as material and installation cost.For automatically generated export
pipelines this defaults to the value specified as the Distance to delivery point in the
concept selector.
Note: All pipelines within a link are assumed to follow the same route.
253
QUE$TORHelp
Water depth
This defaults to the field water depth, but should be overwritten if necessary with the
deepest depth through which the pipeline will pass.It is used to calculate the required
wall thickness to withstand the external hydraulic pressure.
To add pipelines to a link
To add a pipeline to a link, double click on the link and click Add in the Pipeline
linking form. Once the pipeline has been added the fluid type and direction of flow can
be adjusted using the associated drop down menus.
To remove an unwanted pipeline from the link, select the desired pipeline and click
Remove.
Flow type
The flow type can be selected from the dropdown menu; options available are:
l
Oil: Single phase oil flow.
Gas:Single phase gas flow.
Gas injection:Single phase gas flow for gas injection.
Gas lift:Single phase gas flow for gas lift.
Methanol:Methanol line.
Two phase:Two phase liquid and gas flow.
Water injection: Single phase water injection flow.
Liquid:Any other single phase liquid flow such as chemicals, ethanol, etc.
Water and gas injection pipelines should always be specified as injection lines rather
than gas or liquid lines.During pipeline sizing QUE$TOR increases the diameter if
inlet pressures exceed default ANSI flange ratings. Higher default ratings are used in
sizing high pressure injection lines than for export and free-flow lines.See Pipeline
Sizing for more details.
To / From
Pipelines in a link can run in either direction, these boxes specify the direction of the
flow and can be altered by you.
To edit / view the CAPEX estimate for an individual pipeline
The details of the CAPEX estimate for each pipeline within a link can be viewed in a
number of ways:
254
QUE$TORHelp
l
From within the link form: select the desired line and click Cost.
From the field development schematic: double click on the corresponding
coloured arrow on the link.
From the cost tree: right click on the pipeline name and select Edit / view
cost estimate.
To edit / view the decommissioning estimate for an individual pipeline

The decommissioning details of each pipeline within a link can be viewed in a number
of ways:
l
From within the link form: select the desired line and click Decommission.
decommissioning.
For more information on Pipeline decommissioning see Pipeline decommissioning.
255
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Sizing
The pipeline sizing tab, shown below, allows the diameter and wall thickness of the
pipeline to be calculated. QUE$TOR calculates the diameter and wall thickness of the
pipeline and the pressure drop along its length. To do this either the inlet pressure or
the outlet pressure must be specified. QUE$TOR does not allow both the input and
output pressures to be specified. You can also change the diameter to calculate a new
inlet or outlet pressure.
General
The Flow type, Length and Water depth can't be edited in this form. They must be
edited in the Offshore Pipelines and Power Cables Links form.
The Beggs and Brill correlation is used for all flow types, single phase and
multiphase.For gas export pipelines the outlet pressure defaults to 76 bara (default
gas grid pressure).For oil export it defaults to the pressure of the last stage of
separation (or 1.5 bara if a reboiled stabiliser is used) in the upstream Topsides
component to prevent vapour breakout in the oil export lines.
Pressure drop calculations do not take in to account any variation in elevation (except
in the case of a pipeline tie-in) as flows are generally from one topsides to another or
to shore.
The initial sizing of pipelines is based on 50% of erosional velocity.The diameter is
then incremented up if inlet pressure exceeds the following limits:
256
QUE$TORHelp
l
If inlet pressure > 135 bara then line size is incremented up (one size at a time)
until inlet pressure < 135 bara or diameter reaches maximum (60).This is
designed to comply with an ANSI 900# flange rating on the oil export pump/gas
export compressor and allows for a 15% head rise to shut off.
For gas injection, gas lift, water injection & methanol lines:
l
If delivery pressure <= 210 bara and inlet pressure > 235 bara then line size is
incremented up (one size at a time) until inlet pressure <= 235 bara or the
diameter reaches a maximum of 60.This is designed to comply with an ANSI
1500# flange rating on the water pump/gas compressor and allows for a 15%
head rise to shut off.
If delivery pressure > 210 bara then line size is incremented up (one size at a
time) until inlet pressure <= 400 bara or the diameter reaches a maximum of
60.This is designed to comply with an ANSI 2500# flange rating on the water
pump/gas compressor and allows for a 15% head rise to shut off.
If you wish to exceed these flange ratings you can easily reduce the pipeline
diameter by overwriting it.The diameter will then be locked and the flange rating
limits will no longer be used.
Material
Specifies the construction material of the pipelines. Four materials are available.
Default material selection is dependent on the fluid properties.
l
Carbon steel: API 5L Grade X60 carbon steel (density 7850 kg/m3 [490 lb/ft3],
allowable stress 298 MPa [43200 psi], corrosion allowance 3 mm). This is selected
for low-corrosion fluids.
Clad 316 stainless: as per the carbon steel line but with a 3 mm internal
cladding of 316L stainless steel. This is an alternative to a solid duplex line when
acid gas are present.
Clad 825 alloy: as per the carbon steel line but with a 3 mm internal cladding of
825 alloy. This is an alternative to a solid duplex line when acid gas conditions
and/or high temperature conditions are present.
Duplex: a solid 22Cr corrosion resistant alloy (density 7800 kg/m3 [487 lb/ft3],
when acid gas has been specified.
CRA: or super duplex, is a solid 25Cr corrosion resistant alloy (density 7800
kg/m3 [487 lb/ft3], allowable stress 402 MPa [58300 psi], corrosion allowance 0
mm). This should be selected when pipelines are susceptible to pitting corrosion
e.g. seawater lines with high chloride concentrations.
The material selection will impact the material cost of the pipeline, the installation
speed of the lay vessel and the required diving support vessel (DSV) days for any tieins.
257
QUE$TORHelp
Liquid / Oil / Methanol Flowrate
The hydrocarbon portion of the liquid flow through the pipeline (at standard
conditions). The type of liquid will depend on the selected flow type and will be
disabled for pipelines that contain no hydrocarbon liquids e.g. water injection
pipelines.
Water Flowrate
The water portion of the liquid flow through the pipeline (at standard conditions). The
entry will be disabled for pipelines that contain no water e.g. gas injection pipelines.
Gas Flowrate
The gas flow through the pipeline (at standard conditions). The entry will be disabled
for pipelines that contain no gas e.g. water injection pipelines.
Pressure In
The pipeline inlet pressure.By default this is unlocked and calculated for export
pipelines.
Pressure Out
The pipeline outlet pressure.For gas export pipelines this will default to the gas grid
pressure specified in the technical database (76 bara).For oil export pipelines this
will default to the operating pressure of the last stage of separation, or 1.5 bara if a
reboiled stabiliser is used.
Fluid Temperature
This is the seabed temperature and is used in calculating the fluid properties in the
pipeline.The pipeline hydraulics are calculated assuming the pipeline is isothermal at
the seabed temperature.
Buckle Arrestors
When calculating the wall thickness QUE$TOR considers internal pressure, external
pressure and buckle propagation stress.The design internal pressure is set to 110%
of the inlet pressure.Where the wall thickness required to prevent buckle
propagation is greater than that required by internal and external pressure, QUE$TOR
will include buckle arrestors by default.The displayed wall thickness is then based
on the greater of either internal or external pressure.De-selecting buckle arrestors
will remove them from the design and recalculate the wall thickness based on all
three criteria.
If buckle arrestors are included the pipeline weight (and hence unit rate) is increased
by 10% to account for the thicker sections of pipewall. Selecting buckle arrestors will
also decrease the lay rate and therefore increase the pipeline installation time.
258
QUE$TORHelp
Nominal Diameter
Flowline nominal diameters can be adjusted using the dropdown list. Only API 5L
standard diameters between 2 inch and 72 inch are available, i.e. you can't specify
for example a diameter of 9.5 inch. For diameters of 14 inch and above the nominal
diameter is the outer diameter, for smaller diameters it is approximately the inner
diameter of lines with standard wall thickness. In both cases the actual inner
diameter is dependent on the wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
The corrosion allowance to be included in the wall thickness.The default value is
dependent on the pipeline material, i.e. 3 mm (~1/8th inch) for carbon steel and zero
for duplex and CRA. For the Clad 316 stainless option and Clad 825 alloy, this entry is
replaced by the assumed internal cladding thickness, i.e. 3mm (~1/8th inch).
Wall Thickness
When calculating the wall thickness QUE$TOR considers internal pressure, external
pressure and buckle propagation stress and selects the greater wall thickness
calculated.The design internal pressure is set to 110% of the inlet pressure.Where
the greatest wall thickness is calculated to prevent buckle propagation, QUE$TOR will
include buckle arrestors by default so that the wall thickness is based on the greater
of either internal or external pressure.
The calculated figure can be overwritten if you want to use a specific value.If the
pipeline is to be designed for a much higher design pressure than operating pressure,
e.g. for well shut-in pressure, then the diameter should be calculated using the
operating pressure and then the wall thickness should be recalculated using the
design pressure.
The wall thickness includes the corrosion allowance.
The minimum wall thickness is set to the API 5L 'Std' wall thickness and varies
depending on the nominal pipe diameter.
259
QUE$TORHelp
The installation tab enables you to specify the spread used for installation.It also
allows you to specify pipeline coatings and insulation.
Lay Vessel
The type of vessel used to install the pipeline.For each type of vessel QUE$TOR
contains lay rates and limitations according to water depth and pipeline
diameter.The available options are:
l
Reel-lay: Suitable for smaller, short length pipelines. Reels are prefabricated
onshore and laid using an S-lay or J-lay technique allowing installation in water
depths up to 3000 m.Additional time is allowed for change over of reels for longer
pipelines.The maximum pipeline diameter is 16 and then only in water depths up
to 500 m
S-lay without DP: A pipelay barge operating on anchors. Pipe lengths are
welded onboard and laid using a stinger in an S-lay configuration.The water depth
limit for lay barges using anchors is 1000 m
S-lay with DP: A pipelay barge using S-lay configuration but maintaining position
using dynamic positioning.The lay capacity for both S-lay vessels is determined
by the pipe weight that can be supported from the stinger during lay
operations.The maximum water depth for an SDP lay is 2000 m
J-lay: A heavy lift crane vessel converted for pipelay using a vertical J-lay
stinger. The vertical configuration of the stinger allows a lower tension to be used
to support the pipe during the lay operation and allows pipelay in much deeper
260
QUE$TORHelp
waters than the S-lay technique.There is a minimum water depth for J-lay
operation depending on the pipeline diameter.The maximum water depth for a Jlay is 400 0m
l
Solitaire: The latest generation of pipelay barge.This is a converted bulk carrier

designed to operate in S-lay mode.Due to the large size of this vessel and by
adjustment of the stinger angle, large diameter pipelines can be laid in
deepwater.It should be noted that at present this is the only vessel capable of
laying large diameter pipelines in deepwater up to 4000 m.
QUE$TOR chooses a default vessel based on the water depth, the pipeline diameter
and length.This can be changed using the dropdown list.
Day rates include an allowance for pipe barges and tugs required to supply pipe to Slay without DP, S-lay with DP and J-lay vessels.
Pipeline Crossings
The default is determined according to the length of the pipeline specified.If the
actual number is known then this figure should be entered.The default is one
crossing approximately every 60 km, with a maximum of six in shallow waters and a
default of no crossings for deepwater.Pipeline crossings are estimated by adding an
equivalent duration to the lay vessel to cover for installation of mattresses or
crossing frame.The duration is dependent on the pipeline diameter.
Buried Length
For pipelines to shore the default buried length is 5 km if the export end water depth
is deeper than 200 m. If the export end water depth is less than or equal to 20 0m
then the entire length of the pipeline is assumed to be buried. All other pipelines have
a default buried length of 0 km if both the export and receiving end water depths are
deeper than 200m.If either the export or receiving end water depth is less than or
equal to 200 m then the entire length of the pipeline is assumed to be
buried.Pipelines are buried to protect them from damage by commercial fishing
fleets.
Coating
Includes an external three layer polypropylene coating in the cost calculation.The
default selection is for coating to be included for all pipelines.Polypropylene is
suitable for wall temperatures up to 100C.
Weight Coat
Includes weight coating in the cost calculation.The default is based on a buoyancy
calculation for the pipeline.The weight coating is a 50-75 mm thickness layer of
concrete. Weight coating is not available when the pipeline is fully buried.
261
QUE$TORHelp
Cathodic Protection
By default QUE$TOR includes cathodic protection for carbon steel lines
only.QUE$TOR calculates the weight of sacrificial anodes required to be installed on
the pipeline according to its diameter and length.The anode weight is calculated
assuming 1 kg of anodes per square metre of external pipe surface area.
Insulation Material
The default is not to include insulation.The dropdown list allows a choice of one of
four insulation options, the selection of insulation will impact lay barge time as well
as the material cost. The first insulation option is for wet insulation:
l
Wet - PU Foam: here polyurethane (PU) foam is applied directly to the pipeline,
through spraying or wrapping. There are many variations of wet insulation
available in the market.
The next three options are for pipe-in-pipe (PiP). Here, the pipeline is inserted within
a second (carrier) pipe allowing the created intermediate annulus to be filled with
insulation material. The insulation material is protected by the carrier pipe from the
hydrostatic pressure and from water penetration. Both of which increase thermal
conductivity of the insulation and therefore reduce its effectiveness.
l
PiP - PU Foam: the annulus is filled with polyurethane (PU) foam.

PiP - Aerogel: the annulus is filled with Aerogel or a combination of Aerogel and
PU foam. This offers better thermal performance than just PU foam, thus reducing
the required thickness (annular gap). This may allow smaller diameter pipe to be
used for the carrier pipe.
PiP - ITP: the annulus is filled with Izoflex. This offers better thermal
performance than Aerogel, thus reducing the required thickness (annular gap).
This may allow smaller diameter pipe to be used for the carrier pipe. The ITP field
joint system acts as a buckle arrestor and allows quicker laying of the pipeline,
compared to other insulation options.
Note: the ITP pipe in pipe system is not suitable for duplex and CRA pipelines
due to corrosion issues at the swaged joint.
Insulation U-value
This is the overall heat transfer co-efficient for the insulation. There are four options
that cover the range of typical U values seen.
The U value selection, along with the insulation material and pipeline diameter
determines the required insulation thickness and thus the annular gap and carrier
pipe dimensions.
262
QUE$TORHelp
Export End
The Export end tab, shown below, allows you to specify the items at the end of the
pipeline from which the flow originates.
Termination details
The termination details frame allows you to specify the details or the termination of
the pipeline, this could be a riser, pipeline tie-in or shore approach.
l
Export component: the name of the component at the export end of the pipeline.
Water depth: the water depth at the export end of the pipeline. It will influence
the length of the riser and installation time. It will be disabled if the pipeline starts
at shore.
Termination type: the termination at the end of the pipeline: a Riser, Pipeline
tie-in or Shore approach. The default will be dependent on the export component.
Sub type: each of the above terminations can be further categorised. The options
available depend on the options selected above with the default influenced by the
export component and water depth. See Pipeline terminations for further details.
Diverless connections: specifies whether divers are used to make the final
connections via flanged spool pieces.If selected, diverless mechanical connectors
are assumed to be used. By default, QUE$TOR will use diverless connections in
water depths greater than 100m.
263
QUE$TORHelp
l
Subsea ESD valve: an emergency shut down (ESD) valve is included at the base
of the riser if this is selected.QUE$TOR includes ESD valves by default for new
and retrofitted rigid steel risers with gas or two phase pipelines.

A pipeline end termination, or PLET, is a subsea structure that is welded to the end of
the pipeline to provide a termination point for the end of the pipeline. Using PLETs for
a pipeline allows the line to be installed independently of the termination (e.g. riser
base), with the connections made between the PLET and the item (e.g. riser base)
when both are installed. These connections are carried out using short lengths of
pipeline called jumpers.
l
PLET required: when selected, a PLET will be allowed for at the export end of the
pipeline. The default selection is dependent on the termination type and the
diverless connections selection.
Valve: when selected, includes for an isolation valve as part of the PLET
structure. A valve will always be selected by default.
Soil conditions: used to calculate the mudmat weight for the PLET. Three choices
are available: Good, Average and Poor, which relate to the load bearing capacity
of the soil. The default soil condition is Average.
Pressure rating: the rating of the valve, if selected. Four pressure ratings are
available in QUE$TOR and the default is dependent on the maximum pressure in
the pipeline. For PLETs in subsea, the subsea design pressure is also considered.
Trawler protection: includes for a steel protection frame over the PLET. At
water depths deeper than 200 m, QUE$TOR assumes trawl protection is not
required.
Jumper type: the jumper between the PLET and connecting subsea item can be
Flexible or Rigid. The default is for rigid jumpers.
264
QUE$TORHelp
Receiving End
The Receiving end tab, shown below, allows you to specify the items at the end of the
pipeline to which the flow is being received.
Termination details
The termination details frame allows you to specify the details or the termination of
the pipeline, this could be a riser, pipeline tie-in or shore approach.
l
Receiving component: the name of the component at the receiving end of the
pipeline.
Water depth: the water depth at the receiving end of the pipeline. It will
influence the length of the riser and installation time. It will be disabled if the
pipeline ends at shore.
Termination type: the termination at the end of the pipeline: a Riser, Pipeline
tie-in or Shore approach. The default will be dependent on the export component.
Sub type: each of the above terminations can be further categorised. The options
available depend on the options selected above with the default influenced by the
receiving component and water depth. See Pipeline terminations for further
details.
Diverless connections: specifies whether divers are used to make the final
connections via flanged spool pieces.If selected, diverless mechanical connectors
are assumed to be used. By default, QUE$TOR will use diverless connections in
water depths greater than 100m.
265
QUE$TORHelp
l
Subsea ESD valve: an emergency shut down (ESD) valve is included at the base
of the riser if this is selected.QUE$TOR includes ESD valves by default for new
and retrofitted rigid steel risers with gas or two phase pipelines.

A pipeline end termination, or PLET, is a subsea structure that is welded to the end of
the pipeline to provide a termination point for the end of the pipeline. Using PLETs for
a pipeline allows the line to be installed independently of the termination (e.g. riser
base), with the connections made between the PLET and the item (e.g. riser base)
when both are installed. These connections are carried out using short lengths of
pipeline called jumpers.
l
PLET required: when selected, a PLET will be allowed for at the receiving end of
the pipeline. The default selection is dependent on the termination type and the
diverless connections selection.
Valve: when selected, includes for an isolation valve as part of the PLET
structure. A valve will always be selected by default.
Soil conditions: used to calculate the mudmat weight for the PLET. Three choices
are available: Good, Average and Poor, which relate to the load bearing capacity
of the soil. The default soil condition is Average.
Pressure rating: the rating of the valve, if selected. Four pressure ratings are
available in QUE$TOR and the default is dependent on the maximum pressure in
the pipeline. For PLETs in subsea, the subsea design pressure is also considered.
Trawler protection: includes for a steel protection frame over the PLET. At
water depths deeper than 200 m, QUE$TOR assumes trawl protection is not
required.
Jumper type: the jumper between the PLET and connecting subsea item can be
Flexible or Rigid. The default is for rigid jumpers.
266
QUE$TORHelp
About Pipeline Terminations

The terminations at either end of the pipeline can be defined within the corresponding
tab, Export end for the end of the pipeline that is exporting the flow and Receiving
end for the end of the pipeline that is receiving the flow.
The termination can be one of three main types: risers, pipeline tie-ins or a shore
approach. These types can then be further classified as shown in the table below.
Termination Sub-type
type
Riser
Summary
Steel fixed
Rigid steel riser pre-installed on the jacket or GBS,

requiring connection only.
Steel retrofit Rigid steel riser to be retrofitted onto an existing
platform.
Steel catenaryRigid steel risers in a catenary shape and typically
used for deeper water.
Flexible lazy SAn unbonded structure consisting of helically wound
metallic armour wires or tapes combined with
concentric layers of polymers and textiles in a lazy S
configuration.
J-tube
Rigid steel riser pulled up through a pre-installed Jtube. Not available in offshore pipelines.
Top tension
Rigid steel risers under tension between the seabed
and facility. Not available in pipelines.
Single leg
A combination of rigid steel and flexible risers,
hybrid
typically used in deepwater.
Pipeline tie-in Hot tap
A tie-in to existing pipeline using a hot tap device.
Pipeline to "Y" A tie-in to new pipeline or existing Y piece.
piece
Manifold pull- A tie-in to a manifold, pulling the pipeline into place for
in
final connection via mechanical connectors.
Lay-away
A tie-in to a manifold or template which is made above
connection
water before installation.
Shore
Shelving
A tie-back to shore, where there is a gentle shelving
approach
beach
beach.
Cliff/sea wall A tie-back to shore, where there is a cliff or sea wall.
Fjord
A tie-back to shore within a Fjord. Available only in
Norwegian regions.
The default termination selection is dependent on the component to which that end of
the pipeline is connected and the water depth at the termination.
267
QUE$TORHelp
Riser - Steel Fixed

The steel fixed riser type assumes that the riser is rigid steel and will be pre-installed
on the jacket or GBS. The installation time is therefore only for the connection of the
pipeline to the base of the riser. It is selected by default for fixed structures (Jacket,
GBS).
The material cost sheet section for the steel fixed riser is shown below:
Riser Linepipe
The linepipe required for the riser to run from the seabed to the platform, including
an allowance for the freeboard height. The linepipe unit rate is a composite rate per
unit length determined from the pipeline material, nominal diameter and wall
thickness.
The nominal diameter and material are based on that of the associated pipeline. The
wall thickness will, in general, be thicker than that of the pipeline due to the higher
safety factor used at close proximity to the platform.
Coating
When coating is selected, this includes for an external three layer polypropylene
coating.
Insulation
Insulation is never included by default for risers, but you can enter costs here when
insulation is assumed. The insulation cost for the pipeline could be used as a guide for
the unit rate here, provided your riser insulation is of similar design.
Anodes
The weight of sacrificial anodes required to be installed on the riser according to its
diameter and length. The anode weight is included when selected for the pipeline and
is calculated assuming 1 kg of anodes per square metre of external pipe surface
area.
268
QUE$TORHelp
Clamps
The steel fixed riser is assumed pre-installed on the structure, and therefore clamps
are not included within the estimate by default. The unit rate is based on the pipeline
diameter.

Includes the cost of all spools, flanges and fittings or mechanical connectors required
for connecting the pipeline to the termination. A set is included for the end of the
pipeline unless shore approach or lay-away connections are specified.Materials are
assumed to be compatible with the pipeline material selection.A differential for high
pressure (above ANSI 600# [>100 bar]) and low pressure (below ANSI 600# [<100
bar]) ratings is made.

Surface emergency shut down valves (ESDV) are included for all export lines as part
of the topsides instrumentation bulks. A pipeline ESDV includes all necessary valves
and fittings required to install a subsea ESDV system some 100 m or so from the base
of either the export or receiving risers, i.e. outside the drop object zone. This is
installed by diver or ROV depending on the water depth. It includes the ESDV, non
return valves, isolation valves and umbilical for operation. Materials are assumed to
be compatible with the pipeline. A differential is made for high pressure (above ANSI
600# rating [>100 bar]) and low pressure (below ANSI 600# [<100 bar]).
269
QUE$TORHelp
Riser - Steel Retrofit

The retrofit riser should be used when the pipeline termination is at an existing fixed
structure (Jacket, GBS), where the riser will be retrofitted. It assumes that riser will
be attached to the jacket using clamps, which are included in the estimate.
The material cost sheet section for the steel retrofit riser is shown below:
Riser Linepipe
thickness.
Coating
coating.
Insulation
Anodes
area.
Clamps
Clamps are included to attach the riser to the structure. The unit rate is based on the
pipeline diameter.
270
QUE$TORHelp

and fittings required to install a subsea ESDV system some 100m or so from the base
271
QUE$TORHelp
Riser - Steel Catenary

A steel catenary riser (SCR) is a prolongation of an offshore pipeline that allows the
pipeline to be connected to a vessel, or other moving facility. The rigid nature of the
pipe and allowable bend radius means that SCRs are generally only used in water
depths greater than 400m.
The material cost sheet section for the steel catenary riser is shown below:
Riser Linepipe
The linepipe required for the riser to run from the seabed to the platform in a
catenary shape, the length calculated is dependent on the water depth and pipeline
diameter. The linepipe unit rate is a composite rate per unit length determined from
the pipeline material, nominal diameter and wall thickness.
Coating
coating.
Insulation
Anodes
area.
272
QUE$TORHelp
Strakes
Steel catenary risers are prone to suffer from vortex- induced vibration, which add
significant loads to the riser. To counter this, strakes are applied to a length of the
riser. The strakes are assumed to be applied to the a length equal to half of the water
depth. The unit rate of the strakes is dependent on the pipeline diameter.
Buoyancy
The steel catenary risers within QUE$TOR are assumed to follow a simple catenary
shape, however there have been moves towards S shaped steel risers in deepwater
environments. This requires buoyancy to be attached to the riser, which you can
allow for here.
Note: you may want to adjust the riser linepipe length if you are assuming an S
shaped steel riser.
Flex Joint
The point at which the steel catenary riser connects to the platform is prone to
extreme stresses, to cope with these stresses special connectors are used. There are
two main types: Flex joints and tapered stress joints. We assume that a flex joint will
be used, but the costs can be adjusted to represent stress joints if required. The unit
rate is dependent on the riser diameter and pipeline material.


273
QUE$TORHelp
Riser - Flexible Lazy S

Flexible risers are similar to steel catenary risers, in that they allow a static pipeline
to be connected to be vessel, or other moving facility. However, their properties
allow much smaller bend radii and therefore they can be used in shallow water. Many
shapes of flexible riser exist, but we assume a lazy S using a discrete buoyancy
element.
The material cost sheet section for the flexible lazy S riser is shown below:
Riser Linepipe
The linepipe required for the riser to run from the seabed to the platform in the lazy S
shape, the length calculated is dependent on the water depth and pipeline diameter.
The linepipe unit rate is dependent on the nominal diameter and the design pressure.
Riser Arch Buoy System

Provides buoyancy to the middle of the riser, giving it the S shape. For lazy S risers
this is provided by an single buoyancy unit that is tethered to the seabed. The unit
rate is based on the diameter of the line.


274
QUE$TORHelp
Riser - J-Tube
The J-tube riser is a rigid steel riser pulled up through a pre-installed J-tube which is
part of the steel jacket structure. This riser type is not only available within the
subsea component.
The material cost sheet section for the J-tube riser is shown below:
Riser Linepipe
thickness.
Coating
coating.
Insulation
Anodes
area.
275
QUE$TORHelp
Clamps
The riser is assumed to be pulled through the pre-installed J-tube, therefore clamps
are not included within the estimate by default. The unit rate is based on the pipeline
diameter.


276
QUE$TORHelp
Riser - Top Tension

Used on TLPs and spars, top-tensioned risers are a completely vertical riser system
that terminates directly below the facility. They are generally used for production
risers for wells drilled directly from the platform, but can be used for subsea tiebacks to these facilities. Therefore, top tension risers are only available in the subsea
component.
The material cost sheet section for the top tension riser is shown below:
Riser Linepipe
thickness.
Coating
coating.
Insulation
Anodes
277
QUE$TORHelp
area.
Tensioning equipment, in the form of motion compensators, are required at the top of
the riser to allow for the vessel motions. The cost of this equipment is dependent on
the pipeline diameter.
Buoyancy Cans
Buoyancy cans can be used as an alternative to tensioning equipment to remove the
vessel motions from the risers, while maintaining the required tension. Buoyancy
cans are never included by default for top tension risers but can be added as
required.
Lower Assembly
The lower assembly provides the anchor point for the vertical riser pipe and allows
connection to the pipeline, typically via a jumper. The lower joint between the riser
pipe and the lower assembly is exposed to high stresses, the assembly cost includes
for a taper joint to handle these.
Foundation
The lower assembly is fixed to the seabed using suction piles, which are allowed for
here.


278
QUE$TORHelp
Riser - Single Leg Hybrid

The single leg hybrid riser (SLHR) is the simplest design of hybrid riser, comprising a
rigid riser with flexible pipeline that allows the riser to be connected to a vessel, or
other moving facility. It is sometimes known by the registered term: single leg offset
riser (SLOR) and allows a single pipeline to be connected to the surface facilities.
Note: bundled hybrid risers, or riser towers, are currently not available within
QUE$TOR
The material cost sheet section for the single leg hybrid riser is shown below:
Flexible Linepipe
The flexible section of linepipe runs from the upper assembly to the vessel. A fixed
length of 500 m is assumed by default but can be adjusted as required. The linepipe
unit rate is dependent on the nominal diameter and the design pressure.
Rigid Linepipe
The rigid section of linepipe is required to run from the seabed to the upper
assembly, which is assumed to be 100 m below the surface. The length can be
adjusted if required. The linepipe unit rate is a composite rate per unit length
determined from the pipeline material, nominal diameter and wall thickness.
Coating
coating for the rigid length of pipe.
279
QUE$TORHelp
Insulation
Anodes
area.
Upper Assembly
The upper assembly provides the interface between the rigid and flexible linepipe
sections. The unit rate is dependent on the riser diameter and the material of the
rigid section.
Buoyancy Cans
Buoyancy cans are used to tension the rigid section of the riser. The weight is based
on the weight of the rigid pipe.
Lower Assembly
The lower assembly provides the anchor point for the rigid riser pipe and allows
connection to the pipeline, typically via a jumper. The lower joint between the riser
pipe and the lower assembly is exposed to high stresses, the assembly cost includes
for a taper joint to handle these.
Foundation
The lower assembly is fixed to the seabed using suction piles, which are allowed for
here.


280
QUE$TORHelp
281
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Tie-In
Fluids being exported can be tied into existing pipelines, provided that there is
sufficient spare capacity. QUE$TOR provides four tie-in options:
l
Hot tap: a hole is cut into an operating pipeline, using a hot tap device, which
allows for a new branch connection into the existing pipe without any interruption
to the flow.
Pipeline to "Y" piece: a Y piece is assumed to be present as part of the existing
pipeline, allowing the pipeline to be tied in to this fitting.
Manifold pull-in: a tie-in to an existing subsea manifold. The pipeline is laid
close to manifold and pulled into place for final connection via mechanical
connectors.
Lay-away connection: a tie-in to a manifold or template which is made above
water before installation. The pipeline is then laid away from this point.
Pipeline Tie-In
The materials required for the tie-in. This is assumed to be zero for all tie-ins except
the hot tap, where the cost includes for the hot tap machine and valve.


282
QUE$TORHelp
283
QUE$TORHelp
Shore Approach
Fluids being exported to shore require a special consideration of the costs of
installing the pipeline close to the shore. A lump sum is used within the Installation
section of the cost sheet to cover the cost the shore approach.This is based on the
type of shore approach selected and includes the cost of blasting if cliff or fjord is
selected.
Note: shore approach cost using horizontal drilling are not currently available
within QUE$TOR. If this option is required, you will need to adjust the costs as
required.
Shore Approach Materials

The materials required for the shore approach. This is set to zero for all options as
the lump sum within the installation section of the cost sheet is assumed to cover any
material requirements. If required, you can add costs for the shore approach
materials.

284
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline End Terminations (PLETs)

A pipeline end termination (PLET) is a subsea structure that is welded to the end of
the pipeline. PLETs are used to allow the subsea structures (such as a template or
riser base) to be installed independently of the pipeline, with the connections made
between the PLET and the item when both are installed using jumpers.
A PLET can be added to either end of a pipeline or subsea flowline, with the default
selection dependent on the water depth and the riser type.
The material cost sheet section for PLETs is accessed through the hyperlink on the
main cost sheet and is shown below for the export end:
Note : when there are multiple flowlines within the link, the PLET cost sheet
shows the total weight and cost for all PLETs.
Structure
The PLET structure consists of a basic sled that will carry the required termination
assembly. The weight of the structure is dependent on the pipeline diameter.
Valve
The valve is assumed to be a manual ROV operated isolation valve used to isolate the
pipeline during commissioning and other non operating scenarios. The cost of the
valve is dependent on the pipeline diameter, PLET design pressure and pipeline
material.
Protection Structure
An over-trawlable steel structure providing protection from fishing activities and
dropped objects
Mudmat
The PLET foundations provide support for the PLET structure on the seabed. They are
sized to account for the structural dead weight of the PLET and the soil conditions.
285
QUE$TORHelp
Jumper
The jumper provides the connection between the PLET and subsea item (manifold /
riser base). The jumper can be either rigid or flexible, with the default based on the
pipeline material. The jumper is assumed to be of the same diameter and pressure
rating as the pipeline or subsea flowline.
Jumper Connectors
The jumpers require connectors at either end to allow them to be connected to the
PLET and other subsea item. The unit rate for the connector is dependent on the
jumper pressure rating and water depth.
286
QUE$TORHelp
Clicking on Installation durations in the offshore pipelines inputs opens the
Pipeline installation days form.
Pipelay Spreads
Pipeline installation days for the lay vessel specified in the Installation tab of the
main inputs will be calculated by default. Five pipelay spread vessels are available:
Reel-lay, S-lay without dynamic positioning (DP), S-lay with DP, J-lay and Solitaire.
The number of days assumed for laying the pipeline is dependent on the length of
pipeline and speed of the pipelay vessel.For each spread type, the speed at which
that class of vessel operates is dependent on the pipeline diameter, water depth,
material of construction, a regional lay rate factor, insulation requirement and buckle
arrestor selection. If pipeline crossings are specified, then additional time will be
included for these.
The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the pipelay spread is given
separately.

The Diving Support Vessel (DSV) installation duration includes tie-ins, testing and
commissioning. The tie-in duration includes export and receiving risers (either steel
or flexible), shore approach, tie-in to an existing pipeline and diverless connectors
where applicable. The DSV also installs ESD valves when selected, including setting
up, connecting and tying back the umbilical, testing, installation of protection
structure, clearing up and moving away.
The testing and commissioning duration is related to the diameter and length of the
pipeline and includes flooding with inhibited seawater, hydrotesting, dewatering,
drying and moving on and off station.
The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the diving support vessel is given
separately.
287
QUE$TORHelp
Trench Vessel
An allowance for a trenching vessel required when some or all of the pipeline is
buried. The trenching duration is dependent on the buried length of the pipeline and
whether there is a shore approach.
The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the trenching vessel is given
separately.
Survey Vessel
A composite duration for the survey vessels that are required. It includes pre-design
survey, pre-install survey, post lay survey and post trench survey.
The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the surveying vessel is given
separately.
Dredge Vessel
A duration should be manually added if it is considered that the seabed conditions
require dredging.No duration is calculated automatically.The mobilisation /
demobilisation time assumed for the dredging vessel is given separately
Rock Install Vessel

A duration should be manually added if it is considered that rock installation is
required for pipeline stabilisation or protection purposes.No duration is calculated
automatically.
The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the rock installation vessel is
given separately.
288
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
Materials costs relate to the pipeline dimensions, anodes, valves, fittings, connectors
and risers.
Linepipe
The linepipe unit rate is a composite rate per unit length determined from the
diameter, pipeline material and wall thickness.It includes an allowance for buckle
arrestors, if selected.The pipelines are assumed to be seamless for 14 inch diameter
and below and seam welded for 16 inch diameter and above.
Coating
coating.
Weight Coating
When weight coating is selected, this includes for coating of the pipeline with a 50-75
mm thickness layer of concrete.
289
QUE$TORHelp
Insulation
The insulation costs are dependent on the insulation material and U values selection,
for wet insulation there is single cost that covers the insulation materials, application
to the pipeline and field joint materials. For pipe in pipe insulation selections there
are two costs:
l
Carrier pipe: the carrier pipe is assumed to be carbon steel, with the diameter
set to the smallest API standard diameter pipe that will contain the inner pipe and
insulation. The cost is a composite rate per unit length determined from the
pipeline material and wall thickness.The pipelines are assumed to be seamless
for 14 inch diameter and below and seam welded for 16 inch diameter and above.
Insulation + fabrication: this covers the insulation materials, application into
the annulus and field joint materials.
Onshore Welding and Reeling

A percentage of the pipeline cost is added for the spool yard cost when a Reel-lay is
used for pipelay, this covers for welding the pipe and winding it on to reels.
Terminations
The cost of the termination at each end of the pipeline is dependent on the
termination selected. See Pipeline terminations for more details of the cost structure
and assumptions for each termination type.
PLETs
The cost of a pipeline end termination (PLET) will be included for each end of the
pipeline if selected. See PLETs for further details on the assumptions and cost
structure.
Freight
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total material costs. It
includes the cost of packaging and transporting equipment from the manufacturer to
the construction yard.You can modify the freight percentage; the default is
dependent on where the equipment is procured (in region or out of region).
290
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
The installation costs are calculated based on the spreads required to install the
specified pipeline. They include a lump sum for the shore approach if selected.
Pipelay Spreads
Each of the five pipelay spread vessels: Reel-lay, S-lay without dynamic positioning
(DP), S-lay with DP, J-lay and Solitaire has a line item for the total time to lay the
pipe and mobilise / demobilise the pipelay vessel. The number of days for each
vessel is picked up from the Installation durations form. The unit rate cost for each
class of vessel includes labour, fuel, consumables and vessel support systems.

The DSV unit cost includes for support services, labour, waiting on weather and
consumables and is picked up from the Installation durations form. The duration
shown in the cost sheet is the sum of the DSV installation and vessel mobilisation /
demobilisation days.

An allowance for the cost of the equipment required on the DSV during testing and
commissioning.The testing and commissioning duration is dependent on the pipeline
diameter and length. Additional time is allowed for waiting and preparation plus
mobilisation / demobilisation of the equipment into the field.
Trench Vessel
An allowance for a trenching vessel required when some or all of the pipeline is
buried.The trenching duration is dependent on the buried length of the pipeline and
whether there is a shore approach. The duration shown in the cost sheet is the sum of
the trench activity and vessel mobilisation / demobilisation days.
291
QUE$TORHelp
Survey Vessel
A composite duration and all inclusive day rate for the survey vessels required for the
pre-design survey, pre-install survey, post lay survey and post trench survey. The
duration shown in the cost sheet is the sum of the survey activity and vessel sail and
return times.
Dredge Vessel
A duration should be manually added if it is considered that the ground conditions
require dredging. No duration is calculated automatically.The duration shown in the
cost sheet is the sum of the dredging activity and vessel mobilisation / demobilisation
days.
Rock Install Vessel

A duration should be manually added if it is considered rock installation is required
for pipeline stabilisation or protection purposes. No duration is calculated
automatically. The duration shown in the cost sheet is the sum of the rock installation
and vessel mobilisation / demobilisation days.
Shore Approach
A lump sum to cover the cost of a shore approach.This is based on the type of shore
approach selected and includes the cost of blasting if cliff or fjord is selected.
Note: in earlier versions of QUE$TOR the various vessel activity and

mobilisation / demobilisation days were displayed as separate line items in the cost
sheet. If you want to preserve the installation costs from a pre-QUE$TOR 2012 Q3
project cost estimate you should lock both the installation activity and mobilisation /
demobilisation quantities and unit rates in the old project before opening it in the
current version. The QUE$TOR cost sheet will then display the sum of the installation
and mobilisation / demobilisation days as a single line item per spread.
292
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
include design, project management, certification, insurance and a contingency.
Design
The number of man-hours required to carry out the design of the cables.It covers the
hours for project specification, special studies, detail design, follow on engineering,
purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project control, QA and
documentation during the detailed design phase.
The unit rate incorporates all wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel,
payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility services,
depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration) project expenses and
equipment.
It includes vendor data delivery of items to the yard, insurance up to delivery,
guarantees and import duties.
The design hours are calculated based on the length and voltage of the cables and
risers and include for setting up the design team.
Project Management
The project management man-hours are calculated based on the length and voltage
of the cables and risers and include for setting up the project management team.
293
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
A percentage of the total pipeline component cost to cover certification of the design,
materials and construction of the development by a recognised certifying authority
(e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).Certification is only included by default for European and
North American countries where it is common practice.A certification percentage is
included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost databases. All other cost
databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
A percentage of the total cable cost to cover insurance during all phases of the
project up to first oil including transportation, construction, installation, testing and
commissioning. Personnel liability insurances are covered in the respective cost
centres.
Contingency
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total material, installation, design,
project management, insurance and certification costs to bring the component cost
estimate to a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
294
QUE$TORHelp
About Offshore Power Cables

The offshore power cables component allows calculation of cable sizes, materials,
installation, design and project management costs for inter-platform or power from
shore (offshore portion only) power cables and riser systems.The power cables are
assumed to be DC for transmission of power and the conductors are accordingly sized
based on the power and selected voltage rating.The materials costs include for
cable, risers, shore approaches and gravel cover. Installation spreads can either be
for buried or surface laid cable and include rock install and survey vessels.
Allowances are made for transformers and converters in topsides electrical
distribution equipment.
295
QUE$TORHelp
Power Cable Links

Offshore power cables can be specified within a link between two components using
the Pipelines and power cable link form. To open the form, double click on the link
within the main schematic. The example below shows a two phase line going from
Topsides 2 (WHP) to Topsides 1 (CPP), with water injection and gas injection
pipelines flowing in the opposite direction in the upper frame and a power cable from
CPP to WHP in the lower frame.
Length
The length of the link is used to determine the cable material and installation costs.
Note: All power cables within a link are assumed to follow the same route.
Water depth
This defaults to the field water depth, but should be overwritten if necessary with the
deepest depth through which the power cables will pass.It is used to calculate the
installation duration.
To add power cables to a link
296
QUE$TORHelp
To add a power cable to a link, double click on the link and click Add in the Power
cables section of the linking form. Once the cable has been added the direction of
flow of power can be adjusted using the associated drop down menus.
To remove an unwanted cable from the link, select the desired cable and click
Remove.
To / From
Power cables in a link can run in either direction, these boxes specify the direction of
the flow of power and can be altered by you.
To edit / view the CAPEX estimate for an individual power cable
The details of the CAPEX estimate for each power cable within a link can be viewed in
a number of ways:
l
coloured arrow (grey) on the link.
From the cost tree: right click on the power cable name and select Edit / view
cost estimate.
To edit / view the decommissioning estimate for an individual power

cable
The decommissioning details of each power cable within a link can be viewed in a
number of ways:
l
From within the link form: select the desired power cable and click
Decommission.
From the cost tree: right click on the power cable name and select Edit / view
decommissioning.
297
QUE$TORHelp
Cable Sizing
The offshore cables primary tab, shown below, allows the conductor size of the
offshore cable to be calculated. QUE$TOR calculates the conductor size based on the
power and the voltage rating. It also allows you specify if the cable is to be buried
and/or if it is to be covered with gravel.
General
The Length and Water depth can't be edited in this form. They must be edited in the
Offshore Pipelines and Power Cables Links form.
Power
The power is the Total power in the receiving Topsides provided the Distribution
only option has been selected in the Power form.
Voltage
The default voltage is based on the power transmission being estimated. If you want
the cable rated for a different voltage it must be manually adjusted using the
dropdown list. Typical power transmission voltages in the range 6.6 kV to 150 kV are
available.
Conductor Size
The conductor size is calculated depending on the Power and Voltage defined above.
The size is independent of the cable length or water depth. The size increases with
increasing power and decreases with increasing voltage. Losses due to high current
or high voltage are allowed for in the range of typical platform power transmission
although they are not explicitly calculated.
Burial
The cable is assumed to be buried in all except ultra deep waters to prevent it from
being damaged by trawling or mooring lines. When this option is selected a cable lay
298
QUE$TORHelp
spread with burial tool is selected otherwise a cheaper cable lay spread without burial
tool is selected.
Rock Installation
Rock installation (gravel) to cover the cable and keep it in place is never selected by
default. If selected then the entire length of cable is assumed to be covered with
gravel.
299
QUE$TORHelp
Termination details
The Termination details tab, shown below, allows you to specify the termination type
and water depth at both ends of the cable.
Export End
l
Export component: the name of the component the power cable is going from.
Termination type: the termination at the export end of the cable. The options
are either Riser or Shore approach. The default will be dependent on the export
component.
Water depth: the water depth at the export end of the cable. It will influence the
length of the cable riser and installation time. It is disabled if the cable comes
from shore.
Receiving End
l
Receiving component: the name of the component the power cable is going to.
Termination type: the termination at the receiving end of the cable. The options
are either Riser or Shore approach. The default will be dependent on the export
component.
Water depth: the water depth at the receiving end of the cable. It will influence
the length of the cable riser and installation time. It is disabled if the cable comes
from shore.
300
QUE$TORHelp
Clicking on Installation durations in the offshore cables inputs opens the Power
cable installation days form.
Cable laying
The cable lay duration is the sum of the days required to lay the cable and install both
the export and receiving end risers. Riser installation entails lowering a cable lay
vessel chain, riser pull-in and connection, cable anchoring, plugging the J-tube and
installing the cable riser. Additional allowance is included for testing and
commissioning the cable post installation. A weather downtime factor is applied to
the total number of days.
The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the cable lay spread is given
separately.
Survey Vessel
A composite duration for the survey vessels that are required. It includes pre-design
survey, pre-install survey, post lay survey and post trench survey.
The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the surveying vessel is given
separately.
Rock Install Vessel

An allowance for a rock installation vessel if rock installation is included in the
primary input. This is for cable stabilization and/or protection. A duration for the rock
installation is determined based on length of the cable minus riser lengths.
The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the rock installation vessel is
given separately.
301
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
Materials costs relate to the cable dimensions and voltage, gravel cover, connectors
and risers.
Cable
The cable unit rate is for bi-pole, solid core power cable suitable for subsea service.
Gravel
When rock installation is selected, this includes for gravel cover over the entire
length of the cable on the seabed. If cover is only required over part of the cable the
quantity of rock required should be factored down proportionally.
Export End Riser

When the export end of the cable is anything other than the shore this is the length of
cable from the seabed to the lowest deck on the topsides, i.e. water depth +
freeboard height.
Export End Connection System

The cost is for the termination kit connecting the cable riser to the topsides plus pullin and hang off equipment, J-tube seal and bend restrictor and the splice repair joint.
The cost varies depending on the cable size, voltage and termination type (riser or
shore approach).
Receiving End Riser

When the receiving end of the cable is anything other than the shore this is the length
of cable from the seabed to the lowest deck on the topsides, i.e. water depth +
freeboard height.
302
QUE$TORHelp
Receiving End Connection System
The cost is for the termination kit connecting the cable riser to the topsides plus pullin and hang off equipment, J-tube seal and bend restrictor and the splice repair joint.
The cost varies depending on the cable size, voltage and termination type (riser or
shore approach).
Landfall System
The cost is always zero by default. You can optionally add in your own cost for the
landfall system dependent on the option required, e.g. surface laid/trenched or
horizontal directional drilled.
Freight
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total material costs. It
the construction yard.You can modify the freight percentage; the default is
303
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
The installation costs are calculated based on the spreads required to install the
specified power cable.
Cable Lay Spread

The number of days for each operation; cable laying, testing/commissioning and
mobilisation / demobilisation is picked up from the Installation durations form. This
includes an overall waiting-on-weather allowance. The unit rate cost includes the
vessel hire, labour, fuel, consumables and vessel support systems.
Rock Install Vessel

The number of days to install gravel over the cable and mobilise / demobilise the
rock install vessel is picked up from the Installation durations form. This includes a
waiting-on-weather allowance. The unit rate cost includes the vessel hire, labour,
fuel, consumables and vessel support systems.
Survey Vessel
The survey vessel day rate includes for support services, labour and consumables
and is picked up from the Installation durations form. The duration shown in the cost
sheet is the sum of the surveying and vessel mobilisation / demobilisation days
including a waiting-on-weather allowance.

An allowance for the cost of the equipment required on the cable lay spread during
testing and commissioning.The testing and commissioning duration is dependent on
the cable size and length. Additional time is allowed for waiting and preparation plus
mobilisation / demobilisation of the equipment into the field.
Shore Approach
A lump sum to cover the cost of installing a shore approach can optionally be
manually entered.This will depend on the option required, e.g. surface laid/trenched
or horizontal directional drilled.
304
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
Design
The number of man-hours required to carry out the design of the power cables.It
covers the hours for project specification, special studies, detail design, follow on
engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project control, QA and
documentation during the detailed design phase.
The unit rate incorporates all wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel,
payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility services,
depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration) project expenses and
equipment.
It includes vendor data delivery of items to the yard, insurance up to delivery,
The design hours are calculated based on the length and voltage rating of the cables
with an allowance to set up the cable design team.
Project Management
The project management hours are calculated based on the length and voltage rating
of the cables with an allowance to set up the cable project management team.
305
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
A percentage of the total pipeline component cost to cover certification of the design,
materials and construction of the development by a recognised certifying authority
(e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).Certification is only included by default for European and
North American countries where it is common practice.A certification percentage is
included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost databases. All other cost
databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
A percentage of the total pipeline cost to cover insurance during all phases of the
project up to first oil including transportation, construction, installation, testing and
commissioning. Personnel liability insurances are covered in the respective cost
centres.
Contingency
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total material, installation, design,
project management, insurance and certification costs to bring the component cost
306
QUE$TORHelp
About Semi-submersibles
The semi-submersible is one of six types of floating production substructures
available in QUE$TOR.Other floaters available include monohull shipshape (tanker)
vessels, TLPs (Tension Leg Platforms), spar buoys, cylindrical hulls and barges.
The cost of a purpose built (new-build) permanent production semi can be estimated
as can the cost of purchasing a suitable semi-submersible drilling rig and converting
it for permanent production.The semi-submersible component includes costs for the
vessel purchase, mooring system, upgrading of converted vessels, installation and
project management.
307
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The semi-submersible inputs are shown below.
Semi-submersible Type
Costs for a new-build semi-submersible include those for the hull, complete with
marine/ballast, deck and primary steelwork.Costs are given as lump sum values for
each generation of semi-submersible. These costs will vary depending on precise
specifications, fabrication, location and prevailing market conditions, so care should
be exercised.Mooring lines are included as a separate cost item.
Costs for conversion cover the purchase and upgrade of an existing semi-submersible
drilling vessel to a condition ready to receive production facilities.The costs for
purchase of the vessel are given as a lump sum value, which is subject to variation
depending on market conditions, age and condition of vessel and the current
certification situation. The weights and costs for upgrading allow for strip-out of
redundant facilities (such as drilling facilities if removed), and modification or
renovation of existing systems.
These weights and costs are based on analysis of detailed conversion estimates, for
conversion of a vessel up to 5 years old, in average condition.They may vary
depending on vessel condition.Conversions include general and safety upgrades and
additional buoyancy, i.e. rocket columns or sponsons for semi-submersibles.
Upgrades to mooring systems and an extension to the mooring lines are included for
vessels if necessitated by water depth or environmental conditions.
308
QUE$TORHelp
Semi-submersible Generation
Semi-submersible platforms are based on four generations whether new-build or
conversions and can include drilling facilities.
Selection of the Default Semi-Submersible generation is based on the additional load
and water depth.The additional load is dependent on the topsides weight, number of
risers, upgrade material weight, weight of moorings and whether drilling facilities are
retained or removed.
For a given generation of semi-submersible buoyancy aids are added if the supported
load exceeds the Maximum Supported Load.The weight of Recommended Maximum
Buoyancy Weights vary for 2nd, 3rd, and 4th generation semi-submersibles.If the
calculated weight of buoyancy aids exceeds these limits then a later generation will
be picked by default, although you can still select an earlier generation if desired. If
the water depth exceeds the Maximum Water Depth for the selected generation of
semi-submersible the length of the moorings is increased, using either wire or
rope.The number of chains corresponds to the mooring system supplied for drilling
service.When operating as a production semi-submersible this is upgraded to a 12point mooring in all cases see Mooring systems.

The operating weight is passed from the associated topsides (if any) and is used to
select the generation of semi-submersible required.
Water Depth
Defaults to the field development water depth but may be modified for the location of
the semi-submersible. This is used to calculate mooring costs.
Number of Risers
The number of flexible risers is automatically picked up from the associated topsides
component with an allowance for product export. The number of risers is used to
calculate the additional load on the semi-submersible and from this any additional
buoyancy requirements.The semi-submersible is assumed to be required to support
up to 100 m of each riser. Sections of riser extending deeper than this are assumed
to be supported by their own riser arch and buoy arrangement.
Conversion Upgrades
The following upgrades are only applicable to conversions, for new-builds they are
set to zero.
l
General upgrade: Upgrade to existing quarters, control rooms, deck cranes,

utility systems, power generation systems and safety systems.
Marine upgrade: Materials required for upgrades to ballast, navigation and
propulsion systems.
309
QUE$TORHelp
l
Drilling upgrade: Materials required to modify an existing drilling derrick. If no

drilling facilities are included then this is the weight of materials required to install
a light-weight wireline derrick.

The duration of the vessel sea trials including inclination testing and final
commissioning of marine systems.The cost includes allowances for support vessels,
marine and commissioning crew.
Additional Load
This is the supported load in excess of the maximum supported load without
buoyancy. This is used to calculate the additional buoyancy aid required. The
supported load is the sum of the following:
l
Topsides operating weight.

Supported risers weight, this is assumed to be 50 tonnes for each riser to allow a
supported length of 100 m.
General upgrade weight, this is only added for conversions and is dependent on
the generation.
Marine upgrade weight, for conversions only.
Drilling upgrade weight, this is 100 tonnes if the rig is retained or 300 tonnes if the
rig is removed, it is for conversions only.
Supported mooring lines weight, this is the weight in water of the mooring lines
selected.
If drilling is removed, 500 tonnes is subtracted from the calculated load.
If additional facilities, not identified in the topsides, are to be added to the vessel
(e.g. a future temporary load) and the vessel is required to accommodate this, then
add an allowance to the additional load to recalculate the buoyancy requirements.
Buoyancy Aid
Buoyancy aids, such as rocket columns and sponsons, are included by default if the
additional load exceeds the capacity of the semi-submersible generation selected.
The weight of buoyancy aids is calculated by applying a factor to the additional load.
Drilling Facilities
The semi-submersible purchased for conversion is assumed to have a full drilling rig.
When this box is checked these drilling facilities will remain on the platform after
conversion. When unchecked then the drilling rig is assumed to be removed and
replaced with a workover rig. This box will be disabled for new-build semis as a drill
rig is not assumed in the cost.
310
QUE$TORHelp
Marine transport
Semi-submersibles tend to fabricated in S. E. Asia and then transported to the
topsides construction site for mating prior to be being towed out to the field. The
values below allow you to specify the method of transportation to the mating site and
the distance the semi-submersible needs to transported.
l
Method: For semi-submersibles four transport methods are available in QUE$TOR

namely; Barge tow, Flat-deck HTV, Wet tow and None. The default is a Flat-deck
Heavy Transport Vessel (HTV) which is self propelled. A Barge tow is a flat top
barge which is towed by two ocean-going tugs. Wet tow is used when the semisubmersible is towed by a number of ocean-going tugs. None is used when the
semi-submersible and topsides are fabricated in the same construction yard. The
transport speed varies depending on the method chosen; Flat-deck HTV being the
fastest and Wet tow the slowest.
Distance: This is an estimate of the distance the semi-submersible will have to
be transported from its construction yard to the topsides fabrication yard
(assumed to be close to the installation site). The distance is based on standard
sea voyage routes making use of the Suez and Panama canals where appropriate.
This is used in conjunction with the transport speed to calculate the Transport from
fabrication yard duration.
Note: If the selected transportation method is None then the distance entry will
be disabled as it is not relevant.
311
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring System
The mooring system tab allows the mooring system to be specified.
Mooring Type
Three options are available: chain, chain and rope and chain and wire.
Chain
For water depths </= 300 m the mooring system will default to chain only moorings
as the benefits of using rope or wire for the middle section are typically offset by the
cost of the terminations. Chain only mooring lines follow a natural catenary profile in
the section below the fairleads and can be anchored to the seabed using either drag
embedded anchors (DEA) or suction piled anchors (SPA). The section above the
fairleads allows for chain in the chain locker and over the windlasses. The length of
chain on the seabed varies between 30 and 150 m dependent on the anchor type and
the water depth.
Chain & Rope
Chain and rope mooring lines have a taut profile, but can still be considered to be
composed of three sections. Due to the taut fashion of the mooring lines DEAs are not
suitable for use with chain and rope moorings and SPAs will always be used:
l
Top Section: Similar to chain and wire mooring, again it is highly undesirable for
the rope to be exposed to air.
312
QUE$TORHelp
l
Middle Section: The main length of rope. The rope is attached in a taut fashion to
the suction piled anchor with sections of chain at the top and bottom to protect the
rope. The rope is used in part as a restoring force as the elasticity of the rope pulls
the semi-submersible back into position should it move. The proportion of rope
varies as a function of water depth, increasing as the water depth increases.
Bottom Section: A length of chain that connects to the rope some distance above
the seabed and terminates at the anchor.
Chain & Wire

Chain and wire mooring lines follow a semi-taut catenary profile and can be anchored
to the seabed using either drag embedded anchors (DEA) or suction piled anchors
(SPA).Chain and wire mooring lines are assumed to be composed of three sections:
l
Top Section:80 m of chain which connects the vessel and the wire section.This
chain reduces wear on the wire in the splash zone and prevents it from being
exposed to the air.The chain extends from the chain locker over the windlasses
down to sea level and includes a section to take it below the splash zone.If a
drilling rig is included an additional 20 m of chain is included in the lockers to
increase manoeuvrability.
Middle Section: This section is the main wire length. It is attached to the chain at
the top and bottom using mooring terminations. Wire is significantly lighter than
chain and so requires less buoyancy to be built into a semi-submersible. The
proportion of wire varies as a function of water depth, increasing as the water
depth increases.
Bottom Section: A length of chain that connects to the wire some distance above
the seabed and terminates at the anchor. This chain is used as an additional
weight to provide restoring force to the spar and reduce the force applied to the
anchor.It also minimises wear on the wire in the thrashing zone on the
seabed.SPAs can withstand a greater force before any movement of the anchor
occurs than DEAs and consequently require less chain on the seabed.
Anchor Type
QUE$TOR includes costs for drag embedded anchors or suction piled anchors. Suction
piled anchors are always selected for chain and rope moorings. Drag embedded
anchors are selected by default for chain and chain and wire moorings in water
depths up to 500 m.In deeper waters, suction piles are selected in all regions except
South America and the North Sea for chain and wire moorings as large anchor
handling tugs are routinely available for these regions.
Soil Condition
The soil condition is used to calculate the size of the anchors required. Three choices
are available.
l
Good: the soil has high load bearing capacity
Average: the soil has average load bearing capacity
313
QUE$TORHelp
l
Poor:the soil has low load bearing capacity.
Option selection is made by selecting from the dropdown menu. Depending on the
selection anchor weight is factored up or down from that calculated for average
conditions.
Typical mild, moderate and severe environmental conditions are stored for each
region. Selection of severe, moderate or mild conditions updates the default wave
height, wind speed and tidal current. By default severe conditions are chosen.
l
Wave height: QUE$TOR mooring lines are calibrated assuming the highest
unchanged.The significant wave height (50 year return period) is often known and
l
50 year return wave height = 1.86 x significant wave height
Given a 100 year return value, the corresponding 50 year Wave Height for use in
QUE$TOR can be estimated by factoring by 1.86/1.95 = 0.95.
l
Wind speed: The wind speed is the value measured at a reference height of 10m
above stillwater and for a 50 year return period. QUE$TOR mooring lines are
estimated assuming a design speed appropriate to a 5 second gust. Frequently,
mean wind speeds averaged over 1 hour or 1 minute are known. The
The 50 year return wind speed can be estimated from the 100 year return period
as: 50 year speed = 100 year speed/1.05
Tidal current: The tidal current is a surface value. The algorithm estimates a
value for the storm surge current (surface value) as 3% of the wind speed.The
tidal current rarely exceeds 0.3 m/s along any open coastline (Ref API RP 2A) but
local shoreline or seabed features can increase values to 1.0 m/s or more.In
more restricted waters (e.g. North Sea) values between 0.2 and 0.8 m/s are
typical.
Mooring Chain Size

The mooring chain size is determined based on the environmental conditions and on
generation of semi-submersible selected. If chain and wire mooring lines are used
then the wire size is assumed to be the same as the chain size.If chain and rope
mooring lines are used then the Rope Size is selected according to chain size.
The chain size does not vary with small changes in environmental conditions, only a
large change will affect an increase or decrease in chain size.Combinations of effect
are not taken into account, i.e. a large increase in any one condition will cause a
change in size but a moderate change in all three conditions would not cause a
change although it may require one in reality.
314
QUE$TORHelp
Note: QUE$TOR only holds cost data for the chain and rope sizes shown in Chain
and Rope Sizes, no other sizes can be costed.

By default 12 mooring lines are included for all types of semi-submersible.If this is
overwritten the mooring lines are resized to provide the required load bearing
capacity, although you should note that the chain size will never exceed 6.5 inches. If
the mooring chain size is altered, the number of mooring lines is recalculated to
maintain a constant load bearing capacity.
Chain Length
The chain length is dependent on the water depth, mooring type and anchor type. The
length displayed is the total length of chain for all the mooring lines.
Rope Length
A rope length is only displayed if the mooring type is Chain & rope. The rope length
is dependent on the water depth and anchor type. When a combination of chain and
rope has been used a single section of rope connects the upper length of chain
attached to the offshore loading buoy with the section of chain on the seabed attached
to the anchor for each mooring line.
The length displayed is the total length of rope for all the mooring lines.
Wire Length
A wire length is only displayed if the mooring type is Chain & wire. The wire length
wire has been used a single section of wire connects the upper length of chain
The length displayed is the total length of wire for all the mooring lines.
315
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
The equipment cost estimate is shown below.
Vessel Purchase
The cost identified here is a lump sum cost for the purchase of the semi-submersible.
It is either the cost of a new-build cost or an existing vessel suitable for conversion.
l
New-builds: The cost includes allowances for the construction and certification of
the vessel to a condition ready to accept skid mounted topsides facilities. For a
new-build semi-submersible the cost includes components for the hull, complete
with marine/ballast deck primary steelwork, winches and windlasses for a 12point mooring system.
Conversions: The cost of existing vessels fluctuate depending on the economic
climate, vessel condition and country of origin. The cost for an existing semisubmersible is a lump sum cost for a drilling semi-submersible assumed to be
approximately 5 years old and of average condition. It is assumed to have all
drilling facilities (including derrick, derrick substructure and mud pumps/storage),
utility systems to support drilling, power generation, quarters, and propulsion and
an 8-point mooring system.
Anchors
The cost of either suction piled or drag embedded anchors depending upon the choice
made in the inputs.The anchor weight is dependent on the type of anchor selected,
the number of mooring lines, the hull weight and the soil conditions on the seabed.
316
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
Upgrade material values are only applicable to conversions.The weights calculated
or entered in the Inputs are carried forward and a cost per tonne unit rate from the
procurement strategy applied to generate the materials cost estimate.
General Upgrade
Materials required for upgrade to existing quarters, control rooms, deck cranes,
Marine Upgrade
Materials required for upgrades to ballast, navigation and propulsion systems.
Drilling Upgrade
Materials required to modify an existing drilling derrick.If no drilling facilities are
included then this is the weight of materials required to install a light-weight wireline
derrick.
Mooring Upgrade
This is the cost of four winches and fairleads for the additional mooring lines required
to convert from an 8-point to a 12-point mooring system.
Mooring Chain
This is the total amount of new chain required for a 12-point mooring system and is
dependent on the water depth and generation of semi-submersible.See Mooring
system for more details.
Converted semi-submersibles are assumed to have an existing 8 point mooring
system.If the size of the existing mooring chains is equal to or greater than that
calculated by the mooring algorithm then they are re-used, with the wire section
317
QUE$TORHelp
extended if necessary. If chain and rope mooring is selected then only the chains are
re-used (if of sufficient size).When the existing mooring system is re-used 4
additional mooring lines are added to increase it to a 12 point system. If the chain
size of the existing mooring system is below that required by the environmental
conditions then all lines are scrapped and the cost of a new 12 point mooring system
is included.
For new build semi-submersibles the length and cost given is for all 12 mooring
chains.
Mooring Wire
The total amount of wire required for a 12-point mooring system is dependent on the
water depth and generation of semi-submersible. See Mooring system for more
details.
For converted semi-submersibles with re-used mooring systems if the water depth
exceeds the value given in Semi-submersible properties for the selected generation
of semi-submersible wire is used to extend the existing mooring lines to the overall
mooring length required for the specified water depth.The wire has the same
diameter as the chain and this varies with the generation of semi-submersible
selected.
For new build semi-submersibles and new mooring lines for converted semisubmersibles the length of wire is the overall mooring length minus the chain length.
Mooring Rope
The total amount of rope required for a 12-point mooring system is dependent on the
water depth and generation of semi-submersible.See Mooring system for more
details.
Converted semi-submersibles are assumed to have chain and wire mooring lines and
so if chain and rope is selected all wire is assumed to be discarded and the cost of
new rope is included for all lines.If the existing chain is equal to or larger than the
size specified in the inputs then this is re-used.
For new build semi-submersibles the cost of new rope is included for all lines.
When a combination of chain and wire or chain and rope has been used a single
section of wire or rope connects the upper length of chain with the section of chain on
the seabed for each mooring line.A mooring termination fitting is provided at each
end of the wire/rope.
Buoyancy Aid
The weight of materials installed on the vessel to provide the additional buoyancy
requirements, such as the addition of rocket columns or sponsons.
318
QUE$TORHelp
Freight
A fixed percentage of the total cost of materials to cover the cost of packaging and
transportation from the stockists / vendors to the construction yard.
319
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Costs

Strip Out
This is the cost of stripping out existing drilling facilities and other material which
needs to be upgraded.
General Upgrade
The cost to install the upgrades to existing quarters, control rooms, deck cranes,
Marine Upgrade
The cost to install the upgrades to ballast, navigation and propulsion systems.
Drilling Upgrade
The cost to modify an existing drilling derrick if drilling is retained.
Mooring Upgrade
The cost to install four winches and fairleads for the additional mooring lines required
to convert from an 8-point to a 12-point mooring system.
Buoyancy Aid
The cost to install the additional buoyancy requirements, such as the addition of
rocket columns or sponsons.
320
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
The semi-submersible installation cost estimate is shown below.

The semi-submersible is transported either by wet or dry tow from the fabrication
yard to the topsides deck mating site. The tow duration includes an allowance to
mobilise the transportation spread to the semi-submersible construction yard and
demobilise the spread. Deck mating is included within the topsides component.

This incorporates an allowance for the cost of all vessels required to transport the
semi-submersible from the topsides mating yard to the offshore location.The
duration is estimated based on the time to mobilise and demobilise the transport
spread and a regionally dependent distance from the construction yard to the
offshore location.The unit cost is a composite cost incorporating vessel hire, labour,
fuel, consumables, downtime and onshore support.
Installation
This includes an allowance for the cost of all vessels required to install the anchors,
deploy the mooring, attach the mooring lines to the vessel and prove the mooring
system is secure. The duration is dependent on the type of anchor selected and the
water depth.
321
QUE$TORHelp

The semi-submersible hook-up and commissioning cost estimate is shown below.

Includes duration for sea trials and final commissioning of the marine systems on the
vessel.The unit cost is a composite cost incorporating labour, fuel, consumables,
downtime, support and mobilisation / demobilisation.
322
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
Design
The man-hours required to carry out the design of the semi-submersible.The
duration includes project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys,
follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project
control, QA and documentation during the detailed design phase. It also includes
wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance,
general overheads (office facilities, utility administration), project expenses and
administration. It includes vendor drawings and documentation, delivery of items to
the construction yard, vendor's installation and commissioning services,
commissioning spares, insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
The total hours are related to the generation of semi-submersible selected and
whether it is a new-build or conversion.
Project Management
323
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
This is a fixed percentage of the total semi-submersible costs. It includes all
certification costs of the design, equipment, materials and construction of the semisubmersible by a recognised approval authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).
Certification is only included by default for European and North American countries
where it is common practice.A certification percentage is included in the Canadian,
North Sea and U.S. cost databases.All other cost databases have a zero cost for
certification.
Insurance
Contingency
Definitions.
324
QUE$TORHelp
About Spar Buoys

The spar buoy is one of six types of floating production substructure available in
QUE$TOR.Other floaters available include monohull shipshape (tanker) vessels, TLPs
(Tension Leg Platforms), twin hull semi-submersibles, cylindrical hulls and barges.
Three types of spar buoy are available in QUE$TOR: Caisson, Cell and Truss spars.
The spar buoy component includes costs for the hull, mooring system, risers
materials and fabrication plus installation, design and project management.
325
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The Spar buoy primary inputs are shown below.
Spar Type
Three types of spar buoy are available in QUE$TOR: caisson, cell and truss spars.
l
326
Caisson: The caisson spar is the classic spar design and has now been used for
many deepwater developments, in particular in the Gulf of Mexico. It consists
of a single cylindrical hull with helical strakes to suppress vortex-induced
vibration. The upper steel buoyancy tanks in the QUE$TOR caisson spar extend
to a depth of 87 m (285 feet).
Truss: The truss spar is a design which is becoming increasingly favoured as a
lighter and cheaper alternative to caisson spars. The top section of the hull is a
cylindrical steel structure similar to the caisson design, which extends to a
depth of 61 m (200 feet) in the default QUE$TOR design. It provides most of
buoyancy for the spar and contains variable-ballast tanks.Helical strakes
attached to the hull wall suppress vortex-induced vibration.The middle truss
section of the hull consists of an X-braced space frame similar to conventional
jackets and has 3 horizontal plates to dampen the heave response.The lower
keel section provides buoyancy at float-off and in tow. This section is flooded to
upend the hull and filled with ballast after upending.
Cell: The cell spar design is a new alternative to caisson and truss spar designs
that offers a simplified design which is easier to fabricate.A major advantage
of the cell design is that many regional yards are capable of building cell spars
and their fabrication is not limited to Finland (as is the case with classic spar
designs).The upper hard tank section of the hull consists of seven cylindrical
tubes that extend to a depth of 61 m (200 feet) in the default QUE$TOR design
and provide the buoyancy for the spar.They also contain variable-ballast tanks
QUE$TORHelp
and have helical strakes to suppress vortex-induced vibration.The legs, which
form middle section of the hull, are an extension of three of the seven
cylindrical tubes. Horizontal heave plates dampen the heave response in a
similar fashion to the truss design.The lower section of the hull, the keel is
permanently ballasted.
Riser Wall Type

This can be either Single or Double. If Single is chosen 95/ risers are assumed. If
8
Double is chosen 95/ risers inside 12 conductors are assumed.The spar buoy
8
component includes the cost of the risers: the choice of riser wall type will determine
the weight used to calculate their cost.
Number of Platform Wells

This is passed from the associated topsides component.Provision is made for one
spare slot.This input should relate to the number of platform wells only and is used
to size the well bay.
Water Depth
the spar. The water depth is used to calculate mooring costs. Spars are not
recommended for water depths shallower than 300 metres, where other production
concepts tend to be more attractive economically.

The distance from the topsides joining site to the installation site in the field.

The operating weight of the associated topsides is used in determining the hull size
and mooring system. The weight of the conductors associated with the platform
drilled wells does not influence the topsides payload as each production riser has its
own buoyancy can sized to support the riser weight. However, if a large number of
subsea wells are tied back to the spar the Topsides operating weight should be
manually adjusted to account for the additional payload associated with the flexible
risers. A further adjustment should be made to account for the additional payload
associated with large numbers of product export risers.
Marine transport
Caisson spars are assumed to be fabricated in Finland in two pieces and then
transported to the topsides construction site, welded together and mated to the
topsides prior to be being towed out to the field. Truss and Cell spars are assumed to
be fabricated in a USGulf yard. Truss pars are fabricated in two parts and joined at
the topsides mating site. For cell spars QUE$TOR assumes that all fabrication is
completed in a regional yard and so the distance to the joining site defaults to zero.
327
QUE$TORHelp
The values below allow you to specify the method of transportation to the mating site
and the distance the spar needs to transported.
l
Method: For spars four transport methods are available in QUE$TOR namely;
Barge tow, Flat-deck HTV, Wet tow and None. The default is a Flat-deck Heavy
Transport Vessel (HTV) which is self propelled. A Barge tow is a flat top barge
which is towed by two ocean-going tugs. Wet tow is used when the spar is towed
by a number of ocean-going tugs. None is used when the spar and topsides are
fabricated in the same construction yard. The transport speed varies depending on
the method chosen; Flat-deck HTV being the fastest and Wet tow the slowest.
Distance: This is an estimate of the distance the spar will have to be transported
from its construction yard to the topsides fabrication yard (assumed to be close to
the installation site). The distance is based on standard sea voyage routes making
use of the Suez and Panama canals where appropriate. This is used in conjunction
with the transport speed to calculate the Transport from fabrication yard duration.
Note:If the selected transportation method is None then the distance entry will
328
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring System
Clicking on the Mooring System tab allows the mooring system to be specified.
Mooring Type
Chain
the water depth.
Chain & Rope
l
329
QUE$TORHelp
l
the spar back into position should it move. The proportion of rope varies as a
function of water depth, increasing as the water depth increases.
Chain & Wire

Chain and wire mooring lines follow a semi-taut catenary profile and are anchored to
the seabed using SPAs by default.DEAs can be selected but they are not
recommended for use with spars.Chain and wire mooring lines are assumed to be
composed of three sections:
l
Top Section: This section consists of 80 m of chain which connects the vessel to
the wire section.This chain reduces wear on the wire in the splash zone and
prevents it from being exposed to the air.The chain extends from the chain locker
over the windlasses down to sea level and includes a section to take it below the
splash zone.If a drilling rig is included an additional 20 m of chain is included in
the lockers to increase manoeuvrability.
chain and so requires less buoyancy to be built into a spar. The proportion of wire
Anchor Type
QUE$TOR includes costs for drag embedded anchors or suction piled anchors.Suction
piled anchors are selected by default for spars.
Soil Condition
are available.
l
Poor: the soil has low load bearing capacity.
330
QUE$TORHelp
Option selection is made by selecting from the dropdown menu.Depending on the
conditions.
region.Selection of severe, moderate or mild conditions updates the default wave
height, wind speed and tidal current.By default severe conditions are chosen.
l
l
l
Wind speed: The wind speed is the value measured at a reference height of 10 m
mean wind speeds averaged over 1 hour or 1 minute are known.The
typical.
Mooring Chain Size

spar buoy selected.If chain and wire mooring lines are used then the wire size is
assumed to be the same as the chain size.If chain and rope mooring lines are used
then the Rope Size is selected according to chain size.
331
QUE$TORHelp
Number of Lines
By default 12 mooring lines are included for all types of spar buoy.If this is
capacity, although you should note that the chain size will never exceed 6.5 inches.If
Chain Length
Rope Length
Wire Length
332
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The spar buoy materials cost estimate is shown below.
Hull Structure
The hull is sized based on the well bay area and the buoyancy required to support the
operating topsides and mooring lines weight.The outer diameter of the hull is
determined by first calculating the diameter required to provide the well bay area,
which is calculated based on the number of risers.The diameter is then increased
until there is sufficient buoyancy to support the topsides and mooring lines.Each spar
design has a default buoyant length of hull as described below.The amount of
structural steel in the hull is proportional to the outer diameter.Single-hull
requirements are assumed to apply; if a double hull is required, the hull steel should
be increased accordingly.Three types of spar are available:
The caisson spar is the classic spar design and has now been used for many
deepwater developments, in particular in the Gulf of Mexico.It consists of a single
cylindrical hull with helical strakes to suppress vortex-induced vibration.The upper
steel buoyancy tanks in the QUE$TOR caisson spar extend to a depth of 87 m (285
feet).
The truss spar is a design which is becoming increasingly favoured as a lighter and
cheaper alternative to caisson spars. The top section of the hull is a cylindrical steel
structure similar to the caisson design, which extends to a depth of 61 m (200 feet) in
the default QUE$TOR design.It provides most of buoyancy for the spar and contains
variable-ballast tanks. Helical strakes attached to the hull wall suppress vortexinduced vibration.The middle truss section of the hull consists of an X-braced space
frame similar to conventional jackets and has 3 horizontal plates to dampen the
heave response. The lower keel section provides buoyancy at float-off and in tow.
This section is flooded to upend the hull and filled with ballast after upending.
The cell spar design is a new alternative to caisson and truss spar designs that offers
a simplified design which is easier to fabricate. A major advantage of the cell design
is that many regional yards are capable of building cell spars and their fabrication is
333
QUE$TORHelp
not limited to Finland (as is the case with classic spar designs).The upper hard tank
section of the hull consists of seven cylindrical tubes that extend to a depth of 61 m
(200 feet) in the default QUE$TOR design and provide the buoyancy for the spar. They
also contain variable-ballast tanks and have helical strakes to suppress vortexinduced vibration. The legs, which form middle section of the hull, are an extension of
three of the seven cylindrical tubes. Horizontal heave plates dampen the heave
response in a similar fashion to the Truss design. The lower section of the hull, the
keel is permanently ballasted.

Major components for hull outfitting and marine systems are sized in proportion to
the hull structural steel weight.The hull component does not include riser tensioning
equipment, since buoyancy cans are used to tension the risers and they are
considered part of the riser system.
Mooring Chains
This is the total amount of chain required by the mooring system.See Mooring
system for more details on this.
Mooring Wire / Rope

This is the total amount of wire/rope required by the mooring system.See Mooring
the seabed for each mooring line. A mooring termination fitting is provided at each
Anchors
made in the Inputs.The anchor weight is dependent on the type of anchor selected,

The risers are supported by buoyancy cans that surround the risers at their top and
are located in guides within the hull. Risers can either be single-wall or dual-wall
designs, with the weights associated with the dual-wall design considered to be a
factor of 2.5 larger than the single-wall design.
Riser Connectors and Buoyancy Cans

The weights of the riser pipe, connectors, and buoyancy cans are proportional to
water depth and the number of risers.
334
QUE$TORHelp
Riser Components
The weights of other production riser components such as the keel joint, the stress
joint, and the bottom connector are proportional only to the number of risers.
335
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Costs

Hull Structure
Based on current practice, we have assumed that fabrication of the hull takes place in
Finland for caisson and truss spars.For cell spars fabrication is assumed to take
place in a regional yard.Cell spars have a lower fabrication cost due to their simpler
design.

Fabrication includes hull outfitting (e.g. ballast piping, bilge pumps and piping,
ladders and anodes) and adding marine systems (e.g. ballast control) into the hull.

Riser pipe fabrication involves the welding of connectors to the ends of the pipe to
form riser joints.
Hull Joining
For caisson and truss spars, hull joining costs cover the floating operation of welding
a two-piece hull together at a location near the installation site.Fabrication of cell
spars is assumed to be achieved in one operation at the regional yard used for hull
fabrication and so hull joining defaults to zero for cell spars.
336
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
For caisson and truss spars, installation includes transporting the spar in two pieces
from the fabrication yard to a joining facility near the installation site, transporting
the full spar from the joining site to the installation site, installing the anchor piles
and mooring lines and upending/installing the spar at the site. Installation for cell
spars differs in that the spar is assumed to be completely fabricated at a regional
yard and does not need joining at a separate facility.The spar buoy installation cost
estimate is shown below.

The transportation cost is based on fixed and variable components.The fixed
component is for mob / demob of the transport spread and the variable component is
estimated from the transport distance from the fabrication yard (Finland by default
for caisson spars) to the joining site at an assumed marine transportation speed. If
the hull diameter is greater than 130ft (40m), the two spar sections are assumed to
be transported in two trips using the same vessel, therefore the transport cost is
simply doubled.If a second vessel is used, then you should adjust the costs to reflect
any increase in mob/demob.A day rate for the vessel is applied to the estimated
number of days to obtain this part of the transport costs. For cell and truss spars it is
assumed that all fabrication is completed in a regional yard and so distance to joining
site defaults to zero.

The cost of the single trip from the joining site, or fabrication site for cell spars, to
the installation site. A fixed component of 7 days is again assumed but the vessel
speed varies with the location.
Hull Installation Duration

The duration of the hull installation at the site is dependent on the number of mooring
lines. The fixed cost component is covered by an effective duration of 3 days for mob
/ demob and 3 days for upending. The variable component of cost is proportional to
the number of mooring lines.The installation spread rate is applied to the duration of
installation at the site to determine the cost for the operation.

The duration of operations for installing the anchor piles and mooring lines is
dependent on the number of mooring lines. Fixed mob / demob costs are covered by
337
QUE$TORHelp
an effective duration of 4 days.Variable costs are based on the actual number of
days required for the installation which is linearly proportional to the number of
mooring lines and also dependent on the water depth.
338
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
are shown below.
Design
This cost includes project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys,
follow-on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project
control, QA, and documentation during the detailed design phase. It also includes
wages, salaries, and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance,
administration.
It includes vendor drawings and documentation, delivery of items to the construction
yard, vendors installation and commissioning services, commissioning spares,
insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.The total engineering costs
are a percentage of the total project cost that relates to the practices of the operator
and the practices associated with the regions of the world in which the spar is to be
built and installed.
Project Management
339
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
A certification cost is added as a percentage of the total project cost. It includes all
certification costs of the design, equipment, materials, and construction of the spar
by a recognised approval authority (e.g. Lloyds, ABS or DNV) and costs for obtaining
permits from government authorities (MMS, HSE, etc).Certification is only included
by default for European and North American countries where it is common practice. A
certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost
databases.All other cost databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
A percentage of the total spar buoy cost to cover insurance during all phases of the
project up to first oil, including construction, transport, installation HUC, etc.
Contingency
component cost estimate to a P50 level.Contingency reflects cost increases that have
an unknown source but that are known to occur based on historical project cost
data.The contingency percentage is related to the maturity of the technology, the
experience of the operator with the technology, the maturity of the regions where the
project is being built and installed, and the experience of the operator in those
regions.For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
340
QUE$TORHelp
About Tankers
The tanker component should be used to model FPSOs.It is one of six types of
floating production substructure available in QUE$TOR. Other floaters available
include twin hull semi-submersibles, TLPs (Tension Leg Platforms), spar buoys,
cylindrical hull and barges. The cost of purchasing a suitable oil tanker and converting
it for permanent production can be estimated as can the cost of a new-build ship
shape vessel or a new-build custom designed barge shape vessel.The tanker
component includes costs for the vessel purchase, mooring system, quarters (for
marine crew), vessel upgrades, installation and project management.
Tanker based production systems use either single point turret or spread mooring
systems depending on the number of risers and the field location. Product storage is
also included.
341
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The Tanker Primary Inputs are shown below.
Tanker Type
Costs for a new-build ship shape vessel or a new-build custom designed barge shape
vessel include the vessel itself along with all conventional tanker systems apart from
propulsion. They exclude production facilities. The costs for the ship are based on the
vessel size and mooring type chosen.The size of the vessel is determined by the
storage capacity required, as additional loads are not a major influence.
The costs for the vessel may vary significantly, depending on construction location
and prevailing market conditions.
Costs for a conversion include the purchase of an existing crude carrying tanker, and
upgrading to a condition ready to receive production facilities. The cost for the
purchase of the vessel is based on a 5 to 10 year old ship (depending on the region
selected) in average condition.The cost will fluctuate depending on the economic
climate, vessel condition and original country of registry. It is assumed that no
major strip-out operations are required. The costs are based on vessels of typical
sizes.
342
QUE$TORHelp
The cost of modification to FPSO service is added for conversions and new-build ship
shape tankers.This includes vessel strengthening, addition of a turret mooring
systems and an elevated deck.For new-build custom designed barges no
modification work is required.
Tanker Size
For tankers, the required size is based on the Storage Capacity required and
presented as vessel deadweight tonne (dwt) ranges along with the vessel
classification.
Water Depth
the tanker.This is used to calculate mooring costs.
Production Rate
The oil production capacity of the associated topsides facilities. This is used in
conjunction with the Days of storage to select the Tanker size.It is also used to
calculate the number and size of flow paths through the fluid swivels.
Water Injection Rate

The associated topsides design capacity rate, used to calculate the number and size
of flow paths through the fluid swivels.
Gas Export/Injection
The associated topsides design capacity rates, used to calculate the number and size
of flow paths through the fluid swivels.
Days of Storage
Allows specification of the storage capacity required.The tanker size will be updated
if the days of storage are changed.
Number of Risers
Allows you to specify the number of flexible risers.This is automatically picked up
from any associated topsides component with an allowance for product export.It
affects the turret weight or riser porch cost.
General Upgrade
Includes all materials for the upgrade of existing quarters, control rooms, mechanical
handling and safety systems. This is only applicable to a converted tanker.
343
QUE$TORHelp
MarineUpgrade
The weight of materials required to upgrade the marine facilities and the existing
crude offloading facilities. It includes ballasting, tank washing, inert gas systems,
water treatment and export pumps. The export metering system is included with the
topsides facility. This is not required for a new-build custom designed vessel.
The weight of materials required to strengthen an existing or new-build hull to
accommodate the turret and in regions where ice flows are common additional steel
to ice strengthen the hull.This is not required for a new-build custom designed
vessel.

The number of days required for sea trials.
Mooring Option
The four Single Point Mooring Options are as follows:
l
Internal Turret: A turret is mounted in the bow allowing the tanker to

weathervane.The fluid swivels are mounted above the turret and the chain table
at the base of the turret. A maximum of 50 flexible risers are handled by
increasing the diameter of the turret and number or size of fluid swivels. The
mooring system is designed to withstand the 100 year storm
External Turret: The fluid swivels and chain table are mounted on a large yoke
connected to the bow or stern of the tanker. A maximum of 50 flexible risers can
be handled by this type of turret.The mooring system is designed to withstand the
100 year storm
Riser Turret: The riser turret is similar to the external turret in that the fluid
swivels are mounted on a yoke connected to the bow or stern of the tanker. In this
case the flowlines are disconnectable and in severe storm or typhoon conditions
the tanker can sail away from the riser turret. The chain table is located subsea at
the base of the riser turret which has enough buoyancy to float when disconnected
from the tanker.A maximum of 50 flexible risers can be handled and are
manifolded within the riser turret
Buoyant Turret: This is similar to the internal turret except that the chain table
is mounted on a small buoy. This buoy is disconnectable from the turret in severe
storm and typhoon conditions and sinks to a predetermined level below seawater.
The tanker can then winch the buoy back into place and reconnect the risers once
calmer weather returns. A maximum of 20 flexible risers can be handled by this
type of turret.
In addition to single point moored systems it is possible to select a spread mooring

for a tanker.Spread moorings are only suitable in regions where relatively benign
environmental conditions with currents from one direction are encountered and the
risers do not require to be disconnected; namely in West Africa.
344
QUE$TORHelp
In the case of spread moorings all risers are attached to a riser porch or riser hangoff platform on one side of the vessel with a number of guides per riser. This
arrangement prevents the vessel from weather-vaning.There are no practical
constraints on the number of risers which can be accommodated other than the
vessel length.
Added Production Facilities Weight

The topsides operating weight, this is used to calculate the weight of the elevated
deck required.
Elevated Deck
Includes the provision of an elevated deck for the additional production facilities.
Gas Lift
If the production wells are gas lifted an additional path is included in the single point
mooring system swivels.
Marine transport
Tankers tend to fabricated in S. E. Asia and then transported to the topsides
construction site for mating prior to be being transported out to the field. The values
below allow you to specify the method of transportation to the mating site and the
distance the tanker needs to transported.
l
Method: For tankers three transport methods are available in QUE$TOR namely;
Self-propelled, Wet tow and None. The default is wet tow. Self Propelled uses the
tanker's existing propelled system. Wet tow is used when the tanker is towed by a
number of ocean-going tugs. The number of tugs depends on the tanker size. None
is used when the tanker is fabricated in the same region as the field. The transport
speed varies depending on the method chosen; Self propelled being faster than
Wet tow.
Distance: This is an estimate of the distance the tanker will have to be
transported from its construction yard to the topsides fabrication yard (assumed
to be close to the installation site). The distance is based on standard sea voyage
routes making use of the Suez and Panama canals where appropriate. This is used
in conjunction with the transport speed to calculate the Transport from fabrication
yard duration.
345
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring System
Mooring Type
Chain
the water depth.
Chain & Rope
l
346
QUE$TORHelp
l
the spar back into position should it move. The proportion of rope varies as a
Chain & Wire

l
splash zone.
chain and so requires less buoyancy to be built into a tanker. The proportion of
wire varies as a function of water depth, increasing as the water depth increases.
weight to provide restoring force to the vessel and reduce the force applied to the
Anchor Type
QUE$TOR includes costs for drag embedded anchors or suction piled anchors. Suction
piled anchors are always selected for chain and rope moorings. Drag embedded
anchors are selected by default for chain and chain and wire moorings in water
depths up to 500 m
Soil Condition
are available.
l
347
QUE$TORHelp
conditions.
l
l
l
above still water and for a 50 year return period. QUE$TOR mooring lines are
Tidal current:The tidal current is a surface value.The algorithm estimates a
typical.
Mooring Chain Size

the size of the tanker selected.If chain and wire mooring lines are used then the wire
size is assumed to be the same as the chain size. If chain and rope mooring lines are
used then the Rope Size is selected according to chain size.
large change will affect an increase or decrease in chain size. Combinations of effect
348
QUE$TORHelp
Number of Lines
The number of lines is calculated based on the size of the tanker and on the mooring
option selected. If this is overwritten the mooring lines are resized to provide the
required load bearing capacity, although you should note that the chain size will
never exceed 6.5 inches. In a similar fashion, which maintains a constant load
bearing capacity, the number of mooring lines is recalculated if the mooring chain
size is changed from the calculated value.
Chain Length
Rope Length
Wire Length
349
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
The tanker equipment cost estimate includes for the tanker purchase, the swivels and
disconnects and the anchors.
Vessel Purchase
The cost identified here is a lump sum cost for the purchase of the vessel. It is either
a new-build cost or the cost of an existing vessel suitable for conversion.
l
New-Builds: It is assumed that the cost covers the construction and certification
of the vessel to a condition ready to accept skid mounted topsides facilities,
(including additional utilities for process support).The cost includes for
marine/ballast systems, deck primary steelworks, crew quarters, control rooms,
lifeboats, utility systems and base power generation normally associated with a
tanker. A propulsion system is not included.
Conversions: The cost for an existing tanker is a lump sum cost for an existing
crude carrying tanker. It is assumed to be 5 to 10 years old (depending on the
region selected), double hulled, and of average condition. It is assumed to include
utility systems to support normal tanker operations, power generation, crude
shipping pumps, crew quarters and a propulsion system.The cost of existing
vessels will fluctuate depending on economic climate, vessel condition and country
of origin.
Swivels/Disconnect
The number of fluid swivels for production, water or gas injection and gas lift is based
on flowrates possible through 12 and 6 sizes.Mechanical disconnect systems for
each flow path through the swivels are included for riser turret and buoyant turret
systems.The fluid swivels are 5000 psi (345 bar) rated.
The cost includes for mooring winches mounted in the turret, during the construction
phase in the yard. The turret cost allows for installation in the hull, including swivels,
transfer piping and turret handling systems.
It also includes the vendors cost to cover fabrication of the equipment, any
procurement of subcomponents, any subvendors, submission to the certifying
authority and testing at his works.
350
QUE$TORHelp
Anchors
made in the inputs. The anchor weight is dependent on the type of anchor selected,
The cost of new anchors is included by default for both conversions and new-builds,
any existing anchors are assumed to be scrapped.
351
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The materials include those required for conversion upgrades and the materials costs
involved in the turret and mooring systems.
The materials required to strengthen an existing or new-build hull to accommodate
the turret and in regions where ice flows are common additional steel to ice
strengthen the hull.
Marine / Offloading
The materials required to upgrade the marine facilities and the existing crude
offloading facilities.It includes ballasting, tank washing, inert gas systems, water
treatment and export pumps.The export metering system is included with the
topsides facility.
General Upgrade
Includes all materials for the upgrade of quarters, control rooms, mechanical
handling and safety systems.This is only applicable to a converted tanker.
Mooring Chain
The chain for all lines required to moor the tanker.It is dependent on the water
depth, vessel size and type of mooring. See Mooring system for more details. The
cost of new mooring lines is included by default for both conversions and new-builds.
352
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring Wire / Rope
The total quantity of wire or rope required.You can specify whether wire or rope is
used in the mooring system inputs and should see Mooring system for more details.
If the mooring type is chain only this is labelled as Mooring other and the unit rate
for rope is used.
The number of terminations connecting sections of chain to wire/rope.When a
combination of chain and wire/rope has been used a single section of wire/rope
connects the upper length of chain with the section of chain on the seabed for each
mooring line.A mooring termination fitting is provided at each end of the wire/rope.
Frame / Mooring Arm

A frame for internal turret and buoyant turret mooring or a mooring arm (yoke) for
external turret and riser turret mooring.
The cost includes materials, the vendor's cost for fabrication of the equipment,
procurement of subcomponents, any subvendor's submission to the certifying
Turret / Riser
An internal turret or external riser turret connecting the fluid swivels to the chain
table. This is not required for external turret mooring where the chain table is
connected directly to the fluid swivels. This includes the cost of integrated chain
tables for internal turret and riser turret mooring.
Chain table / Buoy

A discrete chain table is required for external turret mooring and buoyant turret
mooring. For buoyant turret mooring the chain table is mounted on a small buoy.For
internal turret or riser turret mooring the chain table is integrated into the turret and
its cost is included under turret/riser.
Riser Porch
Riser porches are used for spread moored tankers. This includes the materials for the
riser porch/riser hang off platform and the riser guides between each level of the
porch. Costs are calculated on a per riser basis.
353
QUE$TORHelp
Elevated Deck
The quantity of steel to provide an elevated deck 3 m above the main deck of the
tanker.All process equipment will be installed on this deck to remove the hazardous
area from the main deck.
Freight
A percentage added to the total cost of materials to cover the cost of packaging and
transportation from the stockist/vendor to the construction yard.
354
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Costs

Strengthening an existing or new-build hull to accommodate the turret and in regions
where ice flows are common additional steel to ice strengthen the hull.
Marine / Offloading
Upgrading the marine facilities and the existing crude offloading facilities. Includes
ballasting, tank washing, inert gas systems, water treatment and export pumps.
General Upgrade
Upgrading quarters, control rooms, mechanical handling and safety systems.This is
only applicable to a converted tanker.
Turret
Adding a turret, riser turret, lifting frame or yoke to a new or existing tanker
depending on the single point mooring system chosen.
Riser Porch
Adding riser porch/riser hang off platforms and the riser guides between each level of
the porch.Costs are calculated on a per riser basis.
Elevated Deck
Adding an elevated deck 3m above the main deck of the tanker.All process
equipment will be installed on this deck to remove the hazardous area from the main
deck.
355
QUE$TORHelp
356
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
Tanker installation includes the costs of towing the tanker to the field and installing it.

The tanker is transported either by wet or dry tow from the fabrication yard to the
topsides deck mating site.The tow duration includes an allowance to mobilise the
transportation spread to the tanker construction yard and demobilise the spread.
Deck mating is included within the topsides component.

This incorporates an allowance for the cost of all vessels required to transport the
tanker from the construction yard to the offshore location.The duration is estimated
based on the time to mobilise and demobilise the transport spread and a regionally
dependent distance from the construction yard to the offshore location. The unit cost
is a composite cost incorporating vessel hire, labour, fuel, consumables, downtime
and onshore support.
Installation
This includes an allowance for the cost of all vessels required to install the anchors,
deploy the mooring, attach the mooring lines to the vessel and prove the mooring
system is secure. The duration is dependent on the type of anchor selected and the
water depth.
357
QUE$TORHelp

Includes duration for sea trials and final commissioning of the marine systems on the
vessel. The unit cost is a composite cost incorporating labour, fuel, consumables,
downtime, support and mobilisation / demobilisation.
358
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
Design
The man-hours required to carry out the design of a custom built barge type tanker or
the modifications for a ship shape vessel.The duration includes project specification,
special studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing,
expediting and inspection services, project control, QA and documentation during the
detailed design phase. It also includes wages, salaries and other benefits paid to
personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility
administration), project expenses and administration. It includes vendor drawings
and documentation, delivery of items to the construction yard, vendor's installation
and commissioning services, commissioning spares, insurance up to delivery,
The total hours are related to the tanker size selected and whether it is a new-build or
conversion.
Project Management
quality assurance, HSE and third party liaison. This covers from the project sanction
359
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
This is a percentage of the total tanker costs. It includes all certification costs for the
appraisal of the design, equipment, materials and construction of the tanker by a
recognised certifying authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).Certification is only
practice.A certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S.
cost databases.All other cost databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
Contingency
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total equipment, material, fabrication,
installation, HUC, design, project management, insurance and certification costs to
bring the component cost estimate to a P50 level. For a fuller explanation see
Contingency Definitions.
360
QUE$TORHelp
About Cylindrical Hulls

The cylindrical hull is one of the types of floating production substructure available in
QUE$TOR.Other floaters available include monohull shipshape (tanker) vessels, TLPs
(Tension Leg Platforms), twin hull semi-submersibles, spar buoys and barges.
The cylindrical hull component includes costs for the hull structure, hull outfitting and
marine systems, mooring system,and fabrication plus installation, design and project
management.
361
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The Cylindrical Hull Primary Inputs are shown below.
Production Rate
This is the design oil production rate of the associated topsides. It is used in
conjunction with the days storage required to calculate the total storage requirement.
Days of Storage
This is the number of days storage required in the cylindrical hull.
Note:The maximum recommended storage is 25 days.
Required Storage
The required storage will be calculated by multiplying the design oil production rate
by the days of storage. This is used with the topsides weight to calculate the required
vessel size.
Note:The maximum recommended storage capacity is 2 million barrels

(318,000 m3) as this is currently the largest size designs are available for.
362
QUE$TORHelp
This value specifies the operating weight of the associated topsides, it is obtained
from the associated topsides component.
Hull Weight
The vessel size will be determined based upon the maximum size required to support
the topsides weight or provide the required level of storage.
Water Depth
The water depth defaults to the field development value but may be modified for the
location of the hull.This is used to calculate mooring costs.

It is assumed in QUE$TORthat two sites will be used in the construction of a
cylindrical hull. This value specifies the wet tow distance, for the joined hull and
topsides, from the mating site to the installation point.
Marine Transport
The fabrication of a cylindrical hull is assumed in QUE$TORto be done in S. E. Asia
and then transported to the topsides construction site for mating. The distance and
options here cover the method of transportation to the mating site and the distance
the hull needs to transported.
l
Method: For cylindrical hull transport methods the options available are Barge
tow, Flat-deck HTV, Wet tow and None. The default is Flat-deck HTV, where the
hull is brought to site using a heavy transport vessel. Wet tow and barge tow
assume that 2 vessel tugs will be used and None is used when the hull and
topsides are fabricated in the same construction yard.
Distance: This is an estimate of the distance the hull will have to be transported
from its construction yard to the topsides fabrication yard (assumed to be close to
the installation site). The distance is based on standard sea voyage routes
avoiding the sea canals . This is used in conjunction with the transport speed to
calculate the Transport from fabrication yard duration.
363
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring System
Clicking on the Mooring system tab allows the mooring system to be specified.
Mooring Type
Chain
the water depth.
Chain & Rope
l
364
QUE$TORHelp
l
the hull back into position should it move. The proportion of rope varies as a
Chain & Wire

the seabed using SPAs by default.Chain and wire mooring lines are assumed to be
l
splash zone.If a drilling rig is included an additional 20 m of chain is included in
the lockers to increase manoeuvrability.
the top and bottom using mooring terminations. The proportion of wire varies as a
weight to provide restoring force to the hull and reduce the force applied to the
Anchor Type
piled anchors are selected by default for cylindrical hulls.
Soil Condition
are available.
l

conditions.
365
QUE$TORHelp
l
l
l
typical.
Mooring Chain Size

size of cylindrical hull selected.If chain and wire mooring lines are used then the
wire size is assumed to be the same as the chain size.If chain and rope mooring lines
are used then the Rope Size is selected according to chain size.
366
QUE$TORHelp
Number of Lines
By default 12 mooring lines are included for all types of cylindrical hull.If this is
capacity, although you should note that the chain size will never exceed 6.5 inches.If
Chain Length
Rope Length
Wire Length
367
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The cylindrical hull materials cost estimate is shown below.
Hull Structure
The hull structure weight is a function of the hull volume and is based upon the
maximum requirement for storage or upon the displacement requirement for the
topsides operating weight. The minimum weight is 8000 te and can take a storage
capacity of 100 Mbbl or topside weight of 2,200 te.

Major components for hull outfitting and marine systems are sized in proportion to
the hull structural steel weight. The category covers ballast control and riser tension
systems
Mooring Chains
This is the total amount of chain required by the mooring system.It is dependent on
the water depth and the size of the cylindrical hull. See Mooring system for more
details on this.
Mooring Wire / Rope

This is the total amount of wire/rope required by the mooring system.See Mooring
the seabed for each mooring line. A mooring termination fitting is provided at each
368
QUE$TORHelp
Anchors
made in the Inputs.The anchor weight is dependent on the type of anchor selected,
Freight
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total materials cost. It
the construction yard. You may modify the freight percentage; the default is
369
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Costs

Hull Structure
Based on current practice, we have assumed that fabrication of the hull takes place in
SE Asia.

Fabrication includes hull outfitting (e.g. ballast piping, bilge pumps and piping,
ladders and anodes) and adding marine systems (e.g. ballast control) into the hull.
370
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
For cylindrical hull, installation includes transporting the hull from the fabrication
yard to a joining facility near the installation site, transporting the joined hull and
topsides from the joining site to the installation site and installing the anchor piles
and mooring lines. and upending/installing the spar at the site.The cylindrical hull
installation cost estimate is shown below.

The transportation cost is based on fixed and variable components.The fixed
component is for mob / demob of the transport spread and the variable component is
estimated from the transport distance from the fabrication yard which is assumed to
be in South East Asia to the joining site at an assumed marine transportation speed.

The cost of the single trip from the joining site, or fabrication site to the installation
site.

The duration of operations for installing the anchor piles and mooring lines is
dependent on the number of mooring lines. Fixed mob / demob costs are covered by
an effective duration of 4 days.Variable costs are based on the actual number of
days required for the installation which is linearly proportional to the number of
mooring lines and also dependent on the water depth.
371
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
are shown below.
Design
This cost includes project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys,
follow-on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project
control, QA, and documentation during the detailed design phase. It also includes
wages, salaries, and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance,
administration.
yard, vendors installation and commissioning services, commissioning spares,
insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.The total engineering costs
are a percentage of the total project cost that relates to the practices of the operator
and the practices associated with the regions of the world in which the cylindrical hull
is to be built and installed.
Project Management
372
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
A certification cost is added as a percentage of the total project cost. It includes all
certification costs of the design, equipment, materials, and construction of the
cylindrical hull by a recognised approval authority (e.g. Lloyds, ABS or DNV) and
costs for obtaining permits from government authorities (MMS, HSE,
etc).Certification is only included by default for European and North American
countries where it is common practice. A certification percentage is included in the
Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost databases.All other cost databases have a zero
cost for certification.
Insurance
A percentage of the total cylindrical hull cost to cover insurance during all phases of
the project up to first oil, including construction, transport, installation HUC, etc.
Contingency
component cost estimate to a P50 level.Contingency reflects cost increases that have
an unknown source but that are known to occur based on historical project cost
data.The contingency percentage is related to the maturity of the technology, the
experience of the operator with the technology, the maturity of the regions where the
project is being built and installed, and the experience of the operator in those
regions.For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
373
QUE$TORHelp
About Tension Leg Platforms

The TLP (Tension Leg Platform) component is one of six types of floating production
substructure available in QUE$TOR.Other floaters available include monohull
shipshape (tanker) vessels, twin hull semi-submersibles, spar buoys, cylindrical hulls
and barges.
Two types of TLP are available in QUE$TOR: a conventional TLP and a mini TLP.
The conventional TLP hull is assumed to have four columns arranged in a square with
a ring pontoon at the base of the columns.The topsides, including the deck, sits on
the columns and a group of tethers attached to each column terminates at the seabed
in a piled foundation.Tensioned steel risers are assumed.
The mini TLP hull is assumed to have a single central column supporting the
topsides.Three radial pontoons project out from the bottom of the column and these
are tapered with height decreasing towards the tip.The tendons are attached to the
hull at the tip of each pontoon and terminate at the seabed in a piled
foundation.Tensioned steel risers are assumed to run through the monopool of the
central column.
The TLP component includes the costs of the steel structure, foundations, hull,
tendons and moorings.
374
QUE$TORHelp
Inputs
The TLP inputs are shown below.
TLP Type
You can pick either a conventional TLP or a mini TLP.
The conventional TLP hull is assumed to have four columns arranged in a square with
a ring pontoon at the base of the columns.The topsides, including the deck, sits on
the columns and a group of tethers attached to each column terminates at the seabed
in a piled foundation. Tensioned steel risers are assumed.
The mini TLP hull is assumed to have a single central column supporting the
topsides.Three pontoons project out from the bottom of the column and these are
tapered with height decreasing towards the tip. The tendons are attached to the hull
at the tip of each pontoon and terminate at the seabed in a piled foundation.
Tensioned steel risers are assumed to run through the moonpool of the central
column.

This value is the operating weight of the associated topsides; it includes facilities and
the deck steel but does not make any allowance for the weight of riser deck
equipment (tensioners, etc).
375
QUE$TORHelp
A value you enter manually MUST be interpreted in this way.Within the algorithm,
and only for use within the algorithm, the topsides weight is adjusted to include an
additional weight proportional to the number of risers ultimately to be installed.
Water Depth
This defaults to the field level water depth.The TLP sizing algorithms are based on
TLPs installed in water depths ranging from 130 1500 m.QUE$TOR will estimate the
cost of TLPs in other water depths but misleading weights may result.
Number of Wells
The total number of platform wells (including pre-drilled wells) is passed from the
associated topsides. Allowance for tensioned risers is made within the TLP cost
estimation and in calculating the hull buoyancy requirements.
Number of Pre-installed Risers

This defines the number of risers installed during the TLP installation operations, i.e.
pre-drilled wells and product export risers.These and the tendons all contribute to
the TLP mooring forces during the sizing and weight estimation. The other risers, yet
to be installed, influence the algorithm through their contribution to the net vertical
load to be supported by the TLP buoyancy.
Soil Conditions
The soil condition is used to calculate the foundation piling requirements.Three
choices are available.
l
Good: The soil has high load bearing capacity with reduced piling requirements
Average: The soil has average load bearing capacity
Poor: The soil has low load bearing capacity and requires additional piling.
Typical environmental conditions are shown for each region considered by QUE$TOR.
These default to the severe conditions that are used to calibrate the weight
estimating algorithms. Each value may be modified individually but should only be
changed with caution.The algorithms within QUE$TOR are intended only to provide
environmental sensitivities close to the calibration conditions and not to wide ranges
of these parameters.
Note:The environmental input data is nominally that for the 50-year storm
condition. However, the TLP algorithm upgrades the wave height and wind speed to
the 100-year storm condition prior to use.
376
QUE$TORHelp
l
Wave height:This is measured from crest to trough.It influences the TLP

freeboard and TLP weight.TLP dynamic loads are proportional to the wave height
and so affect the tether sectional area and the foundation loads. The associated
design wave period is obtained within the algorithm from the wave height
assuming a wave slope of 1:11. Wave velocities are calculated from the Airy wave
theory.
Tide: The tide is the height range between high and low water at the TLP location,
including the storm surge. This affects the TLP freeboard.
Wind speed: This is the wind speed associated with the mean 5 second gust
measured at a reference height of 10 m (33 feet) above sea level. This is used to
estimate the TLP offset and wind overturning moment to be handled by the
tendons.
Tidal current: This is the surface current at the TLP location with a linearly
varying profile to zero at a depth of 500 m (1640 feet).Only the current in the
depth range covering the submerged section of the TLP hull is used by the
algorithm.
selection the pile weight is factored up or down from the weight calculated for
average soil conditions.
Marine transport
TLPs tend to fabricated in S. E. Asia and then transported to the topsides construction
site for mating prior to be being towed out to the field. The values below allow you to
specify the method of transportation to the mating site and the distance the TLP
needs to transported.
l
Method: For TLPs four transport methods are available in QUE$TOR namely;
Barge tow, Flat-deck HTV, Wet tow and None. The default is a Flat-deck Heavy
Transport Vessel (HTV) which is self propelled. A Barge tow is a flat top barge
which is towed by two ocean-going tugs. Wet tow is used when the TLP is towed by
a number of ocean-going tugs. None is used when the TLP and topsides are
fabricated in the same construction yard. The transport speed varies depending on
the method chosen; Flat-deck HTV being the fastest and Wet tow the slowest.
Distance: This is an estimate of the distance the TLP will have to be transported
from the TLP construction yard (assumed to be in S.E. Asia) to the topsides
fabrication yard (assumed to be close to the installation site). The distance is
based on standard sea voyage routes making use of the Suez and Panama canals
where appropriate. This is used in conjunction with the transport speed to
calculate the Transport from fabrication yard duration.
377
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The TLP materials cost estimate is shown below.
Hull
The TLP hull weight has been found to be closely related to the total hull volume
which is dependent upon the freeboard and the buoyancy required to support the
topsides weight, hull steel weight, tendon pretension, riser tension and ballast.
Foundations
Many types of foundations have been used to handle the TLP tendon loads.The
algorithm assumes that piled foundation templates are located at each corner.Pile
sizes required to handle the total vertical static and dynamic tendon load are
estimated and the associated pile weight is factored in a calibration against existing
TLPs. The weight includes for the templates, piles and cathodic protection.
Tendons
The algorithm works mainly with the corner tendon group cross-sectional area
required to ensure that the TLP heave natural period is less than 4 sec and that the
static and dynamic loads are handled while ensuring that the allowable stresses are
not exceeded.An iterative calculation is performed on the individual tendon sectional
dimensions in which the diameter/wall thickness ratio is modified progressively while
ensuring that the group sectional area remains unchanged, that hydrostatic collapse
is avoided and that the tendon diameter does not exceed 1 m (3.3 feet). This
calculation provides the number of tendons (3 or 4 per column/pontoon) required by
the TLP. While this number does not affect the total tether weight, it does affect the
installation costs.
The tendon weight estimated by the algorithm is based on a uniform section along the
entire length and is factored to include an allowance for the increased weight of the
connectors and to calibrate against the tendon weights of existing TLPs.This net
weight is used for costing but excludes the costs of the tensioning equipment.
378
QUE$TORHelp
Tendon Connectors
A fabricated cost is included for the flexible connectors between the tendons and
foundations.These allow for lateral movement on the TLP.The cost is dependent on
the number of tendons.
Production Risers
Risers are assumed to be 9.625 OD x 8.65 ID (47 lb/foot) except for a nominal 90 m
(300 feet) section per riser where extra heavy wall pipe is required in the very high
stress areas at the top and bottom.The riser length shown is the total for all wells
associated with the TLP and includes an allowance for the section of riser between
still water and the hull deck plus some restricted lateral movement of the hull.The
cost includes an allowance for end connections between each 18 m (60 feet) long
section of riser pipe, coating and anodes.
A fabricated cost is included for tensioning equipment, tensioner joint and load ring,
tempered stress joint and hydraulic tie-back system for each production riser.
Buoyancy
At water depths greater than a critical depth at which the riser mean stress exceeds a
pre-set value, supplementary buoyancy is assumed to be required. This is provided
by steel cans.
Freight
A percentage is added to the total cost of materials to cover the cost of packaging and
transportation from the stockist/vendor to the construction yard.The default is
379
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Costs

Based on current practice, we have assumed that construction of the hull takes place
in European or the Gulf of Mexico yards but other outfitting activities are carried out
in the selected region. Fabrication includes hull outfitting and marine systems into the
hull. Tendon fabrication involves welding and heat treating sections of pipe together
to form the tendons. Production riser fabrication involves the welding of connectors
to the ends of the pipe to form riser joints.
380
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
The installation of a TLP is broken down into a number of activities.The day rate for
each activity is a composite cost incorporating vessel hire, labour, fuel, consumables,
downtime, support and mobilisation/ demobilisation.

The hull is transported either by wet or dry tow from the fabrication yard to the deck
mating site. The tow duration includes an allowance to mobilise the transportation
spread to the TLP construction yard and demobilise the spread. Deck mating is
included within the topsides component.
Foundation Install
The steel foundation templates are installed and piled using a heavy lift crane vessel.
Each template takes one day to install plus five days to pile. A further allowance is
included for weather downtime and mobilisation / demobilisation.
Transportation to installation site

Includes the tow out of the TLP hull and topsides, from the mating site to the final
field location. The tow duration includes an allowance to mobilise the transportation
spread to the mating site and demobilise the spread.
Tendon Install
Tendons are made up at the installation from short lengths using a crane vessel. Once
the tendon has been completed it is hung from porches on the TLP column.Each
tendon takes one day to complete with weather downtime factors based on the water
depth.
TLP Connect / Tension

Includes the final connection of tendons to the foundations and their tensioning.
381
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
Design
The man-hours required to carry out the design of the TLP. The duration includes
project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on
documentation during the detailed design phase. It also includes wages, salaries and
other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads
(office facilities, utility administration), project expenses and administration. It
includes vendor drawings and documentation, delivery of items to the construction
yard, vendor's installation and commissioning services, commissioning spares,
insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
The total hours are related to the size and type of TLP selected.
Project Management
382
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
A percentage of the total TLP cost to cover all certification costs for the approval of
the design, materials and construction of the TLP by a recognised certifying authority
(e.g. Lloyds, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by default for European and
North American countries where it is common practice. A certification percentage is
included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost databases. All other cost databases
have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
Contingency
Definitions.
383
QUE$TORHelp
About Offshore Loading

The offshore loading component estimates the cost of single point mooring systems
for oil export via shuttle tanker. There are three offshore loading systems available
in QUE$TOR: Catenary Anchor Leg Mooring (CALM) buoys, Single Articulated Leg
Moorings (SALMs) and Floating Loading Platforms (FLP).A cost estimate for a
permanently moored storage tanker is included if required.Short flexible pipelines
are also included if the offshore loading component is connected to a floating
production platform 2 km or less away.
384
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The offshore loading primary inputs are shown below.
Loading Type
l
CALM: A catenary anchor leg mooring consisting of a buoy supporting fluid

swivels anchored using a spread pattern of four or six chains. Connection to the
tanker is via floating hose if only shuttle tankers are used and via rigid yoke if a
permanent storage tanker is used.
SALM: A single articulated leg mooring based on the EMH articulated column
design.The mooring system consists of a piled or gravity base, a solid or lattice
construction articulated tower, rigid riser, rotating head and extended boom to
support the loading hose.Temporary quarters and helideck are included.
FLP: A floating loading platform. This is similar in principle to the CALM buoy but
is on a larger scale and includes temporary quarters and helideck.
385
QUE$TORHelp
FLPs are not recommended in water depths less than 50 m.In shallow water, (<25
m), it is not possible to install a SALM or FLP and therefore CALM is the only
recommended option. SALMs are not recommended for water deeper than 250m.
Water Depth
The water depth at the offshore loading buoy.This is used to cost the buoys mooring
system and receiving riser.
Export Rate
The oil/condensate export rate from the production facility to the offshore loading
facility.This value is used to size the storage requirements and the flowlines, risers
etc and so should be the maximum daily field production if flowing to a storage
tanker or the maximum offloading rate if flowing directly to a shuttle tanker.The
default is the oil processing capacity from the associated topsides. This may be
increased if spare capacity for future expansion is required.
FlexiblePipeline
When selected the cost of a flexible pipeline is included in the offshore loading cost
estimate along with flexible risers at the topsides and at the buoy. When un-checked
the cost of a steel connecting pipeline and steel or flexible risers should be estimated
in the pipeline component.
A flexible pipeline will be selected when there is no steel line present between
offshore loading buoy and connected topsides. If you manually include a flexible
pipeline you should remove the default steel pipeline to prevent double-dipping.
QUE$TOR does not do this automatically.Similarly you will need to add a steel
pipeline in the pipeline component if you remove a flexible pipeline included by
default.
Number of Lines & Diameter

The diameter of the flexible pipeline (and risers) is calculated based on the Export
rate.The maximum diameter of flexible flowlines and risers in QUE$TOR is 16.If a
larger diameter is required then multiple lines are included ensuring at least the
same flow area as the required line size.
Riser Length at Buoy

The length of a flexible riser is calculated assuming a lazy S configuration using the
specified water depth. For deepwater locations (>300 m) a large U shaped mid water
configuration is used with buoyancy on the flowline portion.The riser length is then
calculated assuming the horizontal section is located 300 m below sea level.In
shallower waters the riser length is always calculated from the seabed.
Water Depth at Topsides

This enables the topsides water depth to be specified if it is different from the water
depth at the offshore loading system and is used to calculate the Riser length at
386
QUE$TORHelp
topsides.
Riser Length at Topsides

This is calculated in the same way as Riser length at buoy but is based on the Water
depth at topsides.
Storage Tanker
Check the storage tanker box if you wish to include a permanently moored tanker in
the cost estimate. The estimate will include for the purchase, upgrade and installation
of a suitably sized second-hand tanker.
By default storage is required for all buoy types if the substructure of the exporting
topsides are located on does not provide storage.
Storage Time
The number of days storage used to size the storage tanker.The storage duration
should be longer than the period between shuttle tanker visits.
Storage Capacity
The default capacity is calculated by multiplying the days storage by the export rate.
Tanker Size
Four tanker sizes are available in QUE$TOR, the default is selected based on the
Storage Capacity.
When a storage tanker is chosen, shuttle tankers are used to transport oil to shore,
shuttle tankers are tandem moored to the storage tanker using on board thrusters to
maintain position.
Marine transport
Tankers tend to fabricated in S. E. Asia. The values below allow you to specify the
method of transportation and the distance the tanker needs to transported.
l
Method:For tankers three transport methods are available in QUE$TOR namely;

Self-propelled, Wet tow and None. The default is wet tow. Self Propelled uses the
tanker's existing propelled system. Wet tow is used when the tanker is towed by a
number of ocean-going tugs. The number of tugs depends on the tanker size. None
is used when the tanker is fabricated in the same region as the field. The transport
speed varies depending on the method chosen; Self propelled being faster than
Wet tow.
Distance: This is an estimate of the distance the tanker will have to be
transported from its construction yard to offshore loading system installation site.
The distance is based on standard sea voyage routes making use of the Suez and
387
QUE$TORHelp
Panama canals where appropriate. This is used in conjunction with the transport
speed to calculate the Transport from fabrication yard duration.
Note:If the selected transportation method is None then the distance entry will
388
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring System
Mooring Type
Chain
the water depth.
Chain & Rope
l
389
QUE$TORHelp
l
the buoy back into position should it move. The proportion of rope varies as a
Chain & Wire

the seabed using SPAs by default.Chain and wire mooring lines are assumed to be
l
Top Section: The chain extends from the chain locker over the windlasses and
includes a section to take it below the splash zone. This section of chain reduces
wear on the wire in the splash zone and prevents it from being exposed to the air.
chain and so requires less buoyancy to be built into the buoy. The proportion of
wire varies as a function of water depth, increasing as the water depth increases.
weight to provide restoring force to the vessel and reduce the force applied to the
Anchor Type
piled anchors are selected by default for chain & rope moorings otherwise selection is
based on water depth. Drag embedded anchors are selected by default for chain and
chain and wire moorings in water depths up to 500 m.
Soil Condition
The soil condition is used to calculate the size of the anchors required.Three choices
are available.
l
Good: the soil has high load bearing capacity.
conditions.
390
QUE$TORHelp
l
Wave height:QUE$TOR mooring lines are calibrated assuming the highest

l
l
Tidal current: The tidal current is a surface value.The algorithm estimates a
typical.
Mooring Chain Size

the size of the tanker selected.If chain and wire mooring lines are used then the wire
size is assumed to be the same as the chain size. If chain and rope mooring lines are
used then the Rope Size is selected according to chain size.
391
QUE$TORHelp
The number of lines is calculated based on the size of the tanker and on the mooring
option selected. If this is overwritten the mooring lines are resized to provide the
required load bearing capacity, although you should note that the chain size will
never exceed 6.5 inches. In a similar fashion, which maintains a constant load
bearing capacity, the number of mooring lines is recalculated if the mooring chain
size is changed from the calculated value.
Chain Length
Rope Length
Wire Length
392
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
The equipment cost estimate is shown below.
Loading Buoy
A lump sum cost dependent on the selection of buoy type made on the input panel and
if storage is required. The cost includes the buoy or structure and product transfer
system. SALM and FLP options additionally include the cost of temporary quarters
and helideck.The cost includes for all equipment materials and fabrication.
Anchors
The cost of anchors is included for CALMs and FLPs.
Storage Tanker
A lump sum cost based on the quantity of storage required to cover the purchase,
conversion and strengthening of a five or ten year old, double hulled tanker
(depending on the region). The cost includes modification to the ballast systems,
clean up, installation of metering and export pumping systems, the addition of a bow
mounted mooring system to enable the tanker to be permanently moored and
additional manifolding to allow import of crude onto the tanker.
393
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The materials cost estimate is shown below.
Mooring Chain
The chain for all lines required to moor the tanker. It is dependent on the water
depth, vessel size and type of mooring. The cost of new mooring lines is included by
default; any existing mooring lines are assumed to be scrapped.
Mooring Wire / Rope

The total quantity of wire or rope required. You can specify whether wire or rope is
used in the mooring system inputs. If the mooring type is chain only this is labelled
as Mooring other and the unit rate for rope is used.
The number of terminations connecting sections of chain to wire/rope.When a
combination of chain and wire/rope has been used a single section of wire/rope
connects the upper length of chain with the section of chain on the seabed for each
mooring line. A mooring termination fitting is provided at each end of the wire/rope.
Flexible Riser at Buoy

The cost of the flexible riser(s) to import crude onto the offshore loading system. The
unit cost includes the cost of materials and fabrication of the riser and delivery from
the vendor's site to the port. The riser is assumed to an unbonded structure
consisting of helically wound metallic armour wires or tapes combined with
concentric layers of polymers and textiles.Risers are only incorporated for the
CALMs and FLPs if a flexible pipeline is used, otherwise all riser costs are estimated
in the pipeline component.
394
QUE$TORHelp
Riser System at Buoy
The cost for the flexible riser systems at the buoy. It includes the cost of materials,
fabrication, testing and delivery to port for the riser base, riser support and
connections at the buoy.
Pipeline (flexible)
The cost of a flexible pipeline including materials, fabrication, testing and delivery to
port. It is selected if crude is being exported from a floating production facility 2 km
or less away. The cost relates to the distance between production facility and the
offshore loading system.
Riser at Platform
The cost of a flexible riser at the production platform if selected.It includes all
materials, fabrication, testing and delivery to port of the riser. Risers are only
incorporated if a flexible pipeline is used,otherwise all riser costs are estimated in
the pipeline component.
Riser System at Platform

The cost for the flexible riser systems at the production platform It includes riser
base, riser support arch and connections.
395
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
The installation cost estimate is shown below.

The tanker is transported from the fabrication yard to a site where the offshore
loading system is installed.The tow duration includes an allowance to mobilise the
transportation spread to the tanker construction yard and demobilise the spread.
Tow out and installation

The cost of tugs to tow the offshore loading system from its fabrication yard to the
offshore location. It includes time for towing and waiting on weather.The unit rate
includes for support services, labour and consumables.
Mobilisation / demobilisation days are itemised separately.
Sea trials and marine commissioning

The number of days a diving support vessel is required on location to complete the
tanker hook-up plus testing and commissioning of the pipeline and risers. The diving
support vessel unit cost includes support services, waiting on weather, labour and
consumables.
Mobilisation / demobilisation days are itemised separately.
396
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
are shown below.
Design
Includes the number of man-hours required to carry out the design of the offshore
loading system.The duration includes project specification, special studies, detail
design, site surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection
services, project control, QA and documentation during the detailed design phase.
The unit rate includes wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll
of facilities and equipment and administration), project expenses and administration.
yard, vendor's installation and commissioning services, commissioning spares,
insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
The total hours are related to the type of mooring selected.
Project Management
The project management man-hours based on the design man-hours.
397
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
This is a percentage of the total cost. It includes all certification costs for the
approval of the design, equipment, materials and construction of the offshore loading
system by a recognised certifying authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).Certification
is only included by default for European and North American countries where it is
common practice.A certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea
and U.S. cost databases.All other cost databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
Contingency
Definitions.
398
QUE$TORHelp
About Offshore Drilling

The drilling component estimates the drilling costs including rig hire (for jackup and
floating rigs), drill crew, well equipment, consumables, materials, conductors, etc.
For a tender-assisted platform rig the rig hire includes only for the hire of the tenderassist vessel and its marine crew.
For each well a profile is specified and the total measured depth calculated.Durations
are determined from depth versus duration curves for both the drilling and
completion operations and from drilling learning factor curves. The eighth well in a
drilling operation is assumed to be the technical well with a learning factor of 1.
There are three possible methods of drilling included in QUE$TOR:
l
Platform based rigs (permanent with full facilities, skidded or tender assisted and
TLP/spar mounted).
Jackup rigs.
Floating rigs.
It is also possible to specify pre-drilled wells with topsides completions.

Several drilling operations can be specified on a development and the total drilling
operations can be a combination of platform wells, subsea wells and
exploration/appraisal wells.However, if a combination of rig types is required, then
each should be costed as a separate drilling component.
Exploration and appraisal wells should also be costed in their own drilling component
to allow them to be accurately scheduled.
399
QUE$TORHelp
Inputs
The drilling input panel allows the high level parameters of the drilling campaign to
be specified. To edit the individual well details, click on View/edit drilling
profiles. To edit the time depth curves and learning factors used to calculated
drilling durations, click on View/edit drilling curves.
Once you have reviewed the drilling profiles certain values in this form will become
read only.When this occurs a Restore default drilling profiles button will appear
next to the Apply button.
This button allows you to restore the defaults within the drilling profiles.
400
QUE$TORHelp
Note: If you click this button, then the read only values will revert to the
defaults. This includes the well counts and other key design parameters. Any changes
you made to the drilling profiles will be lost.
Rig
The available options are:
l
Fixed platform (full): The wells are drilled from a permanently installed
platform rig with full mud handling facilities.
Fixed platform (with TSV): The wells are drilled from a rig on the platform,
either permanently installed or skidded on, but require the assistance of a Tender
Support Vessel (TSV).
Fixed platform (jackup): The wells are drilled from a jackup rig in cantilevered
mode. The maximum water depth for jackup operation varies depending on the
region.
Subsea wells (floater): Subsea wells drilled from a floating drilling rig.
Subsea wells (jackup): Subsea wells drilled from a jackup rig.
TLP/Spar platform:The wells are drilled from a permanently installed platform

rig with full drilling facilities on either a TLP or a Spar buoy
Exploration (floater): Exploration wells drilled before development begins from
a semi-submersible. These wells are not completed.
Exploration (jackup): Exploration wells drilled before development begins from
a jackup.These wells are not completed.
Appraisal
l
(floater): Appraisal wells drilled before development begins from a
semi-submersible. These wells are not completed.
Appraisal (jackup): Appraisal wells drilled before development begins from a
jackup.These wells are not completed.
Category
If the rig type chosen is floater then QUE$TOR allows a choice of floating rigs based
on water depth (includes semi-submersible and drill ship rigs). The default selection
is based on water depth as follows:
l
Floater 1500ft: Water depth <=1500 ft (450 m)
Floater 3000ft: Water depth <= 3000 ft (900 m)
401
QUE$TORHelp
l
Floater >7500ft: Water depth > 7500 ft (2300 m)
Profile
There are four Drilling profiles in QUE$TOR, described below. QUE$TOR assumes the
first well and all exploration/appraisal wells are drilled vertically. All other wells
have a build and hold profile by default. Alternative profiles (build and drop or
horizontal at true vertical depth) can be selected using the dropdown list.
l
Build and drop: wells are drilled on a build and drop profile, allowing multiple
wells to be drilled from the same wellpad. This profile is never selected as a
default.
Build and hold: wells are drilled on a build and hold profile, allowing multiple
wells to be drilled from the same wellpad. This profile is selected as default when
the number of production, water injection or gas injection wells is greater than
one.
Horizontal at true vertical depth: wells are drilled on horizontally once the
well depth is reached, allowing multiple wells to be drilled from the same wellpad.
This profile is never selected as a default.
Vertical: wells are drilled vertically from individual wellpads. The first well and
all exploration/appraisal wells are drilled assumed to always be vertically drilled.
Well Details
The well details frame allows you to specify the number of production, water
injection and gas injection wells to be included in the drilling component.The flowrate
refers to the total flowrate for each well category with the flow per well used to select
the size of tubing, wellheads and Xmas trees.
The flowrate is linked to the number of wells and changing the number of wells will
change unlocked flowrates proportionally.If the project has multiple drilling
components, adding wells to one drilling component will reduce the number of wells
in other components if unlocked.
Flowrates are not entered for exploration / appraisal wells as it is assumed they are
not completed. However the average flow per well multiplied by a peak well design
factor is used to determine the exploration or appraisal well wellhead unit rate. The
average flow is based on the peak daily average flowrate for the primary fluid in the
project Design flowrates form and the production well count in the Number of
development wells form.
402
QUE$TORHelp
Drilling Details
Water Depth
Defaults to the field water depth but can be changed as required.Water depth is
referenced to sea level at lowest astronomical tide (LAT).
Reservoir Depth
Defaults to the field reservoir depth but can be changed as required.It is referenced
to sea level at LAT not the rig table. If several different reservoir depths are to be
exploited in the same campaign you can do one of the following:
l
Click on View/edit drilling profiles and specify the depth of each well
individually.
Use a different drilling component for each reservoir, remembering to adjust the
mob / demob durations and learning factors to prevent double dipping.
Reservoir Pressure
Defaults to the field level reservoir pressure but can be changed as required.
Pressure Rating
Used to set the Xmas tree and wellhead design pressures. Four pressure ratings are
available in QUE$TOR; 3000 psi (207 bar), 5000 psi (345 bar), 10000 psi (689 bar)
and 15000 psi (1030 bar). The default is dependent on the wellhead shut-in pressure
(WHSIP). This in turn is calculated from the reservoir pressure after allowing a
pressure loss equivalent to the head of a column of gas between the reservoir and the
xmas tree. Following industry standards a design margin of 10% or 500 psi (35 bar),
whichever is the greater, is then added to the WHSIP to get the wellhead design
pressure.
Longest Stepout
The longest stepout is the calculated maximum horizontal displacement from the
drilling centre.This assumes a rectangular reservoir with dimensions as entered in
the field level details and the number of drilling centres as defined by the concept
selector. The default number of drilling centres is calculated so that the longest
stepout does not exceed the maximum well stepout entered in the field level details.
The first well is assumed to be vertical and the remaining wells are assumed to be
laid out in concentric rings centred on the drill rig.The number of concentric rings is
dependent on the total number of wells per drilling operation.For 2 to 7 wells there is
a single ring, for up to 19 wells there are two rings, for up to 37 wells there are three
rings, for up to 61 wells there are four rings, etc.The horizontal stepout of the outer
ring is set to the Longest stepout.This takes into account the radius of the well
drainage area per well.
403
QUE$TORHelp
Trip Speed
The regional default drilling speeds are independent of the water depth.When drilling
in deep water, additional time is required to make up extra lengths of 30 foot drillpipe
singles to reach the seabed, run and pull the extra length of drillpipe stands
(assuming 90 foot triples) between bit changes and run the extra length of 15 foot
sections of casing to the seabed. This additional time is dependent on the time to
make up a joint of drillpipe (assumed to be 3 minutes/joint) and the rate at which the
drillpipe is tripped (300 m/hr by default).Alternative trip rates can be entered if
required.
The time to run and pull the extra length of drillpipe stands is also applied to the
calculated completion time in deepwater situations.
Rate of Build
The angle by which the deviation angle below the well kick-off point can change in 30
m.This applies to all deviated wells and defines the radius of bends used in the
drilling profiles.
Acid Gas
This identifies whether acid gas is to be taken into consideration in the drilling cost
calculations. If so, QUE$TOR uses higher grade materials for tubing, Xmas trees,
wellheads, completions and downhole ESPs.By default this is selected if the CO
2
content of the wellstream fluid is above 3 mole %.
Use ESPs
Electric submersible pumps can be selected by clicking on the Use ESPs check box.
This option is only available for production wells if the project main product is oil.If
selected, all production wells are assumed to have downhole pumps. The number of
downhole ESPs can be edited in the equipment cost estimate.The pump power
requirement will be included in the associated topsides electrical load list.If the
wells are subsea, the subsea component will include electrical cables in the
umbilicals to power the ESPs.
Every time Apply is clicked the drilling profiles are recalculated.
404
QUE$TORHelp
Drilling Profiles
Clicking on View/edit drilling profiles opens the Drilling profiles window. This
window allows the type, bottom hole location (as defined by the TVD, horizontal shift
and horizontal section length), profile type, completion and drilling duration of each
well to be specified individually.
A well bottom hole location configuration is generated by QUE$TOR for each drilling
component.This assumes that the first well is drilled vertically and subsequent wells
are drilled radially from the centre with increasing horizontal offsets. Intermediate
rings are laid out such that the horizontal shift between successive rings is the same.
The profile of each well and the bottom hole location can be readily modified.
If there are any gas injection wells these are assumed to have the minimum well
stepout as they are likely to be in the gas cap. The remaining production and water
injection wells are laid out assuming a spot pattern well flood arrangement.
The well type of any well can be changed by using the dropdown box.There are five
options here; Production, Water inj., Gas inj., Prod. host, and Prod. Multi. The first
three options are specified by within the well details on the Details tab.The Prod.
host and Prod. multi. options allow multilateral wells to be specified.
l
Prod. host:Specifies that the well will be used to host multilateral production
wells.
Prod. multi.:The well is a multilateral production well drilled from the host. The
kick off, horizontal shift, profile type, horizontal section and maximum deviation
are uneditable as they are set by the host well.
In the example shown above, well 4 was specified as the host well, automatically
selecting the next production well, well 5, as a multilateral.When you change a wells
type to host one multilateral is automatically included. The number of multilaterals
405
QUE$TORHelp
added per host well can be adjusted using the dropdown list for Multilaterals per
production host, with four being the maximum.
Note: The multilaterals are designated as the next n number of production wells
after the host well.
If the Rig type selected in the primary Input form is either for an appraisal or and
exploration well then in the Drilling profiles form the well type will be shown as either
Appraisal or Exploration. In this case the well type is not editable.
Well Profile
The Drilling Profile of each well is described as follows:
l
TVD:True vertical depth of the well bottom hole location below Lowest
Astronomical Tide (LAT) - substantially the same as sea level. By default this is
the same as the specified reservoir depth for all wells.
Kick off:the distance below the seabed at which deviated wells kick-off from
the vertical.
Horizontal shift: the horizontal distance (offset) between the drilling centre and
the bottom hole location excluding any horizontal portion.
Profile type:a choice of drilling profile to reach the bottom hole location
specified by TVD, horizontal displacement and horizontal length. Four types of
profile are available: Build and hold (BH), Build and drop (BD), Horizontal at TVD
(HVTD) and Vertical. Option selection can be made using the dropdown lists. In the
build and drop option the return to vertical point is set at 90% (TVD - water
depth).
Horizontal Section
An additional horizontal length drilled through the reservoir. This can only be
included for the Horizontal at TVD profile.
To modify the drilling profile of any well, type in a new TVD, kick off, horizontal shift
or horizontal section and the measured depth and maximum deviation are
automatically recalculated.
There are combinations of profile parameters that are not compatible.The diagrams
below show those locations which are accessible for each profile type and those
which are not.
406
QUE$TORHelp
Note: Situations where the bottom hole location is not achievable given the
specified well profile parameters typically result in a calculated measured depth
which is larger than expected.
Vertical well (bottom hole locations)
Build and hold well (bottom hole locations)
407
QUE$TORHelp
Build and drop well (bottom hole locations)
Horizontal at TVD well (bottom hole locations)
Measured Depth and Deviation

The measured depth and maximum deviation columns are calculated automatically
from the drilling profile specified.
408
QUE$TORHelp
For a multilateral well the measured depth is the total length of the multilateral
section measured from the host well.
A total depth summing the measured depth for all wells is displayed but cannot be
edited.
The maximum deviation angle is the angle from the vertical (angle ) you need to
achieve to reach the specified horizontal displacement given the true vertical depth,
kick-off point, profile and rate of build (degrees/30 m) of a well. It is given for
information only and cannot be overwritten.
Drilling/Completion Rig
These are identifiers that specify whether the well is drilled and completed from a
platform drill rig (Plat), Floating rig (Float), or jackup rig (J-U).
QUE$TOR's initial selection is the rig specified in the drilling input panel. To modify
the selection, use the dropdown list.
For all platform completed wells, QUE$TOR includes the cost of conductors in the
drilling component.
To specify predrilled wells, change Plat (for platform rig) in the Drilling rig column to
J-U (Jackup) or Float (semi-submersible or drill ship).The combination of drilling by
a mobile rig and completion by a platform rig identifies a well as predrilled. QUE$TOR
automatically assigns the costs to both rig types and includes the cost of a drilling
template.QUE$TOR also includes the cost of a drilling template if a well is drilled and
completed from the same type of mobile rig.
If you include predrilled wells and platform drilled wells in the same component, they
will be scheduled to be drilled consecutively.If you wish to schedule an interval
between the end of predrilling and the start of platform drilling, you should use two
drilling components.In this situation you can simply delete the completion days,
wellheads etc in the predrilling component and delete the drilling days in the platform
component.
Completion Type
A default completion type of cased hole is assumed for all wells.The completion type
selected affects both the equipment cost and the installation duration.QUE$TOR
includes data for the following types of completion:
l
Open hole:the casing and tubing finish at the top of the pay zone.
Cased hole: the tubing extends into the pay zone and is perforated.
Slotted: the tubing ends at the top of the pay zone but a section of very closely
woven mesh extends into the pay zone. This method is often applied in the case of
horizontal wells to prevent the holes from collapsing.
Gravel pack: the gap between the drilled section and the production tubing in the
pay zone is filled with fine, very uniformly sized sand (not gravel). Quite often the
tubing section is a 'slotted liner'.
409
QUE$TORHelp
l
Frac pack: similar to a gravel pack but a sand containing a 'propant' is pumped
into the fractured fissures to prevent them collapsing (prop them open).
To modify the selection, use the dropdown list.
Drilling Durations
A drilling and completion duration for each well is automatically calculated based on
time versus depth curves in QUE$TORs databases.These can be edited by clicking on
View/edit drilling curves in the drilling inputs.
Add Well / Remove Well

These buttons can be used to revise the well count.
To add a well, select the well immediately above where you want to add the new well
(the whole row for the selected well is highlighted) and then click the Add well
button. By default a production well will be added. To change the well type use the
dropdown list.
To remove a well, click on the well number (the whole row for the selected well is
highlighted) and then click the Remove well button.You will be asked to confirm
you wish to remove the selected well.
410
QUE$TORHelp
Drilling Curves
Clicking on View/edit drilling curves opens the drilling curves form.These time
vs.depth curves are extracted from the relevant technical database and are used to
calculate drilling durations.
A different curve is used for each region, rig type, well type (deviated or nondeviated) and drill stage. The data that you want to edit can be selected using the
options at the top of the form.
Note: Changing the selections at the top of the form will not change the rig
selection within the drilling component.
Rig class
The type of rig used to drill the well, for a full definition see Inputs.
Profile
The profile by which the wells are drilled. There are four available Drilling Profiles;
Deviated (Build and hold and Build and drop), Horizontal (HTVD) and Vertical.
Stage
The drilling stage duration includes for all drilling activities for the complete well,
including weather downtime, replacing drill bits, etc.
411
QUE$TORHelp
l
Completion: show the depth dependent durations during the completion phase
and are used to calculate the completion durations. Cased holes are assumed but
the incremental time, dependent on the completion type, is excluded. The time to
install ESPs is considered separately.
Drilling: show the depth dependent durations during the drilling phase and are
used to calculate the drilling duration of production and injection wells.
Exploration / Appraisal: show the depth dependent durations for exploration or
appraisal wells and are used to calculate the drilling duration of exploration and
appraisal wells.
Learning: show the learning factors dependent on the number of wells drilled.
The factor is a multiplier applied to the drilling duration to take account of the
improvement in drill rate typically achieved as more wells are drilled in reservoir.
The eighth well in a drilling operation is assumed to be the technical well with a
learning factor of 1. The learning curve is illustrated below.
The table under each chart can be edited and will impact the number of days for
which the rig is required, when relevant.
Note: Changes to the data will apply only to the selected drilling component. To
change the data for all drilling components within a project, or across multiple
projects, it may be easier to adjust the values within the database. This can be done
using the database editor.
412
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
The equipment weights are updated in the cost estimate sheet as change is applied.
Unit rates for each identified equipment item are retrieved based on the procurement
strategy and are also dependent on the construction material. Equipment costs cover
the vendor's cost for fabrication of the equipment, any procurement of subcomponents and sub-vendor's submission to approval authorities and testing at the
vendor's works. Direct procurement costs are included in the design cost centre.
The unit cost for the equipment items is determined is based on the throughput,
location (topsides or subsea) and pressure of each well.The peak daily throughput is
multiplied by a factor of 1.3 in determining the equipment size. This is to account for
well decline over the year.
Xmas trees
The cost of Xmas trees can is allocated to drilling for dry trees. For wet trees (subsea
wells) the cost is allocated to the subsea component. The configuration of the Xmas
trees is typically subsurface safety valve, lower master valve, upper master valve,
choke valve, wing valve and (if subsea) tree cap. The design rating of the tree can be
selected in the inputs.
Wellheads
The wellhead sits below the Xmas tree and typically includes a casing hanger, casing
head spool, tubing hanger, tubing spool and seals.
Completions
Completion equipment costs vary dependent on the type of completion selected.
413
QUE$TORHelp
Electronic submersible pumps (ESP)
ESP costs include for the downhole equipment plus the topsides electrical equipment.
The downhole equipment typically includes the pump, motor and seal assembly, a
packer, motor lead extension cable and a nominal 2000 m of power cable per
pump.The topsides electrical equipment includes for a step-up transformer, junction
box and variable speed controller.
If the wells are subsea, the subsea component will include electrical cables in the
umbilicals to power the ESPs.

A wellhead is required for each Exploration or Appraisal well. This is only included if
the rig type is for an Exploration or Appraisal well.
The wellhead sits below the Xmas tree (supplied by the drilling contractor) and
typically includes a casing hanger, casing head spool, tubing hanger, tubing spool and
seals.
Note: The cost of equipment items for multilateral wells is separate to allow for
the reduced total Xmas tree and wellhead count and the increased unit flowrate
through these items.
414
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The material cost estimate is shown below.
Drilling/Completion
The drilling material costs are depth related. The length of each casing/tubing size
shown on the cost sheet is the total based on the individual well drilled depth and the
typical Casing Programme.
With dry trees on fixed platforms all casing is assumed to be run to the wellhead on
the cellar deck. The casing length allows for the water depth and freeboard.
The exception to this is multilaterals where the length of 7 liner and production
tubing is set equal to length of the multilateral section.
Cement, mud, brine and bit unit costs are averaged over the total drill depth. For
subsea wells, depth is calculated from the mud line.For platform wells the cement,
mud and brine depths are calculated up to the cellar deck but the bit depth is
calculated from the mud line.Mud costs are based on the use of a typical mud system
with a mixture of seawater polymer, KCl polymer and pseudo oil-based muds. Brine
costs are based on the use of a mixture of 1.5 and 1.8 SG brines. Bit costs assume
the use of new bits for every run.
Conductors
Conductors are only required for platform wells. The cost of the conductor is located
within the substructure (e.g. Jacket) but the unit rate for 30 x 1 wall thickness
screw thread conductors is calculated and shown here to allow you to easily bring the
cost into drilling, if preferred.
415
QUE$TORHelp
Drilling Template
A drilling template is automatically included by QUE$TOR when pre-drilled wells are
specified or wells are drilled and completed by a mobile rig.The template includes
wellhead base and protective structure. The weight increases stepwise as standard
size templates (multiples of 4 wells) are assumed.
416
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
The installation cost estimate is shown below.
From Floating or Jackup

The cost sheet shows the combined duration for drilling and completing all the wells
from the vessel as calculated in the drilling profiles window.The numbers include an
allowance for weather downtime and for mobilisation / demobilisation. The duration
assumes the latest generation of top drive units is used.
The bare rig charter rate excludes any allowance for marine crew or a supply base.
The drill crew numbers are based on a typical crew for the region and include both
the drill crew (tool pusher, drillers, assistant drillers and roughnecks) and the
engineering/maintenance crew (engineers, mechanics, welders and oilers). The
number given is for the crew on the rig at any one time and covers both shifts but
exclude any catering/cleaning crew.
The marine crew for a jackup rig include the installation manager, a medic, wireless
operator, crane driver and roustabouts.For a floating rig a captain, mate/barge
operator and control room operators are also required.
The consumables include diesel, utilities, etc. required to support the drilling
operation. Helicopter services cover the cost of transporting the drill and marine
crew to and from a shore base at the end of each crew change.
Support vessel costs include for PSVs to transport the drilling and vessel
consumables from a supply base out to the field, Anchor Handling Tug Spreads
(AHTS) and standby vessels. The number of each vessel by type varies depending in
the rig type ranging between 1 and 7 PSVs for mobile rigs and 2 PSVs for platform
rigs; from 1 to 3 AHTS for semi-submersible rigs and a standby vessel for all rig
types except non TSV supported platform rigs. Deep water capability rigs require
more support vessels than shallow water rigs.
417
QUE$TORHelp
Supply base costs include for an onshore warehouse for spares plus some head office
costs for engineering design and project work, human resources, purchasing,
accounting and administration.
From Platform
The cost sheet shows the combined duration for drilling and completing all the wells
from the platform as calculated in the drilling profiles window. The duration assumes
the latest generation of top drive units is used.
the drill crew (tool pusher, drillers, assistant drillers and roughnecks) and the
engineering /maintenance crew (engineers, mechanics, welders and oilers).The
number given is for the crew on the rig at any one time and covers both shifts but
exclude any catering/cleaning crew (as these are part of the topsides crew).
The consumables include diesel, utilities, etc required to support the drilling
operation.Helicopter services cover the cost of transporting the drill crew to and
from a shore base at the end of each crew change.
Support vessel costs include for PSVs to transport the drilling consumables from a
supply base out to the field. An AHTS and a standby vessel are included if a TSV
semi-submersible support vessel is selected.
Supply base costs include for an onshore warehouse for spares plus some head office
costs for engineering design and project work, human resources, purchasing,
accounting and administration.
If a TSV was selected the rig charter will include the hire cost of the supporting
jackup or semi-submersible vessel.
Specialist Services
Specialist services include the crew cost plus hire of equipment to perform the
specific operation on a per well basis.Only exploration and appraisal wells are
assumed to be logged and tested by default. All wells require the services of the
cementing crew.
Transport
The duration to tow the rig to the drilling location.QUE$TOR assumes one movement
of the rig to the site location except for exploration wells when the rig is moved
between each well.For Floating rigs 3 x 10-14,000 bhp anchor handling tugs are
assumed. For jackup rigs only 2 tugs are assumed.During this period the drill crew
and specialist services are not required and there are no consumables (other than
fuel for the tugs and supplies for the marine crew). The tug day rate already includes
an allowance for fuel.The net effect is a reduction in the rig rate.The day rate shown
is the standard rig rate minus the saving due to reduced manning and consumables.
Site Preparation
The duration to prepare each drilling location prior to commencing drilling exploration
wells.
418
QUE$TORHelp
419
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
are shown below.
Design
Includes allowance for the hours required to carry out the design of the drilling
requirements and pattern.
This includes project specification, special studies, detail design, site surveys, follow
on engineering, purchasing expediting and inspection services, project control, QA
and documentation during the detailed design phase.It also includes wages, salaries
and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads
(office facilities, utility services, depreciation of facilities and equipment and
administration) project expenses and equipment. It includes costs for vendor
drawings and data, delivery of items to the yard, vendor's installation and
commissioning services, commissioning spares, insurance up to delivery, guarantees
and import duties.
The design duration is based on the quantity and total measured depth of all wells,
with additional hours for ESPs and deviated wells.
Project Management
420
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
A percentage of the total drilling component costs. It includes all certification costs
of the design, equipment, materials and construction used during the drilling, by a
recognised certifying authority (e.g. Lloyd's ABS, or DNV).Certification is only
practice.A certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S.
cost databases.All other cost databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
A percentage of the total drilling component cost to cover insurance for all drilling
operations and materials up to first oil.
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total equipment, material, installation,
Definitions.
421
QUE$TORHelp
About Subsea
The subsea component provides costs for all subsea equipment and materials
including:
l
Clusters, templates and satellites
Commingling and riser base manifolds
Production, test, injection and gas lift flowlines
Risers and riser systems
Umbilicals
Platform controls
Drilling and Xmas tree costs are covered by drilling operations.

QUE$TOR generates a subsea configuration automatically.This can be easily adjusted
using the subsea schematic. This schematic allows complex arrangements containing
many wells, templates, flowlines and manifolds to be rapidly specified. QUE$TOR
keeps track of the flowrates and automatically resizes manifolds and flowlines.
QUE$TOR allows you to estimate subsea development costs in water depths down to
4000 m.
422
QUE$TORHelp
Inputs
The subsea input panel, shown below, allows high level, general parameters to be
specified for the subsea component.
You can navigate between the inputs using the tabs. Clicking on Flowlines,
Umbilicals or Installation will similarly allow you to specify each of these for the
whole component. Clicking on Display subsea schematic will open the subsea
schematic.This enables you to change the default configuration and allows the
number of wells, manifolding, flowline lengths, water depths and diameters etc. to be
specified.
Once you have reviewed the Subsea schematic certain values in the Primary and
Layout tabs will become read only.When this occurs a Restore default schematic
button will appear next to the Apply button.
This button allows you to restore the defaults within the subsea schematic.
423
QUE$TORHelp
defaults. This includes the well counts and a number of options on the layout tab. Any
changes you made to the subsea schematic will be lost.
424
QUE$TORHelp
Primary
The Primary tab contains the high level details of the wells, flowrates and services.
Wells and Flowrates

The number of each type of well included in the subsea configuration. The number of
spare slots can also be specified, although this always defaults to zero. The flowrate
is calculated by pro-rating the total field flow by the number of subsea wells
assuming an equal flowrate for all wells of the same type.The number of wells
displayed here will update automatically if you add or remove wells in the subsea
schematic and will be shown as locked.
If a subsea component is connected to a drilling component it will automatically pick
up the number of wells in the drilling component.If a subsea component is added to
the FDS without a drilling component it will automatically be assigned an equal
proportion of wells as any other drilling or subsea component. Changing the number
of wells in a drilling component will change the number of wells in any linked subsea
component, but the reverse situation does not apply.Therefore, we recommend you
adjust the well count in the drilling components.
The flowrate is linked to the number of wells and changing the number of wells will
change unlocked flowrates proportionally. See Well and flow distribution for a full
explanation of how wells and flowrates are distributed.
For spare slots, the type of spare slots can be defined and will default to Production
wells.
Services
The services frame lists the services you would like within the subsea setup. These
inputs will be applied to the whole of any configuration. If, for example, you require a
test line in one flowline group but not in another then this can be achieved by ticking
the Test service check box and editing the flowlines in the subsea schematic.These
425
QUE$TORHelp
inputs are used when new subsea configurations are generated.Any changes made in
the subsea schematic will not be reflected here.
l
Multiphase metering: includes multiphase meters on all templates, clusters or

satellite production wells. The meters will be placed so that the flow from each
production well can be measured.
Test service: includes a test/service line(s) as required to allow the flow from
each production well to be measured.
Gas lift: allows for all production wells to be gas lifted and includes a gas lift
flowline in every flowline group.
Gas lift rate: the required ratio of gas lift to produced oil, used to size lift and
production lines. This only becomes active if Gas lift is selected and defaults to
600scf/bbl.
Chemical injection: includes chemical injection flowlines to all production
wells.Chemical injection lines can be included in the umbilical so this should only
be selected if a larger diameter chemical injection flowline (in addition to the
chemical tubes in the umbilicals - typically 1 diameter) is required for batch
dosing the wells.
Note: Once you have reviewed the Subsea schematic certain values in the
Primary and Layout tabs will become read only.When this occurs a Restore default
schematic button will appear next to the Apply button. If you click this button then
the well count by type will revert back to the default and any changes you made to
the subsea schematic will be lost.
426
QUE$TORHelp
Layout
The Layout tab allows you to specify the basic subsea layout, which can then be
refined by going into the subsea schematic.
Note:The details on the layout tab provide the default setup for the subsea
schematic. Changes to the subsea schematic will not be reflected in the subsea layout
tab.
Item defaults
The item defaults allow you set the default item type and size.
l
Development type:There are three development options: Cluster, Satellite and

Template. The selected development type is used to generate the default subsea
configuration.Selecting Cluster or Template does not mean that satellite wells will
not be included as the default configuration is derived based on matching the exact
well count.A combination of clusters, templates and satellites can be specified in
the subsea schematic.Any changes made in the subsea schematic will not update
the development type.
Maximum wells per cluster / template: This dictates the maximum number
of wells per template or cluster manifold in the subsea layout. The default is a
maximum of 4 well slots per template / cluster manifold to avoid any requirement
for heavy lift vessels during installation.
Flowline defaults
The flowline defaults allow you adjust the default flowline lengths.
l
Infield flowline length: This dictates the length of infield flowlines within the
subsea schematic.
427
QUE$TORHelp
l
Tie-back: When selected, the subsea schematic will include manifolding for
multiple subsea items before a single tie-back to the riser base or root
component.
Tie-back length: When a tie-back is selected, this provides the default tie-back
distance.
Note: Once you have reviewed the Subsea schematic certain values in the
Layout tab will become read only.When this occurs a Restore default schematic
button will appear next to the Apply button. If you click this button then the subsea
layout will revert back to the default and any changes you made to the subsea
schematic will be lost.
428
QUE$TORHelp
Features
The Features tab allows you to specify the design conditions and features of the
subsea development.
Design conditions
This frame allows you to specify the design conditions for the subsea development.
l
Water depth: This defaults to the deepest water depth of any attached drilling
component. If no drilling component is attached then the default water depth is the
field level water depth.
Wellhead shut-in pressure: This is calculated from the reservoir pressure
allowing a pressure loss equivalent to the head of a column of gas between the
reservoir and the xmas tree.
Pressure rating: Used to set the Xmas tree and wellhead design pressures.This
is calculated based on the wellhead shut-in pressure plus a design margin of 10%
or 500 psi (35 bar), whichever is the greater. Four pressure ratings are available
in QUE$TOR; 3000 psi (207 bar), 5000 psi (345 bar), 10000 psi (689 bar) and
15000 psi (1030 bar).
Wellhead temperature: The wellhead temperature is used to set the inlet
temperature for the subsea flowlines. The wellhead temperature is calculated
from the field level reservoir temperature, pressure and depth allowing for
subsurface heat loss and JTeffect across the choke valve.
429
QUE$TORHelp
l
Soil conditions: The soil condition is used to calculate the pile weight required
for the cluster, template, satellite and riser base manifolds.Three choices are
available: Good, Average and Poor. The default soil condition is Average. These
categories relate to the load bearing capacity of the soil and impact the pile
weight.
Acid gas: This is selected by default if the CO content in the Gas data frame at
2
field level is >3 mol %. If selected, then the materials required for production
manifolds and flowlines will be adjusted to allow for acid gas conditions.
HIPPS
A High Integrity Pressure Protection Systems (HIPPS) can be added to a subsea
project by selecting the HIPPS check box. A HIPPS is an arrangement of valves and
multiple sensors that will temporarily isolate and protect from overpressure a
downstream subsea flowline if the pressure gets too high. This reduces the design
pressure of the downstream flowline potentially reducing the wall thickness which inturn reduces the material and installation costs. HIPPSsystems tend to be considered
when the flowlines are relatively long (usually around 15 to 20 km) and the design
pressure without a HIPPS system exceeds 5000 psia.
HIPPS is always deselected by default. When selected a HIPPS system is added to a
subsea item when all of the following criteria are met:
1. The item is a production item (satellite, cluster or template manifold) or
commingling manifold
2. The item is connected to an output production or test service flowline
3. The downstream flowline is longer than the length specified in Minimum flowline
length .
l
Minimum flowline length: HIPPS systems will not be included to protect

Production and/or Test flowlines shorter than this even when the HIPPS check box
has been selected.
Features
l
Through pigging: Includes a minimum of two production flowlines of equal size

to allow round trip pigging from the host facility when a new subsea configuration
is generated. If a test/service line is present this forms one of the flowlines.
Trawler protection: Includes for a steel protection frame over templates and
manifolds.At water depths deeper than a value set in the regional technical
database (Installation/Subsea/Main data table), QUE$TOR assumes trawl
protection is not required.
Diverless systems: Includes the cost of diverless connectors at all manifolds,
templates and flowline connections when the subsea items are located in deep
water.All items are designed to allow installation, inspection and maintenance by
remotely operated vehicle (ROV).
430
QUE$TORHelp
l
Retrievable subsea: Templates and manifolds are designed to allow retrieval of

modules and components to the surface for repair and replacement.
Intervention tools: Includes the purchase cost of one set of intervention tools
for dedicated use in the subsea development.
431
QUE$TORHelp
Tie-in Point
The subsea tie-in point tab is shown below.
The pressure and delivery temperature specified within this form represent the
pressures and temperature at the tie-in point, which when connected to topsides is at
top of the riser and when connected to shore is the shore arrival value.The default
pressures are set as follows:
l
Production & Test: 35bara (508psia) for oil projects and 80bara (1160psia) for
gas projects.
Gas injection: the pressure is based on the reservoir pressure with an allowance
for the hydraulic head of gas between the topsides and the reservoir, a nominal
pressure drop in the gas injection well and an overpressure to ensure the gas
injection pressure at the bottom of the tubing exceeds the reservoir pressure.
Gas lift: the gas lift riser pressure is based on the gas injection riser pressure,
allowing for a perforation loss.
The delivery temperature at the tie in point is calculated from the wellhead
temperature accounting for heat loss and the mixing of process fluids together along
the subsea flowlines .
l
Production: the temperature of the process fluids at the tie-in point.
432
QUE$TORHelp
Flowlines
Clicking on Flowlines in the Subsea input panel, opens the Subsea flowlines form as
shown below.
Lay Vessel
The type of vessel used to install the flowlines.For each type of vessel QUE$TOR
contains lay rates and limitations according to water depth.The available options
are:
l
Reel-lay: Suitable for smaller, short length flowlines. Reels are prefabricated
onshore and laid using an S-lay or J-lay technique allowing installation in water
depths up to 3000 m.Additional time is allowed for change over of reels for longer
flowlines.The maximum flowline diameter is 16 and then only in water depths up
to 500 m
S-lay without DP: A pipelay barge operating on anchors. Pipe lengths are
welded onboard and laid using a stinger in an S-lay configuration. The water depth
limit for lay barges using anchors is 1000 m
S-lay with DP: A pipelay barge using S-lay configuration but maintaining position
using dynamic positioning. The lay capacity for both S-lay vessels is determined
by the pipe weight that can be supported from the stinger during lay
operations.The maximum water depth for an SDP lay is 2000 m
J-lay: A heavy lift crane vessel converted for pipelay using a vertical J-lay
stinger. The vertical configuration of the stinger allows a lower tension to be used
to support the pipe during the lay operation and allows pipelay in much deeper
waters than the S-lay technique.There is a minimum water depth for J-lay
operation depending on the flowline diameter.The maximum water depth for a
small diameter J-lay is 4000 m
Solitaire: The latest generation of pipelay barge.This is a converted bulk carrier
designed to operate in S-lay mode.Due to the large size of this vessel and by
adjustment of the stinger angle, large diameter flowlines can be laid in
433
QUE$TORHelp
deepwater.It should be noted that at present this is the only vessel capable of
laying large diameter flowlines in deepwater up to 4000 m.
Vessel lay rates beyond those recognised as maximum depth and line size for each
vessel are extrapolated to provide an approximation of the anticipated duration
should the installation be carried out.
QUE$TOR chooses a default vessel based on the water depth, the pipeline diameter
and length.Selection of an alternative type of vessel can be made from the dropdown
list.
Day rates include an allowance for pipe barges and tugs required to supply pipe and
consumables to S-lay without DP, S-lay with DP and J lay vessels.
Flowline Type
Select from Flexible or Steel flowlines.Risers are defined separately.QUE$TOR
always defaults to steel flowlines and, when selected, the steel type can be selected
for each flow type.
Flowline material, thermal insulation, weight coat, cathodic protection and coating
are not available if flexible flowlines are selected.
Buried Lines
Includes the cost of a spread to bury all flowlines in the installation cost
estimate.QUE$TOR defaults to buried flowlines in water depths shallower than 200m.
Material by Fluid Type

Specifies the construction material of the pipelines.Four steel materials and a
flexible linepipe are available, which is selected is dependent on the fluid properties.
l
Carbon steel:This is selected for low-corrosion fluids. API 5L Grade X60 carbon
steel (density 7850 kg/m3, allowable stress 298 MPa, corrosion allowance 3 mm).
Clad 316 stainless: as per the carbon steel line but with a 3 mm internal
cladding of 316L stainless steel. This is an alternative to a solid duplex line when
acid gas conditions are present.
Clad 825 alloy: as per the carbon steel line but with a 3 mm internal cladding of
825 alloy. This is an alternative to a solid duplex line when acid gas conditions
and/or high temperature conditions are present.
Duplex: a solid 22Cr corrosion resistant alloy (density 7800 kg/m3, allowable
stress 327 MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). This is selected when acid gas has
been specified.
kg/m3, allowable stress 402 MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). This should be
434
QUE$TORHelp
selected when pipelines are susceptible to pitting corrosion e.g. seawater lines
with high chloride concentrations.
l
Flexible: an unbonded structure consisting of helically wound metallic armour

wires or tapes combined with concentric layers of polymers and textiles. Each
diameter has a maximum water depth which limits their application.
The material selection will impact the material cost of the pipeline, the installation
speed of the lay vessel and the required diving support vessel (DSV) days for any tieins.
Thermal Insulation Material

The default is not to include insulation. The dropdown list allows a choice of one of
four insulation options, the selection of insulation will impact lay barge time as well
as the material cost. The first insulation option is for wet insulation:
l
Wet - PU Foam: here polyurethane (PU) foam is applied directly to the pipeline,
through spraying or wrapping. There are many variations of wet insulation
available in the market.
The next three options are for pipe-in-pipe (PiP). Here, the pipeline is inserted within
a second (carrier) pipe allowing the created intermediate annulus to be filled with
insulation material. The insulation material is protected by the carrier pipe from the
hydrostatic pressure and from water penetration. Both of which increase thermal
conductivity of the insulation and therefore reduce its effectiveness.
l
PiP - PU Foam: the annulus is filled with polyurethane (PU) foam.

PiP - Aerogel: the annulus is filled with Aerogel or a combination of Aerogel and
PU foam. This offers better thermal performance than just PU foam, thus reducing
the required thickness (annular gap). This may allow smaller diameter pipe to be
used for the carrier pipe.
PiP - ITP: the annulus is filled with Izoflex. This offers better thermal
performance than Aerogel, thus reducing the required thickness (annular gap).
This may allow smaller diameter pipe to be used for the carrier pipe. The ITP field
joint system acts as a buckle arrestor and allows quicker laying of the pipeline,
compared to other insulation options.
Note: the ITP pipe in pipe system is not suitable for duplex and CRA pipelines
due to corrosion issues at the swage.
Thermal Insulation U-value

This is the overall heat transfer co-efficient for the insulation. There are four options
that cover the range of typical U values seen.
The U value selection, along with the insulation material and pipeline diameter
determines the required insulation thickness and thus the annular gap and carrier
pipe dimensions.
435
QUE$TORHelp
PLET selection
Specifies whether PLETs are included for each flowline type. By default, PLETs will be
included when diverless connections are required but this can be adjusted as
required.
The selection here will provide the default PLET selection for each end of the specified
flowline type, these can be adjusted individually within the subsea flowlines form.
Note: the PLET selection at the end of a pipeline at the riser base also depends
on the riser selection in deciding whether or not a PLET is required.
436
QUE$TORHelp
Umbilicals
Clicking on Umbilicals in the Subsea input panel, opens the subsea umbilicals
form.The specifications chosen in this form apply to all umbilicals within the
component. QUE$TOR assumes a composite umbilical(s) containing all services,
electrical signal cables, hydraulics and chemicals.
Control System
QUE$TOR defaults to electrohydraulic controls but also allows hydraulic controls to be
selected.When electrohydraulic controls are selected four 2.5 mm2 electrical signal
cables are included per link.With hydraulic controls, there are two 2.5 mm2 electrical
cables per link.
Control Tube Material

Four materials are available for control tubes in the umbilical: carbon steel,
thermoplastic, duplex and super duplex. The default is Duplex.
Inhibitor Chemicals
If Inhibitor chemicals is selected, QUE$TOR includes a number of control tubes in
each umbilical to provide hydrate inhibitor chemicals, e.g. methanol or mono
ethylene glycol.
Power Cables
This refers to power cables needed for electric submersible pumps (ESPs). If ESPs
have been selected in a linked drilling component then Power cables will be selected
by default. If selected QUE$TOR includes power cables to all producers. The cables
are assumed to be bundled with the umbilicals and the cost is included in the relevant
link and riser cost breakdowns. Each ESP is assumed to have a power demand of 250
kW. 95 mm2 (6.6kV) cables are included for connections supplying up to 8 ESPs,150
mm2 (6.6kV) cables are included for connections supplying up to 16 ESPs, 240 mm2
(6.6kV) cables are included for connections supplying more than 16 ESPs.
Clicking OK is an inherent Apply, i.e. any changes made automatically update
quantities and unit rates if applicable unless they have been locked.
437
QUE$TORHelp
438
QUE$TORHelp
Installation
Clicking on Installation in the Subsea input panel, opens the Subsea installation
days window.
This form gives a breakdown of spread duration by vessel, along with the specific
activities. It also allows you to adjust parameters such as the distance to the subsea
supply base and the weather downtime percentages for the various subsea
installation spreads which will impact the installation durations.
Distance to supply base: the distance between the field and the subsea supply
base. This is set to the field level Distance to operation base value by default but
allows the subsea supply base and the operations base to be in different locations.
Weather downtime (small vessels): the weather downtime percentage for the
DSV, trench, survey, dredge, rock install and supply vessel spreads. This allows you
to overwrite the regional defaults with data which is specific to the field location.
Weather downtime (large vessels): the weather downtime percentage for the
pipelay, SSCV and SSDV spreads. This allows you to overwrite the regional defaults
with data which is specific to the field location.
The lower frame allows you to view and edit the number of days required for each
installation spread.The durations include the time to install all templates, manifolds,
flowlines, umbilicals, PLETs and risers and to make all connections between
components.
Eight categories of spread are available in QUE$TOR:
439
QUE$TORHelp
n
Pipelay spread:this can be a reel-lay, S-lay without DP, S-lay with DP, J-lay or
Solitaire. The type can be chosen in the Flowlines form
DSV: a sophisticated diving support vessel with high manoeuvrability suitable for
carrying out challenging subsea equipment installations in any type of
environment. The vessel is equipped with the very latest technology and safety
enhancements, featuring a large working deck area and lifting facilities (heavy lift
crane), advanced dynamic position system (DP3), ROVs and a 18 or 24-man twin
bell saturation diving system, in addition to large accommodation facilities
SSCV: a semi-submersible crane vessel
SSDV: a semi-submersible drilling vessel - never selected by default
Trench vessel:a trenching/burial spread
Survey vessel: a survey vessel
Dredge vessel: a seabed dredging vessel
Rock install vessel: a rock dumping/rock installation vessel
Supply vessel: a supply vessel.
Flowlines, umbilicals and risers are installed using the laybarge. By default small
templates and clusters (6 wells or less) are installed by DSV with an SSCV only
brought in for larger structures.Umbilical and flowline connections are made from a
DSV using either divers in shallow water or remotely operated vehicles (ROVs) in
deeper waters. Flowline trenching is performed using a trenching spread.
The calculated durations include for positioning the installation vessel, lowering each
item to the seabed, positioning and levelling, piling (4 piles per manifold) and then
returning back to sea level.All flowline and umbilical connections to a given manifold
are assumed to be made in a single operation. The duration for each connection is
dependent on the diameter or type and water depth.
Flowline lay rates and riser installation durations are consistent with the algorithms
used in the pipeline component.
Transit loadout: a duration which allows for loading items onto the vessel and the
trip time to get to the field
Weather downtime: weather downtime duration calculated using the downtime
percentages entered for small and large vessels at the top of this form.
Mobilization / demobilization:time allowed to mobilize / demobilize each spread
when the sum of the installation activity days for a given vessel exceeds zero.It
covers the time to prepare the vessel for the activities required. All installation is
assumed to be accomplished in one campaign.
Total: the sum of all installation activities, transit loadout, weather downtime and
mobilization / demobilization days for each installation spread. This is for
information only and can't be edited.
440
QUE$TORHelp
Subsea Configuration
Clicking on Display subsea schematic in the subsea input panel, opens the subsea
configuration window. The subsea configuration gives a graphical representation of
the subsea layout.
The subsea configuration is made up of a number of components linked together,

much like the field development schematic. The different components and flowline
link have icons on the Subsea toolbar to allow you to add them to the schematic.
QUE$TOR automatically draws a default configuration based on the selections in the
Layout tab of the subsea inputs together with number and type of wells and the linked
downstream component
To add components to the schematic
Select a component from the Subsea toolbar by left clicking on it.If you require a
different component type to that selected, use the dropdown button to change the
type before clicking on the component button.Move the cursor onto the schematic
and left click again to drop the component in the required position.
To link components
To add a link, left click on the flowline group icon in the Subsea toolbar then left click
first on the item you want production to flow from and secondly on the item the
production will flow to. You can link most subsea components together. However,
limitations include:
441
QUE$TORHelp
l
Circular loops cannot be modelled.
A template or cluster manifold cannot be daisy chained through a satellite well.
When items are linked in a daisy chain configuration, the flow from an item is the
sum of any upstream flows plus the flow from wells at that item.
Note: QUE$TOR does not allow you to have a development with 3 (or more)
commingling manifolds in a circular arrangement.
Item and Link Names

Items and links are numbered sequentially, e.g. Item 01, Item 02 and Link 01, Link
02. Each can be renamed by either doubling left clicking on the item/link name or
right clicking on the item and selecting Rename and then entering the new
name/identifier using the Rename form.
Item and link labels can be re-positioned on the schematic by left clicking on the label
and dragging and dropping them to the new location.
Item and Link Duplication

QUE$TOR allows duplication of one or more subsea items and their links to quickly
revise subsea components containing multiple identical (or substantially similar)
items. This feature saves you having to re-enter changes to the QUE$TORdefaults for
the selected duplicated items.
l
442
Configure the subsea item(s) and downstream links by making changes to the
QUE$TORdefaults as required in the Item properties and Link properties forms.
Select the item(s) you want to duplicate. Right click on one of them and select
the Duplicate option.
QUE$TORHelp
A ghosted image of the selected items is displayed allowing you to position

them on the subsea configuration schematic.
Left click to add the duplicate items and their links to the schematic.
443
QUE$TORHelp
Any changes made to the original items will also be present in the new items
(Items 05 and 06 and Links 05 and 06).
Notes:
1. Once you have duplicated an item or multiple items (which can be daisy
chained) additional changes can be made to a duplicate item which will apply
only to that item
2. If multiple linked items are duplicated then the duplicates are linked together in
the same way as the original items
3. The duplicated items are linked back to the same item as the original
4. The root node (tie-back point) cannot be duplicated
To hide/show all subsea labels

By default all subsea item and link labels are displayed on the subsea schematic.
Click the
labels.
icon to toggle between hiding or showing all subsea item and link
Individual item or link labels can be hidden by right clicking on the label and selecting
the 'Hide label' option. To display a hidden label right click on the item or link label
and select the 'Show label' option,
To add notes in the schematic
444
QUE$TORHelp
Notes can be added to the subsea schematic using the annotation icon
. When
selected, the Add annotation dialog is displayed allowing you enter text and position it
in the schematic.

To select a group of components on the schematic
down to drag over all required components before releasing. These groups can be
moved or deleted.
the component and select Delete.You will be asked to confirm any deletions to
To open a component
To open and adjust a component, double click on it or right click on it and select
Edit.See the relevant component page for more information.
The Print button at the bottom of the subsea schematic windows allows you to print
out a copy of the input data along with a copy of the schematic. The Preview button
allows you to preview this report before printing it.The Copy image button allows
you to copy an image of the subsea schematic to a clipboard as a bitmap file so you
can paste it into an another application, e.g. Word or PowerPoint, for reporting
purposes.
445
QUE$TORHelp
Subsea Items
Subsea items covers three available types of subsea structures through which wells
can be drilled, namely clusters, templates & satellites. Double clicking on any of
these items within the schematic will open the subsea item properties form.
General
l
446
Item type: The item can be set to be a template, cluster or satellite subsea
structure. The water depth will default to that entered in Features tab of the
main subsea inputs but can be adjusted as required.
Water depth: This defaults to the water depth in the Subsea, Features tab
but can be adjusted if the selected item is in a different water depth.
QUE$TORHelp
Well details
The number of wells can be changed for any subsea item. The total number of wells
determines the size of the item. Templates and clusters come in standard sizes with
4,6,8,10 and 12 slots.
QUE$TOR checks the total number of well slots corresponds to a standard size for the
selected item type and adds spare slots to bring an item up to the next largest
standard size. A warning will be shown in the total well slots entry if this is not true.
When spare slots are added, the type of spare can be specified. This will default to
either the value selected at in the Primary tab of the main subsea inputs or
production if none are selected at the higher level. Adding spare slots will mean that
manifolding is included for these wells within the subsea structure.
Note:No allowance is made for the potential future flow from a spare slot.
Services
The services included by default are based on the selections in the Primary and
Features tab of the main subsea inputs and can be adjusted on an item by item basis
as required.
l
Test service: If selected a test/service line will be included downstream of

the subsea item. This will be disabled if the subsea item has no production
wells.
Gas Lift: If selected a gas lift line from the host facility will be included in the
link downstream of the subsea item. This will be disabled if the subsea item has
no oil production wells.
Chemical injection: If selected a 2" injection flowline will be included in the
link downstream of the subsea item for batch dosing chemicals (typically
methanol) into a production well for hydrate suppression.
HIPPS: If selected a HIPPS will be included as part of the subsea item to
protect the downstream production or test service line from overpressure.
The test service and gas lift options will be disabled if there are no production wells.
When a service is selected, the corresponding flowline will be added to the
downstream link.
Multiphase metering
Multiphase metering can be selected when there are production wells within an item.
Multiphase meters will be selected by default when they have been selected on the
Primary tab of the main subsea inputs.
l
On test manifold: will add a test manifold to the item and a multiphase meter
will be placed on this to measure the flow from an individual production well. The
meter will therefore be sized to handle the flow from an single production well.
447
QUE$TORHelp
This option is not available for satellite wells.
l
On production manifold: will add a multiphase meter to the production

manifold. The meter will therefore be sized to handle the flow from all production
wells on that item. This option is not available for satellite wells.
On wellhead(s): will add a multiphase meter onto each production wellhead.
Each meter will therefore be sized to handle the flow from an single production
well. This will be the default for satellite wells when multiphase metering is
selected.
Umbilical Terminations
A Umbilical Termination Assembly (UTA) is assumed at the end of every umbilical
and, if required, a Subsea Distribution Unit (SDU) is included when an umbilical is
providing control of multiple wells.
l
Wells serviced: will define the number of wells controlled via the SDU or UTA.
The SDU wells serviced can be adjusted to allow a single SDU to provide support
to multiple wells or clusters; the UTA wells serviced will be equal to the SDU wells
serviced. If the item is a satellite well then only a UTA is assumed although an
SDU can be added in the event a number of satellite wells are daisy-chained with a
shared SDU located at one of the satellite wells.
Flying leads - Hydraulic: will define the number of hydraulic flying leads
connecting the UTA, SDU, and wells. Adjusting the number of flying leads will
adjust the cost of the flying leads in the item sub cost sheet plus the installation
duration.
Flying leads - Electrical: will define the number of electrical flying leads
connecting the UTA, SDU, and wells. Adjusting the number of flying leads will
adjust the cost of the flying leads in the item sub cost sheet plus the installation
duration.
QUE$TOR calculates the number of flying leads based on the options selected.
Note: When adjusting the number of wells serviced by a single SDU or UTA the
other items should be adjusted to balance all the wells being serviced.
448
QUE$TORHelp
Subsea Flowlines
The links within subsea represent a bundle of lines, this can include production and
injection flowlines, umbilicals and power cables. Double clicking on the link will open
up the subsea link properties form.
General
The general frame shows the length of the link. The length is based on either the infield or tie-back length specified on the Layout tab of the main subsea inputs and is
the same for all flowlines and umbilicals in the link.
Well / Tie-back ends

The name and the water depth at the well end and tie-back end of the link is
displayed. The hydrostatic head due to elevation changes between the well and tie-in
ends is reflected in the flowline hydraulics. The flowline installation vessel selection
is water depth dependent and based on the deeper of the two water depths.
Note: The well and tie back item names and the water depths at each end are not
editable in this form. Any changes required must be made in the General section of
the Subsea items properties form.
Total flowrates
The total production and injection flowrates frames show the total production (oil,
water and gas) and injection (water and gas) flowrates in this link. The flows are
449
QUE$TORHelp
shown for information only and are determined by the upstream wells.
The following tabs allow the definition of each of the flowlines within the subsea link.
Each of the flowlines required by the upstream wells and flowlines is included within
the link and then sized on their individual parameters.
Note: The flowrates are not editable for each line, with the exception of test
lines. Here, you can edit the flowrate but the total flow at the riser base will not be
passed through to the test facilities of a connected topsides.
Flowline sizing
The Flowline sizing tab, shown below, allows the diameter and wall thickness of the
each flowline to be calculated. You can specify the pressure at either end of the
pipeline and modify the nominal diameter.
You can also specify the flowline design pressure used to calculate the pipewall
thickness. The Design pressure is set to the wellhead shut-in pressure for production
and test/service flowlines if a HIPPS system is not installed as part of the upstream
item. For HIPPS protected flowlines and for water injection, gas injection and gas lift
flowlines the design pressure is set to 110% of the maximum operating pressure in
the link (or upstream link) for the selected fluid or the wellhead shut-in pressure,
whichever is the greater.
The outlet temperature for each flowline is used in the calculation to evaluate the
pipeline size. The flowline temperature is calculated for the production and test lines
from the wellhead allowing for the Joule Thomson effect across the choke valve and
temperature loss to the surrounding environment from the reservoir. Where a
production or test flowline co-mingles with another flowline then the input
temperature to the flowline is the mass weighted average temperature of the two
flows. The output temperature of all the flowlines can be specified which will adjust
the size calculation and is then used in further downstream components. The inlet
temperature for the production and the test lines are provided by the upstream
elements and is not editable by the user. The water injection, gas injection and gas
lift lines are assumed to be isothermal and the input temperature is set to match the
outlet temperature and does not affect any other flows that are separated out from
them.
Flowline nominal diameters can be adjusted using the dropdown menu. Only API 5L
standard diameters are available, i.e. you can't specify for example a diameter of 9.5
inch. For steel flowlines the maximum diameter is 24 inch.For flexible flowlines the
maximum diameter is 16 inch. If the calculated diameter exceeds these maximum
sizes then multiple parallel flowlines are used and the flowlines resized.
450
QUE$TORHelp
Further details of the sizing methodology can be found in the Pipeline sizing section.
Chemical injection flowlines if included are sized as nominal 2" diameter methanol
injection lines. The flowline pressure drop is calculated based on a fluid velocity of 2
m/s and outlet pressure equal to 105% x wellhead shut-in pressure. The design
pressure is then set to 110% of the flowline inlet pressure. If a larger diameter
chemical injection flowline is required this can be selected using the Diameter
dropdown list.
Note: for flexible flowlines, the wall thickness and corrosion allowance will not
be displayed as the nominal diameter reflects the industry standard.
Coating and insulation

The Coating and insulation tab, shown below, enables you to specify the pipeline
coatings and insulation requirements.
The options and defaults are explained within the Pipeline installation section.
Note: for subsea flowlines, the common installation vessel assumptions are
common to all lines and can be seen in the Flowlines form.
451
QUE$TORHelp
Well end termination / Tie-back end termination
Each of these tabs, the Well end termination tab is shown below, describes the
pipeline termination details at that end of the line. They allow for the inclusion, and
definition of a PLET at each end.
Note: the well end refers to the end closest to the wells (upstream) and the tieback end refers to the end closest to the tie-back (downstream).
The options for the PLETs are common between subsea and offshore pipelines.
Further details of the options can be found in offshore pipelines. The selection of
PLETs within subsea is also influenced by the selections in the Flowlines form.
Umbilicals
The umbilical frames allow you to edit the number and diameter of control and
chemical tubes.The defaults are based on the number of wells controlled/served by
the umbilical link.Tube diameters between 0.5 (12.7 mm) and 1.25 (31.7 mm) are
available from the dropdown list for both control and chemicals.
There are two types of control tubes available; electro-hydraulic and hydraulic. The
control tube type can be selected in the umbilicals sub-component with the default
being for electro-hydraulic control tubes.When electro-hydraulic controls are
selected four 2.5 mm electrical signal cables are included per link.For hydraulic
controls, there are two 2.5 mm electrical cables per link.
452
QUE$TORHelp
Subsea Tie-back
The tie-back component can be modified by double clicking on the tie-back
component, which opens the form shown below.
Tie-back type
The default tie-back selection is based on the downstream component connected to
the subsea component. You should make sure that both are consistent unless it is a
tie-back to an existing facility, in which case you would have a sink on the main FDS
and can then set the actual tie-back type within subsea.
Water Depth
The water depth at the tie-back. It will be used in the calculations for the termination
or riser. This defaults to the water depth in the Subsea, Features tab but can be
adjusted if the water depth at tie-back location is different.
Termination type
The termination at the end of the pipeline: a Riser or Shore approach. The default will
be dependent on the export component.
Sub-type
Each of the above terminations can be further categorised. The options available
depend on the options selected above with the default influenced by the export
component and water depth. See Pipeline terminations for further details.
The optimum riser type depends on the water depth and environmental conditions but
in QUE$TOR the default riser type is set depending on the type of substructure it is
connected to. The following default riser types are assumed:
l
Steel jacket: J-tube.
GBS: Steel retrofit.
453
QUE$TORHelp
l
Semi-submersible: Steel catenary.
FPSO and Barge: Flexible lazy S.
TLP and Spar: Top tensioned.
Note: It is possible to select a riser type that is unsuitable for the termination
type.
If fixed platform is selected then it is recommended to choose between flexible lazy
S, steel catenary, top tension, single leg hybrid, J-tube, steel fixed and steel retro-fit
risers. Where J-tube or steel risers are used the steel grade is assumed to be the
same as for the flowlines, i.e. carbon steel, clad 316 stainless, clad 825, duplex or
CRA.
If a fixed platform is not selected then J-tube, steel fixed and steel retro-fit risers are
available but should not be selected as these are not suitable for floating platforms.
If a landfall or a sink with shore approach is selected the water depth, riser systems
and riser length are hidden as they are not relevant.
Note:When tying back subsea to shore there is no allowance for manifolding

the lines at shore if connected to a single onshore pipeline. You can either include
offshore manifolding in the subsea component or include an onshore production
facility (manifold only). If the latter option is selected you will also have to include
pipelines for each fluid in the link between the landfall and manifold station.
Riser Systems
When flexible risers are included, the cost for a riser support system consisting of an
arch and buoy is included.Each system can support up to five risers, with the
maximum total diameter of risers that can be handled by any one system is 40 inch.
Riser Length
This is the length of the riser pipe, and is based on the water depth and riser
selection.
454
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
The equipment cost estimate includes the costs of all manifolds, intervention tools
and controls in the component.
Intervention Tools
Includes the purchase cost of one set of intervention tools for dedicated use in the
subsea development.
Platform Controls Main

A main control unit on the platform.
Platform Controls Additional

Incremental control modules for each well.
Note: If the subsea wells are tied back directly to shore the above two labels
will change to read 'Onshore controls - main' and 'Onshore controls - additional'.
Freight
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total cost of the
equipment. It includes the cost of packaging and transporting equipment from the
manufacturer to the construction yard. You may modify the freight percentage; the
default is dependent on where the equipment is procured (in region or out of region).
Detailed Item Cost Breakdown

Clicking on the blue hyperlinked names in the equipment cost estimate will open a
new window.
455
QUE$TORHelp
Main Structure
The subsea installation is constructed as a tubular steel structure.
l
Structure:The weight of the structure including landing and levelling equipment,

surface protection and anodes
Guide base: Supplied for each well slot of a template and satellite well
Protection structure:An over-trawlable steel structure providing protection
from fishing activities and dropped objects
Piles:Weight of piles to secure installation on the seabed.
Xmas trees
The trees for each well type are shown with the costs based on the flowrate and
design pressure. The configuration of the Xmas trees is typically subsurface safety
valve, lower master valve, upper master valve, choke valve, wing valve and tree
cap.
456
QUE$TORHelp
Manifolding (Piping & Valves)
For each flow type a manifold is sized based on the flowrate, design pressure and
number of connections (including spare slots of that type).The weight includes for
branch lines and isolation valves.
Multiphase metering
When multiphase meters are selected, they will be classified into one of three
available sizes and added to the cost sheet.
Flowline Connectors/Pull-In
For each flowline, jumper and umbilical to or from a template, cluster or manifold a
connector is included.For diver connected installations this covers flanges and spool
pieces, while for diverless connections it covers mechanical connectors and pull-in
tools.
Cluster Satellites
If clusters have been specified, this includes the associated costs for guide base, a
steel protective structure, flowline jumpers between the wells and manifold and the
and flying leads from the UTA to the SDU and SDU to the wells.
457
QUE$TORHelp
Control and Testing

l
Subsea distribution unit: The cost of the unit require to distribute electrical and
hydraulic control signals plus chemical flows to the xmas trees and manifold
Subsea controls:The cost of subsea controls required per well including the
subsea control pod.
System testing: A cost covering the equipment and controls testing required for
each well.
HIPPS
If HIPPS has been selected a HIPPS per flowline by fluid type is included. The unit
cost allows for the sensors and control system plus two isolation valves. The valve
cost is dependent on the flowline diameter and the pressure rating .
458
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The materials cost estimate includes costs for all flowlines, umbilicals and risers.
Clicking on the blue hyperlinked name of link or riser will open a new window giving a
detailed cost breakdown.
Riser Systems
When flexible risers are included, the cost for a riser support system consisting of an
arch and buoy is included.Each system can support up to five risers.The number of
riser systems required is determined assuming the maximum total diameter of risers
that can be handled by any one system is 40 inch.
Links
The links within subsea represent a bundle of lines, this can include production and
injection flowlines, umbilicals and power cables.An example of a detailed cost
breakdown for a link is shown below.
459
QUE$TORHelp
Each flowline within the link is specified individually, with the costs based on your
selections within the subsea schematic. A detailed breakdown of the flowline costs
can be seen in offshore pipelines.
Umbilicals
Umbilicals are run in parallel with flowlines assuming the same lengths.The
umbilicals costs are shown below the flowlines, as shown below.
460
QUE$TORHelp
The cost of a direct hydraulic umbilical is for a seven function umbilical, assuming a
combination of hydraulic lines, twisted pairs of wire and a small diameter chemical
injection line.The cost for an electrohydraulic umbilical assumes a cable of various
twisted pairs controlling hydraulic actuators subsea on the template.
Risers
An example of a detailed cost breakdown for a flowline group is shown below.
As with the links, the risers cost sheet shows the riser costs by flow type, with the
umbilical risers shown separately. See Offshore pipeline terminations for details on
the riser costs.
461
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
The installation costs include all vessels required to install the templates, manifolds,
flowlines and risers and to make all connections between components.The cost
estimate displays a summary of the durations for a pipelay vessel (showing the
selected spread type), diving support vessel (DSV), test & commissioning of the
flowlines, semi-submersible crane vessel (SSCV), semi-submersible drilling vessel
(SSDV), trench vessel, survey vessel, dredge vessel, rock install vessel and supply
vessel.
Five types of flowline lay vessel are available in QUE$TOR. The type can be specified
by within the Flowlines sub-component. A more detailed breakdown of vessel
duration by activity can be seen in the Subsea installation days dialog box.
462
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
Design
This component includes the quantity of hours required to carry out the design of the
subsea facility. It covers the hours for detailed design through to installation at the
location.
This includes project specification, special studies, detail design, follow-on
documentation during the detailed design phase. It incorporates all wages, salaries
and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads
(office facilities, utility services, depreciation of facilities and equipment and
administration), project expenses and equipment. It includes vendor data delivery of
items to the yard, insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
The design hours are calculated as a factor of the number of subsea installations (i.e.
number of templates or satellite wells), with a reduction in man-hours for each
repeat design.
Project Management
463
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
This is a percentage of the total component cost. It includes all certification costs for
the approval of the design, materials and installation by a recognised certifying
authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV). Certification is only included by default for
Insurance
Contingency
Definitions.
464
QUE$TORHelp
About Barges
It is anticipated that the barge component will only be used in relatively shallow
waters (50m or less) and in a benign environment.For deeper waters and non-benign
environments the tanker component is strongly recommended in place of the barge.
Other floaters available include twin hull semi-submersibles, TLPs (Tension Leg
Platforms), tankers, cylindrical hulls and spar buoys.
Barges are simple flat bottomed vessels with a minimum of facilities and with no self
propulsion.
Developments with Barges

It should be noted that barges are probably most suitable to shallow water/swamp
regions.As such they are most applicable in the Far East/African regions.Some
geographical databases have no suitable areas for barge installation and are not
provided with barge cost data, e.g. North Sea regions.If it is required that a barge is
to be used in such a region, the cost data should be manually entered.
465
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The Barge Primary Inputs are shown below.
Storage Required
If storage is required the box should be checked.The required storage will be
calculated by multiplying the peak oil production rate by the days requested.The
required storage is then used to determine the barge size.If storage is not needed
the storage required box should be unchecked.
Note: There is a maximum storage capacity of 1,000,000 bbl.
Production Rate
This is the peak oil production rate and is passed from the associated topsides. It is
used in conjunction with the days storage required to calculate the total storage
requirement.
Topside Operating Weight

The operating weight of the associated topsides. This is used to size the barge if no
storage is required.
Barge Size
If the barge has storage, QUE$TOR determines its size based on the storage volume
required.In this situation, three Barge Sizes with Storage are available in
QUE$TOR.The cost of these three barges includes all systems necessary for oil
storage.
466
QUE$TORHelp
Where storage is not required, the barge size is determined by the topsides operating
weight.In this situation two Barge Sizes without Storage are available in QUE$TOR;
these barges are assumed to have no storage systems.
Water Depth
This is used to calculate the mooring lines required. Barges are not recommended for
water depths greater than 50 m.In deeper waters alternative floating substructures
are recommended such as tankers.
Marine transport
Barges tend to fabricated in S. E. Asia and then transported to the topsides
construction site for mating prior to be being towed out to the field. The values below
allow you to specify the method of transportation to the mating site and the distance
the barge needs to transported.
l
Method: For barges only two transport methods are available in QUE$TOR
namely; Wet tow and None. The default is wet tow, where the barge is towed by
two tugs. None is used when the barge and topsides are fabricated in the same
construction yard.
Distance: This is an estimate of the distance the barge will have to be
transported from its construction yard to the topsides fabrication yard (assumed
to be close to the installation site). The distance is based on standard sea voyage
routes making use of the Suez and Panama canals where appropriate. This is used
in conjunction with the transport speed to calculate the Transport from fabrication
yard duration.
467
QUE$TORHelp
Mooring System
Clicking on the Mooring System tab allows the mooring system to be specified. The
mooring system inputs are shown below.The algorithms used allow moorings to be
specified in up to 4000 m of water, however barges are not recommended for water
depths deeper than 50 m and in deeper water the tanker component is more suitable.
Similarly chain and wire and chain and rope mooring lines are available to select but
chain only lines will typically remain technically and economically superior at all
water depths suitable for this component.
Mooring Type
Chain
the water depth. This chain is used as an additional weight to provide restoring force
to the vessel and reducing the force applied to the anchor.SPAs can withstand a
greater force before any movement of the anchor occurs than DEAs and consequently
require less chain on the seabed.
468
QUE$TORHelp
Chain and rope and chain and wire mooring lines are available to select but not
recommended in water depths suitable for water depths where barges are typically
used.
Chain & Rope
l
the semi-submersible back into position should it move. The proportion of rope
Chain & Wire

l
Top Section:80 m of chain which connects the vessel and the wire section.This
chain reduces wear on the wire in the splash zone and prevents it from being
exposed to the air.The chain extends from the chain locker over the windlasses
down to sea level and includes a section to take it below the splash zone.If a
drilling rig is included an additional 20 m of chain is included in the lockers to
increase manoeuvrability.
chain and so requires less buoyancy to be built into a semi-submersible. The
proportion of wire varies as a function of water depth, increasing as the water
depth increases.
Anchor Type
QUE$TOR includes costs for drag embedded anchors or suction piled anchors.Drag
embedded anchors are selected by default for barges.
469
QUE$TORHelp
Soil Condition
The soil condition is used to calculate the size of the anchors required.Three choices
are available.
l
Good: the soil has high load bearing capacity.

conditions.
region. Selection of severe, moderate or mild conditions updates the default wave
l
l
l
Wind speed: The wind speed is the value measured at a reference height of 10m
Tidal current: The tidal current is a surface value.The algorithm estimates a
typical.
Mooring Chain Size

the barges size.
470
QUE$TORHelp
generation of semi-submersible selected.If chain and wire mooring lines are used
then the wire size is assumed to be the same as the chain size.If chain and rope
mooring lines are used then the Rope Size is selected according to chain size.
Note:QUE$TOR only holds cost data for the chain and rope sizes shown in Chain
Number of Lines
An eight point mooring system is assumed for all barges. If this is overwritten the
mooring lines are resized to provide the required load bearing capacity, although you
should note that the chain size will never exceed 6.5 inches. In a similar fashion,
which maintains a constant load bearing capacity, the number of mooring lines is
recalculated if the mooring chain size is changed from the calculated value.
Chain Length
Rope Length
Wire Length
471
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
The equipment cost estimate includes the cost of purchasing the barge and the
anchors and is shown below.
Barge Cost
The barge cost is for a new build flat bottomed vessel with a minimum of facilities
that is not self propelled.
Anchors
made in the Inputs. The anchor weight is dependent on the type of anchor selected,
472
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The material cost estimate includes the cost of the risers and mooring lines and is
shown below.
Mooring Chain
The chain for all lines required to moor the barge. It is dependent on the water depth
and size of barge.
Mooring Wire/Rope
The total quantity of wire or rope required. You can specify whether wire or rope is
used in the mooring system inputs. If the mooring type is chain only this is labelled
as Mooring other and the unit rate for rope is used.
Note:At water depths suitable for the barge component, chain only mooring
lines are likely to be preferable.
The number of terminations connecting sections of chain to wire/rope.
Freight
This cost is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the total materials cost.It
the construction yard.You may modify the freight percentage; the default is
473
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
Installation includes the costs of towing the barge to the field and installing it and can
be seen below.

The barge is transported by wet tow from the fabrication yard to the deck mating
site. The tow duration includes an allowance to mobilise the transportation spread to
the construction yard and demobilise the spread. Deck mating is included within the
topsides component.
Tow Out and Installation

This is the duration taken to tow the barge to the installation location including
mobilisation / demobilisation, waiting time and site survey.The unit rate is based on
a number of tugs/anchor holding vessels and includes labour, fuel, consumables,
downtime and support.

Sea trials and marine commissioning includes for reception of the barge from the
yard and checking and testing of the marine systems.
474
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
are shown below.
Design
The estimated number of hours required to carry out the design of the barge. It
covers the hours required for detailed design and the design hours required in the
yard. Activities included are project specification, special studies, detail design, site
surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services,
project control, QA and documentation during the detailed design phase.The unit rate
includes wages, salaries and other benefits to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance,
general overheads (office facilities, utility services, depreciation of facilities and
equipment and administration), project expenses and equipment. Allowance is made
for vendor data, delivery of items to the yard, insurance up to delivery, guarantees
and import duties.
The design hours calculated are related to the deadweight of the barge.
Project Management
475
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
This is a fixed percentage of the total barge costs. It includes all certification costs of
the design, equipment, materials and construction of the barge by a recognised
approval authority (e.g. Lloyd's, ABS or DNV).Certification is only included by default
for European and North American countries where it is common practice. A
certification percentage is included in the Canadian, North Sea and U.S. cost
databases.All other cost databases have a zero cost for certification.
Insurance
Contingency
A contingency is added as a percentage of the total material, installation, HUC,
Definitions.
476
QUE$TORHelp
About Bridge Links

The Bridge link component provides costs for a permanent steel bridge linking two
fixed platforms. It covers the structural steelwork, secondary steelwork such as
walkways, process flowlines, utilities flowlines and power cables. The weight
estimates of these elements are based on typical tonne / metre values which do not
vary based on the length of the bridge.
Cost estimates for square and triangular section bridges are available with inputs for
the process flowlines, utilities and power cables.
Note: Intermediate supports are not available in the estimate and are not
considered for any bridge.
The bridge link weight and flows will be passed to the attached topsides. To link a
bridge link to a platform you should use the link component, you will have to attach
each topsides separately. The field development schematic below shows the bridge
link correctly linked between two topsides.
When the bridge link is connected to a topsides, half of the operating weight will pass
into the topsides primary steel weight calculations. Half of the weight will also be
passed to the jacket associated with the topsides, thus changing the load and design
of the jacket.
477
QUE$TORHelp
Inputs
The Bridge link Primary inputs are shown below.
Functions
The functions frame allows you to select the main function of the bridge link, in terms
of what is being passed between the two platforms.
l
Process: when selected, you can pass process flows across the bridge, with
options similar to when pipelines are run via the seabed.
Note: No process flows are added by default. You should go into the process
sub-component, by clicking on the green button, and add the required lines.
l
Utilities: when selected, the bridge is assumed to transport some utilities

between the two platforms. This results in increased piping bulks.
Power: when selected, the bridge is assumed to transport power between the two
platforms. This results in increased electrical bulks.
Details
The details frame gives the design details of the bridge.
l
Length: the span between the two topsides that the bridge must be constructed
for.
Bridge structure: this specifies the shape of the bridge section. There are two
options for the bridge structure, square and triangular. A square section bridge
will be selected by default if the process option is selected. A triangular section
bridge will be selected for all other configurations.
478
QUE$TORHelp
Process
Clicking on the Process green button in the Bridge link input panel opens the Bridge
process form as shown below.
The top half of this form is similar to the pipeline link form. It shows each of the
pipelines within the bridge link, there can be multiple pipelines in each bridge link.
Additional pipelines can be added to the link by clicking Add flowline or deleted by
clicking Remove flowline. It is important that you ensure that the flow direction of
each lines is correct within any link; you can change the flow direction for any
flowline by selecting the line and clicking Change flowline direction.
To see the details of a pipeline, select the desired pipeline and the details will be
shown in the bottom half of the form.
Flow Type
l
Oil: Single phase oil flow.
Gas: Single phase gas flow.
Gas injection: Single phase gas flow for gas injection.
Gas lift: Single phase gas flow for gas lift.
479
QUE$TORHelp
l
Methanol: Methanol line.
Two phase: Two phase liquid and gas flow.
Water injection: Single phase water injection flow.
Liquid: Any other single phase liquid flow such as chemicals, ethanol, etc.
than gas or liquid lines. During pipeline sizing QUE$TOR increases the diameter if
inlet pressures exceed default ANSI flange ratings.Higher default ratings are used in
sizing high pressure injection lines than for export and free-flow lines. See Pipeline
Sizing for more details.
Flowrates
The flowrates for the selected line are picked up from the attached topsides and are
dependent on the flow type.
Pressure
The pressure represents the delivery pressure of the pipeline and will be passed to
the attached topsides.
Diameter
The nominal diameter by which line pipe is marketed. For diameters of 14 inches and
above it is the outer diameter, for smaller diameters it is approximately the inner
diameter of lines with standard wall thickness. In both cases the actual inner
diameter is dependent on the wall thickness. See Pipeline Sizing for details on how
QUE$TOR calculates the pipeline diameter.
480
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
The materials section of the cost estimate is shown below.
Primary Steel
The primary steel covers the structural steel requirements for the bridge. The weight
is dependent on the bridge length, the bridge structure and the load from the process,
utilities and power lines.
The unit rate is the same as that for topsides primary steel and includes allowances
for cutting, wastage and surface coatings.
Secondary Steel
The secondary steel covers the steel requirements for walkways, railings and
stairwells. The weight is dependent on the primary steel weight.
The unit rate is the same as that for topsides secondary steel and includes allowances
for cutting, wastage and surface coatings.
Piping
The piping weight covers the piping requirements for the bridge. The weight is
dependent on the bridge length and the load from the process and utilities selections.
The weights include for all pipe supports, flanges and fittings and valves but excludes
control valves and emergency shutdown valves (which are included in instrument
bulks).
Electrical Bulks
The piping weight covers the electrical requirements for the bridge including lighting
and power transmission. The weight is dependent on the bridge length and the load
from the power selection.
The weights include for all cabling, cable trays, supports, terminations, glands, gland
transits, junction boxes, lighting and small power systems (e.g. batteries/life support
power).
481
QUE$TORHelp
Instrument Bulks
The instrument weight covers the instrument requirements for the bridge. The weight
is dependent on the bridge length and includes all instrument cabling, pneumatic
tubing, terminations, glands, gland penetrations, supports, control valves and relief
valves.
Others
This includes all additional bulk system weights associated with the HVAC and safety
systems plus painting and architectural bulks.
The weight is dependent on the bridge length and includes for ducts, duct supports,
insulation, flow dampers and grilles.
Freight
This cost is a percentage applied to the total cost of all bulk items.It includes the cost
of packaging and transporting the steel and bulks from the place of manufacture to
the construction yard.The default is dependent on where the equipment is procured
(in region or out of region).
482
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Costs


The cost of load-out barges, vessels, heavy lift vessels, and any additional materials
required to make the structure safe for transportation at sea and to transport the
structure on to the load-out barge or to launch.This is a fixed percentage of the total
fabrication cost.
483
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Costs
Installation costs include transport of the bridge from the fabrication yard to the
installation site and installation costs of lifting the bridge into place.
The cost of all vessels required to transport the bridge to the offshore installation site
are summarised and split into two components, tugs and barges. The calculated
transport spread durations are based on the number of modules and the average
duration per installation operation.
Note: The bridge is assumed to share the barge and tug spread of the
connected topsides so there will be no barge or tug requirement when a topsides is
connected. The installation spread is also shared in this case and so there is no mob /
demob for the vessel.

The Tugs transport spread includes the cost of tugs required to deliver the bridge to
the installation site including towing a barge to location. The costs include labour,
fuel, consumables, weather downtime and support. The mobilisation / demobilisation

The Barge transport spread includes the tug spread, refurbishment at quayside,
seafastening and grillage. The costs include labour, consumables, and weather
downtime. The mobilisation / demobilisation time assumed for the spread is given
separately.
Installation Spread
The Installation spread is the daily cost of hiring vessels to assist with the installation
of the bridge including lift barges where required. It includes labour, fuel,
consumables, weather downtime and support costs. The mobilisation / demobilisation
484
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
are shown below.
Design
The number of man-hours required to perform the design of the bridge and the design
hours required in the yard. The man-hours include project specification, special
studies, detail design, site surveys, follow on engineering, purchasing, expediting and
inspection services, project control, QA, and documentation in the detailed design
phase.
The unit rate includes wages and other personnel expenses, insurance, general
overheads (office facilities, utilities, depreciation and administration), project
expenses and equipment. It includes allowances for vendor data, deliveries of items
to the yard, insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties.
Project Management
485
QUE$TORHelp
Certification
A percentage of the total bridge cost to cover all certification costs for the approval of
the design, materials and construction of the bridge by a recognised certifying
authority (.e.g. Lloyds, ABS or DNV).Certification is only included by default for
European and North American countries where it is common practice.A certification
Insurance
Contingency
Definitions.
486
QUE$TORHelp
About User Defined

The User Defined component is a blank cost estimate where you enter all quantities
and unit rates for items within each cost centre. This facility allows components not
covered by any other component to be included as part of the overall cost estimate.
User Defined components are included in the total project costs and CAPEX schedule,
but have no operating costs automatically associated with them.
You can build up a library of User Defined components which can be used across all
projects, e.g. a 50 m bridge, a 100 m bridge, a subsea separation unit, etc.
487
QUE$TORHelp
Cost Estimate
On entering the User Defined component, a blank cost estimate will be displayed with
the same format and cost centre breakdown as the other component cost estimates.
An example of the equipment section of this sheet is shown below. This sheet allows
you to enter data into all cells on the sheet except in the total costs column. By
entering quantities and unit rates the total cost for each item, the cost centre and the
total component cost are automatically calculated.
Once user defined components have been created, they can be saved in a library.
This makes them available to any other projects run. The panel in the bottom left of
the screen, shown below, has a dropdown list which enables previously saved user
defined components to be selected.
To use a previously saved user defined component, select the desired component
from the dropdown list and click Apply.
Note: QUE$TOR will not check that the currency of any imported user defined
components matches the project currency.You must ensure the project currency and
the user defined component currency match.
If you wish to save a new user defined component to the library, click on Add, once
the cost estimate is completed. The component will be saved under its defined name.
To delete saved user defined components from the library, select the desired
component from the dropdown list and click Delete.
488
QUE$TORHelp

Selecting OPEX from the Project menu opens the operating expenditure analysis
form. This displays the calculated operating costs for each year of production.There
are four possible tabs: Offshore, Onshore, LNG regas onshore plus a Summary tab.
Which sections are produced is dependent on the development types in use in
QUE$TOR. If it is an offshore only development then only the offshore sheet will be
displayed. If both offshore and onshore components are present then an offshore, an
onshore and a summary tab will be displayed.
The values are calculated using the defaults in the procurement strategy.To see
other years use the scroll bar at the bottom of the window.
Operating costs are split into direct and indirect costs.

Direct costs:these include the following component based costs;
l
Operating personnel: the permanent manning levels required

Inspection and maintenance: the ongoing inspection requirements,
maintenance, planned and unplanned repair and replacement
Logistics and consumables: transport of crew to and from all platforms in
the field, supply boats and standby boats
Well maintenance: wirelining and workover for each type of well
Insurance:insurance of the facilities from the start of production
Indirect costs: these include;

l
Field / project costs:overall fixed field costs including administration,

supply warehousing and support.
489
QUE$TORHelp
l
Tariff costs: includes both tariffs paid by the operator for transportation or
remote processing of oil or gas, and tariffs received by the operator for use of
the processing or transportation facilities.
CO2 emission taxes:shows an estimate of the CO production for each year
2
of the project, for which a tax rate can be applied.
Lease costs:can be used to enter the costs for leased components.
Clicking on any of the underlined blue headings opens a new window where the
calculated operating costs can be viewed and edited in more detail.The blue headings
are only present on the individual development tabs.
The four icons in the windows utility bar allow you to produce reports of the
operating expenditure analysis and unlock values:
Print: activates the report builder wizard in preparation to print.
Print Preview: activates the report builder wizard to preview the reports.
Export to Excel workbook: allows reports to be exported to Excel.
Unlock all OPEX values: Unlocks and returns to default all the user edited
values in OPEX.
Note:Once OPEX values are unlocked, either individually or using the Unlock
all OPEX values icon, the OK button must be pressed to save these changes.
Working with OPEX

The OPEX module is live linked to the QUE$TOR components so provided the field
development concept is not reset using the Concept Selector changes made to field
level data, production profile and the component input values automatically get
updated in OPEX. Additionally, changes to OPEX input values, e.g. annual cost/man or
annual insurance rate, are retained when components are added to or removed from
the field development schematic provided they are still relevant.
Note: If components are deleted from the Field Development Schematic then
the operating costs associated with the component(s) will automatically
be removed from the OPEX.
At the OPEX sub-cost sheet level the OK button accepts the change and returns you to
the Cost summary sheet. The Cancel button is only active at the cost summary
level.
Once the OPEX cost summary form is opened and the OK button is clicked the
Project, OPEX menu command is shown ticked if changes have been made to any
QUE$TOR default input values. Changes to any OPEX input values will be retained
where relevant on re-opening the OPEX cost summary.
490
QUE$TORHelp
Clicking the Cancel button returns you to the field schematic and ignores any
changes to the OPEX input values since the cost summary form was last OK'd.
Note:Existing OPEX analysis "changes" to input values in projects saved in

QUE$TOR 2012 Q1 and earlier will be lost when opened in the current version. To
keep them, open the project in the earlier version.
Locking/Unlocking
OPEX input values are automatically locked if the default values are overwritten. If
you want to unlock one or more OPEX input value(s) then select the values with the
left mouse button held down, click the right mouse button and select the Unlock all
option. Similarly a single or a group of values can be locked by selecting the Lock all
option.
If you want to unlock all user edited OPEX values on all sheets and revert back to
QUE$TOR defaults then select the Unlock all OPEX values icon,
in the menu bar.
To see what input values are locked select the Report, Locked values option from
the main menu bar. OPEX locked values are shown in the lower part of the Locked
values report. The report is displayed in a tree format to facilitate finding the locked
values in the OPEX input forms.
491
QUE$TORHelp

A number of the calculations within OPEX use the same calculation for each year of
the operation, with the option to change each year's basis individually. To allow quick
duplication of this change to other years a change to a cell within OPEX can be applied
to other cells within a row using the "fill right" or "fill left" options.
To use this feature options:
1. Make the desired change to the cell.
2. Select the range of cells that you want to apply the change to.
3. Right click on these cells and select Fill right to apply the value in the leftmost
cell to the range of cells or Fill left to apply the value in the rightmost cell to
the range of cells.
4. If the cell being copied left or right has a user entered value then that value is
copied across. If it has the default formula then that is copied across reverting
cell values back to the default.
5. The selected range can include multiple rows.
492
QUE$TORHelp
493
QUE$TORHelp
Operating Personnel
This covers the permanent manning levels required by the developments. In offshore
developments the topsides manning requirements are specified. These numbers are
shown in the Operating personnel window along with the Shift rotation pattern and
annual Cost per man taken from the procurement strategy. The offshore operating
personnel sheet is shown below.
The permanent manning levels on each platform are passed from the topsides
components. The drilling crew and associated support staff are excluded from these
numbers as their costs are included within the drilling day rate used in the drilling
components.
For offshore loading facilities with a permanently moored storage tanker a minimum
marine crew is included. These numbers are shown in the Operating personnel
window along with the Shift rotation pattern and annual Cost per man taken from the
procurement strategy.
The operating personnel cost is based on the number of permanent crew on the
platform with allowance for a replacement crew or crews on onshore leave according
to the rotation pattern. The Days onsite 2 and Days offsite 2 inputs allow you to
specify more than one shift pattern. The Cost per man covers salaries, expenses,
payroll burden, etc but excludes transport to and from the platform.
Changing the default values for Shift rotation patterns, Cost per man or Number of
men automatically updates the annual cost.
494
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on Inspection & maintenance costs in the OPEX summary opens the
Inspection and maintenance summary window.
The inspection and maintenance cost covers the ongoing inspection requirements,
maintenance, planned and unplanned repair and replacement.For all components the
costs are assigned to one of three areas: spares, inspection and repair. The basis of
these costs are summarised in Basis of Inspection and Maintenance.
Spares costs are determined by applying a percentage to the relevant equipment and
materials capital costs.
Inspection is based on contract labour or services to complete periodic inspection.
For topsides this includes for equipment vendor representatives and specialist
inspection staff in addition to permanent platform maintenance areas. For all other
components inspection includes the cost of a diving support vessel (DSV) or other
suitable vessel, consumables, crew and mobilisation / demobilisation costs.
Repair costs are included in the inspection costs for topsides and substructures. For
pipelines and subsea components specialist vessels are hired to perform repairs.
Platforms
Clicking on Platform costs opens the platform inspection & maintenance window.
495
QUE$TORHelp
This shows the annual inspection and maintenance cost for each topsides,
substructure and offshore loading component. Changes may be made to the
intermediate calculation data, such as spares %, labour rate or DSV days and the
whole sheet will be recalculated.Changes can also be made to individual calculated
costs.
The labour cost includes for inspection and maintenance performed by specialists or
vendor representatives who are not normally stationed on the platform. Equipment
and spares covers all replacement equipment parts, instrumentation, electrical,
corrosion coverings, etc.DSV duration covers the annual inspection of the
substructure, hull and mooring systems as appropriate.
Pipelines
Clicking on Pipeline costs opens the Pipeline inspection and maintenance window.
This shows the annual inspection and maintenance cost for each pipeline component
and the total cost.By default, the operating costs includes for an annual pipeline
survey, less frequent scheduled intelligent pigging operations and pipeline repair. The
repair interval varies by pipeline material selection and region. Intelligent pigging
cost includes the hire of the pig, specialist operators and analysis of the results.
Repair covers span correction, reburial or additional rock dumping type activities.
The initial year and interval between the inspection and repair operations can be both
adjusted. Costs are displayed for each individual pipeline.
Power Cables
Clicking on Power cable costs opens the Power cable inspection and maintenance
window.
496
QUE$TORHelp
This shows the annual inspection and maintenance cost for each power cable
component and the total cost.
By default, the annual maintenance cost of the power cables is assumed to include for
annual inspection and infrequent, potentially expensive, repair operations where an
equivalent annual cost has been allowed to cover the total likely repair cost over the
life of the field. The repair operations are typically performed by either multipurpose
service vessel (MSV) or diving support vessel (DSV) and includes the cost of divers in
shallow water and remotely operated vehicles (ROVs)/intervention tools in deeper
waters.
Subsea
Clicking on Subsea costs opens the Subsea inspection and maintenance window.
This shows the annual inspection and maintenance cost for each subsea component
and the total cost.Subsea inspection and maintenance is performed by either
multipurpose service vessel (MSV) or diving support vessel (DSV) and includes the
cost of divers in shallow water and remotely operated vehicles (ROVs)/intervention
tools in deeper waters.The inspection and spares cost is based on an annual visit and
changeout of critical items.
If the MSV mob/demob duration is less than the total repair time for all subsea items
then the MSV repair days is set to zero.In this situation it is not considered worth
mobilising an MSV for such a short operation.
497
QUE$TORHelp

Logistics covers for helicopter transport of crew to and from all platforms in the field,
supply boats and standby boats. Consumables includes fuel gas, diesel fuel and well
and production chemicals.
Helicopters
QUE$TOR calculates the number of required helicopter flights based on the number of
operating personnel in the field, the shift rotation pattern and the capacity of the
helicopter.A minimum of 12 flights per year are assumed for unmanned platforms
and a minimum of 26 flights per year for manned platforms.The trip time is based on
the distance from the supply base and its speed with an allowance for landings, take
off, refuelling, etc.The cost is then based on a standing charter charge plus a cost per
hour of trip time.
Supply Boats
The cost of supply boats to transfer chemicals, diesel, spares, food, etc to the
platforms is calculated based on the number of trips per week to each platform.The
number of trips per week is taken from the regional technical database and varies
according to the topsides weight, if the platform is fixed or floating and whether or
not the platform is permanently manned.The distance from the supply base and
supply boat speed are used to calculate the round trip time allowing 4 hours at port
and in the field for loading and unloading. The cost is then the number of days vessel
hire plus the fuel cost (days x consumption per day x diesel cost).
Rescue and Recovery Boat

Includes the cost of a boat permanently located in the field if any platform in the
development is manned. The day rate includes vessel hire, consumables and crew
costs.
Fuel Gas
The electrical power load and gas turbine driver duties for all platforms are brought
forward from the component estimates. The gross power load is calculated using
typical efficiencies for power generation sets and gas turbine drivers and the number
of onstream days. Power loads are calculated assuming 70% of the duty is production
498
QUE$TORHelp
flow related with a fixed 'base load' equal to 30% of the load in the plateau
production year. The expected net fuel gas consumption is then calculated as the
product of the power load, calorific value and dividing by the design/swing factor. The
cost of fuel gas is only included for projects where gas is exported and is then
charged at sales gas value. Where all produced gas is flared or re-injected into the
reservoir it is assumed the gas has no value.
Diesel
The amount of diesel consumed is determined from the electrical power duty and the
calorific value of diesel and is an allowance for usage in emergency power
generators, cranes, fire pump testing, etc. An allowance is also included for the base
electrical load on a FPSO or semi-submersible.
Chemicals
The cost of chemicals consumed by the process is calculated based upon the dosage
rate selected in the chemical input form and the flow rate of the streams being
injected into. The cost for chemicals are broken down into 3 categories.
Production chemicals include those that are added to oil processing (Defoamer,
demulsifier, scale inhibitor, corrosion inhibitor, pour point depressant and other oil
chemicals ), produced water (Biocide, flotation aid, demulsifier and other produced
water chemicals ) and gas systems (Corrosion inhibitor and other gas chemicals ).
The amount injected is evaluated on a kg/bbl or kg/MMscf basis and the cost per year
is the production unit cost of chemicals multiplied by the production.
Water injection chemicals added to the injection system (Scale inhibitor,
corrosion inhibitor, biocide, oxygen scavenger, defoamer, surfactant, other water
injection chemicals ). The amount injected is evaluated on a kg/bbl and the cost per
year is the water injection unit cost of chemicals multiplied by the water injection
flow.
Well chemicals added directly to the wells (Methanol, low dose hydrate inhibitor,
asphaltene inhibitor, wax dispersant ). The amount injected is evaluated on a te/well
basis and the cost per year is the well unit cost of chemicals multiplied by the
production well count.
499
QUE$TORHelp
Well Costs
The cost of well operations such as wirelining and workover for each type of well (oil
producer, gas producer, water injector or gas injector) are calculated. The cost and
duration of each activity is dependent on the type of rig used to perform the
operation:
Platform with rig: well operations performed by permanent platform
installed rig
l
Platform no rig: well operations performed by skid-on rig or cantilevered

jackup rig
l
Subsea: well operations are performed by Floating or Jackup drilling rig

based on development selection.
l
This shows the annual cost for all routine and non-routine well maintenance
operations. non-routine well maintenance includes all activities which require a rig to
pull the production tubing, e.g. workovers.Routine well maintenance covers the cost
of maintaining all well systems such as kill and control and includes through tubing
workovers (TTWO), pressure seal test, tubing caliper runs, tubing clean out and
downhole surveys.
The well costs window contains the Material cost per operation, the Rig rate, Interval
between operations, and the Duration of each operation.For platform rigs the
operations are spaced out evenly, while for jackup and semi-submersible drilling
options they are grouped together.All wells are assumed to be in operation from
year 1, and the interval period starts counting from that date.The duration includes
for weather downtime but excludes mobilisation / demobilisation.
The rig rate includes for vessel hire, labour, consumables, and logistics for each of
the drilling options.
500
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
Annual insurance costs are determined as a percentage of the capital costs.The
percentages are applied to the total component capital cost, assuming complete
component replacement with an identical item and can be viewed and modified by
clicking on Insurance costs. This displays the Insurance window.
501
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on Field / project costs displays the field / project costs window.
The field/project costs cover the onshore support and administration related to the
development and includes:
l
Onshore admin:a percentage of the offshore operating personnel cost.

Supply base / warehousing: a fixed sum to include for a secure warehouse and
open storage area to store key spare equipment, piping and valves.The rate
includes labour costs and office accommodation.
Operations support: a percentage of the total offshore annual operating costs.
Special items: a blank cell that a user defined cost can be entered in to cover
any other onshore costs.
Changing the Onshore admin and Operations support percentage automatically

updates the associated costs.
Also on this sheet are the Share factors which allow the partial allocation of field /
project costs. This is used when project operating costs are shared with other fields
allowing you to enter the percentage of logistics costs (helicopter and supply boat
fixed costs), supply / warehousing costs and onshore administration costs attributed
to this project.
502
QUE$TORHelp
Tariffs
Clicking on Tariff costs opens the Tariffs window. From this window, you can look at
tariffs being both paid and received. The Tariffs paid window is shown below, but the
same methodology applies to both forms.
Tariffs are a variable cost, based on the production profile and a tariff rate. The
profiles shown here are the field level production profiles, which can be overwritten
as required.
For each of the fluid profiles, a tariff can be included for transportation and / or
processing. Oil transportation tariffs are included by default if export is via an
existing pipeline, offshore loading or ship to ship. Gas transportation tariffs are
included by default if export is via an existing pipeline.
Tariff values are read from the procurement strategy or can be entered for
processing and transportation of the oil and gas streams.
Note: tariffs can vary widely from the QUE$TOR default. You should check that
the tariff rate is in line with your own benchmarks.
503
QUE$TORHelp
CO2 Emission Taxes

Clicking on CO2 Emission Taxes opens the CO2 Emission Taxes window, shown
below.
There are four primary sources of CO emissions considered within QUE$TOR:

2
Process fluids: the CO removed from the produced fluids through the gas
2
processing units within the project. The volume produced is dependent on the CO
2
percentage in the produced gas and the sales percentage of CO .
2
Fuel gas: the CO produced when fuel gas is burned. It is dependent on the fuel
2
gas quantities within the Logistics and consumables section of OPEX.
Diesel fuel: the CO produced when diesel fuel is burned. It is dependent on the
2
diesel fuel quantities within the Logistics and consumables section of OPEX.
Flare load: the CO produced from emergency flaring. This assumes a nominal 2
2
releases/year at the full associated gas flow rate for a period of 30 minutes on
each occasion, i.e. an annual flow equivalent to one hour of gas flow at the design
flared gas rate.
If required, CO from up to two other sources can be added using the Other CO2
2
emissions source 1 and Other CO2 emissions source 2 line items.The labels
for these two other sources can revised by double clicking on the default label and
over-typing the text. The default annual volumetric flow for these other sources of
CO is zero so the flow for each year of field life must be manually entered.
2
The volume of CO is calculated for each year for each of these emission sources and
2
then converted into a mass per year.
A tax rate is applied for regions where this is common practice, based on the regional
OPEX selection for the procurement strategy. The tax rate is picked up from the
procurement strategy and should be adjusted as necessary.
504
QUE$TORHelp
Leases
Clicking on Lease costs opens the Leases window, shown below.
Lease costs are never included by default within the project, however this section
allows you to enter the costs for any components that may be leased within the
project.
There are five blank rows to enter lease costs. The heading can also be changed to
indicate the cost represented.
505
QUE$TORHelp

QUE$TOR provides the means to produce development schedules and investment
profiles from the calculated engineering data used to produce cost estimates. This is
in the form of standard schedules for each project component, based on derived
technical data such as weight, length and durations.Scheduling is accessed from the
Project menu by selecting Scheduling.
The default schedules have been developed from analysis of existing projects and
studies for various capacities and complexities, while taking into account current
contracting techniques and practices, such as the use of turnkey procurement
strategies for smaller southern North Sea projects.
506
QUE$TORHelp

The CAPEX scheduling window can be opened by selecting Scheduling from the
Project menu.
The window contains a table showing the start month, duration and cost of each
component in the project.The table also includes a distribution (Dist) column.When a
component is expanded distributions can be chosen for each cost centre.A scheduling
bar to the right of each component displays its start, finish and duration. A vertical
bar indicates when first oil will be produced.The Toolbar Icons give various
shortcuts.
The window illustrated above displays the components in a collapsed view, showing
only their total CAPEX. This total CAPEX is made up of a number of cost centres, e.g.
equipment or installation. These are each assigned a default start date and duration
and are called activities.The activities that make up each component are based on
the cost centres in their cost estimate sheets.
To view and edit the start dates and durations of a components activities,
components can be expanded. To do this either expand the component individually or
click on the Expand all button in the toolbar.
507
QUE$TORHelp
Distributions
Each component activity is assigned a distribution.This determines the profile of
expenditure. Distributions can be changed for each component activity by double
clicking on the distribution cell.
Each distribution is made up of three time periods, the distribution is defined by

specifying the percentage of time and cost apportioned to each period. QUE$TOR uses
a down payment and delivery (DPD) distribution for equipment and materials
activities and a uniform (UNI) distribution for all other activities. There is an
additional built in distribution, triangular (TRI) but this is not used by default.You can
select a built in distribution using the dropdown list or specify their own by selecting
User as shown below.
508
QUE$TORHelp
Note:Project costs have an additional distribution type available, CAPEX

breakdown distribution (CBD). This allocates the project cost based on the
percentage of the total CAPEX spent within a given month.
When specifying a user defined distribution, you can adjust the first two time periods
and the third will be automatically calculated.You should ensure that the sum of the
first two percentages does not exceed 100%.
When a user defined distribution is applied to an activity it only applies to that
specific activity. Choosing user defined for another activitys distribution will enable
you to specify a distribution but will not set the distribution equal to any other
activitys user defined distribution.
The effect of these distributions on the total capital expenditure profile can be quickly
assessed using the CAPEX breakdown graphs.The CAPEX profile used in the
investment and production profile will also include these distributions.
QUE$TOR includes default relationships between each activity within a component.In
the example shown above, procurement of jacket materials lags the beginning of
jacket design by three months; jacket fabrication lags the beginning of design by six
months and jacket installation starts at the end of fabrication. Jacket project
management begins with start of the first activity and ends with the end of the last
activity. Whilst different components have different activities the same principles still
apply.
The start date and duration of each activity can be edited by either adjusting the
values in the table or moving or resizing the scheduling bars.If you change an
activity on which the start dates of other components are dependent then all these
activities will move to maintain the default lag.
These default relationships only apply in one direction. In the example shown above,
moving design will move all other activities.Moving materials will move fabrication,
installation and project management but will not affect design. In general each
activity is dependent on an activity that starts before it.Moving an activity will affect
all dependent activities that start after it but will break any links with activities that
start before it.Project management has slightly different rules in that it will always
start when the first activity starts and end when the last activity ends.
509
QUE$TORHelp
Note:The default schedule for the user defined component uses the defaults for
a lightweight topsides. You will probably need to adjust it.
QUE$TOR considers a default set of relationships between components when
generating a project schedule.These relationships between components are
considered as links between activities within each component.The object of these
default relationships is to delay expenditure on each component as far as possible
without pushing back the first oil date. For example in a typical platform
development, the time to first oil will generally be the time from design to final
commissioning of the main topsides.So in this situation QUE$TOR will schedule
pipeline installation to finish at the same time as topsides hook-up.Inter-component
relationships behave in a similar fashion to intra-component relationships.Moving an
activity will move all dependent components but the link will not apply in
reverse.Moving an activity will break any relationships with activities in other
components on which that activity is dependent.
To use the topsides and pipeline example, delaying the topsides by a year will
automatically delay the pipeline by a year but delaying the pipeline by a year will not
affect the topsides.
To reschedule a component with respect to the other components click on the Project
Management bar and slide it backwards or forwards as required. The duration for all
activities within the component remain as previously specified but their start date
changes.
In projects with multiple topsides QUE$TOR tends to schedule all pipelines to finish
with the main topsides. Delaying a wellhead platform may not delay the pipelines
linking it to the main topsides as you would expect.In these projects you should be
careful to review QUE$TORs scheduling assumptions and potentially delay some infield pipelines.
Locking
When you change any start date or duration it will become locked. All relationships
with activities upon which the edited activity is dependent will then be
broken.Unlocking values will restore the default relationships and durations.
Right clicking on a component name in the scheduling table will enable you to lock or
unlock all its start dates and durations. Individual start dates and durations can also
be locked and unlock by right clicking on them.
Locking a component's schedule enables you to recalculate its CAPEX whilst
maintaining its schedule.
First Oil
QUE$TOR will calculate the month in which it expects production to start and display
this on the scheduling chart as a vertical bar. The first oil indicator has no direct
influence on the scheduling calculations. Its only purpose is to specify the month in
which production will start in the investment and production profile.Moving the first
510
QUE$TORHelp
oil indictor will not influence the schedule but it will influence the investment and
production profile.
Initially first oil will be linked to what QUE$TOR calculates to be the critical path, this
will usually be the end of the main topsides hook-up. Moving this activity, or others
on which the activity is dependent will move the first oil. You can break the default
link by moving the first oil bar on the scheduling chart.This will have no effect on the
rest of scheduling.
When you move the first oil bar it will lock.It can also be locked and unlocked by
right clicking on it. The first oil bar is red when locked and black when unlocked.
Whilst QUE$TOR is reasonably accurate with simple developments, it will struggle
with complex and multi-phase developments. In these situations you are advised to
check the date of first oil carefully.
Timescale
The scheduling chart can be toggled between project and calendar timescales by
using the project and calendar timescale buttons on the toolbar.
The project timescale is displayed in months, starting from zero. The calendar
timescale is displayed in calendar years starting from a date specified in the toolbar.
In converting between these two timescales, the project is assumed to start at the
beginning of the month specified.If the start month is month 1, 0 in the project
timescale is assumed to be equivalent to 1st day of month 1.Each month is assumed
to be equal to one twelfth of a year in both timescales, variation in calendar month
duration is not considered.

Any components added or removed from the project using the field development
schematic will automatically be added or removed from scheduling.Any locked
values in scheduling will be maintained unless the component is deleted.
Note:Generating a new concept will delete all components and so any schedule
will be lost.
511
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on the CAPEX breakdown graph button in the scheduling window toolbar
opens a new window that displays a breakdown of capital expenditure against
time.Three timescales can be chosen from the dropdown list: monthly, quarterly and
yearly.You can choose to show the cost either by individual components or by the
components type. The yearly breakdown by component type is shown below.
512
QUE$TORHelp
QUE$TOR retains the identity of the individual components as created during the
capital cost calculation and applies a component decommissioning cost estimate to
each component.
There are detailed bottom-up decommissioning algorithms for limited offshore
components (Topsides, Jackets and Pipelines) which consider the dismantling,
removal and disposal tasks. Decommissioning for the other components is based
around percentages of the component CAPEX values; this option can be used in
preference to the detailed algorithms if desired.
The decommissioning parameters are set at the project level through the use of
decommissioning scenarios. These scenarios can be accessed through the Options
menu. There will be a decommissioning option for each of the QUE$TOR products
(Offshore, Onshore, LNG Regasification) in use in a project.
513
QUE$TORHelp
The offshore decommissioning scenario form is accessed through the Options menu
of the main QUE$TOR toolbar and is shown below.
This form allows you to specify the decommissioning parameters for each component
type; each of the parameters can be changed and scenarios saved. Each saved
scenario can be opened and applied to a project. The Toolbar Buttons allow you to
manage your scenarios. The parameters in the form are applied to all components
within the project when you press OK.
The decommissioning parameters of individual components can be adjusted within
each component, see Component Decommissioning for further details.
Note: As the user-defined component is an unknown variable, we have

assumed a flat percentage across all cost centres. We strongly recommend that you
review this for each user-defined component.
The total decommissioning cost and the schedule are passed to the investment and
production profile where all decommissioning costs are assumed to be spent after the
end of the field life.The decommissioning duration allows you to put a time frame on
the decommissioning activities. A uniform distribution of the decommissioning costs
is assumed.

Typically decommissioning starts does not immediately follow once production has
stopped. The period between the end of field life and the start of decommissioning
can be adjusted as required.
514
QUE$TORHelp
To access the decommissioning details of a component, right-click the desired
component and select Edit / view decommissioning.For pipelines, select the
pipeline from the pipeline link form and click Decommission.
The cost sheet is shown on the right hand side of the screen, for components with
detailed algorithms the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the screen.
For details of the detailed decommissioning algorithms, see the Topsides, Jacket and
Pipeline decommissioning sections.
Cost estimate
The cost sheet for the component is shown on the right hand side of the screen. The
subsea cost sheet is shown as an example below.
The cost estimate sheet displays a breakdown of the costs. The costs are based on a
simple CAPEX x Percentage = Cost relationship. The CAPEX values are read from the
component's CAPEX estimate, with the Percentage read from the selected
decommissioning scenario. It is possible to go to any blue number in the cost sheet
and make any appropriate changes.
Scrap
The modules transported to shore may be assigned a scrap value. A negative value
should be entered for income or a positive value if disposal onshore invokes a cost.
You should overwrite this to reflect current and local conditions.
515
QUE$TORHelp
Inputs
The topsides decommissioning input sheet is based on the data from the topsides
component.
Distance to Disposal Site

The distance between the jacket installation site and disposal site, i.e. the distance to
the deepwater dumping site or to the breakers yard onshore.
Temporary Piping Weight

The weight of temporary piping fitted during the decommissioning of equipment
components and systems. Individual vessels are isolated for individual cleaning.The
temporary piping weight is a fixed percentage of the module weight.
Padeyes Weight
The weight of the lifting padeyes which have to be attached to each module.The
padeye weight is a fixed percentage of the module weight. The net cost is obtained
through the use of a combined materials design and fabrication cost per unit weight.
Crane Size
Specifies the size of the lifting frame or crane used during the heavy lift operation to
transfer the modules of the topsides onto the transportation spread.There are three
options; each has a maximum lift weight.
516
QUE$TORHelp
Maximum Lift Weight
The maximum lift weight of the selected crane.This is set by the crane size but can
be edited.
Number of Lifts
The number of lifts is dependent on the topsides weight and the maximum lift weight.
It is assumed that each lift is utilised fully to minimise the number of lifts.
517
QUE$TORHelp
Weights
Clicking on Weights in the topsides decommissioning inputs panel opens the weights
form.
The weights are taken from the topsides cost estimate and are broken down into
Equipment and Material weights.
518
QUE$TORHelp
Hazardous Volumes
Clicking on Hazardous volumes in the topsides decommissioning inputs panel opens
the hazardous volumes form.
Covers hazardous waste fluids from the decommissioning process including

hydrocarbons, chemicals, fuel, drilling muds and cement. The volumes are based on
each system weight and are broken down into Equipment and Material volumes.
519
QUE$TORHelp
Flushing / Inerting
Clicking on Flushing / inerting in the topsides decommissioning inputs panel opens the
flushing / inerting time form.
Flushing Days
Covers the time required for the flushing of the topsides vessels and is dependent on
the volume of the vessels and piping to be cleaned and the nature of their contents.
Inerting Days
Covers the time required to inert the hazardous vessels and pipelines and includes for
removal, sealing and transport.The number of days is dependent on the volumes.
520
QUE$TORHelp
Dismantle / Removal
Clicking on Dismantle / removal in the topsides decommissioning inputs panel opens
the dismantle / removal time form.
521
QUE$TORHelp
Cost Sheet
The topsides decommissioning cost estimate sheet is displayed on the right hand side
of the screen when topsides decommissioning is open. The cost estimate sheet
displays a breakdown of every cost item included. The decommissioning inputs are
used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost estimate. The unit rates are
determined by the procurement strategy. The costs are generally based on a simple
weight x unit rate = cost relationship. It is possible to go to any blue number in the
cost sheet and make any appropriate changes to the calculated weights or the unit
rates.
Materials
This covers the materials required for the decommissioning and includes padeyes,
temporary piping, lifting frames and seafastenings as well as the transportation
costs.
522
QUE$TORHelp
l
Padeyes: allows for the lifting padeyes which have to be attached to each
module. The padeye weight is dependent on the module weight. The net cost is
obtained through the use of a combined materials design and fabrication cost per
unit weight.
Temporary piping: allows for temporary piping fitted during the
decommissioning of equipment components and systems. Individual vessels are
isolated for individual cleaning. The temporary piping weight is dependent on the
module weight.
Bracing / lifting frames: used during the heavy lift operation to transfer the
module from topsides to the transportation spread and dependent on the module
weight.
Seafastenings: module seafastenings on the transportation spread are taken to
be a fixed percentage of the module weight.
Freight: a fixed percentage applied to the total cost of the materials.It includes
the cost of packaging and transport from the place of manufacture to the
fabrication yard.
Fabrication
This covers the fabrication of the above materials at the topsides.
This covers the cost of the labour, vessels and disposal during the decommissioning
process.Further details are given below.
l
Labour: is the total welding, fitting, cutting and dismantling man-hours for
decommissioning, preparation for removal and fitting. The unit rate is taken from
the technical database. This does not include the man-hours of the flushing and
inerting crews.
Pumping / flushing: the total number of days for flushing and pumping. This is
specified in flushing / inerting time form.
Inerting: total number of days for inerting. This is specified in flushing / inerting
time form.
Multipurpose / DSV: offers general support, including manpower, for flushing,
inerting and lifting operations.The support vessels transport small items of
secondary structure and equipment after removal.
Tanker: is on station to take discharges of washings and residues from the vessel
and pipework flushing and cleaning. The duration is equal to that of the total
flushing duration.
523
QUE$TORHelp
l
Crane spread: heavy lift vessel loads each module on to the transportation
barge. A duration per lift is assigned from the technical database.
Transport spread:covers the cost of all vessels required to transport the
modules and large items of equipment to the onshore disposal site, i.e. for barges
and tugs. The unit day rate allows for mobilisation / demobilisation, hire of vessels
and crews, consumables, downtime, etc.
Landing / dumping: a cost allowance for either landing onshore or dumping at
sea of materials and waste from decommissioning.
Waste disposal: covers the processing and disposal of waste material onshore,
particularly the washings and residue from the decommissioning operation.The
default allowance is zero, this should be edited to reflect local conditions and
requirements.
Design and Project management

This covers the quantity of hours required to carry out the design and management of
the decommissioning. Design man-hours are factored from the weights and project
management man-hours are factored from the design man-hours.
l
Design: includes the quantity of hours required to carry out the design of the
decommissioning. It covers the hours from conceptual design time through to
deconstruction and transportation. This includes feasibility studies, project
execution plans, conceptual design, project specification, special studies, detail
design, follow-on engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services,
project control, QA and documentation during the design phase. It incorporates all
equipment and administration), project expenses and equipment. It includes
vendor data delivery of items to the yard, insurance up to delivery, guarantees
and import duties. Design man-hours are factored from the weights.
Project management: includes all the project management hours required for
the operator company personnel and any project management team costs to
manage, monitor and control all phases of the decommissioning. It includes
management, project engineering, project control and planning, design and
construction supervision, quality assurance and third party liaison.
Insurance
A fixed percentage of the decommissioning cost, includes insurance for all project
components during transportation and deconstruction. Personnel liability insurance is
covered in the respective cost centres.
Certification
A fixed percentage of the decommissioning cost, includes all certification costs of the
design, materials and construction of the development by a recognised certifying
authority.
524
QUE$TORHelp
Contingency
This is a fixed percentage of the total above costs and brings the cost estimate to a
P50 level.For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
Scrap
The user should overwrite this to reflect current and local conditions.
525
QUE$TORHelp
Inputs
The jacket decommissioning input sheet is based on the data from the jacket
component.
Removal
The removal frame specifies the method used for the removal of the jacket and
contains two options.
l
Cut and lift: one, several or all jacket frames are removed in a number of lifts
depending on the crane lift and clearance capacity set within the technical
database.A three-legged jacket (tripod) is lifted as a single unit.
Float: the jacket piles are cut at the mudline and two of the legs sealed to provide
buoyancy.Any shortfall of buoyancy is provided by bolt-on buoyancy tanks, two
per frame.This option is not available for three-legged jackets.
Disposal
The removal frame specifies the method used for the removal of the jacket and
contains two options.The options are only available when float is selected in the
Removal frame.
l
Dump:the jacket structure is disposed of by dumping at a deepwater location.
Scrap: the jacket structure is taken onshore and sold for its scrap value.
Distance to disposal site:the distance between the jacket installation site and
disposal site, i.e. the distance to the deepwater dumping site or to the breakers
yard onshore.
526
QUE$TORHelp
Lifts
The lifts frame contains details of the lifting frame or crane used during the heavy lift
operation to transfer the modules onto the transportation spread. This is only
available when cut and lift is selected as the removal option.
l
Crane size: specifies the size of the crane. There are three options; each option
has a maximum lift weight.
Maximum lift weight: the maximum lift weight of the selected crane.This is set
by the crane size but can be edited.
Number of lifts: the number of lifts is dependent on the jacket weight and the
maximum lift weight. It is assumed that each lift is utilised fully to minimise the
number of lifts.
527
QUE$TORHelp
Details
Clicking on Details in the jacket decommissioning input panel opens the details
form.
The details form specifies the details of the jacket and attachments.
Jacket
Specifies the details of the jacket including type, size, weights and marine growth.
Attachments
Specifies the attachments to the jacket: conductors, risers and J-tubes.
528
QUE$TORHelp
Cost Sheet
The jacket decommissioning cost estimate sheet is displayed on the right hand side of
the screen when jacket decommissioning is open. The cost estimate sheet displays a
breakdown of every cost item included.The decommissioning inputs are used to
calculate the quantities shown on the cost estimate. The unit rates are determined by
the procurement strategy.The costs are generally based on a simple weight x unit
rate = cost relationship. It is possible to go to any blue number in the cost sheet and
make any appropriate changes to the calculated weights or the unit rates.
Materials
This covers the materials required for the decommissioning and includes padeyes,
seafastenings, temporary platforms and flotation and ballast systems.
l
Padeyes: only included if the Cut and lift removal option has been selected.Four
padeyes per lift are assumed and they are not reusable.
529
QUE$TORHelp
l
Flotation tanks: only included if the Float removal option has been selected.
Covers supplementary buoyancy tanks and leg bulkheads.
Ballast system: covers the supply and fitting of all necessary valves, pipework
and ballast control system for ballasting / deballasting of the legs and
supplementary buoyancy tanks.
Seafastenings: tethers used to secure the jacket frames to the barge during
transportation to the disposal location. The weight is taken as a fixed percentage
of the jacket frame weights.
Access platform / temporary bracing: temporary diver access platforms
required when cutting the jacket legs and bracings. These are also used as
temporary bracing to support and control the deflections of the severed jacket
frame ends.One access platform/bracing is required for each leg but they are
reusable at different jacket levels.
Freight: a fixed percentage of the total cost of materials to cover the cost of
packaging and transport of material to the fabrication yards.
Fabrication
This covers the fabrication of the above materials.
This covers the cost of the labour, vessels and disposal during the decommissioning
process.Further details are given below.
l
Cutting spread:required for both removal options.The legs and braces at the
base of each frame, or group of frames, are severed in the Cut and lift option
while all piles must be cut at the mudline in both cases.The technical database
assigns a duration to each cluster of cuts and QUE$TOR determines a total
duration which includes the man-hours to install access platforms and temporary
bracings.
Crane spread: required for both removal options. For cut and lift, the number of
lifts depends upon the crane lift and reach capacity. The technical database
contains a duration for commissioning, each lift including time to attach lifting
padeyes, rigging, lifting structure on to barge and decommissioning. For the Float
option, the crane is required to attach the flotation tanks to half of the jacket legs
(those in the water when the jacket is floated) and also to be on station during the
jacket up-ending operation. A small lift crane is selected in all cases.
Multi-service / DSV: provides general support, accommodation and diver
support throughout the decommissioning procedure.
Transportation spread: covers all barges and tugs for transportation of the
jacket or jacket sections to the disposal site. The transportation spread is on
location during the lifting operations and this duration includes for loading,
530
QUE$TORHelp
unloading, seafastening and stand by. Only tugs are required for the Float removal
option.
l
Landing / dumping:covers the cost of landing the jacket sections from the barge
at the breakers yard or the flooding of the jacket legs and ballast tanks at the
offshore dump site.

l
equipment and administration), project expenses and equipment.It includes
manage, monitor and control all phases of the decommissioning.It includes
management, project engineering, project control and planning, design and
construction supervision, quality assurance and third party liaison.
Insurance
Certification
authority.
Contingency
P50 level.For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
531
QUE$TORHelp
Scrap
532
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Decommissioning
The pipeline decommissioning input sheet is based on the data from the pipeline
component.
Removal
The removal frame specifies the method used for the removal of the pipeline and
contains two options.
l
Partial: only part of the installed length of pipeline is removed, leaving the
remainder in place on the seabed.The length removed is specified.
Complete: removal of the entire pipeline length after decommissioning. Any
buried length is jetted free and the pipeline is cut at all crossings.
Partial removal length: is the length of pipeline removed and is only available
when Partial is selected.
Disposal
The removal frame specifies the method used for the disposal of the pipeline and
contains two options. The disposal can be omitted using the checkbox.
l
Dump: the removed pipeline is dumped at a deepwater location.
Scrap: the removed pipeline is transported to shore for disposal as scrap.
Distance to disposal: the distance between the pipeline installation site and
disposal site, i.e. the distance the pipeline is transported before disposal.
533
QUE$TORHelp
Cleaning
The cleaning frame specifies the method used for the cleaning of the pipeline and
contains three options.The cleaning costs can be omitted using the checkbox.
l
Flushing: all pipelines except water injection lines are flushed. The pipe washings
are stored in a tanker prior to treatment and disposal.
Pigging: additional cleaning by the use of scraping pigs.
Chemical: additional cleaning by the use of chemicals, all pipelines must be
flushed prior to chemical cleaning.
534
QUE$TORHelp
Details
Clicking on Details in the pipeline decommissioning input panel opens the details
form.
This form gives the details of the pipeline including the flow type, length, material
and wall thickness. These details are taken from the pipeline being decommissioned.
For more details on pipeline sizing see offshore pipelines.
535
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Decommissioning Cost Sheet

The pipeline decommissioning cost estimate sheet is displayed on the right hand side
of the screen when pipeline decommissioning is open. The cost estimate sheet
displays a breakdown of every cost item included. The decommissioning inputs are
used to calculate the quantities shown on the cost estimate. The unit rates are
determined by the procurement strategy. The costs are generally based on a simple
weight x unit rate = cost relationship. It is possible to go to any blue number in the
cost sheet and make any appropriate changes to the calculated weights or the unit
rates.
Decommissioning / Removal
There are no additional materials or fabrication costs associated with pipeline
decommissioning therefore all costs are associated with the vessels used to perform
the removal, cleaning and disposal operations. Unit rates for all vessels/spreads
include equipment and vessel hire, support services, crew, consumables and
mobilisation / demobilisation.
536
QUE$TORHelp
l
DSV: the durations include seabed pipeline disconnections (two per pipeline),
cutting the pipeline on each side of a pipeline crossing, general support,
mobilisation and demobilisation.
Pigging and pumping: pigging of the pipeline during cleaning requires
independent pumping.The duration is a function of pipeline length, type and
diameter.
Flushing and chemicals: flushing and chemical cleaning requires independent
pumping. The duration is a function of pipeline length, type and diameter.
Jetting: buried pipelines are jetted free before lifting. The jetting spread's
duration allows for mobilisation / demobilisation, a duration per buried kilometre
of pipe (taken from the Input Data sheet and weather downtime).
Pipelay: pipe lifting operation is essentially the reverse of laying. The duration
allows for mobilisation / demobilisation, lifting, removal of areas of coatings prior
to cutting, inerting and weather downtime.
Tanker: is on station for the duration of the pipeline cleaning and takes all
pipeline washings and residues.
Surveys: a survey is required of the whole pipeline length prior to lifting.A
duration and cost are assigned as a function of length.
Waste disposal:covers the cost of treatment and disposal of the pipeline
washings and residue. The cost should be assigned by the user to reflect local
conditions. The default cost is zero.

l
manage, monitor and control all phases of the decommissioning.It includes
537
QUE$TORHelp
management, project engineering, project control and planning, construction
supervision, quality assurance and third party liaison.
Insurance
Certification
authority.
Contingency
P50 level. For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
Scrap
538
QUE$TORHelp

The Investment and production profile window can be opened by selecting
Investment and production profile from the Project menu.The window
combines all the information from the project in a format suitable for economic or
life-cycle cost analysis.
The investment and production profile summarises the overall project costs: presanction and post-sanction project costs, Exploration and Appraisal (E&A) well costs,
scheduled CAPEX (Production drilling and Facilities), OPEX (Fixed, Variable, Tariffs,
Leases and CO2 tax) and decommissioning costs along with CO2 emissions and the
production profile for exported product streams. An OPEX analysis and a CAPEX
schedule will be automatically generated if you have not already edited them. The
profile is always consistent with the current project configuration and current CAPEX
and OPEX. Only components that currently exist in the field development plan will be
included in the profile.
Note:Seismic costs are not calculated in QUE$TORbut can optionally be

manually entered as part of the E&A costs.
You can adjust and lock any of the imported profiles.You can also enter your own
data for annual investment cost which are not covered in QUE$TOR.
The Project, Investment and production profiles menu will display a check mark only
when there are user edits to investment and production profile or a value has been
locked.
539
QUE$TORHelp
Note: Existing investment profile "changes" to input values in projects saved in

The timescale will be set to the timescale used in scheduling.This can be a project or
calendar timescale. With a project timescale the investment and production profile
starts at this year plus one.With a calendar timescale it starts at the year specified in
scheduling. If the calendar start date specified in scheduling is, for example, 07/2016
then the first year in the investment profile will be 2016 but it will only include costs
incurred from month 7 to 12.
The OPEX and production profiles begin at first oil.The date of first oil can be edited
in scheduling.If first oil is mid year then the OPEX and production profiles are
recalculated to account for the partial year of production.The overall production and
expenditures are not changed, they are just given a new timescale to match the
project timescale.
In the example comparison of profile timescales, the first oil occurs exactly half way
through year 3.The production profile is recalculated so that it starts at the beginning
of month 7 in year 3 in the investment profile.
The sales gas volumes in the investment and production profile excludes any CO2
volume coming into the process and gas volumes that are being used for fuel gas
supply.
Simple indicators are shown giving the cost per barrel of oil equivalent for E&A,
Drilling, Facilities, total Capital (drilling + facilities), Operating cost,
Decommissioning and Lifecycle cost.The Lifecycle unit cost is the sum of the CAPEX,
OPEXand Decommissioning unit costs. The factors used to convert from oil,
condensate (bbl) or gas (Mscf) are shown. These can be adjusted in the Field level
data, Miscellaneous tab.
To save the investment and production profile sheet as an Excel file click
in the
toolbar.To preview the profile before you print click

in the toolbar.Select
the preview screen to print the report.Alternatively, to print the profile without
previewing it click
on
in the toolbar.
If you have overwritten any value in the investment and production profile sheet and
want to want to revert all locked values back to their default values then click
the toolbar. You will asked to confirm if you want to unlock all investment and
production profile values.
540
in
QUE$TORHelp

Note: AS$ET 3.3 or later is required to be able to import from QUE$TOR.
The investment and production profile sheet can be exported into the IHS project and
portfolio economic evaluation program, AS$ET by clicking
in the toolbar.This
offers two methods of exporting the data; by clipboard or by file.
The Clipboard method is useful if you are running AS$ET at the same time as
QUE$TOR and want to import a single project.
The File method is useful if you want to import a number of projects into AS$ET or
save the project to run AS$ET at a later date. When the File method is selected you
specify the location where you want to save the QUE$TOR to AS$ET file using the
Export project to AS$ET form.
541
QUE$TORHelp
QUE$TOR Structure
QUE$TOR is structured around a field development schematic (FDS) which allows
users to create a visualisation of the development. The FDS is driven by a number of
high level inputs which allow the development conditions to be specified. The basic
high level parameters of the development to be specified. Once you have reviewed
and adjusted as necessary the default inputs in each form, click on OK to apply the
inputs and move on to the next form.Click on Cancel to go back to the previous form
and adjust any changes made.
542
QUE$TORHelp
On starting each new project you will be led through the first four stages shown
above. Each of these stages will be populated with default values based upon your
choices in the previous stage.
When the concept selector is completed, QUE$TOR will generate a complete cost
estimate immediately made up of a series of components, e.g. production facility,
terminal facility, wellpad groups, drilling and pipelines.
These components are all live linked to each other so that a change to one component
will change all dependent components, e.g. terminal facility cost is dependent on the
production facility exports. You can enter and update these components and fix inputs
so that they are no longer updated by the program.This is called locking. Although
you can edit components in any order you should try to follow a logical path to avoid
locking variables based on incorrect data.For example you should not lock the
wellpad groups number of wells until the drilling is fully defined. QUE$TORs order of
calculation is explained more fully in Data flow and locking.
OPEX and Scheduling take data from all components to generate field operating costs
(OPEX) and schedule the calculated capital and operating costs along with the
production profile to give an overall project investment profile.
Once on the FDS

as production facilities and drilling.Each of these components will influence or be
dependent on the design of associated components.Components are linked to those
components from which they require data.There are also high level parameters
defined within QUE$TOR, such as reserves, which influence all components.
passes all requisite data onto the next component.The order of this is defined by the
a selection of built-in defaults.The components selected by the concept are then run
If you wish to fix parameters within a component, preventing them from being
recalculated by the program, you can lock them.
543
QUE$TORHelp

The project properties is the starting point for defining a new project. It enables you
to specify the location of the project, the procurement strategy and technical
database to be used in the project and the preferred units.
Note: It is not possible to make changes in this screen once a project is

created. However the project editor does allow the procurement strategy and the
technical database to be changed once the project is saved.
Name: enter a name for the project here. This will be the default file name when you
save the project.
544
QUE$TORHelp
Units of Measure
The units of measure define the units that will appear, both in the project and the
reports.QUE$TOR has three built in unit sets, metric, imperial and oilfield which are
selected from the dropdown list.
Custom unit sets can be defined using the unit editor. To select a user defined unit
set, select the use custom unit set option button and use the Browse button to locate
it. The default location for custom unit sets is: My Documents \IHS \QUE$TOR
\Unit Sets.
Once in a project the units can be easily changed, for every input QUE$TOR provides
a choice of relevant units. However the units in the reports are fixed by the choice of
unit set.
Main Product
The main product can be either oil or gas, the volume of the secondary product, e.g.
associated gas when oil is selected, is defined by a ratio on the Field level data form.
This should typically be Oil if the gas oil ratio (GOR) is <2500 scf/bbl (450 Sm3/m3) [
Liquid gas ratio >400 bbl/MMscf (70 m3/million Sm3)].
Note: Once selected this cannot be changed in the project.

Selection will also affect the default field level data (but this can adjusted if required)
which in turn will influence the field life and plateau production rate.
The default product type is set to the choice made in the last project you created, or
to oil when QUE$TOR is shipped.
Location
QUE$TOR contains a database of typical field characteristics, extracted from the IHS
IRIS21 E&P database. These are broken down on a basin by basin basis and provide
the default properties for the field. Whilst you can overwrite all these characteristics,
they can be useful if some data is unavailable.
Procurement Strategy
This allows you to select the regional databases to be used for each of the cost
centres for the new project. For example equipment could be sourced from North
America and design performed in Europe.The currency of the cost estimate can also
be defined.
The box displays existing procurement strategies which can be chosen by selection.
To look for existing procurement strategies in a different folder, click on Browse.
Click on New to create a procurement strategy.When you create a new procurement
strategy QUE$TOR bases the default regional database on the location selected.See
Creating procurement strategies for more information.
Click on View to look an examine procurement strategy.
Click on Delete to delete the selected procurement strategy.
545
QUE$TORHelp
Note: QUE$TOR does not ship with any built in procurement strategies.
Technical Database
The technical database contains regional specific technical data such as
environmental data.QUE$TOR includes template databases for every onshore region
worldwide. The default database is based on the location chosen.To change to a
different database, click on Browse.
You will be prompted to choose whether you want to use a template database
supplied with QUE$TOR or use a custom database. See Technical Databases for
further information.
Once you have adjusted all inputs as necessary, click OK. This applies your changes
and closes the form to move on.Cancel will clear all entries in the form and take you
back a step.
546
QUE$TORHelp

Procurement strategies allow you to choose different regional cost databases for
each cost centre. They can also be used to choose the currency for the cost estimate.
The cost data in each regional database is stored in either US dollars or the local
currency (for the UK, Norway and the Netherlands). When cost databases are brought
in to the procurement strategy QUE$TOR converts them all in to US dollars. You can
edit the exchange rate used for this conversion. You can then choose a currency for
the cost estimate and enter the exchange rate from US dollars to this currency.

1. Click Create new procurement strategy in the project properties form. This
opens the form shown below.
2. Select a region and country.

3. By default the cost database will be assigned a title which is the same as the
country selected. This can optionally be overwritten.
4. Click OK.
547
QUE$TORHelp
5. The procurement strategy definition form is displayed.
6. QUE$TOR has built in defaults for every country which it uses to choose where
cost centres are sourced from. To adjust the default region use the dropdown
lists.
7. Check the exchange rate for each database. Some cost databases are in local
currencies. In creating a procurement strategy QUE$TOR converts all costs to US
dollars. A default exchange rate is entered if the cost database is in local
currency but this should obviously be treated with care and edited to reflect
expected exchange rates. The rate should be in the form of local currency to 1 US
dollar, e.g. UK0.55 = US$1.
8. Define the currency in which you wish to cost your project. Enter a name and a
symbol (the symbol can have up to three characters). Enter an exchange rate
from US dollars. The rate should be in the form of the specified currency to 1 US
dollars, e.g. UK0.55 = US$1.
9. Click OK.
10. The new procurement strategy will now be available for selection in the
procurement strategy frame in the project properties form.
548
QUE$TORHelp

The field level data form opens after the project properties if you are creating a new
project. If you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Field level
data from the Project menu or clicking
in the toolbar.
The field level data form allows specification of the overall field and reservoir
characteristics.All inputs have default values based on your chosen basin.These are
useful if you do not have some data available although the more accurate the data
the more accurate your cost estimate will be.The form has three tabs: Field
characteristics, Fluid / profile characteristics and Miscellaneous.
Once you have adjusted the input data on all tabs as necessary, click OK. This applies
your changes and closes the form to move on.Cancel will clear all entries in the
form and take you back a step.
549
QUE$TORHelp
The onshore field characteristics tab is shown below.
Reserves:the total recoverable reserves for the field(s) covered by your project.
If you have specified the main product as gas, this is the gas recoverable
reserves. For oil projects it is the oil recoverable reserves.
Condensate gas ratio / Gas oil ratio: for gas projects enter the condensate
gas ratio (CGR) and for oil projects the gas oil ratio (GOR). The ratio should be in
terms of recoverable reserves and represents the ratio when the wellstream fluids
are flashed at stock tank conditions, i.e. 60F (15.6C) and atmospheric pressure.
Reservoir depth:measured from ground level measured to the top of the
reservoir. This is principally used to calculate drilling costs.
Reservoir pressure: used in calculating wellhead and injection pressures.
Reservoir length and Reservoir width: these are based on the recoverable
reserves and global reserves/km figures. The field length is twice the field width.
The field dimensions are used in conjunction with the maximum drilling stepout to
calculate the number of drilling centres required to fully drain the reservoir.
550
QUE$TORHelp
l
Terrain:the terrain type primarily affects the construction cost.The terrain can
be revised using the dropdown list box.Terrain options available are:
Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
Elevation:elevation of the field above sea level. This is used to determine the
pipeline hydraulics and decide the ISO rated power available from gas turbine
drivers.
551
QUE$TORHelp

The fluid/profile characteristics tab is shown below.
Liquid Data
l
Oil density @ STP:the crude or condensate API at stock tank conditions is used
in conjunction with the GOR/LGR and the gas molecular weight to generate a
pseudo composition for the wellstream fluid. This is used in the production
facilities component for sizing the separators.
Initial water cutthe water cut at the start of production as a percentage of
water to gross liquids. This is used in the generation of the produced water profile.
Waxy crude: when selected pig launchers will be included by default in wellpad
group components.
Gas Data @ STP

l
Gas molecular weight:this represents molecular weight of the gas portion of

the wellstream fluids resulting when it is flashed at stock tank conditions, i.e. 60
F (15.6 C) and atmospheric pressure.
552
QUE$TORHelp
Note:The gas molecular weight entered is for the hydrocarbon plus acid gas
components. If you change the default acid gas content you should consider
adjusting the gas molecular weight as increasing the acid gas content without
increasing the gas molecular weight effectively decreases the molecular weight of
the hydrocarbon portion of the gas.
l
CO content and H S content: the gas CO and H S contents are used in the
2
2
2
2
production facilities component for selection of the materials (carbon steel or
corrosion resistant alloy), corrosion allowances and the gas sweetening option.
They are also used to select the casing, conductor and Xmas tree unit costs in
drilling. The following logic is used for material selection of pressure vessels:
- If the CO content in the gas is </= 1 mol % carbon steel is selected with a 3
2
mm (~1/8th inch) corrosion allowance
- If the CO content in the gas is >1 mol % but </= 3 mol % carbon steel is
2
selected with a 6 mm (~1/4 inch) corrosion allowance
- If the CO content in the gas is >3 mol % corrosion resistant alloy
2
pipe/piping and stainless clad carbon steel vessels are selected.
If carbon steel pipelines are selected a standard 3 mm (~1/8th inch) corrosion
allowance is assumed.
Well Data
l
Productivity:used to generate the production well count and relates to the total
production of a well over the field life.
Peak well flow:used to determine the plateau production rate which is also
based on the percentage of reserves extracted at peak and estimated drilling
durations.The peak well flow should be entered on a daily basis.
553
QUE$TORHelp
Miscellaneous
The miscellaneous tab is shown below.
Miscellaneous Items
l
Distance to operations base: used to determine the cost of logistics

(transportation of men and consumables) in OPEX.
Distance to delivery point:used in the concept selector to determine the
export route.
Layout
l
Maximum well deviation:used in conjunction with the reservoir extent to

reservoir.
554
QUE$TORHelp
l
Maximum drilling stepout:used in conjunction with the reservoir extent to

reservoir.
Artificial Lift
Artificial lift can be carried out using either gas lift or by using pumps and is only
available when oil is selected as the primary product.
If gas lift is selected then the gas lift capacity is set to achieve a GOR at the surface
of 1000scf/bbl. When pumps are selected there is a choice between three pump
types; downhole electric, downhole hydraulic and beam.
Temperature
l
Minimum ambient air temperature: this is the minimum monthly average

ambient air temperature. It is used in the hydraulics calculation for liquid pipelines
as this results in a higher viscosity and hence maximum pipeline/flowline pressure
drop. It is also used to select if insulation is required.
Maximum ambient air temperature: this is the maximum monthly average
ambient air temperature.It is used to calculate a derating factor for gas turbine
driven compressors and power generation packages and to calculate the process
outlet temperature and hence the size/weight of fin-fan coolers.The calculated
power requirement is divided by the derating factor to calculate the ISO
BOEEquivalents
Barrel of oil equivalent (BOE) values for oil, condensate and gas can be entered for
use when calculating the cost/BOE metrics displayed above the table in the
Investment and Production Profile sheet. The values entered apply to all Investment
and Production Profile tabs (Offshore, Onshore, Regasification and Combined) .
Note:The units for BOE are by definition fixed and therefore cannot be toggled
to select a different unit set.
555
QUE$TORHelp

The production profile opens after the field level data if you are creating a new
project, if you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Production
Profile from the Project menu or clicking
in the toolbar.
The production profile consists of a series of five forms which allow you to define the
production profile as well as the capacities of your facilities, the number of wells and
the wellhead conditions.
Once you have completed adjusting each form click OK. This applies your changes
and closes the form to move on.Cancel will clear all entries in the form and take you
back a step.
556
QUE$TORHelp

QUE$TOR will generate a default profile based on the reserves, well productivity and
well peak flow rate.The initial ramp-up duration is calculated based on the number of
production wells and the number of production wells that can be drilled per year.
The production profile edit form, shown below, allows you to modify QUE$TORs
initial estimates to shape the generated production profile as required.
Onstream days: the onstream days is used to convert the daily production
rate into an annual rate allowing for a nominal annual maintenance/shutdown
period.
Concurrent drilling operations:the number of concurrent drilling
operations is based on the production well count increasing in stages as the
well count increases.
Wells per year per operation: the number of wells per drilling operation is
based on the production well count, average production well length, a typical
drill rig learning curve, the onstream days and the regional default drilling time
vs depth data.
Plateau rate (daily equivalent): the plateau rate is based on the peak well
flow, production well count, years to plateau and recoverable reserves.
Years to plateau: the years to plateau is based on the production well count,
wells per year per operation, and number of concurrent drilling operations.
Plateau duration:the plateau duration lasts until 55% of the recoverable
reserves have been produced.
Field life: the field life is based on the years to plateau, the plateau duration
and the production well count.
Once these values have been adjusted, click OK to progress to the production
profile.You can still go back to the production profile edit form by clicking on Modify
Profile below the production profile.
557
QUE$TORHelp
Production Profile
The production profile form gives the user a visual representation of the production
profile as specified in the production profile edit form.
oil (or condensate), gas, water and gross liquids. The gross liquids tab shows the sum
of the oil and water tabs. Use the dropdown lists to select which graph is displayed on
each tab.
Tip: When pasting in a production profile from a spreadsheet ensure that the field
life specified in the production profile edit form is the same as that of the profile you
are pasting in.
If you wish to change the reserves or any other field level data, click on Field data
to go back to the field level data form.
In an oil project, changes to the oil profile are automatically reflected in the gas
profile (using the input GOR) and similarly with gas projects the liquids profile
558
QUE$TORHelp
reflects the numbers input for gas.The reverse is not true, i.e. the oil is not back
calculated if a new gas profile is entered in an oil project.
Note: The daily production rate is based on number of onstream days specified
in the Production profile edit form.
The production profiles can be printed or exported to Excel using the toolbar buttons
at the top of the form.
If the production profile entered results in cumulative production differing by >1%
from the total recoverable reserves entered in the field level data a warning will be
displayed when you click OK, shown below.Click OK to continue with the entered
profile or Cancel to go back and edit the values.If you continue with the profile, the
recoverable reserves entered in the field level data will be ignored.
559
QUE$TORHelp
Design Flowrates
The Design flowrates form shows the flowrates that will be used to design the
components.

l
Peak daily average:this is the peak production of the main product from the
production profile.
Design rates
l
Design factor / Swing factor: the design factor (for oil projects) or a swing
factor (for gas projects) is applied to account for the variance between the peak
daily average and the actual peak flows used for equipment sizing.Entering a new
design factor or swing factor automatically recalculates the design rates.
The design rates for oil (or condensate), gas and gross liquid flowrates are
determined by the peak production and the design factor. These flowrates are carried
560
QUE$TORHelp
through the program and are used to size the equipment within the field
development.
Water injection
Water injection is selected by default for oil projects where it is assumed to be used
for reservoir pressure maintenance. Water injection is never included by default for
gas projects.
l
Water injection capacity factor:this factor is applied to the design gross

liquids flowrate to give the water injection flowrate. It is set to 1.1 by default, i.e.
the water injection flowrate will be 110% of the design gross liquids flowrate.
Water injection flow:the design water injection flowrate for the field. The
default is based on the water injection capacity factor and gross liquids design
flowrate. You can adjust either the capacity factor or the flowrate to match you
assumptions.
Gas injection
Gas injection is never selected by default for onshore projects.
l
Gas injection flowrate:the design gas injection flowrate for the field. When gas
injection is selected, the default is for all of the produced gas to be reinjected.
Gas lift
The gas lift options will only be available when gas lift has been selected within the
field level data form (Miscellaneous tab).
l
Gas lift:the design gas lift flowrate for the field. The default rate is based on a
ration of 600 scf for each barrel of oil production.
561
QUE$TORHelp
Number of Wells
The number of development wells form, shown below, provides the estimated
number of wells required across the field to achieve the specified profile but you can
modify the well count.
The default number of production wells is based on the well lifetime productivity. The
default number of water injection wells assumes an average of two injectors for
every five oil production wells.Gas injectors are based on an average flowrate of 30
MMscf/day per well.
562
QUE$TORHelp
Wellhead Conditions
The Wellhead conditions form, shown below, provides the conditions of all the
possible wellhead steams.
Design wellhead pressure: is calculated from the reservoir pressure assuming

a homogeneous mixture of oil and gas for a no flow condition.
Flowing wellhead pressure: is calculated in much the same way as the design
wellhead pressure, however there are additional allowances for the pressure drop
due to friction in the production tubing.
Flowing wellhead temperature: is calculated based on the reservoir depth.
With an allowance for a geothermal gradient of 3C per 100 m.
Water injection pressure: set to 55% of the reservoir pressure. This is an
approximate number based on collated data and is used to in production facilities
when sizing the water injection pumps.
Gas injection pressure: based on the reservoir pressure with an allowance for
the hydraulic pressure of the gas injection column and an over pressure
allowance.It is used to in production facilities when sizing the gas injection
compressors.
Gas lift pressure: is only available for oil projects and uses the same
calculation as the gas injection pressure but with a 15 bar allowance for the fact
that it does not have to be injected in the reservoir. It is used in production
facilities when sizing the gas lift compressors.
563
QUE$TORHelp

The concept selector opens after the production profile if you are creating a new
project.If you are in an existing project you can open it by selecting Concept
selector from the Project menu or clicking
in the toolbar.
It must be recognised that whilst QUE$TORs default concept selection is very useful,
the software does not take all the factors into account that would ultimately influence
a final concept selection. In some instances a concept may be returned that, based on
the generic software logic, is very reasonable but when compared to your real life
field situation might appear somewhat surprising. Having said that, time and effort
has gone into making the selection process as comprehensive and realistic as
possible.
564
QUE$TORHelp

The concept selector form, shown below, gives you the option to define your own
concept or use a predefined concept.
QUE$TOR will choose a default concept based on the field level data and production
profile.You can change this to another of the 6 Predefined concepts using the list
box.Alternatively you can select Blank Concept from the list box and use the field
development schematic to create your own concept.The key input parameters that
influence the selection most are: hydrocarbon type, reservoir extent, water depth,
distance to delivery point, and the number of wells.
565
QUE$TORHelp
The gas export and oil export frames allow you to specify the oil and gas export
method from the main platform. Again QUE$TOR will choose a default concept but
you can select an alternative using the list boxes.Distances to delivery point should
also be entered for pipeline export to determine length of the export pipelines.
Once you have completed adjusting the form click OK. This applies your changes,
closes the form and opens the field development schematic. Cancel will clear all
entries in the form and take you back a step.
566
QUE$TORHelp

When the concept selector is opened from an existing project it has two tabs, New
and Last selected, as shown below.
The Last selected tab is not editable but displays the concept being used by QUE$TOR
at that time.
The New tab will display QUE$TORs default concept selection.This may be different
to the last selected concept if you have changed the field level data or production
profile.The New tab also allows you to choose a different concept.To use the concept
selected on the New tab click OK.This will delete all existing components and create
a new set of components.To exit without changing the concept click Cancel.
567
QUE$TORHelp
Note: When you create a new concept you will lose any changes you have made
to the components in the original field development plan.
The concept is never changed automatically. If you make changes to the field level
data or production profile that trigger a change to QUE$TORs default concept the
concept will only be changed if you open the concept selector and click OK on the
New tab.A warning is displayed, see below, to caution you that you have chosen to
replace the current development concept with the new concept.The warning then
gives a description of the new concept selected in brackets
If you want to use the new concept click Yes.If you want to keep your existing
development concept click No, to return you to the previous form, then Cancel.
This is to prevent QUE$TOR deleting your changes to components in the field
development schematic (FDS). Any changes to the field level data or production
profile are passed automatically to all components in the FDS, e.g. changing the
plateau production rate will change the production capacity of the topsides, but the
concept will remain fixed.
568
QUE$TORHelp

The field development schematic gives a graphical representation of the project and
allows the selected concept to be refined.
To add components to the FDS

Select a component from the Component toolbar by left clicking on it.If you require a
different component type to that selected, use the dropdown button to change the
type before clicking on the component button.Move the cursor onto the FDS and left
click again to drop the component in the required position.
To add notes in the FDS
Notes can be added to the FDS using the annotation icon

. When selected, the
Add annotation dialog is displayed allowing you enter text and position it in the FDS.

To select a group of components on the FDS
down to drag over all required components before releasing.These groups can be
moved or deleted.
To move a component or group of components
569
QUE$TORHelp
Left click on a component or group of components and hold down to drag to a new
position.
the component and select Delete.You will be asked to confirm any deletions to
To open a component
To open and adjust a components cost estimate, double click on it or right click on it
and select Edit / view cost estimate. See the relevant component chapter for
more information.
Pipelines & Linking Components

The Link button enables components to be linked together.This can represent
pipelines e.g. between platforms but can also be used as an information link e.g.
linking drilling to a wellpad group. To link two components:
l
Ensure the two components you wish to connect are on screen.
Select the link button
in the components toolbar.
Left click the first component you wish to connect in the link then click again on the
second component.
The order in which components are linked should generally follow the sequence of
oil/gas production, i.e. drilling to wellpad group or production facility and not the
other way round.If you cant complete a link, hit the escape key and retry in the
opposite direction.
The link will be displayed in one of three colours:
l
Black:A pipeline link. There can be one or more pipelines in each link.
Blue:Used to link wellpad group components to production facilities.This link is
for passing data only.All flowline costs are included in the wellpad group
component.
Green:Used to link drilling components to wellpad groups. This link is for passing
data only
Links become red when selected and can be deleted by hitting delete or right clicking
and selecting Delete link.
Links and pipelines
When a black link is added to the schematic, there are no pipelines included by
default. There can be multiple pipelines in each link, the example below shows an oil
pipeline and LPG pipeline going from Production facility 1 to Terminal 1.
570
QUE$TORHelp
be adjusted using the associated dropdown menus. On the main schematic, each
pipeline within a link is represented by a coloured arrow on the link showing the
direction of flow.
The length and maximum water depth for all pipelines in the link can be edited at the
top of the form.
Note : All pipelines within a link are assumed to follow the same route.
Remove.
Pipelines can then be sized and costed by selecting them and clicking Cost. For more
information see Offshore Pipelines.
571
QUE$TORHelp

QUE$TOR calculates capital costs based on default inputs for every component as
soon as it is added to the field development schematic (FDS).You can then open any
of these components and adjust the inputs to refine the cost estimate. The default
inputs are chosen based upon the region selected, your inputs in the field level details
and other linked components.The default inputs are designed to give you a
reasonable cost estimate in the absence of further data.
The components are all live linked to each other so that a change to one component
will change all dependent components.You can enter and update these components
and fix inputs so that they are no longer updated by the program. This is called
locking.Although you can edit components in any order you should try to follow a
logical path to avoid locking variables based on incorrect data.QUE$TORs order of
calculation is explained fully see Data flow and locking.
Cost Summary Tree

The cost summary tree can be seen in the panel to the left of the FDS.This displays a
running total of the total project cost together with a breakdown of each component
cost.By default, the tree is displayed in expanded format, i.e. for all components
the cost for each cost centre is displayed.If you want to see just the total cost of
each component right click in this panel and select Collapse all.
The tree is updated automatically as components are added, deleted and adjusted.
572
QUE$TORHelp
573
QUE$TORHelp
Component Toolbar
The component toolbar displays the components which can be used to create a
development configuration.There are three tabs available in the component toolbar
Offshore, Onshore and LNG Regasification. When starting a new project
QUE$TOR will acquire only the licence for the type of development being created.
This initial licence is called the primary licence, the example below illustrates a new
offshore project.The green circle indicates the active procurement strategies that
QUE$TOR is currently using. The example below illustrates an offshore only project
and therefore only the offshore tab has a green circle.
The Offshore tab displays the offshore components available in QUE$TOR. The
Onshore tab however will not yet contain any components since the licence has not
been activated.
To add onshore components the licence must be activated, to do this click Add
onshore project. QUE$TOR will locate the onshore licence, when it is located the
onshore components will become active and the Onshore tab will now display the
onshore components.
A green circle has now appeared on the Onshore tab to indicate an onshore
procurement strategy is selected and is ready to be used. As LNG regas onshore uses
the onshore procurement strategy a green circle will appear on the LNG regas
onshore tab as well.
Note: Once acquired QUE$TOR will not release a licence until the program is
closed.
Similarly, to add a LNG regasification component, the licence must be activated. To
do this click Add LNG regasification onshore project,QUE$TOR will locate the
LNG regasification licence, when it is located the LNG regas onshore tab will become
active and will display the LNG regas onshore components.
574
QUE$TORHelp
Some components have a dropdown next to them, these can have one of two
functions:
l
Some components are available in different variations e.g. a spar buoy component
can be a caisson, truss or cell spar buoy. To change the component type selected
use the dropdown arrow to the right of the component button, the type selected is
indicated by the marker dot. The components this applies to are: Jackets, GBS,
TLP, Spar Buoy, Offshore Loading and Terminal Facilities.
For Topsides, Production facilities and Regasification terminal facilities this
dropdown allows the functions of the component to be defined. This can also be
done within these components. To change the component type selected use the
dropdown arrow to the right of the component button, the functions present are
ticked.
575
QUE$TORHelp
QUE$TOR allows duplication of one or more components to quickly produce projects
that contain similar sets of components. This feature saves you having to re-enter
changes to the QUE$TORdefaults for the selected duplicated components.
A typical scenario would be where there are multiple wellpad groups tied back to a
central production facility.

l
576
Configure the wellpad group and onshore drilling and attached link as required.
Select Wellpad group 1 and Onshore drilling 1. Right click on one of them and
select the Duplicate option.
QUE$TORHelp
l
A ghosted image of the selected components is displayed allowing you to

position the components on the field development schematic.
Left click to add the components to the schematic. A new wellpad group and
onshore drilling component and link to Production facility 1 will be added.
577
QUE$TORHelp
Any changes made to the original components (Wellpad group 1 and Onshore
drilling 1) will also be present in the new components (Wellpad group 2 and
Onshore drilling 2).
Note: Once you have duplicated a component additional changes can be

made to the duplicate component which will apply only to that component.
578
QUE$TORHelp

QUE$TOR divides the wells and flows specified in the production profile between the
components in the field development schematic.Wells are divided up first and flows
are then allocated on a per well basis.
Production, water injection and gas injection wells are divided equally between all
drilling components. The three projects shown below, all have a total of 11 producers
specified in the production profiles. The well distribution is illustrated in each figure.
This shows a project with two drilling components. The wells are split between the
two drilling components with the extra well going to the first drilling component.
579
QUE$TORHelp
This shows the same project but the number wells has been fixed at eight for the
second drilling rig. Therefore the remaining three wells have been given to the
remaining drilling component.
Note: Changes to the number of wells or the flowrates in a wellpad group

component will not be passed to any linked drilling component but they will be passed
to any linked production facility.
Water and gas injection wells are allocated on the same basis as production wells.
Adding a new drilling component or adding wells to an existing drilling components
will re-allocate the wells and reduce the number of wells in all other unlocked drilling
components.The total number of wells will be maintained at the number specified in
the production profile.If there is only one drilling component or if all other drilling
components are locked then adding wells will increase the total wells.Deleting wells
follows the same methodology in reverse.Any change to the total wells in the drilling
and subsea components will not be passed back to the production profile but will be
included in all capital and operating cost estimates. See Data flow and locking for
more information on the calculation hierarchy.
Flowrate allocation is done on a per well basis. The design capacities specified in the
production profile are divided by the number of wells in the production profile to give
a flowrate per well.If you increase the total wells in the field schematic then the total
flowrate will be increased as the flow per well is based on the number of wells and
design capacity specified in the production profile.The same applies in reverse if you
decrease the total wells in the field schematic.
Flows from drilling components are passed from component to component in the
direction of production.Gas injection and water injection flowrates are handled in the
same fashion despite physically flowing in the opposite direction.Their flowrates are
determined in the drilling component and passed in the direction of production to
calculate the injection facilities required at the relevant production facility.
Note:The flowrates from the manifold will not be passed to the main
production facility unless there is an appropriate pipeline in the link, the flowrate will
be automatically used to size the pipeline.
If a production facility with only manifolding has a water injection pipeline coming
from a main (full) production facility then QUE$TOR assumes that all pumping is at
the main facility.If you add water injection to the manifold then QUE$TOR will reduce
the pumping capacity at the main facility accordingly.Gas injection and gas lift
compression is always assumed to be done exclusively at the main facility.
Note:Even though injection fluids physically flow from the main platform to the
reservoir information on their flowrates is passed in the opposite direction.If you
wish to change injection flowrates change them in the drilling components and the
topsides component will be automatically updated.
580
QUE$TORHelp
Onshore Cost Centres

Onshore components costs are broken down into seven cost centres which are used
to divide the cost sheet. Each of these cost centres is described below with the
corresponding section of the cost sheet from the onshore user defined component i.e.
a blank cost sheet.
Equipment Costs
from the procurement strategy. Unit rates are also dependent on the construction
high acid gas contents are experienced.
Equipment costs cover the vendor's cost for fabrication of the equipment, any
procurement of sub-components and sub-vendor's submission to approval authorities
and testing at the vendor's works.Direct procurement costs are included in the
design cost centre.
A freight cost is then added which is assumed by QUE$TOR to be a percentage of the
total cost of the equipment identified in the systems listed above. It includes the cost
of packaging and transporting equipment from the manufacturer to the construction
yard.You can modify the freight percentage, the default is dependent on where the
equipment is procured 'in region' or 'out of region' i.e. is the item being procured
from the same region as the field location.
Materials Costs
Material costs cover all the bulk materials permanently installed with the
component.The costs cover delivery, insurance, guarantees and duties.
581
QUE$TORHelp
There are six main categories for the bulk materials:

l
Steel: covers all the necessary steelwork to erect and install the equipment
specified.This includes all prefabricated skids, main truss framing, outfitting steel
for walkways, platforms etc.
Piping: covers the cost of all necessary piping and manually operated valves
required to connect all the equipment together. It includes a range of pipeline
sizes and different materials and includes all pipe rack and pipe supports required.
The piping cost is calculated by applying factors to each of the equipment system
weights, summing these and applying a unit rate dependent on material selection
to give a total cost.
Electrical: covers the cost of all necessary electrical cabling required to connect
the equipment together. It includes all junction boxes but excludes transformers
and switch gear which are included in the item 'power generation distribution'. It
also includes all cabling racking and ties.The electrical cost is calculated by
applying factors to each of the equipment systems weights, summing these to give
a total weight and applying a unit rate to get the total cost.
Instrument: covers the cost of all necessary instrumentation to operate and
control the equipment.It includes all control valves, sensors, gauges,
instrumentation, control panels and instrumentation cabling.The instrument cost
is calculated by applying factors to each of the equipment systems weights,
summing these to give a total weight and applying a unit rate to get the total cost.
Others: covers HVAC, architectural, insulation and painting. The others cost is
calculated by the program by applying factors to each of the equipment systems
weights, summing these and applying a unit rate to give a total cost.
Civils: covers all the bulk materials necessary to construct the foundations,
buildings and vehicular access areas including all concrete, reinforcement
hardcore, gravel, surfacing, etc.The unit rate is dependent on the relative areas
for foundations, roads and general civils preparation.
A freight cost is added to these in a similar method to the equipment freight costs.
582
QUE$TORHelp
The prefabrication weights are defined by the type and percentages specified in the
Prefabrication tab of the component user interface, and are updated in the cost
estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted. The prefabrication costs include
all prefabrication activities, from receipt and storage of materials, fabrication,
assembly, testing and precommissioning to weighing, including any off-site
fabrication (not vendor-supplied skids).
The line items identified cover equipment and the six material costs. Unit rates for
each identified group are retrieved from the procurement strategy. Clicking on the
hyperlinked prefabrication heading will open up the prefabrication breakdown giving
details of how the prefabrication costs are calculated, see Prefabrication Details for
more information.
A percentage is applied to these costs to cover the load out and transportation costs
associated with getting the items to the development site from the prefabrication
site.
Construction Costs
The construction costs cover all on-site construction and are updated in the cost
estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified
group are retrieved from the procurement strategy.
583
QUE$TORHelp
The construction costs vary by component but some line items are common to most
onshore components, these are:
l
Site preparation: covers the preparation of the site and is a total area based on
the area calculated in the civils sub-component.The cost includes for all
preparation work required prior to construction, e.g. clearing and levelling of
jungle.
Civils: covers the construction of all equipment specified and is a based on the
total foundations area.
Skid/spool erection: covers the construction of prefabricated items and is
based on the total weight of all equipment and materials identified as
prefabricated.
Steelwork: covers the construction of the associated equipment steelwork and is
based on the total weight of steelwork minus that proportion which is
prefabricated.
Piping: covers the construction of the associated equipment piping and is based
on the total weight of piping minus that proportion which is prefabricated.
Electrical: covers the construction of the associated equipment electronics and is
based on the total electrical weight minus that proportion which is prefabricated.
Instruments: covers the construction of the associated equipment instruments
and is based on the total weight of instruments minus that proportion which is
prefabricated.
Others:covers the construction of the other associated equipment and is based
on the total weight of others minus that proportion which is prefabricated.
Clicking on the hyperlinked prefabrication heading will open up the prefabrication

breakdown giving details of how the prefabrication costs are calculated, see
Prefabrication Details for more information.
Covers the hours of the component designers and project management:

l
Design hours: covers the design hours required from conceptual design time
through to installation at the location.This includes project specification, special
studies, detail design, follow-on engineering, purchasing, expediting and
inspection services, project control, QA and documentation during the detailed
584
QUE$TORHelp
design phase. It incorporates all wages, salaries and other benefits paid to
personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility
services, depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration), project
expenses and equipment. It includes vendor data delivery of items to the yard,
insurance up to delivery, guarantees and import duties. Design man-hours are
factored from the weight of equipment and bulk materials, the storage capacity
and civils area.
l
Project management hours: the project management hours required for the
project management team to manage, monitor and control all phases of the
development. This includes project engineering, project control and planning,
design and construction supervision, quality assurance, HSE and third party
liaison.This covers from the project sanction date throughto first oil. The project
management man-hours based on the design man-hours. Pre-sanction
management costs are not included within QUE$TOR and should be added as
necessary. Operations supervision, product sales, etc are also excluded from this
cost centre.
Insurance and Certification Costs

Covers the costs of insuring and certifying the components
Insurance: covers insurance for all project components during transportation,

construction, installation and testing and commissioning.Personnel liability
insurance is covered in the respective cost centres.
Certification: covers all certification costs of the design, materials and
construction of the development by a recognised certifying authority.
Contingency
The contingency is a fixed percentage of the total above costs and brings the cost
585
QUE$TORHelp
About Onshore Components

On entering a component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the screen
with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side, the cost tree will display the open
component.
You can edit all inputs, quantities and unit rates. When a value is changed it will
selecting Locked.To unlock a value, right click on it and deselect Locked.You can
change locked values without unlocking them. Unlocked values will be updated if
changed.
Cost Summary Tree

Input Panel
The input panel displays the inputs of the components and behave in a similar manner
to forms.Some input panels contain arrow buttons (
586
) which when clicked will
QUE$TORHelp
open up a sub-component form e.g. Production facility Manifolding, allowing more
detailed specification.When new inputs are entered the cost estimate and any other
dependent values are not updated until Apply is clicked.
Apply will only be active if changes have been made to the inputs.

The cost estimate sheet displays a breakdown of every cost item included in the
component which are broken down under the QUE$TOR cost centres.The costs are
broken down into a quantity, usually a weight, and a unit rate. The component inputs
are used to calculate the quantities and the unit rates are determined by the
Some sheets have blue underlined values. Clicking on these will open a more
detailed cost estimate sheet in a new window.
Clicking on OK will apply all changes to the component, close it and return you to the
FDS.Clicking on Cancel will exit the component without applying any changes and
return you to the FDS.
587
QUE$TORHelp
About Production Facilities

QUE$TOR defines a production facility as any series of unit operations which alter the
chemical or physical properties of the wellstream fluids.
The production facility component covers processing facilities for oil or gas including
manifolding, oil processing, gas processing, product storage, liquid export and
metering, gas compression and metering, water and gas injection, utilities, power
generation and distribution, control and communications, safety systems, bulk
materials, prefabrication, construction, design and project management and
insurance and certification.
from which weights are derived.The equipment weights are combined into system
weights and the associated utilities and power requirements calculated.Bulk factors
are applied to system and individual equipment items to determine the steel, piping,
electrical, instrumentation, architectural and safety bulk material costs.Civils
materials costs are calculated based on the plot area.
Prefabrication and construction costs are determined based on the percentage of
prefabrication, the equipment and bulk material weights, plot area, labour rates and
productivities.
Differences between oil and gas producing regions are reflected in both the technical
algorithms and cost databases.
The cost estimate is completed by calculating design and project management manhours and adding allowances for insurance, certification and contingency.
588
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
On entering the production facility component the input panel is shown in the bottom
left of the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
selecting Locked. To unlock a value, right click on it and deselect Locked. You can
changed.
Once all the inputs are adjusted, click Apply to update the cost estimate. To apply all
changes and exit a component, click OK. To exit a component without saving your
Inputs
The production facility input panel is shown below. QUE$TOR will choose appropriate
values for every parameter based on linked components and field level data. Many
inputs are also dependent upon higher level inputs within the same component.
You can navigate between high level inputs using the tabs. To adjust one of the
available facilities, such as product export, click on the relevant arrow button. Each
facility can be considered as a sub-component within the production facility. All of
these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if high level inputs (e.g. oil
inlet flow) are changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust product export then, as
long as it is unlocked, power generation will be recalculated based on the new power
requirements.
589
QUE$TORHelp
Facilities
The facilities frame contains links to each of the production facility sub-components
(e.g. oil processing) available in QUE$TOR. Clicking on the arrow button next to each
label allows the design details to be reviewed and optionally adjusted. All of these
sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if a high level input (e.g. input
flows) is changed. In a similar fashion if you adjust oil processing then, as long as it
is unlocked, power generation will be recalculated based on the new power
requirements.
This does not apply in reverse. You should also note that once an input is locked in a
if higher level inputs are adjusted. For example if you adjust and lock power
590
QUE$TORHelp
generators. This problem can be solved by returning to power generation and
The data flow between the facilities within a production facility is illustrated below.
The flowchart is designed to give a broad view of the relationships between subcomponents. Any changes to a sub-component may affect all sub-components
downstream of it in the flowchart. This does not apply to every parameter of a subcomponent and neither does it mean that every downstream sub-component will be
influenced by changes to an upstream component.
Cost Estimate
component. The production facility inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown
on the cost estimate. The unit rates are determined by the procurement strategy.
The costs are generally based on a simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship. It
is possible to go to any blue number in the cost sheet and make any appropriate
changes to the calculated quantities or the unit rates.
591
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The Primary tab defines the highest level production facility design specifications.
Terrain
The terrain type primarily affects the construction cost. The default is the same as
selected when defining the Field level data. The terrain at the production facility can
be revised using the dropdown list box.Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra,
Desert, Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
Elevation
The elevation of the production facility above sea level.This is used to determine the
pipeline hydraulics and decide the ISO rated power available from gas turbine
drivers.
Functions
The production facility can consist of any or all of three functions; Manifolding,
Production and Compression. Selecting a function will include all associated systems
in the cost estimate and allow you to open and edit the associated sub-components.
The functions include the following:
l
Manifolding: selection of this incorporates production, test, water and gas

injection and gas lift manifolds. It also includes a well kill manifold, a well control
package with its associated panels and a hydraulic power unit for well control. It
592
QUE$TORHelp
does not include Xmas trees which are included in the drilling component.
l
Production: selection of this will include production and test separation, oil or
condensate processing, oil export facilities, gas processing and water injection
facilities. Detailed specifications of the processing facilities are made interactively
in the relevant sub-components.
Compression:selection of this includes flash gas, gas export, gas reinjection and
lift gas compression packages along with the associated suction scrubbers and
aftercoolers.
Utilities, power generation and distribution systems and civils area are calculated for
all production facilities and are based on the process systems included.
Capacities
The capacities include flows to or from other components and are used to size
separation, processing and export facilities.They include the design margins
specified in the production profile section.
l
Fluid capacities:covers the inlet hydrocarbon flows from linked wellpad group
and production facility components. See Fluid Capacities for further details.
Water injection: the total water injection flowrate leaving the production facility
to linked wellpad group and production facility components.
Export/flared gas: the flowrate of gas leaving the production facility via flare,
gas or multiphase pipelines.
Gas injection: the flowrate of gas leaving the production facility for gas
injection. This includes gas going to linked wellpad groups and production facility
components.
Gas lift:the flowrate of gas leaving the production facility for gas lift.This
includes gas going to linked wellpad groups and production facility components.
593
QUE$TORHelp
Fluid Capacities
Clicking on Fluid capacities in the production facility inputs panel opens the fluid
capacities form.Fluid capacities covers the inlet hydrocarbon flows from linked
wellpad group and production facility components.
Inlet High Pressure Fluids

Covers well stream fluids that arrive directly or have received primary separation
only.
Arrival Temperature
The temperature at which the high pressure fluids arrive at the production facility. If
the inlet temperatures differ then the mixed temperature of the streams is taken.
Arrival Pressure
The pressure at which the high pressure fluids arrive at the production facility.If the
inlet pressures differ then the lowest pressure is taken.
Well Stream Fluids

Any multiphase fluids arriving at the production facility i.e. any untreated well stream
flows. Oil / condensate, produced water and gas define the make up of the well
stream fluids.
594
QUE$TORHelp
Separated Fluids
Separated fluids are the products from another production facility with limited oil
processing, i.e. only primary separation.The fluids arrive at the production facility in
two separate streams, a liquids stream i.e. oil / condensate and water, and an inlet
gas stream i.e. unprocessed gas.
Inlet Medium Pressure Fluids

Covers well stream fluids that have had prior processing but are not at the desired
product specification.
l
Arrival temperature: the temperature at which the medium pressure fluids

arrive at the production facility.
Arrival pressure: the pressure at which the medium pressure fluids arrive at the
Partially stabilised fluids:are the products from another production facility
that have been processed but require further processing to reach the desired
specification. The fluids arrive at the production facility as separate streams, an
oil / condensate stream, a produced water stream, and a gas stream.
Total Capacities
These values are the total flows used to size the components within the production
facility and are the sum of the high and medium pressure fluids.
595
QUE$TORHelp
Design Conditions
The Design conditions tab allows you to specify the reservoir pressure, maximum air
temperature and acid gas / high temperature / high pressure conditions.
Reservoir Pressure
The reservoir pressure is used to determine default gas lift, water and gas injection
pressures.
Acid gas / High T / High P

This allows you to specify whether there is acid gas or if the reservoir is high
temperature / high pressure. If the box is selected QUE$TOR will automatically use
more costly, higher grade materials.
If the CO content of the gas specified 1.5 mol% then carbon steel is used for the
2
oil/gas separation and processing equipment with a corrosion allowance of 1.5 mm
(1/16th inch). If the CO content 3 mol% then carbon steel is still used but the
2
corrosion allowance is increased to 3 mm (1/8th inch). If the CO content >3 mol%
2
then acid gas materials, typically stainless steel lining, are used for pressure vessels
and pumps etc with no corrosion allowance.
Max. Ambient Air Temperature

power generation packages and is taken from the technical database. The calculated
power requirement is then divided by the derating factor to calculate the ISO
596
QUE$TORHelp
Prefabrication
The Prefabrication tab allows users to specify the level of prefabrication of the
Module:the prefabrication is modular and an overall percentage is applied.

Other: allows the percentage of piping spools and steelwork that is prefabricated
to be independently specified.
None:this dictates that there is no prefabrication and all construction is on-site.
597
QUE$TORHelp
Winterisation
The Winterisation tab allows users to specify the level of winterisation at the
production facility. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain for the production
facility on the Primary inputs tab then the boxes will be checked, at all other times
they are unchecked.
Increased depth of gravel bases: when checked the depth of the gravel bases
under the equipment is increased by 50%.
Winterisation of facilities: when checked, the facility will be assumed to be
winterised. This includes additional steelwork for enclosing modules, additional
HVAC and insulation of piping systems.
598
QUE$TORHelp
Manifolding
Clicking on Manifolding in the production facility inputs panel opens the manifolding
sub-component. This is only available if the Manifolding function has been selected.
A manifold is a system of piping and associated equipment used to gather produced
fluids and to distribute injected fluids.The associated equipment includes valves,
connectors for pipeline interfaces and chokes for flow control. The manifold system
also includes a control system, i.e. the distribution system for hydraulic and electrical
functions as well as the interface connections to control modules.Manifolds are
included for Production, Test, Water injection, Gas injection and Gas lift flowlines.
Manifolding will be included for each of these flows if the total number of attached
wellpads and production facility components > 1 and their flowrate > 0. Additional
weights for a Well kill manifold, Control package, and Hydraulic power unit are
included if required.Manifolding for a particular flow can be added or removed using
the check boxes.
Notes: Chemical injection is used to control product foaming, or to inhibit the

development of scale in piping, break oil/water emulsions etc. Test manifolds handle
produced fluids from a single well so that flowrates, fluid properties etc, can be
measured.
Number of Flowlines
The number of flowlines is passed from all linked wellpad group, production facility
and topsides components.
Multiphase metering
Multiphase meters can be added to either the production or test manifolds. When
multiphase meters are selected, they will be classified into one of three available
sizes and added to the cost sheet.
Selecting a multiphase meter on the production manifold will mean that the meter
will be sized to measure the flow from all production wells. Selecting a multiphase
599
QUE$TORHelp
meter on the test manifold will mean that the meter will be sized to measure the flow
from a single production well.
Operating Pressure
QUE$TOR calculates the manifold operating pressures as follows:
l
Production & Test: 35 bara (508 psia) for oil projects and 80 bara (1160 psia)
for gas projects.
Gas injection:based on the reservoir pressure, an allowance for the hydraulic
head of gas between the topsides and the reservoir, a nominal pressure drop in
the gas injection well and an overpressure to ensure the gas injection pressure at
the bottom of the tubing exceeds the reservoir pressure.
Gas lift: based on the same equation as the gas injection pressure but without the
overpressure as the gas is not being injected into the reservoir.
Well kill: equal to the reservoir pressure.
Design Pressure
QUE$TOR calculates the manifold design pressures as follows:
l
Production & Test: the design pressure needs to handle an emergency

shutdown, it is therefore set to 108.5% of the calculated well shut-in pressure. For
the associated flanges, QUE$TOR selects the lowest possible standard ANSI class
with a working pressure greater than the wellhead shut-in pressure.
Water injection,Gas injection, Gas lift & Well kill: the design pressure is
set to 108.5% of the operating pressure. As with the production and test
manifolding, the associated flanges are designed for the lowest ANSI class with a
working pressure greater than the design pressure.
Weight
The manifold weight is ultimately determined from the number and size of flowlines,
the field configuration and the design pressure rating for each manifold.For high
carbon dioxide (CO ) concentrations, i.e. >3 mol % stainless steel is assumed to be
2
the material used. For lower CO concentrations, carbon steel is chosen.The
2
application of NACE is governed by the consideration of the partial pressure of
hydrogen sulphide calculated at the production facility inlet pressure and guidelines
from NACE Standard MR-01-75 for sour gas systems.
Manifolding lengths are calculated based on the Number of flowlines allowing 1 m per
slot with 3 m for each branch line. Manifolding diameters are determined based on
the total flow of the corresponding fluid at the operating pressure assuming the
600
QUE$TORHelp
velocity does not exceed 50% of the erosional velocity.QUE$TOR assumes an equal
productivity for all wells.
The manifold sizing includes spare slots according to the number of connections to it
as follows:
< 5 connections - no spare slots (minimum 2 connections).
5 to 10 connections - 1 spare slot.
> 10 connections - 2 spare slots.
The manifold weights are calculated based on the calculated length, diameter and
design pressure and include for non-return and isolation valves.
601
QUE$TORHelp
Oil Processing
The oil processing sub-component is only available if the Production function has
been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions of oil/gas separation
equipment (separators and reboiled stabilisers), heat exchangers (heaters and
coolers) and oil treatment equipment (dehydrators and desalters).
It allows flexibility in the equipment configuration and a mass balance is performed
internally using the Peng-Robinson equation of state based on user defined operating
conditions and an inlet stream defined by the oil Specific Gravity, gas molecular
weight and gas/oil ratio (specified in the Field level data).
Clicking on Oil processing in the production facility input panel opens the oil
processing form. The example shown below is specified to produce a production
quality/fully stabilised oil export stream.
The colour scheme in the oil processing schematic is as follows:

l
Green
Oil stream.
Red
Gas stream.
Blue
Water stream.
Oil Processing Configurations

A default oil processing configuration is generated based on the feed conditions and
product specification. Stream numbers are automatically assigned to each
stream.The product specifications available are; Refinery/fully stabilised,
Terminal/fully stabilised, Pipeline/partially stabilised, Production facility/Live export
and Combined gas + condensate (gas/condensate projects only).
602
QUE$TORHelp
There are separate default configurations for oil projects and gas projects.
Note: All separators are 3 phase except for the live export and combined gas
condensate product specification where 2 phase separators are selected.
QUE$TOR will automatically assign a product specification by looking at the
oil/condensate export route entered on the FDS.This product specification can be
changed via the dropdown menu at the top of the oil processing form.
If you wish to accept the configuration click the OK button at the bottom. If you wish
to define your own configuration, components can be added and deleted by using the
Toolbar Buttons.
To delete a component, right click on it from within the oil processing schematic and
then select the Remove option.To add a heat exchanger or a separator, select the
point in the flow scheme where you wish to add the item (the selected line is
highlighted) then select the item on the toolbar.The item is added to the schematic
and the stream numbers automatically updated.To add a dehydrator, desalter or
reboiled stabiliser click the relevant button on the toolbar.These components will
appear automatically in the oil processing schematic in a logical position.
Note: QUE$TOR allows a maximum of three stages of separation plus a test

separator.
Stream Properties
The stream properties can be viewed by double clicking on any stream (but not the
stream number itself). The stream form will appear on screen.
The oil volumetric flow is shown at operating conditions (@ T&P).This is typically

higher than the oil production capacity entered in the component input data form as
the production capacity is a stock tank flow, i.e. measured at atmospheric pressure
and 60 F (15.6 C).
The water volumetric flow is based on the produced water rates defined in production
profile form.
603
QUE$TORHelp
QUE$TOR allows you to edit the Water flow, Temperature and Pressure in Stream 1.
All other stream properties will then be recalculated when you click Close.The
flowrates and operating conditions of all other streams are calculated values and
cannot be edited.They can be manipulated by changing the operating parameters of
upstream processing units.
Note: To see the recalculated flowrates when you change the operating
conditions of stream 1 you need to edit the conditions, close the form and then
reopen it.The flowrates do not update dynamically.
Equipment Sizing
By double clicking on a component in the oil processing schematic the component
data form will appear on screen. As an example, the separator properties form is
shown below.
The type of separator type can be changed via the dropdown menu.The following
options are available; 3 Phase (Horizontal), 2 Phase (Horizontal) and 2 Phase
(Vertical).
604
QUE$TORHelp
l
Operating pressure: can also be changed to recalculate the size and weight of
the vessel plus internals. Similar forms exist for heaters, coolers, dehydrators and
reboiled stabilisers.
Number of trains: QUE$TOR calculates the number of oil and gas separation
trains based on restricting the vessel diameter and wall thickness to 4 m (13 ft)
and 100 mm (4 inch) respectively. If either maximum is exceeded, QUE$TOR
increments the number of trains by one until both criteria are met. The value can
be overwritten (up to a maximum of 20) to tailor the oil and gas separation
configuration to your specific requirements.
Design capacity/train: allows the basis for sizing each individual separator to
be adjusted. The percentage entered is applied to the flow of the inlet stream. By
QUE$TOR includes a default slug volume in the first stage separator. The default is
dependent on water depth, varying from 3-5 m3.
The surge factor applies to the volumetric fluid flowrates and defaults to zero.The
separator sizing is based on the inlet liquid and gas flows increased by the surge
factor percentage.
QUE$TOR determines if an inlet heater or cooler is required, so that the first
separator can operate in a workable temperature and viscosity range. When the inlet
stream viscosity is above 20 cP, a pre-heater is added to the inlet stream and the
flow is heated to 50 C, which is assumed to be sufficient to maintain a suitable
viscosity. When the incoming stream is above 120 C a pre-cooler is added so that
the flow into the first separator is cooled to 80 C.
All input variables on the Separator details form can be changed.The weight and
dimensions are recalculated dynamically. Similar forms exist for heaters, coolers,
dehydrators and reboiled stabilisers.Changes can be made to the design variables
for all items and the capacity and number of trains for heat exchangers to recalculate
the equipment size and weight as shown below.
be printed by clicking the printer button in the oil processing schematic toolbar;
605
QUE$TORHelp
Pressure, Temperature, Oil flow, Water flow, Gas flow, Oil SG and Gas MW
(molecular weight).
606
QUE$TORHelp
Gas Processing
The gas processing sub-component is only available if the Production function has
been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions of sweetening, dehydration,
dewpointing and NGL stabilisation systems.
Clicking on Gas processing in the production facility inputs panel opens the gas
processing sub-component. This consists of a series of linked forms which represent
different gas processing unit operations (cooling, sweetening, dehydration, dewpoint
control/NGL recovery, and stabiliser). These can be turned on and off using the check
boxes. The gas processing specifications and the process used can be changed from
within the forms.
A minimum gas processing inlet pressure of 35 bar has been set in QUE$TOR in order
to reduce the diameter of the gas sweetening and gas dehydration vessels and the
loading on the dehydration unit. If the inlet pressure is less than 35 bar QUE$TOR will
automatically include booster compression to reset the inlet pressure to 35 bar. The
booster compressor duty is accommodated by reducing the export gas compression
suction pressure accordingly.
QUE$TOR chooses a default gas processing system configuration based on the
Product gas specifications required to achieve gas export or disposal as selected in
the Export inputs tab. This initial selection is displayed in the top right-hand corner of
the screen.
The gas product specification can be modified either by selecting a new Gas product
spec. from the dropdown list or by directly editing the values in each specification.
A change in the overall Gas product spec. will automatically re-default the process
selections required to achieve that specification and reset the stream data.
607
QUE$TORHelp
If an alternative process is required to that selected automatically by QUE$TOR, this
can be selected from the dropdown list for that process unit. The minimum number of
acid gas removal, dehydration and dewpoint control trains required to process the
gas is calculated and displayed. Additional trains can be estimated by overwriting the
number shown.
At all times, a mass balance is maintained over the gas processing module and
buttons. Each of the conditions may be edited on any stream and the complete gas
process module is automatically recalculated.
If any gas processing unit spec is changed click Recalc. to update the unit operation
sizes.
The gas processing unit operations available are explained below.
Cooling
The gas inlet stream is cooled to assist in the dehydration of the gas stream. Cooling
is applied if the feed temperature is above 50C. Two cooling options are available:
l
the shell side. A 20C water temperature rise and a 10C minimum approach
tube weights.
based on 9.1 m long tubes, 25.4 mm diameter, 1.65 mm thick on a 57 mm pitch.
The number of tubes is calculated from the exchanger duty, log mean temperature
pressure. The weight of the exchanger includes for steel headers, tubes, plenum
Acid Gas Removal

QUE$TORallows for acid gas (CO and/or H S) removal using a membrane unit
2
2
and/or a 'conventional' acid gas removal process. The membrane pretreatment and
removal unit is always upstream of any conventional acid gas removal unit.
Membrane Unit
A membrane unit is automatically included as part of the gas processing system
when:
l
The inlet gas CO content (stream #2) >= 5 mole %
The inlet gas CO content > membrane CO content
The inlet stream temperature is between 16 and 65 C (60 and 149 F)
The inlet stream pressure is between 27 and 138 bara (390 and 2000 psia)
The inlet stream flow >= 5 MMscf/d (0.142 MMsm3/d).
2
2
608
QUE$TORHelp
Notes:
1.
All of the above criteria must be satisfied before a membrane unit is included
by default.
2. The minimum CO content in the membrane unit product stream is 2 mole %. If
2
a lower value is entered it will be reset to 2 mole %.
CO Spec: the target outlet concentration of CO in the gas stream (stream #4).
2
A membrane unit consists of pre-treatment section with:

l
A coalescing filter to remove liquids/mist

A preheater to provide 11 C (20 F) superheat in a shell and tube exchanger
heating medium
A non-regenerable adsorbent guard vessel to remove trace contaminants
A particle filter to removal any dust pick up from the guard bed.
The pre-treatment system is designed for 100% of the gas flow.

The membrane unit itself consists of a large number of spiral wound cellulose acetate
elements. The elements are connected using a clamp mechanism and inserted into a
steel tube. Multiple tubes are mounted in skids, normally in a horizontal orientation.
Each tube has a single inlet but two outlets; one for the low acid gas product stream
(residue) and the other for the low pressure, typically 3.5 bara (50 psia), acid gas
rich stream (permeate).
The number of elements is dependent on the ratio of the acid gas in the inlet and
permeate streams and is influenced by the operating pressure and temperature.
Higher pressures and temperatures result in smaller units but higher hydrocarbon
losses in the permeate stream.
Only a single stage flow scheme is considered in QUE$TOR. This is normally the
preferred option when the ratio of the inlet/outlet acid gas content is <2.
Note: The ratio of CO in the membrane unit inlet and residue streams is
2
assumed to be the same as the ratio of H S in the membrane unit inlet and residue
2
streams , i.e. if the inlet CO content is 20 mole % and the membrane unit CO
2
2
residue spec is 5% then if the inlet H S content is 1600 ppmv the membrane unit H S
2
2
residue stream will contain 400 ppmv.

A conventional acid gas unit is automatically included as part of the gas processing
system when:
l
The inlet gas CO content (stream #2) < 5 mole % and the inlet gas
2
CO content > Gas product spec. CO content
2
609
QUE$TORHelp
l
The H S content in the sales gas is > H S content in the membrane

2
2
unit permeate stream.
Spec : the target outlet concentration of the CO and H S.

2
The process frame contains the alternative processes for acid gas removal using
along with the Number of trains and the Design capacity/train of these systems.
There are six process options in the dropdown list:
l
Amine, (MEA, DEA or MDEA)
Physical solvents (Selexol)
Combination (Sulfinol)
Solid bed (Zinc oxide adsorption).
The default selection is dependent on the quantities of H S and CO to be removed. If

2
2
the gas flow does not exceed 50 MMscf/d, no CO removal is required and the daily
2
quantity of H S removed is less 60 kg then a zinc oxide process is selected by
2
default. For other gas flows and quantities of H S and CO the choice is dependent on
2
2
whether there is Simultaneous H2S and CO2 removal, H S removal only or CO
2
2
removal only.
Amine and Sulfinol units are assumed to contain the same process equipment items:
inlet scrubber, contactor and regeneration unit. The Selexol unit is similar except that
the regeneration unit contains three flash drums. A reboiled stripping column
assumed to be electrically heated, is required only if H S is being removed. The zinc
2
oxide process uses solid beds to adsorb H S from the gas (CO is unaffected) and
2
2
must be regularly regenerated. This is normally performed offsite by the zinc oxide
vendor who will replace the spent material.
The contactor column used in solvent (amine or physical) process is sized based on
the gas throughput and is unaffected by the solvent circulation rate. The diameter is
calculated using the formula:
where:
D = contactor diameter (m)
Qg = actual gas flow at operating conditions (m3/s)
= gas density at operating conditions (kg/m3)
g
= solvent density (kg/m3)

l
M = design margin of 1.3

= gas load factor, 0.055 for bubble cap trays and 0.1 for structured packing.
610
QUE$TORHelp
The height of the contactor is based on 14 theoretical trays and a tray efficiency of
60% for bubble cap trays. For structured packing an equivalent transfer unit height is
calculated based on the gas density and a specific area of packing equal to 250
m2/m3.
The regeneration unit is calculated from the circulation rate of solvent (Amine,
Selexol or Sulfinol) required to achieve the acid gas removal, see Solvent Data for
further details.
A flash vessel is included if the operating pressure is greater than 30 bar. Otherwise
solvent is fed directly to the regeneration column via the solvent/solvent
interchanger. For Selexol, two further flash vessels are included bringing the
pressure sown to 1.5 bar in the LP flash tank, this flashes the CO from the Selexol.
2
For amines, Sulfinol and in projects where Selexol is used to remove H S as well as
2
CO , a reboiled stripping column is used to regenerate the solvent. Overhead gases
2
from the stripper are routed to the sulphur recovery unit if present. Lean solvent is
pumped back to the contactor column via the solvent/solvent interchanger and trim
cooler. If the contactor operating pressure is greater than 50 bar, then hydraulic
turbines recover some of the pressure drop lost between the contactor and
regeneration section. In the amine systems, a 20% slipstream flows through a
cartridge filter and an activated carbon filter pre- and post-cooling. A sump/storage
vessel provides surge volume in operation and a drain point in case of process upset.
For small gas flows where relatively small amounts of H S require removal from the
2
gas, a solid bed process will prove to be more economic than a solvent-based
process. Therefore zinc oxide beds are offered as an alternative process within
QUE$TOR.
The system requires 5 kg of zinc oxide per kg of H S removed and is based on
2
replacing the zinc oxide every 60 days. The system includes adsorber(s) and an
after-filter. No on-site regeneration is included.
l

Design capacity / train: allows the basis for sizing each individual train to be
adjusted. The percentage entered is applied to the flow of the inlet stream. By
Sulphur
Four options for sulphur removal exist. The default configuration is dependent on the
quantity and percentage of H S in the feed stream and on the regional requirements.
2
Incineration: includes for an inlet scrubber, a furnace where the acid gas stream
is combusted and a flare stack.
Claus unit: includes for an inlet scrubber, a furnace with waste heat boiler plus
two or three stage reactor process (depending on the sulphur recovery level) with
condensers and interstage reheaters.
611
QUE$TORHelp
l
Claus unit with tail gas clean-up: essentially the Claus unit as above (without
inlet scrubber) plus a reducing gas generator, hydrogenation reactor, contact
condenser and amine absorber/regenerator unit.
Tail gas unit only: as above but without the Claus unit.
A Claus unit converts 95% of the H S to sulphur while the addition of the tail gas unit
2
improves this to 99.5%. If the feed stream to the recovery unit contains less than
20% H S, the use of a Claus unit is not possible and a tail gas treatment unit is used
2
instead.
Dehydration
Covers the removal of the water from the saturated gas stream.
l
Spec: the target water content of the outlet stream. This can be defined in one of
two ways, either the dewpoint can be fixed at a specified pressure, or the water
concentration as a weight to volume ratio can be given.
The process frame contains the alternative processes for acid gas removal along with
the size and capacity of these systems.
l
Process: there are five choices in the dropdown list, these can be split into two
distinct groups; Molecular sieve or Tri-ethylene glycol contacting with a choice of
regeneration systems (Cold finger, Conventional, Drizo and Stripping gas).
The Default Dehydration Process is based on the water dewpoint temperature at the
dehydration unit conditions.
The quantity of molecular sieve required to dehydrate the gas is based on the amount
of water in the feed stream (all water present will be removed).
Each train is composed of three adsorption vessels operating with two on line and one
being regenerated. Each adsorber operates cyclically with 8 hours on line followed by
4 hours regeneration. Regeneration takes 10% of the dry gas, heats it in a fired
heater, and backflows through the off-line adsorber. Hot gas picks up the water from
the molecular sieve bed and is returned to the feed stream after being cooled and
free water knocked out.
The required TEG concentration is calculated based on the dewpoint depression
specified, with water content of the saturated feed gas and dry gas conforming to
data given in GPSA.
The TEG contactor column is gas phase sized based on a trayed column with between
4 and 12 trays calculated from the lean glycol concentration required and the
effective fraction of dehydration,
where:
Y
= water content wet gas
= water content dry gas
in
out
612
QUE$TORHelp
= effective fraction of dehydration
QUE$TOR then completes a mass and energy balance around the system using
recovery factors for each of the components calculated on the conditions in the low
temperature separator. Heat is assumed to be recovered from both the cold gas and
cold liquid streams. A 15C and 10C approach temperature respectively is assumed
in these exchangers.
The glycol regeneration unit is sized based on the glycol circulation rate with
adjustments for each method of achieving the required purity. The TEG circulation
rate is 0.036 m3/kg of water removed.
l
Conventional: includes a reboiled still, surge drum, flash tank, filters,

glycol/glycol exchanger and glycol trim cooler. An electric heater is assumed to
provide the heating duty. To achieve higher lean glycol purities, additional
equipment is required.
Stripping gas: an additional stripping column is included between the surge drum
and the reboiler which uses fuel gas to strip water from the glycol.
Cold finger: a cooling coil is located in the surge drum which condenses water
from the gas phase above the liquid glycol. This acts as an additional theoretical
stage in the separation.
Drizo: uses a solvent wash system to improve the purity of lean glycol. The
solvent is composed of C + components normally absorbed by the glycol from the
5
gas stream. Additional vessels are required to condense overhead vapours and
recover the solvent.
Capacity / train: allows the basis for sizing each individual train to be adjusted.
The percentage entered is applied to the flow of the inlet stream. By default, the
design capacity per train is (100/Number of trains).
Dewpoint Control
The dewpoint control unit achieves the removal of heavier hydrocarbons by chilling
the gas. The options available are; Refrigeration (Propane), JT valve or Turboexpander/recompressor unit.
In order to calculate the amount of liquids recovery a Gas Composition Based on
Molecular Weight is assumed for the inlet gas.
By default, refrigeration will be selected for low pressure units (<40 bar) and a JT
valve to achieve the gas reinjection specification. Turbo-expanders are used to
achieve pipeline, gas grid or LNG specifications provided that the flow is greater than
50 MMScfd. Below this JT valves are used and QUE$TOR checks that there is enough
pressure to achieve the dewpoint specification then sets a minimum pressure in the
low temperature separator of 20 bar. If the specification cannot be met through the
JT valve or turbo-expander alone, then a refrigeration unit will be added upstream of
the valve or turbo-expander.
613
QUE$TORHelp
The weight for the refrigeration unit includes for a two stage propane loop and
includes the compressor, condenser and flash drum. QUE$TOR calculates the
required refrigeration loop pressures allowing a 10C approach temperature between
the propane evaporation and the required process.
The weight of the JT valve is not specified separately from the exchangers and low
temperature separator. The exchangers are assumed to be aluminium plate fin
exchangers up to an operating pressure of 100 barg and shell and tube exchangers
above this. The low temperature separator is a vertical vessel including a demister
pad for efficient liquids removal.
To achieve higher levels of liquids recovery a turbo-expander is used to reduce the
temperature and provide pressure recovery.
The recompressor discharge pressure is calculated using the following equation:
where:
P
= recompressor discharge pressure (bar)
= turbo-expander outlet pressure (bar)
= turbo-expander inlet pressure (bar)
r
out
in
An upstream scrubber is used to prevent liquids knocked out in the gas/gas

exchanger from entering the expander.
The minimum pressure in the low temperature separator for either the JT valve or
Expander options is set to 20 bar. If the required temperature cannot be met by
reducing the pressure to 20 bar, a chiller and propane refrigeration unit is installed
upstream to cool the gas before pressure reduction.
Gas Metering
Fiscal metering of the gas using orifice plates is automatically included if there is gas
export. If gas is re-injected or flared there is no fiscal metering. The weight includes
the metering skid and meter prover.
Deethaniser
The deethaniser column strips ethane and lighter components from the liquids.
Overhead gas is used for fuel gas and the bottoms liquids either exported as NGL or
fed to the stabiliser column. A deethaniser column is included when the production
facility is exporting either LPG or NGL; this is determined from the pipeline links on
the FDS. The column is a trayed column with reboiler and partial reflux condenser.
Stabiliser
The stabiliser separates LPG (propane and butane) from the liquids if a deethaniser is
installed or removes all propane and lighter components if one is not installed. In
614
QUE$TORHelp
both cases the stabiliser column produces a bottom liquids product of stabilised
gasoline suitable for injecting into an oil/condensate pipeline or as a separate
gasoline stream. The stabiliser is included when the production facility is exporting
LPG or Gasoline/condensate; this is determined from the pipelines on the FDS. The
stabiliser removes lighter components from the NGL to produce a bottom liquids
product of dead condensate suitable for injecting into an oil/condensate pipeline. The
overhead stream is LPG (a combined C , C stream). If the stabiliser is preceded by a
3
4
deethaniser or a fuel gas stream (C and lighter components) if not. The operating
3
pressure of the stabiliser is 8 bara.
Note: If NGL is being exported it is not possible to have a stabiliser. Therefore

if an NGL export pipeline is specified neither LPG or Gasoline will be produced even if
they have export pipelines.
The columns operate under two sets of conditions. The first is Single operating
conditions, where only one of the columns are selected. The second is Dual operating
conditions where both columns are selected.
615
QUE$TORHelp
Produced Water
Clicking on Produced water in the production facility inputs panel opens the
produced water sub-component. This is only available if the Production function has
been selected.
With the increasing political pressure of the environmental movement the oil/gas
industries are now subject to a far greater scrutiny on their emissions policies.
QUE$TOR accommodates the disparity between individual countries allowable
discharge levels by considering two distinct processing schemes.
The produced water treatment system weight is a function of the consent levels for
disposal of produced water. For an oil/water content disposal level of less than
25ppm the system consists of a tilted plate separator (also known as a corrugated
plate interceptor), an induced gas flotation unit (otherwise known as a depurator) and
a flash drum. Each unit is sized on the basis of volumetric throughput. In QUE$TOR
the consent level is regionally dependent and therefore the value may be adjusted by
manually overwriting the appropriate value in the regional technical database. For
consent levels greater than 25ppm a simpler system incorporating a flash drum and
tilted plate separator is chosen.
616
QUE$TORHelp
Product Storage
Clicking on Product storage in the production facility inputs panel opens the product
storage form. Product storage covers the storage of the four products at the
production facility and is only intended as a buffer to allow for upstream disruptions.
The main product storage is at the terminal facility. On opening the product storage
sub-component there is a tab for each product produced from the oil and gas
processing. A storage cost will only be calculated for the products present.Two types
of storage are considered in QUE$TOR.They are:
l
Atmospheric storage: caters for the storage of fully stabilised products such as
crude oil and gasoline.
Pressurised storage:required for the storage of high vapour pressure (volatile)
products such as deethanised NGL and LPG. The pressurised storage can be either
bullets or spheres.

QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required buffer storage for fully stabilised
products at the production facility. The inputs and calculated sizes are common to the
Oil and Gasoline storage tabs and are shown below.
Storage time: the number of days storage required for each product. The default
for all products is one day as the storage at the production facility is only intended
as a buffer to allow for upstream disruptions.
Storage capacity:the volume of storage required and is the storage time
multiplied by the inlet flowrate.
617
QUE$TORHelp
l
Number of tanks: the number of tanks required to give the required storage
capacity.The default is always a multiple of two and the number required is a
function of the storage capacity.
Design capacity / tank:gives the size of each of the tanks and is the storage
capacity divided by the number of tanks.
Diameter and Height: give the geometry of each of the tanks and are calculated
so that the tank height does not exceed 18 m with 0. 5 m included in the height to
take into account the dead space.

QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required buffer storage for volatile products.The
inputs and calculated sizes are common to the NGL and LPG storage tabs and are
shown below.
Storage time: the number of days storage required for each product. The
default for all products is one day as the storage at the production facility is only
intended as a buffer to allow for upstream disruptions.
Storage capacity: the volume of storage required and is the storage time
Bullet / Sphere: the radio buttons determine whether the volatile liquid is stored
in bullets or spheres. By default if the storage capacity does not exceed 4,000bbl
then bullets will be selected, above this capacity spheres are selected.
Number of vessels: the number of vessels needed to give the required storage
capacity. This is dependent on whether bullets or spheres have been selected. The
618
QUE$TORHelp
maximum capacity for a bullet is 2,000 bbl and the maximum capacity for a
sphere is 75,000 bbl.
l
Vapour space: the volume above the maximum liquid level within each
vessel.For bullets this is 15%, and for spheres this is 5%.
Design capacity / vessel:the size of each of the vessels and is the storage
capacity divided by the number of vessels.
Diameter and Length: the geometry of each of the vessels. The length is only
relevant when bullets are selected.
619
QUE$TORHelp
Product Export
Clicking on Product export in the production facility inputs panel opens the product
export form. Product export covers the export of the four products of the production
facility. On opening the product storage sub-component there is a tab for each
product produced from the oil and gas processing. An export cost will only be
calculated for the products present. The product export systems include pumps and
fiscal metering skids.
Export Rate
The export rate is the capacity of both the export pump and the pipeline.The default
export rates are calculated based on the export pipeline operating 24 hours/day.
620
QUE$TORHelp
The pump differential pressure and pump power are dependent on the pressure drop
along the export pipeline and so clicking on this button displays the pipeline sizing
form.
The pipeline sizing frame in the product export sub-component is the same as the
pipeline sizing tab in the export pipeline.Its operation is identical and adjustments
made here will be applied to the pipeline component. For more details on pipeline
sizing see onshore pipelines. The new pump differential pressure and power
requirement etc are automatically calculated when you click OK.
Note: The pipeline length is set by the connected export pipeline in the FDS. If
no export pipeline is connected to the production facility this is taken from the
regional technical database.
Details
l
Pump differential pressure: the difference between the suction pressure

(taken as the storage pressure) and the discharge pressure. Allowances are
included for pressure losses through the metering skid and the loading arms, when
appropriate, of 2.5 bar and 1.0 bar respectively.
Total pump power: derived from the export rate and pump differential
pressure, assuming a 75% pump efficiency.
621
QUE$TORHelp
Driver
l
MW.
Electric motor: electric motors are used to generate the required design power
with the power added to the demand of the facility. Electric drivers will be selected
by default if the power is less than 4 MW.
Gas turbine: gas turbines are used to generate the required design power. This is
selected when the power is greater than 4 MW. When selected the derating factor
becomes active to take into account the effect that the ambient temperature and
elevation have on the power available from the turbine driven generator. Gas
Derating Factor
and is dependent on the ambient temperature and elevation.
Capacity
l
Derated power: the Pump duty divided by the Derating factor.

Number of pumps:specifies the number of parallel pumps installed. This is set
the pump weight.
Driver Model
overwrite the turbine type via a dropdown list box, if desired.
622
QUE$TORHelp
Pump Weight
motor.
Pump Driver Weight

Metering Capacity
The capacity of the metering equipment, this defaults to the product export rate.
Metering Weight
623
QUE$TORHelp
Gas Compression
The gas compression sub-component is only available if the Compression function
has been selected. It calculates the weights of all the production facility compression
facilities, including flash gas, export, injection and lift gas compression.
Clicking on Gas compression in the production facility inputs panel opens the Gas
compression form.

The gas compression form contains the details of all of the gas compressors within
the production facility. There are four classifications of compressors, the default
selection is dependent on your oil processing set-up and the selected gas export
options.
Flash gas
Flash gas compression will be selected by default if you have multiple stages within
oil processing. The flash gas compressors take the off-gas from the second and third
stages of separation and compresses it back up to the first stage separation pressure.
624
QUE$TORHelp
Export gas
Export gas compression will be selected by default if there is a gas flowrate entered
within the Export / flared gas entry within the primary inputs of the production facility
and there is a gas export pipeline from the production facility. Export gas
compression takes the gas coming out of gas processing and compresses the gas to
the export pipeline inlet pressure.
This inlet pressure of the pipeline is dependent on the pipeline details. To allow easy
adjustment of the pipeline size, in optimising the balance of compressor/pipeline
cost, you can access the export pipeline sizing routine by clicking on Pipeline
sizing. An allowance of an extra 1 bar is included if gas metering is selected in gas
processing, to allow for pressure drop across the metering skid.
Gas lift
Gas lift compression will be selected by default if there is a gas flowrate entered
within the Gas lift entry within the primary inputs of the of the production facility. The
gas lift compressors take the gas coming out of the export gas compressors and
compress the gas to the operating pressure set within the gas lift manifold, with an
allowance for the pressure drop over the aftercooler. If export gas compression is
not selected then the suction pressure is taken from the outlet stream from gas
processing.
Gas injection
Gas injection compression will be selected by default if there is a gas flowrate
entered within the Gas injection entry within the primary inputs of the of the
production facility. The gas injection compressors take the gas coming out of the
export gas compressors and compress the gas to the operating pressure set within
the gas injection manifold, with an allowance for the pressure drop over the
aftercooler. If export gas compression is not selected then the suction pressure is
taken from the outlet stream from gas processing.
Compressor Sizing
The sizing of each of the compressors is based around the same algorithm, with the
flowrates and pressures determined as described above.
Note:You may have to click Recalc in order to see any changes made fully
applied.
Compressor type
There are two compressor options available in QUE$TOR: centrifugal and
reciprocating. The compressor type will influence the required compression power
and the drivers available. QUE$TOR always defaults to centrifugal compressors.
625
QUE$TORHelp
Number of stages
The number of compression stages is calculated from the suction and discharge
pressure assuming a maximum compression ratio of 3 per stage. This can be
adjusted to an integer value from 1-4.
Note: the number of stages only influences the gas compression power.
QUE$TOR does not calculate a weight for each stage of compression.
Power
The power for gas export, lift and injection compressors is based on the molecular
weight of the gas out of gas processing.The flash gas compressor molecular weight
is a weighted average based on the 1st 2nd and 3rd stage separator gas flows and
molecular weights.
Derated power
A derating factor is applied to any gas turbine drivers duty to allow for reduced
efficiencies at ambient air temperatures above 60F (15.6C).This factor can be
overwritten and the derated power recalculated if desired.
The derated power is the calculated power divided by the derating factor.For electric
motor or gas engine driven compressors the derated power is greyed out as it is not
applicable.
Specifies the number of parallel compressors installed. Changing the training
assumption will also initially change the design duty/compressor, if unlocked. By
default, export compressors have a spare compressor e.g. 3 x 50%, as the export
gas is assumed to be a revenue stream.All other compressor sets have no spare by
default e.g. 2 x 50%.
The percentage shown is the capacity of each compressor compared to the design
quantity, e.g. 100%, 50%, 33%.Combined with the number of compressors this
Driver type
The available compressor drivers depends upon the compressor type selected. For
centrifugal compressors, an electric motor or gas turbine driver can be selected. For
reciprocating compressors, an electric motor or gas engine driver can be selected.
Default selection is electric for gas compression powers up to 4 MW; with a gas
turbine or gas engine selected above 4 MW. The limit for electric drivers is 5 MW per
train, for gas engines it's 18 MW per train and gas turbine drivers can be used up to
43 MW per train.
626
QUE$TORHelp
Driver model
If Turbine is selected, a dropdown box will be active displaying the name of the
lowest rated driver selected by QUE$TOR to provide or exceed the derated power.
Alternative drivers may be selected from the dropdown list.
Driver rating
The driver rating is the ISO power output, i.e. power output at 60F (15.6C) for the
selected gas turbine and is displayed for information only.
Pipeline Sizing
The pipeline sizing form, is only available for the Export gas compressor. Clicking on
Pipeline sizing will open the gas export pipeline form, shown below.
This form allows you to resize the gas export line, which will alter the pressure drop
along it and change the power requirements of the export compressor(s).The layout
and operation is identical to the Pipeline sizing tab in the gas export Pipeline
component.Adjustments to the line that are made here will be applied to the pipeline
component.For more details on pipeline sizing see onshore pipelines.
The new compressor outlet pressure, and thus sizing, are automatically calculated
when you click OK and exit the form.
Note: It is not possible to change the length of the pipeline in this dialog box. To
do this go to the relevant pipeline link.
627
QUE$TORHelp
Coolers
We assume a maximum compression ratio of 3 per stage, with all stages located on
the same shaft. If required, two interstage cooler options are available:
l
the shell side.A 20C water temperature rise and a 10C minimum approach
tube weights.
based on 9.1 m long tubes, 25.4 mm diameter, 1.65 mm thick on a 57 mm pitch.
The number of tubes is calculated from the exchanger duty, log mean temperature
pressure.The weight of the exchanger includes for steel headers, tubes, plenum
Weights
The weights of compressors, scrubbers and coolers required for each system are
displayed.The compressor weight includes a skid-mounted package containing the
driver, the compressor(s), base plate, seal and lube oil systems, inlet and exhaust
systems for gas turbine drivers.
If the default inputs are adjusted click Recalc to update the driver type and
compressor set weights.
628
QUE$TORHelp
Water Injection
Clicking on Water injection in the production facility inputs panel opens the water
injection form.
Details
This provides the basis for the sizing of the water injection pumps.
629
QUE$TORHelp
l
Water injection pump capacity: the water flowrate which the pump will be
designed to handle. It is set by the flowrates on the Primary tab.
Water injection delivery pressure: the required water injection pressure
which is set from the water injection manifold operating pressure.
Water injection pump duty: the pumping power to raise the water from the
feed pressure to the delivery pressure, this is calculated assuming a pump
efficiency of 70%.
Note: the water injection feed pressure is set to 0 bara to allow for water
treatment in the vacuum deaerator.
Driver
l
Electric motor:electric motors are used to generate the required design power
with the power added to the demand of the production facility. Electric drivers will
be selected by default if the power is less than 4 MW.
selected when the power is greater than 4 MW. Gas turbine drivers can be used up
to 44 MW per train.
Derating factor: for electric motors no derating is applied. If a gas turbine
driver has been selected then the maximum monthly average air temperature
(Derating based on) and the Elevation at the production facility location are
displayed as these affect the derating factor applied to the gas turbine ISO
equivalent power. The temperature and elevation can't be revised on this form but
can using the Design conditions and Primary input tabs respectively if required.
Derated power: the Water injection pump duty divided by the Derating factor.
Number of pumps: specifies the number of parallel pumps installed. This is set
the pump weight.
Driver model: This allows you to select the model of turbine driver and is only
active when Gas turbine is selected. A default is automatically selected from a
number of available turbine driver types based on the smallest driver that will
provide the derated power.You can overwrite the turbine type via a dropdown list
box, if desired.
Driver rating: This is the ISOrating of the selected model of gas turbine.
630
QUE$TORHelp
Configuration
This specifies what treatment the water has prior to injection.There are three types
of treatment available, which can be selected independently.
l
Vacuum deaerator:uses a vacuum column and vacuum pump to achieve a

residual oxygen in water content of 5ppm (after addition of oxygen scavenger).
This would not be required if produced (de-oxygenated) water is being reinjected.
Sulphate removal: If selected then a sulphate removal (SR) package is included
to prevent sulphate ions in the injection water forming barium and strontium
sulphate resulting in scale deposits when injected water and formation water
combine. Two water filtration options are available upstream of the main sulphate
removal membrane package;
l
Ultrafiltration incorporating an ultrafiltration membrane system and a

Cleaning-In-Place (CIP) system
A cartridge filter and media filtration package - default for a Production facility.
The sulphate removal package includes feed pumps to provide the necessary inlet
pressure to the 2 stage sulphate removal membrane system along its own CIP
system and a chemicals dosing system. Injection water leaving the SR unit (the
permeate) will typically have a residual sulphate ion concentration of 30-40 mg/l. The
reject water stream is typically 25% of the flow entering the SR unit therefore for a
given water injection rate the water supply requirements are automatically increased
by 33%.
l
Fine filters: fine filtration using sandfilters (with automatic backwashing).
Weight
The weights displayed are the total dry weights for all the pumps, pump drivers plus
the , vacuum deaerator, sulphate removal, filtration and fine filtration packages.
631
QUE$TORHelp
Custom Equipment
The custom equipment feature is designed to allow you to add additional equipment
items to the production facility.
Clicking on Custom equipment in the production facility inputs panel opens the
custom equipment form.
The custom equipment form allows you to add, remove custom equipment items, and
also select the order in which you want them to appear on the cost sheet.
To add an item of custom equipment, click on the Add button, a custom equipment
item will now appear in the left side of the form.
632
QUE$TORHelp
The newly created custom equipment item can now be specified. To edit the item,
either select the desired item and click Edit or double click on the item. This will open
the custom equipment item details.
633
QUE$TORHelp
You can now specify the details of the custom equipment item, so that it can be fully
integrated into the production facility calculations.
General
These items determine the values that will be shown on the cost sheet and follow the
standard cost sheet format.
l
Name: the name of the item. This will be the used in the custom equipment form,
the cost sheet, the equipment list and all reports.
Quantity and Unit rate: the costs within QUE$TOR are generally based on a
simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship.These entries allow this to be
defined for the custom equipment item.

The weight of the equipment items are the key drivers to the bulk materials weights,
utilities estimates and operating weight (offshore only). To allow your custom
equipment item to integrate into these calculations, you can select the existing item
of equipment that it gives the best approximation of how this item should be handled.
There are eight options: Manifolding, Vessels, Heat exchangers - fin fan, Heat
exchangers - shell and tube, Pumps, Columns, Compressors and Package. If your
custom equipment item includes the majority of the bulk materials associated with
the system then you should select the Package option. Only primary steel bulk
materials will be included for your item when this option is selected.
Utilities
The heating and cooling medium requirements of the custom equipment is entered
here. For onshore cases the cooling medium duty is estimated based upon the
quantity weight as entered above and the selection made in the bulk materials,
utilities and operating weight section.
The duty entered or estimated here is then added to the utilities calculation.
Power
You can specify the power requirement for the item of equipment and it will be picked
up in the required loads in the power sub-component.
Civils
You can specify the foundations area for the item of equipment and it will be picked
up in the civils sub-component.
When you are happy with the equipment item, click OK and the changes will be
applied.
634
QUE$TORHelp
Cost sheet
Each custom equipment item will be added to the cost sheet, after the water injection
costs.
You can edit the quantity and unit rate of the item on the cost sheet, the default will
be based on the value entered in the custom equipment item form.
Example
This feature has been designed to cover a number of items that you may want to
include within QUE$TOR for which there is currently no input. Some examples of such
items are: inlet slug catchers and methanol storage and recovery units. The example
below shows how these items can be created.
Note: the costs and weights used in this example are purely for illustrative
purposes only and should not provide a basis for your estimate.
The costs will appear on the cost sheet in the selected order. The arrow buttons on
the right hand side can be used to change the items' order. The details of the
methanol storage and recovery system are shown below:
635
QUE$TORHelp
The name, quantity and unit rate desired have been entered at the top of the form. As
methanol recovery system is contactor based, it has been chosen that the system
should be treated as per columns in the calculations of the bulk materials and
utilities. The power and foundation area estimates have then be entered. All of this
data will be used as per any other equipment item.
Cost sheet
These new items will be added to the cost sheet in the order in which they appear on
the custom equipment form.
The weights and unit rates of these items can also be adjusted on the cost sheet.
636
QUE$TORHelp

You can build up a library of custom equipment items which can be used across all
projects. Once you have created a custom equipment item, it can be added to the
library by clicking Store selected item in library.
To add an item from the library click Add item from library, this will open the
custom equipment library, shown below.
To add the item to your project, select the required item and click OK.
Note: custom equipment items are not transferable between onshore and
offshore components.
Items can be deleted from the library using the Manage library button.
637
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on Control and comms in the production facility inputs panel opens the
control and communication form. Control and communications allows selection of the
process control system and communications options. The choice of the type of control
and communication system is inherently a function of the geography and location of
the production facility.For example in an isolated environment, like a desert, a
satellite would normally be used.
Control System
Three options are available; the default is based on the size and complexity of the
production facility. Each option covers main process/utility control, emergency shutdown (ESD), fire & gas and associated interface panels.
l
Distributed: suitable for larger production facilities where a main computerised

control room and several local equipment rooms are necessary.
Conventional: suitable for medium-sized production facilities where one
centralised control room is required.
Basic: suitable for small, simple production facilities, in particular those acting
only as a manifold, where local control panels are the only requirement.
Communications
Three options are available; the default is based on the size, location and complexity
of the production facility
l
Satellite: assumes that a satellite system will be used to handle the

communications between the field and the operations centre.
Microwave:assumes that communications are handled using a microwave
link.This method of communication is limited to line of sight, i.e. to a distance of
approximately 30 km.
Cable / fibre: assumes communications are handled via a control umbilical.This
is usually only used over relatively short distances.
dependent on the options selected.
638
QUE$TORHelp
639
QUE$TORHelp
Process Utilities
The Process utilities sub-component calculates the weights of all the utilities systems.
Clicking on Process utilities in the production facility inputs opens the process

These are the utilities directly required by the process systems.
l
condensate from water. The heating medium duty is calculated from the oil
processing module based on the required heat duty of the process and from the
requirements on any production facility custom equipment items. The weight
640
QUE$TORHelp
pumps.
l
water (CCCW) expansion/make-up tank, water/CCCW exchangers and CCCW
circulation pumps.
Fuel gas: Provided to dry and filter process gas prior to use in turbines or by
other platform users. The weight includes for a fuel gas KO drum, a fuel gas
heater and fuel gas filters.
includes for chemical injection pumps and for chemical storage.
General Utilities
l

Open drains: includes separate systems for treatment of drains from hazardous
and non-hazardous areas. The weight includes for an oily water tank, an oily water
returns pump, a non-hazardous open drains tank with associated returns pump, a
hazardous open drains tank with associated returns pump and an oily water
separation tank.
Plant water: includes for plant water distribution and treatment costs.
Plant steam: includes for steam generation and distribution.
641
QUE$TORHelp
l
Firefighting: comprises of firewater and foam systems.It includes for all

necessary firewater pumps, foam units, distribution systems, sprinkler systems,
fire suppressant, firewater storage tanks and necessary firefighting equipment.
Other: never selected by default but gives you the ability to add additional utility
systems that QUE$TOR has not otherwise accounted for.
642
QUE$TORHelp
Power
The Power sub-component covers main and emergency generators as well as the
power distribution system.
Clicking on Power in the production facility input panel opens the power subcomponent form.
Power Requirement
This shows a load schedule of the powers that have been calculated in all other
equipment sizing sub-components. The list identifies the loads for each system, as
described below, which can be changed by overwriting the stated load with a new
figure.
l
Wellpads:the power required by the wellpads connected to the production

facility.This will only apply if From production facility is selected as the Power
supply for the wellpad.
Oil processing:the power required by the oil processing sub-component,
including the electrical load associated with any electrostatic coalescers /
desalters.
Export pumping:the power required by the export pumps for each of the four
products of the production facility; oil, NGL, LPG and gasoline.
Gas processing: the power required by the gas processing sub-component. This
is broken down into the individual processes within gas processing.
643
QUE$TORHelp
l
Compressors: the power required by the compressors within the gas

compression sub-component. This is broken down into the compressors for the
four gas streams.
Water injection: the power required by the pumps within the water injection
sub-component.
Produced water treatment and disposal:the power required for the
treatment and disposal of the water streams from the oil processing subcomponent.
Control and comms:the power required by the systems defined within the
control and communications sub-component.
Safety: the power required by the safety system, this comprises firewater and
foam systems and includes for all necessary pumping requirements.
Utilities: the power required by the systems specified within the utilities subcomponent.
Base load:includes for lighting and security systems.It is defined as 10% of the
sum of the power requirements listed above.
Emergency Power
disrupted and is defined as: 70% of utilities power + Control and comms power +
Safety power.

The radio buttons dictate whether the cost of power generation is included or if only
distribution is considered. Emergency power generation is required in both cases.
l
Generation and distribution: covers both distribution and generation

systems.When selected all the boxes that are used to size the generators and
drivers will become active i.e. Derating factor, Duty and Driver type.Costs are
included for the generator sets and the power distribution equipment.
Distribution only: assumes that power is being imported to the production
facility and includes transformers, all buses, power cabling between switchboards,
switchboards and ancillary controls. This is selected when the Manifolding is the
only function of the production facility.
Derating Factor
and is dependent on the Ambient temperature and Elevation. For diesel / gas engines
no derating is applied.
644
QUE$TORHelp
Capacity
and the percentage of the design power each generator is providing.Changes to the
l
Power factor:is the ratio between real power and apparent power in a circuit.
This is a practical measure of the efficiency of a power generation / distribution
system. The default is 0.83.
Design power: is the Total power (derated) divided by the Power factor.
Number of generators:specifies the number of parallel generator sets
installed. By default the value is such that there is one spare generator.If
Driver
l
Gas turbine:gas turbines are used to generate the required design power.This is
selected when the design power is greater than 2 MW.When selected the derating
factor becomes active to take into account the effect that the Ambient
generator.
Diesel / gas engine: diesel or gas engines are used to generate the required
Microturbine: are generators driven by small scale gas turbines. l They are able
to use a wide range of gas or liquid fuels making them ideal for use in offshore or
remote oil and gas facilities. The maximum power available from an onshore
microturbine is 1 MW.
design power.You can overwrite the turbine type via a dropdown list box, if
desired.
645
QUE$TORHelp
Weights
system:
l
Power generation weight: the weight of the gas turbines plus generator(s) or
Power distribution weight:the weight of the power distribution system.This
includes transformers, switchgear and motor control units
Emergency power weight:the weight of the diesel generator set(s) for black
646
QUE$TORHelp
Civils
The civils sub-component covers the plot area required by the production facility.
Clicking on Civils in the production facility input opens the civils plot area form.
Foundation Area
Foundation areas are calculated from the footprint area of each system with an
allowance for good access. These are summated to give the total foundation area.
l
Manifolding: the foundation area required by the manifolding.

Oil processing: the foundation area required by the equipment within the oil
processing sub-component, this is broken down into the components available
within oil processing.
Gas processing: the foundation area required by the equipment within the gas
processing sub-component. This is broken down into the individual processes
within gas processing.
Storage:covers the storage tanks for the four products and is broken down into
atmospheric and pressurised storage.
Export pumping:covers the export pumps that were sized in product export with
an area given for the pumps of each of the products.
Metering:covers the metering equipment that was sized in the product export
sub-component with an area given for the metering of each of the products.
647
QUE$TORHelp
l
Other:covers the remaining sub-components, Gas compression, Water injection,

Power and Utilities.There is an area for produced water treatment and disposal
and for all the sub-components' associated safety systems.
Total foundations area: is the sum of the above areas.
Plot Area
l
Total foundations area:covers the area of the equipment specified within the
production facility and the systems selected, with an allowance for access around
each item.
Buildings:covers the required buildings within the production facility and is
determined by applying a factor to the Total foundations area.
Vehicular access: covers the required roads and hard standings and is
Total plot area:the total area of the production facility.This is used to
determine the cost of grading the site and the associated civil materials cost.An
area factor is applied to the Total foundations area to give the equipment plot
area.The total plot area is the sum of equipment plot area, buildings plot area and
vehicular access plot area.
648
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment List
The Equipment list can be accessed from within the production facility component by
clicking the View equipment list button located at the bottom of the cost sheet.
The equipment list summarises the individual equipment items assumed within the
production facility with the details of each equipment item shown where available.
The list is limited to those items required for the selected systems and it will
automatically update when changes are made to any of the production facility
subcomponents.
The equipment list cannot be modified, but can be printed or exported to Excel using
the toolbar at the top of the form.
For each equipment item, the following parameters are summarised, where
available:
l
Number of items: the number of identical equipment items of this type.

Capacity per item (%): shows the contribution of each equipment item has to
the total of the combined items. E.g. 2 100% pumps indicate an installed pump
capacity of twice the value stated in the capacity column, 2 50% pumps indicate
that each pump alone provides half the stated capacity.
649
QUE$TORHelp
l
Capacity: shows either the sum of the capacity of active units to get to 100% of
process design capacity. E.g. 2*100% pumps indicate that 1 pump will be running
in normal operation and the capacity will be of 1 pump at 100%.
Duty: the energy exchanged within the equipment item. The value shown is for
the items to achieve 100% design capacity on the process side.
Power: the electrical power requirement of the equipment items. The value
shown is for all items to achieve 100% design capacity, any over design on units
will result in excess power consumption being reported.
Temperature: both operating and design conditions are shown.
Pressure: both operating and design conditions are shown.
Equipment dimensions: the dimensions of the equipment item. The values

shown are dependent on the equipment type, with length (L), width (W) and height
(H) for rectangular equipment items and tan to tan height (t/t) and length (t/t) for
vessels. ID represents the vessel and tank diameter.
Dry weight: the dry weight of equipment items. The value shown is for all inservice and spare items rather than per item. Changes to the dry weight on the
cost sheet will not be reflected in the equipment list.
650
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
The equipment weights are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each subcomponent is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified equipment item are retrieved
based on the procurement strategy and are also dependent on the construction
high acid gas contents are experienced.Equipment costs cover the vendor's cost for
submission to approval authorities and testing at the vendor's works. Direct
Freight
The freight cost is the cost of transportation of the equipment from the place of
procurement to its intended destination.It is a fixed percentage applied to the
equipment cost.The percentage is dependent on whether the equipment is procured
from the same region as the production facility Location or from out of region.
651
QUE$TORHelp
Material Costs
The material weights are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each sub-component
is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified material item are retrieved from the
Steelwork
This item includes all necessary steelwork to erect and install the equipment
specified.This includes all prefabricated skids, main truss framing, outfitting steel for
walkways, platforms etc.
Piping
This item includes the cost of all necessary piping and manually operated valves
required to connect all the equipment together.It includes a range of pipeline sizes
and different materials and includes all pipe rack and pipe supports required. The
piping cost is calculated by applying factors to each of the equipment system weights,
summing these and applying a unit rate dependent on material selection to give a
total cost.
the service.
Electrical
This item includes the cost of all necessary electrical cabling required to connect the
equipment together.It includes all junction boxes but excludes transformers and
switch gear which are included in the item 'power generation distribution'. It also
includes all cabling racking and ties.The electrical cost is calculated by applying
factors to each of the equipment systems weights, summing these to give a total
weight and applying a unit rate to get the total cost.
652
QUE$TORHelp
Instruments
This item includes all necessary instrumentation to operate and control the
equipment. It includes all control valves, sensors, gauges, instrumentation, control
panels and instrumentation cabling. The instrument cost is calculated by applying
Others
This item includes HVAC, architectural, insulation and painting.
The others cost is calculated by the program by applying factors to each of the
equipment systems weights, summing these and applying a unit rate to give a total
cost.
Civils Materials
This item includes all the bulk materials necessary to construct the foundations,
buildings and vehicular access areas including all concrete, reinforcement hardcore,
gravel, surfacing, etc.The unit rate is dependent on the relative areas for
foundations, roads and general civils preparation.
Freight
This is the cost of transportation of the materials from the place of procurement to its
intended destination. It is a fixed percentage applied to the materials cost.The
percentage is dependent on whether the equipment is procured from the same region
as the production facility Location or from out of region.
653
QUE$TORHelp
Prefabrication tab of the production facility user interface, and are updated in the cost
estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted. e p prefabrication costs include

breakdown form giving details of how the prefabrication costs are calculated, see

A fixed percentage applied to the total prefabrication cost to cover the cost of
transporting the prefabricated equipment and bulk materials from the prefabrication
site to the field.
654
QUE$TORHelp
Construction Costs
Clicking on the hyperlinked construction heading will open up the construction

breakdown form giving details of how the construction costs are calculated, see
Construction Details for more information.
Site Preparation
This is a total site area based on the foundations area requirement of the equipment
previously calculated. The cost includes for all preparation work required prior to
construction, e.g. clearing and levelling of jungle.
Civil Construction
This includes the construction of all foundations, roads inside the perimeter fence,
buildings for storage, workshops, and general site construction activities. The areas
for roads and buildings are based on factors applied to the previously calculated
foundation area. General civils are applied to the overall site area.
655
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the production
facility.They include design, project management, certification, insurance and a
contingency.

The design and project management cost is based on the number of man-hours and
the man-hour rates. Design man-hours are factored from the weight of equipment
and bulk materials, the storage capacity and civils area.Project management manhours are factored from the design man-hours.
l
Design: this includes the quantity of hours required to carry out the design of the
facility.It covers through to installation at the location.This includes project
specification, project execution plans, detailed design, special studies,follow-on
engineering, purchasing, expediting and inspection services, project control, QA
and documentation during the detailed design phase. It incorporates all wages,
salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll burdens, insurance, general
overheads (office facilities, utility services, depreciation of facilities and
and import duties. Design man-hours are factored from the weight of equipment
and bulk materials, the storage capacity and civils area.
Project management: the project management hours required for the project
management team to manage, monitor and control all phases of the development.
This includes project engineering, project control and planning, design and
construction supervision, quality assurance, HSE and third party liaison. This
covers from the project sanction date throughto first oil. The project management
man-hours are based on the design man-hours. Pre-sanction management costs
are not included within QUE$TOR and should be added as necessary. Operations
supervision, product sales, etc are also excluded from this cost centre.
656
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the production facility cost and includes insurance for all
project components during transportation, construction, installation and testing and
commissioning. Personnel liability insurance is covered in the respective cost
centres.
Certification
Includes all certification costs of the design, materials and construction of the
development by a recognised certifying authority.
Contingency
657
QUE$TORHelp
About Terminal Facilities

The terminal facility component covers the storage and export of oil plus any liquid
derivatives, i.e. Natural Gas Liquids (NGL), Liquefied Petroleum Gases (LPG) or
Gasoline, from upstream oil and gas processing facilities.
Two types of terminal facility are available in QUE$TOR, an inland terminal facility
and a coastal terminal facility. The inland terminal facility has three options for the
export method of each of the products; road, rail or pipeline. The coastal terminal
facility has an additional product export method, marine, and covers costs for marine
facilities such as a jetty or an offshore single point mooring (SPM).
Technical algorithms are used to calculate storage capacities and equipment sizes
from which weights and volumes are derived. The equipment weights are combined
into system weights and the associated utilities and power requirements calculated.
Bulk factors are applied to systems and individual equipment items to determine the
steel, piping, electrical, instrumentation, architectural and safety bulk material
costs.Civils materials costs are calculated based on the plot area.
productivities.
Differences between oil and gas producing regions are reflected in both the technical
algorithms and cost databases.
658
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
On entering the terminal facility component the input panel is shown in the bottom
left of the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
selecting Locked.To unlock a value, right click on it and deselect Locked. You can
changed.
Inputs
The terminal facility input panel is shown below.QUE$TOR will choose appropriate
values for every parameter based on linked components and field level data. Many
available facilities, such as product export, click on the relevant arrow button.Each
facility can be considered as a sub-component within the terminal facility.All of these
sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if high level inputs (e.g. oil inlet
flow) are changed.In a similar fashion if you adjust product export then, as long as it
is unlocked, power generation will be recalculated based on the new power
requirements.
When the high level inputs in the tabs are adjusted, click Apply to update the
terminal facility sub-components and the cost estimate.
659
QUE$TORHelp
Facilities
Each facility or sub-component has an associated arrow button, clicking on this arrow
button will open the sub-component form.Within the sub-component form clicking
OK will save any changes, close the form and update all unlocked dependent inputs
and costs.Clicking Cancel will exit without saving. Clicking Resize pipeline, where
available, will recalculate the pipeline hydraulics without updating any other subcomponent or the cost estimate; these will only be updated when OK is clicked.
Cost estimate
component.The terminal facility inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown on
the cost estimate.The unit rates are determined by the procurement strategy. The
costs are generally based on a simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship.It is
possible to go to any blue number in the cost sheet and make any appropriate
changes to the calculated quantities or the unit rates.
660
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The Primary tab defines the highest level terminal facility design specifications.
Location
The terminal facility has several geographical factors that affect the cost.These are:
l
Inland / Coastal location:two types of terminal facility are available in

QUE$TOR, an inland terminal facility and a coastal terminal facility. The radio
buttons indicate which type the terminal facility is.
Terrain: the default is the same as selected when defining the Field level
data.The terrain at the terminal facility can be revised using the dropdown list
box.Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland, Jungle,
Mountain, Swamp or Urban.The terrain type primarily affects the construction
cost.
Elevation:the elevation of the terminal facility site above sea level. This is used
to determine the pipeline hydraulics and decide the ISO rated power available
from gas turbine drivers.
Inlet Flows
The inlet flows represent the maximum expected inlet flow from linked components
and are used to size the storage and export facilities.They include the design
margins specified in the production profile.
661
QUE$TORHelp
Export Method
The method of export can be specified for each of the four possible export products.
The methods available are Road, Rail, Pipeline or Marine. Marine is only an option
when a coastal terminal is selected.
Marine Transport
If the terminal is situated on the coast and marine export is selected the user is given
the choice of either a jetty or offshore SPM.
l
Jetty:located in sheltered harbours or waterways, jetties provide easy access

between a ship and terminal. When selected the length of the jetty is specified.
SPM:an offshore single point mooring is a tanker berthing facility to which a
tanker is moored and through which it can load or discharge its cargo. When
selected the distance to the mooring from the shore is specified.
662
QUE$TORHelp
Prefabrication
terminal facility.

Other:allows the percentage of piping spools and steelwork that is prefabricated
None: dictates that there is no prefabrication and all construction is on-site.
663
QUE$TORHelp
Winterisation
The Winterisation tab allows users to specify the level of winterisation at the terminal
facility and is shown below. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain for the terminal
on the Primary inputs tab then the boxes will be checked, at all other times they are
unchecked.
Increased depth of gravel bases:when checked the depth of the gravel bases
Winterisation of facilities:when checked, the facility will be assumed to be
664
QUE$TORHelp
Product Storage
Clicking on Product storage in the terminal facility inputs panel opens the product
storage form as shown below. Product storage covers the storage of the four
products entering the terminal facility. On opening the product storage subcomponent there is a tab for each product with an inlet flow greater than zero.A
storage cost will only be calculated for the products present.Two types of storage are
considered in QUE$TOR.They are:
l
Pressurised storage: required for the storage of high vapour pressure (volatile)
products such as de-ethanised NGL and LPG.The pressurised storage can be either
bullets or spheres.

QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required storage for fully stabilised products.The
inputs and calculated sizes are common to the Oil and Gasoline storage tabs.
Storage time:the number of days storage required for each product.This is

dependent on the export method for each product. The default number of days for
each export method are:
l
Pipeline - 2 days
Road - 5 days
Rail - 5 days
Marine - 10 days.
665
QUE$TORHelp
l
Number of tanks: the number of tanks required to give the required storage
Design capacity / tank: gives the size of each of the tanks and is the storage
so that the tank height does not exceed 18 m with 0.5 m included in the height to

QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required storage for volatile products.The inputs
and calculated sizes are common to the NGL and LPG storage tabs.
Storage time: the number of days storage required for each product and is
dependent on the export method for each product. The number of days for each
export method are:
666
Pipeline - 2 days
Road - 5 days
Rail - 5 days
Marine - 10 days.
QUE$TORHelp
l
in bullets or spheres. By default if the storage capacity does not exceed 4,000 bbl
Number of vessels:the number of vessels needed to give the required storage
capacity. This is dependent on whether bullets or spheres have been selected.The
maximum capacity for a bullet is 2,000 bbl and the maximum capacity for a
sphere is 75,000 bbl.
Vapour space:the volume above the maximum liquid level within each vessel.
For bullets this is 15%, and for spheres this is 5%.
Design capacity / vessel:gives the size of each of the vessels and is the
storage capacity divided by the number of vessels.
Diameter and Length: give the geometry of each of the vessels. The length is
only relevant when bullets are selected.
667
QUE$TORHelp
Product Export
Clicking on Product export in the terminal facility inputs panel opens the product
export form. Product export covers the export of the four products entering the
terminal facility. On opening the product export sub-component there is a tab for
each product with an inlet flow greater than zero. An export cost will only be
calculated for the products present.The product export systems include pumps and
fiscal metering skids.
Export Rate
export rates are calculated on the following basis:
l
Pipeline - 24 hour/day operation
Road - 8 hour/day operation
Rail - 12 hour/day operation
Marine - 10 days capacity in 24 hours.

form.
668
QUE$TORHelp
pipeline sizing tab in the export pipeline. Its operation is identical and adjustments
made here will be applied to the pipeline component.For more details on pipeline
Note:The pipeline length is set by the connected export pipeline in the FDS. If
no export pipeline is connected to the facility, this is taken from the regional technical
database.
Details
l

Driver
l
MW.
by default if the power is less than 4 MW.
selected when the power is greater than 4 MW. When selected the derating factor
Derating Factor
and is dependent on the ambient temperature and elevation.For electric motors no
derating is applied.
Capacity
669
QUE$TORHelp
l

Number of pumps : specifies the number of parallel pumps installed. This is set
the pump weight.
specifies how many spare units are installed Design duty/pump: the capacity of
each pump as a proportion to the total pump capacity, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%.
Combined with the Number of pumps this specifies how many spare units are
installed.
Driver Model
Pump Weight
motor.
Pump Driver Weight

Metering Capacity
This will default to the export capacity but can be adjusted as required.
Metering Weight
670
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on Control and comms in the terminal facility inputs panel opens the
control and communication form. Control and communications allows selection of the
process control system and communications options.The choice of the type of control
and communication system is inherently a function of the geography and location of
the terminal facility.For example in an isolated environment, like a desert, a satellite
would normally be used.
Control System
terminal facility. Each option covers main process/utility control, emergency shutdown (ESD), fire & gas and associated interface panels.
l
Distributed: suitable for larger terminal facilities where a main computerised

Conventional: suitable for medium-sized terminal facilities where one
Basic: suitable for small terminal facilities where local control panels are the only
requirement.
Communications
of the terminal facility
l

link.This method of communication is limited to line of sight, i.e.to a distance of
Cable / fibre:assumes communications are handled via a control umbilical. This
671
QUE$TORHelp
672
QUE$TORHelp
Process Utilities
Clicking on Process utilities in the terminal facility inputs opens the process

l
Fuel gas: Provided to dry and filter process gas prior to use gas turbines or other
facility users. The weight includes for a fuel gas KO drum, a fuel gas heater and
fuel gas filters.
673
QUE$TORHelp
General Utilities
l

hazardous equipment. The weight includes for a closed drains vessel, closed drain
separation tank.
Firefighting: comprises of firewater and foam systems.It includes for all

Other: Never selected by default but gives you the ability to add additional utility
systems that QUE$TOR has not otherwise accounted for.
674
QUE$TORHelp
Power
Clicking on Power in the terminal facility input panel opens the power subcomponent form.

The radio buttons at the top dictate whether the cost of power generation is included
or if only distribution is considered. Emergency power generation is required in both
cases.
l
Generation and distribution: covers both distribution and generation

systems.When selected all the boxes that are used to size the generators and
drivers will become active i.e. Derating, Capacity and Driver type. Costs are
included for the generator sets and the power distribution equipment.
675
QUE$TORHelp
l
Distribution only:assumes that power is being imported to the terminal facility

and includes transformers, all buses, power cabling between switchboards,
switchboards and ancillary controls.
Power Requirement
figure.
l
Export pumping:the power required by the export pumps for each of the four
products that the terminal facility can handle; Oil, NGL, LPG and Gasoline
Utilities:the power required by the systems specified within the utilities subcomponent.
Control and comms: the power required by the systems defined within the
Safety:the safety system comprises firewater and foam systems and includes for
all necessary pumping requirements.
Base load:includes for lighting and security systems. It is defined as 10% of the
Total demand:the sum of the above power requirements.
Emergency Power
Safety power.
Derating Factor
and is dependent on the Ambient temperature and Elevation.For diesel / gas engines
Duty
676
QUE$TORHelp
l
Power factor: is the ratio between real power and apparent power in a circuit.
This is a practical measure of the efficiency of a power generation/distribution
installed.By default the value is such that there is one spare generator. If
Note:Changing the number of generators will also initially change the design
Driver
l
Gas turbine: gas turbines are used to generate the required design power.This is
selected when the design power is greater than 2 MW.When selected the derating
generator.
Microturbine: are generators driven by small scale gas turbines. They are able
design power.You can overwrite the turbine type via a dropdown list box, if
desired.
Weights
system:
677
QUE$TORHelp
l
the diesel driven generator(s) depending on the driver type selected.
includes transformers, switchgear and motor control units.
678
QUE$TORHelp
Civils
The civils sub-component covers the plot area required by the terminal facility.
Clicking on Civils in the terminal facility input opens the Civils plot area form.
Foundation Area
Covers the equipment size with an allowance for access around each item within the
terminal facility.The total foundation area is given at the bottom and is the sum of all
the foundation areas.
l
Storage: covers the storage tanks for the four products and is broken down into
atmospheric and pressurised storage.
679
QUE$TORHelp
l
Export pumping: covers the export pumps that were sized in Product export with
an area given for the pumps for each of the products.
Metering:covers the metering equipment that was sized in the Product export
sub-component with an area given for the metering of each of the products.
Product loading: covers the loading arms for each of the product export
methods.An area is only given when the export method is selected for a product.
Other: covers the remaining sub-components, Power and Utilities plus all
associated safety systems.
Total foundations: is the sum of the above areas.
Plot Area
Covers the actual areas required for the terminal facility
l
Buildings: covers the required buildings within the terminal facility and is
Total plot area: the total area of the terminal facility and is used to determine
the cost of grading the site and the associated civil materials cost.An area factor
is applied to the Total foundations to give the equipment plot area.The total plot
area is the sum of equipment plot area, buildings plot area and vehicular access
plot area.
680
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
based on the procurement strategy.Equipment costs cover the vendor's cost for
Product Loading
Product loading is carried out by the use of loading arms which enable the flow of
product to be easily directed to tanker orifices. Each product has its own dedicated
loading arm(s).The number of loading arms is calculated via a maximum flowrate
through each arm.In general marine loading arms have a greater capacity than rail
loading arms which in turn have a greater capacity than road loading arms.
l
Road:Road loading arms have typical nozzle diameters of between three and
eight inches and have a maximum capacity of about 2,000 barrels per hour per
arm.
681
QUE$TORHelp
l
Rail:Rail loading arms have typical nozzle diameters of between six and twelve
inches and have a maximum capacity of about 5,000 barrels per hour per arm.
Marine:Marine loading arms have typical nozzle diameters of between eight and
twenty-four inches and have a maximum capacity of about 55,000 barrels per
hour per arm.
Safety
The safety system weight comprises firewater and foam systems.It includes for all
necessary firewater pumps, foam units, distribution systems, sprinkler systems, fire
suppressant, firewater storage tanks and necessary firefighting equipment.
Freight
procurement to its intended destination. It is a fixed percentage applied to the
equipment cost.The percentage is dependent on whether the equipment is procured
from the same region as the terminal facility Location or from out of region.
682
QUE$TORHelp
Material Costs
Steelwork
specified.This includes all prefabricated skids, main truss framing, outfitting steel for
Piping
and different materials and includes all pipe rack and pipe supports required.The
total cost.
the service.
Electrical
equipment together. It includes all junction boxes but excludes transformers and
includes all cabling racking and ties.The electrical cost is calculated by applying
683
QUE$TORHelp
Instruments
Others
cost.
Offloading Buoy (marine)

If a single point mooring has been selected then a value will appear here. It is the
cost of a mooring (SPM) located offshore, where tankers will moor, to take on liquid
products. To evaluate this cost in more detail an offshore project may be activated
and linked to the onshore development.
Offloading Pipeline
This is a lump sum cost, dependent on the length of the pipeline from the terminal to
an SPM. It is the total cost of the materials required.
Jetty Materials
This is the material cost for building a jetty to which a tanker can moor to take on
crude liquid products. It includes all necessary materials to build the jetty.
Civils Materials
Freight
as the terminal facility Location or from out of region.
684
QUE$TORHelp
Prefabrication tab of the terminal facility user interface, and are updated in the cost


site to the field.
685
QUE$TORHelp
Construction Costs

Site Preparation
This is a total area based on the foundations requirement of the equipment previously
calculated.The cost includes for all preparation work required prior to construction,
e.g. clearing and levelling of jungle.
Civil Construction
foundation area. General civils are applied to the overall site area.
Buoy Installation
This is the number of days required to install an offshore buoy if specified.
This is the number of days to install a pipeline from the land terminal to an offshore
buoy.
686
QUE$TORHelp
Jetty Construction
This is a cost dependent on the length of the specified jetty.The cost then relates the
numbers of man-hours per metre of jetty.
687
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the terminal facility.
They include design, project management, certification, insurance and a contingency.

l
facility. It covers through to installation at the location. This includes project
construction supervision, quality assurance, HSE and third party liaison.This
688
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the terminal facility cost and includes insurance for all
commissioning.Personnel liability insurance is covered in the respective cost
centres.
Certification
Contingency
689
QUE$TORHelp
About Onshore Pipelines

The onshore pipeline component allows calculation of pipeline sizes, wall thicknesses,
materials, fittings, installation, design and project management costs for a
pipeline.The pipeline component handles single phase or multiphase product export,
water injection, gas injection and gas lift lines.The pipeline can handle fluid flowing
between new or existing production facilities, terminal facilities and existing pipelines
for tie-in.The materials costs include for linepipe, coatings, corrosion protection,
insulation, fixtures and fittings.Construction costs are based on terrain, construction
type, line size, pipeline crossings and the spread used to lay the pipeline.Costs for
design, project management, insurance and contingency are included. Booster and
reducer station costs can be included when required.
690
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Links
Onshore pipelines can be specified within a link between two components. To open
the link, double click on it within the main schematic and a form similar to the one
below should open. The example below shows an Oil pipeline and an LPG pipeline
going from Production facility 1 to Terminal 1.
Length
The length of the pipeline link is used for sizing and pressure drop calculations as well
as material and installation cost. For automatically generated export pipelines this
defaults to the value specified as the Distance to delivery point in the concept
selector.
Note: All pipelines within a link are assumed to follow the same route.
To add pipelines to a link
be adjusted using the associated dropdown menus.
Remove.
Flow Type
691
QUE$TORHelp
l
Oil: single phase oil flow.
Oil + water: single phase oil and water flow.
Gas:single phase gas flow.
Gas injection: single phase gas flow for injection.
Gas lift: single phase gas flow for lift.
Water:single phase water flow.
Water injection: single phase water flow for injection.
NGL:single phase NGL flow.
LPG:single phase LPG flow.
Gasoline / Condensate: single phase gasoline or condensate flow.
Two phase: two phase liquid and gas flow.
than gas or liquid lines. During pipeline sizing QUE$TOR increases the diameter if
inlet pressures exceed default ANSI flange ratings.Higher default ratings are used in
sizing high pressure injection lines than for export and free-flow lines.
To / From
Pipelines in a link can run in either direction, these boxes specify the direction of the
flow and can be altered by you.
To edit / view the CAPEX estimate for an individual pipeline
The details of the CAPEX estimate for each pipeline within a link can be viewed in a
number of ways:
l
coloured arrow on the link.
cost estimate.
To edit / view the decommissioning estimate for an individual pipeline

The decommissioning details of each pipeline within a link can be viewed in a number
of ways:
692
QUE$TORHelp
l
From within the link form: select the desired line and click Decommission.
decommissioning.
For more information, see Decommissioning.
693
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Sizing
The Pipeline sizing tab defines the highest level pipeline design specifications.There
are two modes of operation for the pipeline sizing tab; the mode is dependent on the
number of sections.
When the pipeline is a single section it allows full pipeline sizing.
When there are multiple sections the pipeline sizing tab only defines the inputs that
apply to the entire pipeline.
694
QUE$TORHelp
For multiple sections the pipeline hydraulics calculations are shown in the Pipeline
sections form.
The Beggs and Brill correlation is used for all flow types, both single phase and
multiphase.The initial sizing of pipelines is based on 50% of erosional velocity; the
diameter is then incremented up if inlet pressure exceeds the following limits.After
making a change click Apply to recalculate the pipeline hydraulics.

If inlet pressure > 135 bara then line size is incremented up (one size at a time) until
inlet pressure < 135 bara or diameter reaches maximum (60 inch).This is designed
to comply with an ANSI 900# flange rating on the oil export pump/gas export
compressor and allows for a 15% head rise to shut off.
For gas injection, gas lift and water injection lines

If delivery pressure <= 210 bara and inlet pressure > 235 bara then line size is
incremented up (one size at a time) until inlet pressure <= 235 bara or the diameter
reaches a maximum of 60 inch.This is designed to comply with an ANSI 1500#
flange rating on the water pump/gas compressor and allows for a 15% head rise to
shut off.
If delivery pressure > 210 bara then line size is incremented up (one size at a time)
until inlet pressure <= 400 bara or the diameter reaches a maximum of 60 inch.This
is designed to comply with an ANSI 2500# flange rating on the water pump/gas
compressor and allows for a 15% head rise to shut off.
If you wish to exceed these flange ratings you can reduce the pipeline diameter by
overwriting the calculated value. The diameter will then be locked and the flange
rating limits will no longer be used.Click on Apply to calculate the new pressure
profile and wall thickness.
Material
Specifies the construction material of the pipelines. Five materials are available.
Default material selection is dependent on the fluid properties.
l
Carbon steel: API 5L Grade X60 carbon steel (density 7850 kg/m3 [490 lb/ft3],
for low-corrosion fluids.
Clad 316 stainless: as per the carbon steel line but with a 3mm internal cladding
of 316L stainless steel. This is an alternative to a solid duplex line when acid gas
conditions are present.
Duplex: a solid 22Cr corrosion resistant alloy (density 7800 kg/m3 [487 lb/ft3],
when acid gas has been specified.
695
QUE$TORHelp
l
kg/m3 [487 lb/ft3], allowable stress 402 MPa [58300 psi], corrosion allowance 0
mm). This should be selected when pipelines are susceptible to pitting corrosion
e.g. seawater lines with high chloride concentrations.
GRP: Glass reinforced polyester is highly corrosion resistant plastic matrix
reinforced by fine fibres of glass with an internal absolute roughness of only 0.01
mm, compared to 0.05 mm for steel pipe. Two types are considered; sand core
un-restrained GRP - for buried applications and glass core self restrained GRP - for
surface or elevated applications. It is never selected by default but can be
considered provided the design pressure does not exceed 32 barg (465 psig).
Oil / Gasoline/Condensate / NGL / LPG

The hydrocarbon portion of the liquid flow through the pipeline (at standard
conditions). The type of liquid will depend on the Flow type specified for the pipeline
in the Pipeline Links form and will be disabled for pipelines that contain no
hydrocarbon liquids e.g. water injection pipelines.
Water Flowrate
The water portion of the liquid flow through the pipeline (at standard conditions). The
entry will be disabled for pipelines that contain no water e.g. gas injection pipelines.
Gas Flowrate
The gas flow through the pipeline (at standard conditions). The entry will be disabled
for pipelines that contain no gas e.g. water injection pipelines.
QUE$TOR calculates the diameter and wall thickness of the pipeline and the pressure
drop along its length. To do this either the inlet pressure or the outlet pressure must
be fixed. The radio buttons dictate which value is fixed. For export pipelines
QUE$TOR fixes the outlet pressure by default.
l
Pressure in: the pipeline inlet pressure. For export pipelines this is calculated
from the pressure out.
Pressure out: the pipeline outlet pressure. For gas export pipelines this will
default to the gas grid pressure specified in the technical database. For oil export
pipelines this will default to the operating pressure of the last stage of separation,
or 1.5 bara if a reboiled stabiliser is used, to prevent vapour breakout in the oil
export lines.
Fluid Temperature
The average ambient temperature. This is used in calculating the fluid properties in
the pipeline. The pipeline hydraulics are calculated assuming the pipeline is
isothermal at ambient temperature.
696
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Sections
The number of sections the pipeline is split into. This is not editable and is set by the
Pipeline sections sub-component. A booster or reducer station can be specified
between two sections dependent upon the inlet and outlet pressures.
Nominal Diameter
Flowline nominal diameters can be adjusted using the dropdown list. Only API 5L
standard diameters between 2 inch and 72 inch are available for steel pipe, i.e. you
can't specify for example a diameter of 9.5 inch. For diameters of 14 inch and above
the nominal diameter is the outer diameter, for smaller diameters it is approximately
the inner diameter of lines with standard wall thickness.In both cases the actual
inner diameter is dependent on the wall thickness.
GRP pipe nominal diameters between 2 inch (50 mm) and 60 inch (1500 mm) are
available in QUE$TOR. Standard sizes are generally quoted in millimetres and reflect
the inner diameter. Non-millimetre sizes are mapped to the equivalent size in an
alternative unit set using the GRP Pipe Sizes
Note: If you wish to change the pipeline diameter, remember to click Apply to
calculate the new pressure profile and wall thickness.
Fixed Diameter
Once multiple pipeline sections have been created each section can have a different
diameter, the nominal diameter input/output is therefore greyed.However, checking
the fixed diameter box allows all sections of the same pipeline to be fixed at the
same diameter; this will then calculate a new pressure profile and wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
The corrosion allowance to be included in the wall thickness.The default value is
dependent on the pipeline material, i.e. 3 mm (~1/8th inch) for carbon steel and zero
for duplex and CRA. For the Clad 316 stainless option, this entry is replaced by the
assumed internal cladding thickness, i.e. 3 mm (~1/8th inch). For GRP pipe there is
no requirement for a corrosion allowance therefore this entry is disabled.
Wall Thickness
The wall thickness of the pipeline is calculated using a design internal pressure to
110% of the inlet pressure. The calculated wall thickness can be overwritten if you
want to use a specific value.If the pipeline is to be designed for a much higher design
pressure than operating pressure, e.g. for well shut-in pressure, then the diameter
should be calculated using the operating pressure. The wall thickness should then be
recalculated using the design pressure.
The wall thickness includes the corrosion allowance.
The minimum wall thickness is set to the API 5L 'Std' wall thickness and varies
depending on the nominal pipe diameter.
697
QUE$TORHelp
For GRP pipe industry standard wall thicknesses are selected based on the GRP type
(sand core or glass core), nominal diameter and the pressure rating, i.e. 6, 10, 16,
20, 25 or 32 barg. This is not displayed and is not user editable.
698
QUE$TORHelp
Slug Catchers
The Slug catchers tab defines whether slug catchers are to be included.
A slug catcher can be included on the inlet or outlet of a pipeline by checking the
boxes at the top of the desired frame.The inlet option is to allow a slug catcher to be
placed on the shore line when an offshore pipeline comes ashore.The outlet option is
to allow a slug catcher to be placed at the end of a pipeline before the flow is passed
into a processing facility.
Slug catcher material selection matches the upstream/downstream pipeline material
except in the case of GRP pipe where carbon steel is selected.
l
Slug volume: determined based on the speed of the flow and the mix of liquid
and gas in the pipeline.
The dimensions of the slug catcher are such that the size of the unit is kept as
compact possible while performing the separation with a maximum diameter of 48
inch and a maximum length of 150m.
Note: Slug catchers will always need to be entered if required as they are never
included by default.
699
QUE$TORHelp
Winterisation
The Winterisation tab allows users to specify the level of winterisation of the pipeline.
If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain in the field level data then the box will be
checked, at all other times it is unchecked. Checking winterisation adds insulation as
default.
Pipeline winterisation
These options impact the pipeline assumptions and will be selected by default when
the project terrain selection within the field level data is Arctic/Tundra.
l
Insulate pipeline:when checked, the entire pipeline length will be insulated.

The insulation thickness can be adjusted in the pipeline sections form.
Elevate pipeline:when checked, the entire length of the pipeline will be
elevated. The pipeline construction assumption can be adjusted in the terrain and
crossings form.
Booster station winterisation

These options impact the construction assumptions for any booster stations for this
pipeline. They will be selected by default when the project terrain selection within the
field level data is Arctic/Tundra.
l
Increased depth of gravel base: when checked, the depth of the gravel bases
under the equipment at any booster stations is increased by 50%.
Winterisation of facilities:when checked, the facility will be assumed to be
700
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Sections
Clicking on Pipeline sections in the pipeline inputs panel opens the pipeline sections
form.The pipeline sections form has two modes of operation which are dependent on
the number of sections.
When the pipeline has only one section most of the inputs are greyed and unavailable
because they are defined on the pipeline sizing tab.The pipeline sections form allows
the user to define if the pipeline has insulation, coatings and corrosion
protection.This form also allows access to the Terrain and crossings form.
The second mode of operation is when more than one pipeline section is specified.To
add a pipeline section click Add new section.To remove a pipeline section and its
associated station click Remove last section.Adding a new section will result in a
booster or reducer station being added between the pipeline sections to provide
pumping or pressure reduction.The pipeline sections form with three sections being
calculated is illustrated below.
701
QUE$TORHelp
Now the majority of the main inputs are editable in order to specify the pipeline
sections separately.
Pipeline Sections
The pipeline sections form contains the details of each section.If any conditions are
to be applied to the pipeline as a whole these can be changed on the main inputs, but
intermediate conditions are changed here.As before each section can have the
insulation, coating and corrosion protection specified.The terrain and crossings form
can be accessed for each section.
l
Pipeline section:designates the section. The sections are ordered

alphabetically.
Liquid flow: the liquid flow through the pipeline. This is set by the value on the
pipeline sizing tab of the pipeline inputs and is not editable.
Water flow: the water flow through the pipeline. This is set by the value on the
pipeline sizing tab of the pipeline inputs and is not editable.
Gas flowthe gas flow through the pipeline. This is set by the value on the pipeline
sizing tab of the pipeline inputs and is not editable.
Inlet pressure / outlet pressure: the inlet and outlet pressure of the section.
The inlet or outlet pressure of each of the sections can be adjusted, dependent on
the radio button option chosen on the main input screen.
Inlet elevation: the elevation at the inlet of the pipeline section. This is set by
the elevation of the source component for the first section and by the outlet
elevation of the previous section for all other sections.
702
QUE$TORHelp
l
Outlet elevation: the elevation at the outlet of the pipeline section. This is
dependent on the specified elevation of the source and destination
components.Any change in elevation is accounted for in the first section with a
constant elevation for the remaining sections.
Length: the length of the section. The final section length cannot be edited and
displays the remaining length to make up the total pipeline length.
Note: In order to exit this form the total length of all sections must match the
length of the pipeline link which they make up. If the final section has a length of 0
then the form will not be calculated and OK cannot be clicked.
l
Nominal diameter: calculated in an identical manner to a single section pipeline.

See Pipeline sizing. Alternatively the diameter can be fixed for the length of the
pipeline, this can be specified by checking the box on the pipeline sizing tab of
inputs.
Wall thickness / Corrosion allowance: calculated in an identical manner to a
single section pipeline. See Pipeline sizing.
Coating: this includes an external three layer polypropylene coating in the cost
calculation. The default selection is for coating to be included for all pipelines.
Polypropylene is suitable for wall temperatures up to 100C.
Cathodic protection: included for carbon steel lines only. The weight of the
sacrificial anodes is dependent on the diameter and length. It is assumed 1 kg of
anodes is required per square metre of external pipe surface area.
Insulation U value:allows a choice of the overall heat transfer coefficient of the
insulation. This, combined with the pipeline diameter will determine the required
thickness of polyurethane foam insulation. Insulation is included by default for
sections with Arctic/Tundra as a terrain type and/or if the pipeline contains water
and the minimum monthly average ambient air temperature (as specified in the
Field level data, Miscellaneous tab) is <2C.
Terrain and crossings:clicking on Terrain and crossings in the pipeline sections
form opens the terrain and crossings form. This allows the details of the pipeline
route to be specified.

A booster station is included when the outlet pressure of the first section is lower than
the inlet pressure of the second section; similarly a reducer station is included when
the outlet pressure of the first section is higher than the inlet pressure of the second
section. If the inlet and outlet pressure are the same no station is included. See
Booster / Reducer Stations for further details.
Note: Booster and reducer stations are only available for single phase
pipelines.
703
QUE$TORHelp
704
QUE$TORHelp

Booster and reducer stations are used to adjust the inlet pressure for pipeline
sections so that the outlet pressure of one section is equal to the inlet of the next.
Note: Booster and reducer stations are only available for single phase
pipelines.
A booster station includes pumping or compression equipment, plus any required
power generation and distribution as well as controls, communications, safety
facilities and utilities. The cost estimates includes for materials, design, project
management, construction and insurance of the booster station.
A reducer station includes for a reduction valve, plus design, project management,
and insurance.Associated construction is assumed to be included in the general
pipeline construction costs.
From section / Station / To section:specifies the location of the station.

Booster / reducer:the booster or reducer station can be removed by
unchecking the check box.
Station type: specifies whether the station is a booster or a reducer. A booster
station is included when the outlet pressure of the first section is lower than the
inlet pressure of the second section. A reducer station is included when the outlet
pressure of the first section is higher than the inlet pressure of the second section.
If the inlet and outlet pressure are the same no station is required.
Product Export / Gas Compression

For liquid lines clicking on Product export in the Booster / reducer frame of the
pipeline sections form opens the product export form.
705
QUE$TORHelp
For further details on pumps see Product export.

For gas lines clicking on Gas compression in the Booster / reducer frame of the
pipeline sections form opens the gas compression form.
706
QUE$TORHelp
For further details on compressors see Gas compression within production facilities.
In addition to the specifications of the booster station the control system,
communications system, utilities, power, and civils also need to be specified.
l
Fuel supply: specifies the fuel source for the gas compression turbine drivers.
This can be either external gas or from the gas product in the pipeline.

Clicking on Control and comms in the Booster / reducer frame of the pipeline
sections form opens the control and communications form.This allows the details of
the control and communications systems for the booster station to be specified and is
shown below.
707
QUE$TORHelp
Four control options are available.
l
Distributed: suitable for the larger pipeline systems with multiple booster
stations where a main control room and several local equipment rooms are
necessary.
Conventional: suitable for medium-sized pipeline systems with several booster
stations where one centralised control room is required.
Basic local:suitable for small pipeline systems with easily accessible booster
stations.
Manual: suitable for small easily accessible booster stations.
Three communications options are available.

l
Satellite: satellite system will be used to handle the communications.Costs are

estimated for a main satellite connection with additional booster stations hooked
in with a cable connection.
Microwave:communications are handled using a microwave link. Each booster
station supports a transmitter and receiver to communicate with the control
facility.This method of communication is limited to line of sight.
Cable / fibre:communications are handled by direct cable connection to the
control facility.
Utilities
Clicking on Utilities in the booster / reducer frame of the pipeline sections form
opens the utilities form.This allows the details of the required utility systems for the
booster station to be specified.Utility systems are included only when required based
on the process equipment selected at the booster/reducer station
708
QUE$TORHelp
l
Fuel gas: provided for gas treatment prior to use in turbines. The weight includes
for a fuel gas KO drum, a fuel gas heater and fuel gas filters.
Relief / flare: includes for an HP flare drum, HP flare drum pumps, an LP flare
drum, LP flare drum pumps, a vent KO drum, HP flare tip, LP flare tip, vent tip, a
flare ignition package and a halon snuffing system.
Closed drains: for treatment of pressurised hazardous fluids.The weight
includes for a closed drains vessel, closed drain pumps, a reclaimed oil tank and a
reclaimed oil returns pump.
Open drains:includes separate systems for treatment of drains from hazardous
separation tank.
Instrument / plant air:includes for compressors, receivers, filters, driers and
the associated distribution networks.
Diesel fuel / storage: required by diesel fuelled and emergency
generators.The weight includes for storage, transfer pumps and filters.
Cooling medium: required to cool oil or condensate prior to exportand for
circulation pumps.
Power
Clicking on Power in the Booster / reducer frame of the pipeline sections form opens
the power form. This allows the details of the power requirements and generation for
the booster station to be specified.
709
QUE$TORHelp

The radio buttons at the top dictate whether the cost of power generation is included
or if only distribution is considered. Emergency power generation is required in both
cases.
Power Requirements
equipment sizing sub-components. The list identifies the loads for each system which
can be changed by overwriting the stated load with a new figure.
Emergency Power
Safety power.
710
QUE$TORHelp
Derating Factor
and is dependent on the ambient temperature and elevation. For diesel / gas engines
Duty
l
Power factor: is the ratio between real power and apparent power in a circuit.
Driver
l
selected when the design power is greater than 2MW. When selected the derating
generator.
711
QUE$TORHelp
l
desired.
Weights
system:
l
Power generation weight:the weight of the gas turbines plus generator(s) or

Power distribution weight: the weight of the power distribution system. This
includes transformers, switchgear and motor control units
Civils
Clicking on Civils in the Booster / reducer frame of the pipeline sections form opens
the civils form. This allows the details of the civil requirements for the booster station
to be specified.
712
QUE$TORHelp
l
Total foundations area:covers the foundation area required for pumping,

compression power generation and distribution, utilities, safety, vehicular access
and buildings. The areas are based on the equipment specified within the booster
station and the systems selected, with an allowance for access around each item.
Buildings:covers the required buildings within the booster station and is
Vehicular access:covers the required roads and hard standings and is
Total plot area:the total area of the wellpad group. This is used to determine
the cost of grading the site and the associated civil materials cost. An area factor
is applied to the Total foundations to give the equipment plot area. The total plot
plot area.
713
QUE$TORHelp
Terrain and Crossings

Clicking on Terrain + crossing in the pipeline sections frame of the pipeline
sections form opens the terrain / crossings form.This allows the terrain through
which the pipeline section is laid to be specified.
Each section may cross a number of different terrains en route to its destination.To
add an additional terrain type click Add new terrain. To remove terrain type click
Remove last terrain.
Terrain Type
The terrains can be revised using the dropdown list box. Terrain options available
are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban with the
default set to the field level value. The number and types of terrain specified
primarily affect the construction duration.
Construction Type
Specifies the construction type for the terrain.The construction types can be revised
using the dropdown list box.The construction options are Buried, Surface or
Elevated.A default is selected dependent on the terrain.
Length
The length of the terrain section.The final section length cannot be edited and
displays the remaining length to make up the total pipeline length.
Note: In order to exit this form the total length of all terrains must match the
length of the pipeline section which they make up.If the final section has a length of
0 then the form will not be calculated and OK cannot be clicked.
Number of Crossings
For each terrain selected it is also possible to specify the number of crossings that
the pipeline must negotiate while in that terrain. There are seven crossing types:
714
QUE$TORHelp
l
Estuary: over 100m wide (up to say 500m), pipeline is tunnelled under the river
so that shipping is not affected.
Major river: up to 100m wide, support is a bridge spanning the river which could
take >1 pipe.
Minor river: up to 5m wide, support is a simple carrier pipe spanning the river.
Major road: at least three lanes. The support is a bridge spanning the road which
could take >1 pipe.
Minor road: up to two lanes. The support is a bridge spanning the road which
could take >1 pipe.
Railway: up to two lines. The support is a bridge spanning the railway which
could take >1 pipe.
Pipeline: for crossing a single pipeline.
The default number of crossings is set by the regional technical database.
The number of construction days required to build each portion of the pipeline
section.This is automatically calculated and does not include any mob / demob days;
these are included in the construction duration form.
715
QUE$TORHelp
Pipeline Schematic
Clicking on Schematic in the pipeline sections form opens the onshore pipeline
schematic form.This is a graphical representation of the pipeline and stations
specified.
The x axis shows the length of the pipeline and the y axis shows the elevation of the
pipeline at any point along its length. The colour of the area under the line represents
the terrain over which the pipeline is being laid. The arrow symbols represent a
booster or reducer station located between sections of the pipeline.
The schematic can be previewed and printed using the buttons at the top of the form.
716
QUE$TORHelp
Clicking on Pipeline sections in the pipeline inputs panel opens the product pipeline
sections form. This form shows the total construction duration required for each
terrain in each section of the pipeline.
Construction duration: number of days required to build each terrain portion of

the pipeline section. This is calculated in the terrains and crossings form.
Number of spreads:used to schedule the pipeline laying. The terrains are
grouped by the type of spread required. Grassland, desert and urban are assumed
to require the same basic pipelay spread, whereas each of the other terrains
require a specialised spread.
Mob / demob:the days required to get the spread into the field and ready for
laying.
Total duration: the total pipelay spread requirement. This is the sum of the
construction and mob / demob durations.
717
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
Equipment costs relate only to the booster / reducer stations and slug catchers.Each
booster station and slug catcher has its own cost sheet which breaks out the
component costs.
Booster Stations
Clicking on Booster station 1 in the cost sheet opens the equipment cost sheet for
the booster station.
Equipment costs for booster stations are broken down to account for pumping and
compression requirements, controls and communications, safety, utilities and
718
QUE$TORHelp
power.Freight, design, project management, insurance and contingency are included
on the main cost sheet.
Reducer Stations
Reducer stations have a single line item for the reducer valve. This is dependent on
the pipeline diameter.
Slug Catchers
Clicking on Inlet slug catcher in the cost sheet opens the equipment cost sheet for
the inlet slug catcher as shown below.
The cost sheet gives a single line for the weight and unit rate of the slug
catcher.Freight, design, project management, insurance and contingency are
included on the main cost sheet.
Freight
equipment cost. The percentage is dependent on whether the equipment is procured
from the same region as the pipeline Location or from out of region.
719
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
Materials costs relate to the pipeline, coatings, fittings and crossings.Booster
stations and slug catchers have separate materials cost sheets.
Linepipe
The linepipe unit rate is a composite rate per unit length determined from the pipeline
material and wall thickness. Steel pipelines are assumed to be seamless for 14 inch
diameter and below and seam welded for 16 inch diameter and above.Steel pipes
include an epoxy anti-corrosion coat.
Fittings
This includes for all the required valves and joints to connect the pipeline at either
end to the facilities, as well as any elbows/tees etc along its length.For buried GRP
pipe this also includes an allowance thrust blocks where the pipe direction changes
along its length.It is taken as a percentage of the linepipe cost. An additional
percentage is included for cathodic protection using an impressed current system
when Corrosion protection is selected in the Pipelines sections form. By default
cathodic protection is only selected if the pipeline material is carbon steel or clad 316
stainless.
Coatings
This includes for an external three layer polypropylene wrap to protect the pipe from
external corrosion and pipeline insulation if this has been selected - see Pipeline
sections.External costing is excluded in the case of GRP pipe.
Crossings
This is cost of the materials required for the various pipeline crossings. This is
dependent on the number of crossings, crossing type and the pipeline diameter.
720
QUE$TORHelp
Civils Materials
The civils material cost within the pipeline is designed to cover the materials required
to allow the pipeline to be installed. The cost is dependent on the pipeline
construction type, i.e. surface, buried or elevated:
l
Surface laid pipelines: the cost includes for the materials required to provide
a sufficiently flat surface on which to lay the lines.
Buried pipelines: the cost includes for any specific material that may be
required to be placed under the pipeline or to be used as backfill.
Elevated pipelines: the cost covers the material cost of the supports and their
foundations.
Booster Stations
Clicking on Booster station 1 in the cost sheet opens the materials cost sheet for
Steelwork: calculated by applying a factor on the booster station equipment

weights. The unit rate for steel materials includes allowances for cutting, wastage
and surface coatings. The unit rate assumes Grade S355 low carbon steel is used
and the quantity includes allowances for cutting, wastage and surface coatings.
Piping: calculated by applying factors to the booster station equipment weights.
The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of piping and are stored in
regional databases to reflect different design practices and materials of
construction. The weight includes for all pipe supports, flanges and fittings and
721
QUE$TORHelp
valves but excludes control valves and emergency shutdown valves (which are
included in instrument bulks). ASTM Grade A106B carbon steel pipe is assumed or
316L stainless steel depending on the service.
l
Electrical: calculated by applying factors to the booster station equipment

weights. The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of electrical bulks. The
weights include for all cabling, cable trays, supports, terminations, glands, gland
transits, junction boxes, lighting and small power systems (e.g. batteries/life
support power).
Instrument: calculated by applying factors on the booster station equipment
weights. The factors relate tonnes of equipment to tonnes of instrument bulks. The
weights include all instrument cabling, pneumatic tubing, terminations, glands,
gland penetrations, supports, control valves, relief valves and ESD and blowdown
valves.
Others: includes all additional bulk system weights associated with the HVAC and
safety systems plus painting and architectural bulks. HVAC bulks are calculated as
a factor of the equipment system weights. It includes for ducts, duct supports,
insulation, flow dampers and grilles. Safety system bulks are calculated as a
factor of the equipment system weights. It includes for fire monitors, hose reels,
deluge valves, fire and gas sectors, halon and CO2 systems, portable fire
extinguishers, fire blankets, fireman's equipment. Architectural bulks are
calculated as a factor of those equipment systems requiring architectural items.
These items are then totalled up to give an overall weight which is entered under
the item other bulks.
Civils materials:includes for the clearing and grading of the booster station
site.
Slug Catchers
Clicking on Inlet slug catcher in the cost sheet opens the material cost sheet for
the inlet slug catcher.
722
QUE$TORHelp
As for booster stations the materials are broken into categories and are calculated
based on the weight of the slug catcher equipment.
Freight
as the pipeline Location or from out of region.
723
QUE$TORHelp
Construction Costs
Construction costs relate to the physical construction of the pipeline, crossings,
support framing, plus any pipeline testing or right of way assessments.Booster
stations and slug catchers have separate construction cost sheets. The pipelay days
and the pipelay spread day rate is dependent on the diameter of pipe being installed,
the terrain and pipeline material, i.e. steel or GRP.
Booster Stations
Clicking on Booster station 1 in the cost sheet opens the construction cost sheet for
724
QUE$TORHelp
This gives the breakdown of construction costs for the booster station and includes
the construction of the bulk materials which were estimated in the previous section.
Slug Catchers
Clicking on Inlet slug catcher in the cost sheet opens the construction cost sheet
for the inlet slug catcher.
The costs are broken down into similar categories to the booster station construction
cost sheet.
725
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the pipeline.They

and bulk materials, the storage capacity and civils area. Project management manhours are factored from the design man-hours.
l
Design:this includes the quantity of hours required to carry out the design of the
specification, project execution plans, detailed design, special studies, follow-on
and import duties. Design man-hours are factored from the length, size and
material of pipeline, number and type of crossing, and any equipment associated
with the pipeline
726
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the pipeline cost and includes insurance for all project
components during transportation, construction, installation and testing and
centres.
Certification
Contingency
727
QUE$TORHelp
About Wellpad Groups

The wellpad group component lists all of the wellpads, wells, well location equipment
and flowlines required to connect to a production facility.
A wellpad group can be just one individual wellpad with the necessary flowlines back
to a production facility or it can be several wellpads located in one group and
manifolded together with the associated flowlines back to a production facility.The
user can also specify whether pig launchers and test separators are required at the
wellpad location.
728
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
On entering the wellpad group component the input panel is shown in the bottom left
of the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.QUE$TOR will
choose appropriate values for every parameter based on linked components and field
level data.Some inputs may also be dependent upon high level inputs within the
same component, for example flowline diameters are dependent on flowrates.The
cost estimate displays a breakdown of every cost item included in the component.
changed.
changes and exit a component, click on OK. To exit a component without saving your
changes click on Cancel.
Inputs
The wellpad group input panel is shown below.QUE$TOR will choose appropriate
values for every parameter based on linked components and field level data.Many
available facilities, such as wellpads, in more detail click on the relevant arrow
button. Each facility can be considered as a sub-component within the wellpad
group.All of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if high level
inputs (e.g. flowrates) are changed.In a similar fashion if you adjust wellpads then,
as long as it is unlocked, civils will be recalculated based on the new wellpad
configuration.
729
QUE$TORHelp
Once you have reviewed the wellpads sub-component certain values in this form will
become read only. When this occurs a Restore default wellpad configuration
button will appear next to the Apply button.
This button allows you to restore the defaults within the wellpads sub-component.
you made to the wellpad configuration will be lost.
730
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The Primary tab allows users to choose the highest level wellpad group design
specifications.
Location
Several geographical factors can affect the cost of the wellpad group. The two taken
into account are:
l
Terrain:the default is the same as selected when defining the Field level
data.The terrain at the location of the production facility can be revised using the
dropdown list box Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland,
Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
Elevation: is the elevation of the wellpad group above sea level.
Wells
Specifies the number of wells by well type and the associated flowrates.The flowrate
is calculated by pro-rating the total field flow by the number of wells assuming an
equal flowrate for all wells of the same type. The number of wells displayed here will
update automatically if you add or remove wells in the Wellpad editor.
l
Wells: the number of wells for each type of well.If the wellpad group is
connected to drilling components it will automatically pick up the number of wells
from the drilling components.
Note: Changing the number of wells in a drilling component will change the
number of wells in any linked wellpad group component, but the reverse situation
731
QUE$TORHelp
does not apply.Therefore, it is recommended that adjustments to the well count are
made in the drilling components.
l
Flowrate: the total flowrate from / to each well type.This is used to size the
flowlines required. For an oil project the production flowrate represent the oil
portion of the flow.
732
QUE$TORHelp
Prefabrication
wellpads within the group.
Module: the prefabrication is modular and an overall percentage is applied.

Other:allows the percentage of piping spools and steelwork that is prefabricated
733
QUE$TORHelp
Winterisation
The Winterisation tab allows users to specify the level of winterisation of the wellpads
and flowlines within the wellpad group. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain for
the wellpad group on the Primary tab then the boxes will be checked, at all other
times they are unchecked.
Increased depth of gravel bases: when checked the depth of the gravel bases
Winterisation of facilities: when checked, the facility will be assumed to be
734
QUE$TORHelp
Wellpad Editor
Clicking on Wellpads opens the wellpad editor form.All wellpads specified within
this wellpad group appear on this sheet.The editor details the technical information
relating to each of the designated wellpads in the wellpad group.
Any number of wellpads can be selected at one time from the list.When a wellpad is
selected the row becomes highlighted and the technical information displayed.The
listbox follows the standard Windows conventions for multiple selections i.e. as in
Explorer.
To select a single wellpad click on the desired wellpad.To select all the wellpads click
Select all.To select a range of consecutive wellpads select the first desired wellpad,
hold down the Shift key and select the last wellpad.To select a non-consecutive
wellpads hold down the Ctrl key and select the wellpads required.To clear all
selections click Select none.
To add a wellpad click Add wellpad. To remove wellpads select the wellpads to be
removed and click Remove wellpad.
On selecting the desired wellpad(s), the tabs in the bottom half of the form become
active and display the technical data of the wellpad(s).Changes made in the tabs will
apply to all the selected wellpads.If a field is blank then the value is not consistent
for the selected wellpads, changes can be applied to these fields in the same manner
as any other e.g. to change the power supply of wellpads 1, 2 and 4 select the
wellpads and adjust the power supply.All three wellpads take on the new selection.
735
QUE$TORHelp
Note: The wellpad configuration will become protected if you click the OK
button in the Wellpad editor. If you want to review and accept the default data then
you should click on the Cancel button.
736
QUE$TORHelp
Wellpad Editor Primary Inputs

The Primary tab contains the highest level technical data of the selected wellpad(s).
Linkages
This frame specifies which production facility the wellpad is linked to. The dropdown
list contains the production facilities which are linked to the wellpad group within the
development. If there is no linked production facility then a third party facility is
assumed.
Equipment
Specifies the equipment that is installed at the wellpad.
l
Test separator: is selected when there are at least 4 production wells at the
wellpad.
Pig launcher: is selected when waxy crude is specified in the field level data.
Multiphase meters
Multiphase metering can be selected when there are production wells at a wellpad.
Multiphase meters are never selected by default.
l
On test manifold: will add a test manifold at the wellpad and a multiphase meter
will be placed on this. The meter will therefore be sized to handle the flow from an
single production well.
On production manifold: will add a multiphase meter to the production manifold.
The meter will therefore be sized to handle the flow from all production wells on
that wellpad.
737
QUE$TORHelp
l
All production wells: will add a multiphase meter onto each production wellhead.
Each meter will therefore be sized to handle the flow from an single production
well.
Power Requirements
This frame specifies the power and emergency power requirements together with the
location of the power generation.
l
Power supply: specifies if the power is generated at the wellpad or by a linked

Power: the power required by the wellpad. This covers control systems and
utilities. The pump power is included for pumped wells.
Emergency power: provided by diesel generators. This covers essential systems
such as control but does not include for pumps.
Note: The power required by pumps at pumped wells will only be included if
pumped wells are specified in associated drilling components.
Well Count
This frame specifies the number of wells by well type. The number of wells is
distributed evenly between the wellpads by type.
738
QUE$TORHelp
Wellpad Editor Flowline Bundle

The Flowline bundle tab allows users to specify the flowlines that link the production
facility to the wellpad.
Bundle
The flowlines to and from each wellpad are bundled into a single track containing all
the flowlines. This frame contains technical data that applies to that bundle.
l
Length: the length of the bundle; the distance of the wellpad from the connected
production facility, or third party facility, and therefore the length of the flowline is
set by the Field Length and Field Width.
Inlet elevation: the elevation at the wellpad. This is set by the elevation specified
in the primary tab of the wellpad group inputs.
Outlet elevation: the elevation at the flowline destination. This is set by the
elevation of the linked production facility or by the elevation of the linked sink for
an existing production facility.
Note: These represent the inlet and outlet of the production lines. For injection
flowlines the elevations are inverted.
l
Power cable: the power cable will be selected when the power supply in the
Primary tab is set to the linked production facility.
Umbilicals: allows for a chemical injection tube, if selected the number of
umbilicals defaults to one per well.
Bundle diameter: the equivalent diameter of the pipeline bundle. This is calculated
from the diameters of the selected flowlines and will affect the pipelay spread
selection.
739
QUE$TORHelp
Flowlines
Specifies the details of the flowlines in the bundle. For each flowline the flowrate and
diameter is shown. The full flowline sizing routine can be accessed using the arrow
button.
l
Flow: the flowrate of the fluid.

Nominal diameter: determined through standard flowline hydraulics. The inlet
pressure is fixed for production lines assuming free flow of the fluid. The outlet
pressure is fixed for injection flowlines by the injection pressure.
Flowline sizing: clicking on the flowline sizing arrow button opens the flowline
sizing form.
This form allows full sizing of the flowline including diameter, corrosion allowance
and wall thickness. For further details of flowline sizing in QUE$TOR see Pipeline
Sizing.
Construction
Specifies the details of the construction and route of the flowline bundle.
l
Construction type: specifies the construction type. The construction types can be
revised using the dropdown list box. The construction options are Buried, Surface
or Elevated. A default is selected dependent on the terrain.
740
QUE$TORHelp
Number of Crossings
For each terrain selected it is also possible to specify the number of crossings that
the pipeline must negotiate while in that terrain. There are seven crossing types:
l
Estuary: over 100m wide (up to say 500m), pipeline is tunnelled under the river so
that shipping is not affected.
Major river: up to 100m wide, support is a bridge spanning the river which could
take >1 pipe.
Minor river: up to 5m wide, support is a simple carrier pipe spanning the river.
Major road: at least three lanes. The support is a bridge spanning the road which
could take >1 pipe.
Minor road: up to two lanes. The support is a bridge spanning the road which could
take >1 pipe.
Railway: up to two lines. The support is a bridge spanning the railway which could
take >1 pipe.
Pipeline: for crossing a single pipeline.
The default number of crossings is set by the regional technical database.

l
Construction duration: number of construction days required to build the flowline

bundle and crossings based on the link length, construction type and the number
and type of crossings and but does not include mob/demob days for the link. A
single flowline construction mob/demob duration is included in the Construction
section of the wellpad group cost sheet covering all flowlines.
741
QUE$TORHelp
Wellpad Editor - Details

The Details tab specifies the calculated weights of equipment by system and is shown
below.It also specifies the foundation area.
Manifolding and Equipment

This frame specifies the weight of the manifolding systems for the specified flowlines
including production, test, injection and lift flowlines.The weight of the test facilities
is given at the bottom of the frame.
Utilities
This frame specifies the weights of the associated utility and safety systems. These
include the flare and vent, open and closed drainage, diesel storage, instrument air
and firefighting systems.
Power
This frame specifies the weights of the power requirements specified in the Primary
tab of the wellpad editor.A weight is given for power generation, power distribution
and emergency power.
742
QUE$TORHelp
Flowlines
Clicking on Flowlines in the wellpad inputs panel opens the flowlines form.The
default selection is based on the wellpad configuration and the systems selected.
Flowline
This frame details the specifics of the flowline construction, including insulation,
coating and insulation.
l
Material: Specifies the construction material of the pipelines.Five materials are

available. Default material selection is dependent on the fluid properties.
l
Carbon steel: API 5L Grade X60 carbon steel (density 7850 kg/m3, allowable
stress 298 MPa, corrosion allowance 3 mm). This is selected for low-corrosion
fluids.
Clad 316 stainless: as per the carbon steel line but with a 3mm internal
cladding of 316L stainless steel. This is an alternative to a solid duplex line
when acid gas conditions are present.
743
QUE$TORHelp
l
Duplex: a solid 22Cr corrosion resistant alloy (density 7800 kg/m3, allowable
stress 327 MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). This is selected when acid gas has
been specified.
kg/m3, allowable stress 402 MPa, corrosion allowance 0 mm). This should be
selected when pipelines are susceptible to pitting corrosion e.g. seawater lines
with high chloride concentrations.
GRP: Glass reinforced polyester is highly corrosion resistant plastic matrix
reinforced by fine fibres of glass with an internal absolute roughness of only
0.01 mm, compared to 0.05 mm for steel pipe. Two types are considered; sand
core un-restrained GRP - for buried applications and glass core self restrained
GRP - for surface or elevated applications. It is never selected by default but
can be considered provided the design pressure does not exceed 32 barg (465
psig).
Thermal insulation U value:allows a choice of the overall heat transfer

coefficient of the insulation. This, combined with the pipeline diameter will
determine the required thickness of polyurethane foam insulation. Insulation is
included by default for sections with Arctic/Tundra as a terrain type.
Construction type: the construction type for the flowlines can be buried,
elevated or surface. If buried and the material for any flowline is carbon steel or
clad 316 stainless then cathodic protection is included by default. This is assumed
to apply to all flowlines but the construction type for individual flowlines can be
adjusted - see Wellpad Group - Wellpad Editor - Flowline bundle.
Routing: the flowline length can be calculated based on either a direct route or
corridor route. This has an effect on the default link length between wellpads and
the downstream production facility. Direct is shorter than corridor.
Coating:this includes an external three layer polypropylene coating in the cost
calculation. The default selection is for coating to be included for all flowlines.
Polypropylene is suitable for wall temperatures up to 100C.
Cathodic protection: included for carbon steel and stainless steel internally clad
carbon steel buried flowlines only. The weight of the sacrificial anodes is
dependent on the diameter and length. It is assumed 1 kg of anodes is required
per square metre of external pipe surface area.
Installation
This frame specifies the details of the installation of the flowlines.
l
Number of spreads: used to schedule the flowline laying.

Mob / demob per spread:the days required to get each spread into the field
and ready for laying.
744
QUE$TORHelp
Control System
Clicking on Control systems in the wellpad group inputs panel opens the control
systems form. Control and communications allows selection of the process control
system and communications options.The choice of the type of control system is
inherently a function of the geography and location of the wellpad group.For example
in an isolated environment, like a desert, a satellite would normally be used.
Three options are available; each option covers main control, emergency shut-down
(ESD), fire & gas and associated interface panels.
l
Distributed:suitable for larger wellpad groups where a main computerised

Conventional:suitable for medium-sized wellpad groups where one centralised
control room is required.
Basic: suitable for small wellpad groups where local control panels are the only
requirement.
745
QUE$TORHelp
Civils
Clicking on Civils in the wellpad group inputs panel opens the Civils form.The civils
sub-component covers the plot area required by the wellpad group.
Total foundations: covers the area of the equipment specified within the wellpad
configuration and the systems selected, with an allowance for access around each
item.
Buildings:covers the required buildings within the wellpad group and is
Total plot area:the total area of the wellpad group.This is used to determine
the cost of grading the site and the associated civil materials cost.An area factor
is applied to the Total foundations to give the equipment plot area.The total plot
plot area.
746
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
based on the procurement strategy and are also dependent on the construction
high acid gas contents are experienced. Equipment costs cover the vendor's cost for
fabrication of the equipment, any procurement of sub-components, sub-vendor's
Manifolding
Covers all the manifolding required at all the wellpad locations. A breakdown per
wellpad is given during the calculation process in the wellpads sub-component.When
the wellpads contain only one well the figure here will be minimal. The manifolding
includes all piping and associated equipment to gather the fluids to and from each
well and collect it together into the flowlines connecting the wellpads to the
production facility. This will include all manifolding for production fluids, gas lift, gas
injection, water injection and test lines.
Multiphase Metering
When multiphase meters are selected, they will be classified into one of three
available sizes and added to the cost sheet.
Freight
Freight is a fixed percentage applied to the equipment cost and establishes the cost of
shipping all the equipment from the manufacturers location to the field.
747
QUE$TORHelp
748
QUE$TORHelp
Materials Costs
Steelwork
Covers all the necessary steelwork to erect and install the equipment specified.This
includes all prefabricated skids, main truss framing, outfitting steel for walkways,
platforms etc.
Piping
Covers the cost of all necessary piping and manually operated valves required to
connect all the equipment together. It includes a range of pipeline sizes and different
materials and includes all pipe rack and pipe supports required.The piping cost is
calculated by applying factors to each of the equipment system weights, summing
these and applying a unit rate dependent on material selection to give a total cost.
Electrical
Covers cost of all necessary electrical cabling required to connect the equipment
together. It includes all junction boxes but excludes transformers and switch gear
which are included in Power distribution. It also includes all cabling racking and ties.
The electrical cost is calculated by applying factors to each of the equipment systems
weights, summing these to give a total weight and applying a unit rate to get the total
cost.
749
QUE$TORHelp
Instruments
Covers the cost of all necessary instrumentation to operate and control the
Others
Covers HVAC, architectural, insulation and painting.The others cost is calculated by
the program by applying factors to each of the equipment systems weights, summing
these and applying a unit rate to give a total cost.
Flowlines
Covers all the flowline materials required to connect the wellpads to the production
facility. This is broken into production, test, gas lift, gas injection, and water injection
lines with each flowline type further broken down into three areas.
l
Linepipe:covers the cost of the pipeline. The unit rate is based on the length.
Fittings:covers the associated fittings and is calculated as a percentage of the
Linepipe cost. An additional percentage is included for corrosion protection, when
selected.
Coating:covers any coating specified for the pipeline.The unit rate is dependent
on the type(s) of coating and is based on the length of the flowline.
Umbilical
Includes the total length of umbilicals required for the specified wellpad
configuration.Umbilicals are run in parallel with flowlines assuming the same
lengths.
Power Cable
Covers the cost of the lengths of power lines required to link the wellpads to the
Crossings
Covers all specified crossings. There is a single cost which is dictated by the type and
number of crossings.
Civils Materials
Covers all the materials required to construct the foundations, buildings and vehicular
access areas. This includes all concrete, reinforcement hardcore, gravel, surfacing,
etc. The unit rate is dependent on the relative areas for foundations, roads and
general civils preparation.
750
QUE$TORHelp
Freight
Covers the cost of transporting the materials from the place of procurement to the
as the wellpad group Location or from out of region.
751
QUE$TORHelp
Prefabrication tab of the wellpad group user interface, and are updated in the cost


site to the field.
752
QUE$TORHelp
Construction Costs
estimate sheet as each sub-component is adjusted.Unit rates for each identified

Site Preparation
Covers the preparation of the site and is a total area based on the area calculated in
the Civils sub-component. The cost includes for all preparation work required prior to
construction, e.g. clearing and levelling of jungle.
Civil Construction
foundation area.General civils are applied to the overall site area.
Flowline Testing
Covers the cost of testing the flowlines and is taken as a fixed percentage of the
flowline construction cost.
Flowline Right of Way

Covers the cost or the right of way assessment and is taken as a fixed percentage of
the flowline construction cost.
753
QUE$TORHelp
754
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the wellpad group.
They include design, project management, certification, insurance and a contingency.

l
facility. It covers through to installation at the location.This includes project
755
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the wellpad group cost and includes insurance for all
centres.
Certification
Contingency
756
QUE$TORHelp
About Onshore Drilling

The drilling component estimates the drilling costs including rig hire, drill crew, well
equipment, consumables, materials, conductors, etc.
For each well a profile is specified and the total measured depth calculated.
Durations are determined from depth versus duration curves for both the drilling and
completion operations and from drilling learning factor curves.The eighth well in a
drilling operation is assumed to be the technical well with a learning factor of 1.
These durations and factors can be changed by editing the Drilling Curves.
Several drilling operations can be specified on a single development allowing well
drilling programmes to be phased more easily. Different classes of rigs can also be
specified.
Exploration and appraisal wells should also be costed in their own drilling component
to allow them to be accurately scheduled.
757
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
On entering the drilling component the input panel is shown in the bottom left of the
screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
changed.
Once all the inputs are adjusted, click Apply to update the cost estimate. To apply all
Inputs
The drilling input panel is shown below.QUE$TOR will choose appropriate values for
every parameter based on field level data.Many inputs are also dependent upon
higher level inputs within the same component.
available sub-components, such as the drilling profiles, click on the relevant arrow
button.Both of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if high level
inputs (e.g. rig class) are changed.
When the high level inputs in the tabs are adjusted, click Apply to update the drilling
sub-components and the cost estimate.
758
QUE$TORHelp
Once you have reviewed the drilling profiles certain values in this form will become
read only.When this occurs a Restore default drilling profiles button will appear
next to the Apply button.
This button allows you to restore the defaults within the drilling profiles.
you made to the drilling profiles will be lost.
759
QUE$TORHelp
Details
The Details tab defines the highest level drilling campaign design specifications and is
shown below.
Rig Class
Due to the difficulty in adequately classifying rig types QUE$TOR simply defines rigs
within categories from A to E. The default depth versus duration curves for each rig
type can be edited allowing rigs with user defined characteristics to be created.The
default rig classification is based upon:
l
A-Class: An international heavy duty top drive rig with the capability to drill
highly deviated HP/HT wells to a measured depth of 9,000 metres (30,000 ft).
B-Class: An international medium duty rig with the capability to drill deviated
wells to a measured depth of 5,000 metres (16,000 ft).
C-Class: An international light duty rig with the capability to drill deviated wells to
a measured depth of 3,000 metres (10,000 ft).
D-Class: A domestic medium duty rig with the capability to drill deviated wells to
E-Class: A basic domestic light duty drilling unit with the capability to drill
substantially vertical wells to a measured depth of 2,000 metres (6,500 ft).
760
QUE$TORHelp
Note: Only A-Class to C-Class rigs are selected by default. If the reservoir
depth is greater than 9,000 metres (30,000 ft)then an A-Class rig is assumed.
Well Type
Specifies the type of wells being drilled by the component. There are four options;
which option is selected is dependent on the field level data.
l
Natural: specifies that the wells require no pumping to extract the well fluids.
This is selected when the pressure within the field is sufficient to allow free flow of
the well fluids from the well to the production facility.
Gas lift: specifies that the wells use gas to provide artificial lift to extract the well
fluids. This should be selected when the pressure within the field is insufficient to
allow free flow of the well fluids from the well to the production facility.
Pumped: specifies that the wells use pumps to provide artificial lift to extract the
well fluids. This should be selected when the pressure within the field is
insufficient to allow free flow of the well fluids from the well to the production
facility.
Note: Gas lift and pumped wells are only available in projects where oil is
the main product.
Exploration: pre-production wells drilled for exploration of the field. This is

never selected by default but can be specified to allow accurate scheduling.
Appraisal: pre-production wells drilled for appraisal of the field. This is never
selected by default but can be specified to allow accurate scheduling.
Note: A separate drilling component needs to be used to define

Exploration wells as they are likely to be drilled many months before the
production wells.
Pumped Wells
This specifies the type of pump being used to provide the artificial lift and is only
active when Pumped is selected as the well type.
l
Beam:surface based beam pumps or nodding donkeys provide the necessary

pumping to extract the well fluids.
Downhole electric:electric pumps located at the bottom of the well provide the
necessary pumping to extract the well fluids.
Downhole hydraulic:hydraulic pumps located at the bottom of the well provide
the necessary pumping to extract the well fluids.
761
QUE$TORHelp
Profile
There are four available Drilling Profiles in QUE$TOR, described below. The profile
dictates the profile by which the wells are drilled and is selected using the dropdown
list.
l
Build and drop: wells are drilled on a build and drop profile, allowing multiple
wells to be drilled from the same wellpad. This profile is never selected as a
default.
Build and hold: wells are drilled on a build and hold profile, allowing multiple
wells to be drilled from the same wellpad. This profile is selected as default when
the number of production, water injection or gas injection wells is greater than
one.
Horizontal at true vertical depth:wells are drilled on horizontally once the
well depth is reached, allowing multiple wells to be drilled from the same wellpad.
This profile is never selected as a default.
Vertical:wells are drilled vertically from individual wellpads. The first well and
all exploration/appraisal wells are drilled assumed to always be vertically drilled.
Well Details
The well details frame allows you to specify the number of production, water
injection and gas injection wells to be included in the drilling component together with
the flowrates from these wells. .
l
Wells:the number of wells for each of the types of well and is defined from the
production profile. The number of wells is distributed evenly between all drilling
components i.e. if the project has multiple drilling components, adding wells to
one drilling component will reduce the number of wells in the other components if
unlocked.
Flowrate:the total flowrate from/to each well category in the drilling component
and is used to select the size of tubing, wellheads and Xmas trees required. The
flowrate is linked to the number of wells and changing the number of wells will
change unlocked flowrates proportionally.If the project has multiple drilling
components, adding wells to one drilling component will reduce the number of
wells in other components if unlocked.See well and flow distribution for more
details.
.
l
762
Flowrates are not entered for exploration / appraisal wells as it is assumed

they are not completed. However the average flow per well multiplied by a
peak well design factor is used to determine the exploration or appraisal well
QUE$TORHelp
wellhead unit rate. The average flow is based on the peak daily average
flowrate for the primary fluid in the project Design flowrates form and the
production well count in the Number of development wells form.
Note: In an oil project the production flowrate represents the flowrate of the
produced oil only.
Drilling Details
The drilling details frame specifies the reservoir details together with some
prerequisite limits of the drilling.
l
Reservoir depth: the vertical distance to the reservoir from the surface and is
set by the field reservoir depth. If several different reservoir depths are to be
exploited in the same campaign you can do one of the following:
- Click on View/edit drilling profiles and specify the depth of each well
individually through the Drilling Profiles form.
- Use a different drilling component for each reservoir, remembering to adjust the
mob / demob durations and learning factors to prevent double dipping.
Reservoir pressure: the pressure of the reservoir is set by the field level
reservoir pressure.
Longest stepout: the calculated maximum horizontal displacement from the
drilling centre. This assumes a rectangular reservoir with dimensions as entered
in the field level details and the number of drilling centres as defined by the
concept selector. The default number of drilling centres is calculated so that the
longest stepout does not exceed the maximum well stepout entered in the field
level details.
The first well is assumed to be vertical and the remaining wells are assumed to be
laid out in concentric rings centred on the drill rig.The number of concentric rings
is dependent on the total number of wells per drilling operation. For 2 to 7 wells
there is a single ring, for up to 19 wells there are two rings, for up to 37 wells
there are three rings, for up to 61 wells there are four rings, etc.The horizontal
stepout of the outer ring is set to the Longest stepout.This takes into account the
radius of the well drainage area per well.
Rate of build: the amount by which the deviation angle below the well kick-off
point can change in 30 m/100 ft. This applies to all deviated wells and defines the
radius of bends used in the drilling profiles.
Acid gas: identifies whether acid gas is to be taken into consideration in the
drilling cost calculations. If checked higher grade materials for tubing, Xmas
trees, wellheads and completions are used. This is selected if the CO content of
2
the wellstream fluid is above 3 mole %.
Every time Apply is clicked the drilling profiles are recalculated.
763
QUE$TORHelp
764
QUE$TORHelp
Winterisation
The Winterisation tab allows users to specify the level of winterisation of the drilling
rig and is shown below.If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain for the associated
wellpad group then the box will be checked, at all other times it is unchecked.
Winterisation Cost
A factor applied to the rig day rate to allow for the extra cost of the winterised drilling
rig.This is set to 1.25 when selected.
765
QUE$TORHelp
Drilling Profiles
Clicking on View/edit drilling profiles opens the onshore drilling profiles form
shown below.The form allows the type, bottom hole location (as defined by the TVD,
horizontal shift and horizontal section length), profile type, completion and drilling
duration of each well to be specified individually.
A well bottom hole location configuration is generated by QUE$TOR for each drilling
component.This assumes that the first well is drilled vertically and subsequent wells
are drilled radially from the centre with increasing horizontal offsets.Intermediate
rings are laid out such that the horizontal shift between successive rings is the same.
The profile of each well and the bottom hole location can be readily modified.
If there are any gas injection wells these are assumed to have the minimum well
stepout as they are likely to be in the gas cap. The remaining production and water
injection wells are laid out assuming a spot pattern well flood arrangement.
To add a well, select the well immediately above where you want to add the new well
(the whole row for the selected well is highlighted) and then click the Add well
button.By default a production well will be added.
To remove a well, click on the well number (the whole row for the selected well is
highlighted) and then click the Remove well button.You will be asked to confirm
you wish to remove the selected well.
Any changes made to a well can be replicated in all the wells or a selection of wells
using the Apply changes to single or multiple wells frame.Selecting Single applies
the change to the selected well only, selecting All applies the change to all wells,
selecting Specified wells applies the changes to the wells specified.To specify the
wells insert the numbers of the wells separated by commas, e.g. 1, 2, 5, 11, for a
range specify the start and end well e.g. 3-15.
Note: Only new changes will be replicated when multiple wells are changed.
766
QUE$TORHelp
Well Type
The well type of any well can be changed by using the dropdown box.There are six
options here; Production, Water inj., Gas inj., Prod. host, Prod. Multi..and
Disposal.The first three and Disposal options are specified by within the well details
on the Details tab.The Prod. host and Prod. multi. options allow multilateral wells to
be specified.
l
Prod. host:specifies that the well will be used to host multilateral production
wells.
Prod. multi.:the well is a multilateral production well drilled from the host. The
kick off, horizontal shift, profile type, horizontal section and maximum deviation
are uneditable as they are set by the host well.
In the example shown above, well 4 was specified as the host well, automatically
selecting the next production well, well 5, as a multilateral.When you change a wells
type to host one multilateral is automatically included. The number of multilaterals
added per host well can be adjusted using the dropdown list for Multilaterals per
production host, with four being the maximum.
Note: The multilaterals are designated as the next n number of production wells
after the host well.
If the Rig type selected in the primary Input form is either for an appraisal or and
exploration well then in the Drilling profiles form the well type will be shown as either
Appraisal or Exploration. In this case the well type is not editable.
767
QUE$TORHelp
TVD
The true vertical depth of the well bottom hole location the surface. For all wells this
is set to the specified reservoir depth.
Kick Off
The distance below the surface at which deviated wells kick-off from the vertical.
Horizontal Shift
The horizontal distance (offset) between the drilling centre and the bottom hole
location excluding any horizontal portion.
Profile Type
Dictates the profile by which the well is drilled and is selected using the dropdown
list. There are four available Drilling Profiles; Build and hold (BH), Build and drop
(BD), Horizontal at TVD and Vertical.
Horizontal Section
The length drilled horizontally through the reservoir. This can only be included for the
Horizontal at TVD profile.
To modify the drilling profile of any well, type in a new TVD, kick off, horizontal shift
or horizontal section and the measured depth and maximum deviation are
automatically recalculated.
There are combinations of profile parameters that are not compatible. Those
locations which are accessible for each profile type and those which are not are
shown below.
Note: Situations where the bottom hole location is not achievable given the
specified well profile parameters typically result in a calculated measured depth
which is larger than expected.
768
QUE$TORHelp
Vertical well (bottom hole locations)
Build and hold well (bottom hole locations)
769
QUE$TORHelp
Build and drop well (bottom hole locations)
Horizontal at TVD well (bottom hole locations)
Measured Depth
The measured depth is calculated automatically and is dependent on the specified
drilling profile options.Normally the profile should be adjusted in preference to the
770
QUE$TORHelp
numbers contained here. For a multilateral well the measured depth is the total
length of the multilateral section measured from the host well.
The sum of these, the total measured depth for all wells is displayed but cannot be
edited.
Maximum Deviation
The maximum deviation is the angle from the vertical (angle ) you need to achieve
to reach the specified horizontal displacement given the true vertical depth, kick-off
point, profile and rate of build (degrees/30 m) of a well. It is given for information
only and cannot be overwritten.
Drilling Rig
The type of rig used to drill the well; due to the difficulty in adequately classifying rig
types QUE$TOR simply defines rigs within categories from A to E.The type selected is
set by the rig class selected on the Details tab.
l
A-Class: An international heavy duty top drive rig with the capability to drill
B-Class:An international medium duty rig with the capability to drill deviated
C-Class: An international light duty rig with the capability to drill deviated wells to
D-Class:A domestic medium duty rig with the capability to drill deviated wells to
E-Class: A basic domestic light duty drilling unit with the capability to drill
Note:Only A-Class to C-Class rigs are selected by default. If the reservoir

depth is greater than 9,000 metres (30,000 ft) then an A-Class rig is assumed.
Completion Rig
Similarly to the drilling rig QUE$TOR simply defines rigs within categories from A to
E, see above.The type selected is set by the rig class selected on the Details tab.
Completion Type
A default completion type of cased hole is assumed for all wells.The completion type
selected affects both the equipment cost and the installation duration. QUE$TOR
includes data for the following types of completion:
771
QUE$TORHelp
l
Open hole: the casing and tubing finish at the top of the pay zone.
Cased hole: the tubing extends into the pay zone and is perforated.
Slotted: the tubing ends at the top of the pay zone but a section of very closely
woven mesh extends into the pay zone. This method is often applied in the case of
horizontal wells to prevent the holes from collapsing.
Gravel pack: the gap between the drilled section and the production tubing in the
pay zone is filled with fine, very uniformly sized sand (not gravel). Quite often the
tubing section is a 'slotted liner'.
Frac pack:similar to a gravel pack but a sand containing a 'propant' is pumped
into the fractured fissures to prevent them collapsing (prop them open).
Drilling Durations
The time for which the rigs are used for drilling and completion. These are
automatically calculated for each well based on time versus depth curves in the
technical database.These curves can be edited by clicking on View/edit drilling
curves in the drilling inputs.
772
QUE$TORHelp
Drilling Curves
Clicking on View/edit drilling curves opens the drilling curves form. These time
vs.depth curves are extracted from the relevant technical database and are used to
calculate drilling durations.
A different curve is used for each region, rig type, well type (deviated or nondeviated) and drill stage. The data that you want to edit can be selected using the
options at the top of the form.
Note: Changing the selections at the top of the form will not change the rig
selection within the drilling component.
Rig class
The type of rig used to drill the well, due to the difficulty in adequately classifying rig
types QUE$TOR simply defines rigs within categories from A to E.For a full definition
see Details.
Profile
The profile by which the wells are drilled. There are four available Drilling Profiles;
Deviated (Build and hold and Build and drop), Horizontal (HTVD) and Vertical.
773
QUE$TORHelp
Stage
The drilling stage duration includes for all drilling activities for the complete well,
including weather downtime, replacing drill bits, etc.
l
Completion: show the depth dependent durations during the completion phase
and are used to calculate the completion durations. Cased holes are assumed but
the incremental time, dependent on the completion type, is excluded.
Drilling: show the depth dependent durations during the drilling phase and are
used to calculate the drilling duration of production and injection wells.
Exploration / Appraisal: show the depth dependent durations for exploration or
appraisal wells and are used to calculate the drilling duration of exploration and
appraisal wells.
Learning: show the learning factors dependent on the number of wells
drilled.The factor is a multiplier applied to the drilling duration to take account of
the improvement in drill rate typically achieved as more wells are drilled in
reservoir.The eighth well in a drilling operation is assumed to be the technical
well with a learning factor of 1. The learning curve is illustrated below.
The table under each chart can be edited and will impact the number of days for
which the rig is required, when relevant.
774
QUE$TORHelp
Note: Changes to the data will apply only to the selected drilling component. To
change the data for all drilling components within a project, or across multiple
projects, it may be easier to adjust the values within the database. This can be done
using the database editor.
775
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
The equipment quantities are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each subcomponent is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified equipment item are retrieved
based on the procurement strategy and are also dependent on material with stainless
steel used in areas where high acid gas contents are experienced.Equipment costs
cover the vendor's cost for fabrication of the equipment, any procurement of subcomponents and sub-vendor's submission to approval authorities and testing at the
vendor's works. Direct procurement costs are included in the design cost centre.
When determining the equipment size the peak daily throughput is multiplied by a
factor of 1.3 to account for well decline over the year.High pressure wells are rated
above 345 bar (5000 psi). Low pressure are rated at 345 bar (5000 psi) and below.
Xmas trees
The cost of Xmas trees can is allocated to drilling for dry trees. For wet trees (subsea
wells) the cost is allocated to the subsea component. The configuration of the Xmas
trees is typically subsurface safety valve, lower master valve, upper master valve,
choke valve, wing valve and (if subsea) tree cap. The design rating of the tree can be
selected in the inputs.
Wellheads
The wellhead sits below the Xmas tree and typically includes a casing hanger, casing
head spool, tubing hanger, tubing spool and seals.
Completions
Completion equipment costs vary dependent on the type of completion selected.
776
QUE$TORHelp
A wellhead is required for each Exploration or Appraisal well. This is only included if
the rig type is for an Exploration or Appraisal well.
The wellhead sits below the Xmas tree (supplied by the drilling contractor) and
typically includes a casing hanger, casing head spool, tubing hanger, tubing spool and
seals.
Note: The cost of equipment items for multilateral wells is separate to allow for
the reduced total Xmas tree and wellhead count and the increased unit flowrate
through these items.
Pumps
Covers the cost of the pumps that provide artificial lift, when specified and is broken
down into beam pumps and downhole pumps. The power requirement and cost of the
pump are based on the flowrate, reservoir depth and pump type.
Freight
from the same region as the wellpad location or from out of region.
777
QUE$TORHelp
Material Costs
The material quantities are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each subcomponent is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified material item are retrieved
from the procurement strategy.
The drilling material costs are depth related. The length of each casing/tubing size
shown on the cost sheet is the total based on the individual well drilled depth and the
typical Casing Programme.
The exception to this is multilaterals where the length of 7 liner and production
tubing is set equal to length of the multilateral section.
Cement
Covers the cost of the casing cement, the cost is averaged over the total drill depth.
Mud
Covers the cost of the drilling mud required to correct the pressure during drilling.
The cost is based on the use of a typical mud system with a mixture of seawater
polymer, KCl polymer and pseudo oil-based muds and is averaged over the total drill
depth.
Brine
Covers the cost of the brine used to mix the drilling mud.The cost is based on the use
of a mixture of 1.5 and 1.8 SG brines and is averaged over the total drill depth.
778
QUE$TORHelp
Bits
Covers the cost of the drill bits used. The cost assumes that each bit can be used for
two runs.
Freight
Freight is a fixed percentage applied to the materials costs to give a total cost.It is
the cost of transportation of the bulk materials from the manufacturers yard to the
field location.
779
QUE$TORHelp
Construction Costs
The construction costs cover the costs of drilling the wells and are updated in the cost
Each rig class has its own rental and operating costs and are based on the required
number of days in the field.
Rig Hire
Rig hire is the number of days the drilling rig is in the field.This is the sum of the
drilling and completion days. It does not account for in-field rig down/relocation/rig
up days between wellpads. Typically this will add between 3 and 10 days per move
depending on the rig type and terrain.
The unit rate is the bare hire rig cost and a function of rig type.
Drill Crew
the drill crew (tool pusher, tyre pusher, drillers and assistant drillers and
roughnecks) and the engineering/maintenance crew (engineers, mechanics, welders
and oilers).The number given is for the number of days the drilling rig is in the field
and covers both crew shifts.
Consumables
The consumables include diesel, water and other utilities required to support the
drilling operation. Consumables are assumed not to be required during the period
when the rig is moving between wellpads.
780
QUE$TORHelp
Drill Camps
Drill camp costs include for the living and messing facilities for the drill crew plus
offices and drilling materials storage. The number given is for the number of days the
drilling rig is in the field.
Transportation
Transportation costs include for transporting the drilling consumables from a supply
base to the field and are assumed not to be required during the period when the rig is
moving between wellpads.
In-field Rig Down / Relocation / Rig up

If there is more than one drilling centre/rig per rig class there will be a requirement
to rig down, relocate and rig up between drilling centres. Onshore Drilling is
calculated before the Wellpad Group therefore the number of rig movements is not
known so QUE$TORalways default to zero movements.
If a single class of rig is being used per drilling operation then there will be 'n-1' rig
movements when there are 'n' drilling centres. If multiple rig classes are used then
the number of rig movements/class depends on the number of wellpads are being
drilled by a given class of rig.
You can enter the number of days/rig movement using the following as a guideline:
l
l
l
l
l
Class
Class
Class
Class
Class
A rig: 11 days
B rig: 7 days
C rig: 3 days
D rig: 11 days
E rig: 7 days
The above numbers are indicative for grassland or desert terrains and will vary by
region. For other terrain types the rig movement days will be approximately 7-10
days longer.
The day rate includes for rig hire, drill crew and drill camp but excludes consumables
and transportation.
Mob / Demob
The number of days that it takes the drilling rig to get to and from the field
location.This can include days to transport the rig from abroad and transport within
country of operations.
Drilling Services
Drilling services include the crew cost plus hire of equipment to perform the specific
operation on a per well basis.Only exploration/appraisal wells are assumed to be
logged and tested by default.All wells require the services of the cementing crew.
781
QUE$TORHelp
Other Costs
Additional drilling construction costs can optionally be added.
782
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the drilling.They

l
facility.It covers through to installation at the location.This includes project
and documentation during the detailed design phase.
It incorporates all wages, salaries and other benefits paid to personnel, payroll
burdens, insurance, general overheads (office facilities, utility services,
depreciation of facilities and equipment and administration), project expenses and
equipment.It includes vendor data delivery of items to the yard, insurance up to
delivery, guarantees and import duties.
The design duration is based on the quantity and total measured depth of all wells,
with additional hours for artificially lifted wells and deviated wells.
783
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the drilling cost and includes insurance for all project
components during transportation, construction, installation and testing and
commissioning.Personnel liability insurance is covered in the respective cost
centres.
Certification
Contingency
estimate to a P50 level.For a fuller explanation see Contingency Definitions.
784
QUE$TORHelp
About Infrastructure
The infrastructure component is included to allow the user to define fully the cost of
any new development.The standard of each item will vary depending on the terrain
or geographical region.
785
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
On entering the infrastructure component the input panel is shown in the bottom left
of the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
selecting Locked. To unlock a value, right click on it and deselect Locked. You can
changed.
Inputs
The infrastructure input panel is shown below.QUE$TOR will choose appropriate
values for every parameter based on other components and field level data.Many
available facilities, such as oil processing, in more detail click on the relevant arrow
button. Each facility can be considered as a sub-component within infrastructure. All
of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if high level inputs (e.g.
distance to terminal facility) are changed.In a similar fashion if you adjust
construction camp then, as long as it is unlocked, operations camp will be
recalculated based on the new requirements.
infrastructure sub-components and the cost estimate.
786
QUE$TORHelp
Facilities
OK will save any changes and exit, this will update all unlocked dependent inputs and
costs.Clicking Cancel will exit without saving. Clicking Recalc, where available, will
recalculate the sub-component without updating any other sub-component or the cost
estimate; these will only be updated when OK is clicked.
Cost Estimate
component.The production facility inputs are used to calculate the quantities shown
on the cost estimate. The unit rates are determined by the procurement strategy.The
costs are generally based on a simple weight x unit rate = cost relationship. It is
possible to go to any blue number in the cost sheet and make any appropriate
changes to the calculated weights or the unit rates.
Modifications to the material and construction weights will be immediately reflected
in the design, insurance and contingency costs if these are unlocked.
787
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The primary inputs allow users to choose the highest level infrastructure design
specifications.
Location
Several geographical factors can affect the cost of the infrastructure component. The
two taken into account are:
l
Terrain:the default is the same as selected when defining the Field level data.
The terrain at the location of the production facility can be revised using the
dropdown list box.Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert,
Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
Field in existing oil or gas producing area: this affects the facilities selected,
e.g. an airstrip is assumed to exist if the box is checked
Production facility access good:this affects the transport links that will be
selected to link the production facility to the existing transport network
Terminal facility access good:this affects the transport links that will be
selected to link the terminal facility to the existing transport network
Distances to Major Populations

These values give the distances from the facilities in the field to the nearest major
population centre. The default lengths of power and transport links are determined
from these lengths along with the necessity of building and camps. The distances are
788
QUE$TORHelp
selected from the technical database with allowances for distances on the field
development schematic.
l
Production facility: is the distance from the production facility to the nearest
major population centre
Terminal facility: is the distance from the terminal facility to the nearest major
population centre
789
QUE$TORHelp
Road
Clicking on Road in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the road form. The road
sub-component covers the cost for all the road links across different terrain types
within the field and those providing access to the field.The road sub-component is
broken down into the links between the components and provides the option to select
a different road type and terrain for each link. It provides for a single lane road of a
construction type appropriate to the region.
The road sub-component can be turned off using the check box at the top of the form.
This blanks out all the road link lengths and the road terrains effectively setting all
costs for the sub-component to zero.
Road Links
l
Production facilities to road network: covers the roads required to link the
main production facility to the existing road network
Terminal facilities to road network: covers the roads required to link the
terminal facility to the existing road network
Production facilities to terminal facilities:covers the roads required to link
the main production facility to the terminal facility
Production facilities to wellpads: covers the roads required to link the main
production facility to the wellpads
Regasification facilities to road network: covers the roads required to link
the regasification facility to the existing road network
Other roads 1: covers other road links that are required. The label can be edited
to describe the new road link.
790
QUE$TORHelp
l
Note: The Other road links can be useful if some of the road links between say
the production or terminal facilities and the existing road network are over multiple
terrain types.
l
Total road length: is the sum of the above lengths and is provided for
information only and can't be edited.
Road Type
The default road type varies by region. The options available from the dropdown list
are:
l
Dirt
Gravel
Concrete
Asphalt
The unit rate for each road type varies dependent on the terrain over which the road
is constructed.
Terrain
The default terrain is the same as selected in the Location frame when defining the
infrastructure inputs. The terrain for each road link can be revised using the
dropdown list box. Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland,
Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
791
QUE$TORHelp
Rail
Clicking on Rail in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the rail form.The rail subcomponent covers all the rail links within the field and is only included if rail export
has been specified for any of the product export options in a terminal facility. It
provides the option to select a different terrain for each rail link.It assumes one
single track railway with occasional passing places and includes for railway, sleepers,
construction costs and civil work.The rail sub-component can be turned off using the
check box at the top of the form. This blanks out all the rail link lengths and the rail
terrains effectively setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Note: The rail loading facility cost is included in the terminal facility
component.
Terminal facilities to rail network:covers length of rail required from the

terminal to the existing rail network.
Regasification facilities rail network:covers length of rail required from the
regasification terminal to the existing rail network.
Other rail 1: covers other rail links that are required. The label can be edited to
describe the new rail link.
Note: The Other rail links can be useful if some of the rail links between the
terminal facilities and the existing rail network are over multiple terrain types.
792
QUE$TORHelp
l
Total rail length: is the sum of the above lengths. It is provided for information
only and can't be edited.
Terrain
The default terrain is the same as selected in the Location frame when defining the
infrastructure inputs. The terrain for each rail link can be revised using the dropdown
list box. Terrain options available are; Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland, Jungle,
Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
793
QUE$TORHelp
Construction Camp
Clicking on Construction camp in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
construction camp form. The construction camp sub-component covers the camps
required for construction workers at the field location including accommodation
(portacabins), entertainment facilities, messing and external communications.It is
broken down into three components; wellpads, production facilities, terminal
facilities and regasification facilities. The sub-component can be turned off using the
check box at the top of the form, setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Construction manhours:the number of construction man-hours required for

each component.This is taken from the component and labour rates in the
technical database.
Nominal duration:the construction duration of the component and is taken from
the technical database and based on the man-hours.
Number of men:the total number of men required for the construction work. It
is based on 160 hours being worked per man per month.
Others:for any further men required for construction.
Total: the sum of the above number of men.
794
QUE$TORHelp
Operations Camp
Clicking on Operations camp in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the operations
camp form. The operations camp sub-component covers a field location camp to
house the operators and management personnel required under normal production
and includes provision for accommodation, entertainment and offices.The operations
camp sub-component can be turned off using the check box at the top of the form,
setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Note: The size of the operations camp may need to be reviewed once the
personnel requirements have been calculated in OPEX.
Number of men: is the required number of operating personnel on the field at

any time. It is determined from the size of the facilities in each component
795
QUE$TORHelp
Administration Offices
Clicking on Administration offices in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
company administration offices form.The administration offices sub-component
covers the building of offices and facilities required by permanent company
personnel. The administration offices sub-component can be turned off using the
check box at the top of the form, setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Number of administration personnel:the required number of administration

personnel on the field at any time. It is determined from the size of the facilities in
each component.
796
QUE$TORHelp
Permanent Housing
Clicking on Permanent housing in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the
permanent housing form. The permanent housing sub-component covers the building
of permanent housing for company personnel required at the field location.The
permanent housing sub-component can be turned off using the check box at the top of
the form, setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Number of administration personnel: is the required number of

administration personnel on the field at any time. It is determined from the size of
the facilities in each component.
Number of projects personnel: is the required number of projects personnel
on the field at any time.It is determined from the size of the facilities in each
component.
Total: the sum of the above number of personnel.
797
QUE$TORHelp
Medical / Hospital Facilities

Clicking on Medical / hospital in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the medical /
hospital facilities form.The medical / hospital sub-component covers the medical
facilities at the field location and includes treatment facilities, beds for short-term
stays and emergency surgical facilities.The medical / hospital sub-component can be
turned off using the check box at the top of the form, setting all costs for the subcomponent to zero.
Number of beds: the required number of beds within the medical facilities. It is
determined from the total operations personnel count.
798
QUE$TORHelp
Schools, Places of Worship, Community Buildings

Clicking on Schools / worship in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the schools,
places of worship, community buildingsform.The schools, places of worship,
community buildings sub-component covers cost of schools and places of worship for
the operations personnel and their families.This sub-component is required if
permanent housing has been supplied. The schools, places of worship, community
buildings sub-component can be turned off using the check box at the top of the form,
setting all costs for the sub-component to zero.
Number of operations personnel:the required number of operating personnel

on the field at any time. It is determined from the size of the facilities in each
component.
799
QUE$TORHelp
Power Transmission
Clicking on Power transmission in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the power
transmission form. The power transmission sub-component covers length of power
transmission lines from the grid, and is only selected when generation only is
selected in a terminal or production facility.The power transmission sub-component
covers steel pylons with cabling or small timber poles and cabling. The subcomponent can be turned off using the check box at the top of the form, setting all
costs for the sub-component to zero.
Lines to production facilities:covers the lines from the grid to the production
facilities within the field. The length is determined by the Primary Inputs.
Lines to terminal facilities:covers the lines from the grid to the terminal
facilities within the field.The length is determined by the Primary Inputs.
Lines to regasification facilities:covers the lines from the grid to the
regasification facilities within the field. The length is determined by the Primary
Inputs.
Total power lines length: the sum of the above lengths
800
QUE$TORHelp
Airstrip
Clicking on Airstrip in the infrastructure inputs panel opens the airstrip form.The
airstrip sub-component covers the one-off cost for building an airstrip including
necessary control stations, radio beacons and lighting.It is only selected when the
field is not in an existing oil or gas producing area.The sub-component can be turned
off using the check box at the top of the form, setting all costs for the sub-component
to zero.
Number of airstrips: allows the number of separate airstrips to be set. It is

always set to one by default.
801
QUE$TORHelp
Material and Construction Costs

The material and construction weights are updated in the cost estimate sheet as each
sub-component is adjusted. Unit rates for each identified material item are retrieved
from the procurement strategy.The weights are updated in the cost estimate sheet
as each sub-component is adjusted. Unit rates are retrieved based on the
procurement strategy and are also dependent on the construction material.
The material and construction costs are broken down into the sub-component costs.
Road Construction
Is an all-up cost for building the roads required. Generally it provides for a single
lane road of a construction type appropriate to the region.The unit cost includes for
materials and construction and varies by construction type, terrain and region.
802
QUE$TORHelp
Rail Construction
This item is only included if rail export has been specified for any of the export
options in a terminal facility.The unit cost includes all materials: railway, sleepers,
and the construction costs of the civils work required to build the railway. It assumes
one single track railway with occasional passing places.
Note: The rail loading facility cost is included in the Terminals component.
Construction Camp
This item includes for building a construction camp at the field location.It is
determined by a cost per man appropriate to the region and environmental conditions
and includes accommodation (portacabins), entertainment facilities, messing and
external communications.
Operations Camp
This is a field location camp to house the operators required under normal
production.The item is a cost per man and includes provision for accommodation,
entertainment and offices.
Note: The size of the operations camp may need to be reviewed once the
personnel requirements have been calculated in OPEX.
Administration Buildings
This is a total cost for building offices and facilities required by permanent company
personnel. The cost is calculated on a cost per man basis.
Permanent Housing
This is a total cost for building permanent housing for expatriate company personnel
required at the field location. The cost is calculated on a cost per man basis.
Medical Facilities
This is a total cost to provide medical facilities at the field locations. The facility is
sized according to the total operations personnel count and includes treatment
facilities, beds for short-term stays and emergency surgical facilities.
Schools, Places of Worship

This will be required if permanent housing has been supplied.It includes the cost of
providing a school and places of worship for the operations crew and their families.
803
QUE$TORHelp
Power Transmission
If power is to be supplied from the grid then a length of power transmission line is
required. Dependent on the geographical terrain or region, the facility will be steel
pylons with cabling or small timber poles and cabling.
Airstrips
This item is a one-off cost for building the airstrip.In the jungle it will include for
clearing a jungle area and then rolling and laying a spray tarred airstrip. In the desert
it includes for levelling and then laying a spray tarred airstrip. In rolling plain land it
includes for clearing a suitable flat area. All costs include necessary control stations,
radio beacons and lighting.
Community Projects/Others
These are unidentified costs or projects which have not been specified but are
necessary to develop the prospect.
804
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the
infrastructure.They include design, project management, certification, insurance and
a contingency.

l
805
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the infrastructure cost and includes insurance for all
centres.
Certification
Contingency
806
QUE$TORHelp
About User Defined Components

The user defined component is a blank cost estimate sheet where the user can enter
all quantities and unit rates for items within each cost centre.This facility allows
components not covered by any other component to be included as part of the overall
cost estimate.User defined components are automatically included in the cost
summary and CAPEX schedule, but have no operating costs automatically associated
with them.
You can build up a library of user defined components which can be used across all
projects, e.g. further process facilities.
807
QUE$TORHelp
Cost Estimate
On entering the user defined component, a blank cost estimate will be displayed with
the same format the other onshore component cost estimates. A section is provided
for each of the seven onshore cost centres; Equipment, Materials, Prefabrication,
Construction, Design & Project management, Insurance and Certification and
Contingency. An example of the equipment section of this sheet is shown below.This
sheet allows you to enter data into all cells on the sheet except in the total costs
column.By entering quantities and unit rates the total cost for each item, the cost
centre and the total component cost are automatically calculated.
Once user defined components have been created, they can be saved in a
library.This makes them available to any other projects run.The panel in the bottom
left of the screen, shown below, has a dropdown list which enables previously saved
user defined components to be selected.
To use a previously saved user defined component, select the desired component
from the dropdown list and click Apply.
Note:QUE$TOR will not check that the currency of any imported user defined
components matches the project currency. You must ensure the project currency and
the user defined component currency match.
If you wish to save a new user defined component to the library, click on Add, once
the cost estimate is completed. The component will be saved under its defined name.
To delete saved user defined components from the library, select the desired
component from the dropdown list and click Delete.
You can build up a library of user defined components which can be used across all
projects.This is very useful for components which are unusual and not included
within QUE$TOR such as a mercury recovery package or mercaptans removal
package. In-house data may be used to generate these items, allowing any
development to be incorporated into the program.
808
QUE$TORHelp
809
QUE$TORHelp

are four possible tabs: Onshore, Offshore, LNG regas onshore plus a Summary
tab.Which sections are produced is dependent on the development types in use in
QUE$TOR.If it is an onshore only development then only the onshore sheet will be
displayed. If both onshore and offshore developments are present then an offshore,
an onshore and a summary tab will be displayed.

l
Operating personnel: the permanent manning levels required

maintenance, planned and unplanned repair and replacement
the field, supply boats and standby boats
Well maintenance: wirelining and workover for each type of well
Insurance: insurance of the facilities from the start of production
Indirect costs:these include;

l
810

QUE$TORHelp
l
Tariff costs:includes both tariffs paid by the operator for transportation or

2
values in OPEX.
Note:Once OPEX values are unlocked, either individually or using the Unlock
Working with OPEX

Note:If components are deleted from the Field Development Schematic then
the Cost summary sheet.The Cancel button is only active at the cost summary level.
QUE$TOR default input values.Changes to any OPEX input values will be retained
811
QUE$TORHelp
Note:Existing OPEX analysis "changes" to input values in projects saved in

Locking/Unlocking
OPEX input values are automatically locked if the default values are overwritten. If
option.
in the menu bar.
the main menu bar. OPEX locked values are shown in the lower part of the Locked
812
QUE$TORHelp

cell to the range of cells or Fill left to apply the value in the rightmost cell to
the range of cells.
813
QUE$TORHelp
Operating Personnel
This covers the permanent manning levels required by the developments. In onshore
developments wellpad, production facility, terminal facility and pipeline manning
requirements are specified. These numbers are shown in the Operating personnel
procurement strategy.The wellpad groups and production facilities operating
personnel sheet is shown below.
The permanent manning levels on each facility are passed from the production
facility components. These numbers are shown in the Operating personnel window
along with the Shift rotation pattern and annual Cost per man taken from the
procurement strategy. The drilling crew and associated support staff are excluded
from these numbers as their costs are included within the drilling day rate used in the
drilling components.
The operating personnel cost is based on the number of permanent crew onsite with
allowance for a replacement crew or crews on leave according to the rotation
pattern.The Days onsite 2 and Days offsite 2 inputs allow you to specify more than
one shift pattern.The Cost per man covers salaries, expenses, payroll burden, etc
but excludes transport to and from the platform.
814
QUE$TORHelp

Inspection and maintenance window.
costs are assigned to one of three areas: spares, inspection and repair.The basis of
Information is displayed for each component by type, i.e. Wellpad groups, Production
facilities, Terminal facilities and Pipelines.
Inspection is based on contract labour or services to complete periodic inspection and
includes for equipment vendor representatives and specialist inspection staff in
addition to the permanent maintenance crew. For pipelines inspection specialist
teams and equipment are hired.
By default, pipeline operating costs include for scheduled intelligent pigging
operations and pipeline repair. The repair interval varies by pipeline material
selection and region and is displayed for each individual pipeline. Typically carbon
steel pipelines have the shortest interval between repairs; stainless steel clad carbon
steel, duplex and CRA pipelines longer intervals and GRP pipelines even longer
intervals between scheduled repairs.Intelligent pigging cost includes the hire of the
pig, specialist operators and analysis of the results.
The initial year and interval between the pipeline inspection and repair operations can
be both adjusted. Costs are displayed for each individual pipeline.
815
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on Logistics and consumables in the OPEX summary opens the Logistics
and consumables summary window.
Clicking on Consumables costs in the OPEX Consumables, logistics & vehicles

window opens the Consumables window.
Fuel Gas
The electrical power load and gas turbine driver duties for all facilities are brought
forward from the component estimates. Power loads are calculated assuming 70% of
the duty is production flow related with a fixed 'base load' equal to 30% of the load in
the plateau production year.The gross power load is calculated using typical
efficiencies for power generation sets and gas turbine drivers and the number of
onstream days. The expected net fuel gas consumption is then calculated as the
product of the power load, calorific value and dividing by the design/swing factor.
Where all produced gas is flared or re-injected into the reservoir it is assumed the
gas has no value.
Diesel
generators, cranes, fire pump testing, etc.
816
QUE$TORHelp
Chemicals
The cost of chemicals consumed in the field is split into three operations: production
chemicals with consumption based on the oil flowrate for oil projects and the gas flow
rate for gas projects, water injection chemicals, with consumption, based on the
water injection rate, and well chemicals with consumption based on the number of
wells.Consumption rates are taken from the operating expenditure technical
database.
The cost of diesel and the various injection chemicals are taken from the OPEX cost
database.
Clicking on Logistics costs in the OPEX Consumables, logistics & vehicles window
opens the Logistics window.
Transportation
The personnel transportation costs for each grade are dependent on the Distance
travelled from their home, the Frequency with which each trip is made, the Method of
transport and the Number of Men. The first three values are picked up from the
regional technical database. The number of men is picked up from the Operating
Personnel sheet. To revise the method of transportation click on the dropdown arrow
against Method and select either Road, Rail or Air.
The cost to transport consumables to the field is dependent on the Transportation (%
of consumable cost) and the Cost of Consumables. The first value is picked up from
the regional technical database and varies according to the method of transportation
selected for other labour. The cost of consumables (excluding fuel gas and power
from the grid) is picked up from the Consumables sheet.
Messing
Messing costs (cost of providing food and cleaning) are dependent on the Cost per
man day and the Total Men at Site.The first value is picked up from the regional
technical database and the second from the Operating Personnel sheet.
817
QUE$TORHelp
Vehicles
Vehicle lease costs are dependent on the Cost per vehicle and the Number of
Vehicles. The first value is picked up from the regional technical database and is
based on a vehicle pay back period of three years, the second is dependent on the
number of personnel in the field.
818
QUE$TORHelp
Well Costs
The cost of well operations such as wirelining and workover for each type of well (oil
producer, gas producer, water injector or gas injector) are calculated.The cost and
duration of each activity is dependent on the type of rig used to perform the
operation.
This shows the annual cost for all routine and non-routine well maintenance
operations.Non-routine well maintenance includes all activities which require a rig to
pull the production tubing, e.g. workovers.Routine well maintenance covers the cost
of maintaining all well systems such as kill and control and includes through tubing
workovers (TTWO), pressure seal test, tubing caliper runs, tubing clean out and
downhole surveys.
The well costs window contains the Material cost per operation, the Rig rate, Interval
between operations, and the Duration of each operation.All wells are assumed to be
in operation from year 1, and the interval period starts counting from that date.The
duration includes for weather downtime but excludes mobilisation / demobilisation.
The rig rate includes for vessel hire, labour, consumables, and logistics for each of
the drilling options.
819
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
Annual insurance costs are determined as a percentage of the capital costs.The
percentages are applied to the total component capital cost, assuming complete
clicking on Insurance costs. This displays the Insurance window.
820
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on Field / project costs displays the field / project costs window.
The field / project costs cover the onshore support and administration related to the
Support
l
Administration:covers the cost of supervising and pay-rolling the operating

crews. The cost is determined as a percentage of personnel costs.
Warehousing:includes for a secure warehouse and open storage area to store
key spare equipment, piping and valves. The rate includes labour costs and office
accommodation.The cost is determined as a percentage of personnel costs.
Corporate support: covers on going project support by management and
engineering staff at head office. The cost is determined as a percentage of
personnel costs.
Personnel costs: are read from the personnel cost section of the OPEX sheet.
Infrastructure support: covers the annual maintenance and repair of the
infrastructure. The cost is determined as a percentage of the infrastructure capital
costs.
Land Costs
Land Costs are dependent on the area and whether the land is purchased, rented or
acquired at no cost.To revise the method of payment click on the dropdown arrow
against Land Costs and select either Rent, Purchase or None. If the land is purchased
a one-off payment in Year 1 is assumed.
821
QUE$TORHelp
Land Cost per m2 is dependent on the method of land payment and applied equally to
all land.
The areas shown for production facilities and wellpad groups, terminals and pipeline
booster stations are the total Site Preparation areas read from the corresponding
component cost sheets.
Over-writing any input value automatically results in the costs being updated.
822
QUE$TORHelp
Tariffs
Clicking on Tariff costs opens the Tariffs window, shown below. This shows the oil and
gas profiles on which tariffs can be paid.These default to the field export profiles but
you can overwrite them. You can also include profiles on which tariffs can be
received.
Oil transportation tariffs are included by default if export is via an existing pipeline.
processing and transportation of the oil and gas streams.
823
QUE$TORHelp
CO2 Emission Taxes

below.

2
Process fluids: the CO removed from the produced fluids through the gas
2
processing units within the project. The volume produced is dependent on the CO
2
percentage in the produced gas and the sales percentage of CO .
2
2
2
2
flared gas rate.
2
emissions source 1 and Other CO2 emissions source 2 line items.The labels
over-typing the text. The default annual volumetric flow for these other sources of
CO2 is zero so the flow for each year of field life must be manually entered.
2
824
QUE$TORHelp
Lease costs
project.
825
QUE$TORHelp

profiles from the calculated engineering data used to produce cost estimates.This is
technical data such as weight, length and durations. Scheduling is accessed from the
contracting techniques and practices.
826
QUE$TORHelp

Project menu.
component in the project.The table also includes a distribution (Dist) column. When a
component is expanded distributions can be chosen for each cost centre. A scheduling
bar indicates when first oil will be produced. The Toolbar Icons give various
shortcuts.
equipment or installation.These are each assigned a default start date and duration
and are called activities. The activities that make up each component are based on
components can be expanded. To do this either expand the component individually or
827
QUE$TORHelp
Distributions

specifying the percentage of time and cost apportioned to each period.QUE$TOR uses
828
QUE$TORHelp
Note: Project costs have an additional distribution type available, CAPEX

breakdown distribution (CBD). This allocates the project cost based on the
percentage of the total CAPEX spent within a given month.
and the third will be automatically calculated.You should ensure that the sum of the
QUE$TOR includes default relationships between each activity within a component. In
the example shown above, procurement of production facility equipment and
materials lags the beginning of the production facility design by six months; with
prefabrication and construction six months after the start of procurement. Project
management begins with start of the first activity and ends with the end of the last
activity. Whilst different components have different activities the same principles still
apply.
The start date and duration of each activity can be edited by either adjusting the
values in the table or moving or resizing the scheduling bars. If you change an
activity on which the start dates of other components are dependent then all these
activities will move to maintain the default lag.
These default relationships only apply in one direction. In the example above,
moving design will move all other activities.Moving procurement will move
prefabrication, construction and project management but will not affect design. In
general each activity is dependent on an activity that starts before it.Moving an
activity will affect all dependent activities that start after it but will break any links
with activities that start before it.Project management has slightly different rules in
829
QUE$TORHelp
that it will always start when the first activity starts and end when the last activity
ends.
Note:The default schedule for the user defined component uses the defaults for
production facility. You will probably need to adjust it.
QUE$TOR considers a default set of relationships between components when
generating a project schedule. These relationships between components are
considered as links between activities within each component. The object of these
default relationships is to delay expenditure on each component as far as possible
without pushing back the first oil date.For example in a typical development, the
time to first oil will generally be the time from design to final commissioning of the
main production facility.So in this situation QUE$TOR will schedule pipeline
installation to finish at the same time as the production facility. Inter-component
relationships behave in a similar fashion to intra-component relationships.Moving an
activity will move all dependent components but the link will not apply in reverse.
Moving an activity will break any relationships with activities in other components on
which that activity is dependent.
To use the production facility and pipeline example, delaying the production facility
by a year will automatically delay the pipeline by a year but delaying the pipeline by
a year will not affect the production facility.
To reschedule a component with respect to the other components click on the Project
Management bar and slide it backwards or forwards as required. The duration for all
activities within the component remain as previously specified but their start date
changes.
In projects with multiple production facility QUE$TOR tends to schedule all pipelines
to finish with the main production facility. Delaying a manifold station may not delay
the pipelines linking it to the main production facility as you would expect.In these
projects you should be careful to review QUE$TORs scheduling assumptions and
potentially delay some in-field pipelines.
Locking
with activities upon which the edited activity is dependent will then be
broken.Unlocking values will restore the default relationships and durations.
unlock all its start dates and durations.Individual start dates and durations can also
830
QUE$TORHelp
First Oil
this on the scheduling chart as a vertical bar.The first oil indicator has no direct
which production will start in the investment and production profile. Moving the first
production profile.
will usually be the end of the main production facility.Moving this activity, or others
link by moving the first oil bar on the scheduling chart. This will have no effect on the
rest of scheduling.
When you move the first oil bar it will lock. It can also be locked and unlocked by
Timescale
The project timescale is displayed in months, starting from zero.The calendar
beginning of the month specified. If the start month is month 1, 0 in the project

Note: Generating a new concept will delete all components and so any schedule
will be lost.
831
QUE$TORHelp

832
QUE$TORHelp
each component.
Decommissioning costs of the onshore components is based around percentages of
the component CAPEX values; this option can be used in preference to the detailed
algorithms if desired.
833
QUE$TORHelp
The onshore decommissioning scenario form is accessed through the Options menu of
the main QUE$TOR toolbar and is shown below.
This form allows you to specify the decommissioning parameters for each component
type, each of the parameters can be changed and scenarios saved.Each saved
scenario can be opened and applied to a project.The Toolbar Buttons allow you to
manage your scenarios.The parameters in the form are applied to all components
within the project when you press OK.
Note:As the user-defined component is an unknown variable, we have

assumed a flat percentage across all cost centres. We strongly recommend that you
review this for each user-defined component.
the decommissioning activities with a uniform distribution of the decommissioning
costs assumed.

834
QUE$TORHelp
component and select Edit / view decommissioning.For pipelines, select the
The cost sheet is shown on the right hand side of the screen.
Cost estimate
The cost sheet for the component is shown on the right hand side of the screen.The
production facility cost sheet is shown as an example below.
decommissioning scenario.It is possible to go to any blue number in the cost sheet
Scrap
The modules may be assigned a scrap value. A negative value should be entered for
income or a positive value if disposal onshore invokes a cost. You should overwrite
this to reflect current and local conditions.
835
QUE$TORHelp

Investment and production profile from the Project menu. The window
The investment and production profile summarises the overall project costs: presanction and post-sanction project costs, Exploration and Appraisal (E&A) well costs,
scheduled CAPEX (Production drilling and Facilities), OPEX (Fixed, Variable, Tariffs,
Leases and CO2 tax)and decommissioning costs along with the along with CO2
emissions and production profile for exported product streams.An OPEX analysis and
a CAPEX schedule will be automatically generated if you have not already edited
them. The profile is always consistent with the current project configuration and
current CAPEX and OPEX. Only components that currently exist in the field
development plan will be included in the profile.
Note:Seismic costs are not calculated in QUE$TORbut can optionally be

manually entered as part of the E&A costs.
locked.
836
QUE$TORHelp

The OPEX and production profiles begin at first oil. The date of first oil can be edited
in scheduling.If first oil is mid year then the OPEX and production profiles are
recalculated to account for the partial year of production. The overall production and
expenditures are not changed, they are just given a new timescale to match the
project timescale.
In the example comparison of profile timescales, the first oil occurs exactly half way
through year 3.The production profile is recalculated so that it starts at the beginning
of month 7 in year 3 in the investment profile.
The sales gas volumes in the investment and production profile excludes any CO2
volume coming into the process and gas volumes that are being used for fuel gas
supply.
in the

in the toolbar. Select
on the preview screen to print the report. Alternatively, to print the profile without
previewing it click
in the toolbar.
in
837
QUE$TORHelp

in the toolbar. This
save the project to run AS$ET at a later date.When the File method is selected you
838
QUE$TORHelp
LNG Regasification Structure

The LNG regasification terminal module can be used on its own or as part of a larger
onshore or offshore field development. If used in conjunction with a QUE$TOR
Onshore licence then the LNG regasification terminal can be linked to a storage
terminal, an onshore sink and an onshore source.No other links to the LNG
regasification terminal are acceptable. Infrastructure costs can be included provided
the LNG regasification terminal is run in conjunction with QUE$TOR Onshore.
If the LNG regasification terminal is to be included in a QUE$TOR Onshore project
then the program checks for a valid LNG regasification terminal licence and uses the
same input/output units, procurement and technical database as the primary onshore
project. See Modelling an onshore project.
If the LNG regasification terminal is to be included in a QUE$TOR Offshore project
then select the Add LNG regas onshore project button. QUE$TOR checks for a
valid LNG regasification terminal licence and then displays the Add onshore to project
form to allow you to select from the list of existing procurement strategies or allow
you to create a new strategy based on the region selected in the primary project
form. The default technical database will be selected based on the region selected in
the primary project form but an alternative can be selected from a template or
custom technical database using the Browse button. The input/output units used for
the LNG regasification terminal will be the same as specified in the initial project
properties form.
The main product as specified in initial project properties form is not used in an LNG
regasification terminal only project.Additionally the field level data entered is only
used to set the distance between the LNG regasification terminal and the
infrastructure (used to set the send out pump discharge pressure), determine the
gas/associated gas design flowrate and the production profile field life used in
calculating the LNG regasification terminal OPEX.
To add an LNG regasification terminal to the field schematic select the onshore
regasification terminal toolbar icon and position it on the field development
schematic. There are two options which can be included or excluded by right mouse
clicking on the tool bar icon; Marine infrastructure and LNG processing. Marine
infrastructure should be included if a tanker berth (jetty or slipway), breakwater and
pipeline from the berth to the plant are required. This may not be required if the LNG
regasification terminal under consideration is a phased extension using an existing
berth. LNG processing will be required if the sales gas specification is leaner than
LNG off-loaded from the LNG tankers. These options/functions can also be
selected/deselected in the primary input form. If deselected the field development
schematic image will update when OK is clicked.
839
QUE$TORHelp
About Regasification Terminal Facilities

The regasification terminal facility component covers unloading, storage, and
vapourisation of LNG including marine infrastructure, LNG storage, LNG pumping,
LNG processing, liquid storage, liquid export and metering, vapourisation, gas
metering, utilities, power generation and distribution, control and communications,
safety systems, bulk materials, prefabrication, construction, design and project
management and insurance and certification.
from which weights are derived.The equipment weights are combined into system
weights and the associated utilities and power requirements calculated. Bulk factors
are applied to system and individual equipment items to determine the steel, piping,
electrical, instrumentation, architectural and safety bulk material costs. Civils
materials costs are calculated based on the plot area.
productivities.
840
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
On entering the regasification terminal facility component the input panel is shown in
the bottom left of the screen with the cost estimate sheet on the right hand side.
changed.
Inputs
The regasification terminal facility input panel is shown below.QUE$TOR will choose
appropriate values for every parameter based on linked components and field level
data. Many inputs are also dependent upon higher level inputs within the same
component.
available facilities, such as product export, click on the relevant arrow button.Each
facility can be considered as a sub-component within the regasification terminal
facility.All of these sub-components are recalculated when unlocked if high level
inputs (e.g. LNG capacity) are changed.In a similar fashion if you adjust LNG
Pumping then, as long as it is unlocked, power generation will be recalculated based
on the new power requirements.
terminal facility sub-components and the cost estimate.
841
QUE$TORHelp
Facilities
OK will save any changes, close the form and update all unlocked dependent inputs
and costs.Clicking Cancel will exit without saving.Clicking Resize pipeline, where
available, will recalculate the pipeline hydraulics without updating any other subcomponent or the cost estimate; these will only be updated when OK is clicked.
Cost estimate
component.The regasification terminal facility inputs are used to calculate the
quantities shown on the cost estimate. The unit rates are determined by the
842
QUE$TORHelp
843
QUE$TORHelp
Primary Inputs
The Primary tab defines the highest level regasification terminal facility (RTF) design
specifications.
The primary tab covers the location, functions and capacity.
Terrain
The terrain type primarily affects the construction cost. The default is the same as
selected when defining the Field level data.The terrain at the regasification terminal
facility can be revised using the dropdown list box.Terrain options available are;
Arctic/Tundra, Desert, Grassland, Jungle, Mountain, Swamp or Urban.
Elevation
The elevation of the regasification terminal facility above sea level.This is used to
determine the pipeline hydraulics and decide the ISO rated power available from gas
turbine drivers. The default is sea level as the terminal is assumed to be coastal.
Functions
The regasification terminal facility has two functions which can be selected or
deselected; Marine infrastructure and LNG processing. Selecting a function will
include all associated systems in the cost estimate and allow you to open and edit the
associated sub-components.
The functions are:
844
QUE$TORHelp
l
Marine infrastructure:selection of this includes either a jetty or marine slip, a

breakwater and associated unloading systems, including berths, unloading arms
and unloading lines. When deselected the Marine infrastructure sub-component
will be disabled.
LNG processing:selection of this will mean that QUE$TOR will try to meet the
sales gas specification specified on the Design conditions tab. This will be achieved
by injection of nitrogen, removal of NGL's or a combination of both. When
deselected the LNG processing, Liquid storage and Liquid export sub-components
will be disabled.
Utilities, power generation and distribution systems and civils area are calculated for
all regasification terminal facilities and are based on the process systems included.
Capacities
The capacities represents the flows going into and out of the regasification terminal
facility and are used to size the facilities.
l
LNG capacity:this is the total annual flowrate coming into the regasification
terminal facility and is used to size the facilities. The composition of the inlet LNG
can be specified by clicking on the Composition button.
Gas equivalent: is the equivalent gas flow of the LNG capacity.
Send out rate: is the gas send out rate from the regasification terminal facility.
It is defined as the gas equivalent flow after processing, if selected, minus fuel
gas used in the terminal for vapourisation and power generation.
845
QUE$TORHelp
Inlet Composition
Clicking on Composition in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel opens the
LNG composition form.
The LNG composition form has two modes of operation which are dependent on the
radio button selected at the top of the form.
Molecular weight
When molecular weight is selected QUE$TOR will input a hydrocarbon composition,
based on the molecular weight entered, which is then normalised to take account of
the specified Inerts level.
Warnings are based on MW, absolute lowest possible is 16.5 (this is 98% methane )
and highest limit is 20.5. The range covers typical LNG compositions.
Composition
Specifying the composition allows the molar percentage of each hydrocarbon
component to be specified individually as well as the percentage of inerts.
846
QUE$TORHelp
Note: Inerts are presumed to be only nitrogen throughout QUE$TOR when

sizing equipment.
Gas Properties
The gas properties frame displays the calculated higher heating value and Wobbe
number based on the composition.
l
Higher heating value: the higher heating value (HHV), also known as gross
calorific value or gross energy, is defined as the amount of heat released by
combustion of the gas. The higher heating value takes into account the latent heat
of vapourisation of water in the combustion products and is commonly specified
within gas supply contracts.
Wobbe number:Wobbe Number or Index is the main indicator of the
interchangeability of fuel gases and is frequently set in the gas supply contract.It
is defined as:
Wobbe number = HHV x S.G.0.5
Where: S.G. = MW of the gas / MW of air
847
QUE$TORHelp
Design Specifications
The Design specifications tab allows you to specify the desired sales gas composition
and the maximum ambient air temperature.
Sales gas specification

The sales gas specification frame specifies the desired properties of the send out gas.
These values will be passed into the LNG processing sub-component and are set in
the regional technical database.
n
Higher heating value: the higher heating value (HHV), also known as gross
calorific value or gross energy, is defined as the amount of heat released by
combustion of the gas. The higher heating value takes into account the latent heat
of vapourisation of water in the combustion products and is commonly specified
within gas supply contracts.
Wobbe number: Wobbe Number or Index is the main indicator of the

interchangeability of fuel gases and is frequently set in the gas supply contract.It
is defined as:
0.5
nWobbe number = HHV x S.G.
nWhere: S.G. = MW of the gas / MW of air
Maximum nitrogen content:injecting nitrogen into LNG will reduce the HHV
and Wobbe number.This value specifies the maximum nitrogen content in the
send out gas.
Maximum ambient air temperature

power generation packages and is taken from the technical database.The calculated
power requirement is then divided by the derating factor to calculate the ISO
848
QUE$TORHelp
Prefabrication
regasification terminal facility.

Other: allows the percentage of piping spools and steelwork that is prefabricated
849
QUE$TORHelp
Winterisation
The Winterisation tab allows users to specify the level of winterisation at the
regasification terminal facility. If Arctic/Tundra is selected as the terrain for the
regasification terminal facility on the Primary inputs tab then the boxes will be
checked, at all other times they are unchecked.
Increased depth of gravel bases:when checked the depth of the gravel bases
Winterisation of facilities:when checked there is increased thermal insulation
around temperature sensitive equipment and pipelines.
850
QUE$TORHelp
Marine Infrastructure
The Marine infrastructure sub-component is only available if the Marine infrastructure
function has been selected. It covers the requirements for ship berthing and
unloading, including unloading and vapour return arms, jetty or marine slip
requirements, breakwaters and dredging.
Clicking on Marine infrastructure in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel
opens the Marine infrastructure form.
Ship / Berth Details

The ship / berth details frame covers the specification of the ship and the berth.
l
LNG tanker size: the maximum size of tanker that the berth will be designed to
handle. This defaults to 145,000m3 and can be edited by the user. The tanker size
influences the size of the berth and the marine slip depth, see Tanker Properties.
Unloading rate: the unloading rate is based on a 15 hour unloading time. If
modified the unloading rate then determines the unloading time and therefore the
number of berths as well as the unloading arm configuration.
Unloading arm diameter: there are two possible loading arms diameters, 16
inch or 20 inch, the selection is based on the unloading rate.
851
QUE$TORHelp
l
Number of berths: the number of berths is determined from the turnaround

time for one tanker and the number of tankers per year required to meet the LNG
capacity specified on the primary inputs tab. The turnaround time is the defined as
the time required to unload the tanker based on the unloading rate with 12 hours
added for entry to / exit from the channel and docking.
Each berth has a cost associated with it based on the tanker size which includes for
berthing and breasting dolphins.
l
Unloading arms per berth: the number of arms is based on the maximum
flowrate through one arm (5000m3/hr for 16inch arms and 8000m3/hr for 20inch
arms) with the allowance that full unloading rate can be achieved with one arm out
of service. i.e. there is one spare.
Vapour return arms per berth: the number of vapour return arms will default
to 1 for every 2 (active) loading arms. They are the same size as the unloading
arms.
Jetty details
When jetty is selected the jetty details frame will become active allowing the number
of jetties and the jetty length to be specified.
l
Number of jetties: the number of jetties is determined from the number of

berths, with a limit of 2 berths per jetty based on a T arrangement.
Jetty length: the jetty length is based on a fixed distance from the shore of
500m.In the case of a 2 berth jetty there will be an additional 200m between the
berths. The jetty length is used to calculate the materials and construction cost.
Marine Slip Details

When marine slip is selected the marine slip details frame will become active and will
specify the details of the marine slip. The marine slip is assumed to be dredged to a
depth 2 m greater than draft of the tanker, with a gradient of 6:1.
l
Number of marine slips: the number of marine slips is determined from the
number of berths, with a limit of 2 berths per marine slip based on a parallel
berthing arrangement.
Marine slip length:the marine slip length is based on the length of the tanker,
with 100 m allowance for manoeuvring.
Marine slip width: the marine slip width is based on the width of the tanker,
with 100m allowance for manoeuvring.
Marine slip perimeter: the marine slip perimeter excludes the open end of the
marine slip and is used to calculate the materials and construction cost.
852
QUE$TORHelp
LNG Metering
Fiscal or custody transfer metering is required for all liquid products at the transfer of
ownership from one party to another with a high degree of accuracy required.The
liquid metering sub-system is based on the use of a conventional fiscal turbine meter
incorporating a meter prover loop for operation within an ANSI Class 150 # rating.
Normally one spare metering run is included.
LNG Flowlines / Berth

The LNG flowlines carry the LNG from the tanker to the storage tanks. The length and
diameter are used to calculate the boil off rate for sizing the equipment in Vapour
handling.
l
Length: the length will be dependent on whether there is a jetty or marine slip.
For a jetty the length is dependent on the length of the jetty and the jetty
arrangement, with an additional 500 m for the onshore section from the end of the
jetty to the storage tanks. For marine slips the length is dependent on the marine
slip arrangement, with 500 m assumed between the marine slip and the storage
tanks.
Number of flowlines / Flowlines per berth: allows the specification of spare
lines.
Size flowline: clicking on Size flowline opens the LNG flowline sizing form.
The layout and functionality of the form is identical to the Pipeline sizing tab within
the pipelines component. The outlet pressure is set to LNG storage tank pressure,
assumed to be 1 atm. The inlet pressure of the pipeline should not exceed 11 bara as
the tanker offloading pumps could have insufficient head.
853
QUE$TORHelp
Breakwater
A breakwater is assumed to be wire cages filled with large concrete blocks and
natural boulders which are sunk offshore to alter wave direction and to filter the
energy of waves and tides protecting the jetty or marine slip behind. By default a
breakwater will never be included. The breakwater length will be dependent on
whether there a jetty or marine slip has been selected.
Dredging
Dredging is required to clear the channel for the LNG tanker.For a marine slip
dredging is always included as the marine slip and approach are assumed to be
dredged.For a jetty it is assumed that no dredging is required as the jetty will
terminate at the required water depth for tanker approach.
The dredging cost is calculated on a volumetric basis and is dependent on where the
dredged material is being disposed.Checking remote disposal will increase the unit
rate.
854
QUE$TORHelp
LNG Storage
Clicking on LNG storage in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel opens the
LNG storage form as shown below.LNG storage covers the storage of the LNG being
unloaded at the terminal prior to vapourisation.
Containment Type
There are four containment types that are going to be considered, they are:
n
Single: is a single primary container and generally an outer shell designed and
constructed so that only the primary container is required to meet the low
temperature ductility requirements for storage of the product. The outer shell (if
any) of a single containment storage tank is primarily for the retention and
protection of insulation and to contain the purge gas pressure, but is not designed
to contain refrigerated liquid in the event of leakage from the primary container.
An aboveground single containment tank shall be surrounded by a bund (dike) wall
to contain any leakage.See Examples.
Double: is designed and constructed so that both the inner self supporting
primary container and the secondary container are capable of independently
containing the refrigerated liquid stored. To minimize the pool of escaping liquid,
the secondary container should be located at a distance not exceeding 6 meters
from the primary container. The primary container contains the refrigerated liquid
under normal operating conditions. The secondary container is intended to contain
any leakage of the refrigerated liquid, but it is not intended to contain any vapour
resulting from this leakage. See Examples.
Full: a tank designed and constructed so that both self supporting primary
container and the secondary container are capable of independently containing the
refrigerated liquid stored and for one of them its vapour. The secondary container
can be a distance of 3 to 6 feet (1 to 2 meters) from the primary container. The
primary container contains the refrigerated liquid under normal operating
conditions. The outer roof is supported by the secondary container. The secondary
container shall be capable both of containing the refrigerated liquid and of
controlled venting of the vapour resulting from product leakage after a credible
event. See Examples.
855
QUE$TORHelp
n
Membrane: membrane tanks are similar to single containment tanks but are
buried and therefore require excavation.
The containment type affects the equipment, construction and civils unit rates and the
civils area.
Number of Tanks / Capacity per Tank

The storage tank arrangement is based on a minimum total storage capacity and a
maximum capacity per tank. Where:
Minimum storage capacity = Tanker size OR 5 days storage capacity (whichever the
greater)
The number and capacity of tanks allows for send out to be maintained whilst the
other tanks are being filled.Therefore QUE$TOR will always default to at least two
tanks.
Diameter / Height
The internal geometry of each storage tank is calculated so that the tank height does
not exceed 50 m with 3 m included in the height to take into account the dead space.
856
QUE$TORHelp
LNG Processing
The LNG processing sub-component is only available if the LNG processing function
has been selected. It calculates the weights and dimensions for nitrogen injection,
Demethanisation and NGL processing.
Clicking on LNG processing in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel opens
the LNG processing sub-component. This consists of a series of linked forms which
represent different LNG processing unit operations (nitrogen injection, NGL removal /
recovery, and stabiliser).These can be turned on and off using the check boxes. The
LNG processing specifications and the process used can be changed from within the
forms.
QUE$TOR chooses a default LNG processing system configuration based on the

requirements to meet the sales gas specification.The sales gas specification can be
either the higher heating value (HHV) or the Wobbe number, for definitions see
Design specifications. QUE$TOR will select some form of processing if the desired
HHV or Wobbe number is below that of the inlet stream (1), see Inlet composition.
QUE$TOR will first look at whether the sales gas specification can be met by injection
of nitrogen up to the maximum nitrogen level, see Design specifications, if it can then
nitrogen injection will be selected and the appropriate value injected.If the
specification can not be met then the next step is to see if the specification can be
met just the demethaniser column without nitrogen injection.If it can't be met then
QUE$TOR will try to meet the specification using nitrogen injection to the maximum
level then calculating what percentage needs to pass through the demethaniser
column.
857
QUE$TORHelp
Note: QUE$TOR only looks to decrease the HHV and Wobbe within the specified HHV
or Wobbe. There is no process available to increase these values.
At all times, a mass balance is maintained over the LNG processing module and
buttons.
The available LNG processing unit operations are explained below.
Nitrogen injection
Injecting Nitrogen into the LNG reduces the heating value, increases the specific
gravity of the gas, and as a consequence reduces the Wobbe Number e.g. injection of
one 1% by volume of nitrogen or air reduces the Wobbe Number of natural gas by
858
QUE$TORHelp
approximately 1%. The injection of the nitrogen will occur in the recondenser, see
Vapour handling.
l
Nitrogen level: this displays the level of nitrogen leaving the nitrogen injection
unit and will default to the level required to meet the sales gas specification, it is
limited by the maximum nitrogen level, see Design specifications.
Note:This is the nitrogen level in stream 2.If LNG processing is selected as

well as Nitrogen injection then the nitrogen level in the gas going to the vapourisers,
stream 3, could be higher than the maximum nitrogen content.If this occurs then
you should manually enter a lower value for nitrogen level so that the nitrogen in
stream 3 is within the maximum.
l
Nitrogen supply:the nitrogen being injected can be either generated on site

using air separation units (ASU's) or can be purchased if there is a source within
the locality. When Air separation unit is selected then the cost of the ASU's will be
included in the estimate. When Purchase is selected the nitrogen will become an
operating cost, see OPEX - Logistics and consumables for further details.
Demethaniser
The demethaniser removes the heavier hydrocarbons from the LNG, thus reducing
the HHV and Wobbe number. The demethaniser is assumed to be residue condensing,
i.e. it uses exchangers to re-condense the residue gas. The re-condensed gas (LNG)
is then sent to the send out pumps for pressure boosting then to the vapourisers. The
cost includes all associated heat exchangers and reflux equipment.
Feed to column: in most cases all of the liquid need not pass through the
demethaniser to reach the target specification. This value represents the required
value calculated based on fixed component splits within the column. This value can
be edited and is used to cost the column and associated equipment.
859
QUE$TORHelp
Deethaniser
The deethaniser column strips ethane and lighter components from the demethaniser
bottoms.Overhead gas is used for fuel gas and the bottoms liquids either exported as
NGL or fed to the stabiliser column. A deethaniser column is included when the
demethaniser is selected. The column is a trayed column with reboiler and partial
reflux condenser.
Stabiliser
The stabiliser separates LPG (propane and butane) from the liquids if a deethaniser is
installed or removes all propane and lighter components if one is not installed.In
both cases the stabiliser column produces a bottom liquids product of stabilised
gasoline suitable for injecting into an oil/condensate pipeline or as a separate
gasoline stream. The stabiliser is included when the production facility is exporting
LPG or Gasoline/condensate; this is determined from the pipelines on the FDS.The
stabiliser removes lighter components from the NGL to produce a bottom liquids
product of dead condensate suitable for injecting into an oil/condensate pipeline.The
overhead stream is LPG (a combined C , C stream). If the stabiliser is preceded by a
3
4
deethaniser or a fuel gas stream (C and lighter components) if not. The operating
3
pressure of the stabiliser is 8 bara.
Stream properties
The stream properties can be viewed by clicking on any stream.
860
QUE$TORHelp
The top half of the form specifies the conditions of the stream, flowrate temperature,
pressure. The bottom half of the form displays the compositional information,
including the HHV and Wobbe number.
861
QUE$TORHelp
LNG Pumping
Clicking on LNG pumping in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel opens
the LNG pumping form. LNG pumping covers three possible sets of pumps required to
pump the LNG to sufficient pressure prior to vapourisation thus preventing the need
for any compression of the gas.
In-tank Pumps / Tank

Submerged motor pumps are located within the LNG storage tanks. The pumps are on
a per tank basis and it is presumed that each tank has the capacity to pump the entire
send out, with the addition of one spare.
The LNG is stored at atmospheric pressure and the outlet pressure of the pumps is
limited by the available head.
l
Pump differential pressure:the difference between the suction pressure and

the discharge pressure, we assume a fixed discharge pressure of 10 bara.
Number of pumps:specifies the number of parallel pumps installed. By default
the value is such that there is one spare pump to ensure product export can be
maintained in the event of a pump failure. If modified, the program recalculates
the pump weight.
Capacity / pump: the capacity of each pump as a proportion to the total pump
duty, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the number of pumps this specifies
how many spare units are installed.
Note: Changing the number of pumps will also initially change the
capacity/pump if unlocked, to ensure there is always a spare pump.
l
Pump weight: derived from the pump power, based on standard motor sizes,
and is the total for the specified pump arrangement. The weight includes a skid-
862
QUE$TORHelp
mounted pump and fixed-speed motor.
LNG Processing Feed Pumps

The LNG processing feed pumps are only available if the demethaniser is selected
within the LNG processing sub-component. The inlet pressure is taken as the outlet
pressure of the in-tank pumps with the outlet pressure set by operating pressure of
the demethaniser column, 35 bara.
Send out Pumps

The send out pumps pump the LNG to the gas send out pressure. If the demethaniser
is selected the inlet pressure is set to that of stream 3 in LNG processing, if not then
the inlet pressure is taken as the outlet pressure of the in-tank pumps. The delivery
pressure is set by the inlet pressure of the gas export pipeline, see below.An
allowance is made for losses through the vapourisers and metering skids.
n
Size export pipeline:the vapourisation is assumed to be isobaric, therefore the

outlet pressure of the send out pumps is set by the gas export pipeline. The
pipeline sizing form allows you to resize your gas export line, to alter the pressure
drop along it and change the power requirements of the send out pumps.Clicking
on Size export pipeline in the duty frame opens the pipeline sizing form.
made here will be applied to the pipeline component.For more details on pipeline
863
QUE$TORHelp
no export pipeline is connected to the regasification terminal facility this is taken
from the regional technical database.
864
QUE$TORHelp
Liquid Storage
The Liquid storage sub-component is only available if the LNG Processing function has
been selected. Liquid storage covers the storage of the three possible liquid products
from LNG processing. On opening the product storage sub-component there is a tab
for each product with generated in LNG processing. A storage cost will only be
calculated for the products present.
Clicking on Liquid storage in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel opens
the liquid storage form as shown below. Two types of storage are considered in
QUE$TOR.They are:
l
Pressurised storage: required for the storage of high vapour pressure (volatile)
products such as de-ethanised NGL and LPG. The pressurised storage can be either
bullets or spheres.

QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required storage for fully stabilised products.
Storage time: the number of days storage required for each product.The default
for all products is one day as the storage as it is only intended as a buffer to allow
for upstream disruptions.
Storage capacity: the volume of storage required and is the Storage time
865
QUE$TORHelp
l
Number of tanks:the number of tanks required to give the required storage

Design capacity / tank: gives the size of each of the tanks and is the storage
so that the tank height does not exceed 18 m with 0.5 m included in the height to

QUE$TOR provides full sizing of the required storage for volatile products.The inputs
and calculated sizes are common to the NGL and LPG storage tabs.
Storage time:the number of days storage required for each product. The default
for all products is one day as the storage at the regasification terminal facility as it
is only intended as a buffer to allow for upstream disruptions.
Storage capacity:the volume of storage required and is the storage time
in bullets or spheres.By default if the storage capacity does not exceed 4,000bbl
Number of vessels: the number of vessels needed to give the required storage
capacity.This is dependent on whether bullets or spheres have been selected.The
maximum capacity for a bullet is 2,000bbl and the maximum capacity for a sphere
is 75,000bbl.
866
QUE$TORHelp
l
Vapour space: the volume above the maximum liquid level within each vessel.
For bullets this is 15%, and for spheres this is 5%.
Design capacity / vessel:gives the size of each of the vessels and is the
storage capacity divided by the number of vessels.
Diameter and Length: give the geometry of each of the vessels. The length is
only relevant when bullets are selected.
867
QUE$TORHelp
Liquid Export
The Liquid export sub-component is only available if the LNG Processing function has
been selected.Liquid export covers the export of the three possible liquid products
from LNG processing. On opening the product export sub-component there is a tab for
each product generated in LNG processing. A cost will only be calculated for the
products present.
Clicking on Liquid export in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel opens
the liquid export form.
868
QUE$TORHelp
Export Rate
export rates are calculated based on the export pipeline operating 24 hours/day.

form.
made here will be applied to the pipeline component. For more details on pipeline
no export pipeline is connected to the facility, this is taken from the regional technical
database.
Details
l

869
QUE$TORHelp
l
Driver
l
Gas engine: are typically only used in S.E. Asia and are available in sizes up to
5MW.
by default if the power is less than 4MW.
selected when the power is greater than 4MW. When selected the derating factor
Derating Factor
and is dependent on the Ambient temperature and Elevation.
Capacity
l

Number of pumps: specifies the number of parallel pumps installed.This is set
the pump weight.
Note:Changing the number of pumps will also initially change the design
870
QUE$TORHelp
Driver Model
driver types based on the smallest driver that will provide the design power. You can
Pump Weight
motor.
Pump Driver Weight

Metering Capacity
This will default to the export capacity but can be adjusted as required.
Metering Weight
871
QUE$TORHelp
Vapour Handling
The Vapour handling sub-component covers the equipment required to handle the gas
that boils off during the unloading and storage of the LNG, including vapour return
blowers, boil off gas compressors and recondensers.
Clicking on Vapour handling in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel
opens the Vapour handling form.
Derating Factor
The power available from the turbine driver is affected by the air temperature and
elevation.This frame states the derating factor with together with the basis of the
factor.
l
Derating factor: used to calculate the ISO equivalent power if gas turbines are
selected as the Driver type. For electric drivers no derating is applied.
Derated power based on: the maximum expected air temperature, taken from
the Design specifications tab.
Elevation: the elevation of the production facility, taken from the Primary tab.
872
QUE$TORHelp
Boil off Gas Compression (BOG)
BOG compressors are used to compress the gas that boils off due to heat leak into the
storage tanks and unloading lines.It is compressed to the same pressure as the 1st
stage LNG export pumps and reintroduced to the stream through the recondenser,
see below.
l
Design quantity: the gas flowrate that the compressor is designed to handle.
This is the boil off rate of the LNG based on the size and length of the LNG
flowlines, see Marine infrastructure, and the storage tank dimensions.
Suction pressure: the inlet pressure for the compressors. The boil off gas will be
coming from the LNG storage tanks, which are at atmospheric pressure.
Discharge pressure: the required outlet pressure from the compressors. The
boil off gas is compressed to the outlet pressure of the In-tank LNG pumps, see
LNG pumping normally around 11bara. There is a 0.5 bar allowance for pressure
loss through the recondenser.
Compressor type: there are two compressor options available in QUE$TOR:
centrifugal and reciprocating. The compressor type will influence the required
compression power and the drivers available. QUE$TOR always defaults to
centrifugal compressors.
Number of stages: the number of compression stages is calculated from the
suction and discharge pressure assuming a maximum compression ratio of 3 per
stage. This can be adjusted to an integer value from 1-4.
Power: the power required by the compressors. The power for is based on the
molecular weight of the gas, assumed to be the same as the LNG.
Derated power: the ISO equivalent power if turbine drivers are selected. It is
the Power divided by the Derating factor.
Number of compressors:specifies the number of parallel compressors
installed. By default the value is such that there is one spare generator. If
modified, the program recalculates the compressor weight.
Design duty/compressor: the capacity of each generator set as a proportion to
compressors this specifies how many spare units are installed.
Driver type: the available compressor drivers depends upon the compressor
type selected. For centrifugal compressors, an electric motor or gas turbine driver
can be selected. For reciprocating compressors, an electric motor or gas engine
driver can be selected. Default selection is electric for gas compression powers up
to 4 MW; with a gas turbine or gas engine selected above 4 MW. The limit for
electric drivers is 5 MW per train, for gas engines it's 18 MW per train and gas
873
QUE$TORHelp
l
Model:selects the type of turbine driver and is only active when Turbine is
selected. A default is automatically selected from a number of available turbine
driver types based on the smallest driver that will provide the design power. You
can overwrite the turbine type via a dropdown list box, if desired.
Compressor weight:a skid-mounted package containing the driver, the
compressor(s), base plate, seal and lube oil systems. Inlet and exhaust systems
for gas turbine drivers are included if selected.
Scrubber weight:one scrubber per stage is included using a compression ratio
of 3 per stage (all stages are located on the same shaft).
Note: No compressor after-cooler is included as the compressed gas is

condensed in the sub-cooled LNG.
Recondenser
The recondenser is used to recondense the boil off gas and liquefy any nitrogen being
injected. It is assumed to be a direct contact packed column.
l
Gas flow: the gas flowrate that the recondenser is designed to handle. This is the
sum of the gas boil off rate, calculated for the boil off gas compressor, and the
nitrogen injection flowrate, see LNG processing.
Number of recondensers:specifies the number of parallel recondensers
installed. By default the value is such that there is no spare. If modified, the
program recalculates the recondenser weight.
Design duty / recondenser: the capacity of each recondenser as a proportion
to the gas flow, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the Number of
recondensers this specifies how many spare units are installed.
Recondenser weight: based on the gas flow. The weight is calculated from the
diameter and length of the column, with an allowance for the internal packing.
Vapour Return Blowers

Some of the vapours generated during the unloading process are returned to the
tanker via a vapour return line.This maintains a positive pressure in the ships' tanks,
allowing a continuous flow of LNG from the tanker to the storage tanks.
l
Gas flowrate: the gas flowrate that the blowers is designed to handle. This is the
equal to the volumetric LNG unloading rate, therefore maintaining the pressure in
the tanker.
Suction pressure: the inlet pressure for the blowers. The boil off gas will be
coming from the LNG storage tanks, which are at atmospheric pressure.
874
QUE$TORHelp
l
Discharge pressure: the required outlet pressure from the blowers. The boil off
gas requires minimal boosting, for vapour return blowers a differential pressure of
0.5 bar is assumed.
Power: the power required by the blowers. The power for is based on the
molecular weight of the gas, assumed to be the same as the LNG.
Number of blowers:specifies the number of parallel blowers installed. By
default the value is such that there is no spare. If modified, the program
recalculates the blower weight.
Design duty / blower: the capacity of each generator set as a proportion to the
total generator power, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the Number of
blowers this specifies how many spare units are installed.
Electric: electric motors are used to generate the required design power with the
power added to the demand of the production facility. Electric drivers are always
used for vapour return blowers. The maximum size of electric motor considered is
5 MW.
Blower weight: a skid-mounted package containing the driver, the blower(s),
base plate, seal and lube oil systems.
875
QUE$TORHelp
Vapourisation
Clicking on Vapourisation in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel opens
the vapourisation form as shown below.Vapourisation covers the vapourisers used to
warm and vapourise the LNG as well as any metering of the send out gas.On opening
the vapourisation component the default vapouriser will be selected.Three types of
vapourisers are considered in QUE$TOR.They are:
l
Open rack: uses seawater to heat the LNG and includes the associated seawater
pumps and filtration.
Submerged combustion: heat is provided by the combustion of a percentage of
the send out gas to provide the heat for vapourisation and includes the air blower
and exhaust skids.
Intermediate fluid: uses a closed heating medium system to heat the LNG in
shell and tube type heat exchangers.
Process
The process frame specifies the primary vapouriser and the vapourisation capacity.
l
Primary vapouriser:selects the type of vapouriser used, the default is specified

in the regional technical database. The selected primary vapouriser will become
active and will be sized for 100% of the LNG flow. It is common for there to be
back up vapourisers, e.g. if open rack is the primary system then, if there is the
possibility of the seawater temperature dropping below that required for
vapourisation, then backup submerged combustion vapourisers may be required.
A backup vapourisation system can be selected by checking the box at the top of
the vapouriser. If a backup vapourisation system is selected then it will be sized
for 50% of the flow with no sparing.
876
QUE$TORHelp
l
LNG flowrate:the LNG flowrate that the vapourisers will be designed to handle.
This is taken as the flow coming from the LNG send out pumps, see LNG pumping.
Equivalent gas flow: is the equivalent gas flow of the LNG flowrate.
Open Rack
Open rack vapourisers (ORV's) use the heat from warm seawater. The seawater
flows over a series of panel coils to vapourise the LNG that is flowing countercurrent
within the panels. Seawater lift pumps raise the seawater to the top of each ORV to
flow down the outside of the panels as a falling film. The panels are multiple LNG
tubes with integral fins. LNG flowing upward through the tubes is vaporized and
warmed to approximately 0C. These ORV panels are coated with a zinc alloy to
provide corrosion resistance against seawater.Annual maintenance is required to
maintain the protective coating and clean finned-tube surface area.
The seawater is cooled by exchanging heat with the LNG. The maximum seawater
temperature change is typically limited to 8 C with LNG approach temperatures of
around -15C depending on winter and summer conditions.
Vapouriser details: the number of vapourisers and design duty per vapouriser are
dependent on whether it has been selected as the primary vapourisation method.
l
Number of vapourisers:specifies the number of parallel vapourisers installed.

By default the value is such that there is one spare vapouriser to ensure send out
can be maintained in the event of a failure.If modified, the program recalculates
the vapouriser weight.
Design duty / vapouriser: the capacity of each vapouriser as a proportion to
the total vapourisation duty, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the Number
of vapourisers this specifies how many spare units are installed.
Note: Changing the number of vapourisers will also initially change the
capacity/pump if unlocked, to ensure there is always the correct number of spare
vapourisers.
l
Vapouriser weight: the vapourisers are sized on a per vapouriser basis, based
on the throughput. This gives a weight per vapouriser. The value shown is the total
weight of the selected vapourisers, i.e. weight per vapouriser x number of
vapourisers.
Seawater pumps: the seawater pumps are required to circulate the seawater
used for vapourisation, with the pumps being common to all the vapourisers. The
calculation based on the standard pump sizing calculation with the stainless steel
being the material of choice due to the corrosive seawater. The seawater flowrate
is based on a seawater temperature change of 8C. The differential pressure
defaults to 10bara.
Filter station: the seawater flows through intake screens to remove debris and
marine life prior to being pumped to the ORV's. The filter station allows for all the
intake screens and the weight is a factor of the seawater pump weight.
877
QUE$TORHelp
Submerged Combustion
Submerged combustion vapourisers (SCV's) use a tube bundle submerged in a water
bath to vaporize the LNG. The water temperature is maintained by burning natural
gas. Combustion products are bubbled through a distribution tube into the water
bath.Heat is transferred from the water bath to the LNG fluid flowing inside the tube
bundle. The tube bundle is a multi-tube, serpentine bundle mounted horizontally
within the weir. Combustion products, after disengaging from the gas/water, are
normally discharged to atmosphere via a short stack. The water bath vapourises the
LNG in the immersed tube coil.
SCV's can offer extremely high thermal efficiencies, approaching 100%, due to the
condensing combustion-products water vapour in the water bath. Since the
combustion products are bubbled directly into the water bath, almost all of the
available heat is transferred to the water. The tube bundle is always immersed in a
high-thermal capacity water bath; thus, the SCV's provide rapid response times for
startups, shutdowns and rapid load fluctuations.
l
Number of vapourisers:specifies the number of parallel vapourisers

installed.By default the value is such that there is one spare vapouriser to ensure
send out can be maintained in the event of a failure.If modified, the program
recalculates the vapouriser weight.
Design duty / vapouriser: the capacity of each vapouriser as a proportion to
the total vapourisation duty, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the Number
of vapourisers this specifies how many spare units are installed.
vapourisers.
l
Vapouriser weight: the vapourisers are sized on a per vapouriser basis, based
on the throughput. This gives a weight per vapouriser. The value shown is the total
weight of the selected vapourisers, i.e. weight per vapouriser x number of
vapourisers.
Gas requirement: the gas requirement is calculated from the required duty
based on the heat of combustion of the gas.The duty is calculated based on
vapourising the LNG and then heating it to -10C. This value is dependent on the
LNG composition and is normally in the range of 1.5% - 2% of the throughput.
Air blowers: each vapouriser requires a blower skid to provide sufficient air for
the combustion of the gas.The quantity is based on the composition of the LNG
with a design margin of 10%.
Intermediate Fluid
Intermediate fluid vapourisers are specially designed shell and tube heat exchangers,
an intermediate fluid is used which is vaporised by the heating medium and
condensed by the LNG.The intermediate fluid is assumed to be a glycol / water
mixture. The heat source for the medium is a fired heater.
878
QUE$TORHelp
l
Number of heat exchangers:specifies the number of parallel exchangers

installed.By default the value is such that there is one spare exchangers to ensure
send out can be maintained in the event of a pump failure.If modified, the
program recalculates the vapouriser weight.
Design duty / heat exchanger: the capacity of each vapouriser as a proportion
to the total vapourisation duty, e.g. 100%, 50% or 33%. Combined with the
Number of vapourisers this specifies how many spare units are installed.
vapourisers.
l
Medium inlet / outlet temperature: specify the inlet and outlet temperatures
of the heating medium and affect the size of the exchanger.
Total exchanger weight: the exchangers are sized on a per exchanger basis.
This gives a weight per exchanger. The value shown is the total weight of the
selected exchangers, i.e. weight per exchanger x number of exchangers.
Heating medium: the duty displayed is the total duty required to heat the
medium to it's original inlet temperature from the outlet temperature.This value
is passed through to Utilities where the fired heater and circulation pumps are
costed.
Gas Metering
Fiscal metering of the gas using orifice plates is automatically included. The weight
includes the metering skid and meter prover.
879
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on Control and comms in the regasification terminal facility inputs panel
opens the control and communication form. Control and communications allows
selection of the process control system and communications options.The choice of
the type of control and communication system is inherently a function of the
geography and location of the regasification terminal facility. For example in an
isolated environment, like a desert, a satellite would normally be used.
Control System
regasification terminal facility. Each option covers main process/utility control,
emergency shut-down (ESD), fire & gas and associated interface panels.
l
Distributed: suitable for larger regasification terminal facilities where a main

computerised control room and several local equipment rooms are necessary.
Conventional: suitable for medium-sized regasification terminal where one
Basic: suitable for small, simple regasification terminal, where local control
panels are the only requirement.
Communications
of the regasification terminal
l

link.This method of communication is limited to line of sight, i.e. to a distance of
Cable / fibre:assumes communications are handled via a control umbilical.This
880
QUE$TORHelp
881
QUE$TORHelp
Process Utilities
Clicking on Process utilities in the regasification terminal facility inputs opens the
process utilities form as shown below.

l
condensate from water. The heating medium flowrate is calculated in the oil
processing module based on the required heat duty of the process. The weight
pumps.
882
QUE$TORHelp
l
circulation pumps.
Fuel gas: the Fuel gas requirements frame details the fuel gas usage throughout
the regasification terminal facility.This is calculated from the requirements set in
the LNG processing, Vapourisation and Power sub-components.The value can be
defined as a gas flowrate or as a percentage of the gas equivalent of the LNG inlet.
The weight includes for a fuel gas KO drum, a fuel gas heater and fuel gas filters.
General Utilities
l

separation tank.
883
QUE$TORHelp
l
Firefighting: comprises of firewater and foam systems. It includes for all

884
QUE$TORHelp
Power
Clicking on Power in the regasification terminal facility input panel opens the power
sub-component form.
Power Requirement
figure.
885
QUE$TORHelp
l
LNG processing: the power required by the LNG processing sub-component.
LNG pumping:the power required by the LNG pumps.
Liquid export: the power required by the export pumps for each of the three
liquid products of the regasification facility; NGL, LPG and gasoline.
Vapour handling: the power required by the BOG compressors and vapour
return blowers within the vapour handling sub-component.
Vapourisation: the power required by the seawater lift pumps within the
vapourisation sub-component.
Control and comms: the power required by the systems defined within the
Safety: the power required by the safety system, this comprises firewater and
foam systems and includes for all necessary pumping requirements.
Utilities: the power required by the systems specified within the utilities subcomponent.
Base load: includes for lighting and security systems. It is defined as 10% of the

The radio buttons dictate whether the cost of power generation is included or if only
distribution is considered. Emergency power generation is required in both cases.
l
Generation and distribution: covers both distribution and generation systems.

When selected all the boxes that are used to size the generators and drivers will
become active i.e. Derating factor, Duty and Driver type. Costs are included for
the generator sets and the power distribution equipment.
Distribution only: assumes that power is being imported to the regasification
terminal facility and includes transformers, all buses, power cabling between
switchboards, switchboards and ancillary controls.
Derating Factor
and is dependent on the Ambient temperature and Elevation. For diesel / gas engines
Duty
886
QUE$TORHelp
l
Power factor:is the ratio between real power and apparent power in a circuit.
Design power: is the Total power (derated) divided by the power factor.
Driver
l
Gas turbine:gas turbines are used to generate the required design power.This is
selected when the design power is greater than 2MW. When selected the derating
generator.
design power. This is selected when the design power is less than 2MW but single
units are available up to about 17MW.
microturbine is 1MW.
Microturbine is selected.A default is automatically selected from a number of
desired.
Emergency Power
Safety power.
887
QUE$TORHelp
Weights
system:
l
includes transformers, switchgear and motor control units.
888
QUE$TORHelp
Civils
The civils sub-component covers the plot area required by the regasification terminal
facility.
Clicking on Civils in the regasification terminal facility input opens the civils plot
area form.
Foundation Area
Foundation areas are calculated from the footprint area of each system with an
allowance for good access. These are summated to give the total foundation area.
889
QUE$TORHelp
l
Marine infrastructure: the area required by the marine slip is not included in
the total foundations area, but will be a significant value in the total plot area.
LNG storage: covers the LNG storage tanks.
LNG processing: the foundation area required by the equipment within the LNG
processing sub-component, this is broken down into the components available
within LNG processing.
LNG pumping:covers the LNG pumps that were sized in LNG pumping with an
area given for each of the pumps. In tank pumps have no civils foundation area
requirement as they are located within the LNG storage tanks.
Liquids storage:covers the storage tanks for the three products and is broken
down into atmospheric and pressurised storage.
Liquids export pumps: covers the export pumps that were sized in liquid export
with an area given for the pumps of each of the products.
Liquids metering:covers the metering equipment that was sized in the liquid
export sub-component with an area given for the metering of each of the products.
Vapour handling: covers the compressors, blowers and recondensers that were
sized in vapour handling.
Vapourisation: covers the vapourisers and associated equipment that were sized
in vapourisation.
Other:covers the remaining sub-components; Power and Utilities. There is an
area for all the sub-components associated safety systems.
Totals
l
Total foundations area: is the sum of the above areas, excluding the marine
slip area.
Vehicular access:covers the required roads and hard standings and is
Buildings:covers the required buildings within the regasification terminal facility
and is determined by applying a factor to the Total foundations area.
Total plot area: the total area of the regasification terminal facility and is used
to determine the cost of grading the site and the associated civil materials cost. An
area factor is applied to the Total foundations to give the equipment plot area. The
total plot area is the sum of equipment plot area, buildings plot area, vehicular
access plot area and marine slip area.
890
QUE$TORHelp
Equipment Costs
based on the procurement strategy. Equipment costs cover the vendor's cost for
Odourisation
The odourisation system comprises the storage and injection equipment to dose
odourising chemicals into send out gas. The weight is based on the regasification
terminal facility capacity.
Safety
The safety system weight comprises firewater and foam systems. It includes for all
necessary firewater pumps, foam units, distribution systems, sprinkler systems, fire
suppressant, firewater storage tanks and necessary firefighting equipment.
891
QUE$TORHelp
Freight
procurement to its intended destination.It is a fixed percentage applied to the
from the same region as the regasification terminal facility location or from out of
region.
892
QUE$TORHelp
Material Costs
Steelwork
specified. This includes all prefabricated skids, main truss framing, outfitting steel for
Berth
This is the material cost for building the berths for the LNG tankers. It includes all
berthing dolphins, breasting dolphins, unloading platform and associated
fastenings.The length is based on the tanker size.
Jetty
This is the material cost for building a jetty to which the tanker can moor.It includes
all necessary materials to build the jetty.
Marine Slip
This is the material cost for building the reinforced concrete perimeter wall of the
marine slip.
893
QUE$TORHelp
Breakwater
This is the material cost for building a breakwater, it includes all boulders and the
steel retaining structure.
LNG Flowlines
This is the material cost of the LNG flowlines specified in Marine infrastructure.The
cost is based on insulated low temperature stainless steel (grade 316) pipelines.
Piping (cryogenic)
This item includes the cost of all necessary low temperature stainless steel (grade
316) piping and manually operated valves required to connect all the cryogenic
equipment together. It includes a range of pipeline sizes and different materials and
includes all pipe rack and pipe supports required. The piping cost is calculated by
applying factors to each of the cryogenic equipment system weights, summing these
and applying a unit rate to give a total cost.
Piping
and different materials and includes all pipe rack and pipe supports required.The
total cost.
Electrical
equipment together.It includes all junction boxes but excludes transformers and
includes all cabling racking and ties. The electrical cost is calculated by applying
Instruments
Others
894
QUE$TORHelp
cost.
Civils Materials
Freight
as the regasification terminal facility Location or from out of region.
895
QUE$TORHelp
Prefabrication tab of the production facility user interface, and are updated in the cost


site to the field.
896
QUE$TORHelp
Construction Costs

breakdown giving details of how the construction costs are calculated, see
Site Preparation
This is a total area based on the foundations requirement of the equipment previously
calculated.The cost includes for all preparation work required prior to construction,
e.g. clearing and levelling of jungle.
Civil Construction
This includes the construction of all equipment specified and is a cost based on the
total foundations area previously calculated.
Tank Excavation
This is only required for membrane storage tanks, which are buried. The volume is
based on the volume of the storage tank with an allowance for construction access.
897
QUE$TORHelp
General Costs
The general costs cover all other expenditures associated with the regasification
terminal facility.They include design, project management, certification, insurance
and a contingency.

l
facility.It covers through to installation at the location. This includes project
man-hours based on the design man-hours. Pre-sanction management costs are
not included within QUE$TOR and should be added as necessary. Operations
898
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
This is a fixed percentage of the regasification terminal facility cost and includes
insurance for all project components during transportation, construction, installation
and testing and commissioning. Personnel liability insurance is covered in the
respective cost centres.
Certification
Contingency
899
QUE$TORHelp

are four possible tabs: LNG regas onshore, Onshore, Offshore plus a Summary tab.
Which sections are produced is dependent on the development types in use in
QUE$TOR. For an LNG regasification development the LNG regas onshore tab will
appear along with the tabs for any other components, offshore or onshore, on the
FDS.
Note: The activation of the relevant licence will result in the development OPEX
being included even if no components are present.

l
Operating personnel: the permanent manning levels required.

maintenance, planned and unplanned repair and replacement.
the field, supply boats and standby boats.
Insurance:insurance of the facilities from the start of production.
Indirect costs: these include;
900
QUE$TORHelp
l

Tariff costs:includes both tariffs paid by the operator for transportation or
2
values in OPEX.
Note: Once OPEX values are unlocked, either individually or using the Unlock
Working with OPEX

Note:If components are deleted from the Field Development Schematic then
the Cost summary sheet.The Cancel button is only active at the cost summary level.
901
QUE$TORHelp
QUE$TOR default input values. Changes to any OPEX input values will be retained
Note: Existing OPEX analysis "changes" to input values in projects saved in

QUE$TOR 2012 Q1 and earlier will be lost when opened in the current
version. To keep them, open the project in the earlier version.
Locking/Unlocking
OPEX input values are automatically locked if the default values are overwritten.If
option.
in the menu bar.
the main menu bar.OPEX locked values are shown in the lower part of the Locked
902
QUE$TORHelp

cell to the range of cells or Fill left to apply the value in the rightmost cell to the
range of cells.
903
QUE$TORHelp
904
QUE$TORHelp
Operating Personnel
This covers the permanent manning levels required by the regasification terminal
facility.These numbers are shown in the Operating personnel window along with the
Shift rotation pattern and annual Cost per man taken from the procurement strategy.
The wellpad groups and production facilities operating personnel sheet is shown
below.
The permanent manning levels on each facility are passed from the regasification
terminal facility components. These numbers are shown in the Operating personnel
The operating personnel cost is based on the number of permanent crew onsite with
allowance for a replacement crew or crews on leave according to the rotation
pattern.The Days onsite 2 and Days offsite 2 inputs allow you to specify more than
one shift pattern.The Cost per man covers salaries, expenses, payroll burden, etc
but excludes transport to and from the platform.
905
QUE$TORHelp

Inspection and maintenance window.
costs are assigned to one of three areas: spares, inspection and repair. The basis of
Information is displayed for each component by type, i.e. LNG regasification
terminals and Pipelines.
Note: Pipeline related costs are shown in the Onshore tab, LNG regasification
terminal costs are shown in the LNG regas onshore tab.
Inspection is based on contract labour or services to complete periodic inspection and
includes for equipment vendor representatives and specialist inspection staff in
addition to the permanent maintenance crew. For pipelines inspection specialist
teams and equipment are hired.
By default, pipeline operating costs include for scheduled intelligent pigging
operations and pipeline repair. The repair interval varies by pipeline material
selection and region.Intelligent pigging cost includes the hire of the pig, specialist
operators and analysis of the results.
The initial year and interval between the pipeline inspection and repair operations can
be both adjusted. Costs are displayed for each individual pipeline.
906
QUE$TORHelp

Clicking on Logistics and consumables in the OPEX summary opens the Logistics
and consumables summary window.
Clicking on Consumables costs in the OPEX Consumables, logistics & vehicles

window opens the Consumables window.
Nitrogen
The amount of nitrogen consumed is determined from the LNG flowrate and the
Nitrogen level specified in the LNG processing sub-component. This is only
considered in the OPEX when Purchase is selected for as the Nitrogen supply option.
Fuel Gas
The electrical power load and gas turbine driver duties for all facilities are brought
forward from the component estimates.Power loads are calculated assuming 70% of
the duty is production flow related with a fixed 'base load' equal to 30% of the load in
the plateau production year. From these power loads, fuel gas requirements are
calculated using typical efficiencies for power generation sets and gas turbine drivers
and the number of on-stream days. The cost of fuel gas is only included for projects
where gas is exported and is then charged at sales gas value.Where all produced gas
is flared or re-injected into the reservoir it is assumed the gas has no value.
Diesel
generators, cranes, fire pump testing, etc.An allowance is also included for the base
electrical load on a FPSO or semi-submersible.
907
QUE$TORHelp
The cost of diesel and the various injection chemicals are taken from the OPEX cost
database.
Clicking on Logistics costs in the OPEX Consumables, logistics & vehicles window
opens the Logistics window.
Transportation
The personnel transportation costs for each grade are dependent on the Distance
travelled from their home, the Frequency with which each trip is made, the Method of
transport and the Number of Men. The first three values are picked up from the
regional technical database. The number of men is picked up from the Operating
Personnel sheet. To revise the method of transportation click on the dropdown arrow
against Method and select either Road, Rail or Air.
The cost to transport consumables to the field is dependent on the Transportation (%
of consumable cost) and the Cost of Consumables. The first value is picked up from
the regional technical database and varies according to the method of transportation
selected for other labour. The cost of consumables (excluding fuel gas and power
from the grid) is picked up from the Consumables sheet.
Messing
Messing costs (cost of providing food and cleaning) are dependent on the Cost per
man day and the Total Men at Site. he first value is picked up from the regional
technical database and the second from the Operating Personnel sheet.
Vehicles
Vehicle lease costs are dependent on the Cost per vehicle and the Number of
Vehicles. The first value is picked up from the regional technical database and is
based on a vehicle pay back period of three years, the second is dependent on the
number of personnel in the field.
908
QUE$TORHelp
909
QUE$TORHelp
Insurance
Annual insurance costs are determined as a percentage of the initial capital costs.
The percentages are applied to the total component capital cost, assuming complete
clicking on Insurance costs.This displays the Insurance window.
910
QUE$TORHelp
Field / Project OPEX

Clicking on Field / project costs displays the field/project costs window.
The field / project costs cover the onshore support and administration related to the
Support
l
Administration:covers the cost of supervising and pay-rolling the operating

crews.The cost is determined as a percentage of personnel costs.
Warehousing:includes for a secure warehouse and open storage area to store
key spare equipment, piping and valves. The rate includes labour costs and office
accommodation.The cost is determined as a percentage of personnel costs.
Corporate support: covers on going project support by management and
engineering staff at head office.The cost is determined as a percentage of
personnel costs.
Personnel costs: are read from the personnel cost section of the OPEX sheet.
Infrastructure support: covers the annual maintenance and repair of the
infrastructure. The cost is determined as a percentage of the infrastructure capital
costs.
Land Costs
Land Costs are dependent on the area and whether the land is purchased, rented or
acquired at no cost. To revise the method of payment click on the dropdown arrow
against Land Costs and select either Rent, Purchase or None.If the land is purchased
a one-off payment in Year 1 is assumed.
Land Cost per m is dependent on the method of land payment and applied equally to
all land.
The area shown is the total Site preparation areas read from the corresponding
component cost sheets.
911
QUE$TORHelp
Over-writing any input value automatically results in the costs being updated.
912
QUE$TORHelp
Tariffs
Clicking on Tariff costs opens the Tariffs window, shown below.This shows the liquid
and gas profiles on which tariffs can be paid. These default to the field export
profiles but you can overwrite them.You can also include profiles on which tariffs can
be received.
processing and transportation of the liquid and gas streams.
913
QUE$TORHelp
CO2 Emission Taxes

below.

2
Process fluids: For the LNG regasification terminal, this will always be zero as
there is no acid gas removal unit.
2
2
2
flared gas rate.
2
emissions source 1 and Other CO2 emissions source 2 line items. The labels
over-typing the text.The default annual volumetric flow for these other sources of
CO is zero so the flow for each year of field life must be manually entered.
2
2
914
QUE$TORHelp
Leases
project.
915
QUE$TORHelp

profiles from the calculated engineering data used to produce cost estimates.This is
technical data such as weight, length and durations. Scheduling is accessed from the
contracting techniques and practices.
916
QUE$TORHelp

Project menu.
component in the project.The table also includes a distribution (Dist) column.When a
component is expanded distributions can be chosen for each cost centre.A scheduling
bar indicates when first oil will be produced.The Toolbar Icons give various
shortcuts.
equipment or installation.These are each assigned a default start date and duration
and are called activities.The activities that make up each component are based on
components can be expanded.To do this either expand the component individually or
917
QUE$TORHelp
Distributions

specifying the percentage of time and cost apportioned to each period. QUE$TOR uses
918
QUE$TORHelp
and the third will be automatically calculated. You should ensure that the sum of the
Locking
with activities upon which the edited activity is dependent will then be broken.
Unlocking values will restore the default relationships and durations.
unlock all its start dates and durations. Individual start dates and durations can also
First Oil
this on the scheduling chart as a vertical bar. The first oil indicator has no direct
which production will start in the investment and production profile. Moving the first
production profile.
will usually be the end of the main facility construction.Moving this activity, or others
link by moving the first oil bar on the scheduling chart. This will have no effect on the
rest of scheduling.
919
QUE$TORHelp
When you move the first oil bar it will lock. It can also be locked and unlocked by
Timescale
The project timescale is displayed in months, starting from zero. The calendar
beginning of the month specified.If the start month is month 1, 0 in the project

Note: Generating a new concept will delete all components and so any schedule
will be lost.
920
QUE$TORHelp

921
QUE$TORHelp
Investment and Production Profile

Investment and production profile from the Project menu.The window
The investment and production profile summarises the overall project costs: presanction and post-sanction project costs, scheduled CAPEX (Regas and other
facilities), OPEX (Fixed, Variable, Tariffs, Leases and CO2 tax)and decommissioning
costs along with the along with CO2 emissions and production profile for exported
product streams. An OPEX analysis and a CAPEX schedule will be automatically
generated if you have not already edited them. The profile is always consistent with
the current project configuration and current CAPEX and OPEX. Only components that
currently exist in the field development plan will be included in the profile.
locked.

922
QUE$TORHelp
The OPEX and production profiles begin at first gas. The date of first gas can be edited
in scheduling. If first gas is part way through the year then the OPEX and production
profiles are recalculated to account for the partial year of production.The overall
production and expenditures are not changed, they are just given a new timescale to
match the project timescale.
In the example comparison of profile timescales, first gas for a project with a 25 year
field life occurs exactly 3/4 of the way through project year 4.The production profile
is recalculated so that it starts at the beginning of month 10 in year 4 in the
investment profile and ends in month 9 in project year 29.
in the

in the toolbar. Select
on the preview screen to print the report.Alternatively, to print the profile without
previewing it click
in the toolbar.
in
923
QUE$TORHelp

in the toolbar.This
save the project to run AS$ET at a later date.When the File method is selected you
924
QUE$TORHelp
each component.
Decommissioning costs of the LNG regasification component is based around
percentages of the component CAPEX values; this option can be used in preference to
the detailed algorithms if desired.
925
QUE$TORHelp
The LNG Regasification decommissioning scenario form is accessed through the
Project menu of the main QUE$TOR toolbar and is shown below.
This form allows you to specify the decommissioning parameters for the LNG
Regasification component, each of the parameters can be changed and scenarios
saved. Each saved scenario can be opened and applied to a project. The Toolbar
Buttons allow you to manage your scenarios. The parameters in the form are applied
to all components within the project when you press OK.
the decommissioning activities with a uniform distribution of the decommissioning
costs assumed.

926
QUE$TORHelp
927
QUE$TORHelp
component and select Edit / view decommissioning. For pipelines, select the
The cost sheet is shown on the right hand side of the screen.
Cost estimate
The cost sheet for the component is shown on the right hand side of the screen. The
LNG Regasification cost sheet is shown below.
decommissioning scenario.It is possible to go to any blue number in the cost sheet
Scrap
The modules may be assigned a scrap value.A negative value should be entered for
income or a positive value if disposal onshore invokes a cost.You should overwrite
this to reflect current and local conditions.
928
QUE$TORHelp
Data Input
QUE$TOR has been developed for a Microsoft Windows environment and
consequently uses familiar Windows conventions for program operation.
There are two main views that you will see used within QUE$TOR, the first of these
that you encounter is input form and the second is a spreadsheet type format. In both
the forms and the spreadsheets the same colour scheme is used to aid data input.
This is:
l
l
Blue values - you can edit and lock these values. See below for details.
Black values - you cannot edit or lock these values. They are generally shown for
information only.
Text boxes
The most common form of data entry within QUE$TOR is through text boxes. One of
the first examples of this you will see when creating a project is the recoverable
reserves value.
The text boxes will have a default value that is based on the calculations behind the
program. For the recoverable reserves this is a value picked up from a database or
typical values for the selected basin.
The other main ways of inputting data are:
Option buttons
These provide a choice from a selection of options located within a frame.
Generally, options buttons are used where there are two or three distinct options. In
the example above, when artificial lift is selected this can be by either gas lift or
pumped wells.
Dropdown lists
Boxes with a dropdown arrow to the right of them allow the selection any of the
options in the dropdown list.
Generally, these are used in preference to option buttons where there a more than
two options. The options available can be viewed and selected by clicking on the
dropdown arrow.
929
QUE$TORHelp
Check boxes
Check boxes are used where there is a simple yes or no choice for the inclusion of an
item.
In the example above, the crude is either waxy or it isn't. With the appropriate
assumptions made based on the selection.
930
QUE$TORHelp
Locked Values
Any calculated variable in QUE$TOR, whether on the cost sheet or in the inputs can be
locked.Locking a variable will prevent it from being recalculated by the program. A
locked value is shown in bold and there is a padlock symbol to the left of the input.
Locking should be used with care to ensure that you don't lock values based on
incorrect data.To avoid this you should follow the calculation hierarchy, see Data
Flow and Locking for further details.
You can see all of the locked values within a project using by opening the Locked
values report.
When you overwrite a value within a project it will become locked. The value will be
shown in bold and there will be a padlock symbol to the left of the value entry box,
see below.
To Unlock a Locked Value

You may unlock the data item with a right mouse click and the program will revert to
the calculated value or default value.
Note: You can use this method to lock a value without changing it.
931
QUE$TORHelp
Units
Each input within the program will be assigned a suitable unit, this will generally
appear to the right of the value. The unit assigned will be based on the selected unit
set for the project and the expected size of the value. Individual input units can be
changed on the fly by clicking on the unit and selecting the unit you wish to use from
the options available, this is shown for the recoverable reserves input below.
Changing the unit selected will convert the value in the cell in to the new unit.
Note: Locked values will be converted to the new unit and will remain locked.
The default units to be used within a new project can be chosen in the project
properties.QUE$TOR ships with three built-in unit sets: Oilfield, Imperial and Metric.
You can also define their own unit sets using the unit editor.
Unit Nomenclature
The following nomenclature is used throughout QUE$TOR, regardless of the unit set
selected:
l
M: Thousands (10^3), as seen for the Mm3 and Mcf entries above.
MM: Millions (10^6), as seen for the MMm3, MMbbl and MMcf entries above.
B: Billions (10^9), as seen for the Bcf entry above.
T: Trillions (10^12), as seen for the Tcf entry above.
932
QUE$TORHelp
Form Conventions
Forms are used extensively throughout QUE$TOR and follow standard Windows
conventions, which are summarised briefly below.
Tabs
Tabs are used within the program to allow more data to fit into a single form. The
tabs are generally grouped around a common theme. The offshore field level data
form contains three tabs: Fluid characteristics, Fluid / profile characteristics and
Miscellaneous.
Each tab contains data that can be edited or confirmed. You can access a tab by left
clicking on the tab heading.
Form Buttons
For pop up forms, there will generally be three buttons at the bottom of each form.
Opens the Project notes form, see Project notes for more details.
OK applies changes to the inputs, closes the form and updates all
dependent values elsewhere in the program.
Cancel closes the form without saving any changes that have been
made.
Generally, the values on a form will recalculate automatically. For those forms where
this does not happen, such as gas compression, you will see a Recalc button in
addition to the buttons described above.
Recalc accepts the changes on an input sheet and recalculates the cost
sheet to show the impact of that change.
Component buttons
When you are within a component, again there will be three buttons at the bottom of
the screen.
933
QUE$TORHelp
For component forms, there is an additional Apply button that can be seen under the
component inputs.
Apply applies changes to the input sheet and updates all dependent
values elsewhere in the program.
OK does the same as Apply but you will also exit the component.
Cancel closes the component without saving any changes that have been
made.
Note: The project notes feature can be accessed from the main toolbar when
within a component.
934
QUE$TORHelp
Warning Messages
QUE$TOR incorporates a messaging system to warn you when errors may be
occurring.When a potential error is spotted a message is displayed at the bottom of
the active window.
Clicking on the message will display all relevant messages in a scrollable list.An
example of the messages you may receive are shown below.
There are three levels of message as indicated by the following icons:

l
Information
Potential errors
Identified errors
The messages give a description of where the problem is occurring. QUE$TOR will
require you to review/revise default values to resolve any identified problems.
Note: Whilst efforts have been made to make this messaging system
comprehensive it is unlikely to be able to pick up every problem that may occur.
The error messages can be copied to the clipboard by right clicking on the message
list and selecting Copy or they can be printed or exported to Microsoft Excel using the
reporting options, see Reports for more details.
935
QUE$TORHelp
About Program Menus

The program menus allow you to access the section describes the actions of the
commands and operations available from the dropdown menus above the field
development schematic (FDS) when a project is open. Menu options are greyed out
when not available.
The utilities toolbar provides a shortcut to many of the menu commands. Where
available, the relevant button is shown next to each of the commands listed below.
936
QUE$TORHelp
File Menu
The file menu contains the primary actions for dealing with a project. The options are
based around the options you would find in the file menu of a Microsoft application,
such as MS Excel.
l
New project:
exits the current project and create a new one from
scratch.QUE$TOR will prompt you to save your project.Remember projects are
not saved automatically.
Open:
Recent projects:provides shortcuts to projects used recently.
Save:
Save as...:allows the project to be saved under a new name.
Print preview:
Print:
Export to Excel workbook:
opens a previously saved project.
saves the project under its existing name.
shows how the printout will appear on the page.
prints the active screen.

allows reports to be exported to Excel.
Exit:
closes the program. QUE$TOR will prompt you to save your project.
Remember projects are not saved automatically.
937
QUE$TORHelp
Project Menu
The project menu allows you to navigate around the project. The first four options
allow you to navigate back to the data entered when creating the project. Once you
have reviewed these values a small tick will appear on the menu next to the reviewed
data.
l
Project properties:opens the Project properties form, which displays the

project details such as the field location, procurement strategy and primary
product.
Field level data:
opens the field level data form, which allows specification
of high level variables such as reserves.
Production profile: opens the production profile generator allowing the
estimation or input of the overall field liquid and gas profiles and the number of
development wells required.
Concept selector:
allows you to review the concept chosen.
The next three menu options allow you to move forward from the schematic to create
full lifecycle costs. Once you have confirmed these costs a small tick will appear next
the option.
l
OPEX:opens the OPEX module allowing you to calculate field operating costs.
Scheduling:opens the scheduling component allowing you to schedule the
calculated CAPEX.
Investment and production profiles:opens the investment & production
profile, which brings together the scheduled CAPEX, OPEX and production profiles.
938
QUE$TORHelp
Options Menu
The options menu allows you to change some of the assumptions around the project.
These options can be applied to the project at any time but you may need to rerun the
OPEX, schedule and investment profile for the impacts to be seen in these reports.
l
Project costs: opens the project costs form, where you can add the costs to the
project that fall outside of the traditional estimate.
Note: The project costs will have a small tick to signify if one or more costs are
being applied to the project.
l
Contingency options: allows the contingency levels within the project to be

adjusted. See Contingency options for more details.
Ghost options: allows the cost of drilling components to be ignored while
maintaining the technical parameters. See Ghosting of drilling components for
more details.
Note: The selected ghosting options will only apply to future drilling
components. Existing components will not be affected.
The next group of menu options allow you to specify the decommissioning cost basis
for the components. The options that are available are dependent on the type(s) of
component you are using within your project.
l
Offshore decommissioning:opens the offshore decommissioning options to

allow you to change the decommissioning assumptions for offshore components.
Onshore decommissioning:opens the onshore decommissioning options to
allow you to change the decommissioning assumptions for onshore components.
LNG Regas decommissioning:opens the LNG Regasification decommissioning
options to allow you to change the change the decommissioning assumptions for
LNG regasification components.
939
QUE$TORHelp
Reports Menu
The reports menu allows you to create printed reports from the project. The first
group contains just a single option.
l
Report builder wizard: starts the report builder wizard which allows you to
create a user defined report.
The second group contains two reports that are available for all projects.
l
Locked values: opens a preview of the locked values report. This shows where
values have been locked in the program. See locked value report for more details.
Project notes: opens the projects notes form. This allows you to keep
development notes within the project. See Project notes for further details.
The next group of options contain shortcuts to high level reports. The options that are
available are dependent on the type(s) of component you are using within your
project.
l
Offshore cost summary:opens a print preview of the cost summary report of

the offshore components only.
Onshore cost summary:opens a print preview of the cost summary report of
the onshore components only.
LNG Regas onshore cost summary: opens a print preview of the cost
summary report of the LNG regasification onshore components only.
Combined cost summary:opens a print preview of the cost summary report
including all components.
Offshore decommissioning cost summary: opens a print preview of the
decommissioning cost summary of the offshore components.
Onshore decommissioning cost summary: opens a print preview of the
decommissioning cost summary of the onshore components.
LNG Regas onshore decommissioning cost summary: opens a print preview
of the decommissioning cost summary of the LNG regasification onshore
components.
Combined decommissioning cost summary: opens a print preview of the
decommissioning cost summary report including all components.
Project summary: opens a print preview of the project summary report.
Project metrics: A report that provides metrics on the project and the
components so that a comparison can be made with other projects and with
industry metrics.
OPEX summary: opens a print preview of the OPEX summary report.
940
QUE$TORHelp
l
Investment and production profiles: opens a print preview of the investment

& production profile report.
Project costs: opens a preview report of the project costs report.
The final option provides a shortcut for copying the field development schematic to
the clipboard.
l
Copy schematic image to clipboard: copies an image of the field development

schematic to the clipboard as a bitmap file so you can paste it into an another
application, e.g. Word or PowerPoint, for reporting purposes.
941
QUE$TORHelp
Tools Menu
The tools menu gives you access to program utilities. The first section gives access to
the program utilities:
l
Database editor: allows you to view and edit QUE$TORs cost and technical
databases, see Database editor for further details.
Project editor: allows you to view and edit the procurement strategy and
technical database used within saved projects, see Project editor for further
details.
Project viewer: allows you to view and compare the key parameters of multiple
projects without having to open the projects individually, see Project viewer for
further details.
Unit editor:
further details.
allows a default unit set to be defined, see Unit editor for
The second section allows you to manage your network licences.

l
Network licence manager: opens the network licence manager, this allows you
to view, borrow and return the available licences. See Network licence
management for further details.
The final section allows to check you are using the latest version of the software.
l
Check for updates: will check that the version of QUE$TOR that you are using is
the latest available version.
942
QUE$TORHelp
Help Menu
The help menu allows you to access resources that will give you assistance when
using the program.
l
Help topics: opens QUE$TOR Help. This gives a simple user guide to the program
together with detailed explanations of the methodology used throughout the
program.
Release notes: opens a pdf version of the release notes for the version you are
running. The release notes highlight important, version specific, information.
IHS online community: will open your default web browser, and you will be
taken to the QUE$TOR user community. Here you can access support resources,
discuss issues with other users and have input on future program enhancements.
A link to the user community is also provided in the status bar at the bottom of the
main QUE$TOR window.
Email support: will open your default email browser with a new email addressed
to the QUE$TOR support email: support_questor@ihs.com. A link to this email
address is also provided in the status bar at the bottom of the main QUE$TOR
window.
Email licensing: will open your default email browser with a new email
addressed to the QUE$TOR licensing email: questor_licensing@ihs.com. It will
create an attachment to this email, detailing all local licences (dongles) attached
to your machine at the time.
About: displays a form containing the QUE$TOR version number and build details.
943
QUE$TORHelp
About Data Flow and Locking

as topsides and jackets. Each of these components will influence or be dependent on
the design of associated components, e.g. jacket design is dependent on its
associated topsides.Components are linked or docked to those components from
which they require data.There are also high level parameters defined within
QUE$TOR, such as reserves, which influence all components.
passes all requisite data on to the next component. The order of this is defined by the
a selection of built-in defaults.The components selected by the concept are then run
If you wish to fix parameters within a component you can lock them. Locking a
variable will prevent it from being recalculated by the program.
944
QUE$TORHelp
Data Flow between Components

The data flow between components is defined by a calculation hierarchy.This defines
the order in which components are calculated and is illustrated below. Data is
automatically passed to components lower in the hierarchy, i.e. data in level 1 (field
level data) is automatically passed to level 2 (production profile) and to all other
levels.Data is not generally passed in the opposite direction although there are cases
where it is, these are listed below.
Changing any variable or component will automatically change all variables and
components below it in the hierarchy e.g. a change to topsides weight will change the
jacket cost.
The one exception is the concept selector where the concept must be manually
changed.Changes to the field level data or production profile are still passed
automatically to all components below the concept selector in the hierarchy, e.g.
changing the plateau production rate will change the production capacity of the
topsides.However, if changes to the field level data or production profile result in a
change to QUE$TORs default concept the concept will not be changed until you enter
the concept selector and manually select the new concept.
Changing the concept will delete all components and create a new set of components.
Note: When you change the concept you will lose any changes you have made
to the components in the original field development plan
945
QUE$TORHelp
946
QUE$TORHelp
Exceptions to the hierarchy order
Oil and gas export: oil export pumps and gas export compressors are dependent
on the pressure drop in the export pipeline. The export pipelines are sized first and
changing the pipeline diameter will automatically recalculate the pumps or
compressors.
Multiple topsides
QUE$TOR uses a logical technique in passing flowrates between multiple topsides.
The topsides must be linked with appropriate pipelines before any data is passed
between them, for example gas lift flowrates wont be passed between two topsides
unless they are linked by a gas lift pipeline.
When two topsides are linked by a pipeline they look at the pipeline direction (as
defined in the pipeline component) to work out which direction the flows are
travelling in. Data is then passed in the direction of production.Increasing the oil
flowrate on a wellhead platform tied back to a processing platform will increase the
capacity on the processing platform. Similarly increasing the gas injection on a
wellhead platform receiving gas injection from a main platform will increase the gas
injection capacity on the main platform. These relationships do not apply in reverse.
See Well flow and distribution for further details.
947
QUE$TORHelp
Data Flow Within Components

Many of component inputs influence other inputs within the component.Usually this is
relatively simple, for example the number of storage days for a tanker will affect the
tanker size chosen. Data flow between these types of inputs also follows a calculation
hierarchy. Changing the number of days storage required will dynamically update the
tanker size but changing the tanker size will not update the number of days
storage.These types of relationships are explained individually for each component
in the help sections covering component inputs.
The data flow between topsides facilities is illustrated below. The flowchart is
designed to give a broad view of the relationships between sub-components. Any
changes to a sub-component may affect all sub-components downstream of it in the
flowchart.This does not apply to every parameter of a sub-component and neither
does it mean that every downstream sub-component will be influenced by changes to
an upstream component.
948
QUE$TORHelp
Locking
locked. Locking a variable will prevent it from being recalculated by the program.
For example locking the steel weight in a jacket will prevent it from being
recalculated if you add or remove systems from the associated topsides.
It is important to note that you can overwrite locked values at any time. In terms of
QUE$TOR a locked value is one that will not be changed by the program; you can
change it freely.
Variables can be locked by right clicking on them and selecting Locked. Variables are
locked automatically if you change them. They can be unlocked by right clicking on
them and de-selecting Locked.When you do this they will revert to the values
calculated by the program.
Locking should be used with care to ensure that you dont lock values based on
incorrect data. For example the power demand in a topsides is calculated by adding
the power requirements of all processes on the platform. If you changed the model of
turbines selected and locked them before adjusting other topsides systems you may
be basing your turbine selection on an incorrect power demand.
To avoid this you should follow the calculation hierarchy. When adjusting projects:
start with the highest level inputs (field level data) and work down to the lowest
(scheduling). In some situations you may wish to input your own data and ignore
QUE$TORs calculations and so QUE$TOR does allow you to enter data in any order.
You can see all of the locked values within a project using by opening the Locked
values report.
949
QUE$TORHelp
About Project Costs

The project costs can be used to add costs to a project that would traditionally fall
outside of the QUE$TOR estimate. A project cost can either be pre-sanction e.g. FEED
costs or post-sanction e.g. the owner's project management cost.
The project cost selections can be viewed and edited within the project costs form. To
open this, select Project costs from the Options menu within an open project.
When selected, the costs will be added to the overall project CAPEX within the main
cost tree and all CAPEX reports.
This additional CAPEX cost can be scheduled within CAPEX scheduling.
950
QUE$TORHelp
Project Cost Options

When you open the project costs, you will see the form below.
This form is split into two main areas, one for pre-sanction costs and one for postsanction costs. For each category you can add defined costs or manage the available
costs.
The selected project cost details can be printed or exported to Excel using the toolbar
buttons at the top of the form.
To add a project cost

The description below is for pre-sanction costs, but the same methodology applies to
post sanction costs.
1. Click on the Add pre-sanction cost button for the desired section. This will add a
blank cost to that section, as shown for the pre-sanction costs below.
951
QUE$TORHelp
2. Select the cost that you want to add to the project. In the example below, FEED
costs have been added.
QUE$TOR ships with a limited number of pre-defined project costs, if you want to add
a cost outside of these options then you will need to create a new cost item, this can
be achieved by either clicking Create new cost item or Manage cost items. See
Managing Project Costs for further details.
3. Specify the cost basis for the project cost. There are two options here:
l
Set the cost to a percentage of the project CAPEX: the first option is to
set the cost to a percentage of the project CAPEX, shown at the top of the form.
When this option is selected, the owner's cost will be updated to reflect changes
in the project CAPEX.
Set the cost to a monetary value: the second option is to define the
owner's cost as a monetary value. In the example below the cost has been set
to $25 million.
Note: the default values for the available project costs are only rough
guidelines. You should adjust these values based on your own benchmarks.
Steps 1-3 can be repeated to add all of the desired project costs. Once you have
added the desired costs, click OK to return to the main QUE$TOR window.
To remove a project cost

There are two ways in which you can remove a cost from an estimate, the first is to
uncheck the box to the right of the name. This will leave the cost on the form but
remove the cost from the project.
The second way is to click on the delete button (X) to the left of the name. This will
remove the cost from the project and any changes to the cost will be removed from
the form.
952
QUE$TORHelp
To set the default project costs
Project costs are not selected by default for new projects for new users. If you are
installing QUE$TOR onto a machine with a previous version of QUE$TOR then the
project cost or owner's cost defaults will be picked up from the previous version.
To set a new default, you should create the desired project cost setup and then click
the Save as default button. This new default will then apply to all new projects,
both onshore and offshore.
953
QUE$TORHelp
Managing Project Costs

When you click on Manage cost items, the form below will open.
The available costs are shown on the left of the form, with the parameters of the
selected cost shown on the right of the form. QUE$TOR ships with a number of in-built
costs. For pre-sanction costs, there are three built in options: Environmental studies,
FEED costs and Licensing costs. For post sanction costs there are seven built in
options: Variable owner's costs, Fixed owner's costs, Legal costs, Right of way costs,
Security costs, Surveying and HAZOPs.
Item name
The item name can be changed to reflect the project cost.
Cost
There are two options for defining the expenditure in the project cost.
l
Set the cost to a percentage of the project CAPEX: the first option is to set
the cost to a percentage of the project CAPEX, shown at the top of the form. When
this option is selected, the owner's cost will be updated to reflect changes in the
project CAPEX.
Set the cost to a monetary value: the second option is to define the owner's
cost as a monetary value.
Schedule distribution
Each project cost is assigned a distribution type, this determines the profile of
clicking on the distribution cell. There are five possible distribution options, with each
distribution made up of three time periods, the distribution is defined by specifying
the percentage of time and cost apportioned to each period.
l
DPD: down payment and delivery, this distribution is seen for equipment and
materials activities where a down payment would typically be paid at the point of
order and the remainder paid on delivery. This option is not used as a default for
954
QUE$TORHelp
any of the project costs.
l
UNI: uniform distribution,this spreads the project costs uniformly over the
activity's duration. This is used as the default for all pre-sanction costs and some
post-sanction costs
TRI: triangular distribution, this sees a higher distribution during the middle of the
activity's duration and is never used by default.
CBD: CAPEX breakdown distribution, this allocates the project cost based on the
percentage of the total CAPEX spent within a given month. This is used as the
default for limited post-sanction costs.
User: user defined distribution, this allows you to specify the cost distribution for
the activity. When specifying a user defined distribution, you can adjust the first
two time periods and the third will be automatically calculated.
Schedule duration
This is the duration over which the project cost will be spent. This is not applicable if
the CBD distribution has been selected because the cost is spread over the period of
CAPEX expenditure.
Creating a new project cost

QUE$TOR ships with a limited number of default project costs. These costs can be
added to by either clicking Create new cost item either within the main project
cost window or within the cost items form. Within the cost item form a new cost will
be added and you can then edit the details of the cost as described above.
When you click on Create new cost item in the main window, the form below will
be shown.
This form allows you to specify the details of the cost without having to go through
the cost items form.
955
QUE$TORHelp
Deleting a project cost
Project costs can be deleted from the saved options by selecting the desired cost and
clicking Delete.
Note: costs currently included within the main estimate cannot be deleted. You
should remove them from the estimate and then delete the cost. The default project
costs that ship with QUE$TOR can also not be deleted.
956
QUE$TORHelp
About Contingency
A contingency is a sum included in a cost estimate to cover events and incidents
which probably will occur during the course of a project but which are at the time of
preparing the estimate, unquantifiable.Contingency funds are expected to be spent.
Within QUE$TOR, a contingency is added on a per component basis as a percentage of
the total cost of that component. The value assigned to the contingency is typically
between 10% and 25%, dependent on the component. The default percentage is
taken from the regional cost database and can be seen in each component's cost
sheet as the final row.
This section provides the definitions and basis for the application of contingencies and
accuracy levels to cost estimates.Companies have different policies for how
contingency should be applied to cost estimates, the Contingency Options allow you
to adjust the contingency assumptions within a project to match these policies.
The definitions of basic terminology used are as follows:
Base Cost Estimate

This is the initial estimate produced as a product of the anticipated scope of work and
rates and standard norms available at the time of estimate preparation.This does not
include for changes in scope of work or for changes in rates or norms during the
project cycle.
Expected Value (or most likely cost)

This is the most likely final cost of the development, defined statistically as the 50/50
value, or the cost with an even chance of being exceeded or underrun.This includes
for increases to the base estimate which can be foreseen as a result of experience
from previous projects. The difference between the Expected Value and the Base Cost
is defined as Contingency.
Contingency
A contingency is a sum included in a cost estimate to cover events and incidents
which probably will occur during the course of a project but which are at the time of
preparing the estimate, unquantifiable.On this basis it is apparent that contingency
funds are expected to be spent.
A contingency is not to cover any variations to the project scope of work and/or
project schedule upon which the estimate was based apart from minor changes that
may occur during the project life span such as clash rectifications and make fit
changes.
A contingency is designated to cover typically:l
Delays to the project schedule due to impact of one contractor to another.
Late delivery of equipment and materials.
Lack of productivity resulting in the need for acceleration measures.
957
QUE$TORHelp
l
Onsite clash rectification, make-fit changes and other minor modifications during
fabrication/construction to promote timely project completion.
Severe weather conditions during installation and hook-up.
A larger degree of onshore incompletion than conventionally allowed resulting in
additional offshore hook-up man-hours.
Consequential and time dependent costs resulting from delays to the project
schedule.
In the event that the cost impact of any of the above is in excess of that reasonably
anticipated then this cost is deemed to be covered within the estimate accuracy
ranges.
Accuracy Levels
The accuracy of the cost estimate (Expected Value), i.e. base cost plus contingency,
is expressed in percentage terms. This is calculated from the difference between the
Expected Value and the Upper and Lower Estimate Values. These limits are the
maximum reasonable anticipated variations to the project cost which may occur
during the project as a result of, for example, major construction problems, major
changes in installation rates, etc.
The upper limit is defined statistically as the 90% estimate, that is the value with a
90% probability of being underrun for the development. The lower limit is defined as
the 10% value, that is the cost with a 10% chance of being underrun.
Operators Reserve
This provides for a sum to raise the 50/50 estimate to a level where the cost is
unlikely to be exceeded i.e. to the 90/10 confidence level.This cost is typically used
by operators in economic evaluation of projects on raising project finance. The
operators reserve includes for incidences which are not likely to occur, but which
may have a significant cost penalty if they do, such as:
l
Significant changes in scope
Major changes in legislation
Major project delays
Significant economic changes such as currency devaluation.
958
QUE$TORHelp
959
QUE$TORHelp
Contingency Options
The Contingency options form allows you to adjust the contingency levels that will be
applied to a project. To open this form, select Contingency options from the
Options menu within an open project.
Note: locked cost sheet contingencies will not be affected by the selection.
There are three options within this form:

l
Default regional contingencies: when selected, the contingency used within

each component will be the value within the procurement strategy selected for the
project. These values range from 10% to 25% dependent on the region and
component. This is the default selection for when QUE$TOR is installed.
Fixed contingency: when selected, you can set the contingency for every
component within a project to a fixed percentage. The level applied to each
component can be adjusted as required.
None: when selected, this sets the contingency to zero for all components within
the project.
On clicking OK, your selection will be applied to the project that you are running.
Note: regardless of the above selection, the contingency level for individual
components can still be adjusted within the component's cost sheet.
To set the contingency level for future projects
The contingency settings can be saved as the default for all new projects created. To
do this:
1. Set the contingency option to your desired new default.
2. Click on Save as default.
Note: this applies to new projects only. Saved projects will open with
contingency options set when the project was saved.
960
QUE$TORHelp
961
QUE$TORHelp
About Component Ghosting

The ability to ghost a component allows you maintain the technical algorithms of the
component while ignoring the cost. It was originally introduced for only the drilling
components due to the large number of users whose drilling cost estimates are
produced outside of QUE$TOR.
If you do not need to include the drilling costs within your estimate then you should
ghost the drilling components rather than delete the components. This allows the
correct flow of data through the program and allows you to specify whether you want
to include the insurance and workover of the wells in the OPEX estimate.
This functionality has now been introduced to all components, with the ability to ghost
the CAPEX and OPEX elements of a component separately. For this release onshore
components only have the ability to ghost the CAPEX, with the exception of onshore
drilling which has both options.
The ability to ghost components could assist in removing costs when a component is
to be leased, for example for a leased FPSO you can ghost the CAPEX and OPEX of the
topsides and tanker to remove the costs from the estimate. If you wanted to leave
the cost of the mooring within the CAPEX estimate then you can ghost only the OPEX
of the tanker and then adjust the CAPEX of the tanker to leave only the mooring cost.
962
QUE$TORHelp
Ghosting of Components
The ghosting of individual components is handled through the field development
schematic. The ghost options for each component can be seen by right clicking on a
component, as shown for the offshore drilling component below.
For each component there are either one or two ghosting options. The two possible
options are Ghost CAPEX and Ghost OPEX. When selected, a tick will appear next to
the ghost option.
Note: Onshore drilling is the only onshore component that has the Ghost OPEX
option.
Ghost CAPEX
When Ghost CAPEX is selected for a component the capital cost of the component is
ignored, with the technical parameters still shown. This results in the following:
l
The component changes appearance, it will be greyed and paler.

The CAPEX estimate is removed from the cost tree on the left hand side of the
screen. The QUE$TOR cost estimate can still be seen by going into the component.
963
QUE$TORHelp
l
No capital cost is shown for the component in any of the summary reports
generated by QUE$TOR, component reports still show the calculated cost.
No capital cost for the component is passed through to scheduling, however the
schedule of the component remains.
No capital cost for the component is passed through to the investment and
production profile.
Note:The calculated CAPEX will still be passed into the OPEX algorithms to
calculate the annual insurance costs.
Ghost OPEX
When Ghost OPEX is selected for a component the operating cost of the component
will be ignored. This results in the following:
l
There will be no change in appearance of the component.

The OPEX activities and costs related to the component will be ignored. For a
drilling component this would include:
l
964
The exclusion of the well workover costs for the wells drilled by the selected
drilling component.
The exclusion of the insurance costs for the wells drilled by the selected drilling
component.
QUE$TORHelp
Ghosting Options
The ghosting options were originally introduced for users who do not need to include
an estimate of the drilling costs within their facilities estimates. To facilitate this, you
can set preferences for the default ghosting selections for future drilling components.
The ghosting options for drilling components can be accessed through the Options
menu, clicking on Ghost options will open the ghost options form.
The ghost options form allows the ghosting defaults to be specified. The selections
made will influence all future drilling components within QUE$TOR but will not affect
any components in an open project.
Note: In order to make changes to an existing project each drilling component

will have to be changed individually. See Ghosting of Components for further details.
965
QUE$TORHelp
each component.
There are detailed bottom-up decommissioning algorithms for limited offshore
components (Topsides, Jackets and Pipelines) which consider the dismantling,
removal and disposal tasks. Decommissioning for the other components is based
around percentages of the component CAPEX values; this option can be used in
preference to the detailed algorithms if desired.
See the decommissioning sections for Offshore, Onshore and LNG Regasification for
further details.
966
QUE$TORHelp
About Reports
QUE$TOR can produce a range of high quality reports.These can be printed or
exported to Excel. Project reports can be created using the Reports menu.Reports
can also be created from the field development schematic and within individual
components by selecting Print, Print preview or Export to Excel.
Selecting Report builder wizard in the Reports menu opens a wizard which allows
you to create a full or customised project report.This wizard can also be accessed by
selecting Print, Print preview or Export to Excel.
The Reports menu also gives a shortcut to the following project reports:
l
Cost summary: A breakdown of the total CAPEX by component and cost centre.
Project summary: A summary of the high level project inputs.
industry metrics.
OPEX summary: The total project OPEX and a high level breakdown of OPEX for
each year of operation.
Investment and production profile: A summary of the annual CAPEX
expenditure under various categories, the annual OPEX plus the annual production
of oil, condensate and gas. In addition, simple cost per barrel equivalent economic
indicators for E&A cost, Drilling cost, Facilities cost, total Capital cost, Operating
cost and Lifecycle cost are given.
Project costs: Opens a preview report of the project costs selections. See
Project costs for further details. This report is only available when at least one
project cost has been selected.
Locked values:Opens a preview of the locked values report. This shows where
values have been locked in the program. See locked value report for more
details.
Copy schematic image to clipboard: This allows you copy the field
development schematic to a clipboard and import it into another document as a
bitmap.
To print reports
Select Print from the File menu or click
to your default printer.
in the toolbar. Reports will be printed
To see a preview before you print, select Print preview from the File menu or click
in
the toolbar.Select
on the preview screen to print the report.
To export reports to Excel
967
QUE$TORHelp
Select Export to Excel workbook from the File menu or click

in the toolbar.
You will be prompted for the location in which you wish to save the Excel file created.
968
QUE$TORHelp
Component Reports
Individual component reports are produced when you have a component open.Two
reports are available: Input data and Cost sheet.When you select Print, Print
preview or Export to Excel a form will appear, as shown below. Use the check
boxes to select the reports you wish to print.When you select Export to Excel the
reports will be saved as an Excel file.
969
QUE$TORHelp
Project Reports
The Reports menu allows users to produce a range of high quality reports.Selecting
Report builder wizard in the Reports menu opens a wizard which allows you to
create a full or customised project report.This wizard can also be accessed by
selecting Print, Print preview or Export to Excel from the File menu.
The Reports menu also gives a shortcut to the following project reports:
l
Cost summary: A breakdown of the total CAPEX by component and cost centre.
Project summary: A summary of the high level project inputs.
industry metrics.
OPEX summary: The total project OPEX and a high level breakdown of OPEX by
year. This report can only be viewed once you have run the OPEX module by
selecting OPEX from the Project menu and then clicked OK to apply and exit.
Investment and production profile: A summary of the annual CAPEX
expenditure under various categories, the annual OPEX plus the annual production
of oil, condensate and gas. In addition, simple cost per barrel equivalent economic
indicators for E&A cost, Drilling cost, Facilities cost, total Capital cost, Operating
cost and Lifecycle cost are given.
Project costs: Opens a preview report of the project costs selections. See
Project costs for further details. This report is only available when at least one
project cost has been selected.
Locked values:Opens a preview of the locked values report. This shows where
values have been locked in the program. See locked value report for more
details.
Copy schematic image to clipboard: This allows you to copy the field
development schematic to the clipboard and import it into another document as a
bitmap.
When the report builder wizard starts, a form will appear asking if you require a
complete or custom report. Select Complete report and click on Finish to print out
every report available.
Note: A complete report can often be over 100 pages.

To specify which reports you want to print select Custom report and click on Next to
open the report builder. The report builder is shown below.
970
QUE$TORHelp
The available reports are shown in the left hand window and the reports selected for
printing are shown in the right hand window.The buttons in the central panel enable
selected reports to be moved between the two windows.All selected component
reports have two check boxes for input and cost reports, these should be checked if
you want the report included. Click on Finish to complete your selection. If you
selected Report builder wizard in the Reports menu or Print preview, a preview
will be displayed before the report is printed. If you selected Print, the report will be
sent to your default printer.
Selecting Export to Excel when you are in the field development schematic allows
you to build a report that will be saved as an Excel file.
971
QUE$TORHelp
Locked Values
The locked values report is only available when at least one value in a data input
form, cost sheet or OPEX form has been locked.
locked.Locking a variable will prevent it from being recalculated by the program. The
locked values report lists all of the locked input values to provide clarity on where
QUE$TOR defaults are not being used.
Note: The report does not show locked values within Scheduling or the
Investment and Production profile.
The locked values report is accessed through the Reports menu, an example report is
shown below.
972
QUE$TORHelp
The locked values are listed in the order you see them within the project, with each
component's locked values being shown under separate headings.
The locked value report can be printed or exported to Excel using the toolbar buttons.
973
QUE$TORHelp
Project Notes
The project notes feature allows you to keep notes on a project on which you are
working. These are saved within the QUE$TOR project file.
It is accessible from all forms using the project notes button located in the bottom
left corner.
From the field development schematic Project notes can be accessed through the
Project menu or by using the toolbar shortcut
Clicking on Project notes opens the project notes form, shown below.
The notes are saved in the project file so that when returning to the project there is a
reference to the previous thought process.
Text can be cut and pasted into the spreadsheet using the standard keyboard
shortcuts, i.e. CTRL+C for Copy, CTRL+V for Paste. The content of the text entered is
down to your preference.
The Project notes can be printed or exported to Excel, see Reports for further details.
974
QUE$TORHelp
975
QUE$TORHelp
About Database Editor

The database editor allows you to create and view/edit both procurement strategies
(cost databases) and the regional technical databases. It can be accessed either
using the Start menu following All Programs\IHS\QUE$TOR 2014
Q3\Database editor or from the Tools menu when QUE$TOR is running.
Note: Any changes made to databases will not be reflected in any existing
projects that use those databases. Only future projects will pick up the changes.
Warning: Care is required when editing procurement strategies and technical
databases. These databases are used to drive QUE$TOR and it is possible to modify
them so that QUE$TOR no longer functions correctly when the modified databases are
used in a project.
On entering the database editor you are given various options,
Click on the button for the task you want to perform.
976
QUE$TORHelp
The procurement strategy specifies the regional databases to be used for each of the
cost centres within a project. For example equipment could be sourced from North
America and design performed in Europe.
You can either view/edit an existing procurement strategy or create a new strategy
using one of the existing databases as its base.
View/Edit Procurement Strategy

If you select View/edit the form, shown below, is displayed allowing you to select the
database you want to open.Only procurement strategies that you have already
created are displayed.By default these are stored in the My
Documents\IHS\QUE$TOR\Procurement Strategies folder. An alternative
folder can optionally be specified. QUE$TOR and the database editor remember the
last folder selected and will use this as the user preference when creating a new
Create new procurement strategy

If you select Create new in the database options form then the form shown below is
displayed allowing you to select the database you want to use as the template.(If no
templates exist then you should refer to Creating Procurement Strategies).
977
QUE$TORHelp
This will open up a copy of the selected template cost database allowing you to make
changes and then save the data under a new file name.
978
QUE$TORHelp
Technical Databases
You can either create your own custom technical database using one of the existing
QUE$TOR default regional databases as a template or view/edit an existing
database.You cannot revise a template database; you can only use it as the basis for
a custom technical database.
Create new technical database
If you select Create new in the database options form then the form, shown below, is
displayed allowing you to select the database you want to use as the template.
The technical databases are listed by filename with separate lists for offshore
technical databases and onshore technical databases.
When you have made all the necessary changes to the template database you need to
save the changes to a new file name.The new database will by default be saved in
the My Documents\IHS\QUE$TOR\Technical Databases folder.You may
select an alternative folder and this will be used as your preference for your custom
technical databases.
View/Edit Technical Database

If you select View/edit in the database options form then the form, shown below, is
displayed allowing you to select the database you want to open.
979
QUE$TORHelp
980
QUE$TORHelp
Database Editor Interface

The following screen shots reflect the interface when opening a procurement
strategy.However, similar screens open when opening a technical database.
Any differences that occur between the information seen when viewing cost and
technical databases are noted below.
On opening the required database the screen is displayed.
To select a table you must choose the Item type, Component type and the Table
description. The Toolbar Buttons provided to help you search through a database,
plus log, print and save changes.
Item Type (procurement strategies)

This allows you to select the procurement strategy item of interest.The options are
certification and insurance, contingency, design & project management, equipment,
fabrication and HUC, freight, installation, linepipe, materials and OPEX.
Item Type (technical databases)

This allows you to select the technical database item of interest.The options are
design & project management, equipment, fabrication and HUC, installation, linepipe,
materials, none and OPEX.
None covers the small group of items that dont fall into any of the other categories.
981
QUE$TORHelp
Component Type
This allows you to select the component of interest.The options include barge, GBS,
jacket, offshore drilling, offshore loading, offshore pipeline, semi-submersible, spar
buoy, subsea, tanker (FPSO), TLP and topsides but vary depending on the database
type and the item type.
Table Description
This allows you to select the cost table of interest.The options in this box vary
depending on the item and component selected.
Some tables contain several columns of values, e.g. equipment, topsides, gas
compression turbine data. If there are a number of columns some may not be visible
without scrolling across.To maximise the amount of data that can be seen without
having to scroll you can use Scale data column width slider to adjust the relative
width of the data columns.
If the show audit information check box is ticked then two more columns (or rows
depending on the format of the selected table) are added to show who edited the data
plus the time and date when the last change was made.
If you are unsure which table contains the data you want to view the search feature
should be used. When selected, the search form is displayed allowing you to enter the
key word(s) you want to search for.
The table produced when the search criteria entered was mooring is shown
below.This shows data items containing the key word(s) and the source table
information allowing you to rapidly go to the required data set.Click on the required
data item (in blue) to open the relevant table.
Note: QUE$TOR can take up to 30 seconds to prepare the database for the first
search. This will enable fast searching for the rest of the current database editing
session.
982
QUE$TORHelp
Should you want to go back to the above set of search results then select the
icon from the toolbar.This feature will display the last set of results from a search.
Four print options available. To select the option you want select the
the toolbar.This displays the Print options form.
icon from
983
QUE$TORHelp
All modifications to the default QUE$TOR data are shown in bold font. A log of all
changes made to the current database between a date range defined by you can be
produced by selecting the
icon in the toolbar.
The format of a typical modification log is shown below, this can be printed or saved
to a directory of your choice.
984
QUE$TORHelp
About Project Editor

The project editor allows changes to be made to the procurement strategy and
technical database used within saved projects.It can be accessed through the
Windows Start menu following All Programs\IHS\QUE$TOR 2014 Q3\Project
editor.
Clicking on project editor opens the form shown below, this allows the project to be
selected.
Only projects that have been saved previously are displayed.By default these are
stored in the My Documents\IHS\QUE$TOR\Projects folder.An alternative
folder can optionally be specified. The last used folder is remembered automatically.
Note: Changes are made directly to the project selected.When a comparison is

required we advise that a copy should be made first and the changes made to this
copy.
985
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
Selecting the project to be edited and clicking Open will open the Project editor.
The project editor displays the procurement strategy and technical database used for
the offshore and onshore sections of the project. If a section is not in use it will not
have a procurement strategy or technical database allocated and will display No file
exists as is the case for the onshore section above.
The details of the selected procurement strategy can be seen by clicking on the
corresponding View button.
To Change a Procurement Strategy or Technical Database

1. Prepare your desired procurement strategy or technical database in advance. This
can be done in the project properties form when creating a new project.
2. Click on the Browse... button. This opens up a browser to locate your new
procurement strategy or database, see the following sections for further details.
3. Select the new procurement strategy or technical database and click Open. This
will return you to the form shown above, with the new database name shown.
4. When you are happy with your changes, click Save to apply the changes to the
file. There is no "Save as" option.
986
QUE$TORHelp
Note: Care must be taken when making changes to a project that you have
open within QUE$TOR. Changes will be made to the last saved version of the project
and the new project will only be seen once the project is reopened.
987
QUE$TORHelp
Clicking on the Browse button next to the procurement strategy will open the
procurement strategy form. This form allows the selection of the new procurement
strategy.
Only procurement strategies that you have already created are displayed.By default
these are stored in the My Documents\IHS\QUE$TOR\Procurement
strategies folder. An alternative folder can optionally be specified. The project
editor remembers the last folder selected and will use this as the user preference
when selecting the procurement strategy.
Note: Inserted procurement strategies must use the same currency as the
original procurement strategy. This is to avoid issues with locked unit rates.
988
QUE$TORHelp
Technical Databases
Clicking on the Browse button next to the technical database will open the
technical database selection form.
You can either use one of the existing 17 offshore or 11 onshore QUE$TOR default
regional technical databases or use a predefined custom technical database.
Selecting the template technical database and clicking OK opens the select technical
database form, shown below.
The technical databases are listed by filename with separate lists for offshore
technical databases and onshore technical databases.
Custom databases are stored in a separate folder.Selecting the custom technical
database and clicking OK opens this folder. The default is My
Documents\IHS\QUE$TOR\Technical Databases.
989
QUE$TORHelp
990
QUE$TORHelp
About Project Viewer

The project viewer allows you to view and compare the key parameters of multiple
projects without having to open the projects individually.It can be accessed through
the Windows Start menu following All Programs\IHS\QUE$TOR 2014
Q3\Project viewer.
Clicking on project viewer opens the form shown below.
When you enter the project viewer you should select which saved project(s) you want
to open. This can be done through the toolbar buttons or File menu. You can open
multiple projects at the same time by holding down the Control key or a range of
projects by holding down the Shift key.
991
QUE$TORHelp
By default QUE$TOR projects are stored in the My

Documents\IHS\QUE$TOR\Projects folder. An alternative folder can optionally
be specified. The last used folder is remembered automatically.
Note: Only projects saved in version 9.7 onwards can be opened in the project
viewer.
992
QUE$TORHelp
User Interface
For each project that you open, a tab will be created within the project viewer. The
tab will contain the key parameters for that project, including the procurement
strategy data, the key technical inputs, a component CAPEX breakdown, a
decommissioning cost breakdown and a lifecycle cost. These tabs can be seen in the
example below.
Note: The information displayed for each project reflects the project at the last
saved point and will only contain an OPEX breakdown if the OPEX report has been
saved.
In addition to the individual tabs there are two tabs that will allow you to compare the
projects that you have opened:
l
Projects: lists the details each project in the unit set and currency in which they
were saved.
Comparison: lists the projects in a common unit set and currency. The unit set
will default to the last used unit set within QUE$TOR and can be changed by
clicking on the hyperlink at the top of the sheet. The currency will always revert to
US Dollars in this sheet using the exchange rate specified in the procurement
strategy.
The order in which the projects appear on the comparison sheets is determined by
the order of the tabs in the project viewer.The tab order can be changed by dragging
a tab to a different location or alternatively you could sort the projects by clicking on
one of the headings within the toolbar buttons.
If you choose to sort by Other then the form shown below will open.
993
QUE$TORHelp
This form allows you to define the sort criteria.
994
QUE$TORHelp
Exporting from the Project Viewer

The information within the project viewer can be printed or exported to Excel using
the toolbar buttons at the top of the form.When you click on Print or Print preview
the form below is shown:
This form allows you to select which sheets you want to print, by default only the
Projects and Comparison sheets are selected.
When you click on the export to Excel button you will be presented with the same
options.
995
QUE$TORHelp
About Unit Editor

QUE$TORs built in unit editor allows you to define a default set of units for use with
your QUE$TOR projects.
QUE$TOR ships with three built-in unit sets: Oilfield, Imperial and Metric.
New unit sets can be created by copying and editing either the built-in sets or your
own custom sets.
A unit set can only be assigned to a QUE$TOR project when the project is first
created.This is done in the project properties, the first form to appear when you
create a new project.The units selected are used for all inputs and outputs.
Remember you can still change the units of all individual values at any stage, simply
by clicking on the unit.
The unit editor can be accessed using the Start menu following All
Programs\IHS\QUE$TOR 2014 Q3\Unit editor. Or select Unit editor from the
Tools menu of QUE$TOR.
996
QUE$TORHelp
Custom Unit Sets

QUE$TORs unit editor allows you to create new unit sets and edit existing ones.
There are three ways to open the unit editor:
l
On the task selection form, which appears when QUE$TOR starts, select Edit units
sets and click OK.
Select Unit editor from the Tools menu in an open project.
Click on
in the utilities toolbar in an open project.
The unit editor will open in a new window and the initial task selection form will
appear.
Note: When you create a project it will take a snapshot of your chosen unit set,
any future changes to that unit set will have no impact on the project. Opening the
unit editor while you have a project open will not allow you to edit the projects unit
set.
Creating a new custom unit set.
1. Select New from the File menu in the unit editor.
2. The Create new unit set form, shown below, opens.
3. Enter a title for the unit set, a description is optional.
4. Select a base unit set that you will edit to create your new unit set.
To use a built-in unit set:Select Use built-in unit set and choose using the
dropdown list
l
To use an existing custom unit set:Select Use custom unit set and click on the
Select button to browse your saved sets.
l
5. Click OK.
997
QUE$TORHelp
Opening a unit set

Select Open from the File menu in the unit editor, and use the browser to locate
your saved unit set.
Note:Built in unit sets cannot be edited

Editing a unit set
Opened unit sets are displayed in a window, as shown below.The panel on the left
contains a tree, from which each unit category can be selected. On the left the units
group and category are displayed along with a description of where it is used. To
change the unit used, change the unit in the current unit box using the dropdown
list.The unit choice in the left hand window will be updated to show your selection.
998
QUE$TORHelp
Saving a unit set.

Once you have made your changes to a new or existing custom unit set you must
save them. Changes are not saved automatically.To do this select Save or Save As
from the File menu.When you do this a Details of change form is displayed as shown
below.This allows you to enter your name (to provide an audit trail) and optionally
enter a description of why/what changes were made.Click OK to complete the save.
999
QUE$TORHelp
About Network Licences

The network licence management utility allows you to view, borrow and return
network licences. It can be accessed from the Tools menu.
Clicking on network licence management opens the form shown below.
Feature
The feature column shows the available network licences. The features that QUE$TOR
is currently using are shown in bold.
Days until expiry

The days until expiry column indicates how many days there are before a feature
expires. This will only be shown for features that QUE$TOR is currently using.
Borrowed until
Features can be borrowed from the server and returned at a later date. When a
feature is borrowed, the last date before the feature is automatically returned is
shown in the borrowed until column of the list.
1000
QUE$TORHelp
Network Licence Management

A feature can be borrowed from the server for a period of time, this is sometimes
referred to as checking out a licence. Borrowing a feature will allow you to continue
to use the feature without requiring a connection to the network licence server.
During the period that the feature is borrowed, it will not be available for other users
on the network licence server. For example, if you have 2 network licences for the
QUE$TOR Offshore feature then borrowing one of them will leave only 1 licence for
the QUE$TOR Offshore feature on the network licence server.
At the end of the borrow period the feature will expire automatically on the computer
that it was issued to. At this point the feature will be added back to the network
licence server.
Note: A connection to the network licence server is required to borrow a

feature, but the feature will be returned automatically to the server with or without a
connection to the network licence server.
To borrow a feature from the network licence server

l
Select the desired feature in the list.
Set the borrow until date to be the last day you want to borrow the feature until.
Click the Borrow button.
To return a feature to the network licence server

l
Select the desired feature in the list.
Click the Return button.
1001
QUE$TORHelp
Note: A connection to the network licence server is required to return a

borrowed feature before the end of the borrow period.
Restrictions
The following restrictions apply when borrowing licences:
l
Not all features can be borrowed. This is determined by the licence that is issued.
Features may only be borrowed for a restricted period. The maximum length of
time a feature may be borrowed for is specified in the licence.
When borrowing a feature there must be a spare licence for that feature on the
network licence server.
1002
QUE$TORHelp
ANSI Pressure Ratings

ANSI class
150
300
600
900
1500
2500
Maximum
working
pressure (psig)*
260
675
1350
2025
3500
5610
Maximum working
pressure (barg)*
17.7
46.4
92.8
139.1
231.9
386.5
*Based on a maximum working temperature of 200F.
1003
QUE$TORHelp
Flow Definitions
Multiphase
Liquids
Inlet gas
Outlet gas
Oil
Condensate
NGL
LPG
Gasoline
1004
Wellstream products
Oil/condensate and produced water
Unprocessed but separated gas
Gas processed to export specification
Oil stabilised for atmospheric storage
Full range of liquids extracted from a gas stream
Light liquids condensed from a gas stream
A liquid propane/butane mixture produced from NGL by fractionation
C5+ from the bottom of a stabiliser column
QUE$TORHelp

Spares % of
Inspection
Repair
Man-hours based on hours per

tonne of topsides weight
DSV, duration based on water
Jackets
Materials cost
depth
Equipment and DSV, duration based on water
GBS
materials cost
depth
Vessel, equipment Annual DSV, duration based
Floaters
None
and materials cost
on water depth
Offshore
Equipment and
None
None
loading
materials cost
Annual surveys, durations
based on speed of vessel and Trenching/ burial
length of pipeline.
spread for span
correction,
Pipelines
None
Intelligent pigging in specified
reburying, etc
years. Costs include hire of
crew, and pig and analysis of
recorded data.
Infrequent but
Power cables
None
Annual surveys
averaged over the
field life
MSV for repair,
DSV for inspection of
replacement of
Subsea
Capital cost
templates, clusters, manifolds
manifolds,
and survey of flowlines
structures, valves,
connectors, etc
Topsides
Equipment and
materials cost
1005
QUE$TORHelp

Production profile
Year
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Total
1006
Investment profile
Annual oil
production
Year
Annual oil
production
(MMbbl)
10
20
30
30
30
20
0
0
0
140
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Total
(MMbbl)
0
0
5
15
25
30
30
25
10
140
QUE$TORHelp
Offshore Components
Topsides: can range from a small well protector
platform weighing a few hundred tonnes, to a large
drilling platform including processing, compression and
quarters and weighing more than 30,000 tonnes. The
main process systems can be specified together with
the associated utilities, quarters and drilling and
estimates equipment and bulk weights, material and
fabrication costs, installation durations, design,
management and HUC man-hours to produce an
overall cost estimate.
Jackets: traditional steel-piled jackets with three, four,
six or eight legs can be selected based on the topsides
weight, installation method and local environmental
conditions. For topsides operating weights up to 1,600
tonnes and water depths up to 90m lightweight structures
including guyed caissons, braced monotowers and
lightweight jackets can be selected.
Gravity based structures (GBS): concrete GBS either
conventional or monotower can be selected with or
without storage. Typically used in the Norwegian sector of
the North Sea.
Floating production storage and offloading

(FPSO):can be either new build or converted monohull
tankers up to 300,000 deadweight tonnes. Used in water
depths down to 4,000m.
Cylindrical hull:A new build floating vessel that can be

used for production and storage.
Semi-submersible: second to fifth generation new

builds and second to fourth generation converted semisubmersibles can be selected with or without rigs. Used in
water depths down to 4,000m.
1007
QUE$TORHelp
Tension leg platform (TLP): conventional and mini
TLPs can be selected. Used in water depths down to
4,000m.
Spars: caisson, truss and cell spar buoys can be selected.

Used in water depths down to 4,000m.
Barge: similar to tankers but of a much simpler design

and without propulsion. Only suitable for shallow water
(up to 50m) with mild environments.
Offshore loading: a single-point mooring system with or

without permanent tanker storage that provides an
alternative to pipeline export of liquids.
Drilling: exploration/appraisal and development drilling

from a platform rig, jackup or semi-submersible. Includes
all associated well costs; Xmas tree, wellhead,
completions, production tubing, casing, conductors, rig
hire, labour and consumables.
Subsea: template or cluster wells linked to manifolds,

covers flowlines, umbilicals and risers. Includes features
such as diver or diverless installation, steel or flexible
flowlines, round trip pigging, trawl protection structures
and new or retrofit risers. Used in water depths down to
4,000m.
User defined: a blank cost sheet into which any item not
covered in the components listed above can be input for
inclusion in cost summaries and schedules.
Pipelines: are defined by size, wall thickness, material
and installation. The cost includes for risers, pipeline tieins and shore approaches. Used in water depths down to
4,000m.
Bridge link: a square or triangular section bridge that
can be used between two fixed platform topsides. The
bridge can transport process flows, utilities and power
1008
QUE$TORHelp
between topsides.
1009
QUE$TORHelp
Offshore Concepts
Offshore Project Development Concepts
Blank Concept
FPSO (cylindrical hull) + Subsea
FPSO (cylindrical hull) + Wellhead(s)
FPSO (tanker) + Subsea
FPSO (tanker) + Wellhead(s)
Gravity Base Structure (GBS)
Production platform
Production platform + Subsea tie-back
Production platform + Wellhead(s)
Semi-submersible + Subsea tie-back
Spar buoy
Spar buoy + Subsea tie-back
Subsea tie-back
Tension Leg Platform (TLP)
Tension Leg Platform (TLP) + Subsea tie-back
Wellhead(s) + tie-back
Wellhead(s) with separator + tie-back
1010
QUE$TORHelp
Decommissioning Toolbar
Toolbar
button
Button function
New: Create a new decommissioning scenario
Open:Open an existing decommissioning scenario
Save: Save changes to the current decommissioning scenario
Delete:Delete the current decommissioning scenario
Print: Print out the current decommissioning scenario
Print preview:Preview the current decommissioning scenario
before printing it
Export to Excel:Export the decommissioning scenario to Microsoft
Excel
1011
QUE$TORHelp
Fabrication Details
breakdown form giving details of how the fabrication costs are calculated. The
topsides fabrication details are given as an example below.
For each line item the unit rate is derived from man-hours per unit quantity and cost
per man-hour values read from the selected procurement strategy.
l
Quantity: the equipment and individual bulks weights calculated in the equipment
and material sections of the cost sheet. These numbers are not editable in the
fabrication details form. If changes are required they should be made in the
fabrication section of the main cost sheet.
Man hours per unit: the typical number of man hours required to fabricate each
unit quantity. This number is based on fabrication norms from technical studies of
fabrication yards and are read from the selected procurement strategy.
Man hours: the quantity multiplied by the man hours per unit. These numbers
are not editable in the fabrication details form.
Cost per man hour: the average cost per man hour for fabrication yards in the
selected region, read from the selected procurement strategy. The man-hour rate
includes: yard mobilisation, welder testing, all wages, salaries and bonuses,
payroll burden, indirect services, i.e. scaffolding, cleaning, yard maintenance;
consumable materials, temporary construction/lifting aids, construction plant and
small tools, contractor's own supervision and management, shop drawings,
general overheads, utility services, depreciation, project expenses, i.e. office
facilities for operator's representatives, secretarial and office staff, accounting.
Unit rate: the man hours per unit multiplied by the cost per man-hour. These
numbers are not editable in the fabrication details form. If changes are required
they should be made by adjusting the man hours per unit or cost per man-hour.
1012
QUE$TORHelp
l
Cost: the quantity multiplied by the unit rate. These numbers are not editable in
the prefabrication details form.
1013
QUE$TORHelp
Installation Vessel Maximum Lift Weights

Crane size
Heavy
Medium
Light
1014
Maximum lift weight

(te)
8000
6000
2500
QUE$TORHelp
CAPEX Scheduling Toolbar

Print: Prints the report.
Print preview: Displays a preview of the printed report.
Expand all: Shows all activities of all components.
Collapse all: Collapses the view so that only total CAPEX
scheduling bar is shown for each component.
Re-scale: Resizes the Gantt chart to start and finish within the
project timescale. (Use this if the bars finish a long way before
the end of the chart).
CAPEX breakdown graph: Opens a window with a bar chart
showing CAPEXby year, by quarter or by month.
Project timescale: Displays the timescale in project months
starting at zero.
Calendar timescale: Displays the timescale in calendar
years starting at the Calendar start date.
Calendar start date: The start month and year for the
Calendar timescale.
Zoom: Displays the Gantt chart at a particular magnification.
1015
QUE$TORHelp
Offshore Technical Databases

Filename
OffTechAfrica.qft
OffTechAustralia.qft
OffTechCaspian.qft
OffTechECanada.qft
OffTechEuropean.qft
OffTechGulfOfMexico.qft
OffTechGulfOfMexicoShelf.qft
OffTechIndianOcean.qft
OffTechMiddleEast.qft
OffTechNetherlands.qft
OffTechNorwayNNorthSea.qft
OffTechNorwaySNorthSea.qft
OffTechRussiaArctic.qft
OffTechSAmerica.qft
OffTechSEAsia.qft
OffTechUKNNorthSea.qft
OffTechUKNorthSea.qft
1016
Database
Africa
Australia
Caspian
Canada East
Europe
Gulf of Mexico
Gulf of Mexico Shelf
Indian Ocean
Middle East
Netherlands
N. North Sea (Norway)
S. North Sea (Norway)
Russia (Arctic)
S. America
S. E. Asia
N. North Sea (U.K.)
S. North Sea (U.K.)
QUE$TORHelp
Offshore Toolbar
Topsides
Subsea
Jacket
Offshore Loading
Gravity Based Structure (GBS)
User Defined
Tanker
Source
Cylindrical hull
Sink
Semi-submersible
Link
Tension Leg Platform (TLP)
Bridge Link
Spar Buoy
Landfall
Barge
Annotation Label
Drilling
1017
QUE$TORHelp
Barge Sizes With Storage

Deadweight
(tonnes)
75,000 dwt
100,000 dwt
150,000 dwt
1018
Typical storage
capacity
up to 300,000 bbl
300,000 to 600,000 bbl
600,000 to 1,000,000 bbl
QUE$TORHelp
Barge Sizes Without Storage

Deadweight
(tonnes)
30,000 dwt
50,000 dwt
Topsides operating weight

(tonnes)
<1000
1000
1019
QUE$TORHelp
Offshore Casing / Tubing Programme

Drilled depth (m)
Diameter
(inch)
30
<= 2500
-
>2500
150
20
100
450
13.375
DD * 0.3
DD * 0.5
9.625
DD * 0.8
DD * 0.8
60 + DD * 0.2 60 + DD * 0.2
DD [1]
DD [1]
3.5
DD [1]
DD [1]
DD Drilled depth
[1]
1020
Tubing size is either 3.5 or 5 depending on the average well flowrate
QUE$TORHelp
Offshore Drilling Profiles
1021
QUE$TORHelp
Concept Selector - Export Options

Main
hydrocarbon
Oil
Exported
fluid
Export methods available
Oil
via
Oil
Associated Gas
via
Gas
Gas
via
Gas
Associated
Liquids
via
1022
offshore loading
pipeline to shore
existing production platform
via existing pipeline
ship to ship
fuel/flare
inject into reservoir
pipeline to shore
inject into reservoir
pipeline to shore
inject into gas line
pipeline to shore
offshore loading
ship to ship
QUE$TORHelp
CO
Removal Only
1023
QUE$TORHelp
H S Removal Only
2
1024
QUE$TORHelp
Simultaneous H S and CO Removal

2
2
1025
QUE$TORHelp
Solvent Data
Solvent
MEA
DEA
MDEA
Selexol
Sulfinol
1026
Specific
Rich
Density
Solution
Mol
Heat
Solution
(kg/m
Concentration
Wt
Capacity
Loading
3)
(wt %)
(kJ/kg C)
(mol/mol)
61
105
119
280
120
1018
1092
1042
1031
1268
2.55
2.51
2.24
2.05
1.47
20
35
40
95
50
0.35
0.45
0.60
0.99
1.00
Reboiler
Duty
(kW/m
3/h)
85.2
73.6
92.9
38.7
86.0
QUE$TORHelp

Gas
Project
Oil Project
MW
17 20 29 19 30 45
C
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C +
96.3 89.4 72.7 88.7 50.4 14.0

1.6 4.1 5.0 6.3 27.5 39.5
1.4 2.5 7.5 3.0 12.5 20.3
0.6 1.0 5.5 1.0 3.5 10.2
0.1 3.0 9.4 1.0 6.1 16.0
1027
QUE$TORHelp

Water dewpoint
(C)
>0
0 to -20
-20 to -40
-40 to -70
-70 to -100
1028
Process
TEG - conventional
TEG - stripping gas
TEG - Cold Finger
TEG - Drizo
Molecular sieve
QUE$TORHelp
GBS Storage Capacity
1029
QUE$TORHelp
Jacket Installation Factors

Installation
method
Lift
Launch
Float
1030
Installation
factor
0.95
1.0
1.1
QUE$TORHelp
Maximum Topsides Weight

Jacket type
8 Leg Jacket
6 Leg Jacket
4 Leg Jacket
Tripod
Lightweight Jacket
Braced Monotower
Guyed Caisson
Maximum topsides weight

(te)
40,000
40,000
40,000
2,000
1,600
500
320
1031
QUE$TORHelp
Monotower GBS Concrete Volume
1032
QUE$TORHelp
Semi-submersible Characteristics
Generation
2nd
Generation
3rd Generation
4th Generation
5th Generation
Build cycle
1974-1979
1980-1984/5
1985/6-1990
1997+
Water
depth (m)
500
600
900
3000
Number of
chains
8
8
8
8
Chain size
(in)
3
3.5
4
5
1033
QUE$TORHelp
Maximum Load and Buoyancy Aid Weights

Generation
Variable
deck load
(tonne)
2nd
Generation
3rd Generation
2000
4th
Generation
4000
5th
Generation
6000
1034
3000
Maximum supported
load without buoyancy
aid (tonne)
Recommended
maximum buoyancy
aids (tonne)
2,700
2,000
4,100
2,000
5,800
2,500
10,800
QUE$TORHelp
Subsea Flexible Flowline Limits

Diameter
(in)
16
14
12
10
8
6 (or less)
Maximum water depth

(m)
1300
1650
1900
2300
2750
3150
1035
QUE$TORHelp
Flying Leads Calculation

Item
Cluster
Cluster with wellhead metering
Cluster with test or production manifold
metering
Satellite well
Satellite well with metering
Template with or without metering
1036
Hydraulic
Flying Leads
1 x #wells + 1
Electrical Flying
Leads
2 x #wells + 2
4 x #wells + 2
2 x #wells + 4
1 x #wells
0
2 x #wells
2 x #wells
0
QUE$TORHelp
Subsea Pressure Ratings

Water depth (m)
1,000
1,000 < Water depth 1,500
>1,500
Default pressure rating

(psig)
3,000
5,000
10,000
1037
QUE$TORHelp
Subsea Toolbar
Cluster manifold for four, six, eight, ten or twelve slots with
wells connected by flexible jumpers.Click the arrow to display a
dropdown list which enables you to change the number of wells
in the cluster.
Template structure, for four, six, eight, ten or twelve slots.Click
the arrow to display a dropdown list which enables you to
change the number of wells in the template.
Satellite well green for production, red for gas injection and
blue for water injection.
Commingling or distribution manifold, flowrates are combined.
Flowline group - represents a bundle of flowlines, umbilicals and
control and power cables.
Hide/Show labels - click to toggle between hiding or showing all
subsea item and link labels.
Notes can be added to the subsea schematic using the
annotation icon.
Redraw configuration reverts back to the QUE$TOR default
layout
Clear all removes all subsea items and links (except for the
root component)
1038
QUE$TORHelp
Standard Chain and Rope Sizes

Chain size
2.5in
3.0in
3.5in
4.0in
4.5in
5.0in
5.5in
6.0in
6.5in
Rope size
4.5in
5.5in
6.0in
7.0in
8.0in
9.0in
9.5in
10.5in
11.5in
1039
QUE$TORHelp
Wind Speed Lookup

Averaging
time
1 hour
1 minute
5 seconds
1040
Mean wind speed

(m/s)
30
35
40
35
41
47
40
47
55
45
54
62
50
60
70
QUE$TORHelp
Single Point Mooring Systems
1041
QUE$TORHelp
Tanker Storage Capacity

Tanker
classification
Panamax
Aframax
Suezmax
VLCC
1042
Tanker
size
(000
dwt)
50-73
73-105
105-160
160-310
Nominal maximum
storage capacity (bbl)
450,000
600,000
1,000,000
2,000,000
QUE$TORHelp
Offshore Gas Processing Product Specification

Product
specification
Pipeline
Gas Grid
Gas Reinjection
Combined gas +
condensate (1)
Flare/Fuel
(1)
H S
2
(ppm)
CO
(mol %)
Water
(lb/MMscf)
Hydrocarbon
dewpoint
4
4
100
4
2.5
None
3
1.5
3
(C)
-5
-20
None
None
None
None
None
None
This option is only available for gas/condensate projects.
Note: The 100 ppm specification for H S in the gas reinjection case has been
2
set to prevent reservoir contamination problems and the water specification in the
gas reinjection case has been set to prevent hydrate formation in gas injection lines.
The pipeline product specification is based on typical North Sea sales gas
specifications and the gas grid specification is based on the Interconnector pipeline
from Norway to mainland Europe.
1043
QUE$TORHelp

Product
specification
Inlet
pressure
(bara)
Number of
stages
Separator operating
pressure (bara)
HP
Tanker/fully
stabilised
P<6
MP
1.5
Inlet
P
20 90
2 + Stabiliser Inlet P
P/3
Pipeline/partially
stabilised
Gas + condensate
Live export
6 50
2
1
1
LP
1.5
Min(Inlet P,
10)
Inlet Min(Inlet
P
P/2.5, 15)
Inlet P
Inlet P
Notes: Live export product specification corresponds to primary separation on

a wellhead platform. Inlet pressure is set 10 bara above the default HP separator
pressure to allow free flow across to the main production platform.
Reboiled stabiliser operates at 6 bara.
1044
QUE$TORHelp

Product
specification
Inlet
pressure
(bara)
Number
of stages
Separator operating pressure

(bara)
High
Pressure
Tanker/Fully
Stabilised
Pipeline/Partially
Stabilised
Live Export
P<6
6 20
2
3
P < 15
15 50
50
> 50
3
1
2
Medium
Pressure
Low
Pressure
1.5
Inlet P
Inlet P
Px
Inlet P
Inlet P
Px
Inlet P
1.5
1.5
Min(Inlet P,
10)
Min(Inlet
P/2.5, 15)
15
Inlet P
Inlet P/2.5,
Notes : Live export product specification corresponds to primary separation

on a wellhead platform. Inlet pressure is set 10 bara above the default HP separator
pressure to allow free flow across to the main production platform.
Px = LP * (Inlet P/LP) 0.5, where LP = low pressure.
1045
QUE$TORHelp
Oil Processing Toolbar

Toolbar button
Button function
Insert separator / insert test separator (2nd occurrence of
symbol to the right of the stabiliser icon)
Insert heat exchanger
Insert dehydrator
Insert desalter
Insert reboiled stabiliser
Delete component
Print. Print out contains the oil processing schematic plus a
table containing the flow, temperature, pressure, oil SG and gas
molecular weight
Print preview
1046
QUE$TORHelp
Tripod GBS Concrete Volume
1047
QUE$TORHelp

Production
facilities,
wellpad
groups and
terminal
facilities
Pipelines
1048
Spares % of
Inspection
Equipment and
materials cost

tonne of equipment weight
None
Intelligent pigging in specified

years. Costs include hire of
crew, and pig and analysis of
recorded data.
Repair
Repair in specified
years. Costs
include hire of
crew and
materials
QUE$TORHelp
Onshore Components
Wellpad groups: specifies the equipment at the wellhead
together with the flowlines required to transport the produced
fluids to a production facility and/or injection fluids to the
wellhead. The costs can include manifolding at the wellhead,
test facilities, pumps, power generation and power
distribution. Wellpads are grouped for CAPEX scheduling
purposes.
Drilling:covers appraisal and development drilling. The drilling
rig characteristics and well type can be specified. The costs
include rig hire and drill crews, Xmas trees, casing, production
tubing and consumables.
Production facility: can range from manifolding for flowlines,

to a large facility including manifolding, processing and
compression. Processing, product storage, export pumping, gas
compression, metering, water injection, produced water
treatment, power generation, power distribution, utilities and
controls & communications can all be specified.
Terminal: can handle crude oil or any liquid derivative of oil or
gas - NGL, LNG, Gasoline. The facility includes all storage and
export systems. Export can be by road, rail, pipe or ship.
Infrastructure: includes all infrastructure requirements
including roads, rail links, airstrips, camps and buildings.
User defined: a blank cost sheet into which any item not
covered in the components listed above can be input for inclusion
in cost summaries and schedules.
Pipelines: calculation of pipeline size and wall thickness,
material, installation and design costs. The cost of booster or
compressor stations can be added when required.
1049
QUE$TORHelp
Onshore Concepts
Onshore Project Development Concepts
Blank concept
Wellpad group to main production facility
Multiple wellpad groups to main production facility
Multiple wellpad groups with manifold to main production facility
Wellpad group to existing main production facility
Multiple wellpad groups to existing main production facility
Multiple wellpad groups with manifolding to existing main production facility
1050
QUE$TORHelp
Construction Details
Clicking on the hyperlinked construction heading in onshore components will open up
the construction breakdown form giving details of how the construction costs are
calculated. The production facility construction details for jungle terrain are given as
an example below.
l
Quantity: the civils areas and equipment and bulk weights calculated within
QUE$TOR. These numbers are not editable in the prefabrication details form. If
changes are required they should be made in the construction section of the main
cost sheet.
Productivity terrain factor: a factor to allow for the impact the terrain type
has on the man-hours per unit. The baseline terrain for the factor is grassland.
The terrain factor will have a greater impact on the site preparation man-hours
than the other construction activities.
Man hours per unit: the typical number of man hours required for each unit
quantity taking into account the productivity terrain factor. These numbers are
based on construction norms from technical studies on recent projects, they are
read from the selected procurement strategy then multiplied by the productivity
terrain factor.
are not editable in the construction details form.
1051
QUE$TORHelp
l
Man hours cost terrain factor: a factor to account for the uplift in the day rate
for working in a harsher environment and the increased cost of mobilising the
construction workers. The baseline of terrain is grassland.
Cost per man hour: the typical cost per man hour for construction in the
selected region, read from the selected procurement strategy. The cost includes
for all wages, salaries and bonuses; payroll burden; indirect services, i.e.
scaffolding, cleaning, yard maintenance; consumable materials; temporary
construction/lifting aids; construction plant and small tools; contractor's own
supervision and management; shop drawings; general overheads, utility services,
depreciation; project expenses, i.e. office facilities for operator's representatives,
secretarial and office staff, accounting.
numbers are not editable in the construction details form. If changes are required
they should be made by adjusting the man hours per unit or cost per man-hour.
the construction details form.
1052
QUE$TORHelp
Prefabrication Details
breakdown form giving details of how the prefabrication costs are calculated. The
production facility prefabrication details are given as an example below.
l
Quantity: the equipment and individual bulks weights calculated in the equipment
and material sections of the cost sheet. These numbers are not editable in the
prefabrication details form. If changes are required they should be made in
prefabrication section of the main cost sheet.
Man hours per unit: the typical number of man hours required to prefabricate
each unit quantity. This number is based on prefabrication norms from technical
studies of prefabrication workshops and are read from the selected procurement
strategy.
are not editable in the prefabrication details form.
Cost per man hour: the average cost per man hour for fabrication yards in the
selected region, read from the selected procurement strategy. The man-hour rate
includes: all wages, salaries and bonuses, payroll burden, indirect services, i.e.
scaffolding, cleaning, yard maintenance; consumable materials, temporary
construction/lifting aids, construction plant and small tools, contractor's own
supervision and management, shop drawings, general overheads, utility services,
depreciation, project expenses, i.e. office facilities for operator's representatives,
secretarial and office staff, accounting.
numbers are not editable in the prefabrication details form. If changes are
1053
QUE$TORHelp
required they should be made by adjusting the man hours per unit or cost per
man-hour.
l
the prefabrication details form.
1054
QUE$TORHelp
Onshore Technical Databases

Filename
Database
OnTechAfrica.qnt
Africa
OnTechAsia.qnt
Asia
OnTechAustralasia.qnt
Australasia
OnTechChina.qnt
China
OnTechCSAmerica.qnt Central and South America
OnTechEEurope.qnt
Eastern Europe
OnTechMiddleEast.qnt
Middle East
OnTechNAmerca.qnt
North America
OnTechRussia.qnt
Russia
OnTechSEAsia.qnt
South East Asia
OnTechWEurope.qnt
Western Europe
1055
QUE$TORHelp
Onshore Toolbar
Wellpad Group
Source
Drilling
Sink
Production Facility
Link
Terminal
Landfall
Infrastructure
Annotation Label
User Defined
1056
QUE$TORHelp
Onshore Drilling - Profiles
1057
QUE$TORHelp
Onshore Drilling - Rig Class

l
A-Class: an international heavy duty top drive rig with the capability to drill
B-Class: an international medium duty rig with the capability to drill deviated
C-Class: an international light duty rig with the capability to drill deviated wells
to a measured depth of 3,000 metres (10,000 ft).
D-Class: a domestic medium duty rig with the capability to drill deviated wells to
E-Class: a basic domestic light duty drilling unit with the capability to drill
Note: Only A-Class to C-Class rigs are selected by default.
1058
QUE$TORHelp

Water dewpoint
(C)
>0
0 to -20
-20 to -40
-40 to -70
-70 to -100
Process
TEG - conventional
TEG - stripping gas
TEG - Cold Finger
TEG - Drizo
Molecular sieve
1059
QUE$TORHelp
Onshore Casing / Tubing Programme

Drilled depth (m)
Diameter
(inch)
<=
900
30
<=
2300
-
<= 3800
> 3800
75
20
60
DD * 0.2
13.375
50
DD * 0.5
DD * 0.5
9.625
DD * 0.5
DD * 0.8
DD * 0.8
30
DD
30 + DD * 0.2 60 + DD * 0.2
DD
DD [1]
DD [1]
DD [1]
DD [1]
3.5
DD [1]
DD [1]
DD [1]
DD [1]
DD Drilled depth
[1]
1060
Tubing size is either 3.5 or 5 depending on the average well flowrate
QUE$TORHelp
Solvent Data
Solvent
MEA
DEA
MDEA
Selexol
Sulfinol
Specific
Rich
Density
Solution
Mol
Heat
Solution
(kg/m
Concentration
Wt
Capacity
Loading
3)
(wt %)
(kJ/kg C)
(mol/mol)
61
105
119
280
120
1018
1092
1042
1031
1268
2.55
2.51
2.24
2.05
1.47
20
35
40
95
50
0.35
0.45
0.60
0.99
1.00
Reboiler
Duty
(kW/m
3/h)
85.2
73.6
92.9
38.7
86.0
1061
QUE$TORHelp
CO
1062
Removal Only
QUE$TORHelp
H S Removal Only
2
1063
QUE$TORHelp
Simultaneous H S and CO Removal

2
2
1064
QUE$TORHelp

Gas
Project
Oil Project
MW
17 20 29 19 30 45
C
1
C
2
C
3
C
4
C +
96.3 89.4 72.7 88.7 50.4 14.0

1.6 4.1 5.0 6.3 27.5 39.5
1.4 2.5 7.5 3.0 12.5 20.3
0.6 1.0 5.5 1.0 3.5 10.2
0.1 3.0 9.4 1.0 6.1 16.0
1065
QUE$TORHelp
Gas Processing Defaults

Product
specification
Pipeline
Gas Grid
Gas Reinjection
Combined gas +
condensate (1)
Flare/Fuel
(1)
H2S
(ppm)
CO2
4
4
100
(mol
%)
4
2.5
None
4
None
Water
(lb/MMscf)
Hydrocarbon
dewpoint (C)
3
1.5
3
-5
-20
None
None
None
None
None
This option is only available for gas/condensate projects.
Note:The 100ppm specification for H S in the gas reinjection case has been set
2
to prevent reservoir contamination problems and the water specification in the gas
reinjection case has been set to prevent hydrate formation in gas injection lines. The
pipeline product specification is based on typical North Sea sales gas specifications
and the gas grid specification is based on the Interconnector pipeline from Norway to
mainland Europe.
1066
QUE$TORHelp
Column Operating Conditions - Single Column

Column
Unit Value
Deethaniser only
Pressure
bar
Reboiler temperature C
Number of trays
Stabiliser only
Pressure
bar
Number of trays
27
69
30
8
70
30
1067
QUE$TORHelp
Column Operating Conditions - Both Columns

Column
Unit Value
Deethaniser
Pressure
bar
Number of trays
Stabiliser
Pressure
bar
Number of trays
1068
14
56
20
5
63
20
QUE$TORHelp

Product
specification
Inlet
pressure
(bara)
Number
of stages

(bara)
High
Medium
Low
Pressure Pressure Pressure
Refinery & Terminal /

Fully Stabilised
P > 90
P<6
6 90
Pipeline/partially
stabilised
2+
Stabiliser
1
2
1+
Stabiliser
2+
Stabiliser
P 50
P > 50
Gas + condensate
Live export
1
1
Inlet P
Inlet P/3
Inlet P
1.5
1.5
Inlet P
Inlet P
Inlet P/3
Inlet P
Min(Inlet P,
10)
Min(Inlet
P/2.5, 15)
Inlet P
Inlet P
Note : Refinery/fully stabilised has the same configuration as terminal/fully

stabilised with the addition of a desalting system.
Live export product specification should be selected when only primary separation is
required, with the full processing occurring on a separate production facility. Inlet
pressure is set 10 bara above the default HP separator pressure to allow free flow to
the main production facility.
1069
QUE$TORHelp

Product
specification
Inlet
pressure
(bara)
Number
of
stages

(bara)
High
Pressure
Refinery & Terminal /

Fully Stabilised
Pipeline/Partially
Stabilised
Live Export
P<6
6 20
2
3
P < 15
15 50
50
> 50
3
1
2
Medium
Pressure
Low
Pressure
1.5
Inlet P
Inlet P
Px
Inlet P
Inlet P
Px
Inlet P
1.5
1.5
Min(Inlet P,
10)
Min(Inlet
P/2.5, 15)
15
Inlet P
Inlet P/2.5,
Notes: Refinery/fully stabilised has the same configuration as terminal/fully

stabilised with the addition of a desalting system.
Live export product specification should be selected when only primary separation is
required, with the full processing occurring on a separate production facility. Inlet
pressure is set 10 bara above the default HP separator pressure to allow free flow to
the main production facility.
Px = LP * (Inlet P/LP) 0.5, where LP = low pressure.
1070
QUE$TORHelp
GRP Pipe Sizes

Inner
diameter
(mm)
50
75
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
Inner
diameter
(cm)
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
75
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
Inner
diameter
(inch)
2
3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
24
38
30
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
1071
QUE$TORHelp

Spares % of
Regasification
terminal
facilities
1072
Equipment and
materials cost
Inspection
tonne of equipment weight
QUE$TORHelp
Double Containment LNG Storage Tanks
Images taken from:

http://www.ferc.gov/industries/lng/enviro/eis/06-30-06-eis.asp
Draft Environmental Impact Statement on Calhoun LNG Project (Docket Nos. CP05-91-000 and CP05-380000)
Issued: June 30, 2006
1073
QUE$TORHelp
Full Containment LNG Storage Tanks
Images taken from:

1074
QUE$TORHelp
Single Containment LNG Storage Tanks
Images taken from:

1075
QUE$TORHelp
LNG Tanker Properties

Tanke
r
capaci
ty
(m3)
Tanker
length (m)
Tanker
width (m)
Tanker
draft (m)
7500 10000 12500 15000 17500 20000 22500 25000 26600

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
255
275
285
295
305
315
330
345
345
35
40
44
44
47
50
52
54
55
10
10
11
11.5
12
12
12
12
12
Note: If tanker size is between two values, then values for the larger tanker
are taken
1076
QUE$TORHelp
LNG Regasification Onshore Toolbar

Regasification terminal facility
Annotation Label
1077
QUE$TORHelp

Production profile
Year
Annual gas
production
(Bscf)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
Total
1500
1078
Investment profile
Year
Annual gas
production
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Total
(Bscf)
0
0
0
15
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
45
1500
QUE$TORHelp
Database Editor Toolbar

Toolbar
button
Button function
New: Create a new database from an existing database
Open: Open a database to view / modify
Save: Save changes to the current database
Print: Print out the database tables
Print Preview: Preview the print out the database
tables
Search: Search the database for a specific cost item
Display: Display the results of the previous search
Print modification log: Prints a log of all changes to
the QUE$TOR default values
View procurement strategy: Opens a new window
displaying the details of the procurement strategy
1079
QUE$TORHelp
Project Viewer Toolbar

Toolbar button
Button function
Open project(s): allows you to open previously
saved project(s)
Print: Print out the project details
Print preview: Preview the print out the project
details
Export to Excel: Export the project details to Excel
Sort by: Sorts the tabs into order based on the
selected input
1080
QUE$TORHelp
Unit Sets
Oilfield
Imperial
Metric
Length
Length
Diameter
Area
km
m
in
m2
mile
ft
in
ft2
km
m
cm
m2
Volume
m3
ft3
m3
Mass
tonne[1]
ton [2]
tonne[1]
Heat
Power
Pressure
Temperature
Oil flow
Gas flow
MW
MW
bar
C
bbl/day
MMscf/day
MMBtu/hr
hp
psi
F
bbl/day
MMscf/day
MW
MW
bar
C
Mm3/day
MMsm3/day
Gas oil ratio
scf/bbl
scf/bbl
sm3/m3
Density
kg/m3
lb/ft3
kg/m3
[1] 2205 lb, [2] 2240 lb
1081

QUE$TOR Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

QUE$TOR Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QUE$TORHelp

About the Quick Start Guide

From the taskbar Start button

From your PC desktop

Creating a New Project

Selecting the Project Properties

Entering Your Field Level Data

Creating a Production Profile

Setting the Design Flowrates

Setting the Number of Wells

Setting the Wellhead Conditions

Selecting a Concept - Offshore

Selecting a Concept - Onshore

Using the Field Development Schematic

Calculating the Operating Costs

Scheduling the Capital Costs

Generating the Investment and Production Profile

Saving Your Project

Opening a Saved Project

Recommended System Specifications

Minimum system specifications:

Before installing QUE$TOR

Exporting to Microsoft Excel from QUE$TOR

Contacting Customer Support

Once on the FDS

Creating Procurement Strategies

About Field Level Data

Fluid / Profile Characteristics

Gas data @ STP

About Production Profiles

Production Profile Edit

Peak daily average production rates

About the Concept Selector

Concept Selection for New Projects

Concept Selection for Existing Projects

Field Development Schematic

Topsides docking to substructures

Pipelines, Power cables & linking components

About Component Level Data

Well and Flow Distribution

Offshore Cost Centres

Hook-up and Commissioning (HUC) Costs

Design and Project Management Costs

Insurance and Certification costs

About Offshore Components

Cost Summary Tree

Cost Estimate Sheets

Include electrical buildings

Installation and HUC

Dry tree wellhead temperature

Acid Gas / High T / High P

Maximum monthly average air temperature

Pump Driver Weight

Acid Gas Removal

Conventional Acid Gas Removal

Bulk materials, utilities and operating weight

Control and Communications

Maximum measured depth

Platforms with No Quarters

Process Support Utilities

Gas Design Capacity

Flare Tower Type

Generation and distribution